The Practice of Therapy Podcast with Gordon Brewer: Recent Episodes
Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT: Therapist | Consultant | Writer | Speaker
This podcast is here for therapists, counselors, social workers, psychotherapists, and mental health clinicians in their practice journeys. I'm Gordon Brewer and the person behind The Practice of Therapy Blog and Website that provides tools, resources and advice for people starting, growing or expanding their private practices. The podcast will help you learn from other experts in the field to move your private practice forward to success.
What if your private practice could be a place where people stop trying to fix themselves—and start actually feeling what’s going on inside?
In this powerful episode, Kerry Thomas pulls back the curtain on her 25-year journey in mental health, sharing how a personal wake-up call challenged everything she thought she knew about therapy, medication, and what it really means to heal.
We talk about the connection between nutrition and mood, why numbing emotions isn’t the answer, and how private practice therapists can stop pathologizing normal human experiences.
This one’s honest, eye-opening, and a little bit rebellious—in the best way. Let’s get into it.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the show notes here
Watch on YouTube
Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Consulting with Gordon
Mental Health Wear TN
The PsychCraft Network
Trauma-Informed Yoga Basics
Meet Kerry Thomas
Kerry Thomas is a holistically based Licensed Professional Counselor with over 20 years of counseling experience in many different settings and with diverse populations. In addition to the traditional approaches often used in cognitive behavioral therapy, Kerry will incorporate tools, practices, and strategies encompassing the totality of the person she is working with that are extremely powerful and often overlooked. After 20 years of work in this arena, it is difficult to imagine an issue that has not crossed her threshold. In your session with Kerry, you will be met with profound kindness and a deep understanding of what it is like to be human. Kerry is the mother of two grown, adult children who are her best friends. In her spare time, she enjoys hiking, exploring the countryside on her motorcycle, growing her own food, and laughing at herself. She most enjoys empowering her clients to take brave steps towards living their most authentic lives.
Website Facebook
Let’s be honest: when someone says “Let’s talk tax law,” most of us want to fake a Wi-Fi outage and run for cover.
But when Julie Herres joins The Practice of Therapy Podcast, you actually want to lean in. Somehow, she manages to make the ever-shifting sands of tax policy sound (dare we say it?) friendly — like a conversation over coffee with a really smart friend who also color-codes her spreadsheets.
So, what’s happening with taxes in 2025?
Buckle up, practice owners, because there’s a whole lot of “maybe” in the air. But Julie’s here to help us wade through the uncertainty without losing our minds — or our deductions.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Watch on YouTube
Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Google Ads for Therapists
Consulting with Gordon
Mental Health Wear TN
The PsychCraft Network
Trauma-Informed Yoga Basics
Meet Julie Herres
Julie Herres is on a mission to inspire every private practice to be profitable. Over the last several years, that dream has become reality as Julie and her team have helped hundreds of private practice owners take their profit first and gain financial freedom. As the owner of GreenOak Accounting, Julie leads her firm with this goal in mind, providing tax, accounting and Profit First consulting services to private practices across the United States. Julie is also a Certified Profit First Professional, an IRS Enrolled Agent, a speaker and the host of the Therapy For Your Money podcast.
GreenOak Accounting Therapy For Your Money Profit First for Therapists
What if the path to healing trauma isn’t just through talk therapy, but through carefully guided psychedelic experiences?
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, I sit down with Dori, an experienced therapist and psychedelic facilitator, who shares her deeply informed perspective on the nuanced, responsible, and transformational use of medicines like ketamine, MDMA, and psilocybin mushrooms. Dori doesn’t just follow trends—she’s been on the frontlines, participating in research, working underground before legalization, and now helping clients access inner healing intelligence in a grounded, therapeutic way.
If you're curious about how psychedelics actually fit into trauma work, when they're appropriate, and why they’re not a one-size-fits-all miracle, this conversation will challenge your thinking and expand your clinical toolkit. Tune in to discover how seasoned therapists like Dori are bridging science, soul, and therapy to help clients heal in ways traditional methods sometimes can’t reach.
Are you ready to explore the real story behind the hype? Let’s dive in.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Google Ads for Therapists
Consulting with Gordon
Mental Health Wear TN
Watch this episode on YouTube
Read the show notes here
Meet Dori Lewis
Dori Lewis, MA, MEd, LPC-S, is a co-founder of Elemental Psychedelics and the owner-operator of Reflective Healing in Fort Collins, CO—a psychotherapy group practice that specializes in psychedelic therapy using ketamine, integration therapy, transpersonal psychotherapy, and clinical supervision.
With over a decade of clinical experience, Dori blends transpersonal psychology, depth work, and psychedelic-assisted therapy within a model that centers the therapeutic relationship. To date, she has stewarded nearly 100 ketamine therapy sessions and countless more individual and group ceremonies. She has also been trained and mentored in shamanic ritual, which has helped her bridge traditional counseling practice with transpersonal and existential realms—spaces that can hold incredible meaning and connection for clients.
As an educator and trainer, Dori has delivered numerous talks to the professional psychedelic community through the Nowak Society and other guest lectures. In 2022, she spoke on the importance of psychedelic facilitator ethics through the lens of existential shadow work as a main stage speaker at the Emergence Festival. She co-teaches introductory psychedelic therapy workshops and served as a core lead faculty member with the Psychedelic Research and Training Institute (PRATI) from 2020 to 2023, where she specialized in training new and experienced clinicians on topics like set and setting, ethical ceremony, cultural appropriation in spiritual practices, and ritual in ketamine-assisted psychotherapy.
As interest in psychedelic medicine grows, Dori believes it is the responsibility of those with a voice in professional and psychedelic communities to stay informed—and to intercept and challenge disinformation and questionable ethical practices emerging in the public arena.
Website
Are you ready to discover a powerful new way to support your clients—and yourself?
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon sits down with Tamar Blue, founder of MentalHappy, a revolutionary platform that empowers therapists, coaches, and mental health advocates to create secure, community-driven support groups online. Whether you're a provider looking to scale your services or someone seeking a safe space to heal and connect, this conversation is packed with insight, innovation, and heart. Don’t miss this inspiring story of how one woman turned a passion for peer support into a movement that’s changing lives.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Watch on YouTube
Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Google Ads for Therapists
Consulting with Gordon
Mental Health Wear TN
About MentalHappy
MentalHappy began in 2016 as a small support group on a social media site, where the team quickly recognized the limitations of using platforms not designed for group support—such as inadequate tools, privacy concerns, and a lack of structure. Comprised of mental health providers, advocates, and facilitators, the founding team experienced these challenges firsthand and set out to create a better solution. The result was MentalHappy: a purpose-built platform designed to simplify group management, enhance engagement, and expand access to emotional support.
Rooted in the belief that community care is health care, MentalHappy empowers individuals and organizations to create and manage support groups more effectively. Today, the platform hosts thousands of active groups dedicated to emotional well-being. Through fostering connection, reducing barriers to care, and supporting mental health on a global scale, MentalHappy is redefining how people find strength in community.
Website
Twitter (X)
YouTube
What Happens When the Work Finds You?
Steve Bisson didn’t plan to become a go-to therapist for first responders—but sometimes, purpose arrives without a roadmap. In this episode, Steve shares how a chance encounter on a crisis team back in 1999 set off a chain of events that led to a passionate, purpose-filled career. From riding along in police cruisers to launching a podcast that speaks directly to the hearts of firefighters, paramedics, and law enforcement officers, Steve’s story is a powerful reminder that when you say yes to the work that moves you, incredible things happen.
Whether you're in private practice, thinking about your niche, or simply curious about the mental health needs of first responders, this episode offers insight, heart, and a deep respect for those who serve on the front lines. Tune in to hear how podcasting, trust, and showing up—again and again—can transform a practice, a community, and a life.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the show notes here
Watch on YouTube
Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Google Ads for Therapists
Consulting with Gordon
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Steve Bisson
Steve Bisson has helped a myriad of individuals navigate the complex terrain of mental health. With certifications in Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT) and Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing (EMDR) since 2015, he has developed an expertise in addressing trauma and offering effective talk therapy.
Given Steve's extensive background working in high-pressure environments—jails, houses of corrections, parole, and probation departments, courts, and alongside first responders—he has built an affinity for helping those who work within these challenging fields.
Steve stands firmly behind his guiding motto: "Honest, Real, Change." This extends to every aspect of his practice, be it counseling, coaching, his enlightening books or thought-provoking podcast episodes that he began in 2021. His therapeutic approach prioritizes recognizing and addressing immediate issues while unpacking the histories that shape such behaviors.
Resilience Development in Action Website YouTube Instagram
What if the two most important questions in your practice— 'Is this financially viable?' and 'Am I doing the work I love?' — didn’t have to compete?
In this eye-opening episode, Jeremy dives deep into the strategic crossroads every private practice owner faces, especially when considering whether to take insurance, stay private pay, or explore a hybrid model. He breaks down the real numbers, state-by-state reimbursement differences, and the often-overlooked red flags in insurance relationships—like sneaky non-quantitative treatment limitations and the true cost of claim denials.
You’ll learn why Medicare Advantage's recent rate hike isn’t as rosy as it seems, how chargebacks can be your secret diagnostic tool, and when it’s time to DIY, outsource, or insource your billing. And perhaps most importantly, Jeremy challenges you to think bigger: to step into your role as CEO, shift your money mindset, and design a practice that serves both your clients and your bottom line.
If you're weighing your next move in practice management, this episode is your roadmap.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the show notes here
Watch on YouTube
Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Google Ads for Therapists
Consulting with Gordon
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Jeremy Zug
Jeremy Zug has over a decade of experience in the healthcare industry. Jeremy is known for his expertise in insurance billing, and frequently writes and speaks on topics that support mental health professionals in achieving financial health and operational excellence. He co-founded Practice Solutions with his wife Kathryn in 2017, relying on their combined knowledge from private practices they had worked at while in college. Practice Solutions is an expanded medical billing company offering billing services, professional services, and educational resources to thousands of mental and behavioral healthcare providers for optimal revenue cycle management.
Website LinkedIn Facebook Instagram
Insurance Billing Basics: Steps for Therapists to Successfully Take Insurance (20% off using this link!)
Our insurance billing services are available at 15% off for the first three billing months. Sign up at https://www.practicesol.com/pot
Are you tired of the “time for dollars” trap—where every vacation, sick day, or even slow week hits your bottom line?
In this episode, James Marland gets real about the burnout that comes from trading hours for income and why the solution isn’t just slapping together an online course. He dives into what it really takes to build something scalable and sustainable—without losing yourself or your sanity in the process. Whether you’ve toyed with the idea of creating a course or you’re just craving more freedom in your practice, this conversation is a must-listen. It's honest, encouraging, and packed with insights that’ll challenge the way you think about growth, impact, and showing up as your true self.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Free Coaching Call with James
15 Ways to Package Your Experience Into A Coaching Product
Read the show notes here
Watch this episode on YouTube
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet James Marland
James Marland is the founder of Course Creation Studio, where he helps mission-driven therapists and coaches turn their knowledge into impactful online courses. After a life-changing job loss, James leaned into his faith and found a new calling—helping others step into their purpose and expand their reach through education. His work focuses on guiding clients from idea to launch using a simple, proven framework: Develop, Deploy, Deepen.
Facebook LinkedIn YouTube Website
Follow the Practice of Therapy on Instagram
What happens to our clients when we’re suddenly not there to care for them? In this powerful and eye-opening episode, Dr. Robyn Miller dives into the difficult but essential topic most therapists avoid: what happens when a therapist dies or becomes incapacitated. With compassion, clarity, and deep professional insight, Dr. Miller reveals the ethical, legal, and emotional chaos that can follow when we don’t have a solid closure plan in place—and how TheraClosure offers a dignified, comprehensive solution. If you’re a mental health professional who’s ever told yourself, “I’ll figure that out later,” this conversation is your wake-up call. It’s not morbid. It’s responsible. And it might be the most important step you take to protect your clients, your legacy, and your loved ones.
TheraClosure (use code GORDON)
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Dr. Robyn Miller
Robyn Miller, Ph.D. is a clinical psychologist practicing in Maryland since 2002, and she is the founder of TheraClosure, LLC, the first psychotherapist professional executor service.
Dr. Miller trained at the Massachusetts Mental Health Center/Harvard Medical School and at the Harvard University Counseling Center. She earned a Ph.D. from the University of Rochester and a B.A. from Tufts University.
Her psychotherapy interests include menopause transitions, eating and mood disorders, and trauma. Dr. Miller writes and trains clinicians on professional wills and the role of the practice executor.
Website (use code GORDON) LinkedIn
If you’ve ever poured your heart into writing a blog post only to hear crickets, this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast is for you. Natalie Moore breaks down exactly why keyword research is the non-negotiable first step to getting found online—and she does it with a dartboard metaphor you won’t forget. From picking the right phrases (think “EMDR therapist LA” instead of “trauma therapist California”) to building backlinks that actually move the needle, Natalie shares the exact strategies therapists need to compete online—without trying to beat Psychology Today at their own game. Tune in to learn how to create content Google wants to rank.
Learn more about Natalie's SEO Roadmap
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Natalie Moore
Natalie is a licensed therapist, speaker, and consultant based in Los Angeles, CA, with over a decade of clinical experience. She runs a successful private practice called Space for Growth Therapy and Coaching, where she sees therapy clients and consults therapists in building their own practices. Natalie has spoken at conferences such as South by Southwest and The Yoga Expo on topics including mental health and holistic wellness. She is regularly featured in Huffington Post and other major media outlets for her expertise on people-pleasing, psychology, and relationships.
Website
HARO
Mangools Keyword Research tool
Qwoted
Tune into this episode to explore why therapists must do their own self-work to be truly effective. Jordanne shares why personal growth isn’t optional—it’s essential for providing ethical, insightful, and compassionate care. She discusses how ongoing self-reflection helps therapists navigate complex client dynamics, avoid burnout, and foster deeper therapeutic relationships. Using the powerful analogy, "Would you take a cooking lesson from someone who doesn’t cook?" she emphasizes the importance of therapists engaging in their own healing and development. Whether you're a therapist or someone curious about the inner work of mental health professionals, this episode offers valuable insights into the transformative power of self-awareness.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Jordanne Sculler
Jordanne Sculler is a New York State Licensed Mental Health Counselor and psychotherapist with a Master’s degree in Mental Health Counseling Psychology from New York University Steinhardt. She brings a holistic approach to therapy, working with adults, couples, and adolescents to develop collaborative and personalized treatment plans tailored to their unique needs and goals.
With a deep commitment to her work, Jordanne views psychotherapy as a relational learning experience—one that fosters emotional and behavioral growth while strengthening the therapeutic bond. She is dedicated to helping clients build long-term coping skills, recognize their resilience, and work toward meaningful change.
Her extensive clinical training encompasses psychodynamic therapy, cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), and relational work. By integrating these modalities, she provides a dynamic and personalized therapeutic experience. Known for her “tough” yet supportive approach, Jordanne is unafraid to challenge her clients, encouraging them to embrace discomfort as a path to growth within a warm and secure environment.
Jordanne’s passion lies in working with individuals and couples navigating life transitions, relationships, trauma, anxiety, and disordered eating. Through her compassionate and direct style, she empowers her clients to achieve their therapeutic goals and create lasting change.
Website Instagram
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, host Gordon Brewer welcomes Whitney Owens, a seasoned group practice owner and consultant, to discuss the critical issue of therapist retention. Whitney shares her insights on why losing a therapist can be costly—not just financially, but in terms of client care, team morale, and overall practice stability. She breaks down practical strategies to create a supportive work environment, improve hiring and onboarding processes, and foster long-term commitment among therapists. Whether you're struggling with turnover or looking to build a thriving team, this episode is packed with actionable advice you won’t want to miss!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Whitney Owens
Whitney Owens is the owner of Water’s Edge Counseling, a thriving group practice in Savannah, Georgia. When she’s not leading her practice, she enjoys coaching, running, or sipping coffee while reading a good book. She is married to a pastor and is the proud mother of two daughters. Having navigated the challenges of balancing work and family, she continues to learn and grow in both areas.
A graduate of Richmont Graduate University, Whitney received specialized training in both professional counseling and faith integration. Her career spans various clinical settings, including residential treatment, hospital work, and the successful launch of multiple private practices.
Today, Whitney has created a fulfilling lifestyle, working four days a week, picking up her children from school, and running a profitable business. She has found a way to do the work she loves, live out her faith, and enjoy the journey along the way.
Whitney’s Website Instagram Facebook Summit
In the fast-paced world of private practice, it’s easy to get caught up in the daily grind—managing clients, handling business operations, and juggling personal life—while neglecting the very thing that can lead to lasting success and fulfillment: reflection. But what if you had a simple, structured way to pause, recalibrate, and infuse joy into your practice? Enter the Five R’s of Reflection—a framework designed by Christy Pennison and Steph Korpal to help practice owners thrive with intention. In this episode, we’re diving deep into Rhythm, Ritual, Relationship, Realignment, and Resolve—five powerful principles that can transform the way you approach your business and your well-being. Get ready to rediscover your purpose, reignite your passion, and reclaim the joy in your practice!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Christy Pennison
Christy Pennison is a board-certified counselor, the founder of Be Inspired Counseling & Consulting, a multi-location group therapy practice, and host of the Inspiring Possible Podcast. She is highly respected in the field of mental health and has helped numerous leaders and professionals through consulting. She has received recognition for her efforts in advocating for mental health, including being named a 2024 Remarkable Woman of CENLA and the Louisiana Mental Health Counselor of the Year in 2022. Her expertise has been featured in media outlets such as NBC and Today. Christy is passionate about empowering mental health professionals to grow and thrive. Outside of work, she enjoys being a mother, spending time with loved ones, playing with her rescue animals, and kayaking.
Christy is a 7 on the Enneagram. This means when she is taking leaps off a cliff, Steph is pointing out the sharp rocks at the bottom to keep her friend safe. During your collab experience, she will be responsible for keeping the energy going and ideas flowing to help you move your practice forward.
Meet Steph Korpal
In 2018, Steph left the nonprofit sector, where she had worked with homeless and runaway youth and families in crisis for 7 years. She started her own private practice, Marble Wellness, in St. Louis, MO, primarily focusing on maternal mental health, and at the end of 2020, expanded to a group practice with the aim of being “a one-stop therapy shop for the whole family.” In 2021, Steph moved to Chicago and transitioned from being a remote boss to an in-person team. She is slowly but surely expanding her practice to build out a team and services in Chicago. She has expanded her specialties to include burned-out professionals and still has a special spot for working with moms. She loves promoting therapy as both a normal and integral part of living a thriving life, which every individual deserves and has the opportunity to experience.
Steph maintains a life in Chicago as a social butterfly. She loves exploring new restaurants; is an avid reader; and tries to keep her plants alive. Anytime she needs a burst of spontaneity, or to pull her thoughts out of the weeds, she gives her pal Christy a call and feels balance again.
Steph is a 1 on the Enneagram. Which means when she is getting lost in the fine details of making all the things work, Christy is encouraging her to see the big picture. During your collab experience, she will be responsible for making sure you get your task list done, helping your time with us be the best it can possibly be and ensuring you get the outcome you came for.
Website Facebook Instagram Get the 5 Rs Worksheet
Many therapists pour hours into social media posts, cold outreach, and networking, hoping to attract new clients. But what if there was a more direct path to getting found?
In this episode, Jessica shares how she ditched the endless content grind and unlocked the true power of Google. By optimizing her website and Google Business Profile, she became the first choice for clients searching for therapists in her area—without spending a dime on ads or social media trends.
From SEO strategies that actually work to creating a website that converts visitors into paying clients, Jessica breaks down the essential steps to ensuring potential clients find you—not the therapist down the street.
If you’re tired of chasing clients and ready to let them come to you, this episode is your roadmap. Tune in now and take control of your online presence!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Jessica Harris
Jessica Harris is an LCSW and business coach for therapists growing a private pay practice.
After building a thriving private pay group practice—where she hired six therapists and consistently attracted 5-10 full-fee clients weekly—Jessica sold her therapy practice to focus solely on empowering other therapists to get cash pay clients.
She now dedicates herself to coaching therapists through her 12-week program, designed to help therapists simplify marketing and fill their caseload with cash pay clients.
Jessica is on a mission to help therapists everywhere create financial abundance and achieve their dream lives while making a meaningful impact in the world.
Website Facebook Instagram Book Your Therapist Private Pay Accelerator No-Cost Consult Call Now
Many therapists and psychiatrists dream of running their own private practice—setting their own hours, choosing their clients, and working independently. But what happens when the reality doesn’t match the dream?
In this episode, Dr. Choulet pulls back the curtain on what it really takes to run a successful private practice—especially one that operates on a cash-pay model. Spoiler alert: It’s not just about being a great clinician. If you’re not passionate about networking, marketing, and building your brand, you may struggle to make it work.
Dr. Choulet shares why niching down is a game-changer, how branding can make or break your success, and why investing in your visibility is just as important as your clinical skills. She’s built a thriving practice that serves high-profile clients, from professional athletes to business executives, and she’s here to share her biggest lessons—so you can decide if private practice is the right move for you.
If you’ve ever wondered why some private practices thrive while others barely survive, this episode is for you.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Google Ads for Therapists
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Dr. Brook Choulet
Dr. Brook Choulet, M.D., The Performance Psychiatrist™, is the founder and CEO of the Choulet Performance Psychiatry®, President of the Maricopa County Medical Society Foundation, and President of the American Board of Sports and Performance Psychiatry, of which she is one of the seven founding members.
With a focus on concierge Performance Psychiatry®, Dr. Choulet guides professionals, athletes, and their families towards unparalleled mental health and performance optimization by offering bespoke mental health care services for both adolescent and adult patients.
She holds a Certificate of Additional Training in Sports Psychiatry from the International Society for Sports Psychiatry (ISSP) and is a preferred provider on the NBPA, NFLPA, USSF, USOPC, and MLBPA's Mental Health Directories. Dr. Choulet's expertise has been pivotal in shaping mental resilience in sports at its highest level, and she worked for two seasons as a Consulting Team Psychiatrist for the NBA Phoenix Suns and WNBA Phoenix Mercury.
Dr. Choulet is a regular contributor to Forbes SportsMoney and is a Forbes Health Advisory Board member who reviews and consults on Forbes Health articles. She also contributes her expertise to the American Psychiatric Association's publications and Psychology Today's Sports & Performance Psychiatry column. She also provides expert advice each month to local Arizona publications, including Paradise Valley City Lifestyle Magazine, Stroll Biltmore, Stroll Desert Mountain, and Stroll Paradise Valley, as part of her commitment to cultivating the mental health and well-being of her local community.
Website Facebook Instagram LinkedIn
Grief isn’t just about five stages—it’s messy, personal, and ever-evolving. If you’ve ever felt like you weren’t “grieving the right way” or struggled to make sense of your emotions after loss, this episode is for you. Krista St-Germain joins us to break down the myths about grief and explore what truly helps us heal. From the Dual Process Model to Continuing Bonds, we’re diving deep into the realities of loss, why “moving on” is a harmful misconception, and how we can integrate grief into our lives in meaningful ways. Tune in for a powerful conversation that will change the way you think about grief—and, more importantly, how you support yourself and others through it.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Website Design Packages from Inflow
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Google Ads for Therapists
Mental Health Wear TN
Meet Krista St-Germain
Krista St-Germain is a Master Certified Life Coach, grief expert, widow, mom and host of The Widowed Mom Podcast. When her husband was killed by a drunk driver in 2016, Krista's life was completely and unexpectedly flipped upside down. After therapy helped her unfurl from the fetal position, Krista discovered Life Coaching, Post Traumatic Growth and learned the tools she needed to move forward and create a future she could get excited about. Now she coaches and teaches other widows so they can love life again, too.
Krista's Resources
Krista's Website Get your FREE download of Memories that Matter today! The Widowed Mom Podcast
What if your brand could do more than just look good—what if it could tell a story, attract your ideal clients, and truly reflect your values? That’s exactly what Justin set out to do when he left the corporate world to launch Inflow, a branding agency dedicated to helping private practices create meaningful and impactful brand identities.
From designing album covers in Detroit’s music scene to stepping onto the stage at the APA conference in Seattle, Justin’s journey is one of creativity, risk-taking, and transformation. In this episode, he shares why branding isn’t just about logos and websites—it’s about connection, trust, and the power of a cohesive identity.
Tune in as Justin reveals common branding mistakes practice owners make, how to craft a website that actually converts, and why the right name can make all the difference in your visibility. Whether you're just starting your practice or looking to refresh your brand, this conversation will change the way you think about marketing your services.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Inflow's Resources
Website Instagram Facebook Justin on LinkedIn Inflow on LinkedIn
About Justin Ahn
Inflow was founded by Justin Ahn, a Creative Director inspired by his wife, a clinical psychologist. As he helped her develop client-friendly resources, Justin saw the need for exceptional design in healthcare. Inflow provides top-tier design services, ensuring every healthcare practice has a visual identity that reflects its expertise and communicates compassionate care.
About Inflow
Inflow Healthcare Designs specializes in crafting brilliant, tailored branding, websites, and graphics exclusively for healthcare practices, becoming your trusted partner in long-term success. More than creating visuals, they shape trust and confidence—transforming your vision into a brand that feels inviting, professional, and authentically you. With client-focused designs that inspire trust, foster meaningful connections, and drive practice growth, every detail tells your story. From compelling logos to seamless websites, they'll help your practice stand out, attract patients, and grow with purpose.
Kelley dives deep into the growing trend of therapists exploring multiple income streams. While many dream of creating passive income, Kelley shares a powerful insight: there’s no such thing as truly passive income. She unpacks the reality of building diverse revenue sources, from group practices to online courses, workshops, and retreats. But before diving into digital products, Kelley stresses the importance of first building an engaged audience. She explains how to test ideas, create value with free content, and develop products that truly meet the needs of your community. If you’re a therapist looking to scale and diversify, this episode is packed with actionable tips and strategies you won’t want to miss!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- THE PRACTICE OF THERAPY COLLABORATIVE
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Kelley's Website
- Kelley's Instagram
- Kelley's Facebook
Meet Kelley Stevens
Kelley Stevens is passionate about empowering therapists with the tools they need to start private practices. Based in Santa Barbara, CA, Kelley is an LMFT with over a decade of experience in both mental health and business development. She began her career as the marketing director for a large outpatient program in Los Angeles, where she played a pivotal role in its growth before launching her own successful six-figure private practice. After five years, she relocated and established two more thriving practices in new cities. Additionally, Kelley serves as an adjunct professor at Pepperdine University and Antioch University. When she's not working, she enjoys spending quality time with her toddler and husband.
When it comes to relationships, connection is everything. For Deborah Richelieu, this truth has shaped both her personal and professional life. As a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist (LMFT), she has dedicated her career to helping couples navigate the complexities of relationships, communication, and emotional intimacy. Recently, Deborah sat down with Gordon Brewer on the Practice of Therapy podcast to share her journey, insights on couples therapy, and the importance of community in times of grief.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
THE PRACTICE OF THERAPY COLLABORATIVE
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
YouTube
Meet Deborah Richelieu
Deborah Richelieu is a licensed Marriage and Family Therapist in Florida, specializing in helping couples strengthen their relationships. Whether facing communication challenges or navigating conflicts, she provides guidance, particularly for those seeking a Christian perspective in therapy.
She holds a Bachelor’s in Psychology from Southeastern University and a Master’s in Marriage and Family Therapy from Nova Southeastern University. With extensive experience in premarital counseling, couples counseling, and fostering emotional connection after emotional injury, she is dedicated to supporting couples in overcoming relational difficulties.
Deborah is certified in Level 1 and Level 2 Gottman Couples Therapy, utilizing evidence-based techniques to enhance relationships. She is also a member of Focus on the Family’s Christian Counselor’s Network and is listed on Psychology Today and Therapy For Black Girls.
The Rich Couch Instagram LinkedIn
In a recent episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, host Gordon Brewer sat down with Dr. Kathryn Defilippi to discuss the powerful connection between physical activity and workplace productivity. Dr. Kathryn, a dedicated runner and advocate for movement-based wellness, shared her journey into long-distance running and the profound impact it has had on her life and career. Her insights offer valuable takeaways for anyone looking to improve their mental and physical well-being while enhancing their efficiency at work.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Start Consulting with Gordon
The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Dr. Kathryn's Website
Meet Dr. Kathryn Defilippi
Dr. Kathryn is the driving force behind Running Alchemy, a venture born from her passion for making a meaningful impact in people’s lives. By blending her love for running with her expertise as a licensed mental health therapist, she has created a unique approach to personal and professional growth. Holding a Ph.D. in Industrial/Organizational Psychology, her pursuit of higher education was not just about adding credentials but about deepening her ability to support individuals and organizations alike.
As a disruptive event management consultant, Dr. Kathryn identified a critical gap—employee mental health needs were frequently overlooked. For her, running is not just a pastime but a deeply ingrained passion that fuels her daily life. Though she was not athletically inclined in her early years, running became a transformative challenge. At one time, the fear of failure held her back, but training for a marathon changed her perspective entirely. It redefined failure as a mere stepping stone to growth, reinforcing the belief that every challenge is an opportunity to learn and evolve.
Dr. Kathryn's experience in running has instilled a mindset of resilience and determination that extends into her career and academic pursuits. It has empowered her to overcome obstacles with confidence and purpose. Now, her mission is to help others confront their fears, navigate challenges, and, most importantly, embrace a profound sense of freedom in their personal and professional journeys.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Dr. Robinson shares her profound journey of resilience, purpose, and professional growth. From navigating personal grief and loss to becoming a trailblazer in grief education and business expansion, she offers invaluable insights for clinicians looking to make a greater impact.
Dr. Robinson discusses the importance of stabilizing your practice before diversifying, ensuring financial stability while preparing for growth. She shares her experience transitioning from private practice to corporate and organizational work, offering practical advice on marketing strategies, branding, and building partnerships with schools, universities, and hospitals.
You'll also learn how to expand your impact through writing, public speaking, and creating resources that outlive your practice. Dr. Robinson’s inspiring story of transforming loss into legacy reminds us of the power of purpose-driven work and the possibilities that arise when clinicians step beyond their comfort zones. Don’t miss this episode packed with actionable tips and heartfelt wisdom to help you grow your practice and broaden your reach.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Dr. Robinson’s Facebook
- Dr Robinson’s Instagram
- The Purposeful & Profitable Therapist™ Summit
- Dr Robinson’s Website
Meet Dr. Ajita Robinson
Dr. Ajita Robinson is known as The Experts’ Therapist. She is a Grief & Trauma therapist, Bestselling Author of The Gift of Grief: A Practical Guide on Navigating Grief and Loss and The Purposeful & Profitable Therapist’s Guide to Diversifying Income, International Speaker, and Income Strategist. She has been seen in places such as the Wall Street Journal, HuffPost, Washington Post, Business Insider, Bustle, and Therapy for Black Girls.
Dr. Robinson is a Licensed Clinical Professional Counselor, Trauma and Grief Expert, and first-generation trauma and poverty disruptor. She is the Founder and Executive Director of Friends in Transition Counseling Services, a trauma-centered mental health practice located in Bethesda, MD. She is also the CEO of Legacy Wellness Group, a conglomerate of enterprises dedicated to promoting generational wealth, education, and healing.
Dr. Robinson embodies excellence in mental health and education. She is a servant leader, an involved member of the community, and a born-giver. She believes that we all have gifts that are unique to us, and we thrive when we lean fully into those gifts; we find purpose and fulfillment. At her core, she believes that all people have the capacity to overcome adversity. She is living proof that you can start at ground ZERO and chart a path of excellence that is uniquely yours.
If you're ready to embrace growth, learn from real-world trial and error, and discover how to align your practice with your core values, this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast is a must-listen. Dr. Carlos Garcia takes us behind the scenes of his inspiring journey from navigating the unknown as a new practice owner to building a thriving, value-driven business. With insights on everything from mastering financial metrics to fostering a human-centered approach, Dr. Garcia’s story is packed with actionable takeaways and a refreshing dose of authenticity. Tune in to learn how to turn challenges into opportunities and create a practice that truly reflects your vision!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Tampa Counseling and Wellness
- Tampa Counseling and Wellness on Instagram
- Tampa Counseling and Wellness on Facebook
- Dr. Garcia on LinkedIn
- Follow Dr. Garcia on Instagram
Meet Dr. Carlos Garcia
Dr. Carlos Garcia is a Licensed Clinical Psychologist, Coach, Author and Speaker who is dedicated to helping individuals unleash their full potential through high performance counseling, coaching and consulting. He is also the Founder of Tampa Counseling and Wellness, a private practice in Tampa, FL that provides therapy and wellness services to individuals looking to positively transform their lives. He is also the Founder of The Mastery Group, a company that provides individuals and organizations with the tools to take their leadership and performance to the next level. In addition to leading these two companies, Dr. Garcia also functions as a Human Performance Specialist for O2X, a company that provides comprehensive, science-backed programs to hundreds of police and fire departments nationwide, including federal agencies and the military.
Dr. Garcia received his bachelors and doctoral degree at Nova Southeastern University and completed his internship at Rutgers University. Dr. Garcia also served in the armed forces as a United States Marine and as a firefighter and paramedic prior to receiving his doctorate degree. Dr. Garcia draws on his years of experience in both military and professional organizations to teach individuals how to become more masterful leaders and performers. He has worked with multiple Fortune 500 companies and government agencies. Past clients include members of the CIA, Secret Service, and other top military groups, as well as organizations such as JP Morgan Chase, Cigna, Exelon, Progressive Auto Insurance, Athletic Brewing and Williams-Sonoma. His passion lies in helping others grow and create meaningful and lasting change in their lives. Dr. Garcia strives to help people utilize their natural talents to build a happier and more successful life.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Jessica Patching-Bunch shared her insights on how small, intentional changes in daily habits can significantly improve mental health, stress management, and overall well-being. Through her expertise in breathwork, movement, and mind-body connection, Jessica outlined actionable steps we can take to regain balance in our lives. Jessica’s key message is clear: You have the power to create meaningful change in your life. Whether through breathwork, movement, or a shift in mindset, small, intentional actions can make a big difference. As Gordon and Jessica agree, transformation doesn’t require drastic changes—it happens in the little moments we embrace every day.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Sign up for free at berries.icu, enjoy 20 sessions, and use promo code CRAFT50 for 50% off your first month!
The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Full Focus Planner
Jessica’s Website Jessica’s Instagram
Meet Jessica Patching-Bunch
JPB is an international speaker and stress resilience coach who specializes in stress, anxiety, and nervous system education. She founded Brain-Body Resilience after suffering stress related health issues most of her life. Taking her background in neuropsychology she set out to address a real gap in accessible, alternative mind-care and wellness education. JPB is now on a mission to change the way we approach mental health by providing a practical path to understanding and managing stress. She helps her clients the agency for change, and drop the shame and guilt that keep you stuck in that stress cycle.
Are you ready to take a deep dive into the complex, multifaceted nature of therapist burnout?
In this episode, Dr. Jen Blanchette unpacks the hidden costs of caring, from compassion fatigue and vicarious trauma to the systemic issues that perpetuate burnout in the field. You’ll hear about the unique challenges therapists face, like navigating moral injury and the struggle to prioritize their own well-being amidst clinical and personal demands. Dr. Blanchette doesn’t just stop at prevention—she shares actionable insights for recovery, emphasizing the importance of financial sustainability, meaningful connection, and small, intentional steps toward a healthier, more balanced life. If you’ve ever wondered how to heal while helping others, this conversation is a must-listen!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Sign up for free at berries.icu, enjoy 20 sessions, and use promo code CRAFT50 for 50% off your first month!
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Full Focus Planner
- Dr. Jen Blanchette’s Website
- Dr. Jen Blanchette on LinkedIn
- Free Money Guide From Dr. Jen Blanchette
- The Therapist Burnout Podcast
Meet Dr. Jen Blanchette
Dr. Jen Blanchette is a licensed psychologist, former private practice owner, and therapist burnout consultant dedicated to supporting therapists and heart-centered professionals. She understands the unique challenges they face—balancing the demands of serving others while often confronting burnout repeatedly.
Having experienced these struggles firsthand, Dr. Blanchette recalls her own journey of navigating the desire to leave her role as a trauma therapist during the pandemic. Amid the chaos, she explored whether the traditional 1:1 therapy model aligned with her temperament and aspirations. What she needed most during that time was support, guidance, and the wisdom of someone who had walked a similar path.
Today, Dr. Blanchette offers that support to others. Whether it’s navigating burnout or finding the courage to transition away from therapy, she is committed to helping professionals redefine their work or explore new directions.
With a neuroscience-based approach, Dr. Blanchette helps create the space needed to uncover the answers clients are seeking. She invites anyone ready to take the next step to start with a free consultation, where they’ll identify the sources of burnout and determine a plan to help them rediscover their passion—or confidently transition to something new.
As the calendar turns to a new year, it’s natural to take stock of where you’ve been and where you want to go. In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon Brewer invites us into a deeply personal and insightful reflection on the past year while guiding us to set meaningful intentions for 2025.
This isn’t your typical “New Year’s resolutions” conversation. Gordon’s experiences in 2024—a year shaped by profound personal loss and transformative growth—serve as a powerful foundation for exploring how reflection and purpose-driven planning can lead to real change. Whether you’re a therapist, practice owner, or simply someone looking to embrace the year ahead with clarity and intention, this episode offers actionable strategies and heartfelt wisdom.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Sign up for free at berries.icu, enjoy 20 sessions, and use promo code CRAFT50 for 50% off your first month!
SMART Goals Worksheet
Start Consulting with Gordon
The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Full Focus Planner
What’s the secret to bridging the gap between big business goals and actually achieving them?
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy, TJ unpacks the often-missed “step two” in business planning, using the hilarious (and surprisingly insightful) “underpants gnomes” analogy from South Park. With practical advice on building detailed, actionable roadmaps for growth, TJ explains how breaking goals into manageable steps—like analyzing financial data, aligning marketing with intake targets, and systemizing operations—can transform a business. From learning to let go and delegate effectively to creating structured onboarding processes that set employees up for long-term success, this conversation is packed with strategies to help you step back, see the bigger picture, and steer your business toward success. Don’t miss this deep dive into mindset shifts, proactive planning, and the power of trust!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Ready to give it a try? Sign up for free at berries.icu, enjoy 20 sessions, and use promo code CRAFT50 for 50% off your first month!
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Full Focus Planner
- Crowsnest Mindset
- TJ on LinkedIn
- Crowsnest Mindset on LinkedIn
Meet TJ Slattery
TJ Slattery is the owner and founder of Crowsnest Consulting. A lifetime entrepreneur and strategic advisor, TJ harnesses his decades of experience to create clarity and stability for business owners immersed in the day-to-day on an entrepreneurial island.
With honest, relatable candor (and a stylish neckerchief), TJ helps small business owners across industries create and improve operational systems and develop proactive processes to forge a path forward—one that leads directly to their personal and professional goals.
By leveraging business acumen, experience, and relentless curiosity, TJ enables his clients to connect the dots between the business they have and the vision they want to achieve. He is passionate about empowering entrepreneurs to stop treading water and get up into the Crowsnest where they belong.
Medical necessity—a term that seems straightforward—often becomes a complex hurdle in the world of healthcare, especially in mental health. Joe Feldman, founder of Cover My Mental Health, sheds light on the disconnect between clinical care and legal frameworks, and shares how his nonprofit empowers patients and clinicians to navigate these challenges effectively.
What is Medical Necessity?
Contrary to what many assume, "medical necessity" is not a clinical term; it’s a legal one. As Feldman explains, most healthcare professionals are trained in safe, effective care aligned with ethical standards, not in decoding the legal intricacies of medical necessity. This disconnect often leads to insurance denials, leaving patients stranded without the care they need.
Feldman highlights a key concern: insurance companies often deny claims for higher levels of care, such as intensive outpatient programs or residential treatment, by deeming them “not medically necessary.” This decision-making process frequently prioritizes cost-cutting over patient well-being.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Full Focus Planner
- Cover MY Mental Health
Meet Joe Feldman
Cover My Mental Health President and Founder Joe Feldman began advocating for access to mental health care after overcoming denials for his daughter’s residential care, including with a successful federal lawsuit.
Feldman developed Cover My Mental Health based on his own success overcoming insurance obstacles, with input from leading litigators, appeals experts, clinicians, insurance regulators, and former insurance industry insiders.
His advocacy work has included policy-driven discussions with legislators and regulators, a board role with The Kennedy Forum Illinois, presentations to parent groups, and publication of actionable guidance, such as a 2021 article in the Journal of Psychiatric Practice on medical necessity letters.
Feldman also serves on the board of Thresholds, a Chicago-based firm providing support to those living with mental illness, and Acadian Kitchens, a for-profit seasonings business in Louisiana.
Starting and running a private practice is a journey filled with challenges, growth opportunities, and the potential for both professional and personal fulfillment. Gordon Brewer, a seasoned mental health professional and founder of The Practice of Therapy, reflects on his journey into private practice, sharing insights that are both inspiring and practical for current and aspiring private practitioners.
The Journey to Autonomy
Gordon began his private practice journey in 2006 after gaining extensive experience working in nonprofit agencies. While he credits his nonprofit work for providing invaluable clinical training, he found himself drawn to private practice for its autonomy and financial potential. Transitioning to full-time private practice in 2010 marked a pivotal moment in his career, one that required him to embrace the challenges and opportunities of running his own business.
Mindset Matters: Developing a Business Perspective
A recurring theme in Gordon’s advice is the importance of adopting a business mindset. To thrive in private practice, clinicians must view their work not just as a therapeutic endeavor but as a business venture. This includes understanding:
- Return on Investment (ROI): Assessing where to invest time and money to maximize success.
- Profitability: Ensuring income exceeds expenses to sustain and grow the practice.
- Systems and Processes: Establishing efficient workflows to optimize operations.
“Clarity around your ‘why’ is essential,” Gordon emphasizes. For many, the “why” includes achieving autonomy, earning more, and escaping the bureaucracy of agency work.
Don't miss Gordon's invaluable advice on starting and scaling a private practice, overcoming challenges, and building a supportive network. Tune in now to take your practice to the next level! 🙌
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Read the full show notes here
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Start Consulting with Gordon
The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear TN
Full Focus Planner
Productive Therapist: https://productivetherapist.com/
GreenOak Accounting: https://www.greenoakaccounting.com/
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Keith Kurlander opens up about growing his therapy practice in Boulder, Colorado, navigating high competition and high demand. From door-knocking to diving into the digital world with paid advertising, Keith shares how embracing online marketing and specializing in sought-after areas helped him stand out in a crowded field. He also offers strategies for new and growing practitioners, from networking basics to expanding into group practices. Plus, Keith dives deep into the future of psychedelic therapy, exploring its transformative potential for treating trauma and treatment-resistant conditions like PTSD and depression, with promising results from MDMA, ketamine, and psilocybin. Don’t miss this fascinating conversation about the intersection of traditional therapy and cutting-edge treatments!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Full Focus Planner
- Keith’s Website
- Keith on LinkedIn
- Integrative Psychiatry Institute on Facebook
- Keith on Instagram
Meet Keith Kurlander
Keith Kurlander, MA, LPC, is the Co-Founder of the Integrative Psychiatry Institute, the largest professional education company specializing in integrative mental health and psychedelic therapy, listed in Inc. 5000 as one of the 100 fastest-growing startups in the U.S., top 10 in healthcare, and top 3 in education.
He also co-hosts the Higher Practice Podcast for Optimal Mental Health and co-founded the Integrative Psychiatry Centers, a clinic revolutionizing mental healthcare with cutting-edge psychedelic therapy and integrative psychiatry treatments.
With over 20 years of experience in psychotherapy and coaching individuals, couples, and families, Keith’s journey began after nearly committing suicide at age 19 following a psilocybin mushroom experience. His battle with severe mental illness persisted into adulthood until he overcame it through decades of trial and error.
Now a successful entrepreneur, Keith is passionate about teaching methods that can eradicate mental illness and empower people to reach their full potential.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy podcast, host Gordon Brewer talks with Nicole McCance, who shares her insights on scaling a therapy practice through effective systems and strategic hiring. Nicole emphasizes the importance of systemizing processes before bringing new hires on board, helping therapists avoid the overwhelm of constant questions and task management. She reveals that many therapists dive into hiring without setting up essential workflows, which can quickly turn them into “chief question answerers” rather than effective leaders.
Nicole discusses the power of documenting every step of your practice in a Google Doc, which not only streamlines daily operations but also fosters team independence and enables automation. Reflecting on her own journey, she explains how hiring a business coach early on was instrumental to her success, giving her the clarity and direction to create her own coaching program, where she now teaches therapists the systems and marketing strategies that fueled her rapid growth. From crafting SOP manuals with tools like Loom and ChatGPT to making your first hire a “mini-me” who mirrors your style, Nicole shares a practical and empowering guide for therapists ready to grow their practice with intention and efficiency.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Full Focus Planner
- Nicole’s Website
- Nicole’s Instagram
- Nicole’s Facebook Group
- Nicole’s Free Masterclass
Meet Nicole McCance
Nicole is a Psychologist (retired) turned Business Coach for therapists scaling to a group practice. She expanded her private practice to 55 therapists and multiple seven figures in 3 years (with toddler twins at home). Nicole sold her clinic in her 4th year and then retired as a Psychologist in her 5th year. She now teaches therapists how to help more people, make more money, and have more freedom following her proven method.
Crystal Adams-Scott shares the powerful story behind Hope Unite, a movement born from her and her son’s act of kindness. Driven by the message “You matter,” which she believes could have saved her husband’s life, Crystal discusses how simple cards adorned with a purple rose serve as reminders of worth and invitations to spread kindness. With volunteers distributing these cards across the U.S. and beyond, the initiative not only promotes kindness but also connects individuals in crisis to vital resources like the National Suicide Prevention hotline.
Crystal emphasizes the importance of community involvement and outlines two key volunteer roles that support their mission. By fostering a holistic network of vetted therapists, healers, and community services, Hope Unite aims to address mental, physical, and spiritual health in a comprehensive way. Crystal encourages listeners to embrace daily acts of intentional kindness, highlighting their profound impact on mental well-being and the potential for collective action to create meaningful change. Don’t miss this episode that blends personal healing with a powerful call to action for kindness and community support.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Hope Unite
- The Hope Unite Story
- See the Impact of Hope Unite
Meet Crystal Adams-Scott:
Crystal Adams-Scott is the founder of Hope Unite International, their mission is dedicated to providing hope and support for individuals facing life's most challenging moments. After losing her husband to suicide, Crystal found herself grappling with unimaginable grief, but it was through this personal loss that she discovered her calling to help others navigate their own darkest times.
Driven by a deep commitment to break the silence around mental health and create a community of understanding, Crystal founded Hope Unite International with the vision of offering compassionate resources, emotional support, and a safe space for those struggling with mental health challenges, grief, and personal hardship. Hope Unite's Kids for Kindness initiative is dedicated to help our youth in the early developmental years to gain healthy social and emotional development tools alongside academic learning to help reduce teen depression and suicide rates.
Navigating the world of therapy payments can be a maze for both therapists and clients, especially when insurance and out-of-network benefits come into play. Sanjana from Thrizer breaks down how their platform simplifies this process and how it helps make therapy more accessible for clients while ensuring clinicians get paid their full rate.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Start your free trial and enjoy waived credit card fees for your first $2,500 in charges: https://join.thrizer.com/practiceoftherapy
- Thrizer’s Instagram
- Thrizer’s LinkedIn
Meet Sanjana Sathya
Sanjana is a co-founder at Thrizer. She is passionate about helping people access quality and affordable mental healthcare. Thrizer’s mission is to make cash-pay therapy more accessible. Clients just pay a copay for sessions, while clinicians get their full cash pay rate upfront, creating a win-win for both. She is a long-time therapy-goer herself who credits much of her own growth to therapy. She is excited to share more about her story and how it led her to Thrizer.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Tiffany dives deep into the intricate relationship between anxiety and gut-brain interactions. She explains how anxiety can affect the gut in ways that aren’t always obvious, with some people experiencing clear GI issues, while others may have subtle gut disturbances without noticeable anxiety. Through relatable examples, Tiffany illustrates how thoughts, self-talk, and physical symptoms are interconnected, highlighting the bidirectional communication between the brain and the gut. Beyond the science, Tiffany also shares key insights for private practice owners on building a meaningful, community-focused business, offering evidence-based services that meet unaddressed needs. Whether you're curious about the mind-body connection or looking for entrepreneurial advice, this episode offers valuable takeaways.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Tiffany’s Website
- Tiffany’s Instagram
- Tiffany’s Facebook
Meet Tiffany Duffing
Tiffany Duffing, PhD, is a licensed clinical psychologist, U.S. Army Veteran, and the co-founder of GI Psychology, a practice specializing in treating children, adolescents, and adults with various GI disorders. With a passion for serving her community, Dr. Duffing specializes in the integrative framework that pulls from Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT), Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT), and Clinical Hypnosis. She has successfully achieved therapeutic goals with children aged nine and above, adolescents, adults, and couples. Her areas of focus include gastrointestinal disorders, chronic pain, insomnia, and anxiety.
For Tiffany, empowering patients to create comfort is her biggest priority. Starting from the first intake session, Dr. Duffing focuses on listening actively and relaying what they have said to them to ensure complete understanding. In her career, Dr. Duffing has embraced the health psychology model, emphasizing the collaboration between psychologists, physicians, dietitians, and nurses to address the whole person.
Dr. Duffing maintains active involvement in the American Society of Clinical Hypnosis (ASCH) and the Society for Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis (SCEH). She is also a volunteer Board member of the Association of Northern Virginia Clinical Psychologists (NVCP). In addition to her clinical work, Dr. Duffing serves as president of GI Psychology and ensures the practice's commitment to providing comprehensive mental health services for patients with complicated gastro-psychological conditions.
Guided by her dedication to the field, Dr. Duffing's professional commitments lie within her innovative treatment approach and the importance of her patients' well-being. She continues to inspire and benefit individuals seeking relief from their symptoms, contributing to a healthier and more hopeful future for patients and the mental health community.
To learn more about Dr. Duffing and her work at GI Psychology, visit the website or connect with her on LinkedIn. Her professional journey continues to inspire and benefit individuals seeking relief from their symptoms, contributing to a healthier and more hopeful future for patients and the mental health community. For more information on Dr. Duffing or to learn more about GI Psychology’s unique approach, please visit gipsychology.com.
Do you need help with your private practice website? Jenn Fredette joins us to discuss the transformative power of strong copywriting and how it can elevate your online presence.
When it comes to crafting compelling copy for your website, having a clear niche is crucial. By defining your niche, you can tailor your message to resonate deeply with your ideal client, making your marketing efforts more effective and targeted. Jenn Fredette, an expert in copywriting for private practices, shares valuable insights on refining your website’s copy to attract and engage the clients who are the perfect fit for your services.
Meet Jenn Fredette
Jenn journeys with others to develop a deep understanding of themselves and the world around them. She is passionate about connecting the curious and brave with therapeutic guides who can lead the way into the wild adventure of self-knowledge.
As a former minister, practicing psychotherapist, adjunct graduate professor, and host of “A Thinker’s Guide to…” Podcast Jenn brings a wealth of knowledge and experience in translating the profound into everyday language. Learn more at therapyforthinkers.com or follow her on Instagram at @athinkersguide.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Jenn’s Podcast
- Jenn’s Website
- Jenn on Instagram
- Jenn on Facebook
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Mike Michalowicz dives into a transformative approach to the hiring process: recruiting workshops. Traditional interviews, as it turns out, have proven less effective than anticipated, with a mere 10% of candidates hired through this method turning out to be great performers within organizations. This often results in mishires and mismatches that hinder a company’s growth. We explore how recruiting workshops can revolutionize talent acquisition, elevate organizational success, and foster a paradigm shift in hiring, emphasizing unproven abilities and task-centric talent matching. Join us for an eye-opening discussion on the future of effective hiring practices.
Meet Mike Michalowicz
By his 35th birthday, MIKE MICHALOWICZ (pronounced mi-‘kal-o-wits) had founded and sold two multi-million dollar companies.
Confident that he had the formula to success, he became a small business angel investor… and proceeded to lose his entire fortune. Then he started all over again, driven to find better ways to grow healthy, strong companies. Mike has devoted his life to the research and delivery of innovative, impactful entrepreneurial strategies to you.
Mike is the creator of Profit First, which is used by hundreds of thousands of companies across the globe to drive profit. He is the creator of Clockwork, a powerful method to make any business run on automatic. In Fix This Next, Mike details the strategy businesses can use to determine what to do and in what order to ensure healthy, fast, permanent growth (and avoid debilitating distractions). Get Different will give you the tools to stand out in any market.
Today, Mike leads two new multi-million-dollar ventures as he tests his latest business research for his books. He is a former small business columnist for The Wall Street Journal and a business makeover specialist on MSNBC. Mike is a popular main-stage keynote speaker on innovative entrepreneurial topics and is the author of All In, Get Different, Fix This Next, Clockwork, Profit First, Surge, The Pumpkin Plan, The Toilet Paper Entrepreneur, and My Money Bunnies.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Mike’s Website
- Mike’s Instagram
- Mike’s Facebook
- Profit First
- All In: How Great Leaders Build Unstoppable Teams
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy podcast, Gordon Brewer welcomes Kati Morton, a licensed therapist and YouTube sensation whose channel has become a sanctuary for many seeking mental health support. Kati’s journey is unique; she has not only provided education through her videos but also built a thriving online community. Her dedication to fostering a safe and supportive space has allowed individuals to feel connected and seen, even when traditional therapy may feel isolating.
Listen in as Kati shares the behind-the-scenes of her YouTube channel, how she balances her online presence with private practice, and why community is essential in the mental health journey. Whether you're a mental health professional or simply curious about how Kati’s approach has helped countless individuals, this episode offers valuable insights into the power of connection and the delicate balance between online influence and in-person therapy.
Meet Kati Morton
Kati Morton, LMFT, is a licensed marriage and family therapist and a highly sought-after public speaker in the field of mental health. Starting with a Master's degree in Clinical Psychology from Pepperdine University, she has built a vast & vibrant online community. Her YouTube channel - with over 1.4 million subscribers and 130 million views, has made her a prominent figure in translating complex mental health concepts into accessible language. Through her dynamic presence on social media and appearances on top-rated shows such as The TODAY Show, Dr. Phil, Alex Cooper’s Call Her Daddy, E! News, CBS The Doctors, and The Dr. Drew Show, Kati successfully spreads awareness, reduces stigma, and empowers individuals to prioritize their mental well-being. As an accomplished author of two best-selling books "Are u ok?: A Guide to Caring for Your Mental Health," and “Traumatized: Identify, Understand and Cope with PTSD and Emotional Stress”, Kati's dedication to dismantling barriers to mental health services and fostering a supportive global community is unmatched.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear TN
- Kati’s Website
- Kati on Instagram
- Kati on YouTube
In this episode, Lisa Mustard, a seasoned Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist (LMFT) with over 15 years of experience, opens up about her journey through burnout, rediscovery, and the pursuit of purpose. Lisa shares a relatable story of feeling drained by the demands of her high-pressure job, balancing family life, and maintaining self-care, leading her to question her future in the field of therapy. She recounts a pivotal moment at the Lowcountry Mental Health Conference that sparked her curiosity about how continuing education (CE) could better engage younger, tech-savvy therapists. This curiosity led her to create a podcast platform that offers engaging, portable CE courses. Throughout her journey, Lisa faced challenges, including navigating imposter syndrome, but she ultimately leaned into her strengths and reignited her passion for helping others. Her story is an inspiring reminder to therapists that it’s never too late to explore new paths, follow your passions, and embrace growth.
Meet Lisa Mustard
Lisa Mustard is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist and Life Coach based in South Carolina. She is a dedicated wife to her husband, Billy, and a loving mother to two daughters. With a passion for health, wellness, and fitness, Lisa also enjoys wrangling her puppies and diving into personal development. At the age of 40, she experienced a pivotal moment that sparked a desire for change. No longer content with going through the motions in her life and career, Lisa began exploring new ideas and business ventures—some leading to success and others offering valuable lessons.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear
- Lisa’s Website
- The Therapy Show
- Podcourses
- Lisa on Instagram
In this deeply personal and poignant episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast—episode 350!—Gordon shares his journey through grief after the loss of his wife. As a mental health professional and former funeral director, Gordon has unique insight into the complexities of grief, but facing it himself has brought him to a new understanding of its overwhelming reality. This episode is a raw, honest reflection on navigating personal grief, the necessity of self-compassion, and the importance of allowing oneself to pause in the midst of unimaginable pain. If you’ve ever experienced loss or supported someone who has, this episode is a must-listen.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Start Consulting with Gordon
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Instagram Mental Health Templates
Mental Health Wear
Tune into Donny's episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast to explore profound insights on building resilient and fulfilling marriages. In this enlightening discussion, Donny reveals that while marriage inevitably comes with challenges, choosing the right partner sets the stage for overcoming these obstacles together. He tackles pressing issues like the rise of fractured families and the growing trend of self-centeredness, highlighting how these factors can undermine relationship health.
Donny advocates for a shift from a self-focused approach to one centered on giving and understanding, emphasizing that genuine self-care should support, not detract from, our ability to contribute to others. Learn how to navigate marital complexities with Donny’s unique perspective on maintaining upward-trending relationships, mastering perspective-taking, and fostering a deeper connection. His practical advice, drawn from his book The Making of a Dynamic Duo, promises to provide valuable strategies for couples striving to thrive despite life’s inevitable ups and downs.
Meet Donny Frank
Donny Frank is a licensed marriage and family therapist who has been helping couples and families connect for over 25 years. His clinical practice and worldwide workshops are influenced by his training in leading relationship approaches, such as Imago Relationship Therapy and Gottman methods, EFT, CBT, and NLP. In fact, the communication handbook featured in the second part of his book is largely based on IRT's highly effective Couples Dialogue.
Driven by his passion for people and his deep respect for the institutions of marriage and family, Donny's extensive experience and wealth of knowledge, coupled with a balanced demeanor, practical approach, and creative nature, all contribute to his practice and presentations. These qualities are also the ingredients that make this book a game-changer for couples seeking connection.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- Mental Health Wear
- Donny on Instagram
- The Making of a Dynamic Duo
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, guest Julie Herres brings invaluable insights into the critical role of compensation in group practices. Julie highlights how compensation is often the largest expense in a group practice and underscores its importance for the overall financial health of the business. Many practice owners, she observes, make compensation decisions without sufficient thought, often relying on others’ advice or social media rather than tailoring their approach to their unique business needs.
Julie argues that profitability is essential for the survival and success of a group practice, emphasizing that every clinician must generate profit for the practice to sustain itself. She also addresses common financial mistakes made by practice owners and offers practical tips to avoid them. Julie is also offering a free webinar on September 27th to further help practice owners set up their group practice for financial and relational success.
https://www.greenoakaccounting.com/gordon
Meet Julie Herres
Julie Herres is the founder and CEO of GreenOak Accounting, a firm that exclusively serves therapists, psychologists, and counselors in private practice across the United States. Over the years, Julie and her team have worked with hundreds of private practice owners and developed serious knowledge about what makes a practice financially successful. GreenOak’s goal is to help practice owners feel comfortable with the financial side of their businesses and have profitable practices. Some of the firm’s biggest success stories were achieved through implementing Profit First.
Julie is an accountant and an enrolled agent (EA). She is also a speaker and the host of the Therapy for Your Money podcast.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Free Webinar
- GreenOak Accounting
- Therapy For Your Money
- Profit First for Therapists
- Julie on Instagram
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- Mental Health Wear
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, host Gordon Brewer welcomes Maureen Codispodi, a passionate advocate for accessible mental health services in Canada. Maureen discusses the growing acceptance of online therapy, particularly in the wake of COVID-19, and highlights the unique challenges faced by those in remote communities. She shares how her organization is addressing these challenges through innovative pricing structures and the launch of a low-fee counseling program that leverages the expertise of practicum students. Maureen also delves into the importance of creating a supportive, collaborative environment for her team of independent therapists, emphasizing the need for continuity and effective communication in delivering equitable care across the country.
Meet Maureen Codispodi
Maureen Codispodi, founder and director of Help Clinic Canada, is a force of change in the landscape of mental health support in Canada. She brings 25 years of experience and a life-long passion for education into her commitment to making a difference. As a seasoned traveller and adventurer she has spent a lot of time exploring the nooks and crannies of Canada and abroad. It was during these travels that she nurtured her commitment to supporting the beautiful tapestry of Canadians in both rural and urban communities. Her compassion, empathy, and unwavering desire to see everyone thrive brought this vision to life. She is dedicated to breaking down barriers to mental health services by providing ethically priced virtual therapy by qualified Canadian therapists, along with free and accessible resources. With the support of her team she is making an impact in the lives of Canadians everyday. Maureen tirelessly champions awareness and advocates for the importance of access to services for all. Beyond the virtual walls of her clinic, Maureen spends time with her family exploring Canada’s beautiful west coast.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- Mental Health Wear
- Maureen's Website
- Maureen on LinkedIn
- Maureen on Facebook
- Maureen on Instagram
- Maureen on TikTok
This episode is all about Aaron Mallory’s innovative approach to mental health services and organizational efficiency; he demonstrates his commitment to both community support and business growth. By establishing his organization as a nonprofit, he leverages grants to fund comprehensive wraparound services, including a clinical workforce program combining therapy with work experience. His focus on delegation and infrastructure investment has driven significant growth. With an entrepreneurial and analytical mindset, Aaron balances business processes with client-centered care. His venture, "My Freedom VA," addresses the need for quality virtual support, employing assistants from Nigeria to enhance economic sustainability and bridge gaps in mental health services, particularly for underserved communities.
Meet Aaron Mallory:
Aaron Mallory is the founder and Chief Executive Officer of GRO Community. Aaron founded GRO Community to assist males, particularly males of color, who are often misunderstood and outcasted within our society. Aaron has over ten years in the field, working with specifically African American males with diverse behavior challenges. Aaron has provided direct service work at UCAN within their transitional living shelter for young adult males, HRDI as a child and adolescent therapist, and Youth Advocate as an advocate. Aaron has served in leadership roles at HRDI as the Clinical Supervisor within the Child and Adolescent Department and Clinical Director at Heartland Alliance, READI initiative.
Aaron obtained his bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering at Southern Illinois University Carbondale and a Masters’s in Social Work from the University of Chicago. Aaron is also a licensed clinical social worker under the state of Illinois regulatory board.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear
- Aaron on LinkedIn
- My Freedom VA
- My Freedom Podcast
- Gro Community
- Gro Community on Facebook
- Gro Community on LinkedIn
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Nate emphasizes the importance of understanding your practice's financial health, or "financial story," to reduce stress and uncertainty. He highlights the common issue of relying on intuition instead of accurate data for financial decisions. Nate offers practical steps for therapists, who often lack financial training, to manage their finances confidently. He introduces a simple monthly process: reviewing profit and loss statements and cash flow reports to establish a financial baseline, analyzing clinician metrics for profitability, and creating a comprehensive dashboard to track key metrics. This approach helps practice owners transition from financial anxiety to a clear, data-driven understanding of their financial health, enabling better decision-making and planning.
Meet Nate Hendrikse, Profit First Professional, QuickBooks ProAdvisor:
Nate Hendrikse does not like math, but he does love finance, accounting, and helping practice owners find their financial story. He is the owner and founder of Navigator Bookkeeping and spends most of his days speaking with private practice owners about their practice's financial story. His favorite things are seeing practice owners move from cash flow stress to cash flow confidence, profitable practices, and tax savings accounts.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Gusto: Earn $100 when you run payroll
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear
- Navigator Bookkeeping
- Nate on Facebook
- Nate on LinkedIn
- Free Clinician Profitability Session - 45 Minutes with Nate to do a deep dive on how you pay your clinicians, whether your pay structures are profitable, and/or whether the different locations of your practice are profitable
- Clinician Profitability Tool
- Email: nate@navigatorbookkeeping.us
On the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Rachel Harrison recounts the organic and somewhat accidental evolution of her practice, emphasizing the importance of hiring the right staff and fostering a supportive team. Initially lacking a grand plan, Rachel's practice grew through serendipitous opportunities and learning from other group practice owners. Her trauma-focused practice aims to provide a comfortable, non-clinical environment and has expanded across Maryland, Delaware, and Pennsylvania. Rachel underscores the need for hiring clinicians who align with her practice's culture, advocating for an "abundance mentality" where practices support each other. Reflecting on her decision to specialize in trauma, she highlights the benefits of having a niche, which has helped attract the right clients and therapists. Rachel has also founded the Trauma Specialist Training Institute and ventured into podcasting exploring innovative approaches to mental health. Transitioning from therapist to business owner, she acknowledges the new skills required for running a business and the ongoing evolution in the mental health field.
Meet Rachel Harrison:
Rachel is a trainer and speaker providing education on trauma treatment, EMDR and Entrepreneurship. She is also the Founder of Trauma Specialists of Maryland, Delaware and Pennsylvania. She is a Certified EMDR Therapist and an Approved Consultant for EMDR Therapy, as well as a trainer, offering EMDRIA approved EMDR trainings nationally. She brings 26 years’ experience as a therapist and is the owner of The Trauma Specialists Training Institute. Rachel is passionate about treating trauma, specifically using EMDR to heal our communities. She is also curious about innovations in mental wellness, leading her to develop The Mental Health Entrepreneur Podcast.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Gusto: Earn $100 when you run payroll
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- The Mental Health Entrepreneur
- The Mental Health Entrepreneur on YouTube
- The Mental Health Entrepreneur on Instagram
- The Mental Health Entrepreneur on TikTok
- Trauma Specialists Training Institute
Heather Hendrie is a Whistler nature-based therapist and writer originally from Guelph, Ontario. She lived in Cusco, Costa Rica, California, Colorado, and the Canadian Rockies before calling British Columbia home. Heather’s intimate writing style draws on her varied life experiences and works as a clinical counselor to remind us all that in our tough or embarrassing moments; we are not alone.
Heather’s first best-selling anthology, awfully hilarious: stories we never tell, won the Canadian Book Club Awards readers' choice for best anthology in 2023. The second anthology in the series, period pieces, tells truths in an attempt to end shame around menstruation and menopause.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy podcast, Heather delves into the profound healing potential of nature and its evolving role in therapy. She highlights the age-old recognition of nature’s therapeutic benefits, from historical examples like tuberculosis patients who thrived in Central Park in the early 1900s, to modern initiatives such as Outward Bound that harness nature for growth and resilience. Heather also shares her personal journey, revealing how a condition affecting one in twenty menstruating individuals often goes undiagnosed due to societal stigma and stresses the importance of clinical vigilance. Additionally, she discusses the success of her anthology series "Awfully Hilarious," born from a shared experience of dating mishaps during COVID-19, which underscores the therapeutic power of humor and storytelling. Through these narratives, Heather illustrates how nature-based and community-driven approaches can revitalize both personal and professional practices, offering new perspectives on healing and connection.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Gusto: Earn $100 when you run payroll
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Awfully Hilarious: Period Pieces
- Awfully Hilarious: Stories We Never Tell
- Heather’s Website
- True Nature Wilderness Therapy
- Heather on Instagram
- Awfully Hilarious on Instagram
- True Nature Wilderness Therapy on Instagram
- Mentorship for new nature-based practitioners and aspiring self-publishing writers
Welcome to this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, where Jamey Schrier dives deep into the current challenges facing private practice in today's landscape. From navigating insurance reimbursements and integrating complex technologies like Electronic Health Records (EHRs) to grappling with the soaring costs of professional training, Jamey illuminates the daunting realities many mental health practitioners face despite the growing demand for their services.
He argues passionately that the survival of private practices hinges on treating them as serious businesses, advocating for a shift towards equipping clinicians with essential business acumen alongside their therapeutic skills. Jamey's insights underscore the critical need for strategic thinking, scalability, and profitability to not only sustain but thrive in the evolving healthcare market. Join us as Jamey shares practical strategies and profound insights aimed at empowering clinicians to navigate and succeed in the complex world of private practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- GUSTO: Earn $100 when you run payroll
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear
- Jamey's Website
- Tired of Working More and Making Less? Take Jamey’s Quiz
- Jamey on Facebook
- Jamey on YouTube
- Jamey on Instagram
- Jamey on LinkedIn
Meet Jamey Schrier:
Jamey Schrier, P.T. is an author, former private practice owner and founder of Practice Freedom U...a company focusing solely on helping practice owners work less, earn more and build a business that sets you free.
Jamey has helped hundreds of growth-minded owners in physical therapy, occupational therapy and other health professionals, create a vibrant practice that runs like clockwork. Working less hours and focusing on the things you love to do is a requirement to achieve what he refers to as "Practice Freedom.”
Jamey has worked with owners wanting to expand locations, remove themselves out of patient care or wanting to maximize the clinics value before selling. He helps you build your dream practice and spend less time working “In” the clinic, and more time working "On" your business and enjoying life!
Ryan earned his Bachelor’s degree in Psychology from Texas Tech University in 2003 and a Master’s degree in Mental Health Counseling from Asbury Theological Seminary in Wilmore, KY in 2008. With nearly two decades of experience in private and agency work, Ryan has developed a profound expertise in his field. Ryan has maintained a private practice for the past eight years primarily working with high-impact and highly driven adults.
Ryan Forbes discusses his approach to working with highly driven and high achieving clients on the Practice of Therapy. Inspired by a client in 2016, Ryan explores the challenges this unique yet underserved population faces, such as isolation, high anxiety, and a constant fear of failure. He shares insights gathered from interviews with 45 high achievers, including CEOs, professional athletes, and musicians. Forbes emphasizes the importance of providing a confidential, judgment-free space and adopting a direct, problem-solving approach rather than traditional therapeutic methods. He also highlights the need for therapists to market their services in places frequented by affluent clients and to understand the distinct stressors and expectations that come with high-profile lifestyles.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Ryan's email: ryan@ryanforbeslpc.com
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
Dr. Nicholas Samstag is a psychoanalyst and clinical psychologist living and working in New York City. He holds a Ph.D. in clinical psychology and a certificate in psychoanalysis from the William Alanson White Institute. In addition, he has completed advanced training in Emotionally Focused Therapy for couples. Complementing his professional education is a strong background in classics and literature, which richly informs his work.
In this episode, Dr. Samstag dives deep into the nuanced world of psychoanalysis. He challenges oversimplifications of Freudian theory, advocating for a contemporary approach enriched by modern perspectives like queer theory. Dr. Samstag prioritizes active listening and exploration of both conscious and unconscious realms, steering clear of one-size-fits-all methods. His patient-centered ethos fosters autonomy, steering away from prescriptive advice in favor of self-discovery. Dr. Samstag reveals how psychoanalysis liberates from societal norms, encouraging profound dialogue beyond superficialities. He critiques rigid therapeutic techniques, championing a nuanced, analytical attitude that respects individual journeys. His insights on language as a gateway to unconscious truths make for a compelling exploration of the human psyche.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Dr. Samstag’s Website
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
With over ten years of experience in small business accounting, advising as well as tax planning and preparation, Yonasan is passionate about helping small business owners in the mental health profession to grow their businesses and save money.
In the fall of 2022, he fulfilled a long-time dream and moved with his family to Israel. That being said, he’s still fiercely loyal to his native Seattle sports teams and has strong roots in the Pittsburgh area after living there for over 12 years and starting and growing his business with local Pittsburgh clients. Today, he works remotely from Israel, serving clients all across the United States. When he’s not working, you’ll find Yonasan exercising, exploring the amazing country of Israel, and spending time with his wife and five kids.
Join us on this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast as Yonasan dives into crucial tax strategies for mental health practitioners. He covers common pitfalls, such as the importance of forming an LLC from the start and the complexities of transitioning to an S corporation. Yonasan also demystifies S corps, explaining how they can significantly reduce self-employment taxes while highlighting the necessary administrative considerations. With valuable insights into tax-saving techniques and real-world examples, this episode is packed with practical advice to help practitioners optimize their financial strategies and avoid costly mistakes. Don't miss out on these essential tips to enhance your practice's financial health!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Yonasan's Website
- Yonasan on LinkedIn
- Free Call with Yonasan
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
Jane Carter is a therapist-turned-business-coach for solopreneurs who want to get out of their own way, make more money —and have more fun in the process. She loves helping solopreneurs “put their business on the couch” so they can: Find joy and purpose as they serve their clients, Have a business aligned with their values & personality, and *Find themselves saying, “I can’t believe I get paid so well to do work I love so much!” She lives in Asheville, North Carolina, where she's a beer snob, coffee connoisseur, and avid hiker.
In a world inundated with tactics and trends, Jane stands firm in her belief that the bedrock of success lies in genuine human connections. Through her own journey, Jane has learned firsthand the transformative power of relationships, both in her personal and professional life. From the pivotal role of personal referrals in her therapy practice to the profound impact of networking on her career trajectory, Jane emphasizes the immeasurable value of authenticity and sincerity. Moreover, as an advocate for embracing one's true self, she champions the idea that success doesn't hinge on conforming to extroverted norms but rather on staying true to one's unique brilliance. Jane's insights extend beyond the realm of entrepreneurship, transcending into the broader landscape of personal growth and fulfillment. As she shares her experiences and wisdom, Jane invites others to join her in prioritizing genuine connections, self-compassion, and continuous learning on the journey toward holistic success.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear
- Send me the FREE Podcasting Roadmap PDF
- Jane’s Website
- Jane’s Instagram
- Free Resources from Jane
Colin Carr is the founder and CEO of CARR, the nation’s leading provider of commercial real estate services for healthcare tenants and buyers. Every year, thousands of healthcare practices trust CARR to help them achieve the most favorable terms on their lease and purchase negotiations.
Colin has been involved in commercial real estate for over two decades and has personally been involved in thousands of transactions.
In this podcast episode, Gordon and Colin dive into the intricate world of real estate, particularly focusing on the nuances of negotiating office space for private practice owners. Their conversation unveils vital insights and strategies that can transform a potentially daunting process into a well-managed and advantageous venture.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
Read the full show notes here
Colin's Website
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Start Consulting with Gordon
The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
The PsychCraft Network
The Practice of Therapy Community
Mental Health Wear
Julie is a certified social media manager with three years of experience in digital marketing, TikTok, Instagram management, and content creation. She works with therapists and health professionals to spread the word about wellness and bring it into the new era of social media.
In this episode, Julie discusses the challenges private practice owners face with changing social media algorithms, complicating client management, and online presence. She offers solutions to reduce stress while maintaining control. By researching clients' industries—therapists, spiritual leaders, or coaches—she creates engaging content ideas and assists with online engagement. Julie emphasizes the importance of strong visual hooks and engaging titles, recommends tools like CapCut for social media managers, and notes a shift back to long-form content. She stresses consistent posting and encourages health and wellness professionals to embrace social media to reach and support younger generations, believing a strong online presence is essential for future business success.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Email Julie: jsl-management@outlook.com
- Julie on Instagram
- Julie on TikTok
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
Dyna Tucker is a Licensed Clinical Social Worker and Marriage and Family Therapist specializing in Couples Therapy. She obtained her Masters in Social Work from Long Island University-Post, and Advanced Certificate in Marriage and Family Therapy from Northwestern University. She has more than 10+ years in the field as a Social Worker. She works with couples to identify and address the issues that are keeping their relationships from moving forward. She also empowers individuals to make changes in their lives by helping them confront the belief systems that have kept them from developing into their best selves. Dyna is also a private practice coach; she helps independently licensed clinicians navigate the intricacies and challenges of starting/scaling their own private practice by helping them overcome their fears of the business side of private practice ownership.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Dyna Tucker dives into the realm of effective financial strategies for private practice, particularly in light of the challenges posed by the pandemic. Drawing from her own experiences, Dyna emphasizes the crucial role of saving and adapting to virtual operations to navigate through uncertain times. She shares insights into how transitioning to a fully virtual setup significantly reduced her expenses, shedding light on the importance of meticulous financial planning to avoid unexpected shortfalls. Dyna's approach underscores the necessity of strategic income planning, including assessing caseloads and tracking progress meticulously to ensure financial goals are met. Throughout our discussion, Dyna emphasizes the essentiality of these practices for anyone entering the private practice arena.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Tucker Group Practice
- Tucker Group Practice on Instagram
- Prosper in Practice on Instagram
- Prosper in Practice
Stacy K. Nakell is a licensed clinical social worker, certified group psychotherapist, certified clinical trauma practitioner, and author. She has spent the past fifteen years in private practice in Austin, TX, providing individual and group psychotherapy to clients struggling with body-focused repetitive behaviors (BFRBs).
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Stacy advocates for recognizing body-focused repetitive behaviors (BFRBs) as distinct from OCD due to their unique characteristics. Frustrated with the sole focus on cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) by the Trichotillomania Learning Center, she turned to psychodynamic therapy to explore the root causes of her own behaviors, leading her to write "Treatment for Body-Focused Repetitive Behaviors." Her book promotes an integrative psychodynamic approach that combines body awareness and cognitive and behavioral elements and emphasizes the therapeutic relationship. Through a case study, Stacy illustrates how therapy can help patients process trauma and develop self-compassion. She suggests BFRBs often arise in individuals with physiological sensitivity and nervous system dysregulation, worsened by family stress and internalized emotions. Stacy calls for a trauma-informed approach to uncover and address underlying emotions for more effective and lasting treatment.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the full show notes here
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Treatment for Body-Focused Repetitive Behaviors
- Stacy’s Website
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
David Sturgess is a Licensed Professional Counselor (LPC) in Marietta, Georgia. He owns Foundry Counseling, LLC, just off the Marietta Square.
For over a decade, he worked as a therapist in two of Georgia’s short- to long-term Psychiatric Residential Treatment Facilities (PRTFs). During the last two years of working in the hospital setting, he operated his private practice part-time. In the Spring of 2019, he left the treatment facility environment to do private practice full-time.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, David Sturgess dives into the essentials of balancing the desire to help others with the practical need to sustain a business. He breaks down critical decisions like choosing the right billing model and navigating insurance and tax implications. David highlights the shift from clinician to business owner, stressing the importance of ROI and strategic outsourcing. He shares three key mindset shifts: seeking help, rethinking money and time, and targeting niche markets. He advocates for proper pricing and overcoming imposter syndrome by addressing common solo practice pitfalls. David also tackles the nuances of effective marketing, emphasizing the need for cultural competency and creative strategies. Tune in for a wealth of practical advice to transform your therapy business!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- David's Mastermind
- David's Webinar
- Book a call with David
- Wise Practice Consulting
- Wise Practice Consulting on Instagram
- Foundry Counseling
- Foundry Counseling on Instagram
- Foundry Counseling on Facebook
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
Amy Dover, LMFT, has dedicated over two decades to the field of marriage and family therapy, guiding individuals and families through their most challenging times with compassion and a deep understanding of the complexities of human relationships. As a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist, Amy has not only impacted countless lives through her direct counseling work but has also extended her influence through the successful group practice she has owned and operated for over nine years. Amy is passionate in her desire to support faith-based practice owners, focusing on empowering fellow entrepreneurs to leverage their leadership skills and God-given talents to impact their team and community. She is driven by a vision to help faith-based practice owners create thriving practices that not only succeed in business terms but also provide a meaningful service aligned with their values and beliefs.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Amy shares her journey as a wife, mother, and private practice owner, highlighting the challenges of balancing work and family life. She discusses her shift in perspective towards embracing the rhythms of life instead of striving for balance finding flexibility in adjusting to different seasons and needs. Amy emphasizes the importance of prioritizing tasks and being intentional with time, drawing from her experiences as a therapist and practice owner. She also talks about her preference for paper planners and the significance of tracking tasks for effective management. Additionally, Amy reflects on her transition into group practice ownership, acknowledging the learning experiences and the importance of making wise decisions for sustainable growth. Through her consulting work, she aims to guide others in navigating the complexities of practice ownership and creating positive work environments.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Wise Practice Consulting
- Dover Counseling Services
- Dover Counseling on Instagram
- Dover Counseling on Facebook
- Wise Practice Summit
- Read the full show notes here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Full Focus Planner
Mike Zoladkowski is a digital marketing specialist and content marketing specialist with 12+ years of experience in various sectors, including mental health services. He designed and created a therapy business from scratch and grew it to 6 figures in about 2 years. Now, Mike and his wife Monika are helping other therapists in Canada and the US to grow their private practices.
In this episode, we talk about the pivotal role of a well-designed website in driving marketing success, complemented by targeted Google Ads campaigns. Mike underscores the importance of mobile-friendliness, concise messaging, and user-friendly design in website optimization. Additionally, Mike emphasizes addressing client needs, highlighting specific client groups, and explaining therapy approaches to enhance website effectiveness. By leveraging Google Ads and tracking conversions, therapists can optimize their campaigns for better results. Mike stresses the importance of balancing Google's suggestions with customer-focused ad content and incorporating a personal touch for resonance. While acknowledging the role of AI in marketing, he underscores the value of human expertise in crafting effective advertisements.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Mike's Website
- Learn More About this Episode Here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear
Joshua Rosenthal, PsyD, is a licensed clinical psychologist and the founder/CEO of Manhattan Psychology Group, PC (MPG), an integrated mental health and ABA practice based in NYC. He started his solo private practice in 2008 in NYC and grew it to over 250 staff before selling it to a PE-backed, mental health MSO called ARC Health. Post sale, he continues to focus on growth, leadership and company culture. In addition to MPG, Dr. Rosenthal started a summer treatment camp called Big Apple Day Program and created a progress monitoring software for schools called The Electronic Daily Report Card (eDRC). He went to the University of Delaware for undergrad and Long Island University-Post for his doctorate. When he’s not working, Dr. Rosenthal enjoys working out, going to Knicks games and traveling with his wife and 8-year-old daughter.
In this episode, Joshua shares his journey from clinician to entrepreneur, detailing the pivotal moment when he shifted focus to business expansion. He emphasizes the importance of caution in selecting a buyer and highlights his meticulous vetting process. Joshua stresses the significance of partnering with the right individuals and planning for retirement. He advocates for delegating non-clinical tasks to alleviate stress and foster growth. Joshua also dives into insights on selling clinics without losing control, personal and professional preparedness for selling a practice, strategic team building, and navigating uncertainties with integrity. Throughout, he provides valuable advice for mental health professionals considering unconventional career paths or selling their practices.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Joshua’s Website
- Joshua on LinkedIn
- Manhattan Psychology Group on Instagram
- Learn More About this Episode Here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
Rachelle is a licensed mental health counselor, eating disorder and analytic therapist. She works with clients in New York City and Brooklyn to make sense of life’s messy emotional experiences.
In this episode, we dive into society's intricate dynamics surrounding body image, self-care, well-being, and networking. Rachelle addresses societal pressures, personal struggles, and strategies for navigating them effectively. From exploring the impact of beauty standards and restrictive diets to redefining self-care beyond its spiritual connotations, Rachelle offers nuanced insights into fostering personal growth and fulfillment. She emphasizes the interconnectedness between behaviors and their underlying causes, advocating for a balanced approach to achieve sustainable well-being. We chat about building self-esteem, cultivating genuine connections, and viewing networking as personal enrichment rather than mere professional advancement. This episode invites listeners to reflect on their own experiences and challenges, offering encouragement for fostering holistic growth and authenticity in today's complex world.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Learn More About this Episode Here
- Full Focus Planner
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Rachelle’s Website
- Rachelle on Instagram
- Rachelle’s Podcast
Carolyn is personally passionate about holistic health and wellness and an outspoken advocate that the environment of your space impacts your success. With over 40 years of experience in the commercial interior industry, she holds a BS in Interior Architectural Design from the University of Texas at Austin, is NCIDQ Certified, a Registered Designer, a LEED AP, and a Professional Member of the IIDA/International Interior Design Association.
In 2004, she and her husband, Scott, co-founded CrossFields as a design-build firm in Atlanta. In 2011, they changed their focus to expand the impact of holistic health by elevating the public’s image of alternative medicine by creating outstanding healing environments nationwide virtually. Carolyn loves spending time with her eight wonderful grandchildren, attending church and community activities, traveling, and boating on the lake with her husband.
This episode features Carolyn Boldt discussing various aspects of interior design and its impact on business and client experience. She emphasizes the importance of commercial interior design in enhancing business operations and highlights the difference between commercial and residential design. Carolyn also provides insights into designing therapeutic spaces, focusing on balancing functionality and atmosphere to create a welcoming environment for patients. Additionally, she explores the significance of office maintenance, lighting psychology, and color psychology in branding and office design. Furthermore, Carolyn offers practical advice for therapists renting practice spaces, encouraging them to prioritize factors contributing to a positive first impression for clients. Overall, her expertise sheds light on the strategic role of interior design in business success and client satisfaction.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Learn More About this Episode Here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Get Carolyn’s Megabundle Offer!
- Crossfields Design
- Crossfields on Facebook
- Crossfields on Instagram
- Crossfields on LinkedIn
- Crossfields on Twitter
Maureen Clancy has been a licensed therapist and trauma expert for the past 20 years, helping women go through enormous life changes who have experienced childhood trauma.
In this episode, Maureen shares her journey of integrating alternative healing modalities into therapeutic practice. She discusses her exploration of various methods such as energy work, acupuncture, and Reiki alongside traditional therapy, emphasizing the holistic nature of healing. Maureen reflects on the limitations of the conventional therapeutic profession and advocates for the incorporation of alternative approaches to address clients' diverse needs. She also dives into topics like psychedelic therapy, Tarot integration, and the significance of embracing alternative paths to achieve wholeness beyond clinical intervention.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Learn More About this Episode Here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Maureen's Website
- Maureen's Instagram
- Maureen's TikTok
Kasey Compton is on a mission to help business owners find their entrepreneurial confidence. She went from bankrupt to Boss Babe when she took her first company from zero to three million in less than three years without ditching her life to do it. She owns three other businesses that have accumulated assets of over two million and are growing by the day.
Her superpowers include cutting through the clutter to identify a strategic starting point, increasing efficiency through systems, and tapping into a person’s highest potential. She helps others by designing maps for their entrepreneurial journeys while she stands confidently as their guide.
On The Practice of Therapy Podcast, Kasey Compton dives into her transformative journey outlined in her book, "In Search of You: How to Find Joy When Doing More Isn't Doing It Anymore." She candidly shares her experiences of over-functioning, driven by a quest for success and financial independence, which ultimately left her feeling unfulfilled. Through introspection and a deep dive into her past, Kasey discovered the importance of reconnecting with her inner self and reassessing her priorities. Her book serves as a guide for others seeking balance and fulfillment, offering insights into the therapeutic power of writing and reflection and strategies for navigating personal and professional challenges. Kasey's story is not just one of self-discovery, but also resilience and growth. Tune in as we chat about 'Meet You in Kentucky.’
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get two months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Be A Podcast Guest
- Kasey's Website
- Kasey on Facebook
- Kasey on Instagram
- In Search of You: How To Find Joy When Doing More Isn't Doing It Anymore
- Meet You In Kentucky 2024
- Back Porch Bestie Podcast
Dr. Carney is Associate Dean for Public Health and Health Policy, and Professor of Medicine, at the Larner College of Medicine at the University of Vermont (UVM). She is Chief of the Division of Public Health at the Larner College of Medicine and directs graduate public health education.
In this episode, we cover Dr. Carney’s multifaceted approach to addressing various aspects of healthcare and public health. From guiding individuals through the maze of health information to advocating for systemic changes and collaborative efforts, Dr. Carney's insights underscore the complexity of health challenges and the importance of holistic approaches. Her journey from a physician to a public health advocate reflects a deep commitment to improving community health and well-being. By emphasizing the significance of social determinants and the interconnected nature of health issues, Dr. Carney encourages a comprehensive understanding of health and resilience in navigating these challenges.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- UVM Public Health
- Dr. Carney on LinkedIn
Dr. Connor McClenahan founded Here Counseling, which provides a membership model for private practice so therapists can run their own private practices independently while benefiting from group resources. Dr. McClenahan runs a private practice in Los Angeles and Pasadena and has taught, coached, and written on digital marketing for therapists. His new 100-page workbook helps therapists build a strategic marketing plan and grow their practices.
In this episode, Dr. McClenahan dives into the delicate balance private practice owners face between self-doubt and sincere empathy. Advocating for a mindful approach, he underscores the significance of reconnecting with the empathetic core to foster effective client engagement. Dr. McClenahan champions authenticity and resonance by emphasizing empathy in marketing endeavors and encouraging private practice owners to visualize and connect with clients on a profound level. Tune in as Dr. McClenahan presents a methodical strategy for composing client-centered profile pages, emphasizing understanding clients' desires and obstacles, showcasing the practitioner's ability to help, and concluding with a message of hope to foster empowerment and motivation.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- Mental Health Wear
- Be A Podcast Guest
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- A Therapist's Guide to Digital Marketing
- Here Counseling
Cameron Schober is an LPC-S and LMFT-S in the State of Texas, primarily practicing at The Hope Place in Mansfield, TX. Cameron’s main areas of clinical focus is treating trauma using a combination of Accelerated Resolution Therapy, psychedelic-assisted integration, and postmodern therapy approaches in conjunction with psychoeducation related to trauma and it’s effects on our nervous systems as well as our lives.
In this episode, we talk about Cameron's journey through the realm of therapeutic practices, navigating challenges, and embracing novel approaches to healing. From grappling with stagnation in traditional models to pioneering psychedelic therapy, he illuminates the evolving landscape of mental health care. Through his experiences, Cameron underscores the importance of human connection, adaptation, and empowerment in facilitating profound healing transformations.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear
- Cameron’s Website
- Cameron on Instagram
- Cameron on Facebook
- How to Know a Person: The Art of Seeing Others Deeply and Being Deeply Seen
Carla Titus is a finance expert with over 15 years of combined corporate financial planning, analysis, strategy, and online businesses experience. She provides fractional CFO services and financial consulting to business owners looking to grow their business profitably. Her priorities for her clients are to help them grow profits, have cash in the bank, and pay themselves well so they can build personal wealth.
The journey to financial success in any business requires a solid foundation and forward-thinking strategies. Carla, a seasoned financial advisor, emphasizes the critical role of robust bookkeeping and accounting practices as the cornerstone of this foundation. With expertise honed through years of guiding businesses, she underscores the necessity of having competent professionals on board to ensure financial integrity and develop effective tax strategies. Carla highlights the proactive nature of financial planning, advocating for clear goals and actionable plans. She emphasizes the importance of setting realistic benchmarks, monitoring key performance indicators, and optimizing cost structures to achieve sustainable growth and profitability. Tune in as Carla dives into the intricacies of strategic financial planning, profit optimization, operational efficiency, and clinician compensation; her insights serve as a comprehensive blueprint for navigating the complexities of business finance and securing long-term success.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Carla's Website
- Carla on Facebook
- Carla on Instagram
- Carla on LinkedIn
- Carla on TikTok
This episode covers Dr. Liz Lasky's transformative shift from traditional therapy to coaching, driven by her quest for personal fulfillment and financial success. Embracing skepticism, she champions that therapists can thrive financially while providing valuable services, inspiring others to pursue their dreams. We speak about diverse opportunities for therapists, stressing the need for innovation in the evolving landscape of mental health care. She advocates for balancing roles as a business owner and entrepreneur, believing it's safe to have it all. Dr. Lasky reframes success, encouraging therapists to pursue tangible financial goals aligned with personal values. Tune in as we chat about the demand for diversification and changing client needs, urging therapists to evolve their practices to meet the challenges of today's fast-paced world.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative (use code “collab24”)
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- The 2024 Therapist Virtual Summit
- Dr. Lasky's Website
- Dr. Lasky on Facebook
- Dr. Lasky on Instagram
- Dr. Lasky on LinkedIn
Kristie Plantinga is a mental health nerd, writer, and marketer living in Colorado. She is the founder of TherapieSEO—a marketing agency serving therapists and coaches—and Best Therapists—a therapist directory that vets therapists so therapy-seekers can focus on fit, not quality. When she’s not writing about mental health and dreaming up creative content strategies, Kristie can be found snuggling her multiple terriers, sipping a homemade dirty chai, and half-helping her husband cook Lebanese food.
This episode is all about navigating the evolving landscape of digital marketing. Kristie emphasizes the impact of AI integration, the importance of adapting strategies to meet changing user behaviors, and the shift towards quality content and ethical practices. She outlines a strategic change toward enhancing therapists' individual reputations and introduces the Experience, Expertise, Authority, and Trust (EEAT) framework as a roadmap for digital presence optimization. Kristie also discusses the significance of resilience in facing marketing challenges and the role of Google ads, SEO, and directories in achieving visibility. Kristie advocates for staying informed, auditing services, and embracing innovative approaches to stay ahead in the dynamic digital marketing realm.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Collaborative (use code “collab24”)
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear (use code POT24)
- TherapieSEO
- Best Therapists
- Kristie on LinkedIn
Malka is a Licensed Clinical Social Worker in New Jersey, New York, and Florida. She has been in the mental health field for over 25 years and has successfully run her private practice for the last 15 years.
In response to the events of October 7th and the ongoing situation, Malka Shaw, LCSW and Stacey Shapiro, LCSW, have co-founded the Kesher Shalom Project. This initiative, led by seasoned trauma specialists, has trained over 2000 therapists globally. Their training equips therapists with vital tools to aid Jewish clients during the conflict, covering trauma assessments, practical techniques, and understanding Jewish competency through a trauma-focused lens, as well as addressing intergenerational trauma and the pervasive impact of anti-Semitism. Kesher Shalom plans to extend its impact by offering specialized workshops and groups for non-clinical audiences.
We cover various aspects of Jewish identity, misconceptions about Zionism, advocacy for Jewish rights and diversity, supporting Jewish clients through trauma, navigating anti-Semitism in therapy, and cultivating empathy in therapy. Malka eloquently discusses the correlation between anti-Semitism and racism, clarifies the meaning of Zionism, criticizes misconceptions about anti-Zionism, and emphasizes the importance of combating all forms of anti-Semitism. She also reflects on the role of therapists in providing a safe space for clients, discusses the impact of prejudice on therapy, and advocates for cultural sensitivity and compassion in therapeutic practices. Overall, we chat about the complexities of Jewish identity and the importance of empathy, validation, and understanding in addressing the unique experiences of Jewish individuals.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Kesher Shalom
- Kesher Shalom Newsletter
- Malka Shaw
- Follow Malka on LinkedIn
Jason has been working for over 20 years to support individuals, groups, families, organizations, and businesses. Jason is excited to bring over two decades of work in offices, institutions, kitchens, farmers’ markets, woodlots, and boardrooms to wild new environments. Whether as a psychotherapist, the creator and founder of JourneyMen, public speaker, thought leader, or narrative consultant, Jason believes that our lives are adventurous, and we can and should be active, engaged authors of our own adventure stories!
In this episode, Jason critiques the societal norms that suppress male sensitivity and emotions, advocating for a broader range of narratives that reflect diverse human experiences. Jason emphasizes the importance of presence and mindfulness in navigating societal expectations, particularly for men balancing work and family life. He calls for a reimagining of masculinity and fatherhood within broader social narratives and encourages individuals to craft their own stories. Ultimately, Jason highlights the power of storytelling and agency in shaping our lives and invites others to engage with his work.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear (use code POT24)
- Jason’s Website
- Jason on LinkedIn
- Jason on Facebook
- Jason on Instagram
Ashley is a Licensed Clinical Social Worker and mental health copywriter for therapists. In her professional work as a clinician, Ashley has experience with in-patient counseling and case management, outpatient counseling, and medical and insurance practice.
In the realm of SEO and private practice, the importance of user experience is often overlooked, leading therapists to rush into website setup without addressing essential business aspects. This mistake stems from a lack of business education during clinical training. To enhance online visibility, therapists must define their ideal client, avoiding generic content that fails to connect. The transition from academic writing to a conversational tone is crucial, with Ashley emphasizing simplicity and clarity. In the SEO landscape, she advocates for a basic level of optimization, simplifying the process by breaking it into keywords, strategic copywriting, and technical precision. Ashley empowers therapists to navigate SEO's overwhelming nature, encouraging them to focus on foundational principles for a well-performing website. Through one-on-one interactions, she dispels the intimidation surrounding SEO, fostering a belief that, with basic knowledge, therapists can independently implement strategies, eliminating the need for recurring expenses.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Start Consulting with Gordon
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear (use code POT24)
- Ashley’s Website
- Ashley’s Instagram
Jennifer McGurk RDN, CDN, CEDS-S is the founder and CEO of Pursuing Private Practice. She began her career in business as a dietitian in private practice. She grew her private practice into a group practice and eventually expanded into speaking, offering workshops, and supervising other professionals.
In this episode, Jennifer guides us in overcoming imposter syndrome and navigating the complexities of private practice, promoting diversified offerings beyond one-on-one sessions for a broader impact in the field. Her career in dietetics has undergone a significant transformation from a weight-centric approach to becoming a passionate advocate for anti-diets and holistic well-being. Her journey, shaped by continuous learning and client interactions, highlights the limitations of traditional diets and champions a weight-inclusive perspective. As a committed advocate for eating disorder treatment and recovery, Jennifer emphasizes the interconnected elements of mental health, genetics, environment, and brain function. Transitioning from a clinician to the business world, she stresses the multifaceted nature of recovery, challenging linear progressions, and advocating for a comprehensive treatment team. Jennifer addresses the need for early exposure to business concepts in dietetics education, encouraging an entrepreneurial mindset from the outset of one's career.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Mental Health Wear (use code POT24)
- Consulting With Gordon
- Pursuing Private Practice
- Jennifer on Instagram
- Jennifer on Facebook
- Pursuing Private Practice Podcast
- Jennifer on LinkedIn
In this episode, Jamal Jones chats about navigating the hurdles of partnering with a tech company and transitioning to a sustainable private pay model. We explore his growth, financial transformation, and improved relationship with his work. Beyond his personal journey, Jamal dives into profound topics like faith, abundance, and financial wellness, providing insights into mental health entrepreneurship and the adoption of value-based pricing. Join Jamal in recognizing the worth of mental health professionals, navigating industry challenges, and embracing a mindset that transforms setbacks into success.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Peer Network
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear (use code POT24)
- Jamal’s Website
- Jamal on YouTube
- Jamal on LinkedIn
- Jamal on Facebook
EmBARK on a transformative journey with Stefani Cohen as we chat about “Overcoming Your Child's Fear of Dogs." Stefani shares the heartfelt story of her daughter Becky's unexpected fear of dogs, navigating a landscape void of resources. Through the prism of exposure therapy, Stefani witnessed Becky's remarkable transformation, sparking a commitment to extend her expertise to a wider audience. Stefani authored a comprehensive guide aimed at parents, therapists, dog trainers, grandparents, and dog enthusiasts.
We dive into the book's core components, emphasizing education about dog behavior and the empowering journey of reclaiming control over fears. Join Stefani in uncovering the importance of educating children on safe dog interactions, cultivating curiosity, and practicing mindfulness. Discover her holistic approach to exposure therapy, encouraging individuals to become "detectives" in understanding canine behavior. From practical tips on meeting dogs for the first time to advocating for good manners in both dogs and children, Stefani's insights resonate with anyone seeking harmonious relationships between children and our beloved canine companions.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear (use code POT24)
- Stefani’s Website
- Stefani on Facebook
- Stefani on Instagram
- Stefani on LinkedIn
- Overcoming Your Child's Fear of Dogs: A Step-by-Step Guide for Parents
Susanne Mariga is a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) and Certified Tax Coach specializing in business and personal tax planning.
In the realm of private practice, Susanne brings a wealth of insight to the table, emphasizing the significance of Mindful Money Mastery. Reflecting on her own transformative journey as a profit-first professional and coach, Susanne underscores the need for business owners, particularly in service-driven fields, to redefine success individually. Passionate about service, she champions aligning thoughts, behaviors, and feelings with financial goals, asserting that building wealth can harmoniously coexist with a sense of purpose. Susanne advocates for a mindful approach, urging practitioners to visualize their desired outcomes and craft a roadmap toward financial success while staying faithful to their calling. As we navigate Susanne's narratives—from the impactful lessons learned through shoebox receipts to the intricacies of tax optimization and retirement planning—it becomes evident that her insights are about financial acumen and cultivating a resilient and purpose-driven financial mindset for long-term prosperity.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear (use code POT24)
- Full Focus Planner
- YouTube Series: Love & Loss
- Profit First: Target Allocation Percentages (TAPs)
- Susanne’s Website
- Susanne on Instagram
- Susanne on X
- Susanne on Facebook
- Susanne on LinkedIn
- Susanne’s Podcast
- Profit First For Minority Business Enterprises
- Profit First
- Profit First for Therapists
Liane Wood is a Registered Psychotherapist (RP) who has combined her education in the mental health field with her own experiences to pursue her passion for helping others.
In this episode, we chat about the nature of saying "no" externally and internally, acknowledging the need for self-care and well-being. Liane's proactive approach shines through as she emphasizes the significance of designated admin blocks, strategic vacation planning, and the immediate implementation of boundaries for a healthier and more balanced professional and personal life. Her insights on burnout provide a comprehensive understanding of its insidious effects and the necessity of setting boundaries as a proactive measure. Liane's wisdom culminates in a call to immediate action, urging listeners to reflect on and implement small yet intentional changes that can positively impact work-life harmony.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Full Focus Planner
- YouTube Series: Love & Loss
- Build Your Private Practice
- Build Your Private Practice on Facebook
- Liane Wood on LinkedIn
In this episode, Gordon opens up about the challenges he faced in 2023, reflecting on the loss of his wife to breast cancer. Despite the difficulties, Gordon shares his experiences of grief, emphasizing the power of community and connection. As he navigates through personal struggles, Gordon also looks ahead to the future, setting intentions for the coming year. Gordon reflects on the interconnectedness of personal and professional growth. Through vulnerability, shared experiences, and intentional goal-setting, he envisions a year of community building, genuine connections, and continuous support within the therapy community.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Full Focus Planner
- YouTube Series: Love & Loss
- Full Focus Goal Setting
Dr. Brian Dixon, a seasoned mental health professional, candidly shares the highs and lows that shaped his path in the realm of private practice. From the humorous anecdotes of early administrative struggles to the transformative lessons learned through business coaching, Dr. Dixon's narrative is a tapestry of mistakes turned triumphs. With an emphasis on empowerment, he unravels the story behind founding SimplyPsych during the pandemic, a venture aimed at liberating mental health professionals from the burdens of administrative complexities. Delve into the world of entrepreneurial solitude, the reshaping of mental health perceptions through fair pricing, and the invaluable insights that propelled Dr. Dixon to build a thriving practice. This episode is a compass for mental health practitioners navigating the maze of private practice, offering a blend of wisdom, humor, and resilience.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Jotform
- Love and Loss Series
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- SimplyPsych
- Psychiatry, Naked Podcast
- SimplyPsych on Instagram
- SimplyPsych on Facebook
- SimplyPsych on LinkedIn
- SimplyPsych on YouTube
Jim LaPierre LCSW, CCS is a seasoned mental health clinician who specializes in recovery from trauma and substance use disorder. Jim identifies as a wounded healer and a work in progress. He spends his days with fellow social misfits, helping them transform their lives. Jim & his wife Brigitte own and operate an outpatient client in Brewer, Maine.
In this episode of The Practice of Therapy, we navigate the intricate terrain of imposter syndrome, delve into the raw reflections on authenticity and compassion in mental health training, and uncover the often-neglected reality of self-care in the profession. Jim, a seasoned therapist, shares his invaluable insights on imposter syndrome, emphasizing its roots in the multifaceted journey of overcoming challenges. The narrative challenges misconceptions surrounding this phenomenon, shedding light on its universal nature that can manifest at various career stages.
Jim's candid reflections on authenticity and compassion expose the pitfalls of conventional professional training, urging a shift towards a more genuine and compassionate approach for clinicians. As we conclude, Jim calls for fostering vulnerability within the mental health profession, emphasizing the pivotal role of supportive networks and honest dialogues in navigating the challenges of toxic work environments. This episode provides a holistic perspective, encouraging clinicians to embrace their identity, overcome challenges, and prioritize self-care for a fulfilling and resilient career in mental health.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Jotform
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Overcoming Imposter Syndrome: for Healers & Helpers
- A Guide for Wounded Healers
- Jim’s Website
- Email Jim: counseling@roadrunner.com
Morgan has over a decade of experience helping people do their best work. As Jotform’s Product Education Manager, she shares best practices for taking full advantage of Jotform’s suite of products. Jotform is a powerful form-building tool for all your data collection and management needs.
In this episode, we explore the multifaceted capabilities of Jotform, a versatile form-building solution that transcends its fundamental purpose. With a repository of over 10,000 templates, including specialized options for therapy and counseling, Jotform emerges as a robust workflow management tool. Dive into the world of seamless form creation, data access, and approval flows that cater to the unique needs of therapy practices. Join us as we explore how Jotform's commitment to automating tasks, customizable templates, and efficient workflows aligns with the mission of simplifying and enhancing therapy practices.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Jotform
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Google Workspace for Therapists (formerly G-Suite for Therapists)
Sarah Almendariz Rivera is a San Antonio, Texas native, born and raised. She graduated with a Master of Arts in Counseling from the University of Texas at San Antonio in 2009. She spent the next eight years working in non-profits and larger community mental health agencies. She launched into a solo private practice in 2017 and did tons of things wrong! After getting a little wind under her sails, she transitioned into a self-pay group private practice, La Luz Counseling, in 2020 to help keep up with the mental health needs during COVID-19.
In this episode, Sarah speaks about the defining traits that set mental health professionals apart, emphasizing their innate love for learning and unyielding independence. Join us as we explore the collective enthusiasm within the profession for continuous education, from reading and documentaries to podcasts. Sarah dives into her personal journey of reflection, mistakes, and second chances in business ownership, offering valuable insights for aspiring entrepreneurs. She also shares her experiences in seeking guidance, community support's transformative power, and mentorship's vital role in navigating the complexities of business ownership.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Jotform
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Sarah's Website
- Sarah on LinkedIn
Episode 306 brings to light the transformative influence of certified peer support services in mental health and recovery. Kurt Schmidt, a visionary in this field, unravels the profound impact of peer support and emphasizes its distinction from traditional sponsorship models. Certified peer support specialists, equipped with personal experiences and specialized training, play a pivotal role in breaking down barriers and establishing connections beyond conventional support structures.
This episode sets the stage for exploring the nuanced path of peer support specialization, guided by Kurt's insights. From the rigorous standards upheld by his organization to the essence of becoming a peer support specialist, we dive into the intricacies of a career that demands profound self-reflection and a genuine commitment to the well-being of others. Kurt's emphasis on collaborative growth, soul-searching, and the revolutionary approach of The Peer Network underscores the evolving landscape of mental health services through peer support.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the show notes
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Jotform
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Kurt's Website
- Email Kurt: KurtSchmidt@thepeernetwork.com
- The Peer Network on Instagram
- The Peer Network on Facebook
- The Peer Network on LinkedIn
Julia Nepini's journey from a private practitioner to a collaborative leader is a testament to the transformative potential of self-discovery and growth within the mental health field. In the quest to build a thriving practice, Julia emphasizes the critical distinction between treating the profession solely as a job and cultivating an environment beyond clinical work. Her approach reflects a commitment to nurturing a values-driven team that prioritizes support, collaboration, and individualized care.
Julia's insights into the challenges of the mental health profession, her dedication to financial stability, and her innovative use of the Enneagram as a tool for team cohesion all contribute to her unique approach to creating a professional environment that values personal growth and work-life balance. In this episode, we delve into the multifaceted facets of Julia's journey, offering valuable insights and lessons for therapists, business owners, and anyone seeking to create a fulfilling and supportive work environment.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Learn More About This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Jotform
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Compassionate Consulting Company
- Compassionate Climb Podcast
- Compassionate Consulting Company on Instagram
- Compassionate Consulting Company on Facebook
- Compassionate Counseling Company
- CompassionateCounselingCompany on Instagram
In today's digital age, online marketing has evolved into an indispensable component of establishing a prosperous private therapy practice. With the rapid advancement of technology and the increasing ubiquity of the internet, therapists now possess the means to reach a broader and more diverse client base. Join us in this episode as Omar Ruiz, a marriage and family therapist and a seasoned business coach for therapists, shares his wealth of insights on harnessing the power of online marketing strategies to attract clients in your local area.
We'll delve into various key elements of online marketing, with a primary focus on Google Business Profiles, SEO strategies, and the art of optimizing your digital footprint. We'll explore the ins and outs of leveraging Google Business Profile as a valuable marketing tool. Omar's expertise in this area will guide us through the steps to ensure your Google Business Profile is a beacon for local clients in need of your therapeutic services.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- More About This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Google Workspace for Therapists (formerly G-Suite for Therapists)
- Omar’s Website
- Omar on Instagram
- Omar on YouTube
In this episode, Andrea Liebross takes center stage to illuminate the transformative power of having a clear vision in driving action and achieving unprecedented success. As a seasoned business consultant, Andrea acknowledges the common struggle among business owners, including therapists and coaches, in defining their vision and purpose. She unfolds her unique process, guiding clients through the creation of a visionary business plan, encouraging them to wield a metaphorical magic wand to envision their business a decade into the future. This imaginative exercise, though challenging, is pivotal in breaking free from constraints and allowing dreams to flourish.
Andrea Liebross's insights resonate as a comprehensive guide for private practice owners seeking not just success but extraordinary success. Through the lenses of clear vision, strategic goal-setting, outsourcing, task selection, and financial acumen, Andrea provides a holistic blueprint for businesses to thrive and achieve remarkable results. The journey unfolds as a dynamic interplay of imagination, strategic planning, and emotional intelligence, guided by Andrea's expertise and visionary approach.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Full Focus Planner
- Focus Group
- The PsychCraft Network
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Be A Podcast Guest
- Mental Health Wear
- Website
- Time To Level Up Podcast
- She Thinks Big
- Andrea on Facebook
- Andrea on Instagram
- Andrea on YouTube
In this insightful episode of "The Practice of Therapy," Gordon engages in a thought-provoking conversation with Jeff Russell about the transformative concept of "Think 'Who, Not You'" and its profound implications for optimal productivity. Russell, a seasoned professional, advocates for a mindset shift that prioritizes delegation over the assumption that one can manage every aspect of a business independently. The art of delegation in therapeutic private practices means letting go of certain responsibilities for overall business growth. The episode also addresses the misconception of affordability when it comes to hiring help and introduces a valuable exercise for professionals to determine the actual worth of their time. Tune in for a comprehensive guide for therapists seeking to optimize their practices by embracing a strategic and intentional approach to delegation.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- Kindness and Compassion
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Fire Yourself First
- Fire Yourself First on Facebook
- Jeff on Twitter
- Fire Yourself First on Instagram
- Jeff on LinkedIn
- IAPAM
In this episode, we're diving deep into the essence of personal and professional growth with Christy Pennison. Imagine breaking free from limiting beliefs and unlocking a world of new opportunities that were once thought impossible. Our exploration begins with the profound impact of mentors who guide, support, and inspire us to challenge conventional wisdom and expand our perspectives. Join us as we navigate growth through diverse experiences and fearless exploration, discovering fresh insights and uncovering hidden talents.
But that's not all – we'll delve into the crucial role of reflection in personal and professional development, where we share insights on creating space for clarity, goal setting, and envisioning future possibilities. Then, we'll explore the power of like-minded connections, revealing the potential of surrounding oneself with individuals who encourage growth and challenge limited mindsets. And don't miss our exploration of the importance of embracing slowness for self-care and professional impact. Christy reminds us to step back, reflect, and prioritize self-care in today's fast-paced world, offering a compelling perspective on preventing burnout.
Get ready to embark on a journey of growth, reflection, and self-discovery that promises to reshape your personal and professional landscape. Tune in and embrace the possibilities!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Focus Group
- Launch Club
- Website
- Christy on Facebook
- Christy on Instagram
- Christy on LinkedIn
- Inspiring Possible Podcast
- The Practice Collab
In episode 300 of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, we delve into a transformative approach to the hiring process: recruiting workshops. Traditional interviews, as it turns out, have proven to be less effective than anticipated, with a mere 10% of candidates hired through this method turning out to be great performers within organizations. This often results in mishires and mismatches that hinder a company's growth.
Entrepreneur Mike Michalowicz, known for his groundbreaking book "Profit First," is on a mission to change the hiring game. Drawing inspiration from his focus on prioritizing profit, Michalowicz advocates for the adoption of recruiting workshops as the future of effective hiring. These workshops, which have seen success in the sports industry, offer a hands-on approach to evaluating candidates. They allow employers to witness potential hires in action, assessing their skills, problem-solving abilities, and collaborative aptitude. By immersing candidates in real-world scenarios and tasks, employers can gain a deeper insight into their capabilities and suitability for the organization.
In this episode, we explore how recruiting workshops can revolutionize talent acquisition, elevate organizational success, and foster a paradigm shift in hiring, emphasizing unproven abilities and task-centric talent matching. Join us for an eye-opening discussion on the future of effective hiring practices.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
- Mike’s Website
- Mike on Instagram
- Mike on Facebook
- Profit First
Teva Johnstone is a Licensed Clinical Social Worker in California who specializes in supporting the parents of autistic, spirited and highly sensitive kids. She creates online courses for parents interested in homeschooling for children's mental health and social development.
In this episode, Teva Johnstone sheds light on the children's mental health crisis, which has been brought to the forefront by the COVID-19 pandemic. Therapists like Teva Johnstone have had to adapt and pivot their practices to address the challenges faced by children and parents. The conversation highlights the need for alternative approaches, such as online education and coaching with parents, to create long-lasting change. The pandemic has increased awareness and conversations about children's mental health, but it is crucial to recognize that the crisis existed before the pandemic and requires ongoing attention and support. Tune in as we chat about how to unlock creativity in the classroom, homeschooling, and supporting children with autism.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Teva’s Website
- Teva on Instagram
- Teva on LinkedIn
- Instagram Mental Health Templates
- Mental Health Wear
Meet Ryan Derousseau, the financial advisor with a knack for helping therapists navigate the wild terrain of money. He's here to reveal that your therapy practice isn't just a job; it's a golden goose that can lay those financial security eggs! From therapists struggling to see their practice as anything more than a room with a comfy chair to the importance of professional wills and contingency plans, we've got you covered. And if you're wondering how to pass the therapy torch gracefully, Ryan's got the scoop on finding a partner or successor. We'll also tackle the thrilling world of retirement savings and why it's the real MVP for your financial future. Get ready to learn how to secure your therapeutic legacy!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- Kindness and Compassion
- Launch Club (use code: PLCFALL2023)
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Ryan's Website
- United Financial Planning Group
- You can find Ryan on LinkedIn
- Ryan on Twitter
- Ryan on YouTube
LaDonna Carey is a Senior Psychological Examiner in Tennessee. LaDonna created a group for women who are healing from betrayal trauma called Gathering Our Hearts, has continuing education programs for therapists related to betrayal trauma, and is hosting a retreat for therapists in Hilton SC this October called Navigating the Storm: A Healers Role in Betrayal Trauma Recovery.
Join us in a deep dive with LaDonna Carey as we explore the profound impact of betrayal trauma in therapy sessions. Discover how betrayal can shatter trust, disrupt attachment, and leave individuals grappling with profound loss and confusion. Gain insights into the urgent need for therapists to equip themselves with the knowledge and skills to address this often-overlooked form of trauma. Uncover the complexities of healing from betrayal trauma, from navigating the aftermath to rebuilding trust, and the crucial role of empathy, understanding attachment styles, and open dialogue in the process. Don't miss this eye-opening journey into the world of betrayal trauma and its significance in the therapy room.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- Launch Club (use code: PLCFALL2023)
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- LaDonna's Website
- Betrayal Recovery Center
- Email LaDonna: Contact@LaDonnaCarey.com
- Book Club
- LaDonna on Facebook
- Join LaDonna at the oceanside retreat in Hilton Head, SC, where you can 'Earn CEUs by the Sea!'
Diana S. Rice is the founder and owner of Through the Valley Therapy, a private practice in South Florida where she offers compassionate and personalized mental health services.
In this episode, we delve into the critical topic of teen mental health after tragedy. Mental Health After Tragedy & Other Private Practice Challenges features Diana S. Rice, a seasoned therapist with firsthand experience working with adolescents who have faced traumatic events. Her insights shed light on the vital role of support and mental health resources for young individuals navigating challenging circumstances. Shifting gears, we also dive into the unique challenges private practice owners face, including the absence of business education in therapy training programs. Diana and Gordon candidly discuss the delicate balance required to navigate a successful private practice. They address the interplay between personal beliefs, such as the Christian faith, and the demands of running a thriving therapeutic business.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- Launch Club (use code: PLCFALL2023)
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Diana’s Website
- Diana on LinkedIn
- Diana on Instagram
Ernesto created FYLMIT.com to help mental health professionals develop a web-based presence through video and social media marketing. Recently, Ernesto has dedicated much of his professional career to helping mental health therapists learn how to market their practice through providing workshops and seminars.
With a delicate balance between personal crises and professional responsibilities, Gordon Brewer and Ernesto Segismundo unravel the intricate web of challenges entrepreneurs face. The lack of control emerges as a central theme as the duo reflects on the unsettling reality of relinquishing authority during difficult times. In a world where entrepreneurs thrive on decision-making and action, this loss of control can trigger anxiety and stress, further complicating the journey through adversity. Tune in as they delve into the profound impact of tough times on mental health.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The PsychCraft Network
- Launch Club (use code: PLCFALL2023)
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Ernesto on LinkedIn
- FYLMIT
- TPOT 207
- CAV Academy
- Ernesto on YouTube
- Not Your Typical Psychotherapist Podcast
- Ernesto on Facebook
- Ernesto on Instagram
As a successful group therapy practice owner herself, Jessica Tappana understands the importance of marketing your practice and getting your name out to the right potential clients. A well-ranking website has been Jessica’s number one marketing tool for her Columbia, MO counseling practice.
In the podcast episode, Jessica Tappana delves into the application of artificial intelligence (AI) and ChatGPT in private practice. She highlights the potential use of ChatGPT in creating templates for clinical notes and streamlining the session writing process. Additionally, Jessica discusses how ChatGPT can generate alternative phrasing ideas for clients. However, she emphasizes the importance of remaining vigilant against biased information and conducting thorough scans of the output. Also, Jessica acknowledges that not all clients may be suitable for therapy involving ChatGPT, as discernment skills are crucial. Tune in as we touch on the utilization of AI in blog writing and other areas within the field.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Simplified SEO Consulting
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Focus Group
- The PsychCraft Network
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Launch Club (use code: PLCFALL2023)
Carolyn Solo, LCSW, is an EMDR consultant and business coach. She runs a small group practice in the Philadelphia suburbs and also offers business coaching and consultation to EMDR therapists who are interested in beginning to offer EMDR intensives in their practices. Carolyn hosts a podcast, the Future Template Parent podcast, which is all about EMDR intensives and how offering intensives can transform your practice.
This episode is about discovering the power of intensive therapy sessions for your private practice. EMDR therapy intensives have become increasingly popular as an efficient and effective approach to treating trauma. These intensives offer longer and more immersive therapy sessions, typically spanning several consecutive days. Carolyn Solo, LCSW, is an EMDR consultant and business coach. In this episode, she explains how therapists benefit from the financial stability provided by intensives. Plus, we talk about how clients can get more profound results from these sessions. Tune in as we dig deep into the rising popularity of EMDR therapy intensives, highlighting the power of focused and time-efficient trauma treatment.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Launch Club (use code: PLCFALL2023)
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Carolyn’s Website
- Carolyn on Instagram
- Future Template Parent Podcast
Lauren Hawkins has a Bachelor’s degree in Psychology from the University of Kentucky and a Masters's degree in Mental Health Counseling from the University of Cincinnati. Her experience includes providing counseling services to individuals diagnosed with severe persistent mental illness, as well as foster youth, adults, families, and people in relationships.
Climate change and mental health are two interconnected issues that are increasingly gaining attention in today's society. As the effects of climate change become more evident and severe, it is essential to understand its impact on our mental well-being. In this episode, Gordon and Lauren Hawkins explore the relationship between climate change and mental health, focusing on the counseling professional's role in addressing this issue. We dive deep into climate change's profound impact on mental health and the importance of learning about eco-anxiety.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the Full Blog About this Episode
- Launch Club (use code: PLCFALL2023)
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Lauren on PsychologyToday
- Lauren on LinkedIn
Avivit Fisher is the principal of REdD Strategy, a marketing and business consultancy for therapists in private practice. Avivit teaches therapists business skills they didn’t learn in grad school. She provides guidance in strategy, process planning, business tools, and marketing so that private practitioners can create a sustainable business advantage.
In this podcast, Avivit Fisher discusses the importance of marketing for private pay practices. She helps practitioners start, build, and grow their practices, focusing on creating a strong online presence and using SEO and email marketing. Fisher also talks about the challenges of transitioning from insurance-based to private pay practices, including the need to market services and establish fees. She addresses therapists' concerns about losing clients when no longer accepting insurance and suggests addressing objections by highlighting the benefits of being an out-of-network client. Tune in as we chat about the importance of building solid relationships, leveraging your network, and creating engaging content.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Therapy Business Brief
- Wise Practice Summit
- The PsychCraft Network
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Avivt on TPOT 212
- Avivit on TPOT 241
- Avivit’s Website
- Avivit on Instagram
- Avivit on Facebook
- Connect with Avivit on LinkedIn
Patrick Casale is one of the most authentic voices in the mental health and entrepreneur space. He is a Licensed Mental Health and Addictions Therapist, Speaker, Retreat Planner, Podcast Host, and Business Strategist. He has been featured on Spruce Health, Brighter Vision, Not Your Typical Psychotherapy Conference, Modern Therapy Conference, Private Practice Startup, Abundance Practice Building, Selling The Couch Community, and more.
This episode is a deep dive into the realities of entrepreneurship and creativity. Patrick Casale joins the show to have honest and open conversations about fear, failure, imposter syndrome, and self-doubt. It's a reminder that we're not alone in our journey. Plus, Patrick speaks about expanding your knowledge on neurodivergent affirmative practices in mental health. Lastly, we explore the challenges and stigma surrounding autism. Join the conversation as we advocate for a more inclusive and understanding society.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Patrick’s Website
- Patrick on Instagram
- Patrick on Facebook
- Patrick on YouTube
- Patrick on LinkedIn
David Neagle is the founder of the multi-million dollar global coaching company, Life Is Now. Inc, helping purpose-driven entrepreneurs and small business owners grow and scale their businesses to 7 and 8 Figures using principles and training based in neuro-science and Universal Law.
David Neagle shares his journey from a challenging upbringing to success in business. Neagle discusses the importance of mindset and how it can help small business owners achieve success faster than they thought possible. He opens up about his struggles and steps to break the cycle of limited opportunities. This episode is for you if you're looking for inspiration and practical strategies to grow your business. Tune in to learn how to overcome obstacles, achieve your goals, and break free from your limiting beliefs around money and success.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Focus Group
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Life is Now
- Life is Now on Instagram
- David on Facebook
- Life is Now on YouTube
- Life is Now on LinkedIn
- The Successful Mind Podcast
Danielle’s main focus is working with couples around issues of trust, communication, forgiveness after infidelity, intimacy, sex, and decision-making (finances, children, etc.).
Danielle offers a multitude of different workshops and groups that will help both communities and clinicians build self-awareness, accountability, and help unlearn negative stigmas in a safe, encouraging, and supported space. Take a look at her upcoming workshops by visiting her events page.
Danielle shares her journey to becoming a therapist; she reflects on her initial decision to enter the field, driven by a desire to help and heal others due to her own experiences. Danielle's passion lies in couples' work and relationships, as she believes they shape our worldview. However, Danielle has shifted her focus towards a holistic approach to healing and wellness beyond traditional therapy. Currently, she conducts workshops, trainings, and community events to destigmatize therapy and promote overall wellness. She encourages the intentional application of therapy principles in everyday life and incorporates activities like crafting and movement therapy to foster mind-body connection and create safety and alignment.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the Full Show Notes Here
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Focus Group
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Danielle's Website
- Danielle on Facebook
- Danielle on Instagram
- Danielle on LinkedIn
- Listen to Danielle on this episode: TPOT 151
- Learn more about Danielle
Dr. Brandon Shurn is a mental health professional and counselor educator holding a Doctor of Philosophy in Counselor Education and Supervision and a Master of Science in Clinical Mental Health Counseling.
In this episode, Dr. Brandon Shurn discusses his journey to working with trauma from a clinical focus. He talks about how trauma work is complex and often misunderstood and how he aims to bring a holistic and empowering approach to help individuals navigate their traumas. He introduces the concept of "swimming in the ocean" of trauma rather than simply "white-knuckling" through it. Dr. Shurn also challenges the notion that trauma can only be coped with and emphasizes the importance of empowering individuals to navigate their traumas. Tune in as we chat about retraining the amygdala and leaning into anxiety.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Group
- Dr. Shurn on LinkedIn
- Dr. Shurn's Website
- Dr. Shurn on Facebook
- Dr. Shurn on Instagram
- Dr. Shurn on YouTube
Janet Bayramyan is a Licensed Clinical Social Worker (LCSW). Janet works from a trauma-focused and attachment-oriented perspective, supporting individuals and couples through their healing of past and current distressing events.
Janet Bayramyan joins the show to discuss how mentorship in private practice can be invaluable for therapists of all levels of experience. Plus, we dive into why finding a niche is vital in building a successful private practice. Janet also touches on several ways to attract clients, including tips on marketing your private practice to your target audience. Janet knows being a trauma therapist can be a challenging but rewarding career; that's why we discuss why passion cannot be overstated for therapists and how critical guidance will be on your journey to private practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Janet on Instagram
- Download Janet's Mindfulness Workbook for Anxiety
- Road to Wellness Therapy
- Janet on Facebook
- Janet on TikTok
Dr. Kevin B. Handley is on a mission to help people sleep better. Through his individual and group work with clients, public speaking, and CE training for healthcare professionals, Kevin hopes to teach people how to enjoy the benefits of healthy sleep.
This episode is about the importance of sleep for therapists and their clients. Dr. Handley explains the impact of sleep on our mental and physical health and offers practical tips for improving sleep hygiene. The discussion covers the impact of technology on sleep and recommendations for improving sleep habits. The episode also emphasizes the need for therapists to prioritize their sleep to provide the best care for their clients. Tune in as we chat about the critical need for sleep education to improve treatment outcomes and the overall well-being of our clients.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Money Matters In Private Practice [use code: JUNE2023]
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Use the coupon code GORDON for 20% off Kevin's Sleep CE workshops
- How to Help Your Client Sleep Better
- Kevin's Website
- Kevin on Twitter
- Kevin on Instagram
- Kevin on LinkedIn
- Kevin on Facebook
Whitney Owens is a licensed professional counselor, group practice owner, and faith-based private practice consultant.
This episode is about Whitney’s upcoming Wise Practice Summit conference. The summit starts October 5th, 2023, and has been approved by the NBCC for NBCC credit. Whitney is committed to supporting therapists in incorporating their faith into their practice. During the summit, Whitney looks forward to creating a space where therapists can feel safe and supported as they explore the intersection of faith and therapy. Tune in to hear all the details and why you will definitely want to meet us in Savannah for the Wise Practice Summit!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Money Matters In Private Practice [use code: JUNE2023]
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Kindness and Compassion
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Whitney's Website
- Whitney on Facebook
- Wise Practice Summit
In this episode, Ashley Gayle, host of the mental health podcast "Black Girls Have Anxiety Too," talks about mental health in the Black community and mainly how anxiety affects people of color and the stigmas surrounding it. She shares how "Black Girls Have Anxiety Too” was born from a conversation with a friend in 2020 and how they create a space for real Black people to share their experiences with mental health. Gayle also talks about her personal journey and upbringing in Las Vegas. Lastly, the conversation covers the stigmas surrounding mental health and the need for more education and awareness, particularly for communities of color.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Podcast Workshop
- Money Matters In Private Practice [use code: JUNE2023]
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Ashley's Podcast
- Ashley on Instagram
- Ashley on Twitter
- Ashley on TikTok
On this episode of "The Practice of Therapy" podcast, host Gordon talks to Caara Lovick about incorporating traditional indigenous medicines into mental health healing journeys. Caara Lovick serves as a healing facilitator and translator for a project called "Traditional Medicine" based out of Miami, FL. They discuss the benefits and considerations of traditional healing and how it complements Western medicine. Overall, the episode offers a unique perspective on the intersection of indigenous healthcare and Western medicine and how they can work together to provide more comprehensive, holistic mental health care.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Money Matters In Private Practice [use code: JUNE2023]
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Traditional Medicine Podcast with Caara Lovick
- Caara on Instagram @traditionalmedicinemiami
- Caara’s Website
In this Practice of Therapy Podcast episode, host Gordon Brewer welcomes Adrien Paczosa to talk about the intersection of nutrition and mental health. She explains her entrepreneurial journey, which includes successes and mistakes, and tells listeners that forming relationships with mentors and joining a mastermind group are essential growth methods. Together, they explore how therapists and dieticians can work together to help patients build sustainable lifestyles. They emphasize the importance of treating the whole person and provide insights into ways to optimize the patient experience with a team approach.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Free Webinars
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Use Nourish
- Email Adrien: Adrien@usenourish.com
- Use Nourish on Facebook
- Fearless Practitioners Podcast
- Adrien on LinkedIn
- Adrien on Twitter
- Adrien on YouTube
In this episode of the Practice of the Therapy podcast, host Gordon Brewer interviews Alyse Freda-Colon. She talks about her journey into becoming a therapist and adding a coaching business to her portfolio. Alyse shares how she manages her work-life balance while maintaining a successful private practice. The episode provides valuable insights and advice for aspiring therapists and coaches, including tips on managing a private practice and exploring coaching opportunities to find sustainable success.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Instagram: @coachingwithalyse
- Instagram: @afctherapy
- Facebook: Afctherapy
- Facebook: Coaching With Alyse
- Website: coachingwithalyse.com
- Website: afctherapy.com
- TikTok: @coachingwithalyse
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, host Gordon Brewer speaks with Jonathan Sabbagh, the Co-Founder, and CEO of Journey Clinical, about the revolutionary practice of using psychedelics in psychotherapy. Sabbagh shares his personal journey with post-traumatic stress disorder, anxiety, depression, and substance abuse and how he found relief through ayahuasca ceremonies. The conversation covers the history and research behind psychedelic therapy, the potential benefits and risks, and the future of integrating this practice into mainstream psychotherapy. Listen in to learn more about the transformative power of psychedelics in mental health treatment.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Private Practice Resources
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Jonathan Sabbagh on LinkedIn
- Journey Clinical
- Journey Clinical on Instagram
- Journey Clinical on Facebook
In this episode, Dr. Jamey Schrier, a physical therapist who has been in the business ownership world for over 25 years, joins the show. Jamey shares his experience working with hundreds of practice owners and what it takes to create true practice freedom. He also discusses his background and how he got started in business ownership, highlighting the importance of taking a leap of faith to pursue your passions. He also discusses the common challenges and misconceptions associated with private practice ownership and offers practical advice on how to avoid burnout and achieve success in the long run. This episode provides excellent resources for those interested in practice building and learning how to do a better job in business growth.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Dr. Schrier's Website
- Dr. Schrier on YouTube
- Dr. Schrier on Facebook
- Dr. Schrier on LinkedIn
- The Practice Freedom Method
- Why You Should Outsource in Private Practice
This Practice of Therapy Podcast episode features Maira Holzmann, a group psychotherapy practice owner from Denver, Colorado. Maira discusses her experience with somatic therapy and how she helps clients heal from early trauma and anxiety. She also gives the scoop on her coaching program for therapists looking to up-level their private practice. The episode concludes with a conversation about the growth of Maira's practice and her recent hiring of two new clinicians.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Somatic Therapy Partners
- Maira on Facebook
- Maira on Instagram
- Maira's Coaching Website
In this episode, host Gordon welcomes Maegan Megginson, a licensed therapist and business coach who founded Next-Level Therapist, a coaching program for therapists looking to move beyond private practice. Maegan shares her own journey as a therapist, from working in a group practice to starting her own private practice and ultimately launching her coaching program. She discusses the importance of therapists bringing their authentic selves into their businesses and creating profitable personal brands. Please tune in to learn more about Maegan's approach to coaching and her tips for therapists looking to take their practice to the next level.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Groups
- Maegan’s Website
- Maegan’s Instagram
- Personality Power Pack
- Community Writing Studio
- Next-Level Therapist
In this episode, host Gordon Brewer speaks with guest Jake Ernst, a therapist in private practice and clinical director of a group practice in Toronto, Canada. Ernst shares that he primarily works with young people and their families on skill-building for the modern world, helping individuals navigate stress in the current landscape, and unlocking potential in relationships through parent and family-based therapy. Tune in as Brewer and Ernst discuss the importance of staying current and adapting as a therapist in changing times.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the blog post
- Jake's Website
- Jake's Podcast
- Jake on Instagram
- Jake on Twitter
- Jake on Facebook
- Launch Club
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Join a Focus Group
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy, Gordon interviews Katie Read, a long-time therapist who has worked in private practice, taught grad school, directed community mental health programs, and created therapy training materials. The two discuss how mental health therapists are outgrowing their offices by repurposing their skills, creating amazing lives for themselves, and helping their clients. Katie shares her story and experiences in the field and how she found success by branching out and trying different roles. Gordon and Katie also discuss the importance of adapting to change in the mental health field and finding ways to keep growing and improving as a therapist.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Katie's Website
- Katie on Instagram
- Katie's YouTube Therapist Freedom Incubator: Therapreneurs Creating Freedom-Based Lives
- Wise Practice Summit
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Practice of Therapy Focus Groups
- Private Practice Resources
In this podcast, Donna Jacobs introduces her self-integration model, which explores how our internal filter, rather than external circumstances, stresses us the most. Donna explains that external circumstances do not necessarily cause stress, but rather it's how we process them. She then describes the unhealthy filters that can add to our distress. Tune in as we chat about emotional reactivity in therapy, indulgent beliefs, and the importance of sitting with negative emotions.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the Blog Post
- Donna's Website
- Donna on Twitter
- Donna on Facebook
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Focus Group
In this podcast episode, host Gordon introduces Pavel, who shares his story about a tragic car accident he and his wife were in seven years ago. Pavel's wife remained paralyzed neck down, while he was able to recover. Pavel talks about the trials and tribulations they have faced during these seven years. Despite the challenges, Pavel remains hopeful and has a positive outlook on life. Gordon and Pavel discuss his experiences and some of the significant life lessons Pavel has learned as a caregiver.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Pavel on Instagram
- Pavel's Website
- Pavel on YouTube
- Practice Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Start Consulting
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
This episode focuses on understanding the concept of how one's private practice can change over time. Gordon talks about his own experience, going from a solo practice to a group practice, and the mistakes he made along the way. He discusses the concept of lifestyle congruence and how having a larger practice requires more resources, time, and dedication. Gordon encourages other practitioners to consider the size of their practice and its potential impact on their lifestyle.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Show Notes
- Productive Practice Directory
- Julie Herres - Profit First for Therapists
- Podcasting Mini Course
- Start Consulting
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Podcasting for Mental Health Professionals
Teresa Williams is a therapist from Huntsville, Alabama, and has her own private practice where she does marriage and family counseling. In this episode, she talks about her passion for helping women who have gone through a divorce, sharing her journey as an example. She explains the distinct stages of divorce, from shock/confusion, to messy/complicated, and then the challenge of piecing things together when it is finalized. Teresa emphasized the significant losses associated with divorce and its importance for support and understanding.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Read the blog post!
- Confident and Courageous Woman
- Teresa Williams Counseling
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Podcasting for Mental Health Professionals
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today
- Free Mini Course: 4 Reasons To Start Your Podcast In 2023
In this special episode, Gordon Brewer shares the purpose of his podcast network, the Psychcraft Network. Lisa Mustard, Daniel Fava, Aaron Potratz, Melissa Tiessen, Karen Dyck, James Marland, and Whitney Owens join the show to discuss why they podcast. Hear from these podcasters about creating revenue, giving valuable insights, connecting with the world, and making an impact in all the right places through podcasting. If you want to make an impact in the world, consider podcasting and see how you can make a difference in the lives of others.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Check Out the Blog Post for This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Listen to All the Psychcraft Podcasts by Clicking Here!
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Join us for this live online course on April 21st, 2023: Podcasting for Mental Health Professionals.
Julie Herres, the founder, and CEO of GreenOak Accounting joins the show. It can be easy to forget to take care of yourself, but Julie explains why therapists must put their needs first. Every private practice deserves to be profitable; Julie dives into the concept of “Profit First,” which turns the traditional accounting equation upside down. Tune in as we chat about allocating your money into different accounts, how to run your business profitably, and why you need to limit spending to increase your financial freedom.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- GreenOak Accounting
- Julie's Podcast
- Julie's Book
- Instagram @therapyforyourmoneypodcast
- Instagram @julie.herres
- Money Matters In Private Practice - Premium Content
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Podcasting for Mental Health Professionals
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
In this special episode, James Marland interviews Gordon about a project they are working on around podcasting. First, Gordon reveals the inspiration behind his podcast, the Practice of Therapy. Plus, Gordon speaks about the challenges of podcasting and how you can navigate those obstacles. As Gordon and James discuss the benefits of joining a podcast network like PsychCraft, they also give the scoop on their step-by-step course: Podcasting for Mental Health Professionals.
Resources Mentioned in This Episode:
- Webinars & Trainings
- Podcasting for Mental Health Professionals
- Course Creation Studio
- Scaling Therapy Practice With James Marland
- Kingsport Counseling
- Green Oak Accounting
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Kindness and Compassion
In this episode, Executive Director and Owner of the Mental Health Marketing Conference, Steve Turney, joins the show. Steve chats about how different generations are overcoming the stigma of mental health therapy, especially after the Covid-19 pandemic. Also, Steve explains what we can expect at the Mental Health Marketing Conference this year, including virtual reality therapy! Tune in as we talk about technology, trends in mental health, and the power of advocacy and lived experiences in mental health marketing.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Mental Health Marketing on Facebook
- Mental Health Marketing Conference on LinkedIn
- Steve's Email: steve@mhmarketing.org
- Mental Health Marketing Conference
- How To Increase Revenue For Your Practice With Podcasting
- Try Mental Health Match For FREE! Use Code “PRACTICE”
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Are you looking for a cohesive strategy to attract well-aligned clients consistently? Well, you’re in luck! Bethany Raab joins the show to discuss what does and doesn’t work in mental health marketing. She touches on the strategies you can use to market your therapy services. Plus, Bethany reveals simple marketing techniques through referral and network partnerships, and we chat about speaking directly to your ideal client. Tune in as Bethany gives the scoop on her interactive live class that will give you the tools to grow your private practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- GWS for Therapists Course Contributor Application
- Try Mental Health Match For FREE! Use Code “PRACTICE”
- Meaningful Buzz: Four Weeks to Grow Your Therapy Practice
- Bethany on LinkedIn
- Bethany's Website
- Bethany on Instagram
- Bethany on Twitter
- Bethany on Facebook
In this episode, Ryan Schwartz, the founder of Mental Health Match, joins the show. First, we discuss the client-therapist relationship and how it starts before your therapy sessions. He explains why therapists must ensure their online profiles are putting their best foot forward. Ryan dives into the problems with insurance provider directories and how they are often misleading. Tune in as we chat all about Mental Health Match and how it is designed to facilitate a feeling of fit before a new client even contacts you.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- GWS for Therapists Course Contributor Application
- Try Mental Health Match For FREE! Use Code “PRACTICE”
- Focus Group For Small Group Practice Owners
- Email Ryan: info@mentalhealthmatch.com
- Ryan on LinkedIn
- Mental Health Match on Instagram
- Mental Health Match on Facebook
Raffi Bilek, the creator of WorkspaceEHR.com, joins the show. You shouldn’t have to pay a fortune for EHR features you never use; that’s where Google Workspace can come into play. Raffi is passionate about teaching people how to use Google Workspace for their private practice. He explains how and why he uses Google Workspace as his EHR system. Plus, Raffi gives all sorts of tips and tricks around using Google Workspace, how to set it up for your private practice, and other add-ons that could be useful in conjunction with Google Workspace.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Mental Health Match For FREE! Use Code “PRACTICE”
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Workspace EHR
- Raffi's Email: info@workspaceEHR.com
- Baltimore Therapy Center
- GWS for Therapists Course Contributor Application
- Google Workspace for Therapists (formerly G-Suite for Therapists)
In this episode, Steve Bisson, host of Finding Your Way Through Therapy, joins the show. First, Steve speaks about his niches and how he found himself working with people who have substance use issues, people with trauma, and first responders. Then, Steve dives into his work as an emotional management coach. We touch on the differences between mental health therapy and coaching. Tune in as we chat about why you need both a therapist and a coach; plus, Steve speaks about the inspiration behind his show Finding Your Way Through Therapy.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Try Mental Health Match For FREE! Use Code “PRACTICE”
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- GWS for Therapists Course Contributor Application
- Podcast: Finding Your Way Through Therapy
- Steve’s Website
- Book: Finding Your Way Through Therapy: A Navigation Tool for Therapists & Clients
- Steve on Instagram
In this episode, graduate student Samantha Cimo joins the show. First, Samantha speaks about the importance of destigmatizing mental health counseling, especially for teenagers. The COVID pandemic allowed people to become more open to mental health counseling and social media platforms like TikTok gave teenagers an outlet for discussing their mental health concerns. Later, Samantha explains why every therapist needs a therapist of their own. Tune in as we discuss the inspiration behind Samantha's show: "Good. You?" Therapy Podcast.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- "Good. You?" Therapy Podcast
- Follow Samantha on Instagram
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Be A Podcast Guest
This episode is about goal-setting and how you can achieve your resolutions for 2023. First, consider the why behind your goals and nail down the motivation for your 2023 plans. If you are new to goal-setting, using the SMART Goals Worksheet is an easy way to write goals. Remember, you want your goals to be specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time-specific. Later, Gordon speaks about how to stay organized when it comes to goal-setting; he loves using the Full Focus Planner. Tune in as he chats about working backward toward goal-setting and starting with the small steps to achieve big things!
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- SMART Goals Worksheet!
- Full Focus Planner
- GWS for Therapists Course Contributor Application
In this episode, Gordon does something he usually does with his guests. He asks the questions, “What is your story? And how did you land where you have landed? Gordon shares his own private practice story and how he got started with the Practice of Therapy. And with this being the last episode of 2022, Gordon reflects back on the year and some of the changes and new things happening in his practice and with the Practice of Therapy. He talks about starting the PsychCraft Network and the Practice Launch Club. He highlights the importance of community and his mission to help people connect and find support. Read more here...
Resources mentioned:
Practice of Therapy Website
Join the Practice Launch Club! (Use the promo code PLC22 till the end of 2022 and save)
Practice of Theapy Community
Find out more about Therapy Notes (use the promo code "Gordon" and get 2 months free)
Follow us on Instagram @TPOTPodcast
Follow us on Facebook
In this episode Gordon talks with Dr. Amy Fortney Parks about the new supervision directory she started, clinicalsupervisiondirectory.com some of her motivation around starting this new directory. Amy and Gordon delve into how supervision can help you grow your practice plus help in "paying it forward" in our professions as counselors, therapists and social workers. Amy and Gordon talk about some of the struggles of licensure portability and how we can be better advocates of our professions as counselors and therapists. They also discuss how providing internships in your practice can solve the problem of therapist shortages and give new graduates and opportunity to grow and build their careers. Supervision not only help new counselors and therapists reach their goal of licensure, but it also helps build our professions and give clinicians multiple ways to grow their careers. Read more...
Resources Mentioned:
Dr. Amy's Resources The Clinical Supervision Directory The Wise Family Resources Join The Practice Launch Club Today! (Use promo code PLC22 until 12/31/22 to get membership for just $59 a month) TherapyNotes.com (Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.) Find Other Great Podcasts on the PsychCraft Network Today! Be A Podcast Guest Practice of Therapy Community The Course: Google Workspace for Therapists Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Instagram, Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Dr. Reda is a global trauma expert, the author of several books, and a highly sought-after dynamic public speaker.
In this episode, psychiatrist Dr. Omar Reda shares insight from his book, The Wounded Healer. By framing work and self-care with a compassionate mindset, The Wounded Healer aims to educate mental health professionals on measures to prevent burnout, damage to family relationships, and inner turmoil they may experience due to their work. Dr. Reda hopes to change how therapists approach their well-being by bringing awareness to how they internalize their clients' trauma.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Dr. Reda's Email: DrOmarAReda@gmail.com
- Dr. Reda's Website
- Dr. Reda on LinkedIn
- Untangled: A Go-To Guide for Caregivers of Traumatized Children, Families, and Communities
- The Wounded Healer: The Pain and Joy of Caregiving
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
Dr. Karen Dyck & Dr. Melissa Tiessen are two mid-career(ish!) psychologists working in private practice. They started Intentional Therapist out of recognizing that self-care is so incredibly important for the work we do as mental health clinicians, yet we get little to no training in this area.
In this episode, Melissa Teissen and Karen Dyck discuss female therapists' unique challenges in their personal and professional environments. Pursuing a balance between your individual needs and the well-being of your clientele is the most significant way to ensure your ability to provide the best level of care possible. Although we may prioritize helping others, we must create space for personal health to be more effective. Regardless of gender, all therapists should approach their practice intentionally and maintain an awareness of their individual needs.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Intentional Therapist
- Thrivival 101: A Fresh Take on Self-Care for Female Mental Health Clinicians
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
Chris McDonald is a Licensed Professional Counselor and holistic provider with a group online practice, “Path to Hope Counseling,” in North Carolina.
In this episode, Chris McDonald shares her holistic approach to telehealth sessions. Her methods integrate yoga, meditation, and spirituality to create more beneficial digital therapy spaces for clients. Although it may seem daunting to transform a traditional office into a holistic virtual practice, McDonald's experience reveals invaluable advice for the unique demands of telehealth and new approaches to client wellness. Tune in this week to hear us discuss investing in quality equipment, staying connected with your networks, and maintaining boundaries to protect your energy.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- The Holistic Counseling Podcast
- Chris on Instagram
- Self-Care for the Counselor: A Holistic Guide for Helping Professionals
- Holistic Counseling Webinar Series
- The Holistic Counseling & Self-care Group
- Path To Hope Counseling
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
Clifton Mitchell, Ph.D., is an international clinical trainer and keynote speaker with love for teaching and over 30 years of training experience.
Engaging empathetically with clients is a big part of therapy, but it is essential to incorporate targeted strategies to achieve maximum improvement. In this episode, retired professor Clifton Mitchell continues his discussion on maximizing the benefits of therapy sessions by targeting the subconscious and using specific language. Tune in this week to learn how Mitchell’s methods can reprogram bad habits, dissatisfaction in life, or general frustration by using neurology to intentionally target triggers and reprogram the mind.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Clifton's Website
- Priming: Programming the Mind for Habit Change and Success
- Effective Techniques for Dealing with Highly Resistant Clients
- Clifton Mitchell's Course
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Launch Club
- Be A Podcast Guest
- The Practice of Therapy Community
Clifton Mitchell, Ph.D., is an international clinical trainer and keynote speaker with love for teaching and over 30 years of training experience.
In this episode, retired professor Clifton Mitchell explains how he uses Dominant Thought Theory to incorporate the practice of priming into his sessions with clients. Mitchell aims to reprogram his clients' minds by investigating the subconscious origins behind the thoughts preceding our actions. He carefully identifies triggers and strategically replaces them with new, more positive associations to help individuals exhibiting undesirable behaviors or bad habits.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Clifton's Website
- Priming: Programming the Mind for Habit Change and Success
- Effective Techniques for Dealing with Highly Resistant Clients
- Clifton Mitchell's Course
- Launch Club
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
Carrie Bock, LPC-MHSP of By The Well Counseling, is a Licensed Professional Counselor who specializes in helping clients with trauma, anxiety, and OCD get to a deeper level of healing through EMDR via online counseling across Tennessee and in-person intensive therapy sessions.
In this episode, Carrie Bock shares her experience with telehealth and the structures she has implemented to successfully drive traffic to her website, prioritize niche clients, and minimize scheduling stress. Please tune in to the podcast for a more detailed breakdown of her strategies to produce stellar results for herself and her clients.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- By The Well Counseling
- Hope For Anxiety and OCD Podcast
- Hope For Anxiety and OCD on Instagram
- Hope For Anxiety and OCD on Facebook
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Free Webinars
- Kindness and Compassion
- Launch Club
- Be A Podcast Guest
- The Practice of Therapy Community
Lisa Mustard is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist in South Carolina.
In this episode, Lisa Mustard shares the story of how she started her podcast and the importance of connecting with an audience through different channels. Tune in to hear her discuss educator certification, burnout, networking, and staying grounded as she expands the reach of her podcast.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Free Webinars
- Kindness and Compassion
- Launch Club
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Join The PsychCraft Network Today!
- Lisa on LinkedIn
- The Therapy Show
- Lisa on Instagram
- Lisa on Facebook
Kym Tolson is an LCSW and CSAC licensed in the state of Virginia. She has an online insurance-based therapy practice.
Virtual therapy offers many growth options for therapists interested in expanding their businesses while simultaneously enhancing their lifestyles. In this episode, Kym Tolson discusses the benefits of private practice as a licensed therapist, managing multiple income streams, and the importance of work-life balance. Tune in to this week's episode to learn how to navigate panels, entrepreneurship, and work-life balance.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Insurance Billing Private Practice Course
- Private Practice Insurance Billing
- The Traveling Therapist
- Insurance Billing for Telehealth Practitioners
- Kym on Facebook
- PsychCraft Network of Podcasts
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Launch Club
James Marland is the founder of Course Creation Studio. He has a master’s degree in Ministry from Lancaster Bible College and a Master's of Business Administration from Shippensburg University.
In this episode, James Marland joins the show to speak about diversifying your private practice income through course creation. An online course is a great way to build your income; plus, you can relaunch it throughout the year and automate your income stream even more. James talks about using online courses to charge clients for one-on-one sessions; just another way to diversify your private practice income! Tune in as we chat about how to create a course, the importance of marketing your courses, and navigating imposter syndrome.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- How to Validate Your Profitable Course Topic in Four Steps
- Course Creation Studio
- 30 Minute Meeting With James
- The Therapy Show with Lisa Mustard
- Free Webinars
- Launch Club
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Money Matters In Private Practice
- Google Workspace for Therapists
Brandy Mabra is the CEO of Savvy Clover Coaching & Consulting and a CEO Coach for Private Practice Owners.
Brandy went from bankrupt single mom of a toddler to the breadwinner and CEO of her own company. She knows what it takes to build a 7-figure company and beyond – and helps her clients to stand in their own CEO roles with confidence. She is the CEO of Savvy Clover Coaching & Consulting and is a Business and Leadership Coach with over 15 years of business management and leadership experience. She runs a successful online coaching business empowering her clients to own their role as a bold, confident, and savvy CEO.
In this episode, Brandy Mabra speaks about how to think like a CEO in private practice. We dive into the importance of leadership roles as your practice grows. Learning to offload and outsource some of your essential activities will be critical for avoiding burnout and increasing profits. As the private practice owner, you need to own your role as CEO and be strategic regarding hiring. Tune in as we chat about hiring the best-fit employees, W-2 workers vs. 1099, and the importance of systems and processes for new employees.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Free Webinars
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Launch Club
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Brandy's Website
- Brandy on Facebook
- Brandy on Instagram
- Brandy's LinkedIn
Dr. Jenny Hughes received her Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology from the University of California, Santa Barbara, and completed her predoctoral internship and postdoctoral fellowship at the Louisiana State University Health Science Center.
In this episode, Dr. Jenny Hughes joins the show to discuss vicarious trauma. She defines vicarious trauma and reveals the signs and symptoms that may mean you are suffering from vicarious trauma as a clinician. Then, Dr. Hughes explains what next steps you can take to cope with vicarious trauma. Plus, we dive into preparing for challenging sessions with clients to avoid vicarious trauma and how to make empowered decisions about combating this type of trauma. Download the FREE Vicarious Trauma Tracker HERE.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Download the FREE Vicarious Trauma Tracker
- Brave Providers
- Dr. Jenny's Website
- Dr. Jenny's Instagram
- Brave Providers on Instagram
- Dr. Jenny's Facebook
- Brave Providers on TikTok
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Community
Rosemary Scheppske is a Licensed Mental Health Counselor accepting new clients in Davie, Florida. She enjoys working with couples and individuals to offer hope while helping them achieve their goals.
In this episode, Rosemary Scheppske explains why she decided to join a group practice instead of diving into the world of private practice. Then, Rosemary digs deep into her passion for couples counseling and why she's such a big fan of the Gottman Method. Plus, we discuss using the Enneagram and the Gottman Method for couples counseling. Tune in as we chat about the importance of community, faith-based counseling as a niche, and how our relationships can impact our physical health.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Free Webinars
- Launch Club
- Be A Podcast Guest
- The Practice of Therapy Community
- Rosemary on Instagram
- Caring Therapists
- Whitney Owens
Amanda Landry is a Licensed Mental Health Counselor, Certified Addictions Professional, National Certified Counselor, and private practice consultant.
In this episode, Amanda Landry opens the show by speaking about the importance of community in her life and group practice work. If you're looking for a community in private practice, joining a group practice could be right for you. Amanda explains why group practice work can be fulfilling for the private practice owner looking for autonomy without the headache of business administration work. Tune in as we chat about ensuring your private practice work aligns with your values, beliefs, and priorities.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Practice of Therapy Community
- Free Webinars
- Launch Club
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Amanda's Facebook
- Caring Therapists of Broward
- Guided Journal for Women with Anxiety: Prompts and Practices to Release Worry, Manage Stress and Embrace Calm
- My Private Practice Collective Facebook Group
- My Private Practice Collective
- TPOT 62
Lily Dawson is a Provisionally Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist and a 200-Hour Registered Yoga Teacher.
In this episode, Lily Dawson joins the show to talk about making the right business choices to attract clients to your private practice. One of private practice owners' biggest mistakes is wanting to get extra training done to attract more clients to their practice. Instead of training, private practice owners must invest in their marketing and branding. Lily speaks about the importance of your niche and why you need to know precisely how you stand out from other therapists. Tune in as we chat about improving your private practice website and putting yourself on social media.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Lily on Instagram
- Lily’s Website
- TherapyCorps
- TherapyCorps on Instagram
- Therapy Corps on Facebook
- The Practice of Therapy Launch Club
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Free Webinars
Vanessa Lech is the founder of "Diverse Mediation Solutions LLC" (DivorcingAdults.com).
In this episode, Vanessa Lech joins the show to discuss her transition from working as a mental health clinician to family mediation. If you're unfamiliar, family mediations involve a neutral third party to help to resolve conflict and facilitate communication. As a licensed clinician, it can be challenging to wrap your mind around doing other types of work; Vanessa reveals how she overcame limiting beliefs around her new career aspirations. Tune in as we talk about making a living with family mediations and the importance of marketing when starting a new business.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Free Webinars
- Vanessa Lech | TPOT 080
- Vanessa's Website
- LinkedIn Divorcing Adults Company Page
- Vanessa's LinkedIn Profile
- YouTube Channel Divorcing Adults
- Podcast for Divorcing Adults
- Twitter for Divorcing Adults
- Rumble for Divorcing Adults
- Pinterest for Divorcing Adults
- Newsletter Sign Up
- Vanessa's Store
Betsy Byler has been a therapist since 2003. She is passionate about treating trauma, working with substance use, and training therapists in both areas.
In this episode, Betsy explains why adding substance use to your scope of practice is easier than you think. Many of us didn't get the training we needed to deal with substance use; however, Betsy reveals how you already have the skills to handle these clients. We talk about why therapy is essential in treating substance use; clients will do better if they have both a mental health therapist and a substance use specialist. Tune in as we chat about when your client needs to be referred to a specialist, rewiring the brain for sobriety, and using Dialectical Behavior Therapy (DBT) for substance use.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Betsy's Website
- Betsy's Facebook
- Betsy's Twitter
- Betsy's LinkedIn
- All Things Substance Podcast
- The Practice of Therapy Webinars
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Avivit Fisher is the principal of REdD Strategy, a marketing and business consultancy for therapists in private practice.
Avivit Fisher joins the show to discuss starting a private practice during the summer. Summer is the perfect time to start a private practice for many reasons. First, creating a practice from scratch will require a lot of research and up-front work. So, starting your practice during the slower time of the year isn’t necessarily bad for therapists. Tune in as Avivit talks about where to start when building your private practice, the importance of knowing your ideal client, and what to do when your practice slows down during the summer.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Free Webinars
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Avivit Fisher | How Private Practice Marketing Has Changed | TPOT 212
- Avivit's Website
- Avivit on Instagram
- Avivit on Facebook
- Avivit on LinkedIn
Kelly McKenna is a licensed therapist specializing in helping millennial women and teens overcome anxiety. Kelly built her private practice totally on Instagram @sitwithkelly.
In this episode, Kelly McKenna joins the show to chat about how she built a cash-pay private practice on Instagram. First, Kelly reveals tips and tricks for making the transition from insurance panels to cash-pay and when to tell your clients about the news. Then, Kelly dives into everything social media and Instagram; she explains the importance of having a niche and knowing who your ideal client is. Tune in as we talk about scoring brand deals, adding a stream of income to your practice, and growing your followers.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Kelly's Instagram
- Kelly's TikTok
- Kelly's Website
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Practice Launch Club
- Free Webinars
In this episode, Danielle Swimm, business coach for therapists, joins the show. First, Danielle speaks about staying organized regarding your session notes. If you haven't streamlined the process of writing your notes, now is the time to do so! Next, you need to take a good hard look at your email inbox. Danielle explains why you shouldn't have your work emails connected to your phone. Tune in as Danielle chats about keeping your work schedule organized, adding another stream of income, and the importance of being intentional when it comes to your time in private practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Free Webinars
- Practice Launch Club
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Eat That Frog!: 21 Great Ways to Stop Procrastinating and Get More Done in Less Time
- Danielle's Website
- Danielle’s Podcast
- Danielle's Instagram
- Full Focus Planner
Michelle Moseley regularly provides support to those who are dealing with anxiety, depression, relational difficulties, and life transitions. She specializes in focusing on the areas of religious trauma and body image concerns.
In this episode, Michelle Moseley joins the show to discuss religious trauma and healing from spiritual wounds. Sadly, religious trauma often goes unaddressed and unrecognized because many people don't think it fits into what typical trauma looks like. Michelle explains how to recognize religious trauma and spiritual abuse. Then, Michelle dives into the impact of purity culture and how that ties into religious trauma. Tune in as we chat about abusive beliefs around eternity, leaving a group practice for private practice, and continuing telehealth after Covid.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Michelle's Website
- Michelle's LinkedIn
- Michelle's Instagram
- Free Webinars
- The Practice Launch Club
Maryellen Dance has been a psychology professor at Nazareth College since 2018 and has owned a private therapy practice since 2017.
In this episode, Maryellen Dance speaks about all the obstacles she had to overcome to succeed in private practice and, eventually, her group practice. From figuring out how to ask people for money to worrying about having enough clients for her clinicians, Maryellen has navigated it all! Then, Maryellen dives into the benefits of hiring an intern for your practice and the importance of having relationships with nearby graduate programs. Tune in as we chat about the inspiration behind Maryellen’s OKAY-ISH Podcast and why therapists shouldn’t be afraid to be vulnerable.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Maryellen's Website
- Maryellen's YouTube
- Maryellen's Podcast
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Free Webinars
- The Practice Launch Club
- Be A Guest on The Practice of Therapy Podcast
Megan Swan is on a mission to help wellpreneurs optimize their wellness as a way of life, not a checkmark on their to-do list.
In this episode, integrated wellness and business coach Megan Swan joins the show. Megan speaks about the importance of prioritizing your health and wellness. When you prioritize self-care, your business will also thrive. She reveals some approachable wellness shifts you can start making to your existing routine. Through these shifts, you can grow your business without burnout and show up for your clients as your best self. Tune in as we chat about health hacks like sleep, sunlight, and digital boundaries.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Megan's Website
- Megan's Podcast
- Follow Megan on Instagram
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Launch Club
Shrink Think is an online platform that provides digital resources to cultivate successful therapeutic relationships. With courses geared towards educating and empowering clients, as well as effective training and onboarding new clinicians, Shrink Think supports private practices to achieve better outcomes across the board.
In this episode, Aaron Potratz and Nathan Hawkins join for the last podcast takeover with Whitney Owens. First, they chat about Shrink Think and the importance of pre-session onboarding for your private practice clients. At Shrink Think, Nathan and Aaron aim to demystify therapy for those starting their mental health journey. Tune in as Aaron and Nathan dive into the resources they provide at Shrink Think, including their courses on how clients can get the most out of therapy and achieve breakthroughs. Plus, they talk about their upcoming courses on orienting new clinicians to your group practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Launch Club
- Shrink Think
- Shrink Think Podcast
- Shrink Think on Instagram
- Whitney's Website
- Whitney on Instagram
Whitney Owens is a licensed professional counselor, group practice owner, and faith-based private practice consultant.
It’s incredible how much money private practice owners can spend on their marketing. However, if you don’t have someone answering the phone, you are throwing away a lot of that money. In this podcast takeover with Whitney Owens, she speaks about how to take new inquiries and turn them into new clients. Whitney gives tips on getting your phones answered and why it’s one of the most critical pieces of your practice. Tune in as Whitney speaks about having an online booking option, making your systems and processes as smooth as possible, and why you should never offer free fifteen-minute consultations over the phone.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- The Practice of Therapy Launch Club
- Whitney's Website
- Whitney's Instagram
Whitney Owens is a licensed professional counselor, group practice owner, and faith-based private practice consultant.
In this episode, Whitney Owens takes over the show to talk about changes in private practice. Change is routine in any business; it shouldn't be anxiety-provoking or scary. When changes happen, use it as a chance to slow down, contemplate, and find opportunities. Whitney explains why worrying too much about the future of your practice could actually be making you overwhelmed. Tune in as she talks about listening to God in your faith-based practice, finding time for reflection, and staying focused on your private practice journey.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Whitney's Website
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Whitney on Instagram
- Practice Launch Club
Whitney Owens is a licensed professional counselor, group practice owner, and faith-based private practice consultant.
In this episode, Whitney speaks about her private practice journey, which eventually led to starting her own faith-based group practice. First, she explains why it’s critical to do your own work as a therapist, whether through self-care, personal development, or your relationship with God. Then, Whitney reminisces about her first client and how looking back on her journey is truly humbling. Tune in as Whitney describes the process behind starting her group practice and navigating challenges along the way.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Whitney Owens | Consulting, The Enneagram, & Religion in Private Practice | TPOT 178
- Whitney's Website
- Using the Enneagram to Improve Your Practice
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- The Practice of Therapy Launch Club
As both a tech expert and mental health counselor, Roy Huggins is the bridge from the digital world to real-world client care. His clear translation of legal and technical jargon into clear and actionable information will help you apply tech and security information directly to your business and your clients’ care.
You’ll hear episode 7 of The Practice of Therapy podcast with Roy Huggins in this throwback. He talks about tech, HIPAA, self-care, and the business side of private practice. First, Roy reveals details about his private practice journey and how he was able to use his business and technology background to start Person-Centered Tech. Roy also discusses the ethics of using technology and doing it in a way that protects clients and keeps their information secure. Later, we chat about the differences between being “HIPAA compliant” vs. “HIPAA secure.” Tune in for the importance of financial self-care in private practice and why clinicians must prepare for the constant technology changes in running a private practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Person-Centered Tech
- Remembering Roy
- Easy Safe Harbor From HIPAA Breach Notification
- Signal and HIPAA Compliance
- Free Articles on Technology in Mental Health
- HIPAA Staff Training for Group Practices
- Group Practice Tech Podcast
- Take The Practice of Therapy Survey
- Free Webinars
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
Shaelene Lauriano Kite, LPC, DBT-LBC, RYT, ACS received her Master’s in Counselor Education at The College of New Jersey and has continued to immerse herself on the path of learning and teaching.
In this episode, Shaelene Kite joins the show to talk about the different ways her clinical passion has taken her. First, we discuss the inspiration behind her brand name “Rebelmente.” Then, Shaelene dives into her DBT group practice consulting and the importance of putting yourself out there when it comes to your knowledge and passions. Tune in as we chat about navigating impostor syndrome, overcoming self-doubt, and Shaelene’s podcast T-Talk.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Shaelene's Instagram
- Shaelene's Website
- Shaelene's Podcast: T-Talk
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- Kindness and Compassion
- Free Webinars
- Be A Podcast Guest
Ashley Comegys is a licensed clinical social worker with an online therapy practice that helps women with anxiety navigate life transitions, grief, trauma, and loss.
In this episode, Ashley Comegys joins the show to talk all about networking. Many of us are too busy to attend networking events or simply find the idea dreadful. Well, networking can be all sorts of things. Remember that networking has everything to do with relationship-building and creating connections. Ashley reveals great ways to build connections via social media and how you can get more referrals by sending some simple direct messages. Tune in as we chat about the benefits of online therapy, networking based on your niche, and the importance of finding therapists from out-of-state.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get two months of Therapy Notes free.
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST.
- Free Webinars
- Moms Building Online Therapy Practices | TPOT 143
- Ashley's Website
- Ashley's Instagram
- Village (use code: “3villagefree”)
- Ashley's Facebook Group
- The Practice of Therapy's Cool Resources
Kasey Compton, a former mental health counselor turned entrepreneur, quickly became a southern staple in the land of business operations. Her knack for systems-thinking and relationally driven approach contributed to the successful curation of many multi-million-dollar businesses.
In this episode, Kasey Compton opens up about her experiences with writing her first book, Fix This Next. Kasey reveals the inspiration behind her book and what you'll learn about prioritizing the needs of your private practice. Plus, we speak about the importance of self-love and slowing down as business owners. As therapists, we need to practice what we preach to our clients. Tune in as we chat about overcoming the overwhelm in private practice and knowing your business's diagnoses.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Kasey's Website
- Fix This Next
- Kasey's Instagram
- Kasey's Facebook
- Fix This First In Your Private Practice | TPOT 167
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Kindness and Compassion
- Free Webinars
Dr. Dana McNeil is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist and is the founder of The Relationship Place, a group practice located in San Diego, California.
In this episode, Dr. Dana McNeil speaks about her specialty in working with relationships and the importance of normalizing therapy for couple’s therapy in our society. Couple’s therapy is a great way to learn how to navigate any relationship, not just romantic partnerships. We need to give people the tools to have productive conflicts with others in society. Unfortunately, Covid has increased both domestic violence and substance misuse. Tune in as we chat about group practice tips, starting a podcast, and how to work with different types of clients.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Dr. Dana's Website
- The Relationship Place
- The Relationship Place on Instagram
- The Relationship Place on Facebook
- Emerging Themes In Behavioral Health
- Dr. Dana on LinkedIn
- Dr. Dana on The Practice of Therapy Podcast
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- The Practice of Therapy Webinars
In this episode, Morgan Graves joins the show. She is not only a contemporary mental health professional, but she is also a trusted advisor to therapists transitioning to private practice. Morgan talks about her journey to private practice and some important lessons she learned along the way. Morgan reveals her self-care routine and the importance of managing her time well to stay organized and not feel overwhelmed. Tune in as we chat about utilizing your resources, asking for help, and Morgan's Self-Made Guide.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Morgan's Website
- Morgan's Instagram
- Morgan's Facebook
- Self-Made: A Therapist’s Guide to Starting a Private Practice
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Check out all the webinars
- Cool resources
David Khalili is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist with a focus on working with men, adolescents, couples therapy, and multi-ethnic individuals.
In this episode, we chat about how vulnerability and self-disclosure can be valuable tools in the therapy room. Then, David explains how group sessions can be another helpful therapy tool, and he dives into how he overcame mental hurdles when starting group therapy work. Tune in as we talk about outsourcing administrative tasks, navigating imposter syndrome, and what to know about scaling your group practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Free Webinars
- Rouse Therapy
- Rouse Therapy on Instagram
- Rouse Therapy on Facebook
- Rouse Therapy on Twitter
- Rouse Therapy on LinkedIn
- Rouse Therapy on TikTok
Paul Wright is the author of the Amazon Best Seller "How to Run a One Minute Practice," founder of the Practiceology™ health business freedom program, and has helped thousands of health business owners from 57 countries earn more, work less and enjoy their lives.
In part two, Paul Wright dives deep into more mistakes you could be making in private practice. He covers the importance of having proper systems and processes in place. If your goal is to have a practice function without you, systems will be critical. Next, it’s vital to know your numbers. Tune in as Paul covers why you need a recruitment system and how packaging your services can make you unique. Plus, Paul gives a bonus tip: don’t ever put a monetary value on your family time.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Paul's Website
- “How to Run a One Minute Practice”
- Practiceology The Podcast
- Paul on LinkedIn
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Check out all the webinars
Paul Wright is the author of the Amazon Best Seller "How to Run a One Minute Practice," founder of the Practiceology™ health business freedom program, and has helped thousands of health business owners from 57 countries earn more, work less and enjoy their lives.
In this episode, Paul Wright joins the show to discuss seven mistakes people are making in private practice. In part one, Paul covers the top three mistakes you could be making: failing to understand the true role of your business, falling in love with your service, and becoming a victim of perfectionism. Paul gives loads of private practice advice. For instance, he explains how to get more freedom when it comes to running your own business. Tune in as we chat about the reason why you should launch your product before it’s perfect and how to tell if the market will react well to it.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Paul's Website
- Practiceology The Podcast
- Paul on LinkedIn
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Check out all the webinars
Libby Rothschild shows coaches, consultants, and entrepreneurs how to attract clients online without ads or a website. In this episode, Dietitian Boss, Libby Rothschild, joins the show. Whether you are starting from zero or learning how to attract clients from social, Libby helps dietitians who are looking to make serious profits with their practices. Libby explains how to hone in on your mindset to make more money in your private practice. Plus, Libby describes how private practice can look different for everyone, and there truly is no one-size-fits-all approach. Tune in as we chat about imposter syndrome, overcoming limiting beliefs, and the customer journey regarding your income streams.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Learn about Libby
- Email: Libby@LibbyRothschild.com
- Website: www.DietitianBoss.com
- LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/libbyrothschild/
- Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/DietitianBoss/
- Libby on Instagram
- DietitianBoss on Instagram
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Faith In Practice Conference
- Check out all the webinars
In this episode, Gordon goes solo and talks about how things are changing in the world of therapy and counseling professions. As Covid hit society hard, the crisis around mental health worsened. Luckily, the stigma around seeking mental health is slowly decreasing in America. Gordon talks about other ways therapy is changing amidst the pandemic. Tune in as he dives into The No Surprises Act, tech companies like BetterHelp & Talkspace, and the importance of licensure portability for therapists.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Check out all the webinars
- Faith In Practice Conference
- Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram
Whitney Owens is a group practice owner with an all private pay practice. She has been a part of the Practice of the Practice community for several years.
In this episode, Whitney Owens joins the show to chat about faith in private practice. Having a faith-based practice doesn’t mean what you think it does; Whitney busts many myths around faith in the therapy room. Plus, we discuss marketing ourselves as a faith-based practice and what that means to people who may not necessarily want to talk about faith during a therapy session. Tune in as we chat all about Whitney’s upcoming event, The Faith In Practice Conference. Learn more about the conference and get $100 off your tickets with coupon code “GORDON” by visiting this link: https://practiceoftherapy.com/fip
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
Faith In Practice Conference (use coupon code "GORDON") Waters Edge Counseling Practice of the Practice: Faith in Practice Podcast Whitney Owens | TPOT 178 Whitney Owens | TPOT 036 Whitney Owens | TPOT 091 Email: Whitney@practiceofthepractice.com Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Be A Podcast Guest Kindness and Compassion Check out all the webinars
Stacey specializes in treating women and helping professionals who are overwhelmed, worried, and who may have overlooked their own self-care and well-being.
In this episode, Stacey speaks about using self-disclosure in the therapy room. Yes, even therapists can be a “hot mess.” We aren’t perfect or completely put together; self-disclosure can be a critical tool for gaining your clients' trust. Plus, Stacey talks about the struggles of finding a Black female therapist and why therapists need therapy too. Tune in as we chat about the importance of mastermind groups, different therapy modalities, and why it’s okay to be a hot mess.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode
Truth Empowered
Email: SLanier@truthempowered.com
Stacey on Instagram
Follow Stacey on Twitter
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Be A Podcast Guest Kindness and Compassion Check out all the webinars
Alison Pidgeon, LPC is the CEO of Move Forward Counseling, a large group practice in Lancaster, PA.
In this episode, Alison Pidgeon joins the show to talk about TheraSuite. TheraSuite provides professionally developed style boards created with a therapy office in mind. Alison explains the different options you have when using TheraSuite and how they can help you make the ideal therapy office design to meet all your tastes and needs. Plus, Alison gives loads of design tips for your office. Tune in as we chat about the secret behind running multiple businesses, the importance of outsourcing, and getting into real estate.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
Alison@practiceofthepractice.com
$20 off at TheraSuite with code "LAUNCH20"
Grow A Group Practice Podcast
TheraSuite on Instagram
TheraSuite on Facebook
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
Kindness and Compassion
Check out all the webinars
Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group on Facebook
The Course: Google Workspace for Therapists (use code FEB2022 for 20% off)
Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram
Childhood friends Kendall Bird and Sage Grazer teamed up to create Frame Therapy, a modern marketing resource and free online community for therapists.
In this episode, Sage and Kendall, founders of Frame Therapy, join the show. Frame is a FREE online community for therapists who are dedicated to advancing their careers. First, Sage and Kendall chat about what you can expect when you join the Frame community. Plus, they speak about all the different opportunities they offer within Frame like exclusive marketing partnerships, resources for your professional growth, and even client referrals from therapists across the country. Tune in as we dive into trending topics that therapists are talking about in 2022.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Check out all the webinars Frame Therapy Frame Therapy on Instagram Frame Therapy on Facebook
Dr. Stephen “David” Hall heads up content and creative direction as the “Chief Maven” of PsychMaven.
In this episode, David Hall joins the show to talk about growing pains in private practice. David speaks about the importance of outsourcing for growth and how to let go of control when delegating tasks. Plus, we talk about holding people accountable for sustainable development and why knowing your numbers will be essential for growth. It is fun to see changes in the many ways it can happen in your practice; however, some issues will pop up. Tune in as we chat about how sometimes, to grow big, you have to do some pruning in your practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST
- Check out all the webinars
- Faith in Practice Conference
- PsychMaven
- David Hall | TPOT 004
- David Hall | TPOT 113
- David Hall | TPOT 146
- PsychMaven on Facebook
- PsychMaven on Instagram
- PsychMaven on LinkedIn
Are you trying to get your systems and processes in place for your private practice? Many people are looking at Google Workspace to make their practice run smoothly. I love Google Workspace. However, I don't personally think that Google Workspace would be your best option for completely replacing an electronic health record system for mental health providers. In this episode, I explain the differences between Google Workspace and EHRs. Plus, I discuss why you may want to consider having both for your private practice needs.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
- Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
- Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group on Facebook
- Faith in Practice Conference
- The Course: Google Workspace for Therapists (use code FEB2022 for 20% off)
- Session Note Helper
- Cloud Practice Management System EHR/EMR – Reviews
- Practice of Therapy Courses
David Frank is on a mission to ensure every therapist has access to unbiased and fiduciary financial advice!
I am lucky to have David Frank join the show. He is an expert in fiduciary financial planning for therapists. As private practice owners, we face economic challenges that they don’t teach us how to solve in graduate school. David speaks about how to understand your private practice financials better. Plus, we talk about spending more time with your finances, being curious about your money mindset, and the importance of getting comfortable around your money relationship. Tune in as David reveals money mistakes you could be making in your private practice.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
Study: High income improves evaluation of life but not emotional well-being Money Scripts Inventory Assessment David's Website David's LinkedIn Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Free Webinars Money Matters In Private Practice Kindness and Compassion Podcast
Michael Diettrich Chastain, is an author, speaker, professional coach, and consultant dedicated to peak performance.
In this episode, Michael opens the show by explaining the difference between therapy and coaching. As a coach, Michael reveals the top issues leaders have in their businesses. One of the most significant business struggles is employee retention and employee satisfaction. Michael explains what can be done in the workplace to improve engagement and create a workplace culture that is both positive and inclusive. Tune in as we chat all about CHANGES and how his methods can help you reduce stress, accomplish goals, and master adaptability.
Resources Mentioned In This Episode:
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Scaling Without Failing in Group Practice
Kindness and Compassion Podcast
Michael’s LinkedIn
Michael’s Facebook
Arc Integrated
Get CHANGES here: https://www.thechangesbook.com/
In this episode, Avivit Fisher joins the show to talk about marketing your private practice. First, Avivit gives tips on your marketing messaging and better relating to potential clients. If you’re extremely busy in your private practice, Avivit says you should still utilize marketing tools. Plus, Avivit reveals which marketing tools can make your private practice’s systems and processes smoother. Tune in as we chat about innovation in the mental health field and finding business opportunities to create more income streams in your practice.
Avivit’s Website
Avivit on Instagram
Avivit on Facebook
Connect with Avivit on LinkedIn
Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Free Webinar: Scaling Without Failing in Group Practice
Kindness and Compassion
In this episode, Dr. Waldman talks about the importance of marketing your private practice. Challenge yourself to promote your practice once a day. By the end of the year, some type of marketing will stick. Plus, Dr. Waldman speaks about utilizing the internet for your private practice marketing. Later, we talk about the various ways to increase your income. Dr. Waldman reveals how he grew his income significantly in his practice, allowing him a comfortable retirement.
Meet Dr. Larry Waldman Dr. Waldman is a recently semi-retired certified school psychologist and licensed clinical, forensic psychologist in Phoenix, Arizona. He conducted a highly successful private practice of 45 years working with children, teens, parents, couples, and adults in a solution-focused manner. He also consulted with family, personal injury, immigration, and estate planning attorneys. His BS in Education/Psychology was from the University of Wisconsin; his MS in School Psychology was from the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; his Ph.D. in Educational/School Psychology was earned at Arizona State University, and his Diplomate (ABPP) was received in 2003.
Do Some Type of Promotion Every Single Day As a professional speaker, Dr. Waldman is accustomed to talking in front of large groups. How does he do it? Well, he thinks about what is the worst thing that can happen – exactly what he tells patients. When it comes to marketing, Dr. Waldman would make a point to promote his practice every single day. He would do a phone call, a podcast, an email, or something along those lines. It's essential to be persistent and consistent with things. Over the course of a year, you have several hundred things that you tried. Eventually, something will stick. That's how Dr. Waldman got himself into some lucrative situations.
Virtual Private Practice Marketing The most significant trend in private practice marketing is the internet. A lot of young clinicians are finding value in marketing on the net. If you can get in front of a group of potential referral sources and speak knowledgeably to them, that's the best marketing in the world. They will view you as an expert and refer other clients to you. Marketing in private practice is more about helping people find you. Then, you need to know how to help them once they find you. The internet has completely turned the private practice marketing world upside down. People have to know who you are, where you are, and what you do.
Earn Passive Income As A Therapist Therapists do noble work. They save marriages, and they protect people from suicide. Therapists deserve to be compensated appropriately for their work. Dr. Waldman started to develop passive streams of income. He earns income when he isn't sitting in front of clients. One of the ways to build income is by writing books. The first book that he wrote is titled Who's Raising Whom? A Parent's Guide to Effective Child Discipline. That book is still generating passive income for Dr. Waldman. In fact, you can find a copy of it here: https://www.amazon.com/Raising-Parents-Guide-Effective-Discipline/dp/0943247152. Dr. Waldman provides a simple, step-by-step process using basic behavioral Psychology to teach parents how to manage and modify their children's behavior more effectively.
Increase Income Through Real Estate or Public Speaking Another way to increase your income is by public and professional speaking. Typically this type of gig is on the weekends and after hours. Luckily, it won't interfere with the hours of your private practice. Plus, you can sell the books at those speaking events. It's a great marketing tool for your private practice as well. Another way to increase income is by buying your own building. Dr. Waldman has nine renters in his building. He makes money from their rent. That way, when Dr. Waldman isn't working, he is still making money. Then, he uses that money to purchase other real estate investments. Now, Dr. Waldman is comfortably retired.
Are You Trading Your Time For Money? Unfortunately, the majority of clinicians out there is trading time for money. They only make money when sitting in a chair and a client is in the other chair. You can make a decent living doing this type of work. If you trade time for money, there is only so much time to work. The people who become wealthy are outside of this dynamic. You have to monetize your time. One way to do this is through group work. That way, six patients can be paying you instead of one. Some clinicians only do group work, you will be making a pretty penny, and it certainly beats the one patient per hour dynamic.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Dr. Waldman's Resources Top Phoenix Psychologist LinkedIn Facebook Call Dr. Waldman at 602-418-8161 Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
January 21st Webinar: Solo to Group Practice Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
As we start the new year, I will give you some ideas around setting priorities and goals; it's a topic that I tackle at the beginning of every year. First, I talk about the importance of having a planner that uses good old-fashioned pen and paper. When we write things down, we tend to process that information differently. Plus, I talk about what exactly is a brain dump and how it can help you find clarity in your private practice. Later, I chat about the importance of knowing your numbers, getting your systems and processes cleaned up, and finding community on your journey.
Why You Need A Paper Planner One of the things that I've been doing this past week is going through my planner. Writing things down in a planner rather than typing them out on our phones allows us to process information differently. It forces us to slow down, think, and process what is going on in our minds. There's that brain-hand connection that is made; if you write something out, you have a way of remembering it and processing it differently. That's why I love to use a paper-based planner. Overall, it helps me stay productive and organized. I use The Full Focus Planner. Check it out here: www.practiceoftherapy.com/fullfocusplanner.
Start 2022 With A Brain Dump It's essential to write things down and think about the new year on paper. I like doing something called a brain dump, which is just really getting a sheet of paper, planner, or notebook. Then, write down everything that comes to mind that you want to accomplish, things that you're thinking about, and tasks that you want to do. It gets everything out of your brain onto the paper. The Full Focus Planner has something called Your Big Daily Three. You fill out the three most important things you want to accomplish for that day. Overall, a brain dump is a great way to set your priorities for the new year.
Financial Deep Dive To Know Your Numbers One of the things that you've heard from me a good bit over this last year is the importance of knowing your numbers. If you're going to be successful in your business and your practice, you need to know your numbers. You need to understand how the money is flowing through your business and through what you do day in and day out. Doing a deep financial dive at the beginning of the year can give you a baseline for where you are now. Then, you can think about where you want to get to with your finances. I use QuickBooks to manage the finances of my practice. Make sure you know where your best income sources are coming from for the year. Plus, you'll want to know where you are falling behind. For instance, I discovered that we haven't been collecting all of our copays; it's something that we need to fix for the new year. A deep financial dive will help you find where your money leaks are.
Finding Community On Your Private Practice Journey When we start getting isolated from folks, we lose a sense of community and support from others. Finding a community will help you get clear around your goals for your practice. Having a community and a group of trusted colleagues to bounce things off of goes a long way in helping you have some clarity. Plus, it will help you have some accountability with accomplishing goals and keeping straight with your priorities. I encourage you to find a community within your practice and daily life. A focus group is a great way to find community. That way, you can learn from others and bounce ideas off of each other.
Fix Your Systems and Processes This Year Look at how you can fix your systems and processes. It's time to get rid of the deadwood. You can be outsourcing – it will be a much better use of your time. That way, you're not spending time on things that aren't going to bring you any income anyway. I want to shout out Uriah Guilford; he's the owner of The Productive Therapist. If you have more tasks to complete than hours in the day, Uriah wants to help you get things done. Sometimes you neglect your self-care and other essential items in your life when you're too busy with your practice. That's why Uriah likes helping therapists find world-class virtual assistants. You can learn more about The Productive Therapist here: https://productivetherapist.com/.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Kindness and Compassion Podcast Apply For My Focus Group [Starts January 2022] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
This episode reviews themes covered in the Practice of Therapy from 2021. A few topics have come up from the last fifty episodes or so. I dive into those subjects, including community, preparing for a worst-case scenario, updating your private practice, diversifying income, and using mindfulness in your business. Tune in as I talk about some of my favorite episodes from these topics and the most significant lessons learned from my guests this year.
Looking At The Worst-Case Scenario During Covid, many of us had to think about preparing for the worst-case scenario. Most likely, you, your family members, or your clients have come into contact with Covid. So, many private practice owners started to think about what would happen to their practice if something happened to them. That's why I spoke with Judd Carlton; he is a financial advisor serving families, individuals, and businesses in Morristown, NJ, and beyond. We talked about why the sooner you start planning for retirement, the better off you're going to be in the long run. Even if it's just a tiny bit that you save towards your retirement, it's going to make a big difference!
Judd Carlton | Retirement Planning In Private Practice | TPOT 179
Update and Refresh Your Private Practice One way to update and refresh your private practice is through your private practice website. My good friend and website guru Daniel Fava helped with my private practice website. He is from Private Practice Elevation, and I am so grateful for all of his assistance! This year we chatted all about the website redesign project that I have started, and we walked through the nuts and bolts of what needs to get done to take your private practice website to the next level. If you want to see the final product, check out Kingsport Counseling here: https://kingsportcounseling.com/.
Daniel Fava | Redesigning Your Private Practice Website – Part One | TPOT 169
Daniel Fava | Redesigning Your Private Practice Website – Part Two | TPOT 170
How To Diversify Your Income In Private Practice One of the things about being in practice, particularly if you're a solo practitioner, is that you can quickly reach a glass ceiling with your practice. You can expand your practice and create more income by starting a group practice. If you want to learn more about starting a group practice, then you need to check out this webinar: Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income. This is a pre-recorded webinar with selected automated times. Please choose a time/date in the calendar above that works in your schedule for the one-hour-long presentation.
Another way you can increase your private practice income is through a side hustle. You can create a course or develop new products for other therapists or your clients. I did an episode with Chris Swenson about Self-Publishing For Therapists, Coaches, and Consultants. Chris dives deep into the self-publishing process, including the importance of an outline, an editor, and how to navigate imposter syndrome.
Chris Swenson | Self-Publishing For Therapists, Coaches, and Consultants | TPOT 189
Dr. Lani Chin joined the show to talk about the process of creating an app in order to increase private practice income. CE Hub is a tool for mental health professionals to store their continuing education certificates and track their units earned toward licensure. You can upload your certificates, and CE Hub will take care of the rest. We talk about diversifying your income, the importance of outsourcing, and the nuts and bolts of creating your very own application.
Dr. Lani Chin | Creating An App To Diversify Private Practice Income | TPOT 196
Using Mindfulness In Private Practice Brett Hill, mindfulness guru, joined the show this year. Mindfulness is the awareness that arises from paying attention to the present moment. When you can harness the awareness that occurs, you can respond to reality in a new light. Brett explains the power of incremental growth and how it can change your private practice. Plus, Brett dives deep into how mindfulness can be a powerful tool for not only your personal life but also for your private practice.
Brett Hill | The Power of Mindfulness In Private Practice | TPOT 203
The Importance of Having Community In Private Practice Community is critical during Covid, so I wanted to talk to experts about the subject. The Therapist in the Attic is a way for therapists to get honest with each other. Leah talks about how she created a way to connect with others in complex, uncertain, and stressful times. When you think about it, we are all somewhat "stuck in the attic." Leah chats about the varied experiences many of us have faced in these uncertain times.
Leah Leynor | The Therapist In The Attic | TPOT 188
Plus, I talked with Ernesto Segismundo about having a community. Also, I chatted with Kelly and Miranda from ZynnyMe about incorporating an online community into the mix with a side hustle. You can check out those episodes here:
Ernesto Segismundo | Finding Creative Solutions In Private Practice | TPOT 207
Kelly & Miranda | Following Your Passion Through Online Community | TPOT 208
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Kindness and Compassion Podcast Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income COOL RESOURCES! Get the FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide Apply For My Focus Group [Starts January 2022] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Kelly and Miranda are back for a spirited conversation covering many topics. First, we discuss the importance of following your passion, especially when creating a side hustle. Whatever problems are coming up in your private practice will follow in your second business; so, ensure you have those problems addressed ahead of time. Later, we talk about how big tech companies are taking advantage of therapists and why you need to know your numbers if you’re considering joining one of these sites. Tune in as we chat about naming your business and what you can expect from ZynnyMe in the future.
Meet Kelly Higdon, LMFT Kelly Higdon, LMFT is the co-founder of ZynnyMe and co-creator of The Business School Bootcamp for Therapists, a flagship course that helps therapists in all parts of their private practice journey solidify their business foundation and growth. When she isn’t coaching or hosting retreats for her clients, you can find her playing roller derby or spending time with her family. To learn more about Kelly check out kellyhigdon.com and zynnyme.com
On any given day you will find her writing, meeting with her psychotherapy or coaching clients, running a webinar for therapists, providing consultation with private practice owners, and making lots of room for playtime with her family. Kelly’s hair constantly changes. She cares about the people that she works with. AND her most FAVORITE THING is to push, educate and inspire in the Business School Bootcamp.
Meet Miranda Palmer, LMFT Miranda Palmer built a cash-based private practice during the recession. But, she is most proud that she did it to take care of her family and created a work-life balance that allowed her to avoid the all too common burn-out a lot of therapists experience.
As the co-creator of ZynnyMe.com, she provides how-to articles, free monthly webinars, and co-leads the Business School Bootcamp for Therapists.
Today her primary business is inspiring and teaching therapists private practice marketing. Miranda teaches them business skills, and not because she is all about money. Miranda sees how clinical outcomes, burnout rate, and overall passion can be impacted positively or negatively by how our businesses run.
Follow Your Passion and Success Will Follow If anyone in the private practice world wants to do a side gig, you better make sure it is something you’re passionate about. Without passion, you will be miserable doing it. Whatever things you haven’t taken care of in your main gig, you will replicate it in your side gig. For instance, if you got burnt out in your main gig, you will get burnt out in your side gig as well. If mindset, money, and boundaries issues aren’t addressed, you won’t be able to escape them. It would help if you dream bigger and bigger; your passion project can quickly become something you do full-time with the right tools and resources.
Building An Online Community If you want to start a side hustle, consider incorporating an online community into the mix. There are safe and lovely ways to have virtual conversations with people from all over the world through community building. Kelly and Miranda have focused on creating a space where people can own their values as a person. Once you have your values and vision narrowed down, you can find people who think and feel similarly. It’s critical to build a community where we lift each other up. As therapists, we can keep the field alive and thriving via these communities.
Choose The Best Name For Your Business Zynny was a name that Kelly came up with when first making her Yahoo email account. Kelly and Miranda both liked the idea of using it for their business name. However, Kelly says that you should avoid making up a name with unconventional spelling. She spends a lot of time spelling out ZynnyMe over the phone, and it’s something that she needs to explain constantly.
Know Your Numbers In Private Practice Therapists are afraid of their numbers. Once you know your numbers, you will be empowered to make the right decisions for your private practice. Many tech companies are reaching out to therapists; however, they don’t have your client’s best interests in mind. These companies sell client info to target ads based on their mental health issues. Plus, these tech companies aren’t correctly paying their therapists. ZynnyMe wants to educate therapists on how these tech companies are exploiting their clients.
The Tech World Collides With Mental Health Tech companies are counting the words that are being said to our clients. Therapists will get paid for talking to their clients up to a certain number of words. After that word limit, they are working for free, or their clients are not getting the services they need. Virtual therapy is essential. However, big tech shouldn’t be the one who is helping our clients. One tech company was even offering unlimited therapy to clients for $99 a month. How does that even work? It’s exploiting therapists, and we shouldn’t stand for it.
What To Look Forward To From ZynnyMe ZynnyMe has free pieces of training for their community. They are also paying excellent speakers to come in and talk about issues in the therapist world. For instance, they have people come in and speak about how couples therapy works in the private practice world. They are talking about how insurance impacts the care you give and what you need to know about it. Plus, they are chatting about the issues of burnout and trauma in the profession.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kelly & Miranda’s Resources ZynnyMe ZynnyMe’s Amazing Free Trainings ZynnyMe on Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST COOL RESOURCES! Get the FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide Apply For My Focus Group [Starts January 2022] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Ernesto Segismundo joins the show. He talks about the importance of clinicians feeling comfortable sharing their ideas and being creative. Once therapists start talking about legal and ethics, many people clam up and don't want to be vulnerable with their thoughts. However, the mental health crisis is quickly getting out of hand, and we need therapists to be creative now more than ever. Tune in as we chat about listening to your body, how success will impact your personal life, and attracting the right types of people.
Meet Ernesto Segismundo Ernesto Segismundo is a licensed marriage and family therapist. Ernesto received his undergraduate degree in psychology from BIOLA University and received his Masters of Science degree in Clinical Psychology from Vanguard University. Ernesto has over 10 years of clinical counseling experience working in settings such as group homes, domestic violence shelters, churches, and outpatient programs. Ernesto treats marriage and family relationship problems. Ernesto also treats individuals suffering from depression, anxiety, and addiction.
Along with Ernesto’s counseling experience, he has conducted various classes and seminars concerning relationships and mental health-related topics such as parenting, substance abuse, maintaining healthy marriages, private practice social media and video marketing, and managed care practices.
The Importance of Creativity In Private Practice Clinicians are gifted and creative, but for some reason, where we took the legal and ethics courses, it scared the creativity out of us. Sometimes we put ourselves in a box when we hear the words legal and ethics. People on social media throw it at other psychotherapists out there. Then, therapists become afraid to try new things. Ernesto attracts clinicians who are innovative and question the standards that others put out there. Therapists should be able to exchange ideas with each other without feeling afraid. Mental health is a massive problem, and therapists shouldn't be scared to find creative ways to help people.
Your Body Is Talking and It’s Time To Listen Your body is wise, and your mind interprets what our bodies react to. Think about how your body reacts to the businesses that you create. How does your body respond to the people that you surround yourself with? If you have an uncomfortable feeling, then it's time to ask questions. What is your body trying to tell you? Maybe your body is trying to tell you to lay down some boundaries. When you walk into a room and feel a specific type of energy, your body is trying to tell you something. Being in tune with ourselves is sometimes hard as therapists because we can tune into others very well. Having your own therapist will help you be more in tune with your own body.
Navigating Challenges That Come With Success When you start succeeding, two things happen:
- Emotional responses like fear, resistance, and imposter syndrome all start coming up.
- You will start to figure out who is genuinely on your side. Some people will support you, while other people will become insecure.
You attract those people that want to be around you that give you that energy. There's a powerful exchange between you and them. You repel the people that unconsciously want to stay small, but they want you to stay small with them. People will be uncomfortable with your success, not because they're uncomfortable with you but because they are uncomfortable with your possibility of succeeding. Are you not allowing yourself to succeed in private practice? Well, you're playing small because you're focusing way too much on the people that roll their eyes when you become successful.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Ernesto's Resources Website LinkedIn Call Ernesto: (909) 247-8820 YouTube Facebook Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST COOL RESOURCES! Get the FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide Apply For My Focus Group [Starts January 2022] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
I am lucky to be joined by Kathleen Shannon; she has a real passion for talking about licensure portability. It's an issue that many of us have run into if you move around, change states, or simply want to be licensed in multiple states. This particular issue of licensure portability comes up a lot during Covid. Many people recognize the need for licensure portability as we shift to and from telehealth. Tune in as we chat about what you need to get licensed in multiple states and how Kathleen plans to make the process easier with her courses.
Meet Kathleen Shannon Kathleen B. Shannon, MA, LCMHC, CRC has worked in the rehabilitation and mental health industry as a licensed provider for over 21 years, gaining experience in working with veterans and others with PTSD, anxiety, and depression, as well as those in recovery.
As a seasoned rehabilitation and mental health counselor, she is passionate about seeking out and working with your values, strengths, and abilities to achieve your goals.
Outside of the office, Kathleen enjoys spending time with her family, hiking, and exploring new ideas, and learning with friends.
Why Therapists Are Getting Licensed In Multiple States Even though Kathleen got her degree in Florida, she was on the way to Washington State when she walked across and got the degree. When Covid hit, that was another struggle for Kathleen and most therapists. She works with many people who are either elderly or college students; both of those populations had to go live with family or weren't allowed to be around their families. So, Kathleen decided to take the time to get her license in more than one state. However, the state said she would need to go back to grad school. So, Kathleen found the commonalities that you need in every single state to be able to have licensure.
Getting A License In Every State Will Be Pricey If you want to have a license in every state, you need to have a lot of money because each state wants a lot of money. As long as you have a lot of money, you can be licensed in every state. Plus, you have to stay organized and make sure nothing expires. The first thing you need to do is go ahead and take every single solitary exam. That's the number one thing. From there, you can figure out where you want to focus. Do you want to stay in a single time zone? Do you want to have the luxury of actually offering decent times to people in other time zones? So it's just something to consider but, first, take both exams, whether you need them or not because eventually, you will.
Kathleen Is Creating Courses For Multi-State Licensing There will be two different courses; there's going to be a course for graduate students who are looking for initial licensure. For most states, it's either an associate or an intern. For these people, the course will be about finding out what that state would need to obtain licensure. Let's say you're in an online program in Virginia, and you live in Georgia. So Kathleen wants to help you find out what Georgia would need versus what Virginia would need. The other course will be available to people who've been licensed for more than five years on how to either transfer or obtain additional licensure based on the endorsement. All in all, there will be two different tracks: one for the freshly graduated and going to get associate or intern licensure and then the one for people who have been licensed for several years.
Why License Portability Is Critical During Covid You need to be able to be there for your clients. License portability is a huge problem for therapists and people struggling with their mental health. With Covid, mental health has started to come to the forefront of people's minds. Plus, there is less stigma around people seeking help for mental health issues. It has forced many states to be more consistent with licensure reciprocity. People are also becoming much more transient because of Covid. They are moving to different parts of the counties, leaving big cities, and looking for lower living costs.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kathleen's Resources LPC License Info 5 Key Things that you need to become licensed by endorsement, reciprocity, or comity in everyUS state and jurisdiction Follow Kathleen on Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST COOL RESOURCES! Get the FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide Apply For My Focus Group [Starts January 2022] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Today, we talk about how to build team culture in your practice. Creating the right culture within your practice is a learning process and a growth process as a business owner. Dawn gives tips on building a culture within your workplace that reflects the values and mission of your group practice. We also speak about the importance of soul care and taking care of that side of yourself. Remember, you need to invest in your self-care as much as you do any other part of your practice.
Meet Dawn Gabriel The Faith Fringes Podcast hosted by Dawn Gabriel is for anyone who has ever - or who is currently - questioning their connection with God. Do you find yourself wondering if what you believe is true, asking how a loving God can let bad things happen to good people, or questioning how you're supposed to experience God in everyday life?
As someone born into a Christian home amidst the Christian culture of the Midwest or "Bible Belt," Dawn has experienced many emotions, unanswered questions, and life-changing moments that altered her perceptions of faith forever. She's here to let you know that everyone's journey in finding a deeper connection with God is different, but that doesn't mean that journeys shouldn't be shared.
As a Group Practice Owner, Consultant, wife, boy mom, and Podcaster, Dawn believes that you can - and will - experience God in so many unexpected ways. It's okay to question and challenge everything you've been taught. If you're a Spiritual Explorer, interested in becoming one or looking for an inclusive and safe space where doubt, questions, and curiosity are encouraged, Faith Fringes Podcast is for you.
Interviewing For Workplace Culture In Group Practice Dawn started a group practice, but she didn't have any business skills. Sadly, Dawn didn't know about this beautiful world of consulting. For the first three years, Dawn would hire people who could see clients; she didn't streamline her interview process. During year three, Dawn realized she needed to get better at interviewing. Dawn finally understood the need to interview for workplace culture. Plus, Dawn got business consulting. It changed her practice. Hiring the right people for your business is crucial; it can make or break your group practice.
Building The Right Culture Within Your Team Building the right culture within your practice is a learning process and a growth process as a business owner. Dawn wanted the therapist to be faith-based, but she didn't want the practice to be faith-based necessarily. Dawn's group practice doesn't overtly advertise that they integrate the Christian faith; instead, they make it more subtle. However, Christian faith is something that is embedded in their workplace culture. She wanted that to be important to the people that she hires.
Your Therapists Should Also Be In Therapy It's essential when you're hiring to ask a question somehow to find out if they're in therapy or if they've been in therapy. You want therapists who have worked on their own stuff. Dawn does a three-part interview process. During the second interview, Dawn involves her team. Dawn's team is made up of individual contractors, but they commit to a team atmosphere. They have team retreats and monthly team meetings. The independent contractors commit to those standards. If you're thinking of hiring independent contractors, do your research on how you can implement team meetings or retreats.
Taking Care of Your Soul as a Therapist There's a spiritual piece of all of us, whatever faith or religion you choose to believe in and follow. No matter what, there's still this element of something deeper within us that's bigger than us. As therapists, we create and hold sacred space for others; there's something sacred in that room, regardless of what religion one believes. There is healing, hope, and transformation in therapy. It impacts therapists on a deep level. So, it's vital to look at that deep within your own self of what's happening spiritually in your soul.
The Importance of Self-Care For Mental Health Practitioners Sometimes we put our worth and our purpose in how we impact others. Often, that can come at the expense of our own self-care. Unfortunately, many people are not putting self-care as a focus. Sometimes it feels better to give to other people. Plus, when we focus on ourselves, lots of stuff will bubble up to the surface. That's why it can almost be easier to help other people rather than take care of ourselves. During the pandemic, therapists needed to focus on self-care because we are simultaneously going through a similar trauma that our clients are going through.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Dawn's Resources Listen To Faith Fringes Check Out Dawn’s Website Dawn’s Free Eight Week Course Faith Fringes on Facebook Faith Fringes on Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST COOL RESOURCES! Get the FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide
Apply For My Focus Group [Starts January 2022] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, I talk about some of the myths and misperceptions people have about being on insurance panels. I delve into this topic and let you know what I've learned about it from my insurance-based practice. First, I speak about the stigma around accepting insurance in private practice. If you accept insurance, you are just as valid and can be just as successful as private practice owners who are cash-based. Tune in as talk about the pros and cons of insurance panels, why I chose to be insurance-based, and where to start when you decide to accept insurance.
The Stigma Around Accepting Insurance In Private Practice Many people are curious about accepting insurance and if they should or not. There is no correct answer. If you start to delve into your mindset and think about it all, it might just be something that you should consider doing. When you look at all that is out there, there are so many great resources around building a private practice. It seems like most people are encouraging cash-pay. There seems to be a little bit of a stigma against having an insurance-based practice. Many people say that you don't want to be controlled by insurance companies. If therapists don't have a cash-based practice, they're second-class citizens for being an insurance-based practice. I don't agree with that at all! In fact, my success comes from being insurance-based.
The Pros and Cons of Being An Insurance-Based Practice There are a lot of pros and cons to being on insurance panels. Certainly, one of the cons of being insurance-based is that you've got to have more systems and processes in place. You've got to do more work on the front end to get prepared for insurance. You need specific systems when you start accepting third-party payors and being reimbursed by insurance companies for your services. The biggest con is that there is some work on the front end of being insurance-based.
The pros for being insurance-based are that you've got a built-in referral source by being on insurance panels. I would say at least half the people that we find are from their insurance. In other words, they checked with their insurance provider first to see who would accept their insurance in the area. When making an appointment with us, people ask, how much does it cost? Plus, they ask if we accept insurance. That's why I wanted to be an insurance-based practice. People depend on their insurance, and I want to help those people.
Ready To Accept Insurance? What To Do First Where do you start? Research your area to find out which are which insurance panels are the most prevalent. In my area, most people have Blue Cross Blue Shield health insurance. Another thing to research is looking at significant employers in the area. Then, check which insurance those companies use. Next, use that data to decide which insurance companies you want to be paneled with. Another thing to note is that when an insurance company offers you a contract, that's negotiable! Make sure to negotiate what rate you will accept.
Systems and Processes Around Filing Insurance Claims Figure out your systems and your processes around filing insurance claims. If you're on insurance panels, you need a traditional way to send claims off. The best way I know to do that is through an electronic health record system. TherapyNotes helps my practice with this. It's a few clicks of a button to get your insurance claims sent to the insurance companies to be reimbursed. For the most part, insurance companies have a pretty quick turnaround for electronic health claim submissions. Within a week of sending off the claim, we are getting paid. There's a myth that you have to wait a long time to get paid from insurance companies – that's not true! So, make sure you have a way to submit claims and make it as automated as possible.
Cash-Based and Insurance-Based Private Practices If you're not ready to be entirely reliant on insurance, there's a hybrid option! You can have a mix of cash-paying clients and clients that use insurance. Give people a choice on whether or not they want to pay for therapy through a third-party payor. Remember to set your full fee at a reasonable place; your fee needs to be your FULL fee. The insurance company will pay you what they pay you. Then, you write off the difference between the full fee and the contract rate. If they choose not to use insurance, you can offer a sliding scale based on family income. We don't go and check their income; instead, we go on the honor system. Ensure that the lowest rate on your sliding scale fee schedule is in the ballpark of your average reimbursement rate from insurance companies. If you want more tips about deciding to panel with 3rd-party payors, check out this FREE webinar coming up: https://practiceoftherapy.com/insurancepractice.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Free Webinar | November 19th @ 1 PM EST | Managed Care Finances for Therapy Practice Apply For My Focus Group [Starts November 2021] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Brett Hill, mindfulness guru, joins the show. He defines mindfulness for us as the awareness that arises from paying attention to the present moment. When you can harness the awareness that occurs, you can respond to reality in a new light. Brett explains the power of incremental growth and how it can change your private practice. Plus, Brett dives deep into how mindfulness can be a powerful tool for not only your personal life but also for your private practice.
Meet Brett Hill In college, I decided that the limits of what we can achieve and the quality of our lives are dependent on our ability to communicate well. My degree in interpersonal communication combined nicely with my fascination for technology led to a career as a technical storyteller, author, blogger, and speaker for companies like Microsoft, Adobe and others.
But I wanted to go much deeper, so sought out the best I could find. I’ve had the good fortune to study Hakomi somatic psychotherapy with the founder – Ron Kurtz, Matrix Leadership group dynamics with the founder – Amina Knowlan, and meditation with the late Audle Allison. I taught meditation for several years and founded the Quest Institute in Dallas. Other influences include martial arts, contact improvisation, and training with Gabrielle Roth
As a result of this unique background, I’ve come to believe there is no faster way to improve your communications and the quality of your life than being mindful during a conversation. The Language of Mindfulness is the distillation of many years of work and inspired a TEDx talk (2021), the book, and the class in development.
I am available for podcasts, speaking, and coaching. If you have any questions, would love to chat.
The Power of Incremental Growth Marketing yourself as a resource is a very different business than selling software or a mobile app. When you're selling yourself as a service, it takes an entirely different orientation. You need to add small pieces over time like social media, podcasting, and website work. Plus, networking is essential when you are selling yourself as a service. That way, you can be connected to the right social fabric. When you shift to private practice, you have to learn how to run your business differently.
Improve Your Professional Life With Mindfulness Mindfulness is the number one thing you can do to improve your personal and professional life. If you want to lift your life's quality, learning to be mindful will change your brain matter. Through mindfulness, your prefrontal cortex actually gains more material. That material in your brain is going to make your world a lot easier than it is today. You will be calmer, more resilient, and you will have a lot more choices than you did before. It's time to teach yourself how to slow things down enough to be mindful. You can learn this over time; it's a skill!
Saving Time By Using The Power of Mindfulness If you don't have time to learn about mindfulness, then you really need to practice it! Would you rather spend 20 minutes getting something done frantically and get it done to 70% of your capacity? Or would you rather spend 20 minutes getting something done and be calmer and do it better? You might even do it in 15 minutes. With mindfulness, you can save time doing your tasks. More importantly, you will have a better quality of life. What's the point of being busy? If you're always busy, your life is going to be over before you know it.
The Basics Behind Mindfulness First, Brett will teach clients about mindfulness. Most people don't know what mindfulness means or what it looks like. Brett will tell clients how to separate their thoughts and identity; once you can do this, it's pure magic. You can't read a book about mindfulness and understand it. Instead, it would help if you practiced mindfulness. We have a choice about what voice we listen to in our heads. Think about how your inner critic is taking over your thoughts and behaviors. The practice of mindfulness is responding to which voice we listen to.
The Formula To Find Your Niche Brett has built his niche around mindfulness. He will show up on people's podcasts and talk about mindfulness, explain how it works, and even demonstrate. This routine has established Brett as an expert in this field. So, when people discover Brett, they find him in the context of mindfulness and mindful communication. It's important to frame yourself as an expert on some topic and have a lot of referenceable material. A niche is about having an identity and being an expert at said identity.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Brett's Resources Language of Mindfulness How to Start a Mindfulness Meditation Practice The Language of Mindfulness Podcast Brett's Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Apply For My Focus Group [Starts November 2021] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Jenn Uren of This Mom Knows Podcast joins the show. She talks about staying organized and letting go of her perfectionism while homeschooling five children. If your systems and processes aren't working as smoothly as possible, Jenn explains why you need to remove yourself from the process. If you can't remove yourself from your practice, then find a fresh set of eyes to look for you. Tune in as Jenn talks about the importance of support, finding time to focus, and how to make your least favorite tasks more doable.
Meet Jenn Uren As a mompreneur, every business “yes” can feel like parenting “no” - and the mom guilt kicks in! Jenn Uren helps mompreneurs find and implement the right systems, tools, and processes to help them focus their time and be their best as both “mom” and “entrepreneur”. As a homeschooling mom of 5 (3 bios and 2 by a surprise adoption), she is familiar with the constant pull between task and relationship while making sure all that needs to happen does. Her husband Jim is a serial entrepreneur and together they have had enjoyed flipping the script from building a life around a job to building businesses that allow them to live their priorities. The This Mom Knows podcast is a place where mompreneurs can find encouragement, support, and connection with other women business owners who KNOW.
Lessons Learned From A Mom of Five There is some truth to birth order, and each child is so different and unique. Jenn has had to learn how to let go of her perfectionism. When Jenn wants to try something new as a parent, she tries it for six months to see how it works. Everyone works with systems and routines; you can always find things that need to run smoother. Business owners can be the bottleneck to a process. If you find a way to remove yourself from the process, then flow can happen again.
Observe What’s Happening In Your Private Practice Business owners can be the stumbling block, and we are our own worst enemy. We can't see what's going on in our business because we are too close. So sometimes, it's helpful to sit back and become an observer. Watch what's happening in your home and watch what is happening in your business. If you're still too close to observe your business, then have someone else look at it with a fresh pair of eyes; they can see things that we can't see. Plus, they can notice things that we might not notice. Shifting into the role of an observer can help you figure things out.
Asking For Support With Your Practice Another way to help your business is by asking for support. Mastermind Groups and Focus Groups are a great way to find support in private practice. Find colleagues that you can rely on to be vulnerable with and to talk to about things. You can find people that you can ask for help from. Also, you can swap challenging tasks with other people. Maybe you're good at one task, and your friend is good at another task. Well, swap with each other! That way, you get to do what you like to do, and you get to help a friend too!
Beating Overwhelm By Doing A Brain Dump The three things that consume us are our time, our thoughts, and our things. We need to give margin, boundaries, and space in our life so that we can say yes to the unexpected. That way, we have the capacity to think and create; we have the ability for something new to come into our space. All without bursting at the seams; that's what is overwhelming us. Overwhelm happens when we don't take the time to purge. If you take the time to do a brain dump, you won't have to think about everything. Instead, you get your thoughts on paper and finally focus. When we can concentrate and use our time well, we feel like our business is going well. That's what gives us that sense that all is balanced and integrated.
Think About What You Spend Time Avoiding Think about what things you are spending time and energy avoiding. For a lot of people, it's their laundry. For other people, it's their meal planning. If you hate to cook, then you need to figure out a way to make it work. Jenn hates cooking, but she figured out how to still cook every night for her family. For instance, she uses an Instant Pot for many of her meals. Also, Jenn will prep dinner when she makes breakfast. Don't be afraid to ask for help from your family when it's age-appropriate.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jenn's Resources This Mom Knows - Website This Mom Knows - Podcast 5 Simple Things To Support Your Business Jenn on Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Apply For My Focus Group [Starts November 2021] Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
I am lucky to have many of my good friends and peers join the show. Uriah Guilford, Jessica Tappana, and Whitney Owens are here for a casual conversation. First, we dive into the importance of diversifying your income. We open up about what it's like to run a practice as well as another business. Both isolation and imposter syndrome can show up for us; we talk about ways to overcome and navigate our limiting beliefs. Later, we chat about the importance of finding a community to build you up, make you feel confident, and allow you to be vulnerable on your journey.
Meet Uriah Guilford I am a licensed therapist & group practice owner. I want to help you be more productive, profitable & happy with your business and your life. Basically, work less and get more done!
If you have achieved any level of success in your private practice then you can relate to the following. You have more tasks to complete than hours in the day. You work super hard because you are passionate and want to grow. Sometimes you neglect your self-care and other important things in your life. Not so great right!?
That is why I have built a team of amazing virtual assistants for practice owners just like you! Hiring a virtual assistant in 2012 was one of the best decisions I ever made. It allowed me to double my business income without feeling like I was losing my mind. Actually, go on vacation and not be tied to my iPhone the whole time.
And serve my clients better! It made such a massive difference for me and it can for you as well! If this sounds interesting, check out our services page and the most frequently asked questions we get all the time.
Meet Whitney Owens I enjoy working with both adults and adolescents on an individual basis. I have experience working with those suffering from depression, anxiety, self-harming behaviors, identity formation, relational issues, and other mood disorders. I use a variety of therapeutic models such as Cognitive Behavioral Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, and Interpersonal Therapy. I have been seeing clients since 2009 in a variety of settings. While earning my Master in Professional Counseling from Richmont Graduate University, I saw young adults at a residential treatment facility. In 2010 I moved to Colorado where I spent four years working at an inpatient and day treatment facility. Also while in Colorado, I joined a group practice and saw teenagers and adults.
In 2014 I moved back to Savannah and started Water’s Edge Counseling. I am a Licensed Professional Counselor in Georgia and a member of the American Counseling Association and the Licensed Professional Counseling Association of Georgia. In addition to counseling, I also offer a number of other services including training and speaking engagements.
Meet Jessica Tappana Jessica Tappana started her private practice on her maternity leave about 20 months ago. After filling up in only a matter of months, she decided to bring on other therapists as 1099s and transitioned Aspire Counseling into a group practice. Worried about how she would fill the caseloads of these new therapists, Jessica tried several different marketing strategies. Ultimately, she decided to focus on getting her website to the first page of Google and began teaching herself SEO at nights after her kids were in bed. Slowly after gathering a couple of tips here and there, she got her website to the first page for nearly every keyword she targets. Aspire Counseling has grown to now include five therapists and a virtual assistant! In fact, all of the therapists are nearly full, and Jessica hopes to find a few more quality team members in the months to come.
Create Another Business For An Additional Income Stream A theme that people hear from me a lot on the podcast is how it's important to diversify income. Uriah, Jessica, and Whitney all run at least two businesses. There are a lot of unique challenges that come with owning multiple businesses. One of the great things about having two businesses is constantly waking up excited. If you're less excited about one business, at least you can get excited about your other project. However, having two businesses can come with a lot of stress, and people from the outside looking in don't get to see that side of things. No matter what, you can wake up every day and bring 'you' into that business.
Battling Isolation and Imposter Syndrome In Private Practice As practice owners and business owners, it can get very isolating at times. So, sometimes imposter syndrome shows up. Uriah says one of the most valuable things for battling the isolation and imposter syndrome is feedback. Feedback is invaluable on your private practice journey. When you have people you can gain feedback from, you will walk away with thousand times more confidence. Everyone struggles with their business, so if you can hear other people's experiences, it will make you feel less isolated. Plus, this feedback will shape the future of your business for the better.
Find Support No Matter Where You Are In Your Journey Regardless of where you are in private practice, you need support. Find a group of people that you trust to help you on your journey. Make sure you're comfortable with this group, and you can be vulnerable with them. The power of a group is having a community where you can share anything. As therapists, we all know the importance of group work and community. A mastermind group can be a powerful tool to uplevel your practice and uplevel your business. It will give you the confidence to keep working on your business and take the next step.
Take A Risk, Get To Know Others, and Create A Community Private practice is hard, and managing people is hard. So, make sure to take care of yourself so you can have energy in your businesses. Get out of your comfort zone and meet people. If you're not already in one, create a community for yourself. Get involved and take risks in getting to know people. In general, therapists are pretty safe people. It would help if you weren't too scared to reach out to someone and get to know them.
[fusebox_transcript]
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Uriah’s Resources Productive Therapist Guilford Family Counseling Instagram Whitney’s Resources Waters Edge Counseling Grow Your Faith-Based Practice with Faith in Practice Mastermind! Practice of the Practice: Faith in Practice Podcast Jessica’s Resources Aspire Counseling MO Simplified SEO Consulting Email: Jessica@SimplifiedSEOConsulting.com Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Join the Practice of Therapy Focus Group Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Thursday (Oct. 28th) at 1pm ET: Using Google Workspace In Private Practice Free Webinar: Using Google Workspace for Practice Management Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, podcast editor and content creator Rachel Bond joins the show. We talk about how The Practice of Therapy Podcast gets made. If you have a podcast of your own, Rachel gives tips for promoting it on social media. Plus, we chat about saving time on social media by batching content, creating a calendar, and even outsourcing. Tune in as Rachel talks about helping students for FREE with Affordable College Prep. Plus, I have an exciting announcement at the end of the show – you don’t want to miss it!
Meet Rachel Bond Rachel Bond graduated with her MBA in 2019. After college, she freelanced full-time as a writer, content creator, and podcast editor. Plus, Rachel completed the Disney College Program and two years of AmeriCorps service.
Recently, Rachel and Dr. Alan Seidman started a nonprofit, 501(c)(3) called Affordable College Prep (ACP). As Vice President and Managing Director of Affordable College Prep, Rachel aims to help students from lower-income backgrounds make affordable college choices and complete higher education using their free coaching. Rachel loves to help students with their college applications, essays, and scholarship search. Learn more at affordablecollegeprep.com.
How The Practice of Therapy Podcast Gets Made Gordon uploads audio from the interview, which is pulled from Zoom into Google Drive. From there, we go into an audio editing software and upload the audio into a template. Rachel takes time to comb through the audio and cut anything out. From there, we will plug the audio into Levelator. The Levelator is a free software that will level, compress, and normalize the audio in a matter of minutes.
In iTunes, Rachel can finish the id3 tags. The id3 tags are bits of information that display on the track. For instance, she always makes sure there's an artist name, album name, year, genre, etc. At this point, everything is done for the audio, so it's ready for our podcast hosting service. We use Libsyn – and they will distribute the podcast to all of the apps like Apple Podcasts, Spotify, Google, Amazon.
From there, Rachel will upload the complete audio into Otter.ai, which is a transcription service. Depending on how long the audio is, it could take a few minutes to 15 minutes to finish. Once finished, we will have a written version of the podcast, also known as a transcript. Using the transcript, Rachel will write the podcast show notes that get uploaded to Libsyn and WordPress. You can always check out our show notes on the practiceoftherapy.com
Promoting Your Podcast on Social Media Promoting your podcast on social media is a great tool to get listeners and guests on your show. Each social media platform is different, so it does take time to alter your posts, but it's worth it. For instance, in Canva, you can change your graphics based on where you post them. Also, you can't post as much text on Twitter as you can on Instagram. Plus, the links don't work on Instagram as well as they do on LinkedIn. So there's a lot of tweaking that is time-consuming, but it's worth it.
Saving Time With Social Media Outsourcing is a great way to save time on this. Another great way to save time on social media is by creating a calendar. It can help you visualize all your planned posts for the next weeks or months ahead. Buffer is a software designed to manage social accounts by scheduling posts to Twitter, Facebook, Instagram, Pinterest, and LinkedIn. IGTV is another social media tool you can utilize for your podcast. If you're recording a podcast, record with the video on! That way, you can use the video to promote your podcast, tease the episode, and introduce the guest to your audience.
Free Advising With Affordable College Prep If you need help with anything college, Rachel wants to be the person to give a helping hand. All of the Affordable College Prep services are currently free to high school and college students. We help students with their college applications, essays, and finding scholarships. We also help students who are looking into grad school.
According to the National Center for Education, about 59% of students seeking a bachelor's degree at a 4-year institution have completed that degree within six years. A big part of the problem is not finding the right school that will fit the student financially. Not only do we want to help students get into college, but we also want to see them graduate.
You can follow us on Instagram @AffordableCollegePrep
You can also check out our website AffordableCollegePrep.com
Rachel’s Favorite Practice of Therapy Podcast Episodes Whitney & James Owens | Using The Enneagram In Your Practice | TPOT 191
Check out the course: Understanding & Utilizing the Enneagram (10 CE Hours)
Andréa Jones | Beating Social Media Overwhelm In Private Practice | TPOT 181
LaRonda Starling | Self-Care In Times of Crisis | TPOT 131
BEST OF: Social Justice In and Out of the Therapy Room | TPOT 158
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Rachel Bond's Resources Rachel on LinkedIn Affordable College Prep Affordable College Prep on Instagram The Affordable College Prep Facebook Group Affordable College Prep on Twitter Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Free Webinar: Using Google Workspace for Practice Management Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
I learned a lot of things about starting a private practice the hard way. I'm grateful to share the lessons that I learned from my journey and help you not make the same mistakes that I did. First, I speak about the importance of knowing your 'why' on starting a private practice. Once you know your 'why,' other aspects of your business will begin to fall into place. Tune in as I dive deep into lessons learned around finances, marketing, outsourcing, and systems. Plus, I direct you to all sorts of resources that will help you on your journey. Thanks for being with me!
Knowing Your 'Why' For Private Practice Why did you want to go into this profession, to begin with? Why did you want to go into clinical work, become a therapist, a social worker, psychologist, marriage and family therapist, licensed professional counselor, or whatever you are within this particular profession? Your 'why' is an important piece to keep in mind as you build your private practice. So, I invite you to think about your inspiration. When we get busy with business, we can lose sight of our inspiration, and eventually, we will feel a little burnt out. Private practice is hard work! We have experienced a lot of struggles because of Covid, so knowing your why is more important than ever.
Private Practice Isn't For Everyone One of the things that you need is a sense of wanting to feed the creative side of yourself. We can all feed our creative selves differently, but is a private practice adding to your creative side? One of the things that you need to be successful in private practice is an entrepreneurial spirit. In other words, you need to accept challenges along the way on your private practice journey. I love to learn about the business side of things; it's what inspired me to start The Practice of Therapy back in 2016. I started this podcast so I could share lessons learned around the business aspects of private practice.
Learning About The Financial Side of Private Practice One of the first things you have to learn about private practice is the money side of the business. I put together a course on teaching people about the financial side of private practice. When you go into business, you need to have some money to kind of back that up. A lot of traditional companies do it through investors. In other words, they get people to give them money for some return on that investment. When we go into private practice, we want to be self-sufficient. If you're interested in learning more about managing the financial side of your practice, check out my course Money Matters In Private Practice.
Have Money Saved Before Starting Your Private Practice So, I started in private practice, doing it part-time and working for an agency. The extra income took the pressure off of me when I built my private practice. I wouldn't recommend diving into private practice unless you have enough money to back yourself up. I spent a year saving money, so I had a reserve. That way, if something happened, I had a buffer to protect me through emergencies. You need at least three to six months of income and expenses saved away before you jump into full-time. It will take a tremendous amount of pressure off of yourself.
There Is More Than Enough Business For All of Us One thing that I've learned during the pandemic is that there is more than enough business for all of us. It's a matter of being able to put yourself out there and market your practice in a way that people can find you. That's all marketing is, is just making sure that you've got a website that is performing well and you are networking with the right people. If you are insurance-based, you need to be on the right insurance panels. I have a Facebook Live where I give all sorts of marketing ideas. You can watch the replay HERE.
Keep It Simple When I first started my practice, I made my systems and processes much more complicated than they needed to be. So one of the things I would recommend is to keep it simple and don't make it overly difficult for yourself. People start getting worried about regulations such as HIPAA, state requirements, and all that. You don't want to do anything illegal and unethical. However, these fears can hold us back. You don't need to make things overly complicated. The bottom line to HIPAA is that we protect client information; that's something we do anyway in our profession. Make sure that you encrypt your equipment, and you encrypt your storage of documents. Please read my blog about HIPAA Anxiety In Private Practice.
Outsource Your Administrative Functions In Private Practice People are reluctant to invest in things that are going to be a better use of their time. When initially starting a practice, therapists do too much of the work that isn't a good return on their time. For instance, if you're still returning phone calls to your clients and scheduling your clients, then you might want to outsource. Whenever I do consult therapists, that's the first place I start. The more you can outsource your administrative functions, the easier it will be for your practice. You can bootstrap and do these things yourself when you don't have a lot of clients. However, at some point, you will have to outsource it. I recommend outsourcing if you have ten or more clients per week.
Think About Ways To Diversify Your Income There are only so many clients you can see in one day. There are only so many clients you can see in a week. One of the things that you will want to think about doing is diversifying your income. If you're going to increase your revenue within your business, many people believe they need more clients. However, it might not be a good return on the investment of your time. So, the next logical step for a lot of people is starting a group practice. A group practice might not be for everyone. You need leadership skills, and you need to enjoy working with other people. Check out my free webinar Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income HIPAA Anxiety In Private Practice Money Matters In Private Practice Marketing and Diversifying Income Killin'It Camp Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Have you ever thought about where the seven-day week comes from? In this episode, Joe talks about his brand new book, Thursday Is The New Friday. The seven-day week was created four thousand years ago, and the forty-hour workweek was built in 1926. We are the post-pandemic generation that gets to say, do we want to do work the way we used to, or are we going to create something new? Tune in as we chat about productivity, slowing down, and the importance of outsourcing.
Meet Joe Sanok Joe Sanok, MA, LLP, LPC, NCC is the person behind the #1podcast for therapists, The Practice of the Practice. Joe has helped hundreds of private practice owners in growing and scaling their private practices. Joe has also been a mentor and coach for Gordon in his journey and inspired him to start The Practice of Therapy.
Joe says, “In 2012 I launched Practice of the Practice to blog about what I was learning about business, marketing, and private practice. Since then, my income has gone up over 2,000%. In the beginning, I was making around $1000 per month. In 2015, I grossed over $200k! In fact, every month I post exactly what I made and how I made it. It’s important to me, because we don’t usually talk about money and how to make it in an ethical way. I want to increase your influence and your income!”
Where Did The Seven-Day Workweek Come From? Where did the seven-day workweek come from? How do we understand just this concept of time to begin? A year makes sense: it's when the earth goes around the sun. Also, a day makes sense: it's how long it takes the world to spin. However, the seven-day workweek doesn't make sense. When the Babylonians over 4,000 years ago looked up in the sky, they saw seven essential things: the sun, the moon, earth, Mercury, Venus, Mars, and Jupiter. With that, they said we should have a seven-day week. The Romans had a ten-day week, and the Egyptians had an eight-day week. We think that this seven-day week is just how it is. Well, we could have had a five-day week and had seventy-three of them in a year.
The Industrialists Gave Us A Forty-Hour Workweek Fast forward to the 1900s; the average person was working ten to fourteen hours a day, six to seven days a week. There were protests around this – people wanted a forty-hour workweek. There was a national lockdown because they were scared that these protests and the uprising would spread. In 1926, Henry Ford said he would start the forty-hour workweek. Henry Ford wanted to sell more cars, and he knew people were not going to buy a car to get to work faster. However, if they had a weekend and wanted to visit their friends and family quickly, they would buy a car. The industrialists gave us this model of how to view the world.
It's Time To Slow Down To Get More Done The research shows that when we slow down, when we're not maxed out and stressed out, that's actually when our productivity and our creativity go up. When we slow down correctly, we truly can do better work. You shouldn't check your email after your kids are in bed; maybe you shouldn't work as hard on a Friday, perhaps you should rein in some of those hard and soft boundaries. When you are ready to kill it, how do you do that? We can use neuroscience to inform the way that you work so you get more done. Gordon is a fan of using the Full Focus Planner. It forces Gordon to slow down, think about things, and process stuff in a different way. Most of us are on our phones all day. With the paper planner, we can focus more on what we are doing.
Stop Getting Distracted From What Means The Most Whenever you are distracted from your business for one minute, that's one minute less you will get to spend with your friends and family. If you spend half an hour roaming the internet, that's half an hour you could be playing with your children. When you do things that distract you, you are really stealing time from the people you love the most. Often, when we get distracted, it's a lack of planning. If your day is sketched out, then you won't have time for distractions. Think about what is the highest use of your time. Make sure that you blackout time to get done what you need to get done.
The Importance of Outsourcing In Private Practice Thursday is the new Friday which means you are giving yourself less time to do the same tasks. If you have 20 tasks in a week, and you give yourself 20% less time, most likely, you're going to drop the ball on some things. That gives you some critical data of what's essential. You're not going to do the fifteen least necessary tasks. Instead, you're going to do the fifteen most important tasks. It's time to outsource the things that you can! There are those things that are not a great use of your time that you hate doing that still need to be done. Find a virtual assistant who can take things off of your plate.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Joe’s Resources Practice of the Practice Thursday is the New Friday: How to Work Fewer Hours, Make More Money, and Spend Time Doing What You Want Killin'It Camp Joe Sanok | How To "Kill-it" In Private Practice | TPOT 041 Joe Sanok | How To Level-Up and Grow Your Practice | TPOT 011 Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health: First month free with promo code TPOTPODCAST Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Get Your Copy of The Full Focus Planner Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Today we talk about preparing for emergencies in private practice. As a solo practitioner, certain things need to be in place before you have an emergency on your hands. If you haven't started preparing yet, then it's not too late! Gabe Nelson joins the show to explain exactly what you need to do to be ready for the worst possible scenarios. Tune in as we chat about saving for emergency funds, getting the right insurance, and ensuring you are protected as a business owner.
Meet Gabe Nelson With almost three decades in the financial services industry and more than a decade as an independent small business owner, Gabe Nelson already had an established thriving practice and solid reputation in his industry when he recognized an interesting trend among some of his favorite clients.
More and more, he found himself working with self-employed professionals and solo-entrepreneurs. And as a business owner himself, he was fired up about helping them navigate the unique challenges they were facing – because he was just like them.
He understood that independent professionals have specific needs. Most financial advisors don’t know exactly what it takes to transition from employee to independent contractor status or establish long-term financial security without relying on a regular paycheck.
He also knew that with more of the workforce becoming self-employed every day, more people could benefit from working with an advisor who knows how to plan for the whole financial picture, including legal, estate, financial, retirement, life, disability, and more — with an entrepreneurial spirit.
So he took his passion for providing a personal touch with hands-on problem-solving and solution-oriented comprehensive planning and decided to focus on serving solo entrepreneurs.
Preparing For The Worst Possible Event We're talking about preparing for emergencies or preparing for the worst thing that could possibly happen. It would help if you protect yourself from a crisis as a practicing therapist. This preparation should come in handy whether you're running a solo practice or a group practice. There are certain things that you need to start thinking about and putting into place.
For instance, make sure you have money set aside in case something happens. If something does happen to your practice, and you're not able to keep working or seeing your clients, then what is your plan? The pandemic was a great test run for a lot of people. The beautiful thing about therapy is that you can still see clients virtually and do a lot of your practice through telemedicine.
Start Saving For Your Emergency Fund Today If you haven't yet, then it's time to set aside a certain amount of money in your practice. It would help if you considered how much money you are willing to save. It can be anywhere from three months to six months or even twelve months. Gabe recommends that solo private practice owners reserve twelve months of their income for emergency use. As a solo practitioner, that business checkbook is kind of like your personal checkbook. Many people think that if their business is doing well, they are going to be okay on the personal side. However, that is not always the case.
Do You Have The Proper Insurance? The next step is to start making sure that you've got some adequate insurance in place to protect you from those types of things that could happen. No one ever likes to talk about insurance. I mean, no one's talking about life insurance, and they don't want to talk about disability insurance. These are all things that you need to start thinking about when you are an adult businessperson and running a practice. Make sure that you've got an adequate amount of life insurance in place. Gabe is a huge fan of just Straight Term Life Insurance; keep it simple, get as much coverage as you can, and for the lowest cost.
Who Will Take Over Your Business? If something does happen to you, what is going to happen to your business? Do you have another set therapist or a firm that is set and ready to buy your practice from you? That way, you can realize all of those years of hard work you put together to benefit your family? Over the last ten years, the investment advisory world has gotten big into that because they realize the trust and relationships we build with our clients. That's a piece of protection that most solopreneurs don't think about.
Find Protection As A Business Owner Lastly, it would help if you had some business owner protection. What if there is a fire at your workplace? What if there is a flood in your home? Do you have some of those protections in place that would at least give you some replacement of income? It would help if you had some insurance protections that would replace your computer or your software. Business owner's insurance is a policy that combines both property and liability coverage into one package. Don't forget to consider other types of insurance like life insurance and disability insurance.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Gabe's Resources Gabe’s Podcast Gabe’s Website Gabe’s Resources Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Fall Into Cash 2021 Space Holder Live With Marissa Lawton Killin'It Camp Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Dr. Chin is here to chat all about her new app, CE Hub. CE Hub is a tool for mental health professionals to store their continuing education certificates and track their units earned toward licensure. You can upload your certificates, and CE Hub will take care of the rest. Tune in as we talk about diversifying your income, the importance of outsourcing, and the nuts and bolts of creating your very own application.
Meet Dr. Lani Chin In therapy, my goal is to assist you in addressing issues that are difficult to confront on your own, which often manifest as anxiety, depression, or dissatisfaction in relationships and/or your career. I approach our work together collaboratively, by helping you to articulate your thoughts and feelings in a safe, confidential, and nonjudgmental environment. My task is to encourage you to express yourself, clarify your goals, and explore the obstacles that have held you back.
I listen, reflect, and use clinical methods based on my training and expertise. I strive to help you develop strategies that support the progress you desire. I listen for the patterns in your life and help you identify them so that you can develop a clearer understanding of your life experiences and develop new, more satisfying ways of relating. My understanding as a therapist is informed by my training and clinical experience but also grounded by a long-held commitment to my own psychological work and development.
The Double Pandemic of Social Isolation Dr. Chin works with people that identify as being different. So whether they are cultural minorities or people in the LGBTQ community, those are mostly the people she works with. Also, Dr. Chin works with individuals, couples, and anyone who identifies as different or feels like they're outside. Usually, Dr. Chin's clients feel a level of isolation in general. Plus, the pandemic has been incredibly difficult. People already feel isolated because they are different on top of the isolation from the pandemic – it's a double whammy for patients.
Track Your Continuing Education Certificates Dr. Chin launched the CE Hub App. It's a new, easier way to store and track your Continuing Education certificates. You can safely and conveniently store all of the documents you need to renew your license in one place. Plus, the app lets you track your progress along the way, so you know exactly where you stand. No longer will therapists have to search for misplaced certification, there will be no more guesswork about how many credits you've earned, and no more miscounting when it's time to renew.
How The CE Hub App Works First, people log in. The first screen asks you questions about the certificates that you've earned. So you'll enter the title, the number of credits earned, and whether or not it was a live course. You can indicate that on the app and then save a copy of the certificate as a PDF. Then you enter in your license information and what your profession is like psychologist, marriage and family therapist, licensed clinical social worker, or licensed professional counselor. You'll also input what state you're in and the number of units you need to complete.
Creating Goals Around Continuing Education You can keep a mental goal for yourself. If you want to pursue EMDR training or have X number of diversity credits that you've earned, you can set your personal goals within the app that might go beyond what the state requires. The app then matches what you've entered against what the requirements are. It puts that information into a pie chart. So it graphs out how many certificates you've done, and then it breaks it down by category according to what subject area the credit was in. It stores the certificates for you. So it's all through PDF. Then, if anything happens where you need an additional copy of the certificate, you can get on there and email the PDF to yourself.
Outsourcing Work When Creating An App Dr. Chin outsourced the work for her app. She first started with a wireframing of the app. Dr. Chin knew what screens she wanted in the app and the function that they would provide. She's been fortunate that they could translate what she drew and made a pretty nice representation of what she had imagined. The app went from PowerPoint to a fully functioning application. To find people to work on the app, Dr. Chin did a lot of interviews. She wanted someone who understood mental health workers and what psychologists do. If you're looking to outsource, Dr. Chin recommends checking out UpWork.
How Creating An App Can Diversify Your Income Dr. Chin likes to do a variety of things during the workweek. Doing an online course wasn't part of her personality – it didn't seem to resonate with who she is. So, Dr. Chin decided to make an app as a way to diversify her income. After talking to her peers, people were excited about the CE Hub App. It's always great to diversify income because you never know what is going to happen. Also, being strictly in private practice can be very overwhelming. The app is a helpful way for Dr. Chin to interact with people in a different context.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Dr. Lani Chin's Resources CE Hub App - Use Code "GORDON" CE Hub App on Instagram CE Hub App on Facebook Website Instagram Facebook Twitter LinkedIn Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Fall Into Cash 2021 Space Holder Live With Marissa Lawton Killin'It Camp Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Dr. Chin is here to chat all about her new app, CE Hub. CE Hub is a tool for mental health professionals to store their continuing education certificates and track their units earned toward licensure. You can upload your certificates, and CE Hub will take care of the rest. Tune in as we talk about diversifying your income, the importance of outsourcing, and the nuts and bolts of creating your very own application.
Meet Dr. Lani Chin In therapy, my goal is to assist you in addressing issues that are difficult to confront on your own, which often manifest as anxiety, depression, or dissatisfaction in relationships and/or your career. I approach our work together collaboratively, by helping you to articulate your thoughts and feelings in a safe, confidential, and nonjudgmental environment. My task is to encourage you to express yourself, clarify your goals, and explore the obstacles that have held you back.
I listen, reflect, and use clinical methods based on my training and expertise. I strive to help you develop strategies that support the progress you desire. I listen for the patterns in your life and help you identify them so that you can develop a clearer understanding of your life experiences and develop new, more satisfying ways of relating. My understanding as a therapist is informed by my training and clinical experience but also grounded by a long-held commitment to my own psychological work and development.
The Double Pandemic of Social Isolation Dr. Chin works with people that identify as being different. So whether they are cultural minorities or people in the LGBTQ community, those are mostly the people she works with. Also, Dr. Chin works with individuals, couples, and anyone who identifies as different or feels like they're outside. Usually, Dr. Chin's clients feel a level of isolation in general. Plus, the pandemic has been incredibly difficult. People already feel isolated because they are different on top of the isolation from the pandemic – it's a double whammy for patients.
Track Your Continuing Education Certificates Dr. Chin launched the CE Hub App. It's a new, easier way to store and track your Continuing Education certificates. You can safely and conveniently store all of the documents you need to renew your license in one place. Plus, the app lets you track your progress along the way, so you know exactly where you stand. No longer will therapists have to search for misplaced certification, there will be no more guesswork about how many credits you've earned, and no more miscounting when it's time to renew.
How The CE Hub App Works First, people log in. The first screen asks you questions about the certificates that you've earned. So you'll enter the title, the number of credits earned, and whether or not it was a live course. You can indicate that on the app and then save a copy of the certificate as a PDF. Then you enter in your license information and what your profession is like psychologist, marriage and family therapist, licensed clinical social worker, or licensed professional counselor. You'll also input what state you're in and the number of units you need to complete.
Creating Goals Around Continuing Education You can keep a mental goal for yourself. If you want to pursue EMDR training or have X number of diversity credits that you've earned, you can set your personal goals within the app that might go beyond what the state requires. The app then matches what you've entered against what the requirements are. It puts that information into a pie chart. So it graphs out how many certificates you've done, and then it breaks it down by category according to what subject area the credit was in. It stores the certificates for you. So it's all through PDF. Then, if anything happens where you need an additional copy of the certificate, you can get on there and email the PDF to yourself.
Outsourcing Work When Creating An App Dr. Chin outsourced the work for her app. She first started with a wireframing of the app. Dr. Chin knew what screens she wanted in the app and the function that they would provide. She's been fortunate that they could translate what she drew and made a pretty nice representation of what she had imagined. The app went from PowerPoint to a fully functioning application. To find people to work on the app, Dr. Chin did a lot of interviews. She wanted someone who understood mental health workers and what psychologists do. If you're looking to outsource, Dr. Chin recommends checking out UpWork.
How Creating An App Can Diversify Your Income Dr. Chin likes to do a variety of things during the workweek. Doing an online course wasn't part of her personality – it didn't seem to resonate with who she is. So, Dr. Chin decided to make an app as a way to diversify her income. After talking to her peers, people were excited about the CE Hub App. It's always great to diversify income because you never know what is going to happen. Also, being strictly in private practice can be very overwhelming. The app is a helpful way for Dr. Chin to interact with people in a different context.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Dr. Lani Chin's Resources CE Hub App - Use Code "GORDON" CE Hub App on Instagram CE Hub App on Facebook Website Instagram Facebook Twitter LinkedIn Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Fall Into Cash 2021 Space Holder Live With Marissa Lawton Killin'It Camp Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Austin Kirkland from Brighter Vision joins the show. We chat all about the Fall Into Cash campaign. It's is a month-long event throughout September when they provide mental health professionals with the tools and steps to help them make more money in the fall months. If you want to get a head start on boosting your practice by becoming a Brighter Vision customer, then Fall Into Cash is one of their most significant sales. Tune in as we chat about improving your website, the importance of search engine optimization, and why you need to start blogging.
Meet Austin Kirkland Austin Kirkland is a Senior Account Executive at Brighter Vision. Austin has been a part of the Brighter Vision team for almost 3 years, but outside of work, he is a photographer! In fact, he was just commissioned by the Denver Parks and Recreation to shoot all their cityscapes for their 2021 print materials. If you’re interested, you can see his work on Instagram at @austinkirklandphotography.
What Exactly Does Brighter Vision Do? Brighter Vision makes marketing simple for therapists. They work one-on-one with therapists to get a custom website built that's unique to their practice. More important than the website itself, Brighter Vision will help market your services. They want to make sure that when a potential client searches for therapists, you will be one of the first options on Google. If you are intimated by building a website, then Brighter Vision is the way to go.
Is Social Media Overwhelming? Try Social Genie! Social Genie has a library of thousands of social media and blog posts that you can edit, customize, and schedule across all platforms in a matter of minutes. As a client of Brighter Vision, you can decide what type of content is posted. For instance, you can choose to have a post about anxiety released every single Monday. It takes only a matter of minutes to set up. As a client, you will also have the ability to view the schedule and see the upcoming posts. Plus, you'll have the option to and delete posts as you see fit.
All About The Fall Into Cash Campaign Brighter Vision's Fall Into Cash campaign is a month-long event throughout September when they provide mental health professionals with the tools and steps to help them make more money in the fall months. There'll be weekly blogs, webinars content over the entire month. Between all of us, we will be giving away about $17,000 worth of giveaways. Additionally, you also get a very, very heavy discount on the services with Brighter Vision. They love to provide free information and resources for therapists looking to grow their practices and fall into cash.
Get Help With Your Private Practice Website There are two types of clinicians that Brighter Vision works with when it comes to their website work. There's the clinician that doesn't have a website, and this is going to be their very first website. Often, this clinician doesn't have a niche yet; but Brighter Vision can still help market their services. While on the other hand, there are clinicians who currently have a website. More often than not, they are fed up with how the website is going. So, Austin likes to ask what they like about the website and what they don't like about it. More often than not, Austin can bring pretty much any aspect from their old website to their new website.
How Search Engine Optimization Works and The Importance of Blogs Without search engine optimization, your website's not going to be found unless they know the exact address of it. SEO is a code that describes your website to Google. That way, Google knows who to show your website to. One of the most important things to do around search engine optimization is blogging. A significant factor with how well a website will rank over time is simply how often it's being updated. Google wants to show its users relevant and up-to-date content. So by updating your website, then you are telling Google that you have new information. A great way to do that regularly is through blog posts.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Austin's Resources Brighter Vision Fall Into Cash Austin's Instagram Austin on LinkedIn Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Killin'It Camp Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Today, Tosha Rollins joins the show. She turned her passion into a private practice niche. One of the most important things about finding your niche is looking at what speaks to you. For Tosha, it's working with clients that have autism spectrum disorder. Research shows that only 2 out of 44 therapists feel comfortable working with autistic clients. So, there is a massive demand for referral resources and families that need our help. Tune in as Tosha speaks about the Autism Therapist Network, working with autistic clients, and the importance of continuing education for autism resources.
Meet Tosha Rollins Tosha Rollins is a Licensed Professional Counselor in South Carolina, and owner of Rollins Counseling, LLC. She is also a wife to Travis, and momma to three sons, ages 8-22, and stepmom to Kaylee, who is now in college. She loves adventures, traveling, nature, and spending time with her family. She started the Autism in Action Podcast because she wanted to help families connect with autism resources, services, and support.
She became frustrated trying to find an autism-trained counselor for her oldest two children on the autism spectrum and realized the shortage of trained professionals across the country. She decided to create the Autism Therapist Network to teach & mentor mental health clinicians how to feel more confident and competent working with autistic clients and families affected by autism. When she is not seeing clients, homeschooling her youngest son, podcasting, she is spending quality time with her family and planning her next adventure.
Finding Autism Resources and Ongoing Education Tosha's two oldest sons have autism spectrum disorder. After the diagnosis, Tosha decided to go into private practice and serve people on the spectrum. Research shows only 2 out of 44 mental health clinicians feel comfortable working with the autistic population. Unfortunately, this makes it hard for families to access services. A lot of times, it comes down to competency, skill sets, and education.
So many parents of autistic children complain about how hard it is to find mental health services for their children. In fact, 1 in 5 families has to move because they don't have access to services. Children with autism grow up to be adults with autism. There is a lack of services after children age out of school; it's a big concern. It's estimated that anywhere between 70,000 and 100,000 children aged out of high school services with minimal transitional supports in place.
A Therapist Community That Is Increasing Mental Health Autism Resources Tosha's primary mission is to educate clinicians and collaborate on the skill sets they need to improve on. Often we get comfortable with a specific niche or population. However, we need to do continuing education to meet our licensure requirements. Sadly, there's not a lot of training out there for the autism niche. Tosha is a fan of Pesi and the courses they offer. In fact, they have a Certified Autism Spectrum Disorder Clinical Specialist Intensive Training. Their training provides the education you need to deliver effective transformational strengths-based interventions, strategies, and approaches to support your clients.
Tosha created the Autism Therapist Network to help people expand their clinical skillsets for working with autistic clients. She provides online educational workshops and peer-driven clinical consultation groups to help you learn more about autism. In addition, the Autism Therapist Network is great for networking opportunities because of its online directory for all of its members. Lastly, their resources are perfect for anyone that wants to best support their autistic clients.
Mental Health Therapy and The Autistic Client Therapists need to be open-minded, adaptable, and flexible when working with the autistic population. You might have a particular intervention that is structured for CBT. However, you may have to modify it for your client's executive functioning or cognitive ability. So, therapists need to get a good overview of their clients' executive function, cognitive ability, and emotional regulation. Make sure that your client understands their emotions. Also, ensure that they have plenty of resources to take home and use as visual prompts. That way, your clients can regulate when they are not in therapy.
The number one consideration for working with the autism population is to make sure that you have the education behind it. In order to be comfortable and competent, you need to understand person-centered planning. Plus, you need to understand cognitive behavioral therapy and have an excellent toolbox to pull from when working with these clients. These are all things that Tosha teaches on her Autism Therapist Network. She has expert spotlights that come in and share their words of wisdom. The more you can grow your network, the more that you can learn.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Tosha's Resources Autism Therapist Network Autism In Action Podcast Tosha's Website Instagram LinkedIn Facebook Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health Understanding & Utilizing the Enneagram (10 CE Hours) Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Killin'It Camp Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Russell DuBois joins the show to talk about Blueprint and the importance of measurement-based care. Blueprint automatically gathers client data, measures client outcomes, and get insights at the point of care to make more informed treatment decisions. The more therapists can stay curious about their work, the more likely they are to avoid burnout. Tune in as we talk about how clients, clinicians, and group practice owners can benefit from using a measurement-based mental health care service like Blueprint.
Meet Russell DuBois Dr. Russell DuBois is a psychologist specializing in psychological testing, pediatric & behavioral health psychology, and technology for innovation in mental healthcare. He has over 30+ published research studies, book chapters, and professional presentations at national and international conferences and acts as a peer-reviewer for multiple scientific research journals.
Dr. DuBois has held clinical and research training positions at top institutions including Massachusetts General Hospital / Harvard Medical School, Alpert Medical School at Brown University, and Northeastern University. He is the Clinical & Research Director at Blueprint, a leading digital mental health screening, and assessment platform. His areas of expertise include: mood disorders, eating disorders, mindfulness, mental health technology and innovation, clinical data science, pediatric psychology, health psychology, and psychological testing and evaluation.
Preventing Burnout With Measurement-Based Care We're all busy, strapped for time, and struggling to keep up with the requirements to be a therapist. A lot of us go into our therapy sessions blind. Clients show up every week, we ask how things are going, and it gets really repetitive. It's challenging if you are doing therapy full-time because the repetition can lead to burnout. When you lose a sense of curiosity, that is a massive sign of burnout.
Curiosity is at the heart of staying engaged as a therapist. Measurement-based care helps you be much more informed about your clients and their lived experiences. You have a lot of information that you can learn from and use during the session to help you out. That way, you aren't flying by the seat of your pants. When you're able to collect information and get data about your clients that you never thought you would otherwise, you can approach your work with clients in an inquisitive way, which is healthy from a burnout perspective.
The Basics Behind Blueprint Russell has over 100,000 clients on his platform. Blueprint will listen to both the needs and the problems of therapists. Blueprint is a digital platform that operates at three levels: clients, clinicians, and group practice owners. Russell built Blueprint on top of decades of research proving that measurement-based care improves client outcomes and reduces the time-to-remission. They track and analyze a combination of data, including symptoms, lifestyle metrics, and wearable devices, to give you a deeper understanding of a client's mental health to better personalize care.
Why Clients Enjoy Blueprint Clients can download the app and track crucial information about their mental health and wellness. So they can track things like trends in their mood and their energy. Plus, they can record their sleep quality and social engagement over time. Clients can connect their blueprint app to their GPS in their health kit on their phone so that they can track the number of steps taken each day and how long they are spending at home each day. It's a wonderful tool for clients to improve self-awareness and to understand themselves a little bit better.
How Blueprint Helps Clinicians Clinicians or therapists can use a blueprint to become more informed about their clients. There are different types of screening measures that clinicians can use. Blueprint is a big fan of aligning the measurements library that our partners have with the kind of work their clinicians do. For instance, they have measures on couple satisfaction, family cohesion, and mindfulness. Whatever it is, there is probably a measurement on Blueprint for it. Through that process, clinicians or therapists can access all this information in real-time to help learn and educate themselves about their clients over time. Overall, clinicians can rely on this data to provide this higher quality measurement-based care.
Improve Your Group Practice With Blueprint Blueprint is not only great for clients and clinicians; Blueprint is excellent for group practice owners. Blueprint is an easy way to track and report on population outcomes. Plus, you can grow your revenue by submitting insurance claims for blueprint assessments. You don't need to be a data scientist; you don't need any measurement background; it's all done for you through the software. Plus, when clients experience this measurement-based care, their engagement in treatment goes up—measurement-based care reduced dropout rates by twenty percent. For a group practice owner, that's a critical measurement to know.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Russell's Resources Blueprint Health Russell on LinkedIn Blueprint on LinkedIn Email: Russell@blueprint-health.com Twitter Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Blueprint Health Understanding & Utilizing the Enneagram (10 CE Hours) Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
One of the questions that I get asked a lot is just around how to structure your practice. So, in this episode, I walk through with you exactly how I have my practice structured. I talk about the process from the time we receive a client intake form to when we discharge a client and all the things that happen along the way. I speak about both the business and clinical side of my practice. Lastly, I make sure to point out all the software we use to keep our practice running as smoothly and as efficiently as possible.
How We Do Our Intakes In addition to the other clinicians working with me, we also have a part-time intake coordinator. The vast majority of people that come to us usually is through our website www.kingsportcounseling.com. In addition, we do get a fair number of direct referrals from doctors' offices and insurances. We are an insurance-based practice, and we get many referrals from people who find us in the insurance company directories.
People will contact us predominantly through phone calls. At our practice, we use https://www.phone.com/. It is a modern, work-from-anywhere solution for today's agile, mobile, and always-on growing businesses. Our intake coordinator can use her app at home to answer phone calls. Usually, one of the first things you want to outsource is somebody to answer the phone. Keep in mind that it is great to have a system that is accessible from anywhere in the country.
Setting Up Appointments In TherapyNotes The one thing about TherapyNotes that I love is that it's also linked to a clearinghouse. Since we're insurance-based, all of the insurance claims are filed through TherapyNotes. We set up the patient's biographical information, and we do our documentation; all of those sorts of things are completed through TherapyNotes. In other words, the whole clinical side of our practice is managed through TherapyNotes. However, there are some forms that we have in Google Workspace. When we have a new client, we send them to the TherapyNotes portal. They fill out all their intake paperwork, and we do all the billing through TherapyNotes.
Filing Individual Insurance Claims Now, as far as filing individual insurance claims, I've got that outsourced as well through Practice Solutions. Practice Solutions make sure all the claims are ready to be sent in. Plus, they follow up if there are problems with a claim or if the insurance company rejects it. Both of these things can be very time-consuming; that's why I decided to outsource those tasks. If you have time to do those things, you can do all of that in conjunction with TherapyNotes. For my size practice, it's more cost-efficient to outsource those items.
What You Need For Online Therapy Each therapist within our practice sets their own schedule. They also are made aware of when clients owe money, or when we need to collect the copay. We follow up individually with each client about what they owe us, and if they owe a copay or not. TherapyNotes is a wonderful platform to handle all of this. Plus, TherapyNotes has a telehealth portal that can be used to do sessions with people. During Covid, we were using doxy.me. They make telemedicine simple and easy to use for both therapists and patients. The downside of the free version of doxy.me is that you could only see one client at a time. Another platform we used during Covid was Google Meet.
Valuable Tools That Make My Practice Efficient For faxes, we use a service called Sfax. If we need to fax providers or fax things to people, we use that service. Sfaxenables you to send, receive, annotate, digitally sign and manage faxes without printing a single physical document.
I use QuickBooks as my main accounting software. However, in QuickBooks, you have to be careful about not using client names.
I have a course out there called Money Matters In Private Practice. It goes into the whole accounting side of running a private practice.
Gusto is the payroll service that I use. I enter payroll twice a month to pay my clinicians. Plus, we can get our health insurance through Gusto. Everything syncs automatically — time tracking, new hires, benefits plans, and more.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Enneagram Course Killin’It Camp Google Workspace As A Practice Management Platform Gusto Phone.com Practice Solutions TherapyNotes Doxy.me QuickBooks Sfax Google Meet Money Matters In Private Practice Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Whitney and James Owens join the show to talk about the origins and usefulness of the Enneagram. They explain how identifying your Enneagram type will be beneficial in your life and the importance of understanding how this impacts your clinical work. Understanding relationship patterns within the lens of the Enneagram will allow the therapeutic relationship to thrive as the clinician helps the client or clients see their own personality within the relationship. Tune in as we chat about meeting treatment goals and having success in work and relationships through the Enneagram.
Meet Whitney & James Owens Whitney Owens (MA, LPC) and James P. Owens (MDiv, MA) are helping professionals with a passion for empowering others.
Whitney is a Licensed Professional Counselor and Private Practice Consultant. She is the owner of a group private practice, Water’s Edge Counseling, in Savannah, Georgia. In addition to running her practice, she offers individual and group consulting through Practice of the Practice. She hosts a weekly podcast called the Faith in Practice Podcast to help clinicians start and grow their practices with a faith-based background. Whitney has presented multiple times at professional counseling and practice conferences throughout the United States.
James is an Enneagram teacher and founder of Working the Enneagram, LLC. He received his Enneagram certification through the Enneagram Spectrum Training with Jerome Wagner. James holds a Master of Divinity, as well as a second Master's degree in Christian Practice. As both a pastor and teacher, James helps churches, small businesses, and other organizations understand how to utilize the Enneagram to positively impact their members and missions. James has been interviewed on several podcasts and has spoken to multiple groups on the Enneagram specifically in conjunction to counseling/psychotherapy practice and clinical work.
Whitney and James have been married since 2007 and together they are the parents of two beautiful girls.
The Importance of Knowing Your Enneagram Type You can spend many hours, days, and years understanding the Enneagram. One of the unique things about the Enneagram is it expresses the motives behind people's behaviors. As a therapist, we have to know ourselves to do good work. If you know your Enneagram, it helps you understand your motives in therapy. Whitney is Enneagram type 1, which means she is the reformer and is very controlling. When Whitney started as a therapist, she wanted to know exactly what to say at all times. Since Whitney knows that about herself, she found ways not to control the sessions and not to control her clients.
Identifying Your Strengths And Weaknesses The Enneagram will help identify the motives behind your actions. In addition, the Enneagram will assist you in determining your strengths and weaknesses and identify the ways you behave when you're doing very well and the ways you act when you're not doing so well. The system is not static; it's a dynamic system. The Enneagram acknowledges that we all are different when in stressful situations vs. happy and secure situations. James is a type 5; he can take on a leadership role when he is doing well. However, under stress, James tends to move towards the characteristics of type 7. As you learn your type and discover more about yourself, you'll identify the directions that you go in when you're doing well and doing not so well.
Using The Enneagram With Your Clients If you understand your client's Enneagram number, and they're sharing things going on in their life, then you can listen to where they're coming from to know where they're at. Clients might act like they're doing okay, but then they share something that's moving into other numbers that you know are not the healthy place for them. So, you can help clients bring their positive characteristics to the table. The Enneagram is a great way to evaluate your client's levels of emotional health. Each Enneagram type also has its own levels of functioning. As you become familiar with each type, you'll be able to see those characteristics in your clients.
The Seven Deadly Sins For Your Enneagram Type Each Enneagram type has a deadly sin. So, you actually want to find the spiritual discipline that is the opposite of your sin. When you go into your root sin, you need to practice the opposite to find a healthy place. Here is a list of the deadly sins and what spiritual discipline will help you get to a healthy place:
-
Type 1: Anger. You should practice serenity and letting go.
-
Type 2: Pride. You should practice humility.
-
Type 3: Deceit. You should practice authenticity.
-
Type 4: Envy. You should practice balance.
-
Type 5: Avarice. You should practice being non-attached.
-
Type 6: Anxiety. You should practice courage.
-
Type 7: Gluttony. You should practice sobriety.
-
Type 8: Lust. You should practice innocence.
-
Type 9: Complacent. You should practice action.
Helping Clients Improve Their Relationships The Enneagram can allow you to help your clients with their relationships. The Enneagram is extremely helpful for marital counseling. Once you understand your partner's Enneagram, people can find a new appreciation and patience for their partner. When your clients understand their own number, it helps them understand how they interact with other people in their lives. Whitney says she does Enneagram work in her group practice. In fact, Whitney says they discuss their Enneagram types and how much they understand themselves during the interview process. Plus, knowing people's Enneagram types helps you appreciate your employees.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
James & Whitney's Resources Understanding & Utilizing the Enneagram (10 CE Hours) Waters Edge Counseling Grow Your Faith-Based Practice with Faith in Practice Mastermind! Practice of the Practice: Faith in Practice Podcast Whitney Owens | Consulting, The Enneagram, & Religion In Private Practice | TPOT 178 Whitney Owens | Starting Fresh & Growing Fast in Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 036 Whitney Owens | Contractors Vs. Employees In Group Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 091 Faith in Practice Consulting with Whitney @Practice of the Practice Group Practice Launch Membership Community Email: Whitney@practiceofthepractice.com Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Take The Survey Thursday is the New Friday: How to Work Fewer Hours, Make More Money, and Spend Time Doing What You Want Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Whitney and James Owens join the show to talk about the origins and usefulness of the Enneagram. They explain how identifying your Enneagram type will be beneficial in your life and the importance of understanding how this impacts your clinical work. Understanding relationship patterns within the lens of the Enneagram will allow the therapeutic relationship to thrive as the clinician helps the client or clients see their own personality within the relationship. Tune in as we chat about meeting treatment goals and having success in work and relationships through the Enneagram.
Meet Whitney & James Owens Whitney Owens (MA, LPC) and James P. Owens (MDiv, MA) are helping professionals with a passion for empowering others.
Whitney is a Licensed Professional Counselor and Private Practice Consultant. She is the owner of a group private practice, Water’s Edge Counseling, in Savannah, Georgia. In addition to running her practice, she offers individual and group consulting through Practice of the Practice. She hosts a weekly podcast called the Faith in Practice Podcast to help clinicians start and grow their practices with a faith-based background. Whitney has presented multiple times at professional counseling and practice conferences throughout the United States.
James is an Enneagram teacher and founder of Working the Enneagram, LLC. He received his Enneagram certification through the Enneagram Spectrum Training with Jerome Wagner. James holds a Master of Divinity, as well as a second Master's degree in Christian Practice. As both a pastor and teacher, James helps churches, small businesses, and other organizations understand how to utilize the Enneagram to positively impact their members and missions. James has been interviewed on several podcasts and has spoken to multiple groups on the Enneagram specifically in conjunction to counseling/psychotherapy practice and clinical work.
Whitney and James have been married since 2007 and together they are the parents of two beautiful girls.
The Importance of Knowing Your Enneagram Type You can spend many hours, days, and years understanding the Enneagram. One of the unique things about the Enneagram is it expresses the motives behind people's behaviors. As a therapist, we have to know ourselves to do good work. If you know your Enneagram, it helps you understand your motives in therapy. Whitney is Enneagram type 1, which means she is the reformer and is very controlling. When Whitney started as a therapist, she wanted to know exactly what to say at all times. Since Whitney knows that about herself, she found ways not to control the sessions and not to control her clients.
Identifying Your Strengths And Weaknesses The Enneagram will help identify the motives behind your actions. In addition, the Enneagram will assist you in determining your strengths and weaknesses and identify the ways you behave when you're doing very well and the ways you act when you're not doing so well. The system is not static; it's a dynamic system. The Enneagram acknowledges that we all are different when in stressful situations vs. happy and secure situations. James is a type 5; he can take on a leadership role when he is doing well. However, under stress, James tends to move towards the characteristics of type 7. As you learn your type and discover more about yourself, you'll identify the directions that you go in when you're doing well and doing not so well.
Using The Enneagram With Your Clients If you understand your client's Enneagram number, and they're sharing things going on in their life, then you can listen to where they're coming from to know where they're at. Clients might act like they're doing okay, but then they share something that's moving into other numbers that you know are not the healthy place for them. So, you can help clients bring their positive characteristics to the table. The Enneagram is a great way to evaluate your client's levels of emotional health. Each Enneagram type also has its own levels of functioning. As you become familiar with each type, you'll be able to see those characteristics in your clients.
The Seven Deadly Sins For Your Enneagram Type Each Enneagram type has a deadly sin. So, you actually want to find the spiritual discipline that is the opposite of your sin. When you go into your root sin, you need to practice the opposite to find a healthy place. Here is a list of the deadly sins and what spiritual discipline will help you get to a healthy place:
-
Type 1: Anger. You should practice serenity and letting go.
-
Type 2: Pride. You should practice humility.
-
Type 3: Deceit. You should practice authenticity.
-
Type 4: Envy. You should practice balance.
-
Type 5: Avarice. You should practice being non-attached.
-
Type 6: Anxiety. You should practice courage.
-
Type 7: Gluttony. You should practice sobriety.
-
Type 8: Lust. You should practice innocence.
-
Type 9: Complacent. You should practice action.
Helping Clients Improve Their Relationships The Enneagram can allow you to help your clients with their relationships. The Enneagram is extremely helpful for marital counseling. Once you understand your partner's Enneagram, people can find a new appreciation and patience for their partner. When your clients understand their own number, it helps them understand how they interact with other people in their lives. Whitney says she does Enneagram work in her group practice. In fact, Whitney says they discuss their Enneagram types and how much they understand themselves during the interview process. Plus, knowing people's Enneagram types helps you appreciate your employees.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
James & Whitney's Resources Understanding & Utilizing the Enneagram (10 CE Hours) Waters Edge Counseling Grow Your Faith-Based Practice with Faith in Practice Mastermind! Practice of the Practice: Faith in Practice Podcast Whitney Owens | Consulting, The Enneagram, & Religion In Private Practice | TPOT 178 Whitney Owens | Starting Fresh & Growing Fast in Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 036 Whitney Owens | Contractors Vs. Employees In Group Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 091 Faith in Practice Consulting with Whitney @Practice of the Practice Group Practice Launch Membership Community Email: Whitney@practiceofthepractice.com Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Take The Survey Thursday is the New Friday: How to Work Fewer Hours, Make More Money, and Spend Time Doing What You Want Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Paul Petroski speaks about creating online courses that create extra income for private practice owners. Plus, we talk about the mindset shift that needs to happen to make more money. Private practice owners need to think about their practice in different ways to diversify income. Depending on how your practice is set up, you can reach a ceiling with the amount of income you bring in. Tune in as we chat about different ways to create income streams in private practice and the mindset shift that needs to take place to build a successful business.
Meet Paul Petroski Paul Petroski has spent the past 20+ years helping organizations design and deploy learning solutions that improve bottom-line performance. His experience spans the business landscape from Fortune 100 companies, such as IBM and CSC (now DXC Technologies), to San Francisco-based startups. Several years ago, Mr. Petroski found himself sitting in his Counselors office as he was navigating a major life change. Having such a profound experience and transformation working with his Counselor, Mr. Petroski saw the opportunity to bring these two paths of his life together. At that point, he began helping Counselors and Therapists build passive income by turning their years of experience into online courses. Through his work, he has helped Counselors build their personal brand, free up time by generating multiple streams of income, and rethink what it means to build their overall practice. In his free time, Mr. Petroski is relearning how to live life through the eyes of his 13-year-old son and 10-year-old daughter, is an aspiring drummer, and loves to ride through many bike paths that Colorado has to offer. The Mindset Shift To Build Your Practice The first step in taking the journey down building an online course is thinking of your practice as something big. It would help if you stopped thinking about your private practice as a practice; instead, think about it as a business. Shift that mindset from a practice owner to a business owner. Then you start thinking about the proper ways to grow a business outside of getting people into your practice. Think about the business side of what you're trying to accomplish and how to grow your income.
The Importance of A Niche To Diversify Income Think about how you can turn your niche into an income stream. Maybe you've seen success with marriage counseling. How can you help more people with their marriages instead of just the people you see in your practice? An online course will help you go from the one-on-one method of making income to reaching many people simultaneously. No longer will you need to trade your time for money.
Building An Online Course There's an upfront cost associated with getting your online course off the ground. However, once you reach that breakeven point, all other sales will be straight profit. Plus, you'll get a vast reach of people. Building an online course is a smart investment for people who are looking to diversify their income streams and find a larger audience.
Creating Passive Income Within Your Private Practice If you haven't already, you need to check out Smart Passive Income; they have a one-stop-shop for content, training, and resources on building a successful and thriving online business. Passive income is the idea that you can create something that gives you the ability to make money in a nontraditional way. With passive income, you can have assets that allow you to make money without your direct involvement. It's not entirely passive because there is some level of maintenance and attention required. Online courses will have upfront work and costs. In addition, there is some SEO work that will need attention periodically.
Producing Your Online Course The production aspect of creating an online course is the biggest fear for private practice owners. Most people don't know how to develop well-produced videos and only have a smartphone to create content. Well, there are different ways that you can create an online course. Some people will record themselves live while using a DSLR camera. Other times people make a voiceover PowerPoint where their content is more of the focus, and they're putting an audio recording over the presentation. If you're advanced in the technology space, then it's easy to get started on production. If this type of technology is new to you, Paul recommends getting a coach or finding an expert to assist.
You Are An Expert: Overcoming Imposter Syndrome A lot of times when it comes to business, we hear the concept of imposter syndrome. When thinking about creating an online course, counselors are worried that no one will buy it. Think about how long you've been a counselor and how many clients you have helped. You have an experience that would be of benefit to people. The reality is that you are an expert. Once you can get over imposter syndrome, then you will be successful in selling your online course.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Paul Petroski's Resources Counselor Online Course Facebook Twitter LinkedIn Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
The Google Workspace Platform Course Smart Passive Income Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Chris talks about the process he uses to self-publish books. If you don’t think writing a book is worth it, Chris is here to tell you otherwise. You may not make a ton of money from royalties; however, self-publishing has many other benefits. You can diversify your income when you’re known as an authority figure and as an expert in your field. Tune in as Chris dives deep into the self-publishing process, including the importance of an outline, an editor, and how to navigate imposter syndrome.
Meet Chris Swenson Chris Swenson, LMFT is the author of the recently published book, “Private Practice Warrior.” He is the Owner/Founder/solo-operator of Rhino Wellness Center which is Chris’ successful full-time solo practice in rural Colorado. Chris is a true Private Practice Warrior who is currently developing a program called, “Private Practice Warrior – A Powerful Mindset for Ambitious Practice Owners – The “Way” to True Fulfillment in Life and Business. To receive a free pdf copy of “Private Practice Warrior” and a special bonus, click https://rhinomentality.lpages.co/pp-warrior-ebook-pdf-giveaway/
The Benefits of Writing A Book Some people want to write a book, but they don’t think they’ll make a significant amount of money from it. Chris says you may not make a lot of money from the royalties, but the benefits will pay off in the long run. When you write a book, you’ll gain a lot of credibility as an expert in your industry. When you are an authority on your topic, you’ll get invites to speak at events and programs. It’s like having a business card – you can show people what you have done and put yourself out there.
The Self-Publishing Process First, start with an idea. What is something that you have always wanted to write about? If you help people with something all the time, that can be an excellent topic for your book. When you have an idea in mind, check out other books on Amazon and Barnes & Noble. Spend some time looking at the reviews for similar books. That way, you can see what people liked about the books and what people think the author could improve. Next, you’ll want to identify your purpose for writing the book. The purpose will guide you through the process. If you forget why you’re writing a book, then you are going to get off track.
Pick A Style and Start Your Outline Think about the style of book you are looking to write. Are you going to be more on the traditional and scientific side of writing? Or will you write your book more like a story? You can follow a character as they learn life lessons. After you know the style, then you need to start your outline. The outline helps with the writing process – it can be challenging to start. One way to start an outline is by doing a brain dump. Write everything and anything that you think of in your head. From there, you can bundle ideas into themes. Get as creative as you can with the outline; it will make the writing process more streamlined.
Finding Time To Write Your Book When you’re finding time to write your book, that’s where the purpose comes into play. Remember why you decided to write the book in the first place. If you don’t have a purpose for writing the book, you will never find time to finish it. To help with the process, come up with a writing plan. If you know what day you want to publish by, then you can work backward. Think about how many chapters you need to write each week to finish the book on time. If you don’t finish in time, it’s okay! Keep trucking along and continue writing. Chris likes to speak into his phone instead of writing it down. That way, the process goes by way faster.
Should You Hire An Editor? A lot of people who self-publish will recommend that you hire an editor to go over your book. Remember that there are different kinds of editors. Some people will edit for content, development, and even grammatical. If you’re not sure where to find an editor, you can hire a freelance one using the website Fiverr. When you edit your own book, you may keep adding and adding things – it will drag the process on. So, please stick to your schedule and get it done. If you need to add more, then don’t be afraid to write another edition.
Create Your Title & Cover While the book is being edited, you can finally start thinking of a title and draft the cover of your book. Chris loves to use Canva for his covers. If you’re publishing an eBook, then Canva is the way to go. If you want something that looks a little more professional, then you can hire a graphic designer. Again, you can check out Fiverr to hire a freelancer for the job. Always go back to the purpose and who you want to reach. That way, it will determine if you need a cover for an eBook, printed book, or both!
Imposter Syndrome As An Author You’re never going to overcome imposter syndrome as an author. Instead, it would be best if you worked through the thoughts and the feelings you have. Those thoughts are going to be there – you need to accept them and embrace them. Then, you can move through it and continue the writing process. If you are going to put yourself out there, you will hear the whispers of imposter syndrome. Part of the process is accepting those whispers. These are the same topics that our clients deal with all the time. Think about what you would tell your clients about dealing with their internal critics. It’s better to take imperfect action than perfect action. Put the draft out there and finetune your book afterward.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Chris Swenson's Resources Chris on LinkedIn Enroll in Published The Course The Private Practice Warrior Website Get your free copy of Private Practice Warrior Self-Publishing for Therapists, Coaches, and Consultants Email Chris: chriss@rhinowellnesscenter.com Rhino Wellness Center Rhino Life Lessons: 32 Timeless Lessons to Achieve Strength, Wisdom, Confidence, and Resilience Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Take The Survey Using Google Workspace As A Practice Platform Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
During the pandemic, most of us started conducting psychotherapy sessions through 100% Telehealth. "The Therapist In The Attic," Leah Leynor joins the show to talk about her transition from her thriving private psychotherapy practice office to the attic. Plus, Leah speaks about her consulting work and what private practice owners are struggling with today as the pandemic winds down. Later, we talk all about becoming an insurance-based practice and what sorts of things you need to consider before accepting insurance. Tune in as we chat about diversifying your income, negotiating rates with insurance companies, and marketing your private practice.
Meet Leah Leynor Leah Leynor provides a variety of counseling services to families and individual children, teens, and adults in Cary, North Carolina. She holds a Master's degree in Marriage and Family Therapy from Pfeiffer University, a massage therapy diploma from the American and European Massage Clinic, and a Bachelor's degree in political science from Rider University. She is a certified hypnotherapist with specialized training in trauma counseling and family systems. She is a proud member of the American Association of Marriage and Family Therapy (AAMFT) and the North Carolina Association of Marriage and Family Therapy (NCAMFT).
The Therapist In The Attic During the pandemic, Leah ultimately moved her practice from in-person to her attic. The attic was the perfect place for privacy and for consulting with clients. Whenever Leah called herself the therapist in the attic, people would laugh. For Leah, the attic was a way to connect with others in complex, uncertain, and stressful times. Plus, when you think about it, we are all somewhat "stuck in the attic." Leah hopes to relate to the varied experiences many of us have been experiencing in these uncertain times.
What Private Practice Owners Are Struggling With Today Most private practice owners have a high level of anxiety because of the pandemic. Many people question if private practice is the right move for them or if they need to start changing their business plans. Plus, they have anxiety around dealing with stressed-out clients while managing their businesses' administrative side. On top of private practice responsibilities, many owners are looking after their children participating in online classes. Finally, people are considering if life will go back to the way it was or adjust to a new normal.
Becoming An Insurance-Based Practice When thinking about becoming an insurance-based practice, there are a few questions you should ask yourself first.
-
What brought you to this decision?
-
Where do you see your practice going?
-
What would you like to see in your practice?
You don't have as much control over your fees with insurance-based practices because the insurance companies determine it. So, you need to set your expectations accordingly. You can't just ask the insurance company to change your prices. Plus, you'll want to consider how your marketing and website efforts are going. You'll need to ensure the right people see your advertising when using insurance panels.
Negotiating A Higher Fee From An Insurance Company Negotiating a higher fee will depend on the insurance company. Sometimes, you have to put the negotiation in writing. The insurance company may ask what your proposed rate would be. Other times, you need to find the contract negotiator representative and call them directly. Then, you can start the negotiation process. You have to find out what the process is for the specific insurance company. If the insurance company is not taking negotiations, then you should figure out why. The best time to negotiate is a couple of months before recredentialing.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Leah’s Resources LinkedIn The Therapist In The Attic Call: 919-268-2182 Life Learning Counseling Reliant Practice Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Take The Survey Webinars Webinar: Using Google Workspace in Private Practice July Sale on Cool Resources (Use Code "JULY421") Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Salley Schmid takes us through her journey to creating journals for her clients. Not only is creating products a great way to diversify your private practice income, but it also is a fantastic way to help people who wouldn't typically be in your reach. One of Salley's journals is a tool for clients to calm their emotions and thoughts when they are running amuck. Tune in as Salley talks about the self-publishing process, what to know before writing a book, and the importance of multiple income streams in private practice.
Meet Salley Schmid I am a Kansas native, having been transplanted to Texas from Colorado. I am pretty sure I was supposed to be born in Colorado, but my parents forgot to move there. For several years now, I gladly call Waco, Texas my home and love this community and the people I have come to know and call my friends. I consider it a privilege to begin a business in such an entrepreneurially focused community. My passion is helping people succeed. I am the proud mother of teenage twin daughters. They keep my heart very full. I am blessed with a very supportive husband. I also enjoy time with his son, who is the same age as my twin daughters. My favorite times in life are with my family, especially when all 5 of us can be together.
I earned a Master of Science in Family Therapy from a small school in Wichita Kansas, Friends University in 1996 and a Bachelor of Science from Kansas State University. I have worked in a counseling and administrative capacity since that time in out-patient, in-patient, day treatment, residential, foster care, educational, and private practice settings. I have worked in the field of mental health and human services since 1985.
I understand and respect the important role personal values play in self-evaluation, change, growth, healing, relationships, and success. I practice from a holistic and resilience-based approach to helping people. I help people explore their strengths and learn to harness the success that already lies within them for visible, life and relationship change. Discovering the hindrances present in life and while planning to overcome those obstacles to achieve their best.
"One of my greatest honors has been to help people emerge strong and successful on the other side of a difficult or unplanned life transition"
Currently, I provide Professional Development Training for human service professionals as well as Counseling services.
My counseling practice specializes in helping people transition to a place of strength after experiencing trauma, traumatic grief, and difficult or unplanned life transitions. I work with individuals (adolescents and adults), families, and parents from a family systems perspective. I have extensive experience working with individuals who have experienced trauma, traumatic grief, divorce, parenting difficulties, blended families, and attachment difficulties. I am Certified in the Daring Way by Brene` Brown as well as being a Certified Positive Discipline Trainer.
Creating A Journal For Clients The pandemic had a lot of gifts that were hidden in it. One of those hidden gifts was Salley putting into book format the visual processes she does with clients. Her clients are responding very well to it. It's a journal that's really designed to help people understand how they get emotionally dysregulated and give them some tools to get out of emotional dysregulation. The journal is great for clients when they aren't able to get on the therapist's couch. However, it's not meant to be a replacement for therapy. Instead, it's a supplement for therapy. Check out Sticky Emotions Journal
Working On Your Products The longest process was the art journal because Salley worked on it for a couple of years to draw all of the images in it. Then, she got them turned into digital images. To create a book on artist-quality paper is very expensive. Salley quickly realized that it would not make any money or serve enough people. A friend of Salley's told her about Direct Publishing. So, she gave up her hope of artist quality paper and introduced her art journal on Amazon. It became a big success! Plus, Salley can sell them out of her office. Check out Find Your True North: A Soul Finding Art Journal.
Learn About Self-Publishing Salley looked at different self-publishing options, and the cost was high. Trying to get a publisher was also tricky. Kindle Direct Publishing (KDP) is super user-friendly. Salley didn't have to learn a lot. Instead, KDP tells you everything that you need to do. It's one of the fastest and most efficient ways to self-publish a book. For eBooks, authors can directly upload their book files, and it will appear in the Kindle store as an eBook for readers to purchase and instantly download.
What To Know About Creating A Book It is imperative to have someone edit your work and look at it. When you're writing, you know what you mean. However, does someone else understand what you mean? Another set of eyes will be invaluable on your self-publishing and book-writing journey. If you're looking to have art in your book, you will need to find someone who knows how to digitize art. Don't try and do everything yourself because you can't know it all. Also, don't be afraid to invest money in places where there is the expertise that you don't have.
Diversifying Income In Private Practice Having a book allows Salley to have another set of income. Salley is running a business – she needs to earn income. Products are a wonderful way to make extra money. Plus, Salley gets to extend her reach. Now, she gets to add value to people and can bring healing and transformation into their lives. Not everyone wants therapy, and not everyone can afford it. Salley's products make the healing work more accessible for people. Lastly, Salley is passionate about what she does. Remember to do the things that you're passionate about.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Salley’s Resources Sticky Emotions Journal Find Your True North: A Soul Finding Art Journal Website Instagram Facebook Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Take The Survey Webinars Webinar: Using Google Workspace in Private Practice July Sale on Cool Resources (Use Code "JULY421") Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Salley Schmid takes us through her journey to creating journals for her clients. Not only is creating products a great way to diversify your private practice income, but it also is a fantastic way to help people who wouldn't typically be in your reach. One of Salley's journals is a tool for clients to calm their emotions and thoughts when they are running amuck. Tune in as Salley talks about the self-publishing process, what to know before writing a book, and the importance of multiple income streams in private practice.
Meet Salley Schmid I am a Kansas native, having been transplanted to Texas from Colorado. I am pretty sure I was supposed to be born in Colorado, but my parents forgot to move there. For several years now, I gladly call Waco, Texas my home and love this community and the people I have come to know and call my friends. I consider it a privilege to begin a business in such an entrepreneurially focused community. My passion is helping people succeed. I am the proud mother of teenage twin daughters. They keep my heart very full. I am blessed with a very supportive husband. I also enjoy time with his son, who is the same age as my twin daughters. My favorite times in life are with my family, especially when all 5 of us can be together.
I earned a Master of Science in Family Therapy from a small school in Wichita Kansas, Friends University in 1996 and a Bachelor of Science from Kansas State University. I have worked in a counseling and administrative capacity since that time in out-patient, in-patient, day treatment, residential, foster care, educational, and private practice settings. I have worked in the field of mental health and human services since 1985.
I understand and respect the important role personal values play in self-evaluation, change, growth, healing, relationships, and success. I practice from a holistic and resilience-based approach to helping people. I help people explore their strengths and learn to harness the success that already lies within them for visible, life and relationship change. Discovering the hindrances present in life and while planning to overcome those obstacles to achieve their best.
"One of my greatest honors has been to help people emerge strong and successful on the other side of a difficult or unplanned life transition"
Currently, I provide Professional Development Training for human service professionals as well as Counseling services.
My counseling practice specializes in helping people transition to a place of strength after experiencing trauma, traumatic grief, and difficult or unplanned life transitions. I work with individuals (adolescents and adults), families, and parents from a family systems perspective. I have extensive experience working with individuals who have experienced trauma, traumatic grief, divorce, parenting difficulties, blended families, and attachment difficulties. I am Certified in the Daring Way by Brene` Brown as well as being a Certified Positive Discipline Trainer.
Creating A Journal For Clients The pandemic had a lot of gifts that were hidden in it. One of those hidden gifts was Salley putting into book format the visual processes she does with clients. Her clients are responding very well to it. It's a journal that's really designed to help people understand how they get emotionally dysregulated and give them some tools to get out of emotional dysregulation. The journal is great for clients when they aren't able to get on the therapist's couch. However, it's not meant to be a replacement for therapy. Instead, it's a supplement for therapy. Check out Sticky Emotions Journal
Working On Your Products The longest process was the art journal because Salley worked on it for a couple of years to draw all of the images in it. Then, she got them turned into digital images. To create a book on artist-quality paper is very expensive. Salley quickly realized that it would not make any money or serve enough people. A friend of Salley's told her about Direct Publishing. So, she gave up her hope of artist quality paper and introduced her art journal on Amazon. It became a big success! Plus, Salley can sell them out of her office. Check out Find Your True North: A Soul Finding Art Journal.
Learn About Self-Publishing Salley looked at different self-publishing options, and the cost was high. Trying to get a publisher was also tricky. Kindle Direct Publishing (KDP) is super user-friendly. Salley didn't have to learn a lot. Instead, KDP tells you everything that you need to do. It's one of the fastest and most efficient ways to self-publish a book. For eBooks, authors can directly upload their book files, and it will appear in the Kindle store as an eBook for readers to purchase and instantly download.
What To Know About Creating A Book It is imperative to have someone edit your work and look at it. When you're writing, you know what you mean. However, does someone else understand what you mean? Another set of eyes will be invaluable on your self-publishing and book-writing journey. If you're looking to have art in your book, you will need to find someone who knows how to digitize art. Don't try and do everything yourself because you can't know it all. Also, don't be afraid to invest money in places where there is the expertise that you don't have.
Diversifying Income In Private Practice Having a book allows Salley to have another set of income. Salley is running a business – she needs to earn income. Products are a wonderful way to make extra money. Plus, Salley gets to extend her reach. Now, she gets to add value to people and can bring healing and transformation into their lives. Not everyone wants therapy, and not everyone can afford it. Salley's products make the healing work more accessible for people. Lastly, Salley is passionate about what she does. Remember to do the things that you're passionate about.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Salley’s Resources Sticky Emotions Journal Find Your True North: A Soul Finding Art Journal Website Instagram Facebook Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Take The Survey Webinars Webinar: Using Google Workspace in Private Practice July Sale on Cool Resources (Use Code "JULY421") Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Aaron Carpenter has worked with hundreds of therapists, creating logos, practice websites, and mental health professional portals. He is here to give you some ideas around your branding, niche, and how you're putting yourself out there so that people can find you. The key to having a successful marketing campaign in private practice is by being clear about how you can help people. Tune in as Aaron gives tips for your website, marketing, and branding in private practice.
Meet Aaron Carpenter Aaron Carpenter founded Legendary Lion Creative Agency in 2011. Since then, he’s worked with hundreds of therapists creating logos, practice websites, and mental health professional portals. Aaron and his firm work with mental health professionals to improve their digital presence through Mental Health Marketing where new resources and toolkits are made available to therapists for free every month. You can learn more at https://mentalhealth.legendarylion.com/.
Questions To Ask About Your Marketing Before you start coming up with designs for marketing your brand, there a few questions that you need to ask yourself:
- What does my space look like?
- What makes me unique?
- Why did I get started in private practice?
- Why did I choose my business name?
Going through this activity will help you get clarity around your business and how you want to portray yourself visually. Most private practice owners do not have training in marketing. So, something we need to learn is the importance of creating a brand and understanding what that means for you and your business.
The Importance of Creating A Brand When people create marketing materials, they think it's getting too salesy. However, marketing can be a way to build rapport and trust with potential clients. Branding is like the clothes that you wear. If you showed up to work in your pajamas, it wouldn't be the best foot forward. It's time to think about what feeling you want your clients to feel while at your practice. Usually, there is something unique that will help your clients be comfortable. Branding is a significant investment. If 100 potential clients reach out to you, how many of those are not taking you as seriously as you would like to be taken? That's why you need to spend energy on your online brand.
Covid Changed The Online World During Covid, everyone had to move their business to the online world. So, online you need to portray your personality – it's a big deal to take the time to explain yourself online. If a web page takes a tenth of a second slower to load, you will lose website visitors. Look at your website and determine how well it is running and if people are getting a great sense of your branding.
Tips For Improving Your Website If you are doing your website and branding yourself, then it's critical to keep it simple. People are not interested in your credentials. Instead, they are interested in your approach to therapy. Also, your website should have dedicated pages to the services that you provide. In addition, make sure it's easy for people to connect with you. Have a phone number in your header and have a contact page where people can fill out a form. People who are looking for therapy are in an interesting spot. The more mediums that you can open up, the better off you will be.
Make It Easy For Your Potential Clients When people are looking for a therapist, they're uninformed buyers. So, they have no idea how they're going to connect with you. You'll be better off if you can create imagery and storytelling to help clients understand what it's like to work with you or what it's like to be a patient in your practice. Clients want to know that you are professional. So, it's critical to spend time and energy on your website and on your brand.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Aaron’s Resources Website Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.
Free Webinar: Using Google Workspace for Practice Management July Sale on Cool Resources (Use Code "JULY421") Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Everyone knows that you need to know why you do what you do. However, once you know your why, it's time to figure out who will help on your private practice journey. I have Jamey Schrier on the show. He helps teach practice owners from all over North America how to build the business of their dreams and achieve practice freedom. We chat all about knowing your why, the importance of outsourcing, and why finding help in private practice will be a total game-changer for your business.
Meet Jamey Schrier Today, I live in Rockville, Maryland with my wife Colleen and kids Jack and Gracie. I’ve got an amazing (and growing) team that helps me teach practice owners from all over North America how to build the business of their dreams and achieve practice freedom. I’m an Amazon #1 Bestselling author. I put on highly engaging workshops that generate breakthrough after breakthrough of ideas.
And I still get to spend a lot of time with my family – and I have plenty of time for sports, fun, and working on my passions.
All of this was possible because I decided it was time to take control of my life and my business and create practice freedom.
And now, it’s my goal to help people from all over the United States create the business and the lifestyle of their dreams.
Why Are You Making Money? When we talk about the foundation of your business, you need to know why you chose this profession and why you chose to open up your own practice. Ultimately it's going to relate to really what you're about and how you plan to provide yourself a better life. Your life is not designed to do business all of the time. No one wants to spend all their time and energy on their business. However, your business should provide a lifestyle. So, what is the lifestyle that you want? Do you want to spend more time with your family? Do you want to travel more? How much money do you need to achieve your lifestyle goals? It's okay to make money! Making money is a reflection of how many people you're helping.
The Importance of Outsourcing Jamey started investing in himself as a business owner. Step one in investing in yourself is calling yourself an entrepreneur. You are an entrepreneur because you're relying solely on your own work. So, it's time to embrace that and not shy away. The first thing that Jamey delegated out was bookkeeping. When you outsource, you have more time, you're less stressed, you're working smarter, and you're working more efficiently. So, Jamey started to look around at all of the things he doesn't like doing or is not the best at. Next, he hired someone to answer the phones. Overall, work smarter, not harder, and find ways to outsource.
Find Assistance on Your Private Practice Journey All private practice owners sell expertise and sell a solution to a problem. Business is all about testing, trying something, learning from mistakes, and changing how you do things. Therapists need to change their operating systems. It's time to let go of old habits that are no longer serving you. It's okay to let go, and it does not make you weak. In fact, letting go will make you strong. As a business owner, you influence a role that no one else in your business has. So, it's time to learn how to be a leader and operate in that mode. Open yourself up to the people that can help you. We can't do private practice on our own, we shouldn't do it on our own, and there's no glory in trying to do it on our own.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jamey’s Resources LinkedIn Website Facebook YouTube The Practice Freedom Method: The Practice Owner's Guide to Work Less, Earn More, and Live Your Passion Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. July Sale on Cool Resources (Use Code "JULY421") Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Michaela is a licensed psychologist and copywriter for health and wellness professionals. She joins the show today to speak about expanding your reach with marketing, specifically in multiple states. First, therapists need to redefine marketing and how it looks for them. Plus, Michaela talks about the importance of an 'About Page' and how you can uplevel the copy you use on your website and social media.
Meet Michaela Bucchianeri Michaela Bucchianeri [mih-KAY-luh BOO-kyuh-NEHR-ee], PhD, LP, is a licensed psychologist and copy coach for health and wellness professionals. She shares practical guidance to help healers and helpers get clear on their unique value, communicate it with heart, attract and serve the people they love working with most… and actually have fun along the way!
Expanding Your Reach With Marketing First, get clear with your reach goal. What territories are you looking to expand into? Depending on who you want to reach will dictate what you write on your website, and what SEO will work for your practice. No matter where you want to find people, make sure your potential clients get a cohesive picture of who you are. Also, make sure to do location-specific outreach. There’s a layer of complexity, but it doesn’t have to be complicated. Think about which communities you are a member of – get to know your local communities and local issues.
We Need To Redefine Marketing Therapists didn’t go to school for marketing. At the same time, we need to get over it and redefine it. We have to operate differently on social media. We can’t just ask about traumatic situations on Instagram. Instead, we have to frontload relationship building through marketing and education. From there, potential clients will reach out to you for assistance. Plus, you have to convey to people in as few words as possible what life will be like when they come to therapy.
How To Write Copy For Your Website Therapists are natural copywriters and natural communicators. Start by creating a copy bank of words and phrases from people you are trying to reach. This can be a simple spreadsheet where you store terms that your clients are using to describe what is bringing them to therapy. Plus, you need to mention the benefit that people will receive from therapy. What is their life going to be like after seeing you? Think about what your clients would say to this question: If you woke up tomorrow, and none of this was a struggle for you anymore, what would be different? Over time, you accrue lots of different examples of this copy from clients.
The Importance of Having an About Page The about page gets a lot of traffic. Luckily, your about page doesn’t have to be complicated. Instead, it’s about making the about page more concise, so people do not have a hard time reading it on your website. Michaela wants to help you stand OUT while standing firmly IN your own personality and integrity. She is ready to help you be more intentional with your copy to beat overwhelm and get that page up. You can learn more about Michaela by checking out her website here: https://www.drmichaela.com/tpot.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Michaela’s Resources Website Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. July Sale on Cool Resources (Use Code "JULY421") Ethical Business Practice for Psychotherapists (1 CE hour) Podcast Movement Using Google Workspace in Private Practice Webinar Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Is the traditional private practice a good fit for you? This episode is all about the different ways you can be in private practice and why it may or may not be suitable. First, Gordon explains what type of clinician would excel at private practice and how it can be a great challenge for most people. Then, Gordon dives into the four different ways to be in private practice as a clinician. Tune in for tips and tricks on how to start, grow, and expand your practice.
Is Private Practice Right For You? Private practice isn't necessarily for everyone. It takes a certain kind of person to be in private practice. The number one reason people want to go into private practice is because of the autonomy that it gives them. Being your own boss and just working for yourself is appealing because it gives you a lot of flexibility in your time. However, it's not for everyone. Many people want to work for someone else because they get benefits, they're an employee, their income is predictable, and they may have a retirement plan and health insurance already ready to go.
People that are in private practice need to have an entrepreneurial spirit about them. Private practice owners need to like the challenge of entrepreneurship. However, many people do not like the challenge and the risk that is involved with private practice. If you are interested in private practice but you're not interested in growing something big, then you don't have to. You can have a very successful private practice as a solo practitioner. Since Covid, it's possible to build just completely online practice. That's one model of private practice.
Get the FREE PDF download- 4 Ways To Be In Private Practice. This will help you compare the 4 different models. Working As An Independent Contractor Another model of private practice is putting yourself out there as an independent contractor. One way you can do this is through popular online platforms like BetterHelp, Talkspace, etc. When you sign up to be a therapist on platforms like these, you are signing up as an independent contractor. They will provide you with a platform, and they will provide you with clients. For some people, that might be very appealing. Even if you are an independent contractor, you are still self-employed. This is one thing that many people will get in trouble with because you still have to pay your self-employment taxes.
Find An Accountant And An Attorney For people who are still going the full contractor route, form a separate entity for yourself like an LLC. Talk to an accountant and an attorney about your options. That way, you will have more protection. If you're contracting yourself out, you're just contracting out your LLC. There are different ways you can be taxed as an LLC, so it will be critical to get an accountant's opinion. Depending on how much you are making is how you should set up your entity.
Growing A Group Practice Another thing you should think about is going into a group practice. Maybe you're already a solo practice. If you love the entrepreneurial sides of things, leading people, the excitement of growing a company, and bringing on more and more people, then start a group practice. Whether you are thinking about a part-time contractor or bringing on full-time employees, there are some factors that help you know when the situation and timing are right. Check out the Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Webinar to learn more about growing group practice.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Ethical Business Practice for Psychotherapists (1 CE hour) Using Google Workspace in Private Practice Webinar Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Today I am lucky to have Manoj Kanagaraj from Grow Therapy join the show. Grow Therapy is a multi-state behavioral health group on a mission to help independent providers thrive. There are many benefits to working with Grow Therapy, and Manoj explains who will thrive working with them. If you are looking to dive into private practice, Grow Therapy might be right for you. Tune in as we talk about how Grow Therapy will help you collect from insurance companies, the importance of a community on your journey, and how to get started with Grow Therapy.
Meet Manoj Kanagaraj Manoj Kanagaraj is an MD/MBA Candidate at Harvard Medical School and Harvard Business School. He is also co-founder of Grow Therapy, a startup enabling mental health professionals to offer more affordable, accessible, and integrated behavioral care.
All About Grow Therapy Grow Therapy is a technology-enabled mental health group on a mission to help clients find affordable mental health care. They help their clinicians from a back-end standpoint. That way, mental health professionals don't have to worry about getting paid by insurance companies or having some base source of referrals. For clients with insurance, they could pay nothing. However, this will vary depending on their insurance plan. Overall, Grow Therapy is infrastructure or a back end for somebody who wants their own private practice to get more support, or it's for someone who hasn't started a private practice before. Many people want to take the step to private practice, and Grow Therapy helps those clinicians.
Collecting From Insurance Companies Once you see a client, Grow Therapy will offer an estimated time of when you can expect that to get paid and how much would be based on the contract we have with the insurance company. Then, the Grow Therapy team will submit the claim, do all of the follow-ups, and go straight to the clinician's account. Technically, the clinicians are contractors for Grow Therapy. Grow Therapy started in Florida, and they built a pretty large community there. In Florida, they have close to 350 mental health professionals. Plus, they have a thriving community, and it's growing nicely. Now, they are moving into a handful of other states like Georgia, Maryland, Pennsylvania, and DC.
Having A Community With Grow Therapy Anyone that joins Grow Therapy gets invited to their online community. You have the chance to meet hundreds of other folks who have taken the same leap or have been on this journey. Manoj says it's also been nice to see leaders grow and autonomously take positions within the community of starting peer support groups around specific topics. Mental health professionals are some of the best people, and luckily the community has flourished on its own.
How To Get Started With Grow Therapy The important thing is whether we're if whether you're licensed in the states we currently are active in. However, it should be expanding pretty soon. The first step would be to go to Grow Therapy and enter some basic information about yourself. Then, someone will be in touch with you for an interview. Check out the provider page here: https://growtherapy.com/providers
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Manoj’s Resources LinkedIn Grow Therapy Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Are you ready to make an impact? Andréa Jones helps coaches, consultants, thought leaders, and passion-led online business owners impact and empower more people through strategic social media marketing strategies. First, we talk about how to fight the overwhelm of social media. Then, we dive into the importance of starting small and staying consistent. Tune in as Andréa gives loads of social media tips, including the ABCs of writing captions.
Meet Andréa Jones Andréa Jones is fiercely committed to empowering businesses to utilize the power of social media in a positive and impactful way, without being overwhelmed and drained by it. With over 7 years of experience in the game, Andréa hosts the acclaimed podcast Savvy Social Podcast, leads a team providing done-for-you service inside of her marketing agency that was named a Top Digital Marketing Agency in 2021, and serves over 200 students in her membership Savvy Social School.
You can find her online at onlinedrea.com or @onlinedrea on Instagram.
Fighting The Overwhelm of Social Media Feeling overwhelmed by social media is natural; social media can feel like another language sometimes. To fight the overwhelm, choose a platform that you are most comfortable with to get started. If you already have a personal Facebook account, then it can be easy to create a Facebook account for your private practice. Next, think about how you should spend time on these platforms.
Andréa says you should focus on a time limit for social media. There's so much that goes into posts, and it may add to that overwhelming feeling when you spend too much time on one. So when you sit down to write those posts, try to spend one hour a week working on your social media content. Sometimes in that one hour, you may only put together one caption and snap a photo of your location, and that's okay. Throughout the week, check your account for ten minutes each day. Checking daily really helps build the muscle and the skills needed to do social media.
Start Small With Social Media When we look at social media, sometimes we're looking at a team of people working on their social media accounts. People who are in private practice still hire a group of people to help them with their work. Even though you see a selfie, you see a video; sometimes, there's a team of people behind that. When you compare yourself to other people on social media, you're not giving yourself a fair chance. Overall, you will want to start small when it comes to your social media. Over time, you can add more people to help you out with your posts and your content.
The Importance of Consistency First, start with one social media platform. Instead of having consistent posts, be consistent with the time that you spend on social media. You will get better at it naturally; just like anything, you will get better the more you practice. Focus on one platform and get consistent. Before you dive into social media, Andréa has an exercise that you can do. On one side of a piece of paper, write the word "before." On the other side, write the word "after." Now, think about your clients. What do they feel before working with you, and what do they feel after working with you. Write down all of these feelings. Later, these feelings can all be turned into social media posts.
The ABCs of Writing A Caption Your captions on social media should follow the ABC rule.
A: Grabbing attention in some way. Why would someone stop at your post when they are scrolling through social media?
B: Benefit statement. Tell your followers why you want to help them and how you are going to do that. Focus on the feelings of your potential clients.
C: Call to action. This is the part where we're extending our hands out; we're inviting them to take that next step with us.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Andrea’s Resources Website Instagram Facebook Savvy Social School Social Media Rockstar Framework {Free Mini Course} Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Google Workspace The Webinar Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
This episode is all about having a marketing plan for your private practice. I am lucky to be joined by Lisa Noble; she is a Brand Strategist and Web Designer. First, we talk about how relationship-building can be one of your most significant assets for marketing and getting more clients into your practice. Then, Lisa dives into social media trends and answers the question: which social media platform should I be on? Later, Lisa gives the scoop on how she starts from scratch when building a successful marketing plan for private practice owners.
Meet Lisa Noble I’m Lisa M. Noble and as a Brand Strategist and Web Designer, I work with female therapists and entrepreneurs who are eager to build and grow their client loads.
I specialize in brand and marketing strategies to help my therapists get the traffic and marketing pieces to running a private practice.
I started this business because as a professional web designer working in corporate I learned that a website with no strategy behind it is just a pretty brochure. In that role, I got an insider's look and saw exactly how to create strategies that help businesses grow and make websites that convert sales.
For over 15 years I’ve worked with business owners, therapists, and private practice owners, confused, and frustrated about how to move forward with their businesses so I know exactly what works and what doesn't! I believe that every therapist should work with the clients they would love to work with.
Relationship Building To Boost Marketing When starting a marketing strategy, talk with your colleagues. Talk with people who are in your niche as well as those who are outside of it. When you start talking to them, you can first find out what they've already done as private practice owners; they've already paved the way and done some of the marketing that you need to do. In addition, these people will be a good referral source because their private practice will get full, especially now with what's going on during the pandemic. Please send an email to other private practice owners and ask them to get coffee or send them a Zoom invite. When it comes down to it, marketing is about building relationships.
Social Media Trends In Private Practice Video is massive on social media right now. Many people don't want to hear it, but it's time to step out of your comfort zone and start making videos. People are trying to connect and decide who they want to talk to. So, get on video and show your mannerisms, show what you look like, how you speak, tell them your philosophies about certain things, and reveal your formula to help them. That way, potential clients can get an idea of how you will talk to them. Videos are the very key to bringing business in the door.
If you're not sure which social media platform to start on, that is okay! You'll want to be on the social media platform that your ideal client is on. So, think about who your ideal client is. What do they like to do? Where do they like to hang out? What is their favorite social media platform? Then, you can determine what kind of social media platform you need to be on. Also, remember that social media is constantly changing, and different demographics jump on trends at various times. So, be sure to keep up to date with what's going on in the virtual world.
Starting Your Marketing Plan From Scratch First, you'll want to know who your ideal customer is and get to know them. You'll want to know what your professional goals are and the goals of your ideal client. Next, you can create a logo and start looking at your social media channels. After, make a brand style guide that will cover every aspect of your business. What mood will your brand give off? What colors do you want to use? What fonts will you write in?
Later, you can create your website and add content. You'll want to make sure to set up pages; it's so helpful when you're thinking about SEO. Not many people realize that SEO needs to be part of their marketing strategy. Eventually, PR will come into play. Sadly, many times, people will try to do a marketing plan by just throwing darts at the board and not really having a good plan in mind. If you don't know where you're going, then how are you going to get there? It's critical to have a plan in mind!
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Lisa’s Resources Vivid Visual Solutions Instagram Facebook LinkedIn Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Google Workspace The Webinar Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
The sooner you start planning for retirement, the better off you're going to be in the long run. Even if it's just a tiny bit that you save towards your retirement, it's going to make a big difference! Judd Carlton is a financial advisor serving families, individuals, and businesses in Morristown, NJ. He explains the importance of thinking about retirement as soon as possible. Then, we dive into the more financial aspects of your practice. For instance, if you've got a group practice, Judd describes why you may want to create either a 401(k) for your employees or some other retirement plan within your practice. Plus, Judd reveals the differences between SEP IRA & SIMPLE IRA Plans.
Meet Judd Carlton Judd Carlton is a financial advisor serving families, individuals, and businesses in Morristown, NJ, and beyond. He specializes in finance for business owners and mental health professionals, helping them align the finances of their practice with their long-term financial planning and investment objectives.
Judd graduated Magna Cum Laude from New York University with a BA in Economics and has an MS in Accounting from the Silberman College of Business at Fairleigh Dickinson University. He also holds the CFP® and AIF ® designations.
Judd is also a husband, father of three girls, and dog dad. He posts, blogs, and makes YouTube videos on financial subjects that may be of interest to business owners, psychologists, psychiatrists, and mental health group practice owners.
Think About Retirement Early It's essential to start thinking early about retirement because, in the world of investing, time is on your side when you have a lot of it. The earlier you get started then, the better things will work out for you because of the power of compounding. Even starting five years or ten years sooner can make a huge difference. As you change and develop in your career, you might jump from an employee role to a self-employed role; then, the complication accelerates. The wise choice when it comes to investing in your retirement is to be conservative. You never want to have an issue or feel stressed about money. Once you cross those hurdles, it's good to start thinking about what's next. So that's often where Judd will offer some guidance about managing your cash flow while saving up for retirement.
How To Approach Retirement There's a couple of ways to approach setting up the right retirement plan. First, you need to consider what kind of business structure you are working with. If you have a solo practice, saving for retirement will be a lot simpler to figure out. If you have a group practice, things are going to be more complicated. However, both will have great opportunities. A great way to start is with small and simple things. As time goes on, you can really be more methodical and look at every possibility. Hiring therapists can be challenging when there is a mental health crisis. So, you may want to offer therapists a 401(k) option as an incentive. Even as a small business, you can create a 401(k) that feels just like what a fortune 500 company might have. Later, you can start thinking about a pension plan.
SEP IRA & SIMPLE IRA Plans Judd recommends a few different options when it comes to retirement plans. SEP (Simplified Employee Pension) plan provides employers a method to make contributions to the employees' retirement and their own retirement. The SIMPLE (Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees) gives employees a way to make salary reduction contributions, and the employer makes matching or nonelective contributions. Each plan has a limit on how high you can go. SEP goes a little bit higher, and there's less flexibility with this plan – everyone is going to get the same percent. Any financial planner or accountant can help you figure out which plan is right for you and your practice.
Why You Should Consider A Roth IRA The Roth IRA was introduced for people who are early in their career or for people who do not want to save. Some of the regular IRA plans are not that helpful when you are in a lower tax bracket. When you put money into the Roth, you don't get any deductions. However, that money is going to grow for years and years. When you take that money out, it's going to be completely income tax-free. That's going to be tremendous savings; it's a powerful tool. If you're newer to your career and you want to start saving money, Judd highly recommends starting a Roth IRA.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Judd’s Resources Email Judd: jcarlton@royalnj.com Judd's Website Judd on LinkedIn Judd on YouTube Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Whitney Owens opens the show by explaining the importance of having grace and acceptance on your private practice journey. If you aren't as productive as you want to be, learn from your mistakes and make better choices moving forward. Whitney also explains why she does a time study to determine where she spends most of her working hours and what she can improve on in the future. Plus, Whitney reveals why learning more about Enneagrams has taken her business to the next level, and we chat about using faith in private practice.
Meet Whitney Owens I enjoy working with both adults and adolescents on an individual basis. I have experience working with those suffering from depression, anxiety, self-harming behaviors, identity formation, relational issues, and other mood disorders. I use a variety of therapeutic models such as Cognitive Behavioral Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, and Interpersonal Therapy. I have been seeing clients since 2009 in a variety of settings. While earning my Master in Professional Counseling from Richmont Graduate University, I saw young adults at a residential treatment facility. In 2010 I moved to Colorado where I spent four years working at an inpatient and day treatment facility. Also while in Colorado, I joined a group practice and saw teenagers and adults.
In 2014 I moved back to Savannah and started Water’s Edge Counseling. I am a Licensed Professional Counselor in Georgia and a member of the American Counseling Association and the Licensed Professional Counseling Association of Georgia. In addition to counseling, I also offer a number of other services including training and speaking engagements. I have been invited to local organizations such as churches and schools to educate on leadership, adolescent issues, parenting, family concerns, and mental health. As well, I have spoken at retreats focused on helping women heal and find themselves. I have also spoken at youth meetings to adolescents. Please let me know about your next event and how I can help.
Practice Grace And Acceptance The most important thing is that private practice owners need to provide themselves is grace and acceptance. When a day doesn't go the way you want it to, or maybe you don't prioritize everything the way you would wish to, it's best to learn from it. Always take a lesson from the mistakes that you make and make better choices moving forward. Never beat yourself up for something! Delegating has been huge for Whitney as she works on managing more and more in her personal life and professional life. She relies on her husband tremendously when she needs help around the house and their children.
Conduct A Time Study A time study is significant because our time gets away from us, and we have no idea where we spend it. From a financial standpoint, it's essential to know where your time is going. If you have a side hustle for your practice, think about where you spend your time and which one is bringing you more income. Also, think about where you can delegate more. If you're spending too much time in one area and not getting enough money, consider having more delegation efforts. That way, you can focus your time on the area that will bring you the most income. Making a list will help you see where you can save time throughout the day.
Consider Joining A Mastermind Group Do you want to grow a faith-based group practice? Whitney's favorite thing about consulting is the group work that she gets to do with people. Specifically, she loves mastermind groups because you see these great connections come together in a small group of people working on their business. Whitney's mastermind group is for people who have a faith-based practice. In the group, they talk about religion when appropriate, but they also work on their businesses. Luckily, Whitney and her group get to pray for each other and use their faith to help make business decisions together. If you want to learn more about Growing Your Faith-Based Practice with Faith in Practice Mastermind, check out the link: https://practiceofthepractice.lpages.co/faith-mastermind/.
Learn More About Enneagrams When Whitney learned that the Enneagram Type 1 has a critical voice in their head at all times, she was confused. Whitney thought that everyone had a critical voice in their head. Also, Enneagram Type 1 carries anger around with them; they are angry at the world for being so messed up. These simple things spoke to Whitney. After digging into the Enneagram Type 1, Whitney understands herself so much better. Now Whitney uses it to understand other people and help other people know themselves. In fact, Whitney is planning an Enneagram Type 1 training for all of her staff next week. Overall, Whitney does it with all her clients, and she does it with everyone she consults; it really helps move treatment and businesses along. Learn more about Enneagrams by checking out Ian Cron's work: https://ianmorgancron.com/.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Whitney’s Resources Waters Edge Counseling Grow Your Faith-Based Practice with Faith in Practice Mastermind! Practice of the Practice: Faith in Practice Podcast Whitney Owens | Starting Fresh & Growing Fast in Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 036 Whitney Owens | Contractors Vs. Employees In Group Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 091 Faith in Practice Consulting with Whitney @Practice of the Practice Group Practice Launch Membership Community Email: Whitney@practiceofthepractice.com Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Jessica from Simplified SEO Consulting joins the show. First, Jessica explains how she has learned to accept her imperfections when it comes to time management. Remember, therapists can't be all things to all people all of the time! Plus, Jessica tells us what she has done to make her email inbox so much more manageable. Tune in as Jessica gives loads of tips on SEO and how to get your counseling website to rank higher on Google.
Meet Jessica Tappana Jessica Tappana started her private practice on her maternity leave about 20 months ago. After filling up in only a matter of months, she decided to bring on other therapists as 1099s and transitioned Aspire Counseling into a group practice. Worried about how she would fill the caseloads of these new therapists, Jessica tried several different marketing strategies. Ultimately, she decided to focus on getting her website to the first page of Google and began teaching herself SEO at nights after her kids were in bed. Slowly after gathering a couple of tips here and there, she got her website to the first page for nearly every keyword she targets. Aspire Counseling has grown to now include five therapists and a virtual assistant! In fact, all of the therapists are nearly full, and Jessica hopes to find a few more quality team members in the months to come.
Meanwhile, Jessica has discovered a passion for teaching other private practice owners what she has learned about website Search Engine Optimization. As a private practice SEO Consultant, she has had the opportunity to work with therapists from around the country sharing her SEO secrets. She’s both optimized websites for private practices AND has taught therapists how to do the SEO work themselves through Zoom meetings and enjoyed watching their sites begin to climb to the first page of Google even in larger metropolitan areas like Atlanta or Houston. Recently Jessica released a FREE 7-day e-mail series that teaches therapists all the necessary information they need to know and has received positive feedback across the board from other practice owners who are raving about the vast amount of information covered in only seven e-mails.
Accepting Imperfections Around Time Management Accepting your imperfections and accepting your reality will be critical when it comes to time management. Some people always think they can see one more client during the day. However, you’ll start to realize that’s not always practical. In reality, you can do better if you accept your limitations as a private practice owner and as a therapist. Drawing boundaries will help you stay more present in everything that you do. Remember, you can’t be everything to everyone all of the time. When you have healthy boundaries between work and your personal life, you will be a better therapist because of it.
Managing Your Email Inbox Jessica has started getting some help with managing her email inbox. Many people find that they put incredible pressure on themselves to respond to emails immediately or within twenty-four hours. Depending on how full your inbox is, that can be impossible. That’s why Jessica is outsourcing help for her email work. Of course, there are emails that she needs to respond to personally. However, those go into a particular folder for her to check periodically. In fact, Jessica is getting help from Uriah Guilford, who made an appearance on The Practice of Therapy Podcast episode 176. His 7-Day Email Transformation Challenge has been a total game-changer for Jessica and how she runs her inbox.
Outsourcing Your SEO Jessica outsources a lot of her private practice SEO. Even though Jessica is knowledgeable in SEO, she has trained all her staff to do it. Jessica realized that she doesn’t need to be the one to optimize all of her blog posts. When Jessica first started her website, absolutely no one was clicking on it. However, Jessica learned everything she needed to know about SEO and applied it to her counseling website. Now, Jessica has a full practice and a thriving business. At Simplified SEO Consulting, Jessica helps her clients get to the top of search engines. That way, therapists can fill their caseloads and reach their ideal clients. If you’re looking to learn more about SEO, Jessica has Online SEO Courses for DIY Practice Owners.
SEO Tip: Content Is Key Content will be your best asset when it comes to SEO for your private practice website. Therapists are always worried about writing the right thing. When you write a lot on your website, therapists often think that their potential clients aren’t going to read the content. Well, Jessica says a great way to improve readability is by creating subheadings for your content. That way, if someone is scanning the page, they can find exactly what they are looking for when reading the subheadings. You need enough information on your website for Google to know what your content is all about. If you don’t have enough content, Google won’t pull your website up when someone is making a search.
Having A Niche Is Critical For Your SEO When you have a niche, SEO content will be a breeze. Instead of having fifty different specialties, you can narrow it down to a select few. When you narrow it down, you can write all sorts of things about those niches. If you niche down and write a whole page about depression, that’s a great start. Then, write blog posts on how to combat depression, tips for dealing with depression, what to know about depression. That way, Google starts to see that this website knows a lot about depression. When people search for help with depression, your website will pop up.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jessica’s Resources Aspire Counseling MO Simplified SEO Consulting Email: Jessica@SimplifiedSEOConsulting.com Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Uriah of Productive Therapist joins the show. Uriah thinks that life is too short to burn out early. So, Uriah gives us tips on conquering the overwhelm and growing your practice seamlessly with the least amount of stress possible. First, we chat about how you can conquer the email overwhelm by using the inbox zero method and only checking your inbox three times a day. Later, Uriah reveals the three keys to productivity, and we talk about personal knowledge management.
Meet Uriah Guilford I am a licensed therapist & group practice owner. I want to help you be more productive, profitable & happy with your business and your life. Basically, work less and get more done!
If you have achieved any level of success in your private practice then you can relate to the following. You have more tasks to complete than hours in the day. You work super hard because you are passionate and want to grow. Sometimes you neglect your self-care and other important things in your life. Not so great right!?
That is why I have built a team of amazing virtual assistants for practice owners just like you! Hiring a virtual assistant in 2012 was one of the best decisions I ever made. It allowed me to double my business income without feeling like I was losing my mind. Actually, go on vacation and not be tied to my iPhone the whole time.
And serve my clients better! It made such a massive difference for me and it can for you as well! If this sounds interesting, check out our services page and the most frequently asked questions we get all the time.
Helping Therapists Conquer Email Overwhelm Do you feel frustrated and overwhelmed with your email inbox? In Uriah's 7-Day Email Transformation Challenge, there are basically seven days of tips that have pretty quick action steps. On day two, he talks about batching; it's the simple idea of taking similar tasks, putting them together, and doing them simultaneously. So when you apply that to email, it means checking and processing email at certain times, but not throughout your day, not constantly.
Uriah has made a massive change just this week - whenever his workday is done, he will close his email so that when he gets back to the computer the next day, he won't see his emails right away. Uriah created a schedule to process emails three times a day: nine, twelve, and three. Uriah hasn't been perfect. However, this week has made a huge difference so far because he is getting a lot more things done when he is spending hours away from his inbox. Typically, when someone has an email – they feel the urge to respond to it right away. Take away the urge!
Reaching Inbox Zero Inbox zero means processing all your emails to the point where there are zero emails left. Uriah personally likes to be at inbox zero. Whether you have ten emails or one hundred emails, responding to the essential people and taking care of the things that are top priorities will be crucial. When you pay less attention to your inbox, you may not process every email you have. However, you can snooze the emails that are not urgent for you to respond to that day. Gmail has the most powerful tools for organizing – it lets you create filters and sort messages to prevent inbox overload.
The Three Keys of Productivity Uriah highly recommends checking out Michael Hyatt's book, Free to Focus A Total Productivity System to Achieve More by Doing Less. In the book, Michael speaks about the three keys of productivity: elimination, automation, and delegation. So, Uriah likes to strategize with therapists to remove things from their calendar and their to-do list. We automatically add things that we think we need to be doing to our calendar. So whatever you can eliminate from your schedule and your to-do list is going to help you free up your time and let you focus on the important stuff. Also, automate anything that you can! For instance, Gmail has filters that you can help automate your email process. Lastly, delegation is Uriah's favorite productivity hack. Anything that you can get off your plate and have somebody else take care of for you will immediately free up your time and help you be more productive.
The Problem Of Success When you start a private practice, you have a revenue goal. However, you don't know what it will feel like you when you get there. Handling all the calls while seeing clients while updating QuickBooks is going to be overwhelming. Also, we may not be the best person to be taking on all of these different tasks. You can find a competent person, whether it's a virtual assistant or somebody you hire, that comes into your office to take over that role. If you are busy seeing clients, then your phone is going to be sent to voicemail. In the meantime, those people are calling other counselors and shopping around. So, it's critical to have someone answer your phones while you're in session – you simply cannot do both! Most people wait too long to hire someone to help with their phones.
Personal Knowledge Management Personal knowledge management encompasses how we take in, collect, and access all kinds of information. If you just think about it as a therapist, all of the CPUs, training, and information that we collect over time becomes hard to organize and find when you need it. Uriah has been actually using Evernote, it's been around for a long time. He uses that for basically everything. Whenever Uriah has an idea, he writes it down! The nice thing is that a lot of them are tagged, and they're easily searchable. He uses Evernote to track his goals, it's basically his second brain. Another app that Uriah loves is Todoist – it's a task manager you can trust for life.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Uriah’s Resources LinkedIn Productive Therapist Guilford Family Counseling Facebook Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Win at Work and Succeed at Life: 5 Principles to Free Yourself from the Cult of Overwork Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Are you ready to go from burnt-out to connected and confident? Kathryn Esquer created a professional organization for the next generation of therapists called the Teletherapist Network. We chat about how her group has evolved during Covid and current concerns about the mental health crisis. We speak about the problem with mobile mental health apps and what you need to know about the open note policy that started on April 21st. Tune in as we talk about the importance of consultation on your private practice journey.
Meet Kathryn Esquer Kathryn Esquer is a Clinical Psychologist and MBA graduate. She currently works in her rural hometown in central Pennsylvania providing outpatient mental health services integrated into primary care. She loved her career, but COVID helped her realize that something was missing from her private practice. The clinical work was rewarding, but she felt professionally isolated and uninspired. She also knew consultation was a critical part of the ethical practice but didn’t know where to find it. So, Kathryn created the Teletherapist Network for modern therapists to crowdsource the knowledge and experiences of other private practice teletherapists so that members can develop their clinical and business skills, all while staying connected to their mission and preventing burnout.
The Teletherapist Network During Covid Kathryn didn't want to practice teletherapy alone. That's why she created a premier organization for the next generation of therapists in private practice at Teletherapist Network. It has been really great to have that support throughout Covid from other therapists. Luckily, Kathryn has been able to rely on her newfound peers in a way that she was not able to do remotely at the start of Covid. Kathryn says it's impeccable to hear all different perspectives from around the United States. Plus, there are even international members. So hearing what's going on in India, Australia, or the UK has been fascinating. Connecting across vast distances and time zones has been a humbling experience.
Find A Community For Referrals One of the biggest things Kathryn hears is that a lot of us are entirely full and above capacity as private practitioners. Everyone has a massive waitlist. Plus, therapists are having trouble finding referrals of therapists who are not full. While on the other hand, there are therapists that are having difficulty filling their caseload. For Kathryn, she wants to figure out how to reduce the gap. How do we help the clinicians looking for clients and match them to the appropriate referral? We need to figure out how to get the people who are overbooked and overworked less stressed.
At the Teletherapist Network, they have been working on referrals every single day. There needs to be a better system. Kathryn says it’s so important for therapists, psychologists, and counselors to tap into our communities. That way, we can refer to each other and help build each other's practices. A lot of people seeking mental health treatment are falling through the cracks. Sadly, they don't know where to turn. Therapists can't save the world. However, if you can come up with a system or a community to find and give referrals, then it will be a massive help.
Mobile Mental Health Apps The advent of mobile and mental health apps has been a huge pain point. New clinicians or clinicians who have moved states need income but don't have time to wait. Sometimes these clinicians feel their only options are these companies that pay horrendously. However, these companies might be great for clients and connecting them with easily accessible mental health resources. However, they're diluting and bringing down the value of our services. People going into private practice undervaluing what they are worth. Therapists need to realize that their services are worth a lot more than they think.
Open Note Policy Any certified EHR system needs to grant access or remove any barriers from the patient to access their health records for their clinical notes. Starting April 21st, you will need to reduce the obstacles for your clients to see their notes. This brings up a whole new dynamic in terms of clinical documentation for mental health. There is utility in a client reading their notes. For instance, they will see what their doctor recommended in case they forget. Therapists should proceed with caution on how we document things and how we communicate with our clients about what's being documented. Ultimately it will help us have greater transparency and accountability in the field. However, it's such a significant shift right now that many people are having a hard time with that.
The Importance Of Consultation Kathryn didn't realize how much she was missing until starting the Teletherapist Network. She had no idea what was going on in the world of therapy until she began to hear from other therapists around the country and around the world. Consulting with peers is essential for clinical work. It is the best quality control we have for clinical services. Also, it's great for our energy levels. That way, you don't feel like you are missing something, and you don't have to be checking for resources constantly. It's great for your peace of mind. Lastly, consulting is excellent for your burnout control. It's so helpful to talk to other people about your experiences. We underestimate the power of community in our burnout. Ultimately, consulting is helping us be better people and better clinicians.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kathryn’s Resources Teletherapist Network Teletherapy Podcast Kathryn@teletherapistnetwork.com Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course (Use Code: April2021) Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Are you ready to go from burnt-out to connected and confident? Kathryn Esquer created a professional organization for the next generation of therapists called the Teletherapist Network. We chat about how her group has evolved during Covid and current concerns about the mental health crisis. We speak about the problem with mobile mental health apps and what you need to know about the open note policy that started on April 21st. Tune in as we talk about the importance of consultation on your private practice journey.
Meet Kathryn Esquer Kathryn Esquer is a Clinical Psychologist and MBA graduate. She currently works in her rural hometown in central Pennsylvania providing outpatient mental health services integrated into primary care. She loved her career, but COVID helped her realize that something was missing from her private practice. The clinical work was rewarding, but she felt professionally isolated and uninspired. She also knew consultation was a critical part of the ethical practice but didn’t know where to find it. So, Kathryn created the Teletherapist Network for modern therapists to crowdsource the knowledge and experiences of other private practice teletherapists so that members can develop their clinical and business skills, all while staying connected to their mission and preventing burnout.
The Teletherapist Network During Covid Kathryn didn't want to practice teletherapy alone. That's why she created a premier organization for the next generation of therapists in private practice at Teletherapist Network. It has been really great to have that support throughout Covid from other therapists. Luckily, Kathryn has been able to rely on her newfound peers in a way that she was not able to do remotely at the start of Covid. Kathryn says it's impeccable to hear all different perspectives from around the United States. Plus, there are even international members. So hearing what's going on in India, Australia, or the UK has been fascinating. Connecting across vast distances and time zones has been a humbling experience.
Find A Community For Referrals One of the biggest things Kathryn hears is that a lot of us are entirely full and above capacity as private practitioners. Everyone has a massive waitlist. Plus, therapists are having trouble finding referrals of therapists who are not full. While on the other hand, there are therapists that are having difficulty filling their caseload. For Kathryn, she wants to figure out how to reduce the gap. How do we help the clinicians looking for clients and match them to the appropriate referral? We need to figure out how to get the people who are overbooked and overworked less stressed.
At the Teletherapist Network, they have been working on referrals every single day. There needs to be a better system. Kathryn says it’s so important for therapists, psychologists, and counselors to tap into our communities. That way, we can refer to each other and help build each other's practices. A lot of people seeking mental health treatment are falling through the cracks. Sadly, they don't know where to turn. Therapists can't save the world. However, if you can come up with a system or a community to find and give referrals, then it will be a massive help.
Mobile Mental Health Apps The advent of mobile and mental health apps has been a huge pain point. New clinicians or clinicians who have moved states need income but don't have time to wait. Sometimes these clinicians feel their only options are these companies that pay horrendously. However, these companies might be great for clients and connecting them with easily accessible mental health resources. However, they're diluting and bringing down the value of our services. People going into private practice undervaluing what they are worth. Therapists need to realize that their services are worth a lot more than they think.
Open Note Policy Any certified EHR system needs to grant access or remove any barriers from the patient to access their health records for their clinical notes. Starting April 21st, you will need to reduce the obstacles for your clients to see their notes. This brings up a whole new dynamic in terms of clinical documentation for mental health. There is utility in a client reading their notes. For instance, they will see what their doctor recommended in case they forget. Therapists should proceed with caution on how we document things and how we communicate with our clients about what's being documented. Ultimately it will help us have greater transparency and accountability in the field. However, it's such a significant shift right now that many people are having a hard time with that.
The Importance Of Consultation Kathryn didn't realize how much she was missing until starting the Teletherapist Network. She had no idea what was going on in the world of therapy until she began to hear from other therapists around the country and around the world. Consulting with peers is essential for clinical work. It is the best quality control we have for clinical services. Also, it's great for our energy levels. That way, you don't feel like you are missing something, and you don't have to be checking for resources constantly. It's great for your peace of mind. Lastly, consulting is excellent for your burnout control. It's so helpful to talk to other people about your experiences. We underestimate the power of community in our burnout. Ultimately, consulting is helping us be better people and better clinicians.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kathryn’s Resources Teletherapist Network Teletherapy Podcast Kathryn@teletherapistnetwork.com Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course (Use Code: April2021) Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Dr. David Geier is a double-board certified orthopedic surgeon and sports medicine specialist, media medical expert, and host of the new podcast, The MEDIA PROS Show. Dr. Geier has the formula to make it into the media. As private practice owners, you want to establish yourself as an expert and be well-known. Plus, it would be best to make sure that the people who need your help can find you. So, the media is a great way to do that! Tune in to learn quick, simple tips to grow your business by serving as an expert on your topic in the media.
Meet Dr. David Geier In his practice and on his online platform, he helps people feel and perform their best, regardless of age, injuries, or medical conditions. Having done well over 2,500 TV, radio, podcast, newspaper, magazine, and online publication interviews, he now coaches experts to help them grow their practices by getting interviewed as an expert in the media.
Media For Beginners Where you want to start depends on what you are trying to achieve. First, Dr. David says to figure out what you want to accomplish by doing media appearances. What's your message going to be? You'll want to narrow down who you want to help and why you want to help them. Brainstorm everything that comes to mind for your message. It can be based on your ideal patient, problems you like to solve, and what you are looking to attract. Your message should be one or two sentences. It will help media and reporters think of you when a topic comes up. Sure, you're a therapist, but are you known by a specific niche? If you specialize in divorce, then people in the media will remember that you're a person that knows everything about divorces!
Reaching Out To The Media Dr. David is a big believer in developing relationships with writers, reporters, and journalists. These relationships can be with people in newspapers, magazines, radio shows, TV shows, and reporters. The value of the media isn't in being seen one time. The value of media is repetition. When you make a media appearance, that person is already thinking of other stories they will use you as an expert. Overall, the value of the media is in developing those relationships. That way, the media will ask you back when your niche comes up again in the news. So, identify the types of media that would help build your practice, where you can contribute information that would be helpful, and then start to build those relationships. When you make those relationships, it will pay off for years to come.
Help A Reporter HARO is a great way to start a relationship with reporters. There are 800,000 + HARO users connecting with journalists. The website will send you emails three times a day (5:35 a.m., 12:35 p.m., and 5:35 p.m. ET), Monday through Friday. Check the emails and look out for source requests relevant to your industry, expertise, or personal experience. Dr. David says the trick with HARO is responding to those emails quickly. Most likely, you won't get picked unless you respond within thirty minutes to an hour of their request. You may be wondering how this can help your therapy practice. If you can put that you were used as a resource for USA Today, it will help you build your credibility. Patients can see that on your website and know that you are the real deal!
Relationships With The Media Are Key Relationships are the key! You won't get media appearances unless you can show how you're helping. The reporter wants to know that you're an expert in your field. That's the actual value of media over advertising. When you watch an ad, you know that somebody is trying to sell you something. There is nothing inherently wrong with selling things. However, people generally trust what they hear in the context of a news show much more than advertising. A good goal would be to get a media appearance at least once a month. Offer simple tips to help people. It may not be something they need now, but it can be something they need down the road. That way, when the situation does arise, they will think of you first.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Dr. David Geier's Resources Website MEDIA PROS Coaching Facebook Twitter YouTube The MEDIA PROS Show Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. HARO Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course (Use Code: April2021) Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Have you done your taxes yet? My guest, Danielle Hayden, created The Profit Planner to help business owners know how to analyze their business correctly, generate more profits easily, and gain greater confidence in business and by getting really intimate with their financials. Lucky for us, this episode is all about knowing your numbers. Danielle explains exactly which numbers you need to know and where you can get started. Plus, we chat about accounting software, the importance of building a financial reserve, and what you need to know about self-employment taxes.
Meet Danielle Hayden Danielle Hayden is a reformed corporate CFO (chief financial officer) who is on a mission to help rule-breaking female entrepreneurs understand their numbers so they can gain the confidence needed to create sustainable profits.
After spending 10+ years in the boardroom as a corporate finance officer, Danielle is now in her sweet spot as the co-owner of Kickstart Accounting, Inc. where she helps business owners with bookkeeping, financial analysis, and education and as the author of the Profit Planner book series.
Know Your Numbers What numbers do you even need to know? Danielle says she could spend one hour on this question. When someone says, "know your numbers," they want you to understand your financial statements at a high level. Many people are big fans of profit first; so, you can have a combination of knowing your numbers and the profit first allocation. You should also understand your profit and loss statement and how you can prepare for tax season. When you have these things down, that means you are making smart business decisions all year long. When you're making smart business decisions, then you are maximizing your tax deductions. Overall, we need to pay ourselves as business owners and invest enough money in the business, but not too much money.
Where Private Practice Owners Can Start The very first place you want to start is by having accounting software set up. So you'll always have your client management software, and then you'll have accounting software. It doesn't matter where you are in your journey – it's never too early or too late to get the accounting software you need to thrive. Give yourself grace! Tax management is a critical long-term business decision. Next, you'll need to do "catch up." You'll want to put all your expenses into this software. Once all the data is in, you have a starting point. Think about how much money you brought in, where you spent the money, and any surprises in the process.
Accounting Software To Consider QuickBooks is an excellent place for private practice owners to work on their accounting. Danielle loves QuickBooks so much that she includes it in her costs. Xero is another popular system, and it's easy to use. Plus, Wave Accounting is free software. It is award-winning financial software designed for entrepreneurs. However, there are some limitations. Danielle says that you should plan for where you want to be. Eventually, you will outgrow a system like Wave because you will want more reporting as you get bigger. Sadly, Wave doesn't have all the reports that you need. Whereas QuickBooks will grow with your practice. Start where you're at and then build on more sophisticated software. Stay away from invoicing software that has turned into accounting software like GoDaddy.
How Often You Should Check Your Numbers With Danielle, there are three options: weekly, monthly, and quarterly. If you can be in tune with your financials every week, that is the gold standard. That might mean a weekly dashboard of where your cash balance is at. It would help if you also double-check your collection issues on a weekly basis. If weekly feels like a big ask, you will want to look over your finances every month. Check your sales for the previous month and compare them to past months. Once we have the basic financial information, you can also know how much money is set aside for taxes. Looking at your finances monthly, you can make quick and better financial decisions. If you are paying for software that doesn't make you money, you can quickly decide to get rid of it.
Building A Financial Reserve When you know your numbers and your financials in front of you, you can start to look at how much you need to reserve. Some people say to save three to six months of your expenses. However, do you even know what that number is? Your numbers are trying to tell you a story, it's your job to read the story. Know your expenses and slowly transfer money over to a savings account. Your savings account will be your rainy day operating fund. Start moving that money over there so that you can build three to six months' worth of savings. Also, it's critical to know your slow times; most people will have a slow time of the year.
Self-Employment Taxes The mental health crisis is causing a tremendous amount of growth for therapists. Danielle says to watch your growth. It is imperative to monitor your development and to decide how you're paying yourself. If you are structured as an LLC and take owner's draws today, that means you're just a cash expense of your business. So, you will pay self-employment tax on that profit or loss. If that number is getting close to $50,000, it's time to really start to think about an S Corp. You grew fast last year, and you're growing fast this year – it's time to reconsider how your finances are set up. Make sure you're structured right for the next year so that you can maximize how much money you're taking home in your pocket.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Danielle's Resources Profit Planner Email: danielle@kickstartaccountinginc.com Call: 216-310-8299 Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course (Use Code: April2021) Get your FREE Financial Analysis Guide... Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Marisol talks about the significance of having a niche as it relates to getting more clients. Also, having a niche can improve your SEO results. For Marisol, she enjoys having sex therapy as her niche. We talk about her journey to becoming a sex therapist and advice for people who are venturing into this space. Later, we chat about the importance of outsourcing when it comes to saving time and money – plus, it can even make you money in the long run!
Meet Marisol Westberg Hi, I am Dr. Westberg and I am a sex therapist and couple’s counselor in Portland, OR.
I am a board-certified sexologist (ACS), certified sex educator (AASECT), and a licensed couple’s counselor (LMFT).
I am a former Professor in the Marriage, Couple, and Family Therapy Program at Lewis and Clark College in Portland, Oregon. I coordinated the Sex Therapy Track and supervised students in their clinical training. I have offices in both Portland and Seattle but am doing only virtual sessions at the moment.
Sex Therapy As A Niche Marisol says that the sex therapy niche landed on her lap rather than looking for it. It just started because she was teaching a course on sex therapy. Marisol had never done one case of sex therapy. Interestingly, she began teaching as she was starting out her private practice journey. As soon as she started to focus on sex therapy, her practice started to flourish. With a sex therapy niche, Marisol had a lot more people contacting her; she realized creating that niche was really a way to grow her practice.
Sadly, there's a lot of stigma and shame and all that kind of stuff around the sex therapy niche. When we're training, or when we're going to school, they do teach us a minimal amount of what we should do with human sexuality. Most of the courses in person or online on sex therapy still continue to expand on the human sexuality piece. However, they don't really focus on the therapeutic part, like how we get people to move through their issues?
Moving To Telehealth During Covid Marisol is a fan of the business side of things. She likes to expand on different aspects of her private practice. So when Covid hit, Marisol saw that everything was going to Zoom. So, it made business sense to stop paying rent. Marisol decided to cut her costs, leave the city, and live on a beach. If you do go out of the country, you save yourself from paying a lot of the income tax because the income you're getting is from a different country. It's $100,000 that you don't have to pay income taxes on.
Making Sex Therapy Effective It is a complicated piece in sex therapy to address sexual desire. All the interventions presented out there are counter-therapeutic. Actually, it creates more of a problem. Sadly, the solution creates more of the problem. For example, some people with low sexual desire say you just have to push yourself more. They think you just have to find ways to increase your sexual desire and just go do it.
The reality is that these solutions are mostly very gendered. Women are constantly pushing themselves to be more sexual. However, that's just not how desire works. When women push themselves, it creates trauma. In reality, a lack of sexual desire is affected by being tired and being stressed. To solve the problem, women should work on being less tired and less stressed. Women can light candles and do yoga. Slowly touching your partner will also help. Make sure there is nothing forceful going on.
Outsourcing SEO Work Marisol saw a significant shift in the private practice world with outsourcing. She does all her own website design and social media. However, when she hired somebody to do the actual SEO stuff, that pulled her up in the search results. Some people are just straight out of school and haven't had a lot of time with their website. Yet, they are still number two in Google. There's a lot more to website work than some people can even imagine. A little money will go a long way when it comes to getting your website found. When running a business, it's important to recognize when you can bootstrap and when you can outsource. Sometimes, outsourcing will save you a lot of time and money. Plus, in the long run, it can even make you money!
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Marisol's Resources Website LinkedIn Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Money Matters In Private Practice | The Course Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Nearly 1 in 5 adults experience a severe mental illness in their lifetime. Dr. Tom Young is a physician, and he has developed a screening tool for other professionals in the health industry. The tool helps physicians realize when they need to refer out to mental health providers. I'm looking forward to you hearing from Dr. Tom and learning about the technology that he's put together with his team at nView Health. Plus, we chat about the use of innovative technology and data insights to positively impact all those who serve this vulnerable population.
Meet Dr. Tom Young Dr. Tom Young is the co-founder and chief medical officer of nView Health, an innovative software company that helps you better identify, treat and monitor patients with behavioral health conditions, featuring the world’s most trusted digital assessment – the M.I.N.I.
Primary care physicians make 80% of diagnoses and decisions around behavioral health and get it wrong 92% of the time. nView’s suite of online behavioral health solutions empowers primary care physicians, pediatricians, behavioral health practices, psychiatrists, therapists, and counselors who specialize in identifying and treating patients with mental health, substance abuse, and other behavioral health disorders to get it right 98% of the time.
Intersecting Mental & Physical Health Most family physicians find that there is so much more to their patients than physical health. Of course, there is always the mental aspect of our health. Like most young physicians, Dr. Young was not taught much about mental health back in those days. However, Dr. Young taught medicine for several years, and in those adventures, he began to think more about it. All along the way, he started to understand the depth of opportunity that needed to happen between primary care providers and people's mental health providers. So, Dr. Young began his journey on finding ways to intersect those two worlds, hence nView Health.
The Mental Health Covid Crisis The concept of mental health has really changed over the last 12 months because of the pandemic. The mental health tsunami behind the pandemic increased anxiety and increased depression. Now, mental health professionals are trying to keep up with the demand. Sadly, it's affecting all ages of people, and we're seeing children needing mental health assistance now a lot more than before. Unfortunately, more than 5 million children in America have some serious mental illness that significantly interferes with their daily lives.
The critical issue for primary care is getting the proper initial assessment. However, if a doctor doesn't know what to look for, they will not be able to spot an issue. So, Dr. Young provides a tool that's quick and easy. It only takes a couple of minutes for the patient to fill out, and it really lets the primary care provider decide where they should focus their energy. Dr. Young's Mini International Neuropsychiatric Interview (M.I.N.I.) — has been used in patient care and clinical research for more than 25 years.
Coordinating Mental & Physical Care For the most part, primary care providers want to understand how their patient is doing. Like any other referral process in medicine, doctors will send their patients to you with the hopes that you're able to help them. Then, the patient will come back in between for something medical. That doctor should be able to converse with them about their progress with you in that visit. However, if the doctors don't know what's going on, they will feel left out of the healing process. Then, that's where some of the fractured relationships occur. Sadly, doctors will send a patient for care and then never hear back. Some ways to coordinate care are through phones, tracking tools, and assessments.
Using Data As A Therapist Dr. Young's daughter is a therapist; she found that this assessment tool was great for her work. First, she gets to provide data back to her referring physicians. Plus, she can see how her practice is doing. As she grew her practice using the interview tools, it gave them greater confidence in each therapist's diagnostic skills. It's a beautiful tool because therapists want to know if their patients are getting better. Well, how do you know that? If you use a tracking tool attached to the right assessment tools, you have the data that shows you what's going on. While on the other hand, you'll have the data to know if your patient is, in fact, not getting better and maybe needing more assistance.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Dr. Young's Resources nView Health LinkedIn Young Healthcare Consultants Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Welcome back to the Website Redesign Series - this is part two. If you haven't already, I invite you to go back and listen to the previous episode. I have my good friend and website guru Daniel Fava with me. He is from Private Practice Elevation, and I am so grateful for his assistance! We are chatting all about the website redesign project that I have started. In part two, we walk through the nuts and bolts of what needs to get done to take your private practice website to the next level. If you want to see the final product, check out Kingsport Counseling here: https://kingsportcounseling.com/.
Meet Daniel Fava Daniel Fava is a father, husband, podcaster, website consultant, and founder of Create My Therapist Website and Private Practice Elevation. He helps therapists create websites and attract more clients online.
After building a website for his wife’s private practice and seeing the impact it had on her business, he became passionate about helping others achieve the same. Daniel offers web design services, SEO services, consultations, and online training to help therapists grow their business through online marketing. You can get free access to his library of PDFs, cheatsheets, and ebooks by clicking here.
The Importance of a Website for Your Private Practice The importance of having a website is so critical for your private practice's health - we can't emphasize that enough. As we said in the previous episode, it's more important than the building you work in and your office location in terms of bringing in new clients. Your website is the front of your private practice. When people ask you, what's the face of your business? Well, it's your website! It's the face of your brand. Often, the first interaction that someone's going to have with your private practice is on your website. Even when someone gets a referral from a friend, they will still check out your website.
Why Your Website Could Use A Redesign Is your website already working? If you get loads of referrals from your website, then that means it's working well! Daniel loves to work with clients that already get referrals from their websites. If that’s you, it means your online presence is already working in some sense. There are all these little things that we can do that will make your website even better. For instance, it can always look better on mobile devices. When it looks better, it will then convert better because we can focus on making sure that your contact information is in the right place. Also, a website facelift can make you look more professional, so that can help increase conversions.
Keep Your Website Active Daniel always receives this question first, "what's going to happen to my current website while you're building the new website?" The good news is your current website can stay up and stay alive. We don't want to take it down while you're working on this new project because maybe that new project will take you about six weeks to complete. If you DIY your website, it may take even longer depending on how much time you devote to it. So, obviously, we want to keep business coming in; we want to make sure that your website is still there.
Get Help For Duplicating Your Website To keep your website active, you will need to duplicate it. There can be issues that arise when duplicating a website because you have different hosting environments and PHP languages. It's great if you have the money to invest in getting professional help for your website because receiving help will save you loads of time, and it will save you headaches. No one wants to be on Google to figure out why something isn't working or spending time on support chat. However, if you know to get this done on your own, then there are WordPress duplication plugins that you can use. Make sure you follow their instructions! Otherwise, it can get messy quickly.
Redesigning Page-By-Page A website facelift will start to get a little complicated when it comes to the design part of it. Many people think they can get a new theme, turn it on, and it's going to look great. However, that's not the case, especially if your website is pretty old. Each WordPress theme has a different way of showing your content, displaying images and headers. Divi is the theme that Daniel likes to use with his custom design clients. So, you migrate the website over, and then you install the Divi Theme on WordPress. Next, turn it on! When you look at your pages, you'll probably see all this short code. There is still plenty of work to do when you're redesigning the website, and it has to be completed page-by-page. That's where it can be a time suck for many people.
Tune in as we chat about the difference between Squarespace, WordPress, and Wix. Plus, we talk about website plugins, design tips, and SEO.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Daniel Fava's Resources Daniel Fava | Redesigning Your Private Practice Website - Part 1 | TPOT 169 5 Ways to Improve Your Website- PDF Download Create My Therapist Website Private Practice Elevation Apply For Private Practice Elevation Daniel Fava on Effective Private Practice Website Design 5 Ways To Improve Your Private Practice Website Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ See The Website Redesign: https://kingsportcounseling.com/ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Welcome back to the Website Redesign Series - this is part two. If you haven't already, I invite you to go back and listen to the previous episode. I have my good friend and website guru Daniel Fava with me. He is from Private Practice Elevation, and I am so grateful for his assistance! We are chatting all about the website redesign project that I have started. In part two, we walk through the nuts and bolts of what needs to get done to take your private practice website to the next level. If you want to see the final product, check out Kingsport Counseling here: https://kingsportcounseling.com/.
Meet Daniel Fava Daniel Fava is a father, husband, podcaster, website consultant, and founder of Create My Therapist Website and Private Practice Elevation. He helps therapists create websites and attract more clients online.
After building a website for his wife’s private practice and seeing the impact it had on her business, he became passionate about helping others achieve the same. Daniel offers web design services, SEO services, consultations, and online training to help therapists grow their business through online marketing. You can get free access to his library of PDFs, cheatsheets, and ebooks by clicking here.
The Importance of a Website for Your Private Practice The importance of having a website is so critical for your private practice's health - we can't emphasize that enough. As we said in the previous episode, it's more important than the building you work in and your office location in terms of bringing in new clients. Your website is the front of your private practice. When people ask you, what's the face of your business? Well, it's your website! It's the face of your brand. Often, the first interaction that someone's going to have with your private practice is on your website. Even when someone gets a referral from a friend, they will still check out your website.
Why Your Website Could Use A Redesign Is your website already working? If you get loads of referrals from your website, then that means it's working well! Daniel loves to work with clients that already get referrals from their websites. If that’s you, it means your online presence is already working in some sense. There are all these little things that we can do that will make your website even better. For instance, it can always look better on mobile devices. When it looks better, it will then convert better because we can focus on making sure that your contact information is in the right place. Also, a website facelift can make you look more professional, so that can help increase conversions.
Keep Your Website Active Daniel always receives this question first, "what's going to happen to my current website while you're building the new website?" The good news is your current website can stay up and stay alive. We don't want to take it down while you're working on this new project because maybe that new project will take you about six weeks to complete. If you DIY your website, it may take even longer depending on how much time you devote to it. So, obviously, we want to keep business coming in; we want to make sure that your website is still there.
Get Help For Duplicating Your Website To keep your website active, you will need to duplicate it. There can be issues that arise when duplicating a website because you have different hosting environments and PHP languages. It's great if you have the money to invest in getting professional help for your website because receiving help will save you loads of time, and it will save you headaches. No one wants to be on Google to figure out why something isn't working or spending time on support chat. However, if you know to get this done on your own, then there are WordPress duplication plugins that you can use. Make sure you follow their instructions! Otherwise, it can get messy quickly.
Redesigning Page-By-Page A website facelift will start to get a little complicated when it comes to the design part of it. Many people think they can get a new theme, turn it on, and it's going to look great. However, that's not the case, especially if your website is pretty old. Each WordPress theme has a different way of showing your content, displaying images and headers. Divi is the theme that Daniel likes to use with his custom design clients. So, you migrate the website over, and then you install the Divi Theme on WordPress. Next, turn it on! When you look at your pages, you'll probably see all this short code. There is still plenty of work to do when you're redesigning the website, and it has to be completed page-by-page. That's where it can be a time suck for many people.
Tune in as we chat about the difference between Squarespace, WordPress, and Wix. Plus, we talk about website plugins, design tips, and SEO.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Daniel Fava's Resources Daniel Fava | Redesigning Your Private Practice Website - Part 1 | TPOT 169 5 Ways to Improve Your Website- PDF Download Create My Therapist Website Private Practice Elevation Apply For Private Practice Elevation Daniel Fava on Effective Private Practice Website Design 5 Ways To Improve Your Private Practice Website Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ See The Website Redesign: https://kingsportcounseling.com/ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Your website is ground-zero for marketing your private practice and fueling your business with new leads and clients. In this particular interview, we chat all about my private practice website redesign. Daniel Fava has been just gracious enough to partner with me and hold my hand as we go through this. This episode is part one of a two-part series – we examine the questions you need to ask yourself before starting a website redesign. Be sure to listen next week for the second part of this series. We will dive into the nuts and bolts around this particular project. If you want to see the final product, check out Kingsport Counseling here: https://kingsportcounseling.com/.
Meet Daniel Fava Daniel Fava is a father, husband, podcaster, website consultant, and founder of Create My Therapist Website and Private Practice Elevation. He helps therapists create websites and attract more clients online.
After building a website for his wife’s private practice and seeing the impact it had on her business, he became passionate about helping others achieve the same. Daniel offers web design services, SEO services, consultations, and online training to help therapists grow their business through online marketing. You can get free access to his library of PDFs, cheatsheets, and ebooks by clicking here.
Why Do You Want To Redesign Your Website? Why do you want to redesign your private practice website? Especially, think about why you want to switch it up right now. Most people will say that their website is pretty old and outdated. However, it goes a lot deeper than that. A website is and should be an investment into the future of your business. It's the way that people will find you, and it can be just a great tool to bring lots of traffic to your practice and convert that traffic into new clients. So, if you are interested in a private practice redesign, then think about your why.
Your Business Goals Will Drive The Website Redesign Once you know your 'why,' then it's time to think about your business. If your private practice needs a new website, it will help clean up the front of your business. With a clean website, you can be responsive to your clients. Also, when redesigning your website, it's critical to increase your visibility in Google search engines. However, we also need to think about your goals when it comes to private practice. So, now you need to think about the most crucial aspect of your website and the most important goals you have for your business for the next 12 months. For instance, many people have the goal to get more telehealth clients. Then, we need to make sure that people are aware on your website that you offer telehealth and in which states.
Consider Hiring A Website Professional As far as a redesign goes, the best place to start is with the why. Before starting your redesign, it will be critical to think about the goals you want to hit next year. When you start looking at your goals and vision, you might need to think a little bit bigger when it comes to your redesign. If your goals are big enough, Daniel highly recommends getting help with your website. Reach out to a professional to build the website because you might end up spending a ton of time and some money on trying to put it all together on your own. Making a website without any help can be very time-consuming. You may have better luck investing in someone that's going to increase those conversions.
Working With Daniel Fava If you're looking for some professional help with your website redesign, I highly recommend working with Daniel. To get the process started, Daniel will have a 15-minute call to uncover the issues holding you back and put together a plan to help you reach your goals. If you're not ready for a complete redesign, Daniel has loads of free website and SEO resources to help you elevate your online presence and market your private practice. You can check those out HERE. Lastly, be sure to check out the redesign we did on Kingsport Counseling, and let me know what you think!
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Daniel Fava's Resources 5 Ways to Improve Your Website- PDF Download Create My Therapist Website Private Practice Elevation Apply For Private Practice Elevation Daniel Fava on Effective Private Practice Website Design 5 Ways To Improve Your Private Practice Website Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course SALE! Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ See The Website Redesign: https://kingsportcounseling.com/ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
I'm glad you're with me for this particular episode with Lisa Mustard. Lisa is a great person to get to know, and I'm excited about what she is doing, which is pretty unique - she is offering podcourses. Lately, I've been working on getting some continuing education credits online. Well, Lisa has built an entire business around that. So, we talk all about how podcourses could be a great way to diversify income in your private practice. Tune in as we also touch on imposter syndrome, marketing, and navigating NBCC credentialing.
Meet Lisa Mustard My name is Lisa Mustard and I am a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist in South Carolina. I am also a wife to Billy, mama to two daughters, puppy wrangler, lover of health, wellness, and fitness, and personal development junkie. I started this show because I was bored with the traditional modes of continuing education and professional development. I yearned for convenient education that was fun, interesting, inspiring, helpful, and easily accessible anywhere, anytime. And I couldn’t find what I was looking for, so I decided to create it. When I am not podcasting or seeing clients, I am in the gym, on a run or walk, spending time with my family, or wrangling the lovable, yet incorrigible Lulu, our Australian Shepherd/Pitbull puppy. The Therapy Show The Therapy Show with Lisa Mustard provides value by bringing in-depth and exciting interviews with experts, experienced practitioners, and other interesting people within the world of talk therapy. Lisa's hope is that her guests positively impact you, your work and career, and ultimately your clients. Guests range from specialists and experts in the clinical world, as well as those who have pivoted their skill sets and are doing something different and unique now, like writing books, motivational speaking, creating an online business, doing consulting work, health and wellness coaching, life coaching or they are other helping professionals who can give a different perspective when working with specific issues or populations.
Creating Podcourses In January 2020, Lisa put together a packet and sent it off to NBCC. People told Lisa that it would take a couple of months for them to approve her. Well, because of Covid, it took them ten months to get back to Lisa. During this time, Lisa started to doubt herself and her abilities. Eventually, imposter syndrome kicked in. However, Lisa was approved! Next, Lisa needed to hire people to help her with all the techie stuff that makes her head want to explore. Overall, Lisa loves creating podcourses. To get started, Lisa reached out to people who she knew personally that are experts in their field. She told them to throw together three to five objectives; she interviews them and even pays a small fee. The rest is history!
Getting NBCC Credentials Getting NBCC credentials can be complicated. Let's say you already have a course. Next, look at how the NBCC needs your course to fit their model. If you already have a course, you can just look at it and retool it. Otherwise, you need to figure out how to meet their requirements. If you don't have a course already, it may be easier to check the requirements first and then create your course around the types of things they are looking for.
The most challenging part for Lisa was making sure that what they needed from her was on the website. There's a lot of work to be done, and it needs to be consistent. For instance, your evaluation survey needs to be specific, or else it won't get approved. They pretty much tell you what you need to have on there, but they work with you. NBCC will help you massage it to get it to where it needs to be. Another challenging part of the process is marketing; when you create something, you have to figure out how to get it out in the world.
Imposter Syndrome Every single day Lisa has thoughts about being an imposture. After taking a strengths test, Lisa found that she's really good at connecting with people and achieving things. That totally makes sense because Lisa enjoys connecting with people. She loves to listen, and that's what makes her a great therapist. Plus, Lisa likes to help other people shine their light. Basically, she is looking for those people that are the experts that want to get out there and shine their light and share what they know. Of course, Lisa will make sure that everything they're presenting is research-based and have references. Now, Lisa comes from a place of needing to be the conduit of the information, not so much the expert. That way, the imposter syndrome tends to go to the back-burner.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Lisa Mustard's Resources Lisa's Website Facebook Instagram You can listen to The Therapy Show with Lisa Mustard here: http://bit.ly/TherapyShowApple Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Join my Focus Groups Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Business ownership can be challenging, but it's not that different than treating patients. Your business is like a patient, and Fix This Next for Healthcare Providers by Kasey Compton will teach you to treat it that way. We talk all about the inspiration behind this book and why Kasey thinks healthcare providers are the best suited for entrepreneurship. Plus, we dive into everything you need to fix in your private practice and how to finally get closer to professional goals while building a strong foundation.
Meet Kasey Compton Kasey built a million-dollar practice with over seventy-five staff members in less than two years from the ground up. She is the President/CEO of Mindsight Behavioral Group with multiple offices located in Kentucky. Kasey says, “it definitely wasn’t easy but I learned a lot scaling a practice”. She is now in year three and her business with basically running itself; largely due to the systems and processes we put into place.
Now, Kasey is a behavioral group consultant (www.consultwithkc.com) and author that helps practices avoid mistakes by cleaning up their systems, implementing better processes, and understanding what to do with their money. Kasey says, “ I take so much pride in my own practice and now I feel honored to help others grow too.”
About Fix This Next When Fix This Next: Make the Vital Change That Will Level Up Your Businesscame out; Kasey loved it! It is based on Maslow's hierarchy of needs. Well, our private practices have tons of needs. We can't act like a firefighter in private practice. Every time our business has a problem, we need a system for addressing the issues rather than just willy nilly solving things. When Kasey read that book, she thought this was meant for mental health. Kasey knew that mental health professionals needed something similar. After talking to so many other practice owners, Kasey learned that they loved the book. However, something was missing – they didn't know how to apply those principles to their private practice. Kasey knew that it was just something she had to fix; she felt like she was responsible for writing this book.
Treat Your Business Like You Treat Your Patients In many ways, private practice consultants have a responsibility to help people feel confident in the way that they're spending their time and feel like they don't need an MBA to run a therapy practice. Throughout Kasey's book, that's a running theme that therapists, in her opinion, are better-suited business owners than anybody else out there. She truly believes that our businesses are much like our patients. If we treat our businesses like we treat our patients, everything becomes much smoother, and everything becomes much more efficient. Overall, we will have better outcomes. So, that is what Kasey teaches in Fix This Next for Healthcare Providers is how to treat your business like you do your patients.
How To Assess Your Business One of Kasey's strategies within Fix This Next for Healthcare Providers is all about assessing your business. Basically, you would do a diagnostic assessment of a client or a patient. Kasey teaches therapists how to evaluate the business in the same way. There are three foundational levels in your business, which are sales, profit, and order. We have core needs within each of those levels. Next, we ask ourselves the fifteen questions in the book. Based on that simple assessment, we're able to determine what our business's biggest priority is and where we should start.
If you have a client coming in to see you, and they're having panic attacks. What you're going to do first is you're going to gather information. We're going to ask them all these questions to try to determine what is at the core. Panic and anxiety are a direct result of fear. So, fear is just manifesting itself into anxiety and then ultimately into a panic attack. What we have to do is identify the fear and treat that. This method is exactly how we get back our time, and that's how we make our business better. It will help us reach more confidence in our decisions and what we decide to work on by fixing the core of our issues.
Fixing Your Level of Sales One of the most significant issues for practices is having too many clients and not enough clinicians. Of course, there will be issues with this because you cannot serve the clients in your practice properly. While on the other hand, some practices have too many clinicians and not enough clients. The foundational level of sales is sort of like the bloodline for the practice. It's the creation of cash; if we don't have sales, we can't have a business. Sales will be the most critical thing to look at in your business. Tune in as we dive into all the other aspects of your business that need to be fixed.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kasey Compton's Resources Kasey’s Website Pre-Order Fix This Next Kasey on TPOT 47 Kasey on Instagram Kasey on Facebook Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Profit First Fix This Next: Make the Vital Change That Will Level Up Your Business Learn more about Mike Michalowicz Getting Things Done Join my Focus Groups Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Margarita Khosh joins for a lively and fun conversation. We talked about expanding your niche beyond state lines; it's time that you become available to more clients than you could have ever imagined! Plus, Margarita gives us the scoop on navigating regulatory compliance, licensing regulations, and the importance of niche branding to reach underserved and underrepresented communities. Lastly, we chat about how Covid and 2020 had a massive impact on getting telehealth to become universally accepted and finally lowering the stigma around mental health.
Meet Margarita Khosh Margarita Khosh, MBA, LSSGB, GHAC, is a healthcare industry implementation consultant who works with health care professionals to strengthen the patient-provider relationship. Leveraging her 20-year healthcare operational experience, international training, Healthcare MBA, fluency in insurance terminology, licensing, and regulatory compliance, she launched MK Medical Solutions, LLC to shift the mindset of providers and health systems to understand that the patient is a consumer. Through this lens, and motivated by overcoming trauma and burnout, she propels the implementation of a modern patient-centric experience that funnels to benefit all healthcare stakeholders by reducing cost, decreasing burnout, and contributing to a health system that works for all.
Margarita serves on the Board of Directors of Women’s Healthcare Executive Network of South Florida and teaches a Facebook community of 12K therapists while interviewing industry-leading authors. She has been featured on Sabrina Runbeck’s Powerful and Passionate Healthcare Professionals, The Mighty Pete Lonton’s Fire In The Belly, The B2B Podcast by The App Guys, The Practice Of Therapy Podcast with Gordon Brewer, and Coming Out Loved and Supported Podcast.
She is also a contributing author and columnist. In a recently cited article at awarenow, she spoke about the importance of leveraging technology to make the health system work better for everyone.
Covid's Impact On Telehealth Before Covid, therapists were not leveraging technology the way that other industries leverage technology. When Covid happens, all of a sudden, it helped therapists propel the adoption of technology in a way that we never imagined. The entire healthcare industry has been turned upside down (for the better)! During this time, Margarita learned everything that she needed to know about how the new policies, rules, and regulations worked.
So, she started helping therapists launch private practices beyond state lines. Plus, she can inform therapists on how to utilize the executive orders and treat patients. 2020 and 2021 are all about helping therapists expand their practice beyond state lines for Margarita. It is a total game-changer for both therapists and clients. Plus, it's helping lift the stigma that people have around mental health issues. Covid has been extremely stressful, and we are lucky to help patients in the virtual world.
Why You Should Get Licensed In Another State It has been exciting for many therapists - you can get licensed in another state and grow your practice. There is value in niche branding and lived experience. When you expand your practice beyond state lines, think about how that will impact a population that has traditionally had a different viewpoint on therapy. So, this is how you heal even more people. With telehealth, we can bring therapy to people regardless of where they are. Sadly, there is stigma and shame associated with mental health in specific communities; nobody will talk about it the importance of therapy. That's why it will be critical to get your practice across state lines.
How Licensing Works In Other States There are resources out there to empower therapists to understand how licensing works in different states. Therapists might not be aware of specific questions they need to ask, especially given the executive orders. Margarita will help clinicians figure out interstate licensing. She has all of the resources for a therapist to do it themselves. Her goal is to empower and educate professionals to make educated decisions and understand the process themselves. If someone doesn't have time to make it work, then Margarita will offer additional support. She understands which questions to ask to get to the bottom line and move the process along.
Florida Telehealth Registration There are certain states that therapists can explore in terms of getting to take their practice to where they don't need to become credentialed fully. If you would like to start seeing patients in Florida, there is a Florida Telehealth Registration. It is not a licensing, it's a registration. Simply put, it allows you to be registered in the state of Florida to treat patients, and it had nothing to do with the executive order because it's been in place for two years now. So it means that you can solicit patients in Florida that are not your patients, and you could practice there. It only takes a couple of days. Plus, the registration is free. To complete the registration application, click the link labeled "Documents" at the bottom of the homepage HERE.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Margarita's Resources MK Medical Solutions MK Medical Solutions on Facebook Margarita's Instagram MK Medical Solutions on LinkedIn Florida Telehealth Certification Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Free to Focus: A Total Productivity System to Achieve More by Doing Less The Free to Focus Course Join my Focus Groups Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Do you need help with your private practice website? Jenn Fredette joins to talk about the power of strong copywriting on your website. First, it's essential to have a niche when thinking about copywriting. That way, it will be seamless to market to your ideal client. Jenn gives loads of copywriting tips for your private practice website. Plus, we talk about the importance of community and mentorship, especially when it comes to your copywriting.
Meet Jenn Fredette Jenn journeys with others to develop a deep understanding of themselves and the world around them. She is passionate about connecting the curious and brave with therapeutic guides who can lead the way into the wild adventure of self-knowledge.
As a former minister, practicing psychotherapist, adjunct graduate professor, and host of “A Thinker’s Guide to…” Podcast, Jenn brings a wealth of knowledge and experience in translating the profound into everyday language. Learn more at therapyforthinkers.com or follow her on Instagram at @athinkersguide.
The Importance of Copywriting Jenn realized the importance of finding a niche in terms of who she wants to serve. However, a niche is also helpful in terms of what marketing does and doesn't work for you. There are 20 billion options when it comes to marketing your practice. We need to think about how we speak about who we are and who we want to serve. Online speak is also known as "copy" or written content that we've created. However, our marketing copy doesn't even have to be in writing; it can also include a podcast or a networking conversation. Basically, how do you articulate who you are serving, who you are, and who want to work with?
Plus, Jenn speaks about her copywriting journey; she loves to write. So, Jenn set out to learn how actually to write copy that is captivating and is converting clients. Your copy needs to be representative of who you are as a clinician. Sometimes, marketing can feel kind of shallow and feels a little slimy. As therapists, we're not wanting to manipulate people. In addition, a lot of marketing techniques sometimes don't integrate our clinical depth or clinical awareness, which is a real shame. Jenn feels passionate about helping people translate their voice and the knowledge they already have into the copy on their website.
Copywriting Tips A lot of therapists are resistant to the essence of marketing, which is niching down. You have to niche down for your marketing to work. However, many therapists don't want to exclude someone from their niche. When you're trying to accommodate many different people, then often this leads to a lot of blocks when writing. Then, it will be challenging to write either your therapy directory profile or website. When we try and write to everyone, then we need to write to Jim, as well as Karen, and Bob. Also, you don't want to leave Jane out either. So, it's hard to distill down what you want to say in your website copy.
Plus, Jenn says that sometimes a therapist will lose themselves; you lose your desire of what you want your practice to be. If you're so focused on accommodating others, you're maybe not getting your own needs met. So the first step is to really get in touch with your own desire. Who do you want to sit with who would light you up? When you know who your ideal client is, it will be super easy to start copywriting for your website! If you're not sure who your ideal client is, then think about the people that you are most excited to work with!
Can We Really Say That? Therapists will think some of their copy might sound too edgy for their website. For instance, a therapist's ideal client may smoke marijuana. The therapist says: "I know that you just smoked three bowls of marijuana back to back to numb the pain." Your copy should always start with the problem in mind. Then, you get into where you can go from the problem. It's a basic copywriting formula that works well for websites. Next, you will describe what the client has tried in the past that hasn't worked for them. Overall, therapists need to write a copy that reflects who they are and who they want their ideal person to be.
We Can't Copywrite Alone Unfortunately, writing copy alone doesn't work. The solution is having formulas and frameworks for your copywriting process. Also, have people that can partner with you as you write your copy. These people can be in a mastermind group, a business group, or a Facebook group for private practice owners. Also, you could find a coach or consultant that can walk you through the process. You need a coach anyway- therapists need a coach so they don't have to go out there and get a business degree. Often, therapists want to rewrite their website completely – Jenn says that's not a good idea! Instead, start with your directory profile. That way, you can do some trial and error and find out what is working.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jenn's Resources athinkersguide.com athinkersguide.com/diagnosis athinkersguide.com/attune therapyforthinkers.com Jenn's Podcast: A Thinker's Guide To... Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Purchase The Full Focus Planner™ Free to Focus: A Total Productivity System to Achieve More by Doing Less The Free to Focus Course Join my Focus Groups Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
I am grateful to be joined by two private practice rock stars, Kelly Higdon and Miranda Palmer, in The Practice of Therapy's latest episode. Our conversation revolves around the money mindset that we should have as therapists and as private practice owners. The one silver lining that has come out of Covid is that people are finally starting to understand mental health services' true value. So, join me, Kelly, and Miranda as we talk about what you should be charging, why you should consider outsourcing, and the reason therapists should never compare fees.
Meet Kelly Higdon, LMFT Kelly Higdon, LMFT is the co-founder of ZynnyMe and co-creator of The Business School Bootcamp for Therapists, a flagship course that helps therapists in all parts of their private practice journey solidify their business foundation and growth. When she isn’t coaching or hosting retreats for her clients, you can find her playing roller derby or spending time with her family. To learn more about Kelly check out kellyhigdon.com and zynnyme.com
On any given day you will find her writing, meeting with her psychotherapy or coaching clients, running a webinar for therapists, providing consultation with private practice owners, and making lots of room for playtime with her family. Kelly's hair constantly changes. She cares about the people that she works with. AND her most FAVORITE THING is to push, educate and inspire in the Business School Bootcamp.
Meet Miranda Palmer, LMFT Miranda Palmer built a cash-based private practice during the recession. But, she is most proud that she did it to take care of her family and created a work-life balance that allowed her to avoid the all too common burn-out a lot of therapists experience.
As the co-creator of ZynnyMe.com, she provides how-to articles, free monthly webinars, and co-leads the Business School Bootcamp for Therapists.
Today her primary business is inspiring and teaching therapists private practice marketing. Miranda teaches them business skills, and not because she is all about money. Miranda sees how clinical outcomes, burnout rate, and overall passion can be impacted positively or negatively by how our businesses run.
How Much Is Therapy Worth? How much is therapy worth? Most of us know that it's a silly question! Well, people are priceless, and you cannot put a value on a therapy. How are you going to monetize transgenerational trauma and healing? So then that brings us back to, well, how do we know what to charge? What do we need to do good work and to live the life we teach our clients?
Money is a resource; that is part of the outcome that we are working towards. We're working towards an outcome with our clients, a clinical outcome, and we want them to have a great experience. We want to be able to be present to provide that outcome. So we need to look at our outcome; money is just one resource that we need to get there. Time and energy are also resources that we require as therapists. Now, we start to calculate, what does that number really come out to?
When you take all of this into account, then you no longer feel shame or guilt about how much you charge for your services. When you think about running a business, you need sick time; you need to pay your rent, you need to pay your mortgage, health insurance, vacation, technology, and utilities. All of these things that are part of being a business owner we need to consider. Most of us did not learn how to be business owners in graduate school, we have nonprofit training, and we have this nonprofit mindset. Nonprofit organizations will get grants for millions of dollars; then, they can use that money to pay for their positions. You never really get to see where all of the other money goes.
Stop Comparing Fees The mental healthcare system is not doing well. Access is challenging. As therapists, we are one part of that system. In order for that system to exist, to be sustainable, we all have to operate from that place of our highest and best. Then, we can raise the bar for these other systems, maybe to change with us.
We should not be looking at our peers and saying, "you charge too much; why are you doing that?" Because at the end of the day, you don't know someone else's situation. You don't know what that therapist needs to run their business. It can be totally different than what you need to run your business. A lot of us live paycheck to paycheck. Would you want your clients to live paycheck to paycheck? No! So, you shouldn't have to live paycheck to paycheck either.
Private Practice During Covid Our relationship to money has a lot to do with self-care. Many private practice owners are starting to see their phones ring off the hook because of Covid. However, the clinician will not be able to see everyone that calls their practice. It wouldn't be fair to the patients or fair to the clinician. The pandemic has only highlighted the issues we have had as a system. Now, we see the cracks in mental healthcare widen. We will be treating anxiety, depression, agoraphobia, medical trauma, and all sorts of things in the next years to come. As therapists, we feel like we have a duty to do extra work during these times because it is such a crisis. However, don't forget about self-care!
The Importance of Outsourcing When we get into private practice, we have to look at the bookkeeping, answering the phones, maintaining the website, and dealing with loans. If you are the business owner, you have to budget for those things that you're outsourcing, or you have to have time for those things that should be outsourcing.
Clinicians think private practice will be great because they are only going to see thirty clients a week. However, they find themselves working sixty or seventy hours a week because of all the extra tasks they have taken on. Unfortunately, Clinicians are a lot of times too slow to outsource stuff. When you don't outsource things, you'll be saving money. However, when you do outsource things, it will allow you to enjoy your life. Make outsourcing part of your business plan and charge a fee that covers that instead of stressing out about small things that don't necessarily matter.
Reevaluate What You Charge During Covid One silver lining that has happened through Covid that a lot of the stigma around mental health and mental wellbeing is starting to lower. So many of us have experienced anxiety on different levels. More than ever, people are beginning to understand the value of therapy, and they need to pay for what the services are truly worth. We hope that therapists are really looking at those numbers and reevaluating what to charge. For instance, it's time that therapists start saying no to insurance contracts that are paying $25 or $35 for a session. It's appalling that those contracts are still out there, and therapists are still signing them. Therapists need to do the math - we have to do the math for ourselves and figure out what works.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kelly & Miranda's Resources ZynnyMe ZynnyMe’s Worksheet on Setting Your Fees ZynnyMe’s Amazing Free Trainings Business School Bootcamp Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Listen to Kelly Higdon on Episode 16 of The Practice of Therapy Podcast Join my Focus Groups Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 70. Your Successful Therapy Website Redesign: Understanding When & Why Kingsport Counseling Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Colleen Hilton joins the show to talk about our marketing mindset in private practice. Many therapists think that marketing is icky. However, marketing is actually essential to get clients the help that they need. The more effective your marketing efforts are, the better you can help the right people. Tune in as we talk about finding your ideal client and how Thrivelution can be a win-win for both therapists and clients.
Meet Colleen Hilton Colleen Hilton is the founder & CEO of Acuity Counseling, Acuity Consulting and Thrivelution LLC. She is also a licensed Marriage & Family Therapist & an AAMFT approved Supervisor, with over 14 years of experience in the industry.
Since 2016, Acuity Counseling has been providing boutique therapy services, with a retail-style model, making high-quality mental health available to the general public. With 3 brick and mortar locations and a strong online presence throughout the state via telehealth, Acuity is seeking to make a difference across all of Washington state.
Acuity Consulting focuses on creating change in the business world by offering leadership coaching, and organizational mental health training. By supporting individuals and organizations in personal and professional change, believing in the systemic impact we will have together.
Colleen co-founded Thrivelution LLC in 2020, amidst the unprecedented circumstances of the Covid-19 pandemic. Thrivelution is disrupting the current market space by throwing out the antiquated practice of directory style searches, focusing on the quality of matches, and demonstrating a return on investment for small business owners.
Colleen is outspoken as a leader and educator on the business side of the mental health industry. She is active in coaching private practice owners, as well as new group practice owners, in how to align their values as a helper, with their role as a business owner to assist them in creating successful, profitable businesses.
Personally, Colleen is a wife and the proud mother of two inspiring young women. She is passionate about warm weather (still missing
SoCal), boating, and finding great food wherever she is at. Colleen loves people and making new connections, finding great joy in learning from others, and hearing the amazing stories every person has to share.
Success Mindset Many therapists think that marketing is icky or too salesy. Colleen is working on debunking that marketing mindset for private practice owners. Instead, we should use marketing to create a mindset for success. Marketing and advertising get an awful rap in the mental health industry. We feel like somehow being a helper doesn't align with marketing and advertising, but Colleen honestly believes that our professional ethics require that we do beneficial marketing and advertising.
Charge What You're Worth Your marketing mindset has a lot to do with finances too. If you don't have enough money, then you are struggling. How will that impact the work that you do for clients? If you can hone in on marketing, then you can market to your ideal client and attract the person into your practice. That is why it's essential to have an exact brand. Then, the feedback loop just starts to work in a beautiful way where the clients are coming to us. We can charge what we're worth!
Market To Your Ideal Client When we do effective marketing, we reach our ideal client and provide the most qualified help. While on the other hand, if our net is too broad or there is no net at all, we can't help our ideal clients. Clients will not magically find you when you build a website. We should be practicing from an abundance mindset - there are many clients out there, and you really should be helping the people you are passionate about supporting.
Colleen will reverse engineer her marketing. So, think about your ideal client and answer these questions:
- What do they do for a living?
- What gender do they identify as?
- Where do they hang out?
- What are their problems?
- How can you solve their problems?
Then, start thinking about ways you can engage with your ideal client. We are not selling something. Instead, we are communicating the value that we have and how we can provide help. Marketing is the ability to help people find you. Potential clients are out there, and they are struggling. By using doing effective marketing, we can provide them the exact solution that they are looking for.
Get More Clients Through Marketing What if your ideal client is out there with the wrong therapist? They have a terrible experience, so they visit another therapist. Yet again, they have a terrible experience. Sadly, this keeps happening to your ideal client. Eventually, they give up on therapy altogether. Now, their problems keep getting worse and worse. They are digging a hole for themselves, and they can't figure out how to get out. Maybe ten years pass by, and they finally find you. If you could find that ideal client ten years ago, they would be in a much different place today.
Give your clients what they are looking for in the first place. When you find your ideal client, you help them, and they get to help you. Working with our ideal client allows us to be supported financially. When we are supported financially, then we can do our best work. After grad school, we have the hopes and dreams to open a private practice. Like any business, marketing is a crucial component to getting more clients. For therapists, it's no different – we need to practice effective marketing techniques!
About Thrivelution Colleen stumbled with her marketing at first. She didn't know how to communicate with potential clients. She had referral relationships, the directory listing, yet she didn't find herself with the right clients. Unfortunately, when you don't have the right clients, then you need to turn them away. It's a shame for the client because they ask for help, yet they find themselves with a roadblock.
So, Colleen wanted to know why there wasn't a "dating app" for finding a therapist. Clients should go on the app and ask for what they want. Then, therapists should advertise their services. We need a matching system that focuses on clinical fit. Thrivelution is an algorithm that will present options to clients and clinicians. That way, they can mutually agree to the relationship. Once it's a good fit, the clinicians can take it from there. Clinicians can build thriving private practices, and clients can find the best therapist for them – it's a win-win!
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Colleen's Resources Colleen's LinkedIn Thrivelution.com Code: "MATCH21" For 2 months free! Thrivelution on Facebook Download Our Thriving Practice Checklist Now! Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Join my Focus Groups Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course 70. Your Successful Therapy Website Redesign: Understanding When & Why Kingsport Counseling Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, I am joined by Susan Orenstein, who works with individuals and couples to pursue a more peaceful, purposeful, and passionate life. Susan speaks about the process behind starting a podcast and what she has learned so far. We chat about creating content outside of the therapy room to help people on their healing journey. Tune in as we discuss other ways to expand your niche and turn your passions into creative and useful content.
Meet Susan Orenstein Hi, I’m Susan Orenstein, Ph.D. For over twenty-five years, I’ve worked with individuals and couples that come to my counseling office in pursuit of a more peaceful, purposeful, and passionate life. Relationships are integral to that rich, fulfilling existence we all desire. Healthy relationships bolster our well-being while unhealthy relationships hinder our ability to thrive.
That’s why I’m passionate about helping couples to either optimize their relationship or learn to let each other go so they can develop a nourishing, intimate connection elsewhere.
Making Content For Clients Susan wants her work to be accessible to more people. So, she developed a podcast - it's called After The First Marriage. Plus, Susan has a free e-course that goes with it. She is creating a lot of content because Susan particularly loves the work that she does. In addition, Susan loves going online and looking at worksheets, reading, and joining groups. There are so many ways people can heal outside of the therapy room, and Susan wanted to help develop those things for her clients.
Creating A Podcast In Susan's podcast, she gets to bring more of herself in. Susan gets to think about who interests her, who she wants to learn from, what she is reading, and who she wants to interview. Plus, Susan gets to create fun materials with her content. Also, Susan is learning that there are parts of her that she can bring into this process to expand her ability to be a therapist. For instance, Susan has learned about the effectiveness of self-disclosure when working with clients because it gives you more credibility when they can hear that a therapist has gone through similar struggles. Overall, with a podcast and creating content, it's fun to shake it up and to learn new things all the time.
Normalizing Therapy Next, Susan speaks about working on tearing down the stigma that's still attached to being a therapy client. She wants to normalize these processes for people because almost everybody cares about having healthy relationships. Therefore, getting the skills to learn about this and making it approachable and accessible to people is critical to Susan. One way Susan helps people for free is through her podcast and social media. Plus, podcasting is more personal than blogging or written material because it's a better way to connect with the person on the other end. Even though you're just listening to a recording, you still make a connection through voice.
Choosing Divorce As A Niche Professionally, Susan's favorite clients have been people who have been kicked to the curb. They are so down; they cannot get their head up, and they are so grateful to have therapy and have someone believe in them and have someone help them. That way, Susan can help her clients figure out what happened, so it doesn't happen again. Through therapy, Susan's clients regain self-esteem and gain some tools for intimacy in the future. Some of her very favorite clients have been people going through a divorce. Luckily, Susan can't say that she knows personally what divorce is like. However, she can say that she has never taken her husband for granted, and he has never taken Susan for granted.
Client Themes Around Divorce When Susan sees somebody going through a divorce who didn't choose divorce, they are often very wounded, have hurt self-esteem and depression. Plus, there is anxiety, they question their attractiveness, and they question their desirability. After divorce, many people will suffer from self-doubt, low self-esteem, and even revenge fantasies. In addition, many times these people are angry, and they are bitter. Also, these people will look for ways to numb themselves so they may start drinking heavily, eating more, turning to relationships that aren't good for them in order to dull their feelings.
While on the other hand, for the person who is initiating the divorce, there can be guilt and shame. Usually, these people want to know how they can help their children through the divorce process. Mainly, people want to be proactive, which is terrific. Lastly, another category is people that want the divorce, but don't think it's possible. For instance, someone might be staying in the marriage because of financial issues, or they are worried about their children's wellbeing. These are the trickiest and saddest situations because these people are almost like hostages.
Expand Your Practice Outside The Therapy Room When expanding your practice, find some issues and topics that fascinate you that you want to learn about no matter what. That way, you can't go wrong. When you enjoy the information, you'll become an expert, and it will help fuel your energy. Also, when you love what you do, it will be harder to burnout. Another piece of advice is having a colleague help you. For instance, talking it out with someone can be a massive asset to your endeavors. It's also critical to have a set of trusted peers and colleagues that you can share information with.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Susan's Resources After The First Marriage After The First Marriage Podcast After The First Marriage Instagram After The First Marriage Twitter Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Join my Focus Groups Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Google Workspace for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the Google Workspace (formerly G-Suite) for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Amber Benziger joins the show to speak about creating a membership program for our clients. Amber created The Anxiety Lab, a monthly membership program full of courses, workbooks, speakers, and educational content to help people manage their anxiety. First, we dive into talking about racism in a therapy setting, Amber speaks about her switch to telehealth, and then Amber reveals the inspiration behind The Anxiety Lab. Plus, Amber explains why we need to stop doubting ourselves; we can execute our great ideas and help even more people outside of the therapy room.
Meet Amber Benziger Hey, I’m Amber, a Licensed Professional Counselor and Certified Clinical Trauma Professional in the state of New Jersey. I am a therapist, an advocate, a feeler, and a flawed human. My goals are to create an environment for women to come, explore and process their feelings; and heal from their troubles while growing in self-compassion and self-worth.
I'm no stranger to anxiety and perfectionism and through my own journey of self-exploration, I fell in love with the therapeutic process. When I'm not in my therapy chair I'm a busy mom of two, a runner, a french bulldog enthusiast, and an avocado toast connoisseur. I curse too much, I find solace at the beach, and I love spray painting stuff.
Speaking About Racism In Therapy As a Black therapist, Amber thinks it is imperative for her to discuss racism and advocate for equality because of her unique perspective. A larger majority of Amber's practice is women of color. Lately, Amber has seen a lot of racial trauma and a lot of anxiety around the election. Racism isn't something new. However, it does have a spotlight on it. So, Amber is talking about much more in her practice than she ever has before. It is critical to hold space for racial issues still, primarily because they haven't gone away, and people still have those concerns and worry. Racism isn't a trend, it's something that has always been there, and it seems like something that will always be around.
Switching To Telehealth Before the pandemic, Amber had one or two clients online, but her practice was basically in the office. So, during the pandemic, Amber had to make that switch to telehealth, like many practitioners. She was worried about how that transition would go, and luckily, her clients were fantastic. Plus, Amber has just seen her practice grow incredibly in the past few months with the pandemic. She even has a waiting list and has turned people away. However, it's a struggle for Amber because she wants to help people who are having a hard time. Sometimes, it can be heartbreaking to turn a client away. That's why Amber created her membership service, The Anxiety Lab.
The Anxiety Lab The Anxiety Lab is a monthly membership program full of courses, workbooks, speakers, and educational content to help manage your anxiety. The program is accompanied by a private online Facebook community where you can interact with Amber and your peers. Amber created it because it was something that she felt like she needed during the pandemic. During Covid, living under the same roof with kids and spouses can be really stressful, and Amber became really anxious herself. Then, Amber started getting a bunch of calls and a bunch of people reaching out to her through social media platforms about working with her. That made Amber feel even more overwhelmed and stressed out. So, she had the idea of creating The Anxiety Lab.
Creating A Membership Program Amber is not a technology person. So that was the part that overwhelmed her. As practitioners, we're always questioning if we know how to do all this next-level stuff. So, Amber did a lot of research, and she decided to use the platform Kajabi. It is great for membership services because it allows Amber to put the courses on there, and it allows for the community aspect. That way, Amber doesn't have to use a different tool, and she can do everything on Kajabi. It will even let you send out email marketing; it's like a one-stop-shop for everything you need to create a membership program.
Marketing Your Membership Program Amber will market a lot through her social media platforms, specifically Instagram. Amber will make connections on Instagram with other therapists and private practice owners. Plus, she jumps on Instagram Live with people who have a larger following. In addition, Amber dabbles with Facebook Ads; it's something that she still needs to learn more about. Overall, Amber utilizes a lot of word of mouth to get people to The Anxiety Lab. Plus, her therapist friends have been a lot of help when it comes to spreading the word.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Amber's Resources Vitality Behavior Health Vitality Behavior Health on Facebook Amber on Instagram The Anxiety Lab Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Training Webinar Join my Focus Groups Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Angela James joins the show. Amidst the pandemic, Angela opened Classroom to Couch, which is her private practice coaching business. We talk all about the importance of community over competition. In private practice, other therapists aren’t your competition; they are your community and a great referral source. Later, Angela gives her three-step process to opening a private practice. Plus, we talk about making the switch to telehealth and why it has never been easier to open a private practice.
Meet Angela James My name is Angela James and I'm a Licensed Marriage & Family Therapist in California. I've been practicing as a therapist for over 13 years and am grateful to be doing what I love.
I'm nationally certified in TF-CBT which focuses on the treatment of Trauma in youth. I am a strong believer in the brain's ability to heal from past traumas and for PTSD to be seen as curable, given the right therapeutic intervention. I also specialize in helping adult women overcome anxiety and panic disorder related symptoms.
I've always been passionate about helping others reach their full potential, so when I noticed myself eager to assist Therapists in opening their own Private Practice, it only seemed natural to develop this part of my professional career. Amidst this Pandemic, I opened Classroom to Couch which is my Private Practice coaching business. I am thrilled to see other mental health professionals reach their small business dreams and absolutely love being a small part of that process.
Community Not Competition Therapists will view other therapists as their competition; it’s a huge mistake. Angela says that private practice made her step out of her comfort zone and connect with other therapists. With a scarcity mindset, therapists think that all other therapists are their competition. However, it’s simply not the case. When you build relationships with other therapists, you can refer potential clients to each other. Not everyone has the same niche, so your ideal client will not be another therapist’s ideal client. In fact, Angela says that other therapists are her number one referral source. Connect with other therapists in the community and get to know them so you can generate more referrals.
Angela’s Three-Step Process Angela helps therapists using a three-step process. Step one is all about business basics; that’s Angela’s biggest passion. With Angela, you’ll talk about the different business structures and which one could be a good fit for you. Step two is all about HIPAA compliance. Step three is all about networking, advertising, and marketing. Angela will teach you all about how to get the best referrals and how to network with other therapists in private practice. Plus, Angela says that her program is affordable and attainable.
Switching To Telehealth Angela built an entire telehealth practice in the span of the weekend when the pandemic started. Luckily, Angela didn’t lose very many clients. Even some that were unsure about telehealth eventually came back and gave it a shot. A lot of teenagers are actually a lot more comfortable with therapy via telehealth. At first, Angela struggled. However, she adapted and grew. The best part is that Angela can see clients from all over the state of California. Now, she has access to tons of people that she didn’t before; it’s incredible. Plus, Angela’s coaching business was born out of Covid. You don’t need a lot of money to start a telehealth practice, and now you have access to so many more clients. In the mental health world, Covid hasn’t been a bad thing from the professional side.
Starting A Private Practice The easiest way to get started in private practice is to create a telehealth practice from your house. There are not a lot of start-up costs to get it going. The earliest that Angela will be back in her office is in August. After the pandemic, telehealth isn’t going anywhere. Moving forward, Angela will integrate both telehealth and in-person days so she can meet everyone’s needs. Plus, with telehealth, you can see people from all over the state; it’s a massive game-changer for your private practice. Also, Angela encourages clinicians to keep telehealth as part of their practice because people prefer it and it expands their reach. Telehealth is a considerable convenience; people no longer have to take off work to see their therapist.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Angela's Resources Angela's Website Angela's LinkedIn Angela's Facebook Angela's Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Join my Focus Groups Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Angela James joins the show. Amidst the pandemic, Angela opened Classroom to Couch, which is her private practice coaching business. We talk all about the importance of community over competition. In private practice, other therapists aren’t your competition; they are your community and a great referral source. Later, Angela gives her three-step process to opening a private practice. Plus, we talk about making the switch to telehealth and why it has never been easier to open a private practice.
Meet Angela James My name is Angela James and I'm a Licensed Marriage & Family Therapist in California. I've been practicing as a therapist for over 13 years and am grateful to be doing what I love.
I'm nationally certified in TF-CBT which focuses on the treatment of Trauma in youth. I am a strong believer in the brain's ability to heal from past traumas and for PTSD to be seen as curable, given the right therapeutic intervention. I also specialize in helping adult women overcome anxiety and panic disorder related symptoms.
I've always been passionate about helping others reach their full potential, so when I noticed myself eager to assist Therapists in opening their own Private Practice, it only seemed natural to develop this part of my professional career. Amidst this Pandemic, I opened Classroom to Couch which is my Private Practice coaching business. I am thrilled to see other mental health professionals reach their small business dreams and absolutely love being a small part of that process.
Community Not Competition Therapists will view other therapists as their competition; it’s a huge mistake. Angela says that private practice made her step out of her comfort zone and connect with other therapists. With a scarcity mindset, therapists think that all other therapists are their competition. However, it’s simply not the case. When you build relationships with other therapists, you can refer potential clients to each other. Not everyone has the same niche, so your ideal client will not be another therapist’s ideal client. In fact, Angela says that other therapists are her number one referral source. Connect with other therapists in the community and get to know them so you can generate more referrals.
Angela’s Three-Step Process Angela helps therapists using a three-step process. Step one is all about business basics; that’s Angela’s biggest passion. With Angela, you’ll talk about the different business structures and which one could be a good fit for you. Step two is all about HIPAA compliance. Step three is all about networking, advertising, and marketing. Angela will teach you all about how to get the best referrals and how to network with other therapists in private practice. Plus, Angela says that her program is affordable and attainable.
Switching To Telehealth Angela built an entire telehealth practice in the span of the weekend when the pandemic started. Luckily, Angela didn’t lose very many clients. Even some that were unsure about telehealth eventually came back and gave it a shot. A lot of teenagers are actually a lot more comfortable with therapy via telehealth. At first, Angela struggled. However, she adapted and grew. The best part is that Angela can see clients from all over the state of California. Now, she has access to tons of people that she didn’t before; it’s incredible. Plus, Angela’s coaching business was born out of Covid. You don’t need a lot of money to start a telehealth practice, and now you have access to so many more clients. In the mental health world, Covid hasn’t been a bad thing from the professional side.
Starting A Private Practice The easiest way to get started in private practice is to create a telehealth practice from your house. There are not a lot of start-up costs to get it going. The earliest that Angela will be back in her office is in August. After the pandemic, telehealth isn’t going anywhere. Moving forward, Angela will integrate both telehealth and in-person days so she can meet everyone’s needs. Plus, with telehealth, you can see people from all over the state; it’s a massive game-changer for your private practice. Also, Angela encourages clinicians to keep telehealth as part of their practice because people prefer it and it expands their reach. Telehealth is a considerable convenience; people no longer have to take off work to see their therapist.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Angela's Resources Angela's Website Angela's LinkedIn Angela's Facebook Angela's Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Join my Focus Groups Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
"If you don't know where you're going, then how are you going to get there?" It's essential to have goals that are tangible and written down. In this episode, I walk you through part of the process that I use to develop plans for myself and how I'm able to stay on track and organized. As you move through 2021, one of the things that I would encourage you to do is to spend some time writing things down and doing quarterly reviews. Tune in as I talk about planners, SMART goals, and The Big 3.
Find A Planner When we think about goal setting and all that we do to run a practice and manage our own lives, I think it's essential to have some goals. Make sure that your goals are tangible and written down. You have a forty percent greater chance of completing a goal just merely by writing it down. One of the tools that I use pretty consistently now and for the last several years is the Michael Hyatt Full Focus Planner. My friend Michelle makes another planner that I recommend. You can hear Michelle Hardman, LPC from The Primed Practice on TPOT 101; the planner she developed is called the Primed Planner. It is one that she created specifically for therapists. Whichever tool you choose to use, I think it's good to have a way that you can use to keep yourself organized and on track.
Know Your Domains The other thing about having a plan or having a system is it should be very goal-directed because, like the quote says, "if you don't know where you're going, how are you going to get there?" It's essential to break things down into smaller pieces to know how to accomplish what you want to achieve for the year. I think the other thing about goal setting is that when we think about our lives, our businesses, and what we do in our practices, we have many different domains or different areas of our life.
Most of us are kind of interconnected; we have our home life, private life, what we do with our friends and family, and all of that. There is probably a whole set of goals that you want to have around your personal life, like your health, taking care of yourself, and self-care. Then we have our business goals that revolve around our private practices. Think about what growth you want to have, how you want to build your practice, the milestones you wish to set for yourself, and moving forward in your practice.
Brain Dump One exercise that I think is always helpful is, and this is my brain dump exercise. Use your planner, and jot down and label each of the domains in your life. For example, you might have your practice; you might have a church community domain, personal finances domain, and business finances. Plus, you've got your family life; you have your immediate family and extended family. It's essential to jot those down, and then under those different domains, do a brain dump. When we write things down, our brains process that information a little differently.
The Big 3 The Big 3 allows you to work on three big goals per quarter. When working on big goals, break them down into smaller pieces. There's a thing called SMART goals (specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound). When you think about making goals, they need to be specific. They need to be measurable, and they need to be actionable. They also need to be risky to some degree. In other words, you need to get out of your comfort zone a little bit with making goals. Goals need to be time-sensitive. You need to be able to have an end date in mind when setting a goal. Also, they need to be exciting and something that you can get behind rather than something you dread. Lastly, goals should be relevant and aligned with your own values.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Focus Groups Consulting The Primed Planner Michelle Hardman | Having A Primed Practice | TPOT 101 Full Focus Planner FranklinCovey Getting Things Done Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
How are you and your clients handling the climate of 2020 in and out of the therapy room? In this episode, we revisit some episodes where private practice owners give their thoughts on social justice in and out of the therapy room. We talk all about mental health in the Black community, healing through trauma, finding hope in 2020, and the Black Lives Matter movement. This episode features clips from Bewindi Bobb, LaToya Smith, Linda Sanderville, and Danielle Branche.
Meet Bewindi Bobb Bewindi was born and raised in the beautiful, gorgeous Island of St. Lucia in the Caribbean. Her journey towards accepting the calling to be a counselor is interesting, but let’s just say, she eventually stopped running (insert laughter) and realized that being a counselor is not just a profession but a God-given and ordained calling and ministry.
Bewindi is super passionate about seeing people become free to live happily and free from emotional baggage, free from whatever is blocking, delaying, or hindering their healing. She loves the opportunity to create a safe space where clients receive permission to express themselves, their feelings, and find themselves while gaining a new and changed perspective.
She helps professionals who are dealing with unresolved emotional conflicts such as depression, anxiety, grief, stress, etc live freely by equipping them with tools to renew their mindsets. She loves to encourage and empower clients and when they apply the tools, they are able to show up for themselves and be their best selves in all areas of their lives. Additionally, she provides Christ-Centered Counseling to whom it applies and for those who request.
With over 14 years of clinical experience, she is driven and fueled by her professional and personal values including but not limited to Faith, Empower, Purpose, Service, Encourage, and Teach. She is so honored to be in this space and knows that whether she is providing therapy, coaching, supervision or speaking to an audience or on her podcast, ‘Empowered to Empower You’, which can be found on Spotify, Podbean, Apple Podcasts, Google, etc, she is convinced that people are definitely encouraged and ignited.
Black Lives Matter Bewindi has a set of values that anchor her practice and a set of values that anchor her personal life. Faith is a tremendous value for Bewindi. If she combines all of her values, Bewindi believes that Black Lives Matter. Bewindi is honored that 99% of her practice is Black people. One of the messages that Bewindi takes from these times is that we need to invest in our mental health.
Mental Health in the Black Community Mental health is a stigma in the Black community and the Asian community. It’s awful that it took things like this to happen for people to seek mental health. However, Black people have been reaching out for mental health help now more than ever. People are experiencing so many losses, and they are so angry. The Black Lives Matter movement gives an outlet for our feelings. Bewindi is thankful that people recognize the need for mental health care. It’s time to permit yourself to feel without being judged.
Meet LaToya Smith LaToya is the owner of LCS Counseling and Consulting Agency in Fortworth Texas. She firmly believes that people don’t have to remain stuck in their pain or the place they became wounded. She encourages her clients to be active in their treatment and work towards their desired outcome.
Preventing Divison Vulnerability will build courage. The most authentic stories allow us to be seen, and that is how the connection is made. When we put words to our pain and our emotions, then we light up. Story will help bridge the gaps. We need to learn to set things aside, listen, and connect through stories and experiences. It will help tear down walls and prevent division. When we are willing to hear other people’s pain, we realize that strangers are no different from us.
Healing During 2020 It’s hard to heal; there is always something. 2020 has been devastating. You can’t stop to catch your breath. It’s so heavy, and therapists are overwhelmed. If your clients are still being traumatized, then it’s going to be hard to heal. Even Black therapists are having a hard time. It’s a lot to process, and unfortunately, it’s not new. People who are not Black can empathize with the community. A faithful ally will do something to prove that they are anti-racist.
LaToya has been part of peaceful protests, and she sees change happening. When you are walking through the protests, you don’t get all the love back. If you’re out at the protests, then you need to practice mental health. There are people out there doing the work that needs to be done, reach out to them, and lend a helping hand.
Meet Linda Sanderville Ready to receive greater abundance in your private practice? Without guilt, fear, or self-sabotage? Linda Sanderville helps therapists move beyond the initial stage of practice building, to increase profits through subconscious work, trauma release, and authentic business design.
Working with Linda means growing your income in the next stage of your private practice, with all of the clarity and impact, and none of the scramble to hustle harder. She has an uncanny intuition for pinpointing your limiting beliefs and getting you unstuck so you can master your unique business strategy!
When she’s not working on unlocking your unlimited potential, you’ll find Linda watching Arrested Development on perpetual repeat, and happily downing a vegan doughnut or an apple-ginger green smoothie. Don’t be surprised if you hear her adorable toddler sounding loud and proud in the background of a Zoom call!
Finding A Liberated Identity Recognize the effects of how you can tend toward devaluation of yourself as a result of other experiences. These effects should not be impacting your private practice. As a Black woman, Linda thinks about how she would do things if she had white man confidence. In general, women do not ask for more money, they don’t ask for raises, and they don’t ask for promotions. We have a responsibility to take care of ourselves emotionally, financially, and physically. It’s time that we take control of our own lives and make our wildest dreams come true.
Meet Danielle Branche If you ask any therapist why they were drawn to this profession, most of them would answer with, “I wanted to help people”. While this is true, it is much deeper. Danielle wanted to help people navigate through life in more fulfilling ways. She aspired to teach people how to be in a relationship with their mothers and fathers. Danielle wanted to give couples the tools they need to be the husbands and wives they want to be, not the ones their parents were. Her commitment is to do just that. Danielle is no longer working out of the Largo area
Danielle’s main focus is working with couples around issues of trust, communication, forgiveness after infidelity, intimacy, sex, and decision making (finances, children, etc.). She does pre-marital therapy and marital/relational enrichment. Danielle mainly uses Emotion-Focused Therapy & Solution-Focused Therapy. Danielle also sees individuals and does group therapy.
As a Licensed Clinical Marriage and Family Therapist, Danielle is trained in understanding how to see things relationally, not just individually. She is versed in locating where behaviors, beliefs, ideas, and feelings originate, how they affect our lives and relationships, and how to effectively manage and/or change them.
Feeling Hopeful in 2020 Danielle says that she has to do a lot of self-care. In staff meetings, they do vision boards. Sometimes, they also vent during staff meetings and chat about the different impacts. Danielle encourages her therapists to be in therapy themselves. As a Black clinician who sees a lot of African American clients, it can be cumbersome. Her clients are feeling hopeless. While on the other hand, some are feeling more hopeful about the changes happening in the country. Overall, Danielle says it’s critical to take care of yourself so you can take care of others.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Bewindi’s Resources Empowered to Empower You Twitter Instagram Therapy For Black Girls LaToya’s Resources Visit LaToya’s Website Facebook Instagram Twitter Linda’s Resources LinkedIn Facebook Website Instagram linda@lindasanderville.com Danielle’s Resources …And I Still Love You: The Art of Loving Imperfect People Branches of Life Facebook Instagram Resources Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Focus Groups Consulting Brighter Vision Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide! Brighter Vision G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeOfTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
This week on The Practice of Therapy, we revisit some of our favorite conversations about self-care. As COVID continues and therapists are needed more than ever, it's a great time to rethink your self-care routine. Enjoy the episode as we hear from Kati Morton, LaTonya Shelton, LaRonda Starling, and Veronica Cisneros. Tune in as we explore planning self-care time, spiritual self-care, and practicing self-care unapologetically.
Meet Kati Morton, LMFT Kati Morton, LMFT holds a Master’s in Clinical Psychology from Pepperdine University and is a licensed marriage and family therapist. In addition, she is a certified dialectical and behavior therapist and grief counselor and a member of The California Association of Marriage and Family Therapists. She runs a private practice in Santa Monica, CA.
Over the past seven years, Kati has leveraged social media to share mental health information worldwide through video. Her specialties include working with individuals experiencing eating disorders and self-harming behaviors, although she addresses all things related to mental health.
Kati is well known for her YouTube channel which now has over 820 thousand subscribers and over 50 million views. In addition to her YouTube channel and strong presence on social media, she has appeared on the CBS The Doctors, HLN/CNN “Dr. Drew On Call,” E! News, KTLA, Fox News. She also has been featured in CNN, VICE, Glamour UK, Huffington Post, Yahoo, VOX, and many more. Kati released her first book, Are u ok?: A Guide to Caring for Your Mental Health in December 2018.
Kati’s passion is to increase awareness about mental health. Her online community has expanded to all major internet platforms, allowing her to answer mental health questions from her followers around the world. She hopes by doing this, the global community can push for better services worldwide and remove the stigma associated with getting help.
Thinking Outside the Box Kati’s husband pushed her to take the leap into social media. Kati’s colleagues have been supportive; however, they don’t always understand it. Eight years ago, her peers didn’t realize how confidentiality would work over social media. Other clinicians give her pushback on the way she thinks about things. The most significant pushback Kati got was when she said therapy should be working toward a goal. Kati says we should be learning new tools that we can utilize in life. We shouldn’t be using our therapist as a crutch.
Staying Organized and Maximizing Your Time Kati started scheduling self-care in her calendar – it cannot be rescheduled. Kati isn’t afraid to outsource the things she can’t do. Kati has a team of people behind the scenes which lets her do creative work in her free time. Initially, she was nervous to bring people to her team. However, scheduling doesn’t need to be done by herself. If you don’t have time to clean your house, you should have someone come and clean it for you.
Meet LaTonya Shelton LaTonya N. Shelton, LCSW, RYT, the owner of Red Jasper Counseling, PLLC, located in Nashville, TN. Her practice specializes in providing treatment for trauma, anxiety, and depression. She is a licensed clinical social worker and yoga instructor who integrates somatic (body-centered) psychotherapy practices and mindfulness in her work with clients. LaTonya embodies a deep passion for helping individuals learn, heal, and grow. She believes that by helping others understand and navigate difficult emotions, clients can experience relief, improved health, and regain control of their lives. Doing Things Your Own Way LaTonya is a self-starter. It is so easy to get overwhelmed and inundated with all of the information that’s out there. There are a lot of opportunities for mastermind groups and business coaching. With all the information, it’s so easy to get overwhelmed. You need to start somewhere. Plus, you’re not going to get it right and perfect in the beginning. However, that’s the beauty of starting and moving forward on a journey. Make it your own!
Self-Care For Private Practice Owners Self-care is such a buzzword these days. Some of the self-care that LaTonya engages in is very simple. She enjoys a cup of coffee most mornings with her dog walking in the park, and that works well for LaTonya. Do the things that get you out in nature. Reading, talking, and being around people that support you will also be essential. These things have been the crux of LaTonya’s self-care.
Take the Leap of Faith Throw your limiting beliefs out the window. Show up and do the work that you want to do. LaTonya is a dreamer, but also a planner. Being organized, balanced, and flexible will assist in your private practice journey. Are you wondering if you should take the leap into private practice? It’s going to be scary, and there’s going to be peaks and valleys, but start, and you’ll find your way. You’ll meet great people like Gordon. Plus, LaTonya met people in mastermind and focus groups.
Meet LaRonda Starling Dr. LaRonda Starling is a Licensed Clinical Psychologist and a Licensed Professional Counselor in Texas, a National Certified Counselor, an adjunct professor at a Christian university, and the author of Be Still: Spiritual Self-Care for Mental Health Professionals. She has earned a Bachelor of Arts degree in Psychology, a Master of Science degree in Counseling, and a Doctor of Philosophy degree in Psychology with a specialization in Clinical Psychology. As a clinician, Dr. Starling provides therapeutic services (psychological assessment and counseling) in a private practice setting. Along with her clinical experience as a mental health professional, Dr. Starling has over fifteen years of experience working in academic environments; first as a staff member and then as adjunct faculty in both classroom and online settings. In all that she does (working or volunteering), she hopes that God receives the glory as she uses the gifts He has so graciously given her.
Why Private Practice Owners Need to Practice Self-Care Private practice owners need to take time for themselves. When you work for yourself, you have so many roles to take on. There is always a time where you could be doing some work. One of the things that LaRonda suggests is to be still. Sometimes that means to physically be still – stop being so busy during the day. Also, you need to spiritually be still.
Find the Good in Your Day Who is God as a person? If you know that God is everywhere, then we can lean on God. Also, be intentional about prayer. Sometimes we only pray when something terrible happens. We need to take the time throughout the day to pray. Throughout the day, think about what is good. What’s the silver-lining of quarantine? Maybe you learned how to use teletherapy, that’s a fantastic silver-lining during this time.
Meet Veronica Cisneros Veronica is a licensed marriage and family therapist, motivational speaker, mother of three, and wife of her beloved husband of 20 years. Through personal experience, she has defeated life’s challenges by leaning into fear unapologetically. She’s taught hundreds of women how to take ownership of their lives, lean into fear, and let go of judgment. However, this is not a big enough impact and she learned to empower the millions of women worldwide who suffer. She focuses on creating true change, encouraging women to no longer compromise themselves in order to meet the needs of others.
Vulnerability A lot of therapists’ lack vulnerability – Veronica sees this frequently. There’s a fear of being exposed. If a therapist exposes their true self, then what are other people going to think? If someone knew their reality, then what would people say? Veronica says that therapists are wrapped up in their identity as a therapist. When you take away your therapist role, then who are you? When is the last time you engaged in one of your hobbies? It’s time that therapists start thinking about themselves and give themselves permission to be real humans and show their vulnerabilities.
Empower Your Life Veronica thought about the life she wanted to live. She wants to be a connected and exceptional mom and wife. Then, Veronica thought about what was standing in her way. She looked at herself and examined what she was doing. Eventually, Veronica realized that she didn’t think she was deserving. Her house was at a higher ranking than herself. She looked at her life and how she wanted to change it. Instead of thinking she wasn’t worth it, she decided to create her perfect day. For instance, when Veronica sleeps in, she gives herself grace. She permits herself to do the things that she wants to do.
Take Action Veronica used to wake up to a checklist and would yell at her kids because they were late for school. She found herself irritated the moment she woke up. Veronica realized it was her fault – she needed to ask her husband for help. What boundaries have you set, and how have you asserted yourself? Veronica never asked her husband for help. Instead, she felt resentful. Plus, she felt guilt and shame for screaming first thing in the morning. Veronica knew something needed to change. She could have blamed her kids and her husband. Instead, Veronica decided to take action. She asked for help and let go of perfection.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kati’s Resources For more information about Kati, please click here. Are U OK? A Guide to Caring for Your Mental Health YouTube Facebook Instagram LaTonya’s Resources LaTonya’s Website Email: info@redjaspercounseling.com Phone: (615) 606-2964 Facebook Instagram LaRonda’s Resources Grace Psychological Health Services, PLLC Be Still: Spiritual Self-Care for Mental Health Professionals Veronica’s Resources Website Podcast Facebook Group Instagram Resources Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Focus Groups Consulting Brighter Vision Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Get your FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide! Brighter Vision G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeOfTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
The shift to telehealth has just created a massive change for a lot of us in private practice. So this episode is all about diving into restructuring your practice. First, ask yourself why you started a private practice, and think about why you want to restructure your practice. Once you know why you can begin to focus on restructuring your workflow. Sometimes, certain aspects of your workflow can be made more straightforward; simple is always better. Stay tuned as I talk about restructuring your finances, increasing your rates, and giving your website a facelift.
Start With Why When we think about our why - go back and think about why you wanted to go into private practice, to begin with. What motivates you to have a practice? For a lot of people, they want the autonomy that it brings. Also, it creates a more significant earning potential for us. So, why do you want to restructure your practice? Perhaps your systems and processes have become overly complicated. Maybe your stress levels continue to rise because of things within the practice that cause you a lot of headaches.
Look At Your Workflow From the time that a new client contacts your practice, what takes place? One client is easy, but if you start getting ten clients a week, what’s the workflow around that? Who is in charge of the workflow? Map this out! The intake procedure should be simple for the client. Think about ways that you can make it easy. Now that everything is online, the process should be as user-friendly as possible. Plus, the process should also be easy for you as a clinician. In private practice, there is an overlap between the clinical and business sides. Keep those processes separate from each other. Having an electronic health record system will help you keep these things separate.
Ditch Your Deadwood There are probably things in your workflow that you don’t need. Simple is always better. Writing session notes can be a massive headache for clinicians. Newer therapists will go into so much detail in their session notes. It will be an entire narrative of everything that took place in the session. This is something that you can cut back on. Progress notes are a reminder for you as a clinician of what you did in that session. If you have things that give you the theme of the session, then that should be documented.
Session Note Helper Your progress notes should only take about five or ten minutes to complete. If they are taking longer than that, you need to streamline it more. People can get really backed up on client documentation. The Session Note Helper is a set of templates that I created. It uses an add-on called Form Publisher that is HIPAA secure. You can check off boxes about what you did in the session. Then, the Form Publisher will create a narrative based on what you checked on the form. You can find out more about the Session Note Helper here. I created this to make my workflow easier. Because it’s in a Google Doc format, I can just copy and paste what I wrote there into TherapyNotes.
Understanding Your Profits One mistake that most people will make is looking at their bank account and thinking they don’t have to worry. You need to do a deeper dive into your profitability. Look at the profits at least once a quarter. Make sure that what you are bringing in is making a profit for yourself, and it’s sustainable. Look at your numbers and think about restructuring your payment system. Anytime there is a change in the pay system, it can be painful. However, once you rip the band-aid off, it can bring long-term benefits. If you will restructure how you pay your clinicians in a group practice, set a deadline for yourself. The first of the year is an excellent time to change things; it’s natural.
Restructure Your Prices If you are insurance-based, look at those contracts and which ones are going to renew. You can set up a new fee structure if the contract is going to be up. There is a shortage of mental health providers. One of the things that are coming out of 2020 is insurance pay is going up. The first of the year is an excellent time to go up on your fees. Think about what a reasonable increase would be. Going up on your fees is one way to become more profitable. If you go up on your fees, there are a few ways to deal with current clients. You can raise your current client’s fees, or you can keep them at the current rate. There is no right or wrong way of doing this. The main thing is, you should be looking at your fees, making sure it’s increasing to keep up with inflation.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Focus Groups Consulting Brighter Vision Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course (use code julie2020) The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
This episode is all about embracing the changes that 2020 has thrown at us. As we adjust to the new normal, it's time to think about what opportunities we can find. For instance, if you haven't already, maybe it's time to ditch your physical office and go full-time into telehealth. Also, it's time to start thinking about diversifying your income through Gumroad or Teachable. Tune in as I speak about all sorts of ways you can embrace the curveball that is 2020.
Start With Your Why What are your priorities? Why do you want to be in practice? Why do you want to do the things that you do? This year we learned a lot about making a transition to a whole new business model, and that's the switch to telehealth. Frankly, telehealth will become the new normal over the next year. So, it's time that you think about how you have your practice structured and set up. One of the things about being online is that your office space becomes less important. You don't need the furniture anymore!
Think About Your Practice Moving Forward The boundaries around the types of people you can see for therapy has now widened a great deal. Your potential client base can be the entire state you are licensed in. So, how are you going to start to market your practice? You can think about a broader reach. Does your website need to be updated? This could be a great time to make upgrades and changes. That way, it will reflect that you can see clients from a broader geographic location. Think about doing things in different ways.
It's A Great Time For Private Practice Owners There is such a demand for mental health services during 2020. When you switch to telehealth, it will reduce the geographic bounds of what you do. Are you thinking about having a group practice? The therapists that you can hire has now broadened too; they no longer have to commute! The pandemic allows for more work and less commute time. It's time to think about things differently.
Write Down Your New Priorities When you write down your new priorities, it will help with the overwhelm. When we are overwhelmed, there will be a sense of anxiety. To battle anxiety, do a brain dump! In your planner, make a list and write down everything that captures your attention at the moment. It's a journaling exercise in many ways, and it gives us a new perspective on things.
Why You Need To Embrace Change Our routines have been turned upside down. Particularly for those who have children. It's challenging to navigate work with homeschooling. We need to accept the fact that our routines are messed up. Now, it's time to look at small ways to change our routine and make it work for us. We are creatures of habits, and we get used to doing things the same way each time. When we change that up, it becomes unsettling. Instead, we need to focus on self-care. If you want to learn more about practicing self-care as a private practice owner, listen to my episode with Veronica Cisneros: Unapologetic Self-Care in Private Practice.
The Importance Of Connecting With Others The pandemic has caused us to feel isolated and disconnected from people that matter most to us. Thanksgiving is around the corner. However, many of us have pulled back from our traditions, and we are not getting together with family. It's a hard decision to make. Allow yourself to embrace change, lean into it, and take ownership of how you will reorganize your life. We think about our relationships with others differently during 2020 – embrace it! I recently did an episode with Kathryn Esquer about connecting with other private practice owners during 2020. You can listen to the episode HERE. Plus, try The Teletherapist Network for two weeks free using my link: https://teletherapistnetwork.com/gordon.
Diversify Your Income There are so many great opportunities to create income for yourself in the online space. For instance, you can sell digital products or some sort of activity you'd like to share with other therapists. To sell those digital products, like Paperwork Packets and the Session Note Helper, I use Gumroad. Another idea for creating additional income streams is doing online courses. I know for many of us that once we got out of graduate school, we loved teaching other people things. There is an excellent opportunity to increase income, and that's by creating online courses or seminars, that kind of thing. The platform I use for that is Teachable. Give yourself permission to think outside the box and create other income streams for yourself so that you're not solely dependent on client interactions.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Teachable Gumroad Brighter Vision Listen to Private Practice Elevation Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course (use code julie2020) The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Faith Dulin and I talk about her experiences as a new therapist and working on boundaries with people. As therapists, we like to be accommodating. However, people-pleasing will take a toll over an extended period of time. One way that Faith works on her boundaries is by seeing her own therapist. Plus, we talk about working with clients who are challenging to engage with, and we give tips on building rapport with clients upfront.
Meet Faith Dulin I moved to Charlotte from the West Coast 20+ years ago. I have a military background and worked uptown in corporate America before completing my degrees in Psychology, Sociology, and Marriage and Family Therapy. In my free time, I gush over dogs on Instagram, enjoy sports, and like taking pictures.
My counseling style is a balance between challenging and cheer-leading. I have a contemporary approach that’s less theory-oriented and more real talk. I’m not reclined in my chair with a monocle, analyzing your every move. I’m listening, I’m curious, I’m aware that behaviors make sense in context. I want to understand you and know what you want in life so we can figure out how to get there. I provide helpful feedback, compassionate support, and take-home strategies and tools. The relationship you have with yourself sets the tone for all other relationships, and I want to empower you to create the love and life you deserve.
In addition to supporting relationships, I work with individual men and women. I'm located near uptown and have evening appointments. Check out my website to see if I'd be a good fit for you. Boundaries Faith is putting together a book around the concept of boundaries that doesn't have a religious foundation. There are practical ways to set boundaries without feeling like a jerk. Therapists can struggle with boundaries. For example, some therapists will become heavily invested in their client's lives and their success. Another example of poor boundaries is when a therapist may have social media interactions with their clients. Sometimes, therapists will talk to their clients over the weekend. Also, therapists that handle money will have a challenging time setting a boundary with their clients. We need to continue to work on boundaries. One way that Faith works on her boundaries is by seeing her own therapist.
Working With Difficult Clients In graduate school, therapists are told they should be gentle and non-confrontational. Everyone has a different style of working with clients. Faith says that she likes to be direct and confrontational. It's essential to label behaviors, even if it isn't warmly received. If a client does not take the label well, it's probably not the right fit for Faith. Clients need to find a therapist that's a good fit for them. If you are not the right therapist for a client, then you shouldn't take it personally. The client must benefit from therapy. If the client doesn't work well with you, it will be best for both of you to go separate ways.
Working With Difficult Men Faith tends to get male clients that hate therapy – they think it's a bunch of BS. When it's a couple, Faith says that their wife has made them go to therapy. However, men like when Faith gives it to them straight. It's essential to build rapport and trust with your clients. For Faith, she works with police and first responders. A lot of times, these men will come and test her as a therapist. They want to know if their trauma will rattle you. Faith likes to hold a safe space for clients so that they will learn to trust her. When you have that trust, then your relationship with clients can withstand challenging moments in therapy.
Creating A False Mutual Pretense Therapists can create false mutual pretense. When someone is resistant to therapy, then they are probably testing you out. We should be able to label that dynamic from the beginning. Gordon will ask their clients what sort of experiences they have had with therapy in the past. He says that talking to strangers about personal stuff isn't on anyone's top ten list of things to do. Gordon will let his clients know that he admires their bravery to talk to him. That way, people will let their guard down. Gordon learned this when working with teenagers; they can be resistant to therapy. It's crazy to spill your guts to a total stranger! So we must acknowledge this aspect of therapy.
Building Credibility With Clients You can share personal things with clients to build your credibility. Clients feel better about a therapist that does a bit of self-disclosure about their struggles. It will help deal with demanding clients. There are some clients that you have to spend more time engaging and aligning. The client must buy into the therapeutic process so they will share and open up with their therapist. Listen to Jeff Geunther on The Practice of Therapy to learn more about self-disclosure in the therapy room.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Faith's Resources Harmony Psychotherapy Instagram Facebook Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course (use code julie2020) Boundaries: When to Say Yes, How to Say No to Take Control of Your Life The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist Listen to Say More About That Listen to Jeff Geunther on The Practice of Therapy G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
As a telehealth therapist, do you ever feel alone? My guest, Kathryn Esquer, knows exactly what this feels like. She misses the daily interactions with fellow mental health professionals. That’s why Kathryn created the Teletherapist Network, an organization for the next generation of therapists in private practice. Tune in as Kathryn speaks about how she created a community, politics in the therapy room, and the benefits of finding your network.
Meet Kathryn Esquer Kathryn Esquer is a Clinical Psychologist and MBA graduate. She currently works in her rural hometown in central Pennsylvania providing outpatient mental health services integrated into primary care. She loved her career, but COVID helped her realize that something was missing from her private practice. The clinical work was rewarding, but she felt professionally isolated and uninspired. She also knew consultation was a critical part of the ethical practice but didn't know where to find it. So, Kathryn created the Teletherapist Network for modern therapists to crowdsource the knowledge and experiences of other private practice teletherapists so that members can develop their clinical and business skills, all while staying connected to their mission and preventing burnout.
Teletherapist Network Don’t practice teletherapy alone. Join a premier organization for the next generation of therapists in private practice at Teletherapist Network. Kathryn Esquer explains the inspiration behind her network. When COVID hit, there were loads of challenges that therapists experienced. Once we had to switch to telehealth, it felt professionally isolating and uninspiring. No longer did we have peers or other people in the mental health trenches. As a problem solver, Kathryn wanted to find people to connect with. Thus, the Teletherapist Network was born!
Creating A Community Kathryn uses a platform that does all the technical stuff for you. Weekly, they do mindfulness exercises and questions. Plus, they consult with each other and have live consultations every other week via Zoom. Each week, they highlight a new member – they get to know each other on a deep level. People get to pick their brains all day. Therapists will ask questions, and the group gets to benefit from the collective knowledge. Plus, they have guest expert webinars coming in every month. Industry professionals will teach something new to the community. It’s a neat way to connect with people who want to help private practice owners. Now, Kathryn feels more inspired to better herself as a clinician. It’s easy to get out there and learn new things in the Teletherapist Network.
Politics In The Therapy Room Do you disclose your political affiliations or beliefs in the therapy room? We should be aware of what we personally bring into the therapy room and keep it in check. The only way to do that is to consult with peers. There’s a lot of political conversations happening in Kathryn’s community. It’s a skill to have civil discourse with your peers. This year, in general, has been challenging with COVID and the election. A lot of things are affecting our therapy internally. Finding a community will be essential for a therapist.
You’re Not Alone You’re not alone in feeling isolated or uninspired as a private practice owner. It’s scary that this community wouldn’t have happened without COVID-19. Kathryn is glad she has the community to stay on top of best practices and resources. When she started the network, over 150 people were looking to join the group. There’s an overwhelming response for the community – you’re not alone! Therapists need to speak with their peers. If you’re feeling a little isolated, find a community of support. With telehealth becoming so prominent, the barriers to entry for private practice are very low. If you recently went out on your own, you can learn loads in the Teletherapist Network.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Kathryn's Resources Teletherapist Network Teletherapy Podcast Kathryn@teletherapistnetwork.com Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Learn more about Flywheel Listen to The Private Practice Elevation Podcast The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Julie Herres interviews Gordon about how great clinicians can fail. First, clinicians can fail when they don’t know their numbers. It’s critical to understand the profit and loss of your business. Another significant mistake clinicians make is not charging enough for their sessions. A therapist must understand how their money mindset is holding them back from making enough money to run a private practice. Plus, we talk about the importance of having six months of income saved for emergencies, how to avoid debt, and why you need to stop bootstrapping.
Meet Julie Herres Julie Herres is the owner of GreenOak Accounting. The firm provides bookkeeping, accounting, CFO, and tax services to mental health private practice owners throughout the United States. When Julie founded GreenOak Accounting she started working with a few therapists. Over time, more and more therapist referrals came in and she started noticing trends across the practices that were thriving. Based on those trends she developed success ratios as a way to quickly determine the health of a practice.
Know Your Numbers & Charge Enough To Understand Profit And Loss Understand how the money is coming in. How are your patients paying you? Then, what do you do with the money after that? How are you paying yourself and your expenses? Most people don’t have a clear picture of what those numbers are. A big mistake people make is paying their clinicians too much when you start a group practice. Gordon made this mistake! He was paying his clinicians way too high, and he wasn’t covering overhead. It’s possible to pay clinicians a fair and competitive wage without having to overdo it. If Gordon knew his numbers better at the start, he wouldn’t have made this error.
Money Mindset: Therapists Should Not Feel Ashamed or Guilty About Making Money Many clinicians grow up with money shame. We think that money is evil or making money is bad. As therapists, we have a caring heart. Sometimes we feel like when we charge people money, then we are doing something wrong. Therapists will think that if someone is paying you for something, you are putting a burden on them. It’s a myth! Most people that go to therapy expect to pay. It’s one of the mistakes that a lot of people make. Then, therapists won’t charge enough for their services.
Reserves: Prepare & Plan By Having 2-6 Months of Income Saved For Expenses Set aside a reserve so you can pay for expenses or substantial tax bills. The minimum is at least two months. This money shouldn’t be touched unless you get into an emergency. However, six months of a money reserve is more ideal. This reserve should be created for both personal expenses and business expenses. When COVID hit, the people with reserves were better off than those who did not have a reserve. When thinking about switching to private practice, make sure to have your reserve first! Gordon spent a year accumulating his reserve before he made the dive into private practice.
Startup Expenses: Avoid Debt And Make The Practice Pay For Itself From The Beginning There’s a way to avoid debt when going into private practice. For mental health, there isn’t as much equipment that needs to be purchased. It can be relatively inexpensive to start your practice – you only need a few basic things, and then you are ready to go. Make your practice pay for itself instead of getting a loan to get started.
Bootstrapping: Spend Money To Make Money Because Doing It All Is Not A Good ROI Doing it all is not a good return on your investment. Sometimes you have to spend money to make money. People will hold off on spending money because they are trying to save. However, you are hurting yourself in the long run. For instance, you can hire a virtual assistant to help answer phone calls. If you can hire someone to answer the phone, then you can spend more time seeing clients. The less you are seeing clients, the less money you are going to make. Answering phone calls will not bring you income. Your time is better spent in the room with clients. Even if you pay someone $30 an hour, you can make $150 in a session.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Julie's Resources Call GreenOak Accounting: (571) 208-2065 Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Julie’s LinkedIn Money Matters In Private Practice - Premium Content (Coupon Code: Julie2020 for 20% off)
Mistakes To Avoid For A Stress-Free Tax Season Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Profit First by Mike Michalowicz Company of One by Paul Jarvis Take the G-Suite For Therapists Survey The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Featured Courses Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Danielle Branche joins the show. She talks about navigating perfectionistic beliefs when it came time to create her private practice. After loads of therapy, Danielle finally came to terms with the idea that a perfect private practice simply isn’t possible. Also, Danielle speaks about the transition from private practice to group practice. Plus, we talk about overcoming shame, the black lives matter movement, and the importance of boundaries.
Meet Danielle Branche If you ask any therapist why they were drawn to this profession, most of them would answer with, "I wanted to help people". While this is true, it is much deeper. Danielle wanted to help people navigate through life in more fulfilling ways. She aspired to teach people how to be in a relationship with their mothers and fathers. Danielle wanted to give couples the tools they need to be the husbands and wives they want to be, not the ones their parents were. Her commitment is to do just that. Danielle is no longer working out of the Largo area
Danielle's main focus is working with couples around issues of trust, communication, forgiveness after infidelity, intimacy, sex, and decision making (finances, children, etc.). She does pre-marital therapy and marital/relational enrichment. Danielle mainly uses Emotion-Focused Therapy & Solution-Focused Therapy. Danielle also sees individuals and does group therapy.
As a Licensed Clinical Marriage and Family Therapist, Danielle is trained in understanding how to see things relationally, not just individually. She is versed in locating where behaviors, beliefs, ideas, and feelings originate, how they affect our lives and relationships, and how to effectively manage and/or change them.
Navigating Perfectionistic Beliefs Danielle found herself chasing the high of what it felt like to get praise. There was a high associated with being successful and getting straight A’s. When she started a private practice, part of her was terrified to fail. Every time a client comes in and says something negative about the décor, Danielle would take it personally because she wanted everything to be perfect. Which, of course, perfectionism is unrealistic and impossible. It has been a real struggle to overcome these challenges. Danielle has embarked on her own therapy journey so she can accept the imperfections.
Overcoming Shame As A Therapist Danielle felt many self-doubt thoughts after her first couple broke up after coming to her for couple’s therapy. She felt shame and loads of crappy emotions. Danielle needed to process it deeply and take it to therapy before she was able to accept it. She figured out that it wasn’t her job to fix relationships. That was the pivotal moment that she had as a private practice owner. The perfectionist part of us will take over, and an internal critic will take over – we compare ourselves to others, and we are harder on ourselves than others. The best thing we can do is just dismiss it and move forward.
Flexibility In Private Practice Private practice allows for a flexible schedule. It’s essential to find a practice that works around your lifestyle. Some therapists like high caseloads. Whereas other therapists thrive with a lower caseload. In private practice, you can choose how many clients you see. Make sure you are able to understand where your boundaries are.
Starting A Group Practice Danielle says a group practice wasn’t her version. Danielle thought she would stay in private practice forever with self-doubt – she didn’t want to be responsible for anyone else. However, it felt lonely and isolating. She thrives on community and connection. So, her first independent contractor came from an agency that Danielle used to work for. Actually, the independent contractor came to her – she wanted to join the practice. Danielle didn’t realize that people would like to be part of her practice. After a few conversations, Danielle decided to bring her on as an independent contractor.
Black Lives Matter Danielle says that she has to do a lot of self-care. In staff meetings, they do vision boards. Sometimes, they also vent during staff meetings and chat about the different impacts. Danielle encourages her therapists to be in therapy themselves. As a Black clinician who sees a lot of African American clients, it can be cumbersome. Her clients are feeling hopeless. While on the other hand, some are feeling more hopeful about the changes happening in the country. Overall, Danielle says it's critical to take care of yourself so you can take care of others.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Danielle's Resources ...And I Still Love You: The Art of Loving Imperfect People Branches of Life Facebook Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Take the G-Suite For Therapists Survey Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Danielle Branche joins the show. She talks about navigating perfectionistic beliefs when it came time to create her private practice. After loads of therapy, Danielle finally came to terms with the idea that a perfect private practice simply isn’t possible. Also, Danielle speaks about the transition from private practice to group practice. Plus, we talk about overcoming shame, the black lives matter movement, and the importance of boundaries.
Meet Danielle Branche If you ask any therapist why they were drawn to this profession, most of them would answer with, "I wanted to help people". While this is true, it is much deeper. Danielle wanted to help people navigate through life in more fulfilling ways. She aspired to teach people how to be in a relationship with their mothers and fathers. Danielle wanted to give couples the tools they need to be the husbands and wives they want to be, not the ones their parents were. Her commitment is to do just that. Danielle is no longer working out of the Largo area
Danielle's main focus is working with couples around issues of trust, communication, forgiveness after infidelity, intimacy, sex, and decision making (finances, children, etc.). She does pre-marital therapy and marital/relational enrichment. Danielle mainly uses Emotion-Focused Therapy & Solution-Focused Therapy. Danielle also sees individuals and does group therapy.
As a Licensed Clinical Marriage and Family Therapist, Danielle is trained in understanding how to see things relationally, not just individually. She is versed in locating where behaviors, beliefs, ideas, and feelings originate, how they affect our lives and relationships, and how to effectively manage and/or change them.
Navigating Perfectionistic Beliefs Danielle found herself chasing the high of what it felt like to get praise. There was a high associated with being successful and getting straight A’s. When she started a private practice, part of her was terrified to fail. Every time a client comes in and says something negative about the décor, Danielle would take it personally because she wanted everything to be perfect. Which, of course, perfectionism is unrealistic and impossible. It has been a real struggle to overcome these challenges. Danielle has embarked on her own therapy journey so she can accept the imperfections.
Overcoming Shame As A Therapist Danielle felt many self-doubt thoughts after her first couple broke up after coming to her for couple’s therapy. She felt shame and loads of crappy emotions. Danielle needed to process it deeply and take it to therapy before she was able to accept it. She figured out that it wasn’t her job to fix relationships. That was the pivotal moment that she had as a private practice owner. The perfectionist part of us will take over, and an internal critic will take over – we compare ourselves to others, and we are harder on ourselves than others. The best thing we can do is just dismiss it and move forward.
Flexibility In Private Practice Private practice allows for a flexible schedule. It’s essential to find a practice that works around your lifestyle. Some therapists like high caseloads. Whereas other therapists thrive with a lower caseload. In private practice, you can choose how many clients you see. Make sure you are able to understand where your boundaries are.
Starting A Group Practice Danielle says a group practice wasn’t her version. Danielle thought she would stay in private practice forever with self-doubt – she didn’t want to be responsible for anyone else. However, it felt lonely and isolating. She thrives on community and connection. So, her first independent contractor came from an agency that Danielle used to work for. Actually, the independent contractor came to her – she wanted to join the practice. Danielle didn’t realize that people would like to be part of her practice. After a few conversations, Danielle decided to bring her on as an independent contractor.
Black Lives Matter Danielle says that she has to do a lot of self-care. In staff meetings, they do vision boards. Sometimes, they also vent during staff meetings and chat about the different impacts. Danielle encourages her therapists to be in therapy themselves. As a Black clinician who sees a lot of African American clients, it can be cumbersome. Her clients are feeling hopeless. While on the other hand, some are feeling more hopeful about the changes happening in the country. Overall, Danielle says it's critical to take care of yourself so you can take care of others.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Danielle's Resources ...And I Still Love You: The Art of Loving Imperfect People Branches of Life Facebook Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Take the G-Suite For Therapists Survey Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @PracticeofTherapy on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Linda Sanderville explains how she wants to shift generational poverty – it’s all about a money mindset shift. We talk about navigating our mindset blocks when it comes to having a thriving private practice. Also, Linda reveals what it takes to create a practice that fits your lifestyle, including why you should never feel guilty for raising your fees. Lastly, Linda speaks about how she found her liberated identity and gives her thoughts on the #BlackLivesMatter movement.
Meet Linda Sanderville Ready to receive greater abundance in your private practice? Without guilt, fear, or self-sabotage? Linda Sanderville helps therapists move beyond the initial stage of practice building, to increase profits through subconscious work, trauma release, and authentic business design.
Working with Linda means growing your income in the next stage of your private practice, with all of the clarity and impact, and none of the scramble to hustle harder. She has an uncanny intuition for pinpointing your limiting beliefs and getting you unstuck so you can master your unique business strategy!
When she’s not working on unlocking your unlimited potential, you’ll find Linda watching Arrested Development on perpetual repeat, and happily downing a vegan doughnut or an apple-ginger green smoothie. Don’t be surprised if you hear her adorable toddler sounding loud and proud in the background of a Zoom call!
Creating A Practice That Fits Your Lifestyle Private practice should fit your lifestyle. Linda knew that she needed a strong foundation and clarity in her private practice. She loves her work – it’s her calling and her mission. Linda realized that if she doesn’t take care of herself, she won’t be able to take care of her clients. So, she wanted to design her practice from the ground up in a way that she wouldn’t have to leave it. From the start, Linda wanted her practice to revolve around her lifestyle and taking care of herself and her family.
How To Start Building Your Practice The first step is to unlearn unhelpful information. It would help if you had your own style of doing things. Reflect on and examine social work culture more objectively. That way, you won’t feel guilty for taking care of yourself. In social work, there’s a martyr-like quality. You don’t have to stay up late hours and help your clients. If you don’t stay up late, then you shouldn’t feel guilty about it. Lastly, Linda says to look at your numbers. Figure out how much money you need to make your practice work. What will it take for you to show up excited to work for your clients? We are not taught about money in grad school; however, it’s an essential piece of the puzzle.
Navigating Money Shame Recognize that you have subconscious money blocks. Some people don’t realize they have a money block until they start looking at setting their fees. For instance, when you think about raising your fees, you might begin to wonder if people will think you’re greedy. However, you know in your heart that you’re not greedy. So, where is that mindset block coming from? Many people have a fear of perception. If you want to have a sustainable private practice, you need to learn how to raise your fees. To be sustainable, you can’t work for free. When clients invest in you, then you can show up better for them.
Finding A Liberated Identity Recognize the effects of how you can tend toward devaluation of yourself as a result of other experiences. These effects should not be impacting your private practice. As a Black woman, Linda thinks about how she would do things if she had white man confidence. In general, women do not ask for more money, they don’t ask for raises, and they don’t ask for promotions. We have a responsibility to take care of ourselves emotionally, financially, and physically. It's time that we take control of our own lives and make our wildest dreams come true.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Linda's Resources LinkedIn Facebook Website Instagram linda@lindasanderville.com Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Take the G-Suite For Therapists Survey Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist My Grandmother's Hands: Racialized Trauma and the Pathway to Mending Our Hearts and Bodies Scale-Up Services Summit October 20th – 23rd G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Elizabeth Broyhill Morris, the Founder of Living Hope, joins the show. We talk about the difference between hope and expectation. When we expect something to happen, we are relying on external factors. When we hope, we understand that our life is in our own control. Then, Elizabeth reveals the eight practices you can utilize to sustain hope - Surrender, Stillness, Grief, Honesty, Curiosity, Forgiveness, Resilience, and Joy. Stay tuned as Elizabeth dives into how to put these actions into place to start your journey to joy.
Meet Elizabeth Broyhill Morris Elizabeth Broyhill Morris is the Founder of Living Hope. Through her own experience of finding Hope after struggle and trauma, she found herself privileged to offer love and encouragement to others who were in despair. In sharing her words and wisdom and receiving them from others, she came to believe that Hope is not an emotion – it is an action that must be practiced consistently and intentionally.
This project has been a labor of love that evolved over the course of several years, gaining traction, slowing down, and eventually going silent for a time. The turning point, however, was in 2015, when Elizabeth lost a precious friend who died unexpectedly and tragically. In her grief, Elizabeth was called to speak on a broader platform to people who were losing hope. From this experience grew a team of devoted individuals who brought the community of Living Hope to life.
Elizabeth lives in Chapel Hill, N.C., with her husband, their son, and a new baby on the way. She is a voracious reader, amateur cook, aspiring gardener, and passionate community volunteer.
Hope vs. Expectation There is a big difference between hope and expectations. Disappointment is just an unmet expectation. Who are you hoping to be, and who are you expecting to be? Hope is the sweet spot. You should never fully expect something to happen a certain way. Expectations are focusing on something outside of yourself. We need to think about our locus of control.
People who are happiest in life have an internal locus of control – they know themselves well, and they know how to handle their own emotions well. People with an external locus of control are continually responding to what they think everyone else wants or thinks. At the end of the day, we need a great “I am.” We all have the ability to tap into our internal wisdom. Expectations are entirely external. Whenever we are externally focused, we are going to get tripped up.
Eight Practices To Sustain Hope Elizabeth identified eight specific practices that create and sustain hope – Surrender, Stillness, Grief, Honesty, Curiosity, Forgiveness, Resilience, and Joy. It is these eight Practices that became the cornerstone of Living Hope. You have to be totally focused on your personal therapeutic practice and you can’t put it down. So, Elizabeth sat down and thought about her process of recovering from divorce. These steps need to be interchangeable for any challenge in your life. Elizabeth dives into her eight practices for hope:
- Surrender: let it go.
- Stillness: sit with it; it’s gone now.
- Grief: we have to process our grief; it is absolutely vital to go through the grieving process. Do not get stuck in the grieving process.
- Honesty: sit down and get honest with yourself. Ask yourself, how did I get here?
- Curiosity: what happened in your past that shapes the way you pursue this? All the puzzle pieces are starting to come together.
- Forgiveness: there is a lot of value to forgive someone. The most significant piece is forgiving yourself for going through that. You can really find freedom through forgiveness.
- Resilience: pull your bootstraps up, stand up, and move forward. Find fresh new air.
- Joy: this is the ultimate practice of hope. Step into a space of complete freedom and joy – it’s an incredibly loving place to be.
When we are in crisis, we need to slow down enough to get the landscape. This framework gives people steppingstones. Grief is at the heart of everything we struggle with as human beings. Once we can move through grief, we can be on our way to find joy.
[fusebox_transcript]
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Elizabeth's Resources Living Hope Facebook Twitter YouTube Instagram Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Listen to Finding Fred The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist Scale-Up Services Summit October 20th – 23rd G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
Veronica Cisneros joins the show to talk about how therapists can start empowering their personal and professional lives. Most likely, you lack vulnerability. Veronica says it’s time you started taking care of yourself and engage in the hobbies that spark your joy and fire your passions. Think about the life that you want to live in. How are you currently pursuing it? Well, it’s time to start permitting yourself to do the things that you want to do. Plus, don’t be afraid to ask for help when you need it. Stay tuned as Veronica reveals her habits for success.
Meet Veronica Cisneros Veronica is a licensed marriage and family therapist, motivational speaker, mother of three, and wife of her beloved husband of 20 years. Through personal experience, she has defeated life’s challenges by leaning into fear unapologetically. She’s taught hundreds of women how to take ownership of their lives, lean into fear, and let go of judgment. However, this is not a big enough impact and she learned to empower the millions of women worldwide who suffer. She focuses on creating true change, encouraging women to no longer compromise themselves in order to meet the needs of others.
Vulnerability A lot of therapists’ lack of vulnerability - Veronica sees this frequently. There’s a fear of being exposed. If a therapist exposes their true self, then what are other people going to think? If someone knew their reality, then what would people say? Veronica says that therapists are wrapped up in their identity as a therapist. When you take away your therapist role, then who are you? When is the last time you engaged in one of your hobbies? It’s time that therapists start thinking about themselves and give themselves permission to be real humans and show their vulnerabilities.
Empower Your Life Veronica thought about the life she wanted to live. She wants to be a connected and exceptional mom and wife. Then, Veronica thought about what was standing in her way. She looked at herself and examined what she was doing. Eventually, Veronica realized that she didn’t think she was deserving. Her house was at a higher ranking than herself. She looked at her life and how she wanted to change it. Instead of thinking she wasn’t worth it, she decided to create her perfect day. For instance, when Veronica sleeps in, she gives herself grace. She permits herself to do the things that she wants to do.
Take Action Veronica used to wake up to a checklist and would yell at her kids because they were late for school. She found herself irritated the moment she woke up. Veronica realized it was her fault – she needed to ask her husband for help. What boundaries have you set, and how have you asserted yourself? Veronica never asked her husband for help. Instead, she felt resentful. Plus, she felt guilt and shame for screaming first thing in the morning. Veronica knew something needed to change. She could have blamed her kids and her husband. Instead, Veronica decided to take action. She asked for help and let go of perfection.
Habits For Success Veronica says vulnerability is her habit for success. She can live unapologetically by being vulnerable. That means she is going to be subjected to criticism. If someone walks into your house with dirty dishes in the sink, there might be some form of judgment. Well, do it anyway. Permit yourself to be your true authentic self. That way, you are no longer attempting to meet other people’s needs. Make sure you have fewer expectations – it’s time to accept your family for who they are and who they are not.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Veronica's Resources Website Podcast Facebook Group Instagram Twitter LinkedIn Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast The Group Practice Outfitter Waitlist Scale-Up Services Summit October 20th - 23rd G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Alison explains what it is like to run a group practice, like a boss! Alison is into tracking data; she likes to make her decisions based on numbers. You’ll hear loads of tips about having a group practice. For instance, don’t wait to delegate for when you’re stressed out and on the verge of burn out – it’s probably time to delegate today! Stay tuned as Alison explains how she finds the best clinicians for her practice, the ways that she compensates her staff, and why she utilizes an employee model rather than an independent contractor model.
Meet Alison Pidgeon Alison Pidgeon, MA, LPC is the Founder and CEO of Move Forward Counseling LLC. What started out as a solo private practice in early 2015 quickly grew into a group practice and has been expanding ever since.
Alison has been working in the mental health field since 2003. She graduated from Immaculata University with a master's degree in counseling psychology in 2007. She earned her license as a professional counselor (LPC) in 2009. Her time spent working in community mental health helped to shape her as a leader and made her aware of the problems which exist in the mental health system.
Taking what she learned from the traditional model of mental health care, Alison set out to create something different when she started her private practice. Her attention to detail to the whole client experience and treating her staff exceptionally well have created a reputation of excellence that is recognized by the community.
Learn How To Delegate Practice owners get caught in the trap of bootstrapping everything like answering the phone and cleaning the office. Why? Because they want to save money. However, you are putting a hard cap on how large you can grow your business. There’s a way to make sure you’re hiring trustworthy people who will do good work and be reliable. It’s possible to delegate sooner than you need to. People wait too long to start delegating. Don’t wait until your drowning at work.
Find Good Clinicians When starting a group practice, it’s essential to find the best clinicians. However, whenever clinicians wanted to join Alison, they said they couldn’t because they needed health insurance. That’s why Alison decided to switch from an independent contracting model to an employee model. That way, Alison can offer her employees the opportunity to have health insurance. This has been a total game-changer for Alison. Her turnover rate is a lot lower. Plus, she gets so many more applications with the employee model.
Moving Toward Group Practice Look at your systems. This will have to change when you hire people. Most likely, your systems will only work for a private practice rather than group practice. For instance, you may need multiple phone extensions. Plus, you’ll need to change up your website. Change your wording from “I” to “we.” Also, think about whether or not you want to be a boss. Managing people is a significant aspect of group practice. If that sounds terrible, then group practice may not be right for you. Think long and hard about what you love to do.
Determining Fit It would help if you were clear about your mission, vision, and values. Your values will speak a lot about the culture of your practice. You can even print these things out and have your potential clinicians look it over. The clearer you are about what you want will help you attract the right people and repel the wrong people. Having a problem employee is a nightmare and not worth the stress. That’s why Alison is picky about who she hires. Alison wants her clinicians to be organized, timely, and self-sufficient. If a clinician isn’t organized enough to manage themselves, it will not be a good fit. Also, Alison values boundaries – you can’t teach good judgment. So Alison wants to know if her potential clinicians have good boundaries with their clients.
Recruiting Alison uses Indeed.com, plus she has an employment page on her website. She gets quite a few resumes through that as well. Therapists talk to each other. So one therapist will tell their friends. That’s why Alison likes to have an employment page on her website so that people can reach out to her directly.
Compensation Alison says that compensation will depend on the laws in your state. In Pennsylvania, there’s not a lot of options. Alison pays her therapists more to see a client and less for administrative work. She doesn’t go the salaried route because your therapists will get paid the same amount no matter how many clients they have. At a minimum, they have to do twenty-five hours a week. If they want more, then they can earn a bonus. However, they don’t need to work forty hours a week if they don’t want to.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Alison's Resources Email Alison: alison@practiceofthepractice.com Move Forward Counseling Consulting with Alison Alison Pidgeon | Buying An Office And Growing A Private Practice Group Practice Boss Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Use my link for 1 Month FREE of Brighter Vision services Brighter Vision Fall Into Cash Event Sign up for Killin’It Camp – October 5-7, 2020 G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, David Hall joins to speak about making the transition from private practice to group practice. First, think about if you’ll add employees or independent contractors to your practice. Then, decide how you will pay them; there are many different structures to set this up. However, you need to know the financial side of your practice before you start paying others. Stay tuned as we talk about keeping it simple and the reasons why you may want to think twice before starting a group practice. Lastly, catch our free live webinar on September 25th: Solo To Group Practice.
Meet David Hall Dr. Stephen “David” Hall heads up content and creative direction as the “Chief Maven” of PsychMaven. He began his work as a psychotherapist in 2005, and he currently holds clinical licenses in Family Therapy and Mental Health Counseling. He has built up multiple counseling practices in his years as a clinician, first in Georgia and then in his home state of Tennessee. In 2015, he led the start-up of an independent psychiatry clinic, Haven Family Psychiatry, in Knoxville, TN. Dr. Hall maintains a psychotherapy caseload and supervises postgraduate therapists in the practice he leads in the clinic, Haven Counseling Center at Haven Family Psychiatry.
Transitioning To Group Practice At one point, you’ll realize the only way that you can grow is by doing something different. David realized that he could grow if he brought new people to practice. Do you feel like you can’t take on any new clients? Then it could be time to think about starting a group practice. Whether you are thinking about a part-time contractor or bringing on full-time employees, you'll hear about some factors to help you know when the situation and timing are right in our upcoming webinar.
Paying Your Staff Most people will start with independent contractors when creating their group practice. However, don’t try and be too generous when it comes to paying your contractors. Make sure that you are keeping enough for yourself. You don’t want to be paying your contractors from your profits. Most therapists didn’t get into therapy to make loads of money. Most therapists want to help people. This idea extends to our employees and contractors. You cannot sustain your mission unless there are margins.
Group Practice Can Be Simple David made things too complicated when starting his group practice. He realized that he could run a simple practice and be more profitable. For David, this was far less stressful. At first, it was super stressful, and he didn’t sleep well at night. When he crossed the bridge of realizing how the practice could be, a huge weight was lifted off his shoulders. Now, David can lead a group of therapists and not live in constant stress. Have a vision of why you want to start a group practice. Don’t try and do too much. Learn how to delegate and outsource well.
Why You Might Think Twice Before Starting A Group Practice Sometimes there can be pressure for what you “should” do. That’s not true. If you want to start a group practice, then do it. However, don’t start a group practice because you think that’s what you should be doing. Some people LOVE their private practice. It can be simple with little distractions; maybe it’s your sweet spot. If private practice is a paradise for you, you don’t need to start a group practice. It doesn’t matter if you’re introverted or extroverted; group practice can be right or wrong for anyone. Embrace the trueness of who you are.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
David’s Resources Sign up for the webinar: Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income PsychMaven PsychMaven on Facebook PsychMaven on Instagram PsychMaven on LinkedIn Haven Family Psychiatry Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Use my link for 1 Month FREE of Brighter Vision services Brighter Vision Fall Into Cash Event Sign up for Killin’It Camp – October 5-7, 2020 G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, LaToya Smith of LCS Counseling and Consulting Agency joins the show. LaToya speaks about the importance of telling your story as it relates to creating connections and networking in your community. Plus, storytelling is a great way to build your brand and expand your social media presence. Stay tuned as we talk about the Black Lives Matter movement and diversity in private practice.
Meet LaToya Smith LaToya is the owner of LCS Counseling and Consulting Agency in Fortworth Texas. She firmly believes that people don’t have to remain stuck in their pain or the place they became wounded. She encourages her clients to be active in their treatment and work towards their desired outcome.
She has also launched Strong Witness which is a platform designed to connect, transform, and heal communities through the power of storytelling.
Visit LaToya’s website and connect with her on Facebook, Instagram, Strong Witness Instagram, and Twitter.
Why Story is Important The more you talk about your story, the easier it gets. It would help if you weren't afraid to speak about your story. Telling your story will help you be more confident in your voice. Plus, people will come up to you and connect with you. We are not out on an island by ourselves - it's time to be vulnerable and create connections. Telling stories will bring healing and understanding through being free, and sharing will allow yourself to be who you are.
Empowering Through Story Vulnerability will build courage. The most authentic stories allow us to be seen, and that is how the connection is made. When we put words to our pain and our emotions, then we light up. Story will help bridge the gaps. We need to learn to set things aside, listen, and connect through stories and experience. It will help tear down walls and prevent division. When we are willing to hear other people’s pain, we realize that strangers are no different from us.
Black Lives Matter It’s hard to heal; there is always something. 2020 has been devastating. You can’t stop to catch your breath. It’s so heavy, and therapists are overwhelmed. If your clients are still being traumatized, then it’s going to be hard to heal. Even Black therapists are having a hard time. It’s a lot to process, and unfortunately, it’s not new. People who are not Black can empathize with the community. A faithful ally will do something to prove that they are anti-racist.
LaToya has been part of peaceful protests, and she sees change happening. When you are walking through the protests, you don’t get all the love back. If you’re out at the protests, then you need to practice mental health. There are people out there doing the work that needs to be done, reach out to them, and lend a helping hand.
Storytelling Consultancy LaToya helps therapists and private practice owners incorporate storytelling into their presentations and social media profiles. LaToya wants to help private practice owners integrate stories into their everyday lives and help boost their business. Visit Strong Witness - an app designed to give people a platform and a safe space to share their stories. They welcome any story you are comfortable with sharing. This includes stories of triumph, victory, pain, joy, gratitude, shame, love, or defeat.
You want to tell stories that will draw people to you. The story should get people to take action. Allow yourself to be seen at the moment. People can connect with you better when they can see you. When you share, people will want to pick up the phone and call you. Use your authentic voice and tell the stories that you are comfortable with.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
LaToya’s Resources Visit LaToya’s Website Facebook Instagram Strong Witness Instagram Strong Witness Facebook Twitter Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Use my link for 1 Month FREE of Brighter Vision services Brighter Vision Fall Into Cash Event Sign up for Killin’It Camp – October 5-7, 2020 Check out these great resources from PsychMaven G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, LaToya Smith of LCS Counseling and Consulting Agency joins the show. LaToya speaks about the importance of telling your story as it relates to creating connections and networking in your community. Plus, storytelling is a great way to build your brand and expand your social media presence. Stay tuned as we talk about the Black Lives Matter movement and diversity in private practice.
Meet LaToya Smith LaToya is the owner of LCS Counseling and Consulting Agency in Fortworth Texas. She firmly believes that people don’t have to remain stuck in their pain or the place they became wounded. She encourages her clients to be active in their treatment and work towards their desired outcome.
She has also launched Strong Witness which is a platform designed to connect, transform, and heal communities through the power of storytelling.
Visit LaToya’s website and connect with her on Facebook, Instagram, Strong Witness Instagram, and Twitter.
Why Story is Important The more you talk about your story, the easier it gets. It would help if you weren't afraid to speak about your story. Telling your story will help you be more confident in your voice. Plus, people will come up to you and connect with you. We are not out on an island by ourselves - it's time to be vulnerable and create connections. Telling stories will bring healing and understanding through being free, and sharing will allow yourself to be who you are.
Empowering Through Story Vulnerability will build courage. The most authentic stories allow us to be seen, and that is how the connection is made. When we put words to our pain and our emotions, then we light up. Story will help bridge the gaps. We need to learn to set things aside, listen, and connect through stories and experience. It will help tear down walls and prevent division. When we are willing to hear other people’s pain, we realize that strangers are no different from us.
Black Lives Matter It’s hard to heal; there is always something. 2020 has been devastating. You can’t stop to catch your breath. It’s so heavy, and therapists are overwhelmed. If your clients are still being traumatized, then it’s going to be hard to heal. Even Black therapists are having a hard time. It’s a lot to process, and unfortunately, it’s not new. People who are not Black can empathize with the community. A faithful ally will do something to prove that they are anti-racist.
LaToya has been part of peaceful protests, and she sees change happening. When you are walking through the protests, you don’t get all the love back. If you’re out at the protests, then you need to practice mental health. There are people out there doing the work that needs to be done, reach out to them, and lend a helping hand.
Storytelling Consultancy LaToya helps therapists and private practice owners incorporate storytelling into their presentations and social media profiles. LaToya wants to help private practice owners integrate stories into their everyday lives and help boost their business. Visit Strong Witness - an app designed to give people a platform and a safe space to share their stories. They welcome any story you are comfortable with sharing. This includes stories of triumph, victory, pain, joy, gratitude, shame, love, or defeat.
You want to tell stories that will draw people to you. The story should get people to take action. Allow yourself to be seen at the moment. People can connect with you better when they can see you. When you share, people will want to pick up the phone and call you. Use your authentic voice and tell the stories that you are comfortable with.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
LaToya’s Resources Visit LaToya’s Website Facebook Instagram Strong Witness Instagram Strong Witness Facebook Twitter Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Solo to Group Practice: Adding More Therapists to Grow Your Time & Income Use my link for 1 Month FREE of Brighter Vision services Brighter Vision Fall Into Cash Event Sign up for Killin’It Camp – October 5-7, 2020 Check out these great resources from PsychMaven G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Rebecca Toner joins to speak about supervision and seeking support for your private practice. She explains exactly how a supervisor can help you with your clinical journey. Plus, Rebecca reveals the most significant obstacles that clinicians face at the beginning of their career and some ways to overcome those common challenges. Stay tuned as we talk about how you can find a niche and the ways to navigate imposture syndrome.
Meet Rebecca Toner
Rebecca Toner, MA, LPC is a group private practice owner, clinical supervisor, EMDR consultant-in-training, and host of the Supportive SuperVision Podcast. She specializes in trauma work and combines both her clinical practice of EMDR and her clinical supervision/consultation practice with an Internal Family Systems model. She's a multi-passionate entrepreneur whose mission is to help heal as many lives as possible through direct clinical practice, supervision, and EMDR consulting.
Connecting With Clinicians
It’s terrific for clinicians to be connecting as long as it’s authentic. Supervision is a way to develop other clinicians. You can work on a few goals together and help drive their career. Rebecca does a lot of trauma-informed supervision. She helps her clinicians dig deep and compartmentalize.
Learn How To Be Genuine
Rebecca notices that clinicians focus on doing their work correctly and precisely by the book. This method will strip the human element. Instead of staying in the moment, clinicians are second-guessing themselves. Plus, clinicians will work on becoming more like their supervisor rather than becoming more like themselves. It’s essential to develop your own style when doing clinical work. The number one predictor of the efficacy of therapy is the relationship between the therapist and the client.
Advice For Those Who Are Getting Started
Rebecca says to invest in your own supervision and consultation. A consultation will be a one-time session where you ask a couple of questions. Supervision is a paid ongoing relationship. If you’re a young clinician, then you are probably getting administrative supervision. However, you can pay for someone who will provide clinical supervision. That new perspective will help assist your clients. This person will also have the clinical process at the forefront of their mind.
Be part of an online therapist group, if possible. Facebook groups are great for exposing yourself to people with specialties and niches. There is no need to reinvent the wheel. Pay the person that has your niche for their time and ask how they got to where they are. Build your business and your confidence while also building your clinical skills.
Getting Unstuck as a Clinician
Clinicians will get stuck with their confidence. Sometimes, they are not sure which diagnosis is the right choice for their client. A clinician will overthink their gut feelings. Plus, people are made to believe that they are dependent on their agency jobs. That’s not the case! It’s scary to give up the stability of an agency job and move out on your own. However, every therapist in private practice has wrestled with these thoughts.
Private practice does not need to be zero to one-hundred. You can build your private practice during nights and weekends. Then, start thinking about moving from full-time to part-time agency work to give yourself more time when transitioning to private practice. It’s vital to form a niche and a specialty. That will help when you make a move to private practice.
Finding a Niche and Overcoming Imposture Syndrome
What are you naturally doing as an interest? If you’re interested in clients with OCD and ADHD, then work on getting super confident in that area. It’s also essential to go to the trainings and validate that you know what you’re doing. People can get caught up in imposter syndrome because they don’t recognize what they do know. It’s important to remember that you have gone through trainings and learned from graduate school and internships. It would help if you didn’t discount these things.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Rebecca’s Resources
Supervision/Consultation Website
Counseling Practice Website
Supportive SuperVision Podcast
Rebecca@SupportiveSupervision.com
Resources Use the promo code “GORDON” to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Use my link for 1 Month FREE of Brighter Vision services Sign up for Killin’It Camp – October 5-7, 2020 Brighter Vision Fall Into Cash Event
Brighter Vision 1 Month of Free Services
Check out these great resources from Psychmaven
Psychmaven
Gordon Brewer Shares Inside Secrets To Having A Successful Counseling Practice | Episode 24
Consulting with Gordon
G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Ashley Comegys gives us the basics of building an online practice. We talk through some of the challenges of being a full-time virtual therapist and how clients react to telehealth during COVID-19. Stay tuned as Ashley explains the process behind getting licensed in several states and the importance of flexibility during these uncertain times.
Meet Ashley Comegys Ashley Comegys is a licensed clinical social worker with an online therapy practice that helps women with anxiety navigate life transitions, grief, trauma, and loss. She has been working with clients online since 2014 and loves the ability to work with clients who may not be able to make it into a traditional office for therapy. Through cross country moves, and a growing family, Ashley has built a successful online practice, working with clients in Louisiana, Hawaii, and Colorado. Ashley is passionate about helping other mom clinicians build their own online therapy practices so they can have the time freedom and flexibility to have a career and raise their family.
To help moms get started with building their online practices Ashley has created a free guide called The ABCs of Online Therapy: A Quickstart Guide for Mom Clinicians to Take Their Practice Online. You can download the free guide at bit.ly/momABCguide.
Telehealth During COVID The reality is, schools can shut down at any time. Working with clients online will give you the flexibility and freedom that a brick and mortar office doesn’t provide. For example, do you share an office space with someone else? Then you may be limited to which hours you can go in there. Working with clients online, you have the flexibility to work around your schedule and your childcare. It cuts down on the extra time for commuting too! No one knows what the outcome will be from COVID; it’s time to pivot and adjust your expectations and find success in online practice.
Flexibility with Clients Clients have been willing to be very flexible during COVID. There are a lot of moms who understand the importance of being flexible. Even those clients who aren’t moms, they understand the need to be flexible. Nothing is normal right now. Some days we can work from home, while other days we need to be in the office. Ashley has very understanding clients.
Adjusting Your Schedule When you need to make adjustments to your schedule, Ashley says that it needs to be an upfront conversation. Tell your clients the situation and prepare them for possible changes. Also, be willing to have options for your clients. For the most part, our clients are also going through difficult times too; they understand and relate to you. Communication is critical during these uncertain times.
Getting Licensed In Several States Getting licensed in several states happened organically for Ashley because she kept moving around. As a military spouse, it’s hard because each state is so different. The only beneficial thing is that Ashley’s application went to the front of the line in Hawaii. Compared to some applications, the Hawaii application wasn’t too bad. Most of Ashley’s clients are in Hawaii, even though Ashley lives in Louisiana. Plus, Ashley works with military families that moved to Colorado. So, she got licensed in Colorado – it was a simple process compared to other states.
Marketing Your Private Practice Get a good website! That will be a significant source of referrals for your practice. When you market to too many people, then you’re marketing to no one. Think about your physical location. That will be the most accessible place to start marketing. A website will be the easiest way for people to find you. Plus, you can still have a lunch meeting with someone in your area that is a natural collaborator with you. That way, you can connect with other counselors and get a referral source.
Starting Your Virtual Practice Get the basics in order. Figure out what is the EHR system that you are going to use. There is a variety of systems out there, which one will be best for you? After you get the nuts and bolts, you can start picking up the phone and finding clients. Ashley has a free guide to help you get started. You can find it here: https://bit.ly/momABCguide.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Ashley's Resources The ABCs of Online Therapy: A Quickstart Guide for Mom Clinicians to Take Their Practice Online Ashley's Website Ashley's Facebook Group Raised To Empower Email Ashley Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free.Learn more about GreenOak Accounting Listen to Therapy For Your Money Podcast Use my link for 1 Month FREE of Brighter Vision services Sign up for Killin'It Camp - October 5-7, 2020 Click on this link, nominate yours truly, and write your most intriguing questions for the “Up Close and Personal Podcast Mini-Series.” Use the discount code “AUG2020” on all of the Practice of Therapy e-courses and digital products at Gumroad and Teachable. G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Dana McNeil and Nancy Ryan speak about how to be a successful couple's therapist. A couple's therapist needs to be compassionate and connect with the pair. Plus, a couple's therapist has to control the room and not be afraid to make mistakes. If you're looking for a private practice niche, couple's therapy can be an excellent tool for your practice. However, if you find out that couple's therapy is not your specialty, please refer to another therapist. Tune in for more tips about couple's work!
Meet Dana McNeil, LMFT Dana McNeil is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist and is the founder of a group practice called The Relationship Place located in San Diego, California. Dana’s practice specializes in couples’ therapy and utilizes an evidence-based type of couples’ therapy which is known as the Gottman Method. Dana is a certified Gottman Method therapist and Bringing Home Baby instructor. Dana’s practice works with all types of relationship issues from pre-marital counseling, dealing with the aftermath of extramarital affairs, partners working through addiction recovery, the military deployed families, parents of special needs children, LGBTQ, and polyamorous clients.
Dana has been featured on many relationship podcasts and in publications such as the Business Insider, Authority Magazine, Eat This-Not That, Parade, Oprah Living, Martha Stewart Living, Ladders, AARP and is the resident relationship expert on the Cox Communications show “I Do”.
Meet Nancy Ryan, LMFT Nancy Ryan is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist and is the founder of a group practice called The Relationship Therapy Center in Roseville and Fair Oaks, California. Nancy's practice specializes in couples therapy and she is a Certified Gottman Therapist. Nancy's practice works with all types of relationship issues from pre-marital counseling, all types of couples, divorce, and uncoupling, affair recovery, sexual issues, and codependency. Nancy has been featured in the media and in publications such as the Psych Central, Bustle, Elephant Journal, Marriage.com, KFBK News Radio, Fox 40 Sacramento, and Cox Media "Main Street Living".
Client Ambassadors Do you want to talk about money while you're in the session? It is better to have someone else talk about business aspects with your clients. That way, the therapists do not need to ask their clients for the money. When you go to medical practice, the doctor doesn't ask you for the money; there is a separate person. Having a buffer is enormous.
Handle The Room In Couple's Therapy You have to be the presence that carries hope and the demeanor. Internally, therapists could be thinking that it's a mess. However, it should never come out in the room. Both partners need to be able to feel like you're on their side. There is a way for you to get the couple to talk to one another. It would help if you were a therapist for the relationship, not for each individual. When one person is talking and sharing, look at the other partner's face, and see how they react.
Call Out Emotions If someone is aggressive, there needs to be a pause, so you remain in control of the room. When someone is aggressive, then they are not tuned in to the other person's body language. As a therapist, you need to show them what is happening with their partner. A therapist needs to be brave enough to call out emotions. It's a talent that you have to learn because sometimes you get it wrong. It would help if you were comfortable with correcting yourself and making mistakes. There's a dance that happens when you're a perfect couple's therapist.
Normalize Couple's Therapy Couples aren't in therapy because they can't figure things out. Couples are in therapy because no one teaches them about the couple's communication. Couples should be in therapy because they need to learn the tools. A therapist should also relate to their clients – we all have struggles. A therapist can talk about conflict at their house. That way, the couple will start to feel safe.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months of Therapy Notes free. GreenOak Accounting
Dana's Resources Free Copy of Three Conflict Busting Techniques Confident Couple's Therapists Use to Manage Escalated Clients The Relationship Place Dana's Website Confident Couples Therapist Nancy's Resources Relationship Therapy Center Confident Couples Therapist Other Resources Click on this link, nominate yours truly and write your most intriguing questions for the “Up Close and Personal Podcast Mini-Series” Use the discount code "AUG2020" on all of the Practice of Therapy e-courses and digital products at Gumroad and Teachable. G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast wherever you listen to it. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn, and Pinterest, “Like” us on Facebook.
When I first started my practice, there was very little information explaining how to start a private practice. However, there are a lot of basics that are important for people to know. This episode is all about getting back to the basics and thinking about what is needed in order to have a successful practice. I share what I have learned through my own successes and failures (by the way, there have been a lot). Plus, I share what I've learned from other clinicians and conversations that we've had. Enjoy!
Start With Your Why Always start with your why. Think about things in-depth and have clarity for yourself as to why you want to start a private practice versus just working for someone else. Private practice isn't for everyone. You have to have a bit of a mindset shift from being an employee to becoming a self-employed person. This is something you have to get your head around. Look at your reasons why you want to be in private practice. For most people, they wish to have the autonomy of creating their schedule. Listen to Why Knowing Your Why Is Important In Private Practice.
Business Models Next, think about what sort of business model you want to use in your practice because, like it or not, being in private practice is like running a business. You have to have business savvy in running your practice. In the private practice startup guide, there are some links to one of the most popular blog posts that I did early on about setting up a private practice because there are lots of different ways to set it up. Read Business Models in Private Practice.
Find A Private Space One thing that you need is a place or a method to meet with clients. You will need to have a private space to do that. During COVID, telehealth is now the predominant way of providing services. Essentially, you can have an online practice, and that's a massive game-changer in terms of saving costs and being able to cut down on overhead. That's something to consider, starting online without even having an office space. Now more than ever is a great time to go into private practice or be a mental health provider because there is a shortage of us folks.
Understand The Financial Side A lot of people make a mistake when going into private practice if they jump into it too quickly. You've got to make sure that you've got a financial buffer for yourself. Also, you need to have a clear picture of what sort of income you need from your practice to support your lifestyle. One of the things that you need to do as a business owner is to have a financial buffer. If you didn't see any clients for a month, would you be able to pay yourself plus be able to cover your expenses? I recommend putting a lot of effort into creating that buffer for yourself. It may be beneficial for those folks that might be transitioning from agency work to start your practice part-time. Learn more in the Money Matters in Private Practice Course.
Marketing Your Private Practice How are people going to know who you are? People should be to find you so that you can help them. Marketing is just merely a relationship-building exercise. It is making sure that you're putting yourself out there for people to find you because believe me, people are looking for us. People want help, and people want to be able to connect with the right person and find people who can help them with the things they're struggling with. The first part of marketing is merely networking; being able to build relationships within your community. The other part of that is with the niche that you defined for yourself. It's essential to establish a specialty area for yourself because it will make it easier for the right clients to find you. Listen to Niche Marketing in Private Practice.
Outsourcing Tasks As you grow, one of the things that will happen is that you can get busy with a lot of stuff that doesn't bring you any income. That's when you want to begin to automate and outsource. The big mistake that people make is they create a mindset about money that doesn't work when it comes to business. One of the things about being able to run a business is you've got to be prepared at different times be able to invest in your business. You'll either be investing your time or your money and sometimes both. Think of it as a learning period, being able to set up things on your own, if you're comfortable with that, all of those things is an investment of your time. You should be able to, at least over time, get a return of the investment of your time in your practice. In other words, it will pay off in the long run.
Money Mindset Think about your mindset, and mainly your money mindset is not to be afraid to spend money. One of the things that I hear from people is that they're scared to spend money on things that are going to give them a return on their investment. For example, a Psychology Today listing costs about $30 a month. That is absolutely a good investment because if you got just one client from that, it would pay for itself. The other part is being able to spend your money on things that will free up your time.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources TherapyNotes.com - Use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months free!
Get your FREE Private Practice Start-Up Guide! Brighter Vision SEO and Getting Your Private Practice Website Found Simplified SEO Consulting with Jessica Tappana GreenOak Accounting During August, I am offering a 20% discount on all of the Practice of Therapy digital products. This includes all of the e-courses and digital products on the Teachable Platform and Gumroad. Use the promo code "AUG2020" at checkout. G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper 3.0 Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram My colleague Ryan Hofrichter is forming several online mastermind groups for therapists getting started in private practice. Contact Ryan at ryan@steadypractice.co with any questions or visit https://steadypractice.co/mastermind/ to fill out an interest form. Let him know your learned about it from me ;-) Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this solo episode, Gordon gives tips and tricks on pivoting in private practice. Whenever you're thinking about making a change, the first thing to consider is "why?" What is driving your decisions and is private practice the right fit for you? One way to think about your "why" is by doing a brain dump. Get all your thoughts out on paper - Gordon does this every single week. Stay tuned as he speaks about knowing your numbers in private practice and the importance of outsourcing.
Think About Your Why COVID has caused most of us to think about what we are doing and how we can change things. Think about your "why." Why are you thinking about going into private practice? Many people want to make more money in private practice. However, why do you want the money? Think about your lifestyle. What is the life that you want to create for yourself within your practice? What is going to feed you emotionally, spiritually, and physically?
A person can go into private practice and realize that it's no different than working nine to five for someone else. It's not the best fit for everyone. You need to have a massive drive to succeed in private practice. An entrepreneurial spirit is an absolute must – there should be a growth mentality there. At the end of the day, you have to be a self-starter, and you have to hold yourself accountable. If you're not wired this way, then private practice may not be the best fit.
Understand Your Numbers If you are in private practice and you're not making a profit, you will not survive. Get a clear picture of your numbers as you begin to change things in private practice. If you're thinking about adding another person to your practice, make sure you understand your practice's financial side. Do a deep dive into your numbers and understand how all the financial pieces work. How much do you get per session? What does it cost you per session? Break things down in that way.
Outsource Your Admin Work Once you reach a critical mass with your clients, spending time on admin work is not a good use of your time. You make money by seeing clients, so don't spend too much time working on admin work. Once you outsource your admin work, you'll find that it pays for itself. That way, you have more free time to see clients. The hardest part around this is a mindset shift. You have to get your head around the idea of return on investment. In order to make money, you need to spend money. Think about the math!
Do A Brain Dump Think about all of the things that are important to you. Every week, write down everything you need to do and everything you want to accomplish. Take a sheet of paper and jot down all of the things that you wish to change in your private practice. This way, you can capture all of those thoughts. Map out how you want to get to where you want to go. If you're creative, you can take these thoughts and create a visual map on a poster board.
Cut Out The Deadwood Have a space that is comfortable for you and allows you to do the things that you want to do. Throw things away or donate items that you do not need anymore. This is called cutting out the deadwood. You can do this in private practice. Look at your systems and processes. Are there things that you are doing that no longer serve you? Maybe your clients are filling out too many forms. Think about how you can streamline your systems. Also, think about your subscriptions. It may be time to change your cell phone plan. Are you paying for things that you don't use? Then it's time to clean things up and cut the deadwood.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources TherapyNotes.com - use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months free.
Self Care Podcast Interview with Gordon Brewer Business Models for Private Practice Paul Jarvis |How Keeping Your Practice Small Could Be Big... | TPOT Podcast 086 For all of my digital products and courses, I am offering a 20% discount for the month of August. Use the promo code "AUG2020" to get the discount. G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course > Session Note Helper 3.0
Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Blog post and free download: Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
What opportunities have you found during COVID-19? Rachel Barbanel-Fried joins the show and reveals the opportunities she is taking advantage of during this time. If you haven’t thought about it yet, consider how your priorities are changing for the next year. Plus, Rachel explains why therapists need to be comfortable talking about money. Stay tuned as we speak about the importance of finding your niche and considering lifestyle when styling your perfect practice.
Meet Dr. Rachel Barbanel-Fried Dr. Rachel Barbanel-Fried, aka Dr. RBF, is a clinical psychologist, writer, and optimal performance consultant based in Newton Centre, Massachusetts. She consults with executives and organizations looking to elevate performance and reach new levels of success in the workplace and beyond. She also sees individuals, couples, and families in a therapeutic setting who are looking to move forward towards growth, change, and healing. Dr. RBF utilizes an evidence-based, collaborative approach. She’s direct, down-to-earth, and non-judgmental, specializing in working with people from diverse backgrounds. Talking About Money When you have a private practice, you are a small business owner, and you are creating something of your vision. Rachel assists other clinicians to build their practices, and she helps them figure out a work-life balance. Most clinicians do not want to run a business. So, they need to work on getting comfortable with money and talking about money. We need to be comfortable talking about uncomfortable things. For many of us, it’s awkward to tell clients what our fees are. Rachel got stiffed from a client because she was uncomfortable talking about money. Now, Rachel is really good at talking about money. For instance, she collects fees at the time of service.
Know What You Do Well Know what you do well in, and know when you need to refer out. If you’re not the right person for your client, your job should be to assist them in getting the help they need. That’s why it’s essential to define your niche. When you work with clients who are a good fit for you, it makes for better clinical work. You never want to look at your schedule and not be excited to see your clients. At the very least, you want to feel like you’re enjoying what you’re doing. That doesn’t mean you need to be psyched every day, but you need to feel good at what you’re doing.
Start With Your Lifestyle There is a number that is associated with your lifestyle. What do you need to bring home for you and your family every year? Then, work backward from that. So, how much do you need to make on a daily basis? It’s a great approach to private practice. If you don’t know where you are going, then how are you going to get there? Take stock of what works for you and what doesn’t work for you.
Therapy During COVID Rachel walks while on the phone with her clients during therapy. It enables her clients to get out and get back into the world during COVID. It has been so useful for Rachel; she actually doesn’t want to give it up. What opportunities can you think of during COVID? Hopefully, you have had time to think of your priorities during our current situation. What do you want your life to look like for the next year?
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Rachel’s Resources Website Facebook Instagram Resources TherapyNotes.com - Use the promo code "GORDON" and get 2 months free.
G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Bewindi Bobb, LCSW joins the show to speak about her recent move to full-time private practice. Bewindi explains the mindset shift that is necessary actually to make a move to private practice. First, the thing you need to know before making a move is your purpose. Are you driven to private practice, or are you just jumping on the bandwagon? Plus, Bewindi gives her thoughts on Black Lives Matter and the importance of mental health in the Black community.
Meet Bewindi Bobb Bewindi was born and raised in the beautiful, gorgeous Island of St. Lucia in the Caribbean. Her journey towards accepting the calling to be a counselor is interesting, but let’s just say, she eventually stopped running (insert laughter) and realized that being a counselor is not just a profession but a God-given and ordained calling and ministry.
Bewindi is super passionate about seeing people become free to live happily and free from emotional baggage, free from whatever is blocking, delaying, or hindering their healing. She loves the opportunity to create a safe space where clients receive permission to express themselves, their feelings, and find themselves while gaining a new and changed perspective.
She helps professionals who are dealing with unresolved emotional conflicts such as depression, anxiety, grief, stress, etc live freely by equipping them with tools to renew their mindsets. She loves to encourage and empower clients and when they apply the tools, they are able to show up for themselves and be their best selves in all areas of their lives. Additionally, she provides Christ-Centered Counseling to whom it applies and for those who request.
With over 14 years of clinical experience, she is driven and fueled by her professional and personal values including but not limited to Faith, Empower, Purpose, Service, Encourage, and Teach. She is so honored to be in this space and knows that whether she is providing therapy, coaching, supervision or speaking to an audience or on her podcast, ‘Empowered to Empower You’, which can be found on Spotify, Podbean, Apple Podcasts, Google, etc, she is convinced that people are definitely encouraged and ignited.
Focus on Abundance Bewindi wanted to make the jump to full-time private practice for a long time. However, Bewindi would always focus on why she couldn’t make a move to full-time private practice. When in reality, we should be focusing on the reasons why we can make a move to private practice. Once Bewindi made the jump, her schedule filled up! She made the jump into abundance – even amid a pandemic.
Full-Time Telehealth Bewindi is doing 100% telehealth. She has been authentic and honest with her clients. Most likely, Bewindi will not go to the office for the rest of the year. Most of her clients have adapted and adjusted. However, there are a few clients who miss going to the office. Tennessee has been hit hard with COVID, and many people are switching back to 100% telehealth as well.
Private Practice Isn’t For Everyone When starting a private practice, you have to know your purpose. You shouldn’t be doing something just because everyone else is doing it. It’s essential to think about and reflect on the why behind your decisions. What is your purpose? Or are you trying to mimic someone else’s path? Just because Bewindi has a license, doesn’t mean she needs a private practice. Some people actually love working for a group practice. That doesn’t mean they need to start a private practice. Overall, think about your purpose before making a jump.
Black Lives Matter Bewindi has a set of values that anchor her practice and a set of values that anchor her personal life. Faith is a tremendous value for Bewindi. If she combines all of her values, Bewindi believes that Black Lives Matter. Bewindi is honored that 99% of her practice is Black people. One of the messages that Bewindi takes from these times is that we need to invest in our mental health.
Mental Health in the Black Community Mental health is a stigma in the Black community and the Asian community. It’s awful that it took things like this to happen for people to seek mental health. However, Black people have been reaching out for mental health help now more than ever. People are experiencing so many losses, and they are so angry. The Black Lives Matter movement gives an outlet for our feelings. Bewindi is thankful that people recognize the need for mental health care. It’s time to permit yourself to feel without being judged.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Bewindi’s Resources www.aaopcs.net/ 901.319.9677 bewindi.bobb@outlook.com Empowered to Empower You Twitter Instagram Therapy For Black Girls Resources TherapyNotes.com - use the promo code "GORDON" to get 2 months free.
G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this Best Of Telehealth episode, we feature four previous guests who know about running a successful virtual private practice. You will hear from Clay Cockrell, Jonathan Van Viegen, Jeremy Zug, and Danielle Blessing Taylor. The four speak about various topics like the importance of having a website and how to work with clients internationally. Plus, they give tips and tricks on making your virtual private practice run smoothly. As COVID is still among us, now is the time to think about how we will continue to serve clients virtually.
Meet Clay Cockrell Clay Cockrell, LCSW is a therapist based in New York City and is the founder of several counseling oriented endeavors. Most recently he is the founder of Onlinecounselling.com – a listing directory with the mission of helping clients all over the world to find the therapist or life coach that will best meet their needs. The site also works through their educational resources and podcasts to help counselors work online in an ethical, responsible, and legal manner. A majority of proceeds from the site are donated to non-profit arts. Clay started his career as the creator of Walk and Talk Therapy (www.walkandtalk.com).
Where Are You Licensed? The first question therapists will have licensure. Who can you work with? Back in the day, there weren’t a lot of regulations. People will think if you’re sitting in New York, then the therapy is happening in New York. However, that’s not how it works. The only thing that matters is where your client is sitting. Is your client sitting in Nebraska? Then that’s where you need to be licensed.
Can You Work With Clients Internationally? There is a caveat. What about people outside of the United States? There is a massive mental health need all over the world. It would be best if you did some investigation on this. Think about your ethics and the different regulations around the globe. With the exception of Canada, no countries regulate virtual therapy. Clay says that he has clients all over the world. It’s a personal choice. Clay has the ability to work with people who need his services; therefore, he works internationally.
You Need a Website and Advertising Your private practice needs a website. On that website, you will need to explain that you provide this service. Make sure it’s on your homepage. Plus, make sure you have another page about online therapy. On this page, make sure you describe the benefits of online therapy. Advertising is also essential. You can have your ad only show in a specific area. That way, people who are looking for you will find you. Find out where your target audience is and advertise to them. This is where the importance of having a niche comes in. Make sure you know who your ideal client is!
Meet Jonathan Van Viegen Husband, Father of 2, Marriage and Family Therapist, Entrepreneur, and Coach, Jonathan Van Viegen, MA, MFT, CCC is the Founder and CEO of the Online Therapist Academy.
Jonathan helps therapists all over the world attract new clients and build thriving online practices so they can do more of what they love to do while serving their clients with passion, integrity, and authenticity. Jonathan built a successful therapy practice in Canada before selling it all to travel full-time with my family. After transforming his struggling online practice into a 6-figure business, he decided to help other therapists do the same. His therapy website is: https://jonathanvanviegen.com/ The Do’s of Online Therapy * DO your research. Make sure you have the proper licenses to practice. * DO have a goal in mind. You can be both a coach and a therapist if that’s your plan! * DO protect your license. Make sure you operate under the necessary authority. * DO take action. Put one foot in front of the other. You can pay for mentorship – it will be a journey. * DO be consistent. Regardless of how you build your practice, get your momentum.
“Success is going from failure to failure without losing your enthusiasm.” -Winston Churchill
Getting Momentum Online It took about twelve months for Jonathan to get momentum. Jonathan learned everything himself using webinars and training. Today, Jonathan has three sales calls. People show up to book calls with Jonathan; he doesn’t have to go out and find people. It took a lot of work and effort. If it were too easy, then everyone would do it.
Online Coaching vs. Online Therapy With therapy, your client will come to you with the content. With coaching, we go to our clients with the content. We are teaching them skills that will help with their daily lives. We aren’t supposed to label our clients – why are we labeling how we assist them? Psychotherapy isn’t the be-all and end-all intervention for our clients. We can offer people coaching or therapy – you do not need to mix the two. There is no reason that we can’t provide both.
Meet Jeremy Zug Jeremy grew up in the Pacific Northwest where he discovered his passion for people. He decided to go to college in Chicago to further develop his skills working with people and pursue a degree in counseling. While in Chicago he worked for a group practice as a practice biller and marketing manager. This initiated his desire to pursue learning about the business of private practice, particularly medical billing. He now lives in Michigan with his wife of 3 years. They both are pursuing their passion for helping helpers maintain sustainable and compliant billing practices. In his free time, Jeremy loves reading, fishing, biking, hiking, and camping.
Telehealth Claims How can you determine whether your patient’s copay will be waived? There are some excellent resources, but the best way to do that right now is to call the insurance companies. You’re going to want to say: is telemental health covered on an outpatient basis for this patient? Then, give them the insurance information and the date of birth because that will lead the provider representative to tell you what they have. What we’re seeing as a trend is if the patient had telehealth benefits into their benefits before COVID-19, they are covered at one-hundred percent. If they didn’t have those benefits, the patients still have copays and deductibles applying through this time. It’s confusing for many people, but as providers, we can do the best job we can by being as clear as possible. We want to be as transparent as possible with that.
Telehealth is the New Normal Providers can do a good job as far as lobbying with their government officials on telehealth being the new normal. Telemedicine is effective, and you can reach more people. Jeremy knows that insurance companies often get a bad rep, but this has been an enormous agenda item for them for a long time. Please send a letter to your governor, your senator, and congress members to push for it. Telehealth can also make the lives of the private practice owner easier too. Telehealth will make it more convenient to choose your hours, and therapists can even be available for clients who are overseas.
Meet Danielle Blessing Taylor Danielle Blessing Taylor is a Licensed Marital and Family Therapist in DC, MD, VA, and PA who has been providing therapy since 2010 and has built her ever-growing private practice which was created in 2015. In addition to specializing in Telehealth, she also specializes in helping individuals, families, and couples to cultivate healthy relationships. She helps people to make sense of their past and create healthy changes for a happier life within themselves and in relationships with others.
Telehealth Tips Danielle shows private practice owners how to position the camera at the top of the screen and put their head at the top of the screen. That way, it looks like you’re making more eye contact. If the internet goes out, Danielle encourages therapists to restart their computers and update their browsers. Also, clearing the cache in the browser and updating the actual computer system will help with any audio issues.
Danielle gives a tips and tricks sheet to her clients for the initial set up, which also explains how to troubleshoot if they have issues. Also, think about where you will be practicing therapy virtually. You need to be comfortable at home in a private space, where nobody can hear you. Do not be in a moving car. Danielle says it’s important to know where your clients are. If the client is in a different place, you need to be licensed in that state. Especially in the summer, clients will be on vacation all over the place, and not even realize that it will affect their therapy.
Telehealth Is The New Normal Gordon was surprised how smooth the transition was for telehealth. However, some clients did not want to do it. Gordon is seeing 1/3rd of his clients online. At first, telehealth can be uncomfortable. Therapists are used to seeing people in person. It’s a little weird not being able to see people from the waist down. So, Danielle has started asking specific questions on her questionnaire. For instance, now, Danielle asks: do you have any physical limitations? Sometimes, you can’t even tell if someone is in a wheelchair when you’re talking online. Telehealth has become second nature for Danielle. Plus, her clients are so open when they are in the comfort of their own home.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Clay’s Resources Clay Cockrell | Providing Your Services in Unconventional Ways | TPOT 008 Sign-up for the Online Counseling Directory Listen to Clay’s Podcast Jonathan’s Resources Jonathan Van Viegen | Working Abroad As An Online Therapist and Coach | TPOT 117 Jonathan’s Website Jonathan’s Facebook Schedule Your Strategy Session with Jonathan Jeremy’s Resources Jeremy Zug | Telehealth and Insurance Best Practices | TPOT 129 Jeremy Zug | Solutions To Insurance Credentialing & Insurance Billing In Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 052 Practice Solutions Practice Solutions on Facebook Practice Solutions on LinkedIn Danielle’s Resources Danielle Blessing Taylor | Telehealth Creativity In Private Practice | TPOT 135 Danielle’s Website Call Danielle: (202) 759-6107 Email Danielle: DBTaylor@mymfts.com Resources TherapyNotes.com - Use the coupon code "GORDON" and get 2 months free.
The Session Note Helper System Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Jennifer Sneeden shares her journey in private practice. Unfortunately, it took Jennifer months after opening her private practice to realize the importance of marketing. After becoming a marketing guru, Jennifer recognized that she could help other private practice owners with marketing their private practice. You’ll hear Jennifer give marketing tips. First, stop saying you need to “get clients.” Instead, think about how you can “attract clients.” Plus, Jennifer and Gordon dive deep into changing your marketing mindsets.
Meet Jennifer Sneeden Business coach and author, Jennifer has written three books and helped thousands of therapists and coaches all over the world create thriving 6-figure businesses that they love.
Jennifer understands that success in business starts from within, but that mindset must be combined with effective marketing techniques in order to get results. To learn more about Jennifer, visit JenniferSneeden.com.
Masters and Disasters of Private Practice When it comes to masters and disasters, Jennifer started in the disaster category of private practice. She opened her practice in 2007, and she agonized over finding the right leather couch. Plus, she spent weeks perfecting her business cards. After improving everything, Jennifer was in her office all by herself with ZERO clients. So, Jennifer realized that she needed to market – people don’t just show up! It took a few months for Jennifer to realize that she needed to get on any panel that would take her. Jennifer started making $43 an hour. However, she wasn’t going to get where she wanted to go with $43 an hour.
Learn To Market Jennifer made herself a student of marketing for eighteen months. She realized that she wasn’t the only therapist that sucks at this stuff. So, Jennifer launched her coaching business on how to market yourself. Now, Jennifer is a total marketing junkie. It took her a long time to get there because she never realized how important it was going to be for her success.
Give, Give, Get Marketing Jennifer’s philosophy is to come from a place of service. What do your clients need, and how can you help them? Provide value before you ever ask for something in return. When you provide value, people will want to work with you. Serve first, then ask later. Jennifer teaches how to serve clients through marketing. When you can come from an adding real value perspective, then clients will naturally show up. If you come at people from desperation, not only will it feel icky, but it will also repel the clients you’re seeking.
Attracting Clients in Uncertain Times Some people are questioning if they should even be marketing during COVID. Jennifer says that there has never been a greater need for therapy services than there is right now. There is so much global psychic trauma. Who is going to make this better? Mental health professionals are going to allow us to get through this difficultly. Step up and tell others that you are here to help. It’s the most exceptional service you can offer to clients. When you hide, you can’t do any service.
Make A Marketing Mindset Shift Empower yourself to make your private practice stronger through COVID. First, don’t try and do anything until you have decided that you will be successful. It is all about mindset. Permit yourself to change your mind about things, especially when it comes to marketing your private practice. Use marketing to generate clients and eventually make money. Sometimes, there can be a scarcity mindset when it comes to marketing. Often, the mindset you have about money will be the mindset you have about marketing. If you think there’s not enough money to go around, you most likely believe there are not enough clients to go around. Remember, that mindset will give you the results that you want.
The actions you take are not going to get the results that you want if you don’t come with the mindset of having great value. You do not need to “find clients,” and you do not need to “get clients.” Instead, it’s about attracting clients. Put your best work out there and know that people will want to work with you. When you have a scarcity mindset, clients will not be attracted to your practice. Rather than finding clients, your clients should be able to find you. A client will need to WANT your services. Make yourself be seen and available to your ideal client.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jennifer’s Resources Jennifer’s Website The Own Your Worth Podcast Attracting Clients in Uncertain Times Jennifer’s Instagram Books
Attracting Clients In Uncertain Times
Building A Six Figure Private Practice
Resources TherapyNotes.com - Use the coupon code "GORDON" to get 2 months free
G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course The Session Note Helper System Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Danielle Blessing Taylor reveals her creative avenue for telehealth. Before COVID-19, Danielle was already utilizing telehealth services for her clients. So, COVID-19 wasn’t as much of a shock to her therapy business – essentially nothing changed! Danielle describes how subleasing an office can save you loads of money, and she also gives her telehealth tips and tricks. Tune in later as Danielle and I speak about working with couples and high-risk patients virtually.
Meet Danielle Blessing Taylor Danielle Blessing Taylor is a Licensed Marital and Family Therapist in DC, MD, VA, and PA who has been providing therapy since 2010 and has built her ever-growing private practice which was created in 2015. In addition to specializing in Telehealth, she also specializes in helping individuals, families, and couples to cultivate healthy relationships. She helps people to make sense of their past and create healthy changes for a happier life within themselves and in relationships with others.
Starting Your Private Practice Danielle uses her EHR as the base for her practice; it is straightforward. It has everything you need like scheduling, billing, and all of that. At first, Danielle started off having an Excel spreadsheet, and her husband would track how much she was making. It just became a headache. Danielle says to set up your LLC or sole proprietorship to keep it separate from your personal stuff. When tax season comes, it’s easier to look at your business credit card and bank statement. Then, write it off from there.
Telehealth Tips Danielle shows private practice owners how to position the camera at the top of the screen and put their head at the top of the screen. That way, it looks like you’re making more eye contact. If the internet goes out, Danielle encourages therapists to restart their computers and update their browsers. Also, clearing the cache in the browser and updating the actual computer system will help with any audio issues.
Danielle gives a tips and tricks sheet to her clients for the initial set up, which also explains how to troubleshoot if they have issues. Also, think about where you will be practicing therapy virtually. You need to be comfortable at home in a private space, where nobody can hear you. Do not be in a moving car. Danielle says it’s important to know where your clients are. If the client is in a different place, you need to be licensed in that state. Especially in the summer, clients will be on vacation all over the place, and not even realize that it will affect their therapy.
Telehealth Is The New Normal Gordon was surprised how smooth the transition was for telehealth. However, some clients did not want to do it. Gordon is seeing 1/3rd of his clients online. At first, telehealth can be uncomfortable. Therapists are used to seeing people in person. It’s a little weird not being able to see people from the waist down. So, Danielle has started asking specific questions on her questionnaire. For instance, now, Danielle asks: do you have any physical limitations? Sometimes, you can’t even tell if someone is in a wheelchair when you’re talking online. Telehealth has become second nature for Danielle. Plus, her clients are so open when they are in the comfort of their own home.
Couples’ Work in Telehealth Knowing your client’s names is essential. You have to keep addressing each person by name because they won’t be able to tell who you are looking at. Couples’ work in telehealth can be challenging. Not being able to move around puts you in an interesting position. A therapist can only get so loud. So, Danielle uses telehealth to her advantage. For instance, she will ask one of the partners to go in the other room and calm down. Having another place to cool down in isn’t something you can usually do in the office.
Higher Risk Clients in Telehealth Danielle says that higher risk clients need someone in person that they can also see. Someone needs to be monitoring this person, especially if they have severe depression. A few of Danielle’s clients have been suicidal. She cannot call 911 when she is in a different room than them. So, you have to find the right emergency number to call. Plus, it’s essential to have current emergency contact numbers up to date. Seeing an actively suicidal person on telehealth is a liability.
Consent Forms Danielle built in her telehealth consent form into her other paperwork. There is a separate section on technology and everything else the client needs to know. There is a clause where Danielle encourages them to be sober during therapy sessions. Also, there are crisis numbers in the forms too. Basically, Danielle adds anything a client should know about telehealth into the paperwork she already needs to give out.
Subleasing An Office Danielle blocks off a week every couple of months and rents the office by the hour. It is the same office every time, as long as they have the same rent situation, Danielle will keep renting out that space. Having the same space every time she speaks with clients helps them feel more comfortable and familiar with telehealth. Plus, it helps have a balance between in-person practice and telehealth. Essentially, Danielle has created a hybrid practice.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Danielle’s Resources Danielle’s Website Call Danielle: (202) 759-6107 Email Danielle: DBTaylor@mymfts.com Resources TherapyNotes.com - use the coupon code "Gordon" to get 2 months free.
4th of July Brighter Vision Sale Business Models For Private Practice G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course (Use Code JUNE2020) The Session Note Helper System Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon dives deep into the systems and processes it takes to run a private practice. No matter what size your practice is, you will want things to run as smoothly as possible. A few ways to ensure your practice is running smoothly is by automating specific administrative tasks. Plus, you’ll need to consider where and how you are storing all your documents and information. Later, Gordon dives deep into the benefits of using G-Suite and how to ensure your practice stays HIPAA compliant.
Systems and Processes Systems and processes are what happens when you receive a client’s call until the time you discharge them. Particularly on the back-end in terms of the clinical documentation and the administrative functions. For example, when you get a new client, you’ll probably give them some paperwork or forms. We need to do that, just legally and ethically have them sign forms, understand their HIPAA privacy policy, understand their fees, and the risk involved in doing therapy. Especially with teletherapy, our clients need to understand the risk of doing virtual therapy.
In addition, we have that whole moving piece for those of us with insurance-based practices. We are checking benefits for their insurance and then filing the claims. So, when I say systems and processes, it means all of those things that occur outside the therapy room in terms of documentation and administrative functions. When starting in private practice, all of those things can be overwhelming, particularly in the beginning. A lot of people are not sure how to pull all that together. Regardless of the size of your practice, you want those things to run smoothly.
Divide Your Tasks So the first thing that I think is helpful is to divide things into what I think of as clinical functions versus administrative functions. So, you’ve got your progress notes and session notes, your treatment plans, your discharge plans, all of that kind of documentation that we keep for our patients. Those are the clinical functions, and that’s the stuff that we really have to focus on keeping protected and confidential. These things are commonly referred to as personal health information. The administrative side includes tracking things like where your money is coming in and coming out from. Plus, it would help if you had a marketing plan and a business plan. Those things are all administrative functions.
HIPAA HIPAA comes in around our clinical functions. A lot of times, we can make HIPAA much more complicated than it is. If you want to keep paper records, which there’s nothing wrong with that, then HIPAA doesn’t apply other than keeping it under a double lock. With analog paper records, you can quickly run out of space. I have moved to pretty much paperless office now and any documents we get, we either scan them and convert them, or we put them into an electronic health record system. Also, we use our Google Drive, which is HIPAA secure. I make it a policy within my practice that the only thing that I’m going to communicate with a client by email is just something around appointment times and changing appointments and sending out initial paperwork. I’m not going to use email to address clinical issues as I would in a session. So in that sense, you’re keeping things a little more private.
Using G-Suite You cannot make your regular Gmail account HIPAA complaint. Instead, you need a G-Suite account. G-Suite allows you to change the email name from @gmail.com to @yourcounselingpractice.com. Plus, when someone emails you, it is handled through the Gmail app, it’s just like using the free Gmail app. Also, you get the benefit of having HIPAA secure emails. G-Suite allows you to create all sorts of cool things with it. Google Drive is one of my favorites because it comes with cloud storage. Cloud storage is much better and more secure than storing stuff on your computer. If you’re storing things on your computer, there is always the potential for someone to hack into it. Also, you could lose your computer, or it could crash. However, if stored in the cloud, you will always have access to it, and you will always have a backup. Plus, Google’s security will be better than anything you can put on your computer; they depend on it.
Most people are familiar with Google Docs and Google Sheets. The biggest nugget for private practice owners is Google Forms. It allows you to track how many sessions you have per week and the average session rate. This dashboard can be done on a Google Form – it will automatically put the information from the form to the sheet. This way, the data can be manipulated. If you get creative, there are lots of different ways you can set up systems and processes using Google G-Suite.
Electronic Health Records System An EHR is a way to go! That way, you can file all your claims electronically. Plus, it makes things a lot more automated. Most EHR systems will track the money you make from clients. However, it doesn’t necessarily have a function to track business expenses. Instead, you’ll want an accounting and bookkeeping system. Keep in mind that QuickBooks is not HIPAA secure. Therefore, do not put any health information or client information in the accounting system. When you have a client, do not write their name in the accounting system, write that you received payment from a client. You can use your client’s name in an EHR or on Google G-Suite.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources TherapyNotes.com - Use the coupon code "GORDON" to get 2 months free.
4th of July Brighter Vision Sale Roy Huggins on Technology, HIPAA and The Financial Side of Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 007 Rob Reinhardt | Electronic Health Records (EHR) In Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 028 Rob’s EHR Reviews Easy Safe Harbor From HIPAA Breach Notification: Now on Your Computer and Smartphone Racism Resources G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course (Use Code JUNE2020) The Session Note Helper System Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Ed Darrah joins the show and describes how to streamline your private practice using G-Suite. Ed reveals which G-Suite tools are HIPAA and BAA compliant. After loads of trial and error, Ed is here to describe what he now knows about using G-Suite to streamline and make your practice as efficient as possible!
Meet Edward Darrah Edward Darrah is a Licensed Professional Counselor in the state of Pennsylvania. Additionally, Edward holds board certifications in Counseling, School Counseling, and TeleMental Health. Edward founded Edward Darrah Counseling & Athlete Wellness Consulting in 2015, providing mental health and sport performance services within the greater Philadelphia area. Edward is currently a full-time staff member at Temple University, where he serves as a mental health and performance counselor.
Streamlining Your Practice Ed started to look at potential ways to streamline his practice. G-Suite is a HIPAA compliant platform, and it was very familiar to Ed because he uses it for personal work. Ed learned how to interconnect all the tools to use within his healthcare facility and transmit healthcare data. It was a lot of trial and error to connect the pieces. But once Ed became familiar with what he wanted to do, it became his primary EMR.
Ed was looking at his return on investment, and he was pouring money into an electronic medical record that is well known, but his patients were not using a lot of the features that Ed was paying for. They didn’t sign into the portal, and they didn’t manually schedule appointments. Plus, his patients didn’t use the messaging system. Instead, they often chose text message or email as primary communication, all things that didn’t fit into this software. The most significant difference between an EMR that you pay for monthly is that once you create that account, everything’s there for you – forms are there for the scheduling and billing. The optimization is undoubtedly there, especially if you take insurance, which will be the most significant piece.
EMR will undoubtedly give you an advantage if you’re doing insurance claiming. In contrast, an out of pocket provider might find that of the features and customization, the product might not technically meet all your needs, or you might not need everything. So, you might be overpaying on your subscription. Ed realized that maybe there’s a better way. With G-Suite and some of the third party add-ons, he found you’re able to build a robust system, and he doesn’t call it an EMR because it doesn’t do everything, but it does allow you to run your practice pretty efficiently at a low cost. Providers that are working part-time or even providers working full-time need to maximize their profits.
Cloud Search Not many EMRs are going to have such a robust cloud search, like Google, that’s what they specialize in. So, if you were putting your documents into your drive, you can go into a patient’s folder and narrow it down. You can type in medication and then bring up the notes on that medication in seconds. So, in terms of paper and being able to access data, it makes sense to use both to allow more consistency and streamline that care.
G-Suite Marketplace Within G-Suite, they have what they call the marketplace. The marketplace offers what we’re calling add-ons from companies that have other tools that G-Suite might not provide. They can add different applications like Google Forms or Google Docs to allow for different types of customization and accessibility. You have to make sure that the companies that you’re integrating with your G-Suite account are compliant. You need to go on their sites and look at their privacy policies if they offer a BAA. Then, make an informed decision.
JotForm JotForm is just an alternate solution to Google Forms, but there are advantages to JotForm. You can take a natural electronic signature right on the form, which makes a document legalized. You could also capture your IP addresses, create form IDs, and submission IDs. You can take payments through JotForm so you can create a receipt or even an invoice and send it out. There’s a little more customization; there’s a bit more opportunity to make it more branded. They do have very streamlined integration to Google Drive into Google Sheets – it generates a PDF. It cuts down on error and time.
About Ed’s Workflow Ed uses Google Meet for his telehealth work. There are things to keep in mind with telehealth. For instance, you should have a backup telehealth service in case a client is not able to access Google Meet. In addition, Ed uses Google Tasks in his calendar. It helps him stay organized and prioritize. Also, Ed uses Google Sheets as a chart, for case management, contact information, and taking notes. Google Voice falls into a BAA agreement. Many therapists are confused if they can or cannot use Google Contacts. Ed says not to use Google Contacts for client information – it is not covered under BAA. Instead, Ed will keep a separate Google Sheet with all of the information. Now, Google has something called Google Chat. Google Chat is under the BAA.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Edward’s Resources Darrah Counseling Darrah Counseling on Facebook Athlete Wellness Twitter JotForm SRFAx Resources TherapyNotes.com (use the coupon code "GORDON" and 2 months free)
Racism Resources G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course (Use Code JUNE2020) The Session Note Helper System Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet you can get here. Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon dives deep and speaks out about racism, white privilege, and fear and how we can do a better job about speaking truth, reaching out, and genuinely helping one another through this time. Gordon explains how we can speak loudest at the ballot box. Plus, he talks about how we can use free speech responsibly and the importance of emotional intelligence. It’s time that Gordon no longer keeps silent about racism, bigotry, and white privilege. Let’s end racism together.
We Need To Speak Truth We need to speak truth to what is going on around us – this has been happening for centuries. Our country needs to do what we need to do to change things. Gordon is still learning about how his prejudices have affected himself and others.
As white people, we do not know what it’s like to go into a place and be automatically self-conscious. Gordon hasn’t done enough to reach out to people in this situation and help them feel comfortable. We need to let people know that we are safe people. Have the power to speak out against other people’s injustices, prejudices, and racism. It’s time for us to speak out.
We Need To Speak Out We can speak out loudest at the ballot box. The rhetoric and talk that we have heard from our political leaders over the last four years need to stop. This speech is doing nothing but creating more division within our country. The rhetoric has got to end. We need to use free speech responsibly – words do count.
We have an opportunity to use our knowledge with psychology and emotions to teach people emotional intelligence. Racism is rooted in fear – it’s fear of someone that looks and speaks differently than us. There is no “they” or “them.” It’s all of US. We need to get away from separating ourselves based on economic status, what we look like, and how we speak.
We Need To Stand Together We need to go above and beyond and reach out to our clients of color. We need to let them know that we are aware of what’s going on and how it may be affecting them. Gordon is feeling a lot of grief and guilt around this as a white person. It is time to be very aware and be there for others. Be present with people and stand with them. Reach out to each other and understand how racism is affecting those around us.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources TherapyNotes.com
Racism Resources The Session Note Helper System Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet you can get here. Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Dr. LaRonda Starling joins the show and speaks about self-care. Private practice owners need to practice self-care because it’s too easy for business owners to work 24/7. We need to allow ourselves to be real people and take care of ourselves in the ways that we take care of others. LaRonda says we need to learn how to say no, practice prayer throughout the day, and be still. Tune in for more of LaRonda’s self-care advice!
Meet LaRonda Starling
Dr. LaRonda Starling is a Licensed Clinical Psychologist and a Licensed Professional Counselor in Texas, a National Certified Counselor, an adjunct professor at a Christian university, and the author of Be Still: Spiritual Self-Care for Mental Health Professionals. She has earned a Bachelor of Arts degree in Psychology, a Master of Science degree in Counseling, and a Doctor of Philosophy degree in Psychology with a specialization in Clinical Psychology. As a clinician, Dr. Starling provides therapeutic services (psychological assessment and counseling) in a private practice setting. Along with her clinical experience as a mental health professional, Dr. Starling has over fifteen years of experience working in academic environments; first as a staff member and then as adjunct faculty in both classroom and online settings. In all that she does (working or volunteering), she hopes that God receives the glory as she uses the gifts He has so graciously given her.
Why Private Practice Owners Need to Practice Self-Care Private practice owners need to take time for themselves. When you work for yourself, you have so many roles to take on. There is always a time where you could be doing some work. One of the things that LaRonda suggests is to be still. Sometimes that means to physically be still – stop being so busy during the day. Also, you need to spiritually be still.
Find the Good in Your Day Who is God as a person? If you know that God is everywhere, then we can lean on God. Also, be intentional about prayer. Sometimes we only pray when something terrible happens. We need to take the time throughout the day to pray. Throughout the day, think about what is good. What’s the silver-lining of quarantine? Maybe you learned how to use teletherapy, that’s a fantastic silver-lining during this time.
Saying No and Other Self-Care Techniques One way to practice self-care is by being able to say no in a loving way to other people. Also, make sure you can say no to yourself. You have time to do loads of extra work during the day, but you need to say no. Staying at home with the family, you may not have time to get up early and be still. Parents can set boundaries with their children, this is a great way to practice saying no. We still have to sleep, eat, and exercise. Plus, we need to surround ourselves with good people and good friends.
There’s so much to do during the day, make sure you are taking care of your body and spirit. Plus, LaRonda says to take an hour by yourself and reflect on what’s going on with you. Being outside is a refreshing difference. When COVID-19 is over, we should be able to go out and get some fresh air and exercise. Lastly, don’t forget that every therapist needs a therapist.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
LaRonda’s Resources Grace Psychological Health Services, PLLC Be Still: Spiritual Self-Care for Mental Health Professionals Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Healing the Shame that Binds You The Session Note Helper System If you want to be kept in the loop about things as they develop, >>click here<< and I’ll add you to list. Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet you can get here. Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, James and Lorinda Marland join in speaking about outsourcing work in private practice. A virtual assistant can be used to do loads of things in your private practice. For one, a VA will help you stay connected with clients. When a potential client speaks to someone on the phone the first time they call – that’s going to be a massive win for your practice. James and Lorinda talk about other things a VA can do for your practice, such as marketing, social media, and perfecting your website. Plus, they explain how a VA can help you build relationships and sell more content.
Meet James & Lorinda Marland James Marland is Chief Operations Officer at Move Forward Virtual Assistants with over 18 years of experience in social service and non-profit organizations. James loves the power of learning and holds a Master’s degree in Ministry and Business Administration.
Lorinda has been doing secretarial and scheduling work for over 15 years. Her experience ranges from working in small businesses to large scheduling offices. Some of those years were spent working in the medical field with Philhaven, now Philhaven Wellspan. Lorinda enjoys working with the public and using her administrative gifts to help the business grow and thrive. She brings a unique perspective to the table having not only worked doing scheduling but also managing an office. Listen to her interview on what makes it easy to onboard with a new virtual assistant and what might make it hard to start with a new practice.
Using a Virtual Assistant to Stay Connected with Clients A virtual assistant will connect with the clients by passing along messages or just getting them in contact one-on-one with their therapist. A virtual assistant can generally do that a little quicker or maybe much quicker than the therapist. Many new clients like to get a live person on the phone – they appreciate that fact. When Lorinda first started taking calls for a therapist, she got like sixteen calls. Out of the sixteen, there were probably about four or five that she scheduled as new clients to her practice. Whereas if Lorinda hadn’t been there, the therapist wouldn’t have gotten all of those calls.
How to Utilize a Virtual Assistant Despite COVID-19, we still have clients to see. We still have phone calls to make. We still have insurance issues to figure out. We still need marketing, podcasts, social media, webpages. It’s good to remember that even though a lot has changed, a lot hasn’t changed. You’re still a therapist, you’re running a business. How you do it now that the world has changed? We need to figure out that puzzle.
One thing a virtual assistant can do is connect with current clients. A lot of work needs to be done to ensure that the existing clients keep coming to their sessions. The VA can spend a lot of time connecting with current clients, sending letters, checking emails, calling them, making sure they know about virtual therapy. A VA can even call the client and let them know about the missed session. Lorinda has been sending out emails, making phone calls to different referral places, and reminding clients of their appointments. She has also calls to reschedule with clients and touch base with them. Some of the clients aren’t as technology savvy. Lorinda has had clients call before their session, trying to figure out how to get into the link. Lorinda will send a message to the therapist and let the client know they are trying to enter the session while coaching the client on how to use the technology.
Building Relationships Using a Virtual Assistant We still need to continue to build relationships with referral sources. A VA can let referrals know that you are doing teletherapy. Plus, they can find new referrals by contacting hospitals, schools, churches, and colleges. Now with everything kind of shut down, a VA can develop relationships with these referral sources because it does take time. Virtual assistants always pay off for people. The sooner you can get back with somebody, the more likely that person will go with you.
Selling Your Content with a VA Many people have been trying to repackage their workshops, classes, paperwork packets, or some sort of online course or tool. Typically, that’s a lot of investment of time to get that going, but once it’s out there, you have it forever for marketing. So a virtual assistant can assist with social media and helping create teachable courses. They can also create blog posts for your website.
You might have an HR policy that’s out of date, or you have to review your paperwork, and it’s not really clear. A VA can help you do those types of things. It’s essential to have systems and processes in place to where things are more automated. A virtual assistant can help you bridge that gap. When we’re starting out in private practice, we’ve got a lot of time on our hands. Once you get busy and your practice starts getting full, that’s really the time to begin outsourcing and getting those things off your plate.
Keep Your Practice Running You do have to cut hours, don’t stop because you don’t want to stop completely. Maybe you can cut back a little bit, but keep doing your process, keep the routine, try to keep your current clients. Keep running those insurance reports and verifying benefits. Keep doing those things that have kept your business successful. Because if you have to start over again, there will be a month’s worth of work piled up. It will take hours to dig out from starting over again. It’s much harder to restart. So keep some of the momentum going.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
James & Lorinda’s Resources Move Forward Virtual Assistants Schedule with James Time Saved by Outsourcing Interview Questions Progressive Delegation Board Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
The Session Note Helper System If you want to be kept in the loop about things as they develop, >>click here<< and I’ll add you to list. Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet you can get here. Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Jeremy Zug from Practice Solutions joins the show to explain what’s going on with telehealth during these uncertain times. Jeremy advises on submitting telehealth claims and explains how telehealth is rapidly becoming our new normal. Then, Jeremy gives tips on collecting from patients. As a business, we need to make money. Your patients may be in financial distress, so Jeremy describes what to do in this situation. Stay tuned as Jeremy gives the pros and cons of accepting insurance as a private practice owner.
Meet Jeremy Zug Jeremy grew up in the Pacific Northwest where he discovered his passion for people. He decided to go to college in Chicago to further develop his skills working with people and pursue a degree in counseling. While in Chicago he worked for a group practice as a practice biller and marketing manager. This initiated his desire to pursue learning about the business of private practice, particularly medical billing. He now lives in Michigan with his wife of 3 years. They both are pursuing their passion for helping helpers maintain sustainable and compliant billing practices. In his free time, Jeremy loves reading, fishing, biking, hiking, and camping.
Telehealth Claims How can you determine whether your patient’s copay will be waived? There are some excellent resources, but the best way to do that right now is to call the insurance companies. You’re going to want to say is telemental health is covered on an outpatient basis for this patient. Then, give them the insurance information and the date of birth because that will lead the provider representative to tell you what they have. What we’re seeing as a trend is if the patient had telehealth benefits into their benefits before COVID-19, they are covered at one-hundred percent. If they didn’t have those benefits, the patients still have copays and deductibles applying through this time. It’s confusing for many people, but as providers, we can do the best job we can by being as clear as possible. We want to be as transparent as possible with that.
Telehealth is the New Normal Providers can do a good job as far as lobbying with their government officials on telehealth being the new normal. Telemedicine is effective, and you can reach more people. Jeremy knows that insurance companies often get a bad rep, but this has been an enormous agenda item for them for a long time. Send a letter to your governor, your senator, and congressmen to push for it. Telehealth can also make the lives of the private practice owner easier too. Telehealth will make it more convenient to choose your hours, and therapists can even be available for clients who are overseas.
Collecting From Patients People need to start collecting from patients – you are contractually obligated to receive it. If the person is out of work, you still have to collect the copay and deductible. As a business owner, you need to treat people the way you want to be treated. If a patient is short on cash, the provider should tell the patient they owe for the service. However, you can offer an extension on their debt.
Another thing you can do is set up a weekly payment plan. That way, the private practice owner knows that that patient will pay. Plus, the patient can budget it into their weekly expenses. We should not feel bad for getting paid for what we do. Think about all the time and effort that you went through to get licensed. People know when they go to a doctor’s office that they are going to owe something. So, when a patient goes to a therapist, they should expect to pay. Jeremy suggests reading the book Against Empathy.
Accepting Insurance It’s much easier logistically to not take insurance. However, there is a case to accept insurance. Clinically, you can work with populations that you are passionate about. If you work with military patients, that’s a huge client base, and they need it. If that’s your expertise, then do that. At the same time, you will sacrifice profitability. If you take insurance, then you will receive a hit on the money side. Do you want to work with those clinical populations? You will have to weigh that with the profitability side. There is something to be said about access to care and that growing market. Perhaps you can grow your practice faster when accepting insurance – plus, they can be easy to work with. There is a sense of speed and deployment with insurance, and that matters. However, you’ll have to manage paperwork and fuzzy bureaucracy.
Jeremy’s Resources Practice Solutions Practice Solutions on Facebook Practice Solutions on LinkedIn Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Against Empathy The Session Note Helper System Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet you can get here. Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Chris Swenson joins Gordon on the podcast to explain why we shouldn’t forget about our inner game in private practice. Our inner game is always happening, and it’s continuously turning – it shouldn’t be ignored. Chris describes how he found his passions, purpose, and principles by diving deep into mindset and the importance of mental clarity. Then, Chris tells us all about what it means to be a Private Practice Warrior and why a bigger practice isn’t necessarily better.
Meet Chris Swenson Chris Swenson, LMFT is the author of the recently published book, “Private Practice Warrior.” He is the Owner/Founder/solo-operator of Rhino Wellness Center which is Chris’ successful full-time solo practice in rural Colorado. Chris is a true Private Practice Warrior who is currently developing a program called, “Private Practice Warrior – A Powerful Mindset for Ambitious Practice Owners – The “Way” to True Fulfillment in Life and Business. To receive a free pdf copy of “Private Practice Warrior” and a special bonus, click https://rhinomentality.lpages.co/pp-warrior-ebook-pdf-giveaway/
The Inner Game The biggest thing for Chris is that he has learned to never forget about the inner game. It’s always going on. Early on in Chris’s private practice, he felt like he was like a slave to the practice. It didn’t feel like it was his. There was almost this illusion, and he had no sense of fulfillment. But once Chris stepped back identified his purpose, he found his passion and lives by his principles. Plus, he realized the big things he could do each and every day to move the dial, things began to fall more into place, and he began to feel a lot more fulfilled. Even though there are still struggles and challenges, we all have to fly through that turbulence to build a practice.
Finding Mental Clarity Chris probably took a different journey than most. He got ingrained within the warrior community and learned about mental toughness and mindset. Chris found his purpose, passion, and identified the principles which he operates by each and every day. Plus, he has daily practices to make sure that he is making the right decision instead of making decisions out of fear. Chris felt an internal struggle. However, once he began daily work and ingraining a new mentality, he feels great. Chris has a lot more confidence and is a lot calmer. Plus, Chris says he has more mental clarity for what he needs for decisions to be made.
Boosting Our Mindset People will say to build your practice, scale your practice, expand your stuff, do all of these things, and then you’re going to reach that promised land and feel that sense of fulfillment. Chris found that it’s an illusion. If you have a bigger practice, you might end up more stressed, more mentally fatigued, and more tired. So, Chris looked at what really makes a successful practice for the long haul. He looked at numbers of failure rates over the years, and he noticed that the failure rate has remained the same even though we’ve got better technology and we’ve got a lot more programs. What is the missing variable? It’s our inner game. We have to get ourselves to do XYZ every day, and how do we get ourselves to do that?
Get yourself, your mindset, mentality, purpose, passion, all these things in line. From there, you can accomplish great things. However, the point of it is not just to create this great business; this great practice, it’s about being a better person through doing all of it. Chris is just tired of seeing people struggle and have a hard time not getting that joy and fulfillment from what they’re doing. It’s not just building the practice. It’s becoming a better person through the challenges of building a better practice – which, of course, requires some mental skills, but also just a different mentality on how you look at your practice.
Private Practice Warriors Chris initially had the idea for Private Practice Warriors when he started seeing the struggles of private practice owners, he knew he needed to do something. Chris wanted to make a difference and what made a difference was being able to share stories with others. Chris thought about writing his book. He wrote it like a story. You get to follow the main character through their journey. There’s a lot of twists and some turns in the book as well. You begin to learn about the identity of being a warrior and identifying your purpose, your passion, never forgetting about the inner game, things like that. So you can take out a lot of those ideas as you learn from the story.
Bigger Isn’t Necessarily Better What’s most important to you? What is the lifestyle that you want to have? What’s going to bring you fulfillment? Being a warrior is about wanting to be a better person. It’s about the personal growth that develops. It’s not only about becoming that way for a better practice but as a better person. There are challenges to grow or to put stuff out into the external world, those difficulties can lift and we can overcome them. As we begin to expand who we are now, we become that better person. Bigger could be better if it fits for you. There’s so much potential that a lot of us have as therapists to make a difference. There are times where a lot of great therapists could get a better reach if they were in private practice.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Chris’ Resources Chris’ Website Get your free copy of Private Practice Warrior Courage To Be Bold Challenge Event
Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
If you want to be kept in the loop about new G-Suite courses and tools as they develop, >>click here<< and I’ll add you to list. Free Google G-Suite Hacks Sheet you can get here. Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Rob Reinhardt from Tame Your Practice joins Gordon to talk about the importance of having a contingency plan in private practice. First, Rob explains the difference between a contingency plan and a professional will. Plus, he reveals the first things you will need to do when thinking about your contingency plan, including considering who will be on your emergency response team. Rob highly recommends having another mental health professional on your team, rather than a family member. Later, Rob speaks about all the things you will need to inform your emergency response team about. If you need more assistance with your plan, get Rob’s book Private Practice Preparedness: The Health Care Professional’s Guide to Closing a Practice Due to Retirement, Death, or Disability (use code WF44M for 15% off the ebook).
Meet Rob Reinhardt Rob Reinhardt, LPCS, M.Ed., NCC has his own successful counseling practice and is CEO of Tame Your Practice. Known for his expertise in reviewing and recommending EHRs for therapists, Rob previously worked in Information Technology for over ten years and has lived around technology his entire life.
Contingency Plans for Private Practice Mental health professionals usually don’t have a contingency plan. If something happens to a private practice owner, what is the spouse going to do? The owner is in charge of helping all of these people get informed about the situation. Plus, there are all of the records to deal with. There’s all of this business to take care of. If there were no plans, an attorney would have to help them through it.
It’s not just what happens when you die; there could be lots of reasons that you need a contingency plan. For instance, you need a plan in case you decide to retire or in case you find some fantastic job opportunities that you can’t turn down. What if your family decides to move across state lines? That would change everything. You might have to take an extended leave of absence to care for an ill family member. There’s any number of reasons that draw you away from your practice and require you to have this plan in place.
Well, there are not many resources out there for private practice owners to create the plan. And that’s when Rob decided to sit down and write Private Practice Preparedness: The Health Care Professional’s Guide to Closing a Practice Due to Retirement, Death, or Disability with Nancy Wheeler. They talk about how to make the plan and provide some templates that you can fill in your information and have that plan.
Professional Wills Many people talk about a professional will in this context. The reason Rob doesn’t say professional will a lot, and instead, he talks about a contingency plan is because the professional will tends to be focused on if you die. Plus, it also tends to be focused on the business aspects of private practice. Some people do incorporate other things into the professional will, but not everything will be covered. For instance, what if somebody needs to get into your G Suite? What if somebody needs to get into your EHR? These are the kinds of details that often aren’t included in something like a professional will. So, make sure you’re covering all these things that someone would need to address if someone else has to care of business. There are so many things that you do that are connected to your practice that are in your head. However, you never really bothered to write down or explain it to anybody else.
Starting Your Contingency Plan Get Rob’s book, Private Practice Preparedness: The Health Care Professional’s Guide to Closing a Practice Due to Retirement, Death, or Disability, and go through it. Rob would step back and make a list of all these things that he does. Including all of the things that he doesn’t even really think about. They’re second nature to him. Think about what are all the things that you do, and if you weren’t there, who would do them? As you are making a list, think about doing these things, how are you doing them, and what are you doing them with?
In other words, what tools are you using? Are you using G suite a lot? Some people have electronic health records, and they have bank accounts for their business. So, make a list of what are all the tools that you use, and how do you access those tools? Then, it can get even more detailed. So one example is electronic health records. We’re talking about protected health information here. It may not just be enough that somebody has your login and password information. You may want to have them set up in that EHR as a confirmed user. And in fact, some of the electronic health record systems have that as part of their programs.
Rob advocates firmly using two-factor authentication. So that means you’re not just entering a username and password, but you’re often entering a code that you either receive via text or through an authentication app. It’s an extra layer of security to be sure that if someone gets your username and password, they can’t impersonate you and get into this sensitive data.
Plus, who is your emergency response team? That’s the terminology Rob uses in his book. How is your emergency response team going to get that authentication data? The key is that you identify these workflows, how do you access the information, what information do you use, and how do you make sure that your emergency response team knows all of this? When Rob says an emergency response team, that could be a team of one, it could be a team of 10. It depends on your practice and what your needs are and so forth. So a solo practitioner may only have a team of one or two people to back them up.
Emergency Response Team You want to identify your emergency response team, whether that’s an individual or a group of people, and you want to make sure you talk to them, and you set an agreement and give them everything they need to know. So, at a moment’s notice, they can jump in and take over. Many people do mutual agreements. They will be your backup, and you will be their backup. Get that established so that they know that they’re the backup; it should never be a surprise. Plus, they should know where to find the information if they need to jump in and take care of business.
Also, make sure they are a mental health professional. Some people want it to be their family members. Especially when you’re talking about a professional will, it may be fine and well, but it’s essential to consider having a knowledgeable mental health professional take care of business. They have the clinical knowledge; they have the experience of things like HIPAA and ethics that a family member is not likely to have. They’re going to step in and know what’s essential and how to take care of the records. That’s a crucial facet of deciding who’s going to be on your response team.
Another reason why it’s crucial to have a mental health clinician involved in this emergency response team because they may be providing some counseling as they help transition people to a new care provider. What does this emergency response team need to do? Apart from your day to day routine activities, how are they going to communicate this to clients? It’s essential to have already identified some clinicians that would be a good fit for the particular clients that you work with. Make sure those clinicians are aware that they are a part of your transition plan. Those clinicians need to know how to contact your clients, what to tell them, and the list of providers to make them aware of.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Rob’s Resources Private Practice Preparedness: The Health Care Professional’s Guide to Closing a Practice Due to Retirement, Death, or Disability (use code WF44M for 15% off the ebook) Creating Income From Products in Private Practice Electronic Health Records in Private Practice “Tame Your Practice” Therapy Tech with Rob & Roy Describe Cards Other Resources TherapyNotes.com LastPass Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Annie Schuessler joins the show and talks about serving others outside of the therapy room. Annie explains what type of people are most likely to start a business outside of therapy, including the person who is on the verge of burnout or the person who is looking to be more creative. There are many ways we can serve others outside of therapy, including coaching, courses, and groups. Stay tuned as Annie dives deep into how we can best be successful when getting outside of the therapy room.
Meet Annie Schuessler Annie Schuessler is a business coach and the host of the podcast Rebel Therapist® Podcast. She’s been a therapist in private practice for 20 years, and a business coach for over 10 years. With her Rebel Therapist® Programs, she helps therapist entrepreneurs make an impact beyond the therapy room. You can find her resources at rebeltherapist.me.
Why We Go Outside of the Therapy Room Annie has noticed a couple of different kinds of types of folks who are drawn to creating a business outside of the therapy room. Someone who is headed to burnout will find other ways to generate income. Most likely, this person is hitting the ceiling in terms of the number of hours they can work. They have built a successful private practice. However, they want to use their time differently, and they want to be able to leverage their time, learning, and experience into something else.
The other kind of person may not even have a full practice yet, and they may just be growing their private practice. However, they already see that there’s another part of themselves that they want to bring out into the world. Or there’s another message they want to bring out into the world. Plus, creativity is a massive value for them. So, from the very beginning, they want to create some programs beyond the therapy room so that they can express their full selves and work with people in these different ways.
How To Get Out of the Therapy Room It works when a therapist can create some program that they can get started with quickly. We tend to have these big dreams and these visions of what it could look like, what our empires could look like. People have amazing ideas; the first step is creating something that is done more quickly so that before you have grown an enormous audience, you can start testing a pilot program. When people can start promptly and check something early in the process, Annie sees them getting early wins and being able to move forward as opposed to folks who have this tremendous vision and maybe don’t ever figure out how to accomplish it.
Starting a Coaching Program Annie says that people are starting with perhaps either a small group coaching program or even a one on one coaching program. Make sure you are creating a separate website. This is going to be an independent business, so that you’re not taking any chances with your private practice. Start with one program. It could be one on one coaching where you’re walking through people through a process, within a very particular niche and a specific outcome. Or it could be a small group coaching program where you’ve got three people who you’re walking through a process that brings about a profound change in one particular area.
Creating a Course Annie sees people growing their businesses into membership communities. It is a beautiful way to bring people together who share a particular problem and who share a specific identity. Plus, it’s a way to add value! Also, Annie sees people creating courses. That can be such a rewarding way to bring together a lot of the stuff that you’ve learned and that you love. However, some people believe that they can create a course, never touch it again, and make a load of money. Annie doesn’t see that working except for when it’s Oprah. Annie advises people to at least start with a lot of interaction where you’re just adding tons of value by actually being with the people who you’re serving and then pulling back from there.
Being Transparent… Some of the resources listed below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you make purchase using the link, we receive a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Annie’s Resources rebeltherapist.me Listen to The Rebel Therapist Podcast Check out the free training & resources Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Join the G-Suite for Therapists Users Group The Practice of Therapy Teachable Courses (use code SPRING2020) Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
John Clarke joins the show; he helps private practice owners build a practice that they love. In this episode, John gives tips on how to do private practice made human. First, start with your “why”. Why are you considering private practice, or why did you get into private practice in the first place? Later, John gives more tips on establishing your endpoint, creating company values, and knowing your ideal income.
Meet John Clarke John Clarke is a licensed psychotherapist and a private practice expert at PrivatePracticeWorkshop. After learning a lot of things the hard way while building his first practice in San Francisco, he started a blog to share with others the lessons he had learned. Private Practice Workshop was born, and this blog eventually evolved into so much more: a thriving Facebook community, a successful podcast, online courses, and coaching/consulting. Some therapists want to learn how to use digital marketing to grow their audience and get more clients, but the majority just want to leave it to the pros. John founded Unconditional Media, the digital marketing team for therapists, to meet the biggest need of private practitioners: getting more clients! When he’s not nerding out over all things private practice, he’s playing jazz drums, practicing Muay Thai martial arts, and talking to his pets like they’re humans.
Having Fuel in the Tank Start with your why. You are crafting your purpose statement. Why do any of this in the first place? Why does this matter? Knowing your why will be your fuel source. So especially on days where it’s tough to get out of bed in the morning like in a crisis, you need enough fuel in the tank to make this worth it. There are more risks associated with being a business owner than being an employee. There are more risks; there’s more stress. You are going to take work home more often; you’re liable to different things that you’re not as responsible for if you’re the employee of a company. So for John, it has to be worth that. The bumps in the road have to be worth it.
Why Private Practice? Many therapists feel like they were born to do this. They were born to help people. Take that one step further and write down why private practice? If your purpose in life is to help people, then why private practice? It’s not the most effective place for you to help people. Do you have other ideas behind your purpose? Whether it’s owning your schedule or increasing income. Try to get honest with yourself.
Establish Your Endpoint The endpoint is a mission statement. You should think big! You should think of the ripple effects of your work. Your mission statement is this high-level impact that your business could have on the world. Start to sketch out how are you going to get there? If you don’t know where you’re going, than any place will do—reverse engineer your big tasks. So if you want to get 50 fully booked students in this launch, you can start to work backward and go, then what do you need to do in these next one to three months to build your email list for that? What do you need to do this week to create more lead magnets to make your email list? So it helps if you trace back what actions you are taking today and what they should lead to.
Establish Company Values Establishing your company values will help you make decisions. Even if you’re a solo practitioner, John highly recommends doing this. Create the kind of practice that you want to have for yourself. Put some thought into that and get out a piece of paper to write stuff down. When we write, we get clarity and can see the big picture.
Set Your Ideal Income and Ideal Schedule Get in there, create that income target and make it sure it’s based on something. What are you going to need to get that money, and how are you going to use it? Then, you can reverse engineer that around your schedule. If you want to make a certain amount, how many hours will you have to work to get there? What kind of schedule do you need? Start sketching out your days, weeks, months, and years and make sure when you look at your calendar that it seems right to you. It looks good. It looks like, yes, this is worth it.
John’s Resources
Private Practice Workshop Listen to John’s Podcast PODCAST| Grace and Gratitude with Gordon Brewer of the Practice of Therapy John’s Free Online Training Apply For 1-1 Consulting Other Resources TherapyNotes.com Financial Tips for Surviving The COVID-19 Crisis The Practice of Therapy Teachable Courses (use code SPRING2020) Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Jane Carter joins the show. We speak about why your mindset in private practice will change everything, especially during COVID-19. Jane’s motto is imperfect action. Instead of experiencing constant panic, we can use this moment to relax and reframe. Jane explains the various ways we can use our time during the coronavirus and why we need to focus on the things that we can control.
Meet Jane Carter Jane Carter, LPC is a counselor and business coach from Asheville, NC. Jane has spent the last several years in private practice as a counselor and has recently begun focusing more on business coaching, not only for therapists but other businesses as well. Her website is: JaneCarterCoaching.com
Jane says, “As a therapist, business coach, and life coach, I love helping people navigate the path to achieving their goals for a meaningful life. I apply these principles in my own life in the mountains of Asheville, NC, where I’m an outdoorswoman, world-traveler, dog-mama, food-and-wine lover, reader, and coffee-shop connoisseur. (I’m also known for making up great puns on the fly).”
The Mindset in Private Practice We’ve all got crap. Our job is to help people turn it into fertilizer, which is the work of what all therapists are doing. The way you grow your business can be very healing of some of that deeper stuff without you even realizing it. It just feeds Jane’s soul to do this work. It’s fun to be with people on this journey.
Imperfect Action Jane’s motto is imperfect action. Right now, we’re recording this podcast during the current virus crisis where we’re in lockdown; we are at home. I think a lot of people experienced this kind of sudden panic. Jane put together a mindset checklist of short-term strategies and long-term strategies. A lot of people are feeling overwhelmed at this moment. So Jane hopes that people mostly focus on their mindset right now. To be in business is just to be dealing with the problems that come up regularly. We should relax, reframe, and use this moment.
Have a Moment Anxiety and fear make us want to contract and get small and hide under the covers. It’s hard to see beyond what we are going to do today, what are we going to do tomorrow? Sometimes we can get into that very reactive place. There are three things we need to do:
- Look at the big picture.
- Be intentional.
- See the expansion at this time.
Fear and anxiety want us to contract, and this time may seek to expand us, some amazing things could come out of this time. How can we see an expansion at this moment?
Private Practice as a Tool For Spiritual Growth We need to look at the big picture. The big picture is this will pass. Every challenge throughout history has given. The coronavirus will pass, we are going to get through this. Keeping that long view helps us to look at it kind of from a distance and go, okay, so what is our sense of purpose? When we look back at this moment in a couple of years, how do we want to say that we handled it? That’s a spiritual thing. Do we want to make decisions from a place of love or a place of fear?
When we’re looking at the small picture and fear, it’s easy to get into those thoughts of, well, how are we going to get the money? When we look at the big picture, it gives us space to think about how we are serving people. We are here to fulfill our most profound purpose. So, when we go through a crisis, it’s an excellent opportunity to think about your “why.” It’s a gift to recommit and realign with why we are doing this.
Figure Out What You Can Control We need to figure out the things that we can control. And then, the flip side is learning to just be with those feelings, to learn to be with the lack of control, to learn to be present with our grief and our fear, and just kind of allow it and wear it like a backpack. Jane wants to encourage people to be intentional at this time. We need to figure out how we want to use this time and who we want to be at this time? Look at the checklist and start checking things off. We can also be intentional about our goal for this time. What if it’s possible that this is the greatest thing for our private practice? Thinking about that question then allows you to start seeing that.
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you use the link to make a purchase, I get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jane’s Resources Email Jane For Her Free Checklist: jane@janecartercoaching.com JaneCarterConsulting.com Money Mindset in Private Practice | TPOT 005 Finding Your Superpowers in Private Practice | TPOT 038 Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Teachable.com Man’s Search For Meaning Financial Tips for Surviving The COVID-19 Crisis The Practice of Therapy Teachable Courses (use code SPRING2020) Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Derek Collins, MEd, CADC explains how he started his drug & alcohol counseling private practice and how he navigated imposture syndrome. Also, Derek describes how he reaches the maximum amount of people using Google rankings and SEO. Stay tuned as Derek dives deep into his marketing strategy and why it’s necessary to have multiple streams of income.
Meet Derek Collins Derek Collins is the founder and CEO of the Diversion Center where he provides court-mandated classes and counseling services to offenders who are trying to get their lives back on track. He owns and operates 5 outpatient treatment facilities surrounding the Atlanta Metro area and provides court-mandated classes that include: anger management, shoplifting and theft prevention, values clarification, ASAM Level I, family violence intervention program and more. Currently, he is transitioning into the consulting field, helping others around the country start their own court-mandated practice. You can find out more information about Derek Collins and the Diversion Center at www.thediversioncenter.com.
How Derek Started His Practice Derek had to step out of faith. He started just teaching classes at first, and then he proceeded to add on anger management. Then, he moved to get registered with the state of Georgia for their DUI intervention program. Derek kept on adding services and taking his time. He started his practice with a laptop, a broken down printer, and co-op coworking space. Derek’s space was only $99 a month, and he ran classes. Eventually, he had so many clients in there, so he had to get a second and third office.
Private Practice Competition Georgia is highly competitive, and a lot of people want to do it out there. There are roadblocks and hoops you have to jump through. They make it hard for you to get into this industry in Georgia. However, if you jump through all those hoops, you should do what you need to do to be profitable. But at the same time, what a lot of therapists struggle with is marketing. It’s not something that’s taught in the schools and graduate schools, how to market your services. If your clients cannot find you on their phone, then you can forget about it.
Marketing Strategy Derek’s marketing strategy is to get number one on Google. You have to be number one or at the very least on the first page. So when someone types up alcohol and drug evaluation, his name pops up first. Derek has multiple websites. On the first page of Google, you will see three different websites that Derek has. So no matter what, you have to come to him. Derek tries to dominate the market. Derek’s main website is a WordPress site because it’s a more substantial website for SEO. You will also want to have a Google business page and several of those that can help. Derek says that about 90% of his business is through his website SEO, and the other part is just word of mouth.
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you use the link to make a purchase, I get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Derek’s Resources Derek’s Website Derek’s LinkedIn Diversion Center on Facebook The Ultimate ‘On-Demand’ Court Mandated Training Program CALL: 404-781-7468 info@thediversioncenter.com Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Teachable.com
Financial Tips for Surviving The COVID-19 Crisis The Practice of Therapy Teachable Courses (use code SPRING2020) Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Julie Herres from GreenOak Accounting joins the podcast again to speak about financial tips for surviving the COVID-19 crisis. We are going to be talking about thoughts that we’re having about this whole crisis and what’s going on for people financially. We speak about how we can get through the next couple of weeks and next few months if you don’t have a considerable amount saved for a sudden downturn like this. We discuss how to budget for a crisis, creative ways to pay for expenses, and calling big-name companies and asking for assistance. Later, we speak about paying your team, applying for loans, and diversifying your income streams. Stay tuned as we take questions from Zoom!
Meet Julie Herres Julie Herres is the owner of GreenOak Accounting. The firm provides bookkeeping, accounting, CFO and tax services to mental health private practice owners throughout the United States. When Julie founded GreenOak Accounting she started working with a few therapists. Over time, more and more therapist referrals came in and she started noticing trends across the practices that were thriving. Based on those trends she developed success ratios as a way to quickly determine the health of a practice.
Today, GreenOak Accounting’s focus on mental health private practice is intentional and geared towards helping business owners understand the story that their numbers are telling. Julie understands what’s involved in managing and growing your practice and is uniquely positioned to be a trusted advisor to clients.
How to Budget for a Crisis What does it look like if you don’t have a big buffer, can you make it through? Make decisions based on data and not from fear. So it’s always a great idea to know where you stand, right? Run the numbers and see how much is coming in. Also, know what it takes for you to keep your doors open.
What’s the minimum number of dollars that you need to bring in to pay for the rent and to pay for the minimal software expenses that you have? How much does it cost for your payroll and how many clients do you need to cover that? You’ll find it’s not as much as you think it is. So you may not be paying yourself as much as usual, and there may not be a lot left over. Figure out where you are. You want to make sure that you have enough money in your personal life to pay for your food, shelter, and necessary expenses.
Paying Your Expenses Call your mortgage company, call your landlord, call your credit card company and ask them what they can do to help. There are a lot of different programs and it really depends on the company and the state. Some utility companies are not disconnecting anyone for lack of payment. Many companies are suspending all the payment fees. So if you reach out, you might be able to get a break. Always be proactive versus reactive.
You can also reach out to your credit card company. Ask if they will waive your payment and not apply any fees. You can also reach out to your bank and say that you are going through a time of financial distress. A lot of banks are being very amicable because they know what a difficult time it is for someone. Start with the big companies that are going to be understanding.
Cutting Subscriptions Look at how you can really streamline things. A lot of times we have subscriptions we pay for, that we don’t need. Suspend the subscription for the months that we are in financial distress. Most people are going to be open to that; they realize money is tight for people. For instance, if you have been thinking about cutting cable, now would be a good time to suspend those payments. Now is the time, especially if we’re having more downtime, is to look at your numbers and understand what it takes to stay open and what it takes to pay your people.
It’s a good time also to pull out your credit card bill and go down the list. What are the things that you’re using, and what are you not using? It’s an excellent opportunity to do that. If you are thinking about cutting your VA, be really careful. Your VA is a really small business, they’re struggling too. If you really can’t afford it, then you have to. But if there’s a way for you to reduce maybe even your hours versus cutting them altogether, it’s an excellent way to keep things moving along.
Using Your Time Productively If you have a client that cancels on you, then there is an excellent opportunity to use that hour very productively. You can build on your email list, start making videos for Instagram, and reach out to clients who you haven’t seen in a while. Lots of people are switching to telemental health space. If you haven’t already done so, now is the time. Most insurance companies have dropped their restrictions on having online sessions. Check with your state and your insurance company to make sure they are embracing this change.
Paying Your Team Profit first and Money Matters in Private Practice are both essential resources for running your practice. In the middle of a crisis, it’s not time to implement profit first. But once the dust settles, you should definitely be following profit first. Ask if anyone on the team takes fewer hours. Maybe they have a spouse that is still getting paid full salary, so they’re able to defer their salary for a little while. You can also defer that tax payment later so you can catch things up.
Another thing you can do is to adjust your salary for a later date. There might be tax credits for people keeping on their employees. There might also be your credits for self-employed folks as well. So your relief is on the way.
Applying For Loans You can apply for a small business loan. The government has approved up to 7 billion in SBA loans. Most businesses are getting a minimum of 25,000 at very favorable rates – it’s just under 4%. Plus, there are no payments for at least four months. That is an option for small businesses. You are going to need personal financial statements. Make sure you know what liabilities you personally have. Plus, you will need to understand what cash and what assets you have. Get your applications in quickly and accurately. It’s challenging to get ahold of customer service agents.
Diversify Your Income Streams Now is the time to diversify your income streams. Have you been wanting to start an e-course or make a downloadable? This is a great time to put pen to paper and start working on that. Even though you won’t make money right away, it will be great to have for another time. There are a lot of different ways for you to create digital products for people. Adding people to your practice is another way to diversify your income. Affiliate marketing is also a way to make money, suggesting books or products to your clients. You can set up an Amazon Affiliate account. You will get a commission, not a lot of money but some.
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you use the link to make a purchase, I get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Julie’s Resources GreenOakAccounting.com Call GreenOak Accounting: (571) 208-2065 Julie’s LinkedIn Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Special Episode: COVID-19 The Practice of Therapy Teachable Courses (use code SPRING2020) Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Free Webinar: Contractors vs. Employees? How To Hire and Add People To Your Practice G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Gordon and a panel of private practice leaders and consultants discuss what we can do to navigate the uncertainties of the current COVID-19 crisis as private practice owners and clinicians. They discuss switching to online therapy and counseling. They also talk about the economic impact of people canceling sessions and the unknowns this places on practices. Plus, we learn creative ways to serve our clients like doing mini sessions, teaching meditation, and relationship-building. Also, start thinking about ways you can diversify your income and how to plan for future emergencies.
Meet Alison Pidgeon Alison Pidgeon, MA, LPC, is a licensed professional counselor and the owner of Move Forward Counseling in Lancaster, PA. Her private practice, which focuses on women’s issues, currently consists of six other therapists and two assistants. Alison has recently purchased an office building to house her private practice and will be expanding to a total of 12 therapists in the fall of 2018.
In addition, for the past two years, Alison has been working as a business consultant along with Joe Sanok, from Practice of the Practice, for other private practice owners. She loves being an entrepreneur and helping others achieve their dream of being their own boss. Alison’s specialty as a consultant is how to have an insurance-based practice, helping those who are just starting out and how to grow from a solo to a group practice.
Meet Amanda Patterson Amanda Patterson is a private practice consultant who helps therapists create business and marketing plans. She’s the owner of a group practice, Caring Therapists of Broward in South Florida. She’s the founder of My Private Practice Tribe, an online community for therapists in private practice. Find out more about Amanda here: www.amandapattersonlmhc.com
Meet David Hall Dr. Stephen “David” Hall heads up content and creative direction as the “Chief Maven” of PsychMaven. He began his work as a psychotherapist in 2005, and he currently holds clinical licenses in Family Therapy and Mental Health Counseling. He has built up multiple counseling practices in his years as a clinician, first in Georgia and then in his home state of Tennessee. In 2015, he led the start-up of an independent psychiatry clinic, Haven Family Psychiatry, in Knoxville, TN. Dr. Hall maintains a psychotherapy caseload and supervises postgraduate therapists in the practice he leads in the clinic, Haven Counseling Center at Haven Family Psychiatry.
Meet Jane Carter Jane Carter, LPC is a counselor and business coach from Asheville, NC. Jane has spent the last several years in private practice as a counselor and has recently begun focusing more on business coaching, not only for therapists but other businesses as well. Her website is: JaneCarterCoaching.com
Jane says, “As a therapist, business coach, and life coach, I love helping people navigate the path to achieving their goals for a meaningful life. I apply these principles in my own life in the mountains of Asheville, NC, where I’m an outdoorswoman, world-traveler, dog-mama, food-and-wine lover, reader, and coffee-shop connoisseur.
Meet Jessica Tappana Jessica Tappana started her private practice on her maternity leave about 20 months ago. After filling up in only a matter of months, she decided to bring on other therapists as 1099s and transitioned Aspire Counseling into a group practice. Worried about how she would fill the caseloads of these new therapists, Jessica tried several different marketing strategies. Ultimately, she decided to focus on getting her website to the first page of Google and began teaching herself SEO at nights after her kids were in bed. Slowly after gathering a couple of tips here and there, she got her website to the first page for nearly every keyword she targets. Aspire Counseling has grown to now include five therapists and a virtual assistant! In fact, all of the therapists are nearly full, and Jessica hopes to find a few more quality team members in the months to come.
Meet Joe Sanok Joe Sanok, MA, LLP, LPC, NCC is the person behind the #1podcast for therapists, The Practice of the Practice. Joe has helped hundreds of private practice owners in growing and scaling their private practices. Joe has also been a mentor and coach for Gordon in his journey and inspired him to start The Practice of Therapy.
Joe says, “In 2012 I launched Practice of the Practice to blog about what I was learning about business, marketing, and private practice. Since then, my income has gone up over 2,000%. In the beginning, I was making around $1000 per month. In 2015, I grossed over $200k! In fact, every month I post exactly what I made and how I made it. It’s important to me, because we don’t usually talk about money and how to make it in an ethical way. I want to increase your influence and your income!”
Meet John Clarke John Clarke is a licensed psychotherapist and a private practice expert at PrivatePracticeWorkshop. After learning a lot of things the hard way while building his first practice in San Francisco, he started a blog to share with others the lessons he had learned. Private Practice Workshop was born, and this blog eventually evolved into so much more: a thriving Facebook community, a successful podcast, online courses, and coaching/consulting. Some therapists want to learn how to use digital marketing to grow their audience and get more clients, but the majority just want to leave it to the pros. John founded Unconditional Media, the digital marketing team for therapists, to meet the biggest need of private practitioners: getting more clients!
Meet Kasey Compton Kasey built a million-dollar practice with over seventy-five staff members in less than two years from the ground up. She is the President/CEO of Mindsight Behavioral Group with multiple offices located in Kentucky. Kasey says, “it definitely wasn’t easy but I learned a lot scaling a practice”. She is now in year three and her business with basically running itself; largely due to the systems and processes we put into place.
Now, Kasey is a behavioral group consultant (www.consultwithkc.com) and author that helps practices avoid mistakes by cleaning up their systems, implementing better processes, and understanding what to do with their money. Kasey says, “ I take so much pride in my own practice and now I feel honored to help others grow too.”
Meet Katie Englert Katie Englert, LPCC, NCC, BC-TMH is an experienced entrepreneur who works with therapists to help them pioneer new ways to practice. She believes that helping therapists find their purpose as a therapist is how the mental health field will prosper. Katie has started and grown six-figure group private practices and co-created Practikat, the first online marketplace exclusive for therapists. She loves helping therapists discover products they have already created! Outside of work, she enjoys spending time on the soccer field with her kids, travel, hanging out with her family and learning about her family history.
About Katie Lemieux I attended graduate school at Nova Southeastern University and graduated with my Master’s degree in Marriage and Family Therapy with a specialization in Medical Family Therapy in 2004.
I fell in love with couple’s work which is my main specialty. I am trained in the Gottman Method of Couples Therapy and Emotionally Focused Therapy.
I am the proud Co-Owner of The Private Practice Startup. My business partner is the amazing Dr. Kate Campbell. We inspire ambitious mental health professionals to brand themselves and grow their dream private practice.
Meet Marissa Lawton “I’m passionate about bringing my two loves together: strategy and therapy, to help my therapeutic community thrive in the online space. It is seriously one of the most important aspects of my life to help other therapists create on-brand messages that target their ideal clients and build the private practices they’ve always longed for.”
Marissa’s mission is to help clinicians in various stages of private practice to create online marketing plans that attract clients with integrity and authenticity. Marissa says, “there is seriously no point in portraying yourself online in a way that contradicts who you are in session, no matter how many calls it brings you. When you invite me to help you with your online marketing, you’re partnering with someone who takes your practice, your goals, and your dreams into consideration. You’re getting a guide who promises to walk alongside you every step of the way.”
Meet Whitney Owens I enjoy working with both adults and adolescents on an individual basis. I have experience working with those suffering from depression, anxiety, self-harming behaviors, identity formation, relational issues, and other mood disorders. I use a variety of therapeutic models such as Cognitive Behavioral Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, and Interpersonal Therapy. I have been seeing clients since 2009 in a variety of settings. While earning my Master in Professional Counseling from Richmont Graduate University, I saw young adults at a residential treatment facility. In 2010 I moved to Colorado where I spent four years working at an inpatient and day treatment facility. Also while in Colorado, I joined a group practice and saw teenagers and adults.
In 2014 I moved back to Savannah and started Water’s Edge Counseling. I am a Licensed Professional Counselor in Georgia and a member of the American Counseling Association and the Licensed Professional Counseling Association of Georgia. In addition to counseling, I also offer a number of other services including training and speaking engagements.
Making the Switch to Telemental Health * It’s time to be creative and flexible. * Put a pop-up on the website stating that you are offering telemental health services. * Do not put your client’s health at risk – do not see clients in person. Now is the time to get ahead of everything and start seeing clients virtually. * Remember HIPAA.
Creative Ways to Serve Clients * Discount your fees. * Do mini sessions. * Charge a small fee for a mindfulness meet-up. * Teach meditation techniques. * Work on relationship-building during this time. * Write blog posts to provide useful information for your community.
Emergency Planning * Practice both short-term and long-term thinking. Make sure you keep your long-term vision in mind. * Have a three to six-month fund ready for emergencies like this. * This is either an opportunity or a challenge. * Take lessons during this recovery. * Be realistic with your staff. * Make sure all your staff is working toward the same thing. * Call your liability insurance. * Email your boards to get clarification on things. * Therapists need to think about what really matters: your health, your clinician’s health, your client’s health, and your business.
What To Do Now * Use this time to position your brand, grow your email list, create multiple streams of revenue. * Deepen your relationships. * Bring joy to your life every single day and to other people. * Work on the products that you are developing. * Look long-term and start preparing for the future. * Think about offering a discounted rate. * Self-care!
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you use the link to make a purchase, I get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Alison’s Resources alison@practiceofthepractice.com Grow a Group Practice Podcast Amanda’s Resources My Private Practice Tribe Website David’s Resources The Narrative Institute PsychMaven Jane’s Resources JaneCarterCoaching.com “Money Mindset in Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 005” Jessica’s Resources Aspire Counseling MO Simplified SEO Consulting Joe’s Resources Practice of the Practice Killin’It Camp John’s Resources Private Practice Workshop John’s Free Email Marketing Course Kasey’s Resources **hello@consultwithkc.com** **Consult with KC** Katie E’s Resources **Practikat** Katie L’s Resources Private Practice Startup Marissa’s Resources Marissa’s Website The Empathy Rising Podcast Side Hustle Support Group Whitney’s Resources Waters Edge Counseling Whitney Owens | Starting Fresh & Growing Fast in Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 036 Faith in Practice Consulting with Whitney @Practice of the Practice Other Resources **TherapyNotes.com** Apply for the Focus Group G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. **PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play.** Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
LaTonya Shelton joins the show to discuss the highs and lows of her first year in private practice. It’s possible to do things your own way. LaTonya speaks about her self-care techniques and what has helped her get through the lows of running your own business. Plus, LaTonya explains the ways to ease the pain points of private practice and how mastermind groups can play a crucial role.
Meet LaTonya Shelton LaTonya N. Shelton, LCSW, RYT, the owner of Red Jasper Counseling, PLLC, located in Nashville, TN. Her practice specializes in providing treatment for trauma, anxiety, and depression. She is a licensed clinical social worker and yoga instructor who integrates somatic (body-centered) psychotherapy practices and mindfulness in her work with clients. LaTonya embodies a deep passion for helping individuals learn, heal and grow. She believes that by helping others understand and navigate difficult emotions, clients can experience relief, improved health, and regain control of their lives. Doing Things Your Own Way LaTonya is a self-starter. It is so easy to get overwhelmed and inundated with all of the information that’s out there. There are a lot of opportunities for mastermind groups and business coaching. With all the information, it’s so easy to get overwhelmed. You need to start somewhere. Plus, you’re not going to get it right and perfect in the beginning. However, that’s the beauty of starting and moving forward on a journey. Make it your own!
Self-Care For Private Practice Owners Self-care is such a buzzword these days. Some of the self-care that LaTonya engages in is very simple. She enjoys a cup of coffee most mornings with her dog walking in the park, and that works well for LaTonya. Do the things that get you out in nature. Reading, talking, and being around people that support you will also be essential. These things have been the crux of LaTonya’s self-care.
Take the Leap of Faith Throw your limiting beliefs out the window. Show up and do the work that you want to do. LaTonya is a dreamer, but also a planner. Being organized, balanced, and flexible will assist in your private practice journey. Are you wondering if you should take the leap into private practice? It’s going to be scary, and there’s going to be peaks and valleys, but start, and you’ll find your way. You’ll meet great people like Gordon. Plus, LaTonya met people in a mastermind and focus groups.
Pain Points in Private Practice The most significant pain point for LaTonya is not knowing. A lot is riding on your business, so it can be scary, not knowing how it’s going to turn out. The journey is unpredictable, and that cannot be very easy. Also, learning how to market has been a journey for LaTonya. We all want to scale and grow our practices. So that’s been a pain point, not knowing and then deciding what marketing avenues to go down. Imposture syndrome is also a pain point. Sometimes you’ll ask yourself if you really know what you’re doing or if you know what you’re talking about. Take a step back and breathe deeply. You can ease some of the anxiety of jumping into private practice by keeping your full-time job until you have enough finances saved up to feel comfortable.
Mastermind Groups It’s great to know other people are going through the same struggles. Plus, you’ll see how well other private practice owners are doing, and yet they still have questions and need help. There is always room to grow. It’s inspiring to see other people who are willing to learn continuously. Once you hit a peak, there is still an opportunity to find another peak. Having the support and the opportunity to problem solve is invaluable.
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you use the link to make a purchase, I get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
LaTonya’s Resources LaTonya’s Website Email: info@redjaspercounseling.com Phone: (615) 606-2964 Facebook Instagram Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Free Webinar: Contractors vs. Employees? How To Hire and Add People To Your Practice Apply for the Focus Group The Faith in Practice Podcast G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Alyssa Adams opens the show talking about adding coaching to her private practice. Therapists have a rich skillset, and we can utilize our knowledge in various ways. Alyssa dives deep into how she navigates the stigma of becoming a coach and what the difference between coaching and therapy are. Plus, Gordon and Alyssa talk about the reasons why you would even want to diversify your private practice.
Meet Alyssa Adams Dr. Alyssa Adams is a clinical psychologist and certified coach who helps therapists and coaches to grow their practices and make even more money working for themselves so they can focus on serving clients they love. She specializes in helping therapists navigate the field of coaching by leveraging their incredible skills and ethically adding this service to their practice.
She has been featured in media outlets, such as Brit + Co, Popsugar, Bustle, and has authored numerous scientific publications. She created a successful coaching practice and subsequently left her leadership position with the federal government, and she is passionate about supporting other therapists and coaches to find autonomy and financial freedom working for themselves.
Adding Coaching to Your Private Practice Why coaching? As therapists, we have a rich skillset around creating transformation in people. We can support people differently than in a therapeutic relationship. Alyssa went back and got more training to learn how to coach. There are ways to help and support people as a coach vs. as a therapist. You can use your skillset differently. Therapists may feel a stigma when they become a coach.
Navigating the Stigma of Becoming a Coach Coaching is a less regulated field. People can be a coach who may not have a lot of training or background. There are room and space for coaches to be well trained. Learn the areas of overlap between coaching and therapy. Always be open and curious about what you can bring to your coaching practice. However, always remember to keep the integrity of your therapy practice.
How is Coaching Different From Therapy? Alyssa will have her diagnosis hat on when working as a therapist; she will be thinking of mental health concerns. Coaches will not be thinking of a diagnosis or mental health. A coach will be thinking about moving toward a specific goal. The topics on the lists are usually different from therapy to coaching. Alyssa’s niche areas are pretty different, so it feels clean and clear in her head. The way she communicates will be changed, and her clients will be different. Coaching is helping people work on a specific problem, whereas therapy is assisting clients in working on a particular condition.
Diversify Your Private Practice How do we think about building a business? Diversify your business to help increase your profit. Step into the entrepreneurial mindset and look at what will help you have more freedom and financial stability. Give yourself permission to think about private practice as a business. For the most part, people who can give themselves this permission, they will find their work more fulfilling and more rewarding.
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you use the link to make a purchase, I get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Alyssa’s Resources Alyssa’s Website Facebook Instagram Email: Alyssa@DrAlyssaAdams.com Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Free Webinar: Contractors vs. Employees? How To Hire and Add People To Your Practice Apply for the Focus Group G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Cool Resources Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, YouTube sensation Kati Morton joins the show. Kati talks about thinking outside the box when it comes to creating content and diversifying your income in private practice. YouTube can be a lucrative side hustle for your private practice – Kati tells us the common ways to monetize your videos. Plus, Kati speaks about how she navigates imposture syndrome and some helpful tools to stay organized.
Meet Kati Morton, LMFT Kati Morton, LMFT holds a Master’s in Clinical Psychology from Pepperdine University and is a licensed marriage and family therapist. In addition, she is a certified dialectical and behavior therapist and grief counselor and a member of The California Association of Marriage and Family Therapists. She runs a private practice in Santa Monica, CA.
Over the past seven years, Kati has leveraged social media to share mental health information worldwide through video. Her specialties include working with individuals experiencing eating disorders and self-harming behaviors, although she addresses all things related to mental health.
Kati is well known for her YouTube channel which now has over 820 thousand subscribers and over 50 million views. In addition to her YouTube channel and strong presence on social media, she has appeared on the CBS The Doctors, HLN/CNN “Dr. Drew On Call,” E! News, KTLA, Fox News. She also has been featured in CNN, VICE, Glamour UK, Huffington Post, Yahoo, VOX, and many more. Kati released her first book, Are u ok?: A Guide to Caring for Your Mental Health in December 2018.
Kati’s passion is to increase awareness about mental health. Her online community has expanded to all major internet platforms, allowing her to answer mental health questions from her followers around the world. She hopes by doing this, the global community can push for better services worldwide and remove the stigma associated with getting help.
Thinking Outside the Box Kati’s husband pushed her to take the leap into social media. Kati’s colleagues have been supportive; however, they don’t always understand it. Eight years ago, her peers didn’t realize how confidentiality would work over social media. Other clinicians give her pushback on the way she thinks about things. The most significant pushback Kati got was when she said therapy should be working toward a goal. Kati says we should be learning new tools that we can utilize in life. We shouldn’t be using our therapist as a crutch.
Overcoming Imposture Syndrome Kati feels imposture syndrome to do this day. In the beginning, people would tell her she was an expert, and she was creative. Kati never thought of herself as either of those things. At a conference, Kati learned that everyone creates, which makes us creative. It has been something that she is trying to believe more. Kati is an expert at certain things; it’s okay to accept it! In society, we look down on people who are too confident because they come off as egotistical. Kati never claims to be an expert on everything. She does her research and talks to experts to give her viewers the best information she can.
Making Money on YouTube The easiest way to make money online is through YouTube AdSense. YouTube deems mental health content as sensitive – so they are not all monetizable. Only about half of Kati’s videos are monetizable. People can make thousands of dollars a month from AdSense. Kati doesn’t get viral hits on her channel, so it’s not a sustainable source of income for her. Another way to monetize your videos is by making brand deals. Kati doesn’t get a lot of brand deals because she is careful of who to introduce to her audience. She has had online therapy programs as a brand deal and Bumble BFF. Kati also does speaking engagements at schools and wrote a book to help diversify her income. Plus, Kati has a Patreon account. These are a few ways that she supports herself.
Ethical Dilemmas as a Public Figure A therapeutic relationship should be something that is developed over time in therapy. You should feel a click with your therapist. If people come into therapy and feel like they already know their therapist, it changes the dynamic of the relationship. Therapists can’t fix anything for people. You can work together with your therapist, but you’ll have to integrate the tools into your life.
Staying Organized and Maximizing Your Time Kati started scheduling self-care in her calendar – it cannot be rescheduled. Kati isn’t afraid to outsource the things she can’t do. Kati has a team of people behind the scenes which lets her do creative work in her free time. Initially, she was nervous to bring people on to her team. However, scheduling doesn’t need to be done by herself. If you don’t have time to clean your house, you should have someone come and clean it for you.
Kati’s Resources For more information about Kati, please click here. Are U OK? A Guide to Caring for Your Mental Health YouTube Facebook Instagram Twitter Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Free Webinar: Contractors vs. Employees? How To Hire and Add People To Your Practice
Apply for the Focus Group G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Jonathan Van Viegen joins the show to talk about the time and effort it took to start his online coaching and therapy business. Jonathan gives tips on what you’ll need to do to start your own online business – most importantly, know your message! Plus, Jonathan reveals his “do’s” of online therapy and some common ways to get momentum online.
Meet Jonathan Van Viegen Husband, Father of 2, Marriage and Family Therapist, Entrepreneur, and Coach, Jonathan Van Viegen, MA, MFT, CCC is the Founder and CEO of the Online Therapist Academy.
Jonathan helps therapists all over the world attract new clients and build thriving online practices so they can do more of what they love to do while serving their clients with passion, integrity, and authenticity. Jonathan built a successful therapy practice in Canada before selling it all to travel full-time with my family. After transforming my struggling online practice into a 6-figure business, I decided to help other therapists do the same. His therapy website is: https://jonathanvanviegen.com/ Getting Online Clients Jonathan would blog regularly and make YouTube videos to get his name out in the open. It took a long time for him to figure out what was going to work. It started to take off and get traction when he was on Instagram. It’s about adding value to people’s lives and following up with them. Build relationships with your audience and send direct messages. The process is about authenticity and genuine relationships.
Create a Message Create a message about what you do, how you do it, and who you do it for. Generalities die, and specificity thrives. Find your passion! What do you love to do, and what type of client do you like to help the most? Craft a message surrounding your nano-niche. You only need a couple of hundred clients per year. There’s enough market demand out there that you can be really specific. You’ll want to be known as a trusted advisor in your niche.
The Do’s of Online Therapy * DO your research. Make sure you have the proper licenses to practice. * DO have a goal in mind. You can be both a coach and a therapist if that’s your plan! * DO protect your license. Make sure you operate under the necessary authority. * DO take action. Put one foot in front of the other. You can pay for mentorship – it will be a journey. * DO be consistent. Regardless of how you build your practice, get your momentum.
“Success is going from failure to failure without losing your enthusiasm.” -Winston Churchill
Getting Momentum Online It took about twelve months for Jonathan to get momentum. Jonathan learned everything himself using webinars and training. Today, Jonathan has three sales calls. People show up to book calls with Jonathan; he doesn’t have to go out and find people. It took a lot of work and effort. If it were too easy, then everyone would do it.
Coaching vs. Therapy With therapy, your client will come to you with the content. With coaching, we go to our clients with the content. We are teaching them skills that will help with their daily lives. We aren’t supposed to label our clients – why are we labeling how we assist them? Psychotherapy isn’t the be-all and end-all intervention for our clients. We can offer people coaching or therapy – you do not need to mix the two. There is no reason that we can’t provide both.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jonathan’s Resources Jonathan’s Website Jonathan’s Facebook Schedule Your Strategy Session with Jonathan Resources **TherapyNotes.com**
Free Webinar: Contractors vs. Employees? How To Hire and Add People To Your Practice
Apply for the Focus Group G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Nicole Liloia joins the show and talks about building bigger practices the right way. The first step in attracting more clients is overcoming our limiting mindsets. The next step is building three key relationships – community, referrals, and transactional. Stay tuned to hear how to why these relationships are so important and how to create them. Meet Nicole Liloia Nicole Liloia is a business strategist who helps women entrepreneurs build bigger businesses and create consistent income growth. She loves helping them create multiple income streams that allow them the freedom to work less while still making more money.
Nicole’s first business was a counseling private practice but she quickly added in multiple income streams so that she could travel more while still running her business. She got her Masters in Social Work from Columbia University and has contributed to Forbes, Huffington Post, Mind Body Green, and more. Nicole always says yes to tacos and loves Apothic wine.
You can find her online at www.nicoleliloia.com and download her free tool, the Consistent Income Generator so that you can create a personalized plan to have consistent income growth in your own business at nicoleliloia.com/consistentincome.
Freedom and Flexibility Nicole’s business is online, when she goes on vacation, she can bring her work with her and stay extra long. Working online also allows for more time with kids or more time to dedicate to your hobbies. Look at what motivates you outside of work and think about how you can get more time doing what you love. Think about the lifestyle that you want for yourself and create or alter your practice so it will best fulfill your needs.
Mindset Blocks Nicole always felt like there wasn’t enough out there for her. There were still other people who had what she wanted. Therefore, Nicole wouldn’t be able to do it herself. Nicole also thought that if she went on vacation, then her business would fail while she was gone. We are all subject to imposture syndrome – assuming we are not qualified enough for our dreams.
The key to building a more prominent practice is building healthy relationships. However, if you have a scarcity mindset, then you will be unable to create healthy relationships. Be open to putting yourself out there and be open to the possibilities that come with being seen and building mutual relationships. In the mental health space, there is always room for more people. Just because someone has a successful practice, doesn’t mean you can’t do it as well – it just means there is a path for you to be successful too.
Building Successful Relationships There are three key relationships you need to build to have a successful private practice.
- Community. Your ideal clients and the people that you want to work with. Make sure you are building a large community – you want to nurture a broad audience so when your clients leave you to have more people to pull from. Show up, create content, and get in front of an audience. Be active on Facebook, write blog content, and utilize mailing lists.
- Referral Relationships. Build a relationship 1:1 with someone who has a similar audience that you do. You can share each other’s content and even refer to each other when necessary. Reach out to someone and ask about their needs – how can you help their audience? Develop long-term relationships that will benefit your business. Think about how you would want someone to approach you for that relationship.
- Transactional Relationships. A transactional relationship is someone that shares a complementary audience with you. Nicole pitched herself to The Practice of Therapy Podcast. She wanted to know if there was anything she can do for the podcast. Nicole wasn’t asking for clients; she wanted to know how she could be helpful to Gordon’s audience. This relationship is a community builder. To be successful in any business, you need to be known, liked, and trusted. Be genuine with what you do.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Nicole’s Resources Nicole’s Website Consistent Income Growth Nicole’s Facebook Nicole’s Instagram Nicole’s Twitter Resources **TherapyNotes.com**
Free Webinar: Money Matters in Private Practice Apply for the Focus Group G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Ryan and Emily Russ join the show. They speak about their niche working with sexual addiction patients and uncovering underlying traumas. Plus, Ryan talks about how lucrative intensives have been for his practice. Later, Ryan and Emily explain the importance of doing your own work as a therapist – invest your time in education, therapy, and informative readings.
Meet Emily and Ryan Russ Our family lives in Little Rock, AR. We have 3 young children and 1 Goldendoodle puppy. When Ryan was finishing up grad school at Reformed Theological Seminary in Jackson, MS 15 years ago, we knew one day we wanted to work together in private practice. After being on staff at Capstone Treatment Center, where Ryan received extensive training and certifications in Trauma, Sexual Addiction, Multiple Addiction, EMDR, Mindfulness, and Brainspotting, in 2019 we nervously took the plunge into opening our own group practice clinic. Ryan’s main specialties are Sex Addiction, Trauma, Custom Intensives, and Custom Personal Growth Intensives for other therapists wanting to do their own therapy work. Emily’s specialties include administration, client hospitality, and juggling all the clinic details while raising 3 children and potty training a puppy. Getting to work together as a married couple has its challenges, but it mostly has been so rewarding! Seeing how God has created our skill sets so oppositely and yet so complementary has been a really neat gift this past year. Client care and the “Art of Therapy” is at the core of our family-owned and operated clinic. Sexual Addiction Niche In 2012, Ryan stumbled upon the work of Patrick Carnes. Ryan loved how men could encounter each other and work through their issues. This inspired Ryan to do sexual addiction work with people who were out of control sexually in their lives. Trauma, attachment, and family systems are also underneath sex addiction; Ryan likes to help his clients uncover these issues.
Intensives Half of Ryan’s revenue comes from doing intensives. You can do so much more with uninterrupted time. Ryan does one, two, or three-day intensives with eight hours of therapy each day. The intensive will be customized to the issue at hand. Ryan utilizes brain spotting, trauma egg, and yoga. Plus, Ryan is a certified yoga therapist – they are also looking to start goat yoga.
The Value of Doing Your Own Work Both Ryan and Emily have gone to therapy independently and as a couple. If it weren’t for that, they wouldn’t be as secure as a team. They want their clinicians who work for them to also have done their own work. It’s hard to take a patient farther in the therapy process than you have gone yourself. Sometimes, Emily and Ryan disagree on business ideas. You have to learn how to work through the bumps in the road.
Work-Life Balance When there is scarcity, there is a shame-based hustle. Be intentional. Ryan and Emily have the mindset to go slow and steady. Plus, they have learned not to say yes to everything. When Ryan and Emily are home for work, it’s tempting to talk more about the business. However, they realized they needed to have more family time. They even hired a housekeeper to lessen the burden and increase their quality time together.
Recommended Resources Ryan heard about G Suite on the Practice of Therapy. They recommend the G Suite E-Course because it helped them learn how to maximize their productivity using the G Suite tools. Emily says that the Practice of the Practice has also been beneficial because it is essential to have a community in private practice.
Also, continual education will carry various dividends. Emily recommends doing your own work as a clinician so you can be a better clinician and serve your clients. They have a budget for each member of their staff to do their own work. Ryan even does intensives for other therapists. You can’t sell therapy if you don’t believe in doing it yourself.
Investing Your Time Other people tend to value you more than you value yourself. If you are trapped in specific ways of thinking, then you are not going to be doing more in-depth and quality work. It’s essential to have an intentional effort to do quality work. Utilize the tools around you to level up. It’s a no-brainer for Ryan. Behind every risk, Ryan felt support.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Emily and Ryan’s Resource The Finding Place Counseling Emily@thefindingplacecounseling.com Instagram: @TheFindingPlaceCounseling Resources **TherapyNotes.com**
Free Webinar: Money Matters in Private Practice Take the 2-Minute Mastermind Survey Gordon’s Mastermind Group Profitable Mental Health CE Starter-Kit (Use Code GORDON2020) G Suite for Therapists | The E-Course Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Edit
In this episode, Daniel Fava talks about five things you can do with your website to attract more clients to your private practice. You can take bits and pieces from each tip and dive deep into your site content. Daniel says the first thing you will want to do is to be specific with your goals. Have you been able to identify your ideal client? Stay tuned to hear Daniel dive deep into each of his five tips.
Meet Daniel Fava Daniel Fava is a father, husband, podcaster, website consultant and founder of Create My Therapist Website and Private Practice Elevation. He helps therapists create websites and attract more clients online.
After building a website for his wife’s private practice and seeing the impact it had on her business, he became passionate about helping others achieve the same. Daniel offers web design services, SEO services, consultations, and online training to help therapists grow their business through online marketing. You can get free access to his library of PDFs, cheatsheets, and ebooks by clicking here.
-
Be Specific With Your Goals Everybody has goals for their practice, but how does it pertain to your ideal client? If you want to attract ten new clients, what would those clients look like? Find out who the people are that you enjoy working with. After identifying your ideal client, you can look at your website through the eyes of your client. Are the images, words, and content speaking to that type of client? Once you do this, you can finally get specific with your content.
-
Ask Your Website Visitors to Take an Action You need a call to action on your website. Therapists are great at filling their websites with a lot of information. However, they may never tell their visitors actually to do anything. Daniel says you need to ask your visitors for their information. Daniel likes a specific and engaging call to action on each page. What is the next step that someone can take in order to work with you? For instance, you can have a free fifteen-minute phone consultation. On every page, there should be something that explains that step. Conversion rates are usually low on popups, be patient with your rates.
-
Make Sure Your Website is on Google Is your website indexed on Google? Put quality stuff on your website; Google will pick up on it. Think about your audience and who you are trying to attract to your site. Daniel says to think about the keywords that you want to rank for. Check out the first few websites that are listed on Google for those keywords and find out what kind of content they are putting out.
-
Get Your Content Shared When you create a blog post, you want to make it high-quality and give people a reason to share your content and come back to your website. Think about your ideal clients and the challenges they face. What are some ways you can help them out and create a win for their life? Blogging is also an essential way to get your ranking up.
-
Measure What You’re Doing It’s hard to grow something that you’re not measuring. What does your Google Analytics say? If you’re not tracking how many people are going to your website, how will you know what the problem is? Google Analytics is free to set up with your website. Even if you’re not planning on looking at it, have it going, so it’s collecting that information. Eventually, it will come in handy.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Daniel’s Resources Create My Therapist Website Private Practice Elevation Get the Free PDF E-Book, 5 Ways To Improve Your Website. Daniel Fava on Effective Private Practice Website Design Resources **TherapyNotes.com**
Take the 2-Minute Mastermind Survey Gordon’s Mastermind Group Profitable Mental Health CE Starter-Kit (Use Code GORDON2020) Money Matters in Private Practice Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, David Hall joins the show to talk about continuing education events. At first, David had significant “impostor syndrome”. However, he has come to realize that you do not need to be an expert to lead a training; you simply need to be an enthusiast of your topic. David explains some essential steps you need to take while planning your CE training, plus he describes some different ways you can profit from the event. Later, Gordon and David talk about the pros and cons of online courses.
Meet David Hall Dr. Stephen “David” Hall heads up content and creative direction as the “Chief Maven” of PsychMaven. He began his work as a psychotherapist in 2005, and he currently holds clinical licenses in Family Therapy and Mental Health Counseling. He has built up multiple counseling practices in his years as a clinician, first in Georgia and then in his home state of Tennessee. In 2015, he led the start-up of an independent psychiatry clinic, Haven Family Psychiatry, in Knoxville, TN. Dr. Hall maintains a psychotherapy caseload and supervises postgraduate therapists in the practice he leads in the clinic, Haven Counseling Center at Haven Family Psychiatry.
Impostor Syndrome David says he would have started doing continuing education events earlier in his career. In David’s mind, he needed enough credentials to do CE. David thought he needed to be an expert to lead a training. However, David now knows that you do not need to be an expert to train other people. The first paid CE event David put on was about ethics. He isn’t an ethics expert, but he knew it would be a high-demand topic, so he was going to figure it out. David doesn’t like to present himself as an expert; he wants to present himself as an enthusiast.
Starting a CE Event There are a lot of different steps to holding a CE event. Figure out what the CE requirements are for your state. Some states are easier than others to get approval. David’s first event involved getting his event approved for a pretty broad audience. The next step is figuring out where you are going to hold your event. Keep your costs as minimal as possible – it’s effortless to overspend when putting events together. Remember that it does not have to be a significant event. You can do a ten-person event and still make money. David does a lot of direct mailings; there is a lot of expense in this. The reason David picked ethics because he knew it would have a big draw. What do people want to learn about? In the CE State Guide, there is a list of required topics.
Making Money from CE Events There are lots of ways you can make money from CE events. The most obvious way is to charge for the event. The best place to start is by looking at the mailings you get. You will price the event based on how many CE hours it includes. Between $15 and $20 an hour is a good starting point. Plus, you can also lower the price for an early-bird special, then charge more once the event gets closer. Sponsorship is another way to make money from CE events. Affiliate marketing is another way to make money. You can recommend a subscription service or another course and become an affiliate with them. The rate can be up to 30%, and the revenue can even be reoccurring. If you do a CE event at cost, because of that, you deepen your reputation and get an extra five clients.
Presentation Space When David travels, he likes to do talks in hotels. However, the cost can be high with hotel space and catering. In a church space, David can do way cheaper catering. Managing your expenses is the biggest thing you will have to worry about when holding a CE event. David thought he needed to “go big or go home.” Nobody told him that he could “go big and go home.” Start lean by keeping your expenses low, and you can always add to your events later on when you know what your audience responds to.
Online Courses There’s a lot of benefits to in-person events; the audience will have a significant commitment. Online, people are signing up and not attending. If you want CE events to be a steady source of income for you, then you should be doing both online and in-person events. The best way to build up your email list is by doing online events. If someone knows you, it’s easier for them to buy your online product. However, if there is no relationship there, people will start to question if the product is legitimate. Plus, many states have limitations on how many online credits you can do.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
David’s Resources CE Requirements Free PDF The Narrative Institute Psychotherapist Start-Up Kit PsychMaven PsychMaven on Facebook PsychMaven on Instagram PsychMaven on LinkedIn Haven Family Psychiatry Resources TherapyNotes.com
Brighter Vision Gordon’s Mastermind Group How To Be Financially Successful For 2020 Business Models for Private Counseling Practices Money Matters in Private Practice Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Aaron Potratz and Nathan Hawkins join the podcast to discuss starting a partnership in private practice. They reveal some vital things you will need to know before committing to a partnership; you especially need to know the identity of your practice and where you see your business going. Later, the two explain why there is no competition between them and the importance of trust in a partnership.
Meet Nathan Hawkins Nathan Hawkins is a Licensed Professional Counselor and has been working in the field for almost 17 years. He is a certified trauma professional and performs EMDR and also utilizes Hypnosis at times as well. He is an approved clinical supervisor in the state of Oregon. He is the owner of Life Encounter Counseling which he established in 2004. While maintaining his own client load he supervises the clinical and administrative work of 4 employees and a clinical intern program. The success of Life Encounter Counseling birthed a passion to multiply the work of counseling in different ways. One of those directions leads to him co-founding another private group counseling practice, Life Discovery Counseling Services with Aaron Potratz in 2016. Life Discovery Counseling Services has grown from 1 location to 2 successful locations that serve opposite sides of the Portland Metro. He supervises and manages the counselors and staff in both of those locations with Aaron. Nathan loves to teach and also intermittently fills in at Multnomah University as an Adjunct Clinical Supervision Professor.
Meet Aaron Potratz Aaron is a Licensed Professional Counselor in Oregon, the owner of Discover Counseling, and co-owner of Life Discovery Counseling Services – two private group counseling practices. Aaron maintains his own client caseload while also managing and supervising his counseling staff. He started out as a solo practitioner in 2007, expanded to a group practice in 2015, and started his second practice with his business partner, Nathan Hawkins, in 2016. Between the two businesses, he has 10 clinicians and one support staff. Aaron also does consulting for small businesses, helping them become more efficient and productive. He especially enjoys helping other therapist business owners grow their practices and focus in on the areas they are most passionate about.
Building Trust Nathan and Aaron get along really well. There went through a honeymoon phase; however, there wasn’t much depth at first. As time went on, they had to lean on each other and give each other additional information. Plus, they were vulnerable when speaking about their businesses and gave honest feedback about the direction of their companies. They play up each other’s strengths and complement each other’s weaknesses.
Integrating Practices When Nathan and Aaron first started with the shared space, they had a lot to think about, like rent, square footage, and office space. It is easy to make assumptions when you find a partner – even small things need to be discussed. Nathan and Aaron have separate businesses. However, the way they treat their employees is identical. These people are in the same space, so they need to be treated equally. When you are dreaming about combining practices, this may not be something you think about upfront.
Competition You know what you’re good at, and you stick with those things. Aaron and Nathan have niched down and found what they do well. They both know what clients they work best with. If a client doesn’t fit one practice, then they will refer them to the other practice. Getting competitive with other therapists doesn’t make sense; there are more than enough clients out there for everyone. We will be doing a disservice if we are not giving our clients the right therapist.
Tips for Starting a Partnership Both Aaron and Nathan have their own identities for their businesses. One reason they got together is because of how isolating private practice can be. However, it would be best if you spent some time understanding what you like to do on your own. Do not be in a big hurry to get together with another practice. You have to know who you are on your own before starting a partnership. Plus, Aaron and Nathan say how essential, to be honest, and open with your partner.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources for Nathan & Aaron Life Discovery Counseling Life Encounter Counseling Life Encounter Counseling on Facebook Life Encounter Counseling on Instagram Call Nathan: (503) 446-2135 Email Nathan: Nathan@lifeencounter.com Discover Counseling Discover Counseling on Facebook Discover Counseling on Instagram Call Aaron: (971) 222-8166 Email Aaron: aaron@discovercounseling.com Resources TherapyNotes.com
BrighterVision.com How To Be Financially Successful For 2020 Business Models for Private Counseling Practices Money Matters in Private Practice Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon reveals nine unique ways to diversify income in private practice typically, we trade our time and expertise for money. We have a session, and our clients pay us for that. Trading time for money can be limiting. There are lots of other ways we can generate income for our practice. Gordon identified nine different ways to diversify revenue. The list goes in order from most practice related to less practice related.
Nine Ways to Diversify Income in Private Practice 1. Group Sessions Most groups are between four to six people. You can have a group around a particular topic or niche. This way, you are maximizing the amount of money you get for the time spent.
-
Start a Group Practice Partner with other therapists and create a small group. Gordon collects a small portion of their rates to pay for overhead. However, a small piece of that is also the profit margin. This additional income allows Gordon to see fewer clients himself and gives his other therapists more clients. You can bring on therapists for your group practice as independent contractors or employees.
-
Affiliate Marketing Find products and services that other people are producing. When you offer that product or service, then you will get a commission from that. A lot of the links Gordon uses are affiliate links. If a person clicks through the link, then Gordon will get a commission. A big affiliate is Amazon. Gordon says to sign up for an Amazon Associate account. Through the account, you can offer anything from Amazon, link it on your website, and then you will receive a commission. For instance, Gordon recommends The Full Focus Planner. Whenever you click on his site, Gordon will earn money from Amazon. Here are some other resources Gordon recommends:
AWeber: Email Marketing Teachable Brighter Vision Pat Flynn – Smart Passive Income 4. Selling Online Products Gordon offers a Paperwork Packet as one of his online products. A lot of therapists create handouts and worksheets for clients. You can generate income from providing these resources online. Check out Practikat; they help therapists sell resources through their platform. Another platform is Gumroad – you can sell digital products on this site. With Gumroad, they take a percentage of what you sell. However, it can still be a lucrative way to create income.
-
Online Courses Gordon uses Teachable for his online courses. There is a lot of stuff that you as a therapist and a private practice owner are knowledgeable about. It doesn’t necessarily have to be courses for other therapists. It can be courses that you offer to your clients. If you do a lot of anger management counseling, think about putting it into a course format and provide it to your clients.
-
Writing a Book Gordon offers a Private Practice Start-Up Guide. When people sign up to get it, they use their email address. Then, Gordon will use the email address to market. An eBook will get your name out there and establish you as an expert. EBooks can be used as a lead magnet, or you can sell the eBook online. Make sure the eBook is quality. Do not do it just to make people spend money.
-
Public or Live Events By offering continuing education events, you can create more income. Dr. David Hall of PsychMaven has a whole course on how to create one of these events: A How-To Guide to Build Your Own Continuing Education Events for Income. Several organizations also offer continuing education credits online and as live events.
-
Starting a Podcast or YouTube Channel Gordon’s podcast has grown, now advertisers are interested in sponsoring the podcast. For example, TherapyNotes pays to be a sponsor of the podcast. Gordon does not take any old advertiser. He only uses people that he trusts and businesses that offer a relevant service for his audience. People on YouTube will also create income via advertising.
-
Consulting and Coaching If you have been in practice for a while, and have business-related skills, think about consulting others. Generally, you can charge more for consulting than you can counseling because it comes with a level of expertise. Gordon charges two or three times higher for consulting than he does for counseling. Plus, counseling is more of a long-term commitment, whereas coaching may be more of a short-term commitment.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
TherapyNotes.com
AWeber: Email Marketing Teachable Brighter Vision Pat Flynn – Smart Passive Income Gumroad Practikat PsychMaven A How-To Guide to Build Your Own Continuing Education Events for Income Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon reveals nine unique ways to diversify income in private practice typically, we trade our time and expertise for money. We have a session, and our clients pay us for that. Trading time for money can be limiting. There are lots of other ways we can generate income for our practice. Gordon identified nine different ways to diversify revenue. The list goes in order from most practice related to less practice related.
Nine Ways to Diversify Income in Private Practice 1. Group Sessions Most groups are between four to six people. You can have a group around a particular topic or niche. This way, you are maximizing the amount of money you get for the time spent.
-
Start a Group Practice Partner with other therapists and create a small group. Gordon collects a small portion of their rates to pay for overhead. However, a small piece of that is also the profit margin. This additional income allows Gordon to see fewer clients himself and gives his other therapists more clients. You can bring on therapists for your group practice as independent contractors or employees.
-
Affiliate Marketing Find products and services that other people are producing. When you offer that product or service, then you will get a commission from that. A lot of the links Gordon uses are affiliate links. If a person clicks through the link, then Gordon will get a commission. A big affiliate is Amazon. Gordon says to sign up for an Amazon Associate account. Through the account, you can offer anything from Amazon, link it on your website, and then you will receive a commission. For instance, Gordon recommends The Full Focus Planner. Whenever you click on his site, Gordon will earn money from Amazon. Here are some other resources Gordon recommends:
AWeber: Email Marketing Teachable Brighter Vision Pat Flynn – Smart Passive Income 4. Selling Online Products Gordon offers a Paperwork Packet as one of his online products. A lot of therapists create handouts and worksheets for clients. You can generate income from providing these resources online. Check out Practikat; they help therapists sell resources through their platform. Another platform is Gumroad – you can sell digital products on this site. With Gumroad, they take a percentage of what you sell. However, it can still be a lucrative way to create income.
-
Online Courses Gordon uses Teachable for his online courses. There is a lot of stuff that you as a therapist and a private practice owner are knowledgeable about. It doesn’t necessarily have to be courses for other therapists. It can be courses that you offer to your clients. If you do a lot of anger management counseling, think about putting it into a course format and provide it to your clients.
-
Writing a Book Gordon offers a Private Practice Start-Up Guide. When people sign up to get it, they use their email address. Then, Gordon will use the email address to market. An eBook will get your name out there and establish you as an expert. EBooks can be used as a lead magnet, or you can sell the eBook online. Make sure the eBook is quality. Do not do it just to make people spend money.
-
Public or Live Events By offering continuing education events, you can create more income. Dr. David Hall of PsychMaven has a whole course on how to create one of these events: A How-To Guide to Build Your Own Continuing Education Events for Income. Several organizations also offer continuing education credits online and as live events.
-
Starting a Podcast or YouTube Channel Gordon’s podcast has grown, now advertisers are interested in sponsoring the podcast. For example, TherapyNotes pays to be a sponsor of the podcast. Gordon does not take any old advertiser. He only uses people that he trusts and businesses that offer a relevant service for his audience. People on YouTube will also create income via advertising.
-
Consulting and Coaching If you have been in practice for a while, and have business-related skills, think about consulting others. Generally, you can charge more for consulting than you can counseling because it comes with a level of expertise. Gordon charges two or three times higher for consulting than he does for counseling. Plus, counseling is more of a long-term commitment, whereas coaching may be more of a short-term commitment.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
TherapyNotes.com
AWeber: Email Marketing Teachable Brighter Vision Pat Flynn – Smart Passive Income Gumroad Practikat PsychMaven A How-To Guide to Build Your Own Continuing Education Events for Income Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Happy New Year! In this episode, Gordon talks about setting goals, specifically SMART goals. Plus, Gordon reveals some useful tips when thinking about your annual goals. For instance, make sure to write down your goals, look at them often, and reassess your goals each quarter. In order to accomplish your goals, ensure you have the most helpful resources and tools to set yourself up for success.
Writing Down Goals Currently, Gordon writes down his goals using the Full Focus Planner. You do not necessarily need a planner to write down your annual goals. Gordon started thinking about his goal-setting by writing them down in a blank journal. We have a 40% greater chance of reaching our goals just by writing them down. Think about your goals for the year and write some things out. Gordon says even to write them out using longhand. It causes us to think about things differently. Once you write down your goals, you will need to look back at them throughout the year.
SMART Goals SMART stands for specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time-specific. The goal must state what is to be achieved. When you are setting a goal, make sure it’s not too ambiguous. For instance, if you wanted to lose weight, the goal needs to be a specific number. In private practice, owners wish to achieve the goal of getting more clients. Again, you need a particular number of clients you are hoping to bring in. For instance, you can say you want to get ten new clients each month. When we set goals, they need to be realistic and attainable. A goal is much better if you give yourself a deadline. Think about why you are in private practice. Are your goals going to help produce the lifestyle you want to have for yourself? Get the SMART Goals Worksheet.
Accomplishing Goals What tools are you going to need to reach your goals? Gordon uses a planner to help him reach his goals. Other tools could be software, automation, or people. Draw on your resources. Gordon switched from contractors to employees – he was able to make that switch by consulting with people. Get feedback from others about your goals. Telling others about your goals will also help keep you accountable.
Keep Yourself On Track Gordon uses a planner and Google G-Suite to keep him organized. He tracks the number of phone calls and conversions in G-Suite. The more data you have, the better you can measure your goals. Also, we have the ability to change our goals if we need to. Look at your annual goals once a quarter and think about what needs to be replaced. Have a way to track your goals and hold yourself accountable. Another way to stay on track is by taking small steps. Think about the individual actions that you need to take to reach your goals.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources TherapyNotes.com
SMART Goals Worksheet Session Note Helper Be a Podcast Guest Cool Resources Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Janeen Herskovitz joins the show. Janeen speaks about working with autism spectrum families. No additional education is required for private practice owners who wish to niche down to this specialty. Janeen also talks about the importance of self-care for parents with autistic children and where parents can seek support. Later, Janeen describes the inspiration behind her podcast, Autism Blueprint, and how she utilizes self-disclosure in her practice.
Meet Janeen Herskovitz Janeen Herskovitz is a licensed mental health counselor in the state of Florida and owner of Puzzle Peace Counseling, LLC. She earned her Bachelor’s degree in Special Education from Rowan University in New Jersey (1995) and her Masters of Arts in Mental Health Counseling from Webster University (2010). She has been married to her husband, Joe, since 1995, and together, they have two young-adult children.
Janeen’s private practice, Puzzle Peace Counseling, is located in Ponte Vedra, Florida, and helps autism families live more peaceful lives. Her podcast, Autism Blueprint, covers a variety of topics surrounding autism in the home.
Working with Autism Spectrum Families You don’t need a lot of experience in autism to work with parents who have autistic children. You will need the qualities that you most likely already have like empathy, listening skills, and the understanding that the parent’s journey is unique to them. As therapists, we are good at having unconditional positive regard. Clinical things Janeen does are screening for post-traumatic stress disorder because the research shows that PTSD is very prevalent among autism spectrum parents. The diagnosis itself is a traumatic event, and people come into it with their childhood trauma.
Self-Care It’s so necessary for autism parents to practice self-care. They need to have healthy boundaries in place for themselves, live with intention and practice mindfulness. Autism parents need to lean into their lives and create a new normal. Parents also need to grieve – however, it’s a cycle. There never is any closure to their grief. It’s difficult nowadays because there are a lot of autistic adults speaking up and saying they don’t want anyone feeling bad for them. While this is true, parents still need space to breathe.
Seeking Support Janeen always tells parents to ask their child’s school first if they have any support groups. Not every school district has this, but they can point the parents in the right direction. Online groups can be beneficial for parents. Especially when the parents are unable to get out of the house or find a sitter. The idea that parents aren’t alone and there are lots of people going through this will be very relieving and therapeutic.
Self-Disclosure Janeen uses self-disclosure to add a level of trust and let others know they are not alone. Sometimes parents can be embarrassed and not want to tell people about their experiences. One time Janeen lost her child in a Target. When they found him, he was completely naked. She laughs about it now, but at the time, it was traumatic, and she never wanted to talk about it.
Autism Blueprint Janeen’s podcast, Autism Blueprint is a real passion of hers. It is something she can talk about every day. Her child is an escape artist; he needs 24/7 attention. There are things in Janeen’s home that you don’t find in a typical house. Many doors inside the house have locks and keys. Plus, the glass doors are now plexiglass because when her child has a meltdown, things can get broken. Meltdowns can be almost catastrophic when your child is twenty-two and nearly six feet tall. Janeen’s home is designed for him. During the podcast, Janeen talks about her home and also interviews experts.
When Janeen added her podcast to her website, her SEO went through the roof. Now, SEO is one less thing she has to worry about. The podcast is helping people go and find her. Plus, it’s another resource for Janeen to help people who may otherwise not be able to go to her practice.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Janeen’s Links Autism Blueprint Podcast Puzzle Peace Counseling Click here to be added to the Puzzle Peace Counseling Newsletter Like us on Facebook | Follow on Twitter 5 Best Practices for Working with Autism Spectrum Parents Facebook Group Other Resources GreenOak Accounting
Therapy Notes
Private Practice Owners: Mistakes To Avoid For A Stress-Free Tax Season Be a Podcast Guest Killin’It Camp Cool Resources Session Note Helper Private Practice Start-Up Guide Money Matters in Private Practice G-Suite For Therapists Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon and Julie Herres from GreenOak Accounting talk about taxes. Being a private practice owner comes with a unique set of financial advantages and disadvantages. Self-employment is a whole lot different than being an employee – many private practice owners are not prepared for the change. Stay tuned to hear Julie discuss why you may want an accounting firm managing your money monthly and the importance of knowing your numbers. Don’t forget to reserve your spot for the upcoming FREE webinar: Private Practice Owners: Mistakes To Avoid For A Stress-Free Tax Season.
Meet Julie Herres Julie Herres is the owner of GreenOak Accounting. The firm provides bookkeeping, accounting, CFO and tax services to mental health private practice owners throughout the United States. When Julie founded GreenOak Accounting she started working with a few therapists. Over time, more and more therapist referrals came in and she started noticing trends across the practices that were thriving. Based on those trends she developed success ratios as a way to quickly determine the health of a practice.
Today, GreenOak Accounting’s focus on mental health private practice is intentional and geared towards helping business owners understand the story that their numbers are telling. Julie understands what’s involved in managing and growing a practice and is uniquely positioned to be a trusted advisor to clients.
Self-Employed Being a business owner is one of the most significant opportunities, income-wise and tax-wise. There’s a big difference between being an employee and being a business owner. When you’re an employee, you’ll get a W-2 or 1099, a lot of the tax work is already done for you. As a business owner, there are many items you can deduct and savings opportunities out there. You need to keep track of what is going on in your business to prepare for taxes or a potential audit.
DIY Taxes You may want to do your taxes if you just started your business, and you have minimal income. Another reason you should do your own taxes is if you are very comfortable with your numbers and know your finances like the back of your hand. For most business owners, doing your taxes may not be worth it – there are risks involved in doing your taxes incorrectly. If you have a more complex business structure, typically, you will want to outsource your taxes.
Find an Accounting Professional Now is the perfect time to find someone you want to work with. Accountants are going to start getting very busy. You should find someone that is the right fit for you. Dave Ramsey says to find someone who has the heart of a teacher. Most therapists do not have an accounting background; there is a lot of stress that comes around finances. Find an accountant who isn’t going to make you feel like you asked the wrong question and find someone who will be patient with you. Make sure they are trustworthy and are capable of making you feel comfortable.
Monthly Accounting Some accountants will help you with your monthly accounting. Julie says it helps them advise the business owner year-round. When you see your accountant once a year, there are a lot of missed opportunities. Monthly accounting doesn’t work for everyone – many people are happy to do the yearly tax accounting.
Money Shame People hold back because they are embarrassed by their financial situation. Business owners might be worried that they are being compared to other people who may have more financial means than they do. When someone works with Julie, there is no judgment. Julie and her team know what habits are successful for private practice owners – she can offer different perspectives and useful information based on their experiences.
Understanding Your Numbers You shouldn’t be making less money as a group practice owner than as a solo practice owner. You need to know where the money is coming from and where it is going. At one point, Gordon paid his therapists out of his pocket, whereas his therapists should be making enough to cover their costs and then some. The end of the year is a great time to analyze your data and find places to decrease expenses and increase profitability. Should you get rid of the insurance panels that may not be producing for you? It’s essential to be knowledgeable about your numbers.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Julie’s Resources GreenOakAccounting.com
Call GreenOak Accounting: (571) 208-2065 Julie’s LinkedIn Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Private Practice Owners: Mistakes To Avoid For A Stress-Free Tax Season Private Practice Start-Up Guide Money Matters in Private Practice Cool Resources Session Note Helper G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Perry Rosenbloom, Founder of Brighter Vision, joins the show. Perry and Gordon discuss Brighter Vision’s most recent project, Social Genie. Is keeping up with social media challenging for your busy schedule? Perry and his team make social media a breeze with Social Genie. Later, Perry and Gordon talk about how to get your website the best search engine optimization.
Meet Perry Rosenbloom Perry has always had a connection to the field of therapy and therapists, having family both working in the field and benefiting from it. He founded Brighter Vision in March 2014 with a passion to use business savvy and web development know-how to help therapists both fully realize their career ambitions and help the most people possible. Since then, Brighter Vision has grown to be the world’s best therapist website design company, as well as one of the most trusted names in our industry, helping thousands of therapists throughout the world. Brighter Vision Brighter Vision makes marketing simple for therapists. They have over 5,000 therapists on their platform who trust them with their websites. The website will look like you’ve spent thousands of dollars when, in reality, you only pay a few dollars a day. They have been at this for about five years now. After working with his mother-in-law, Perry knew he needed to help her with her digital presence. After some research, he realized how much he could assist the therapist market. He learned more about therapy and behavioral health – now, he focuses exclusively on therapists. They can build websites at an agency-like caliber at a fraction of the cost. It was a long strange journey to get where they are now, but they have 27 employees and have a lot of fun working with their clients.
Social Genie One of the advantages Brighter Vision has is working with thousands of therapists. Because they work just in behavioral health, they understand the needs of the community from a marketing standpoint. They spent about six months talking to therapists about their pain points of social media. With Social Genie, after fifteen minutes of work, you can set up your social media or the next few months. You can edit and customize posts that are already premade.
If you work with couples, you can use the couple’s campaign, the divorce campaign, and the infidelity campaign. Each campaign can have nearly 90 posts – you can schedule them however you wish. Then, you can upload your logo and have it embedded in all of your images.
Some therapists spend hours working on social media to customize it. However, you can easily spend fifteen minutes working with Social Genie and be done with social media for months. Clients can request content and what sort of campaigns they are looking for. Then, Perry and his team will create the content.
“Position yourself as an authority and start conversations.”
Search Engine Optimization When you do SEO, it’s about providing content to Google that is relevant for what people are searching for. What services or specialties do you have? Then, write a specific page for your website on each of those individual specialties and services. Brighter Vision can easily add these pages to help with your SEO; they take a lot of the work from the client. Otherwise, there are lots of resources online about what Google needs for SEO. The better you rank on Google, the more people will see your website and the more clients that will join your private practice.
Design Team When you sign up for Brighter Vision, you get your very own design team. The team will build you a first draft of your website in about two weeks. Then, you can talk to the team and edit the site how you want. Plus, there is a sticky note function on your website, so the design team can see exactly how you want to change the site. This takes out the hassle of having to email the design team back and forth. Once you are happy with your website, you can get unlimited support from the tech team.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Perry’s Resources Brighter Vision Social Genie Making Your Private Practice Website Work For You The Therapist Experience Podcast Resources TherapyNotes.com
GreenOakAccounting.com
Private Practice Owners: Mistakes To Avoid For A Stress-Free Tax Season Private Practice Start-Up Guide Session Note Helper G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon and James Marland talk all about virtual assistants. Hiring a virtual assistant for your private practice has so many benefits. Virtual assistants can save you both valuable time and money. Plus, James gives tips on how to find the right VA for your practice and ways to make the hiring process as smooth as possible.
Meet James Marland James Marland is Chief Operations Officer at Move Forward Virtual Assistants with over 18 years of experience in social service and non-profit organizations. James loves the power of learning and holds a Master’s degree in Ministry and Business Administration.
He started his career in the mental health field working in a shelter for children and has held positions in Family Based, Day Hospital, Crisis, Intake to Inpatient, Youth Minister, and Manager of a Mental Health Triage program. Along the way, James has learned people are resilient, inspiring, and capable of so much if we offer them hope and give them a vision and a path for success. James loves cooperative games of all kinds and can be found organizing a board game night with friends or playing a casual game online. He has lived in Lancaster County, PA for the last 11 years with his wife of 21 years and his active 14-year old son. He is currently writing a few times a month in his new blog “Two Steps Forward.”
Finding a Virtual Assistant A job description is your first filter. Once you know what you want your virtual assistant to do, write down a description of who you want them to be. Understand why and what you are trying to accomplish. Most therapists didn’t go to school to answer the phone, schedule appointments, and fight with insurance companies. A VA frees up the therapist to do the things they love to do. James says experience is one of the best things to look for. Have they been successful in using technology? They should be able to bring the same experience over to your business.
James’ first failure was hiring an event manager. They had a lot of the same skills a virtual assistant uses but didn’t have the office background. They lasted one day with James. Check and make sure they have the right skills to manage an office. Plus, your virtual assistant should have the right personality. They need to build rapport quickly, but not take it too far and cross boundaries. Getting along with others virtually is also an essential trait for a competent virtual assistant. Another thing James looks for is someone who is a problem-solver – they need to be able to take the resources the private practice owner gives them and solve any problems that arise.
Manager Economics If two people can do the same task and the quality is pretty much the same, always have the lower-cost employee do the job. When you are thinking about how much a VA will cost or if you feel their work won’t be the same quality – at first, it probably won’t be the same quality. Over time, they will develop the skills to do the task at the same quality. For example, you can hire someone for $1,000 to paint the house, or you can hire someone for $500 to paint a house. All around, the quality will stay the same. Who do you hire? Manager economics says to hire the person who will cost less. A manager’s time is worth $100 to $200 an hour, whereas a VA is worth $20 to $30 an hour. Sure, you could save $30 by doing the task yourself; however, you could be losing out on $200 by doing it.
Protecting Time We all have the same amount of time – how do you protect it? If water is valuable to you, then you don’t waste it. Time should be the same rule. We have all sorts of tools to manage our time, like calendars, alarm clocks, and reminders. A virtual assistant is just a tool to manage our scarce resource of time.
Hiring Process Have useful inputs for your hiring pool. James likes to hire people he already knows or a referral from someone else. One of his best employees is someone who was referred to by someone else. A good job description will also help with the hiring process. If they don’t fit the job description, then they won’t be a good fit for the job. Also, map out the interview process. Do a 15-minute phone-screen to check for skills. Then, conduct the interview and give scores for each of their answers. That way, you can compare their answers to other people you are interviewing.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
James’ Resources Move Forward Virtual Assistants Schedule with James Manager Economics 101 Video Time Saved by Outsourcing Interview Questions Progressive Delegation Board Resources TherapyNotes.com
GreenOakAccounting.com
Gordon’s Black Friday Sale! Use Code: Cyber19 Private Practice Owners: Mistakes To Avoid For A Stress-Free Tax Season AP 1094: How Do I Pitch My Product Better? Private Practice Start-Up Guide Session Note Helper G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon explains how private practice owners can embrace change. Change is going to happen; the sooner we can embrace the change, the easier it will be to handle it. Some ways to ease the potential pain of change will be preparing ahead of time. Have systems in place, capture everything, and break things up into smaller pieces. Later, Gordon speaks about the importance of having a professional will and the significance of being uncomfortable.
Prepare Ahead of Time Gordon had no way of predicting his wife’s fall. However, he does have a network of friends in town that could help out. One of his good friends went to be with his wife in the hospital. Your network is important to remember when we think about being prepared for the unexpected. All Gordon had to do was send one text to his intake coordinator to cancel all of his appointments. The systems and people were in place for him to be prepared for the unexpected. Change is always going to happen.
Capture Everything It is so essential to have a way to capture everything. Throughout the days and weeks, we get a lot of stuff handed to us. You need a way to capture all of these things. Gordon knows he needs some low-tech stuff – he uses a planner as a capture device. As things come up, Gordon starts writing it down and making a note of it. Writing everything down will help us look at our goals and bring it from inside of our brains and into the physical world. Another exercise is to brainstorm everything that you want to accomplish and throw it all on a whiteboard. It doesn’t matter how it’s organized – dump your brain! If you are pelted with unexpected changes, then do a brain dump.
Break Everything Into Smaller Pieces Write everything down into individual steps, so you know how to accomplish something big you are faced with. Writing things down not only works in a situation where we are overwhelmed, but it works for running our practice in general. We all have a dream about how big we want our practice to be – take those dreams and write them down. Looking at those goals will make it less overwhelming. Write down three things you want to accomplish each day. If you start thinking about too many things, it will become overwhelming. Tackle one thing at a time, because this method is how we will get anything done. Multi-tasking doesn’t exist – we are not capable of handling matters in this way.
Embrace Change The more we can embrace change, the better we can handle the change. When a toilet overfills, the only choice we have is to get into a mess. Embrace the fact that it’s going to be messy for awhile. After it’s fixed and cleaned, you will be back on the road of life. Anxiety has a way of tricking us into thinking we can’t handle things sometimes. Most of us are equipped to handle the things that are handed to us in life. It might be painful and uncomfortable; however, we can always work our way through it.
Professional Wills If you were to die tomorrow, what would happen to your private practice? What would happen to your clients? It’s not something we need to dwell on, but we do need to have some things in place. For example, you need a plan for someone to get into your computers and log in to your accounts.
How To Prepare A Professional Will For Your Practice
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Therapy Notes - TherapyNotes.com
GreenOak Accounting Private Practice Owners: Mistakes To Avoid For A Stress-Free Tax Season AP 1094: How Do I Pitch My Product Better? Private Practice Start-Up Guide Cool Resources Session Note Helper G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon and Brent Sweitzer, LPC, RPT dive deep into the book, Getting Things Done by David Allen. Brent describes how the methods of GTD changed his life and some of his favorite tools from David Allen. Plus, Brent explains his recent jump into full-time private practice, despite not thinking he was 100% ready for the change.
Brent Sweitzer Brent Sweitzer, LPC, RPT specializes in helping distant couples reconnect and in helping children play their way through difficult emotions through play therapy. He is a Registered Play Therapist, which means he has received special training and supervision in using the medium of play to work with children of all ages. He is also extensively trained in Emotionally Focused Couples Therapy, a well-researched approach that helps couples overcome long-standing conflicts in order to feel closer and communicate better. He runs his own private practice, Sweitzer Counseling, that serves the communities of Cumming, Johns Creek, Alpharetta, and the surrounding communities in Atlanta, GA. He is married and has two young children of his own. When he’s not connecting with clients or his family, he’s often exploring the great outdoors or strumming his guitar.
Getting Things Done Brent found the book Getting Things Done, and it spoke to him so clearly. There are so many distractions and challenges with work now as therapists and entrepreneurs. As an entrepreneur, we have to define a lot of our work. Brent knew the book was the answer – he went all in and applied the methodology to his life since January. Gordon was also blown away by the book. David Allen breaks it down into manageable pieces.
Getting Things Done for Teens Since Brent works with children, he is always looking for things that simplify the concepts from Getting Things Done. That why he is a big fan of Getting Things Done for Teens. There are these things called transformer tools – decide if you care about something and then decide if you are committed to doing it. It’s so simple but an unconscious choice. We can learn how to do it and respond to these challenges consciously.
What Are Contexts? How much time do you have available? Imagine having a list of things you can do with a spare ten or fifteen minutes. Have a list of items already decided that would be possible to do in between clients or in line at the DMV. This method has been a real change for Brent. GTD is about efficiency – not in a cold kind of way. We only have 24 hours in a day, and we only have so much energy. GTD helps us to list the things that we can do that are mindless. Keep your life moving!
Channel Your Inner CEO Brent loves being with people. He has a left side of his brain, but he wasn’t able to pull it up when he needed it. GTD has helped Brent think that way. Being a private practice owner means you are an entrepreneur and a CEO. You need to be thinking like an executive at least some of the time.
OmniFocus OmniFocus is designed to align with GTD – Brent tried to use it with Trello. So far, it’s going well. For those people who are digitally oriented, Brent says it works well with Apple Reminders. It’s a great way to capture all your ideas while you are out and about or even exercising. However, it is essential to remember to go back and look at the ideas you captured.
Full-Time Private Practice Marketing your private practice is a part-time job in itself. Brent didn’t know when he would be able to leap into full-time private practice. He wanted to start next year when his son joined Kindergarten. His leap into private practice happened a little sooner than he planned for. Brent needed time and focus on putting all of his knowledge into place. He put his foot on the accelerator to market his practice and himself to the community. He is actually going to be speaking at a mental health symposium at a high school about communication between parents and children. After Killin’It Camp, Brent was inspired to create the next step for people after his speeches. He is in the process of developing an email series – allowing himself to stay in contact with potential clients.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Brent’s Resources Sweitzer Counseling 678-701-7545 brent@sweitzercounseling.com Brent’s LinkedIn Resources TherapyNotes.com
Ethical Business Practice for Psychotherapists Killin’It Camp Session Note Helper G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram OmniFocus Business School Bootcamp Practice of the Practice Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon describes the inspiration behind his Session Note Helper – it was created to quickly write session and progress notes while using standard phrasing menu items and checkboxes. Gordon also explains the tools on G-Suite and how therapists can use G-mail and still be HIPAA compliant. Later, Gordon discusses the importance of connecting with people and some of his favorite highlights from Killin’It Camp.
HIPAA HIPAA stands for Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act. Most of us forget what this actually means. Typically, we think of it as a big brother force that is always ready to slap us on the wrist. Gordon was looking for a way to send an email that was HIPAA secure. HIPAA requires a BAA (Business Associate Agreement). After doing some research, Gordon realized you could get a BAA from Google. However, you have to get the paid version of Google. At that time, it was called Google for Work – now it’s titled G-Suite for Business. The price point is very economical.
G-Suite Gordon got the BAA from Google and was able to use the URL for his business as his email address. It costs $6 a month for the basic version and $12 a month for the more advanced version. >>Sign Up Here<< When you get a Google account, you will also get a whole suite of tools: Google docs, sheets, drive, and forms. Gordon’s e-course, G-Suite for Therapists, teaches us how to maximize our productivity using these tools.
Session Note Helper Playing around with the tools, Gordon started to make templates. A lot of the stuff therapists do require writing the same things over and over again. Progress notes and sessions notes usually have the same type of phrasing. Gordon had a template he was using, and he thought there had to be a way to create a note for each client. Now, Gordon has come up with a Session Note Helper. At first, Gordon started to use Form Publisher, and it worked to produce a narrative in a Google Doc format. However, using Form Publisher was not HIPAA secure because they did not provide a BAA. Gordon’s Helper allows us to quickly write session and progress notes using standard phrasing menu items and checkboxes.
Connecting with People At Killin’It Camp, Gordon was able to get to catch up with a lot of other private practice consultants. Despite being an introvert, Gordon was excited to talk to other consultants, network, learn from others, and teach about G-Suite. Now, The Practice of Therapy Podcast has loads of new guests to be in the show from people who were at the conference.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources TherapyNotes.com
Free Webinar: Business Entities For Private Practice Killin’It Camp Session Note Helper G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Do you ever feel overwhelmed? In this episode, Gordon and Sarah Leitschuh, LMFT discuss the progression of practicing therapy to consulting people on the business side of private practice. Often, private practice owners crave the flexibility of being an entrepreneur. However, flexibility isn’t always a good thing as Sarah can attest to. Stay tuned to hear all the ways owners can navigate the overwhelm of private practice.
Meet Sarah Leitschuh Are you ready to reduce the overwhelm that has overtaken your life as a result of trying to balance your work and personal life? Schedule a complimentary 20-minute Vibrant Therapist Clarity call and walk away with a strategy that you can implement today in order to find yourself feeling more energized and less depleted. You can access my schedule HERE.
Flexibility in Private Practice Sarah quickly realized that flexibility could be a bad thing. She found herself overwhelmed – it was hard for her not to have enough time or energy for anything she wanted to do. Sarah was working all the time and not seeing the results she wanted to see. Plus, she was supervising others – her supervisees were saying the same things that she was thinking. Sarah knew there was something she wasn’t doing. There needed to be a way to show up to private practice and still have a life in the outside world.
Taking Inventory We can find the path to doing things more easily – but we don’t necessarily have the big picture of what is contributing to our overwhelm. Here are some questions you need to ask yourself: what is contributing to your overwhelm? Where do you feel like you are wasting a lot of your time? Also, find out where you are leaking time, energy, and money. Once you fix these leaks, you will have more time to devote to things that could fill your bucket.
Feeling Overwhelmed Private practice owners feel overwhelmed because of the constant need to document. Sometimes, their caseload is full of clients that they are not passionate about working with. Or, the schedule can be overwhelming. Your schedule may not be working out – are you scheduling too many things outside of therapy? These extra activities could be stressing you out. Gordon says therapists need to stick to their schedule. Do not let your clients run your schedule for you.
Solid Boundaries Sarah says having boundaries is one of the ways to beat the overwhelm in private practice. Have limits as to which clients you can take into your practice. Have a solid list of referrals to give to your clients if you cannot take them in. Plus, have your set hours. If clients ask to see you outside of your hours – set your boundaries and let them know what is possible. Gordon says it was overwhelming when he started taking clients that were not his ideal clients. He is not a drug and alcohol addiction specialist – he gets a lot of calls about this, but his practice is not equipped to do this kind of therapy.
Constant Evaluation Sarah recommends that quarterly or monthly therapists take a look at the state of their practice. Are you taking action to get you closer to vision? Or are you taking steps that are pulling you away from your vision? Evaluating regularly will keep your practice on track of meeting your goals and fulfilling your vision.
Tabling For Later We do not have time for everything! It is beneficial to table things intentionally. At the end of 2019, some of the items on your brain dump list are not able to happen this year. Write this list down for 2020 to free up energy on things you can get done this year. It will no longer be hanging over your head for the rest of 2019. Find a blank spot on your calendar and make it sacred. Prioritize your well-being – it is just as important as seeing a client.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Sarah’s Resources Counseling Website Vibrant Therapist & Professional Development Website The Overwhelm Assessment for Stressed Out Therapists Sarah’s Facebook Other Resources Therapy Notes
Free Webinar: Business Entities For Private Practice Killin’It Camp The Practice of Therapy Resources G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest How To Make Money In Private Practice >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon talks with Michelle Hardman, LPC from The Primed Practice. They discuss the importance of understanding how to run a business when starting a private practice. Therapists do not get training on how to run a business, so starting a private practice can be tricky. However, Michelle wants to bridge that gap of knowledge and coach therapists through the intricacies of running a business. Plus, Michelle tells us about her Primed Planner, the perfect tool to remind private practice owners to practice self-care, network, and follow-up with clients.
Meet Michelle Hardman Even though she knew at 15 years old she wanted to be a therapist, life always has some interesting detours! After nearly 16 years in corporate human resources leadership, Michelle decided to follow her dream to counsel people in the context of their whole life rather than just their career life.
Now, as a Licensed Professional Counselor and owner of a successful private practice, Michelle enjoys working with adults who have anxiety and/or trauma histories. Michelle is also a Certified Daring Way Facilitator, teaching curricula based on the research of Dr. Brené Brown. While Michelle is honored to be in this clinical space, she still loves all things “business!”
By leveraging her unique combination of corporate and clinical experience, as well as her MBA in strategic management, she is an exceptional business coach to fellow clinicians in private practice. By teaching clinicians about critical business elements such as marketing, branding, networking and business planning, as well as creating invaluable tools such as The Primed Planner™, Michelle is committed to helping amazing clinicians become confident business owners!
Business Coach When Michelle grew her private practice, people kept asking how she did it. Michelle took for granted the things she knew from her MBA; she applied all her business knowledge without even knowing it. The idea of coaching on the business side of private practice grew organically. Michelle doesn’t have a secret sauce; she loves talking with clinicians and breaking down business for them. Clinicians will have an epiphany that the business side of practice doesn’t have to be so scary.
Brené Brown Workshops Brené Brown’s work is so relatable and easy to break down into digestible bits. Her research and the way she presents it fascinates Michelle. Brené’s work is part of the human experience, so that is why it is easy to relate with. Michelle works with people who have anxiety and trauma, so shame almost always presents itself in those situations. Clinicians also feel guilt when they go into private practice because they feel like they are supposed to know how to run a business even though the courses were never taught in graduate school. Even though Michelle has an MBA, she still thinks it’s still scary.
Therapist Shame It’s easy for self-care to fall off the radar; sometimes, therapists are the worst ones to stay on top of it. Michelle felt like an outsider coming into the world of private practice. In graduate school, we are taught to feel shame about running a profitable business. We are told that therapists shouldn’t be working to make money; they should be working to make a change. There’s a stigma that marketing and business do not help people; that is not true. We got into this business to help people; however, we deserve to have thriving lives of our own.
Private Practice Sales Michelle says you don’t have to be a salesperson; you need to showcase your strengths and skills. Marketing is about relationships and cultivating those relationships; it’s not about selling. We should never be making a sale. Instead, we should be putting ourselves out there. If you repel people, then they are not the right fit for your practice. The small things matter most. We can only do so many things in a day, so think about the little things you can do today to move the needle forward.
The Primed Planner If we are not trained in business, and it feels overwhelming and scary – having a tool that has those prompts along the way to keep us engaged will help our practices flourish. Michelle wanted to put an engaging structure around the business of private practice. The Primed Planner is published and available! It was developed in the spirit and love of Michelle’s company. The planner creates prompts for self-care, networking, and follow-up items. Yes, it’s a monthly and weekly calendar, but there is also an annual roadmap. Michelle’s planner allows us to take the time to think about our goals and the things that energize us.
Goal Setting Michelle is a big believer in knowing what your core values are. When building a house, you want a strong foundation for it to sit on. In your business, if you do not have a strong message, your marketing will come off as inauthentic. We deserve a solid foundation. Think about your core values and how you align your business to build on those values. Then, we can start thinking about our goals for the actual business. If you don’t know where you’re going, how are you going to get there?
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Michelle’s Resources The Primed Practice The Primed Planner Facebook Instagram LinkedIn Vimeo The Daring Way™ Email: Michelle@MichelleHardman.com Other Resources Therapynotes.com
Free Webinar: Business Entities For Private Practice Killin’It Camp The Practice of Therapy Resources G-Suite For Therapists Be a Podcast Guest How To Make Money In Private Practice >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, The Practice of Therapy celebrates its 100th EPISODE! Gordon plays clips from some of his favorite episodes, including guests like Jeff Guenther, Allison Puryear, Joe Sanok, Kasey Compton, Mike Michalowicz, Paul Jarvis, Melvin Varghese, and David Hall. The clips cover a variety of private practice topics like marketing, return on investment, processes, systems, and how to find support.
Jeff Guenther: Say More About That In this clip, Jeff Guenther talks about why some therapists get “ghosted” by their clients and he also gives specific examples. His podcast, Say More About That, dives deep into the client’s personal journey of finding a therapist and going to counseling. Jeff talks to people about why they wanted to go to therapy, what kind of therapist they were looking for, and why. He covers why some mental health counselors were excellent matches and why others didn’t work and also touches on what they thought therapy was going to be like and if it met their expectations. Say More About That asks their guests if they have advice for therapists to help them be better or more effective counselors.
Jeff Guenther, LPC, is a therapist in Portland, OR. He has been in private practice since 2005 and currently leads workshops on how therapists can build their digital brand and attract more clients online.
TherapyDen Say More About That Jeff Guenther | What Clients Are Saying About Their Therapists | TPOT Podcast 075 Allison Puryear: Marketing Isn’t Scary The most common struggle for private practice owners is being afraid to market and being uncomfortable with the idea of marketing. Some people think marketing is something a businessperson does, not a clinician. Allison says every client has their ideal therapist out there. It is up to the therapist, as an act of service, to help our clients find us and overcome their struggles.
Know that it is about showing up and continuing to try and build your practice. If someone has a phone call during their first two weeks of private practice, then that’s an anomaly. If you build it, they will not come; you have to tell people about your practice to build it.
Allison Puryear, LCSW is the person behind Abundance Practice Building, Abundance Party, and is a private practice coach and consultant.
TPOT 006 |Allison Puryear, LCSW | Marketing Your Private Practice Without Fear Joe Sanok: Return on Investment (ROI) Depending on which phase of growth you are in, it will determine where and how a clinician in private practice should spend their time and money resources to get the best ROI. When you start your private practice, your greatest asset is the time you spend. In this phase, attention should be spent on bootstrapping and marketing your practice. Spend time making those community contacts and developing relationships with other professionals in your business. Plus, Joe explains the benefits of outsourcing as much as possible so you can continue running your practice and seeing clients.
Joe Sanok is the person behind The Practice of the Practice Podcast and Blog. Joe is a speaker, mental health counselor, business consultant, and podcaster.
Joe Sanok | How to Level-Up and Grow Your Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 11 Kasey Compton: Processes and Systems Kasey’s phenomenal growth (80 staff members and a million-dollar practice in just three years) came primarily out of her ability to create processes and systems to make the growth as seamless as possible. She put most of her effort on the front end into mapping things out so that the processes and systems were well defined. Kasey also said that she made some mistakes and learned from them rather than let them ultimately defeat her. For instance, her partner was high-strung, which made their workplace culture toxic. Three years later, the people who quit her practice are back and notice the immense changes.
Kasey Compton built a million-dollar practice with over seventy-five staff members in less than two years from the ground up. She is the President/CEO of Mindsight Behavioral Group with multiple offices located in Kentucky.
Kasey Compton | Systems, Processes & Growing a Million-Dollar Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 047 Mike Michalowicz: Profit First With Mike’s “Profit First” system, he turns conventional wisdom on its head and gives us another way of thinking about how we manage our finances and look at profit. The traditional way of thinking about making a profit is this:
Income – Expenses = Profit It’s what we get to keep after everything else is paid for; operating expenses, salaries, and taxes. The problem is that the bigger we grow, the more our expenses grow too. It becomes a never-ending cycle that keeps our profitability at bay and keeps our businesses unhealthy. Mike says this line of thinking is kind of like saying, “my health comes last.”
Mike says that a better way is to allocate our profit first rather than let our expenses and operating costs determine what we get. The premise is to allocate a percentage of the income on the front end for profit. It looks like this:
Income – Profit = Expenses This, of course, seems like unconventional wisdom. Mike goes on to explain that by taking our profit first, we are better able to take control of our business’ health and operate at a level that is more sustainable and realistic.
By Mike Michalowicz’s 35th birthday, he had founded and sold two companies – one to private equity and another to a Fortune 500. Today he is running his third multi-million dollar venture, Profit First Professionals.
Mike’s Website Get the Free Clockwork Kit Mike Michalowicz | Using “Profit First” In Your Private Practice (Part 2) | with Kasey Compton | TPOT Podcast 050 Mike Michalowicz | Using “Profit First” In Your Private Practice | with Kasey Compton | TPOT Podcast 049 Paul Jarvis: Bigger Isn’t Always Better If people are working from home, then others think they do not have a legitimate business. Paul is a one-person business; he does work with contractors but has never hired an employee because he doesn’t want to be a boss. We should reconsider the idea that bigger is always better. Paul’s book isn’t about anti-growth; it is thinking critically about growth. The key is to think about how the business works and runs. If we grew our businesses, we would have to hire people and then become a manager. Is that the position you want to put yourself in?
Paul Jarvis is a writer and designer who’s had his own company of one for the last two decades. His latest book, Company of One, explores why bigger isn’t always better in business.
Company of One, The Podcast Paul’s Website Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Paul Jarvis | How Keeping Your Practice Small Could Be Big… | TPOT Podcast 086 Melvin Varghese: Income in Private Practice If all you do is focus on income generation, you are eventually going to burn out. Time flexibility and creating a lifestyle that makes sense is far more critical than the money you will make. When a person reaches a net income of around $150,000 annually, then it just becomes unmanageable. Their quality of life will not increase with additional money. It is better to have a strong foundation that lasts long-term rather than something that takes off quickly and fizzles out.
Melvin Varghese, Ph.D., is a licensed psychologist in private practice in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, he launched Selling The Couch, a podcast and blog to help our field learn the business and marketing lessons we don’t often learn in our training.
Melvin Varghese, Ph.D. | Podcasting, And Entrepreneurship In Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 078 David Hall: Finding Supports From Others in Private Practice Private practice can be lonely sometimes; we should find like-minded people to support us in our journeys. David gives us thoughts on proximity and finding support. Support can come in many different forms, and David speaks on ways to find resources and how to get your name out into your community.
Dr. Stephen “David” Hall heads up content and creative direction as the “Chief Maven” of PsychMaven. He began his work as a psychotherapist in 2005, and he currently holds clinical licenses in Family Therapy and Mental Health Counseling.
The Narrative Institute PsychMaven David Hall | Being A Private Practice Maven | TPOT Podcast 087
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Therapy Notes
Free Webinar: Business Entities For Private Practice Be a Podcast Guest Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Jill Barnett Kaufman tells us all about the courses she provides for continuing education. Her latest course is on how parents can redirect children’s behavior. Jill describes the four reasons a child may be misbehaving and the ways we can identify these behaviors. Plus, Jill explains all the different niches she has been part of including parenting classes, court-ordered co-parenting classes, and her upcoming course on thriving through a divorce.
Meet Jill Barnett Kaufman Jill Barnett Kaufman is an experienced therapist, a certified Parent Educator, and a Certified Divorce Mediator. She provides divorce counseling, couples counseling, co-parenting counseling, family counseling, and divorce mediation.
She recently co-authored an online training for therapists entitled “Redirecting Children’s Behavior Training for Therapists” which has been approved for 6 CEUs through NASW. She is the mother of three adult children and is committed to helping raise a generation of children who have high self-esteem and a well-developed sense of responsibility for themselves and their community.
Jill’s Course Jill researched her course, Redirecting Children’s Behavior Training for Therapists, and the specifics on getting approval from the Continuing Education Unit (CEU). Everything we do as therapists requires a lot of steps, and you need to jump through numerous hoops to accomplish it. It’s a fifteen-hour course, not all of it is necessary for therapists. Jill took the parts that she thinks therapists would need to know. Currently, it is six hours of classroom time and is available for people to take. Jill uses Teachable, it’s a straightforward platform with an excellent sales page, and everything is automated.
Teaching Clients About Parents look at a child when they misbehave as being bad. Jill’s course, Redirecting Children’s Behavior Training for Therapists, will teach you how to look at a child as being discouraged instead of bad. Jill teaches therapists on the varying ways to encourage the child, so you’re not disciplining or punishing. Instead, you’re looking for positive ways to discipline so they are learning while understanding what they did was unacceptable.
Goals of a Misbehaving Child There are four goals of a misbehaving child:
- Attention
- Power
- Revenge
- Avoidance
You discipline the child differently depending on the intention of the child. You find out the goal of the child by analyzing the way you are feeling. If you are feeling irritated, their goal is attention. If you are feeling angry, their goal is power. If you’re feeling hurt their goal is revenge. If you are feeling pity for the child, then their goal is an avoidance.
Parenting Expert Niche You need to involve the parents to give them the proper skills to parent their child. Therapists can develop a niche working with children and will want to have a session or two with their parents. You can also go to schools – Jill has done training for teachers and parents at schools. This helped Jill get her name out into the community. Now, Jill has people contacting her consistently because her name is out there as a parenting expert.
Court-Ordered Parenting Classes There’s a course in Jill’s state that she would have to take to be approved for court-ordered parenting classes. With this course, Jill knows people who have developed a curriculum based on this work to teach the course to parents. However, Jill’s niche is divorce and co-parenting. Judges have ordered parents to take co-parenting classes with Jill. There is no special certification you need to do these sessions with parents.
Thriving Through Divorce Jill is working on an online course about thriving through a divorce. The course is for people who are struggling with their separation. The reason Jill came up with this idea is that there are not enough things out there to support people who are going through a divorce. Also, Jill likes the idea of having something out there that she can share with people without having to do the one-on-one sessions.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Jill’s Resources Jill’s Website Jill’s LinkedIn Redirecting Children’s Behavior Training for Therapists use code: GORDON Other Resources GreenOak Accounting
Free Webinar: Business Entities For Private Practice The Practice of Therapy Resources Be a Podcast Guest How To Make Money In Private Practice >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Smart Passive Income Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Juan Santos about what it was like for Juan to open a private practice straight out of graduate school. Plus, Juan gives valuable tips on how to market a private practice. He says the essential factor is to be your most genuine and authentic self when spreading the word about your practice. Later, Gordon and Juan discuss a unique niche – immigration evaluations.
Meet Juan Santos Juan Santos is a Licensed Professional Counselor in North Carolina. He is married to his wife, Elizabeth Livingston Santos, together they operate Santos Counseling PLLC a family-owned private practice. Mr. Santos is a father to his 5-year-old daughter Nola and 3-year-old son Alexander. Mr. Santos and his family enjoy traveling, outdoor activities, and spending time with family and friends.
Mr. Santos specializes in helping couples build healthy sustainable relationships and supporting individuals with their immigration case by writing immigration evaluations. He utilizes his experience in working with immigration attorneys and writing hardship evaluations to guide clinicians interested in the specialty.
Juan is currently a doctorate student at the University of the Cumberland’s where he is a pursuing a Ph.D. in Counselor Education and Supervision. Mr. Santos hopes to utilize his doctorate studies to strengthen his clinical skills.
Mr. Santos has attained recognition in publishing courses and self-help books aimed to address issues ranging from anxiety to relationship, he was the recipient Winston Salem State University Alumni Achiever 2015, the Winston Salem Under 40 Leadership Achiever, and the 2015 Notable Latino of the Triad Award. Juan has presented his work in immigration hardship evaluations with GoodTherapy, the LPCANC fall conference 2018, and on a notable podcast.
Marketing Juan started his private practice journey with support; he was so fortunate to have someone that put him under his wing. Juan wasn’t taught how to run a private practice or how to utilize marketing in graduate school, so this assistance was essential. Juan stays genuine in his marketing practices; he is true to himself. At first, he struggled with being himself because, at school, they were taught about professionalism. His first professional videos did not go well because people could tell it was not his authentic self.
Private Practice Post Graduate School Juan is the type of person to jump into the pool before learning how to swim. After getting his degree, Juan knew he wanted to start a private practice right away. Juan utilized his mentor to help him with things that Juan would need to learn to succeed. Plus, he read books and listened to podcasts to push himself.
Immigration Evaluations Juan helps his clients who are working with attorneys on their immigration status. Depending on the type of case will depend on the type of evaluation needed. For instance, an example of a hardship case is when a citizen of the United States has an undocumented partner. The clinician is going to work with the citizen about documenting would it be like to be without their partner. This will lead to potential diagnoses and recommendations. The attorney will then use this information in court when they are presenting their client’s case.
Marketing Your Niche Primarily, Juan partners with immigration attorneys, clinics, and churches to get his name out in the community. More than likely, these are places his ideal client is going to visit. Next, Juan explains how to market a private practice using social media. The first thing to do is look for a platform. Where do you think your clients spend most of their time on? For instance, Instagram is getting more younger folks than Facebook is. Social media should be to support those out there who will navigate towards their goals, whether it’s with Juan or without Juan. Marketing doesn’t have to be looking for the sale; be genuine above all else.
Being Bilingual in Private Practice If you are not bilingual, some services will bring a translator to your meetings. When Juan works with couples, he shares his experiences with having a wife who is not bilingual. Differences in languages and culture can massively affect our relationships at home and work. As clinicians, we all go through some culture class. However, one consistent problem in relationships is communicating through the lenses of our cultures. Our society has a significant diversity overlap, so understanding these barriers will go a long way.
Juan’s Resources Juan’s Website Call Juan: 336-707-1723 Email: juansantos@santoscounseling.com Other Resources GreenOak Accounting
Be a Podcast Guest How To Make Money In Private Practice G-Suite for Therapists >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram The Power of Vulnerability Building a Storybrand Jump – Steve Harvey Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Mio Yokoi, a registered psychotherapist, podcaster and Supporter of Growth. First, Mio explains why mental health needs to be an ongoing discussion rather than something people only are concerned about when in distress. Then, Mio describes how she was fortunate enough to get her private practice website up and running over ten years ago; age is helpful when Google is ranking websites. Stay tuned to hear some ways Mio has diversified her income, and Mio explains the ways she has overcome the obstacles that come along with starting a podcast.
Meet Mio Yokoi Mio Yokoi is a registered psychotherapist, podcaster and Supporter of Growth, based out of Toronto, Canada. Her main goal is to serve meaningfully, through working with clients in her private practice and by consulting with other helping professionals to help them be of service in the most ideal way possible for them.
Her podcast, Life Stuff 101, is devoted to sharing stories and insights to inspire as many people as possible to make their mental and emotional wellness a top priority. Her website is Solidwellness.org.
Mental Health Should be an Ongoing Concern Mio has been in private practice for ten years now. She wants people to think of their mental and emotional wellness as an ongoing need versus only when they are in severe distress. Mio developed the idea that we should be thinking about our mental and emotional health just as much as we think about our physical health. We think about our physical health on an ongoing basis to ward off illness and other physical distress.
When Mio first started her practice ten years ago, she wanted to provide more accessible therapy services. At the time, Google searches were not a big thing. So, with her marketing background, Mio was able to put up her website in a short period, and it gained a lot of traffic.
Marketing a Niche The ways to market online have expanded since Mio first started. One thing Google looks for with SEO is the age of the website. Mio has had her website up for ten years. It gets a lot of traffic and ranks well on Google. Depending on the day, she may still come up on the first page results. For people starting now, Mio says SEO is going to be tough; there are so many more people online these days. However, you need a website because it’s a 24/7 business card.
Diversifying Income When Mio first started her practice, she immediately wanted to think of ways to diversify her income sources because Google can be unreliable. At any given time, Google can decide not to rank your website well. A few months ago, Google changed their algorithms, so Mio’s website dropped. Plus, Mio didn’t want to rely solely on client work. Think of it as a table; you want to have four solid legs that provide you with a solid foundation. Mio has done consulting work and workshops to help diversify her income. Currently, Mio is working on establishing an online business, that’s one of the reasons why she contacted Pat Flynn.
Starting a Podcast People are surprised to hear Mio has challenges with verbal fluency. It takes a lot of internal work for Mio to speak and get her ideas across. Inside there is a lot of action happening. Pat Flynn offered Mio access to his Power-Up Podcasting® course, which helped out immensely. Figuring out podcasting on your own can be challenging, so having the steps laid out is extremely helpful. If Mio didn’t get the push from Pat and the resources he provided, she would be overwhelmed and still trying to figure it all out. You can listen to Mio’s podcast HERE.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Mio’s Resources Be on Mio’s Podcast: mio@solidwellness.org Solid Wellness Life Stuff 101 AP 1081: Where Do I Start to Build an Audience and Community Online? Other Resources GreenOak Accounting
Power-Up Podcasting® Killin’It Camp G-Suite for Therapists Fall Into Cash >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Have you ever been so overwhelmed in your private practice that it completely took over your day? In this episode, Gordon gives helpful tools and resources to beat the overwhelm and take control of your day. In particular, Gordon utilizes self-care, his daily planner, and the getting things done philosophies.
Self-Care Focus on the things that matter most in your life, and don’t lose sight of that. Self-care is essential for therapists and counselors because it allows us to recharge and be fully present for our clients. If we have not been taking advantage of self-care for the week, we may face the dangers of burnout. Gordon mentions how he practices self-care by finding time to help out his family and taking hikes.
Breaking Things Down Gordon has to remind himself to focus on his time management skills continually. He is not a naturally organized person, and he has to regroup now and then. By regrouping daily instead of weekly it makes it easier to find things. Have a system in place, so you know what is most important and what is least important. In some cases, you may have to stop what you are doing entirely and tend to those things, like family emergencies. Gordon points out sometimes we assign jobs as “urgent” even if they are not urgent, just important. Marking everything as urgent will lead to severe burnout. The other quadrants are urgent but not important and not important, not urgent. Gordon points out that social media can be a time waster and often results in doing mindless stuff.
Take Time To Plan Your Day Gordon currently uses a planner each morning to figure out how he will spend his day. He recommends using a pencil and pen planner because it forces us to slow down and focus on our day. Gordon uses the full-focus planner, spending that type of money on a planner encourages him to use it. Plus, it has time management and productivity tools built into the planner. The goals you write down should be tied down to the weekly goals, which in turn are tied into your big-picture goals. This concept made sense to Gordon. Focus on a few things at a time daily; the whole purpose of the planner is to track what we are doing.
Navigating Our Inboxes If you can do something in 2 minutes or less, and it is not going to take a lot of energy, then do it as soon as possible. Once you have done that, trash it or archive it. Another thing you can do with your inbox is delegating it to someone else. For instance, Gordon forwards things to his administrative assistant all the time – she handles all of his appointment requests. Whereas, projects are things that are going to take more time, put them in your calendar. A lot of times, we do not schedule tasks that take some time to do. With this podcast, Gordon delegates Friday morning to send it to his virtual assistant. Another thing that comes into our inbox are things that may be a reference for later. Gordon stores those using Evernote. Overall, the getting things done inbox philosophy includes these five steps:
-
If it can be done in 2 minutes or less, do it immediately.
-
Trash it or delete it.
-
Delegate things by handing it off to somebody else.
-
Assign it to a project by using your calendar.
-
References are things you want to save for later.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
GreenOak Accounting
Fall Into Cash How To Make Your Practice Financially Secure Introducing the Eisenhower Matrix Evernote FREE Webinar: How To Make Money In Private Practice >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Rob Reinhardt and Gordon discuss some tips on creating products to diversify income for your private practice. Rob explains how his first product Describe cards, came to be. Describe is a deck of cards that supports over three dozen games for people of all ages. Then, Rob explains how he came up with the second deck and the activity board. Later, Rob gives tips on things you need think about before starting your product line and the two wrap up by talking about private practice websites and the occasional need to outsource.
Meet Rob Reinhardt Rob Reinhardt, LPCS, M.Ed., NCC has his own successful counseling practice and is CEO of Tame Your Practice. Known for his expertise in reviewing and recommending EHRs for therapists, Rob previously worked in Information Technology for over ten years and has lived around technology his entire life.
Describe Cards The words that Rob is regularly trying to get from is clients are adjectives. Emotions are adjectives. Rob started to tinker with cards that had adjectives on them; it’s easier to pull out words when they are on the cards. Rob asks his patients to pick out five cards that describe themselves and five cards that represent somebody else. Over the years, he has refined and developed into a deck of cards with over three dozen activities. Plus, he has launched a second deck and an activity board. Rob doesn’t want the only market Describe products to counselors and therapist, loads of other people buy the products too. For instance, teachers, families, and coaches are all fans of the products. However, will people outside of counseling and therapy be buying the activity board?
Activity Boards When Rob is at conferences promoting his describe cards, he wanted something interactive for the people attending. He made selfie boards, laminated adjectives, and had people come into the booth and take a selfie with the adjectives. It helped people be social and understand how the describe cards worked. People started asking him how much it costs to buy the boards; he didn’t see this coming. He probably would not have thought of this if people hadn’t asked him for it first.
Diversify Your Income Take time and prioritize, make sure the idea is viable before starting down the path. We only have so many hours in the day, figure out which ideas you are going to focus on to be successful. If Rob followed every idea, none of them would have been successful executions. Here are some helpful tips Rob follows when creating a product:
-
Conceive – Come up with the idea, and what does it look like?
-
Assess – Talk to other people and ask how they see it. What are the needs associated with this product?
-
Evaluate – Can you do this? If you do research and you find out it’s $30 to produce, how much are people going to pay for the product?
-
Logistics – Now you need to create the product or service and maintain it.
Product Pricing Pricing will depend on what you are producing, what your market looks like, and what your goals are. A lot of people will create an eBook and give it away for free because they can use the eBook to draw in people, so they end up on your website. How many people will you end up gaining from it and does it pay for itself? If you are looking for a self-sustaining product and revenue-generating, then you have to look at it what it costs for you to produce and how much people will buy it for. Also, you need to consider if it will be worth your time and effort in the long run. If it only generates $20,000 a year, it may take up too much of your time to be worth it. Think of the long-term, is it a one and done thing, or will it continue to evolve?
Websites Even though Rob’s website is not the product, he wants to appear to be a tech expert, so Rob knew he needed an excellent website. Plus, he needed a mobile-friendly and clean site. Pieces of it were outsourced. For instance, he is not a graphic designer, so he had the artwork done for him. The website itself was crafted by Rob using WordPress. Sit down and crunch the numbers, will it be cost-effective to hand off your website to someone else? Gordon changed servers recently, so he hired someone to do it for him. It was well worth the money that he spent. WordPress has so many moving parts, not knowing certain aspects will indicate you may need to outsource.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Rob’s Resources Electronic Health Records in Private Practice “Tame Your Practice” Therapy Tech with Rob & Roy Describe Cards Other Resources GreenOak Accounting
The Paperwork Packet Join the Mastermind Group FREE Webinar: How To Make Money In Private Practice >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Litsa Williams and Gordon discuss helping people with an issue that affects all of us at one point or another in our life, grief. Litsa and her partner, Eleanor Haley, have created an endless supply of resources for people who are in the grieving process. Plus, they have resources for professionals who help others that require grief support. Later, they discuss creative coping and the idea that re-grieving is entirely normal.
Meet Litsa Williams I have taken a winding road, from England and a Master’s in Philosophy, to Baltimore and a Master’s in Social Work, to working with homeless adults, troubled kids, and grieving families. It is those individuals who have taught more than I could ever have hoped to learn in my 20 years of schooling. Though I never imagined myself here I am confident it is where I am supposed to be. I live in Charm City, with my husband and my rescue pit bull. And I believe that 5 minute late is absolutely on time.
Grief Support Grief is a natural part of life. It’s an adjustment people are going to have to cope with at some point. About 85% of people can cope with grief without getting formal grief counseling as long as they receive normalization, validation, and social support. Unfortunately, when we look at this space where people do not need extra support, where does it come naturally? Litsa and Eleanor asked if there was something that they could create in the online space that would offer so many new ways to share information and build community.
Creative Coping Both Litsa and her partner, Eleanor Haley, used photography as a real tool for self-expression and coping with their grief. They started talking about this and wanted to find other people who would be interested in it. As soon as they started talking about it, people were immediately online and wanted to know more about how to connect photography with grief. They ended up creating webinars, online courses, blog posts, and podcast episodes. People are excited about getting this information in a convenient format.
Print Materials Litsa and Eleanor also create print materials for funeral directors, hospitals, grief centers, and hospices. They were often given brochures and booklets to hand out to patients during grieving times. The leaflets were outdated because they have not been updated for 30 years. Litsa loves seeing how her new materials are used as the first step to the introduction of grief for so many people.
What’s Your Grief Blog At this point, Litsa and Eleanor have nearly 600 articles. They try and cast an extensive net and still publish every week. There has long been a disconnect between academia and the regular people out there for grieving materials. Sometimes the resources for people struggling are underestimated; their blog translates their knowledge into understandable terms for everyone. Plus, they cover topics like talking to kids about suicide, miscarriage loss, and creative expression. Also, they offer hands-on ideas for professionals to help their grieving groups.
Re-grief We re-grieve experiences, and that is a normal part of life. For kids, this is especially important because they re-grieve at every developmental stage. When kids get older, they revisit those losses through new lenses they now have. We as adults do that as well. When we hit life milestones, we suddenly re-grieve losses even if it happened thirty years ago. It doesn’t mean we did not grieve right; it just means it is part of our journey. When we see things in the media, we will feel empathy for other humans, and our losses will wrap into those thoughts as well.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Litsa’s Resources What’s Your Grief? Grief 101: A Primer For Helping-Professionals What’s Your Grief on Facebook What’s Your Grief on Instagram What’s Your Grief on Twitter Photographing Grief Email: whatsyourgrief@gmail.com Other Resources Practice Solutions
GreenOak Accounting The Paperwork Packet Join the Mastermind Group FREE Webinar: How To Make Money In Private Practice >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Dr. Alan Wolfelt The Five Stages of Grief Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Holly Chantal about how she helps therapist, counselors and other service providers package and present what they have to offer in a way that attracts your ideal clients. Holly and Gordon discuss what should go on your “about page” and how it should make people connect with you. Then, Holly explains why narrowing down your client base will help you get more clients. Plus, she describes how a therapist can start their online messaging and the benefits of packaging.
Meet Holly Chantal For the last decade, Holly Chantal has been helping visionary service professionals bring their brand, business model, and marketing systems into alignment with their next stage of growth. If you’re looking for someone that can quickly grasp your vision and what you do in all of its complexity then help you decide the best path forward then Holly is the woman to call. Holly’s clients call her an integrator because she helps them take their big-picture vision or idea and reverse engineer how to bring it to life in a way that feels right for them.
About Pages What Holly likes to do on about pages is sharing core philosophies. If you have particular quirks or niches share them here. Maybe you have a unique scheduling tool, or there is something unusual that you do – put that on the about page. People will decide if they like your approach instead of the more functional reasons they would become your client. It is more about connecting with people and being able to represent who you are as a therapist. If people connect with you, you are probably going to enjoy working with those clients more than people who may not be a good fit for you.
Client Attraction For therapists, especially, it is challenging to limit your client base because you want to serve everyone. Holly helps her therapists work through mindset things and how they attract clients. Think about which clients you want to attract. Some people love working with people who have identity disorders. While others like working with people who have anxiety or depression. When you are looking for help, you want someone who is jazzed about the problem they have, not someone who is a generalist. What are your passions, callings, and the magic that you have working with clients? Once you uncover this, you can start to attract more clients to your practice through messaging.
Messaging When coming up with your messaging, it is important to compare yourself to your competition. Once you know how you differ, you can talk about yourself and your beliefs. This will give you three to five topics to discuss in Facebook live, on a blog, or in a newsletter to clients. Share little tidbits about your modalities and why they work. Therapists do not want to come across as “salesy,” but you can create a message that does that for you.
Packaging The typical norm is open-ended engagement on a session to session basis. Many people are coming to you that have had bad experiences in the past with therapy, so there’s a stigma they have. When you can create packages, you are giving them a roadmap for what the experience will be like, and they can see how their progress is measured. It will provide them with something more tangible to hold on to, and it will be easier to sell long-term engagements. You might be able to create higher-end packages and start getting out of the time for money model. Specializing is helpful if you have decided what kind of work you want to do, and you know the modalities you are bringing into your practice then you can lay this out in a big-picture way for your clients. You can give an estimate of how long the therapy will take, topics covered, homework to work on, and other things that will come in the package.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Holly’s Resources Website Facebook Email: hello@hollychantal.com Overcome Your Business Blindspot Other Resources The Paperwork Packet (coupon code: podcast93) Software Pundit’s Best Mental Health Blogs and Podcasts of 2019 Join the Mastermind Group >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Killin’It Camp Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon talks with David Sturgess, LPC about making the transition from working in a hospital setting to full-time private practice. David was able to make that transition over time by starting part-time with his private practice working just a few evenings a week. David shares how he was able to decide when to go full-time with his practice.
Also, Gordon and David discuss understanding the financial leap into private practice. Start part-time before completely committing to quitting your day job. Then, they talk about why outsourcing your website may save you money in the long run.
Meet David Sturgess David Sturgess is a Licensed Professional Counselor (LPC) in Marietta, Georgia. He owns Foundry Counseling, LLC just off the Marietta Square. He is a National Board Certified Counselor (NCC) and holds the Certified Professional Counselor Supervisor (CPCS) credentials in Georgia.
For the last decade, he has been a clinician in Georgia’s short- to long-term Psychiatric Residential Treatment Facilities (PRTFs). During the last two years of working in the hospital settings, he operated his private practice part-time.
In the Spring of 2019, he left the treatment facility environment to do private practice full-time. His experience and focus have been with adolescents and their families learning how to cope and heal from trauma, self-harm, and life-threatening behaviors, as well as psychosis. He is intensively trained in TF-CBT, Trauma-Informed Care and Dialectical Behavior Therapy. He facilitates training in these areas for different agencies and churches in Georgia, to empower people to identify when someone close to them needs a more personal level of care and connect with mental health professionals. In private practice, he works with individuals and families to build peace and confidence in their lives as they cope with the daily challenges of their needs, as well as the caregivers supporting the client. Aside from adolescents and families, he works with 20-30-year-olds in learning how to manage the stressors of leaving college and creating their new lifestyles; as well as helping men learn strategies to manage the unique needs they carry and often do not find a confidential place to work.
Understanding the Financial Leap David and Gordon spent a few mastermind sessions talking about this topic. Handle your personal finances as well as setting up business finances. Minimize the debt risk to your home, not in terms of your mortgage, but all of the monthly payments that you need to make. The transition will take your income from a guaranteed paycheck to a variable income, where one month can be significant and the next month not so much – you will still have those payments you need to make. Get rid of as much debt as possible on the personal side. There are a lot of great therapists out there, but they don’t know how to run a business, so their private practices have failed. While on the other hand, there are a lot of great business owners, but they are not therapists.
Starting Private Practice Part-Time To limit financial liability, David suggests starting a private practice part-time so you can begin building a financial buffer while still having a guaranteed paycheck. Make sure you are still in good standing with your employer. David was not prepared to be full-time in private practice financially; he did it on the side to pay down student loan debt. He recognized that his employer would not give him the raise to help him do that. As David’s first night filled up, he moved into doing his private practice two nights a week. It is one of those things you have to weigh in the beginning stages of private practice. If you are working a full-time job, and you depend on that income, don’t quit your day job too quickly. Be prepared financially to make the transition.
Outsourcing Websites David’s website broke the other day; it’s a thorn in his side. When people start a business, they often cannot afford to pay someone to run their website, so they decide to bootstrap it. There are pros and cons to this method. You will find yourself in a situation where you cannot financially afford it. The amount of time that David has wasted trying to do it himself and it not working, probably would have been better off paying someone to run it for him. When you outsource things that are sucking your time, that’s the time you can turn into seeing a client and gaining revenue.
Skills Groups David brought on another therapist to his practice; they worked together at his old employer. They have a similar skill set and experience in a hospital setting, so it was a good fit. Having the opportunity to do the skills groups are a great way to increase revenue. Multiple people in the same room are paying an individual price to participate in the group. David is not losing the hour just because there are two therapists in the same place. By the time they split the revenue, they are making the same they would in an hour. Plus, they get to serve more people at the same time.
The Benefits of A Mastermind Group Gordon finds people are hungry for is a way to have a community that is a little more than social media. The mastermind group that he runs is limited to 6 or 8 people. It is a way for people to get together to talk about their practices and struggles. David was recently part of the mastermind group; Gordon’s next group will be starting in September. To sign up, click HERE.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
David’s Resources Facebook Page www.foundrycounseling.com Other Resources TherapyNotes.com
Join the Mastermind Group >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Killin’It Camp Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon talks again with Whitney Owens, LPC and they discuss the difference between hiring independent contractors versus employees. Overall, hiring an independent contractor is less paperwork, but you will also have less control over their supervision. Then, Whitney explains how she uses promotion groups to bring clients to her practice and how she plans to help private practice owners incorporate faith into their businesses. Plus, the two talk about their upcoming trip to Killin’It Camp!
Meet Whitney Owens I enjoy working with both adults and adolescents on an individual basis. I have experience working with those suffering from depression, anxiety, self-harming behaviors, identity formation, relational issues, and other mood disorders. I use a variety of therapeutic models such as Cognitive Behavioral Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, and Interpersonal Therapy. I have been seeing clients since 2009 in a variety of settings. While earning my Master in Professional Counseling from Richmont Graduate University, I saw young adults at a residential treatment facility. In 2010 I moved to Colorado where I spent four years working at an inpatient and day treatment facility. Also while in Colorado, I joined a group practice and saw teenagers and adults.
In 2014 I moved back to Savannah and started Water’s Edge Counseling. I am a Licensed Professional Counselor in Georgia and a member of the American Counseling Association and the Licensed Professional Counseling Association of Georgia. In addition to counseling, I also offer a number of other services including training and speaking engagements. I have been invited to local organizations such as churches and schools to educate on leadership, adolescent issues, parenting, family concerns, and mental health. As well, I have spoken at retreats focused on helping women heal and find themselves. I have also spoken at youth meetings to adolescents. Please let me know about your next event and how I can help.
Contractors vs. Employees Working with an independent contractor, you cannot tell the therapist what they can and cannot say. Whitney wanted to provide more supervision to her counselors. The same day her last contractor put in her two weeks was the first day she had an interview for a W-2 employee. Having a contractor is less paperwork, but you will not have as much control.
There is way more teamwork with her employees vs. when she had contractors. Plus, morale is a lot better because everyone feels part of the business; they have team meetings, discuss the work they do together and participate in more events. At Christmas, they went out together, and Whitney can pay for continuing education. Run your numbers to understand which one will be more profitable depending on your structure.
Promotion Groups One of the ways Whitney has been able to market her practice is through community promotion groups. Whitney has several connections within a group called Southern Mamas; you pay every six months, and you get to put up something once a week. They add it to their electronic newsletter, and you get to showcase your banner. Whitney says to try new things and see what sticks. Also, make sure to know your numbers when trying out new promotions. For instance, Whitney knows she needs to book three sessions to make up the cost for Southern Mamas.
Faith in Private Practice Whitney had a big idea to help consult other practice owners on how they want to make faith a part of what they do. She also helps with the therapist’s verbiage on their website to attract the right type of clients. Some people want to make faith part of everything they do in their practice, including their name and branding. Whereas others do not want it incorporated with their advertising or branding, but their practice is faith-informed. Gordon tells his clients that he is a clergy person, but he does not have a religious agenda with his counseling.
If you are thinking about a faith-based practice, slow down, and think about what kind of practice you want to have and what type of clients you are looking to attract. The most exciting part should be creating your branding and clients, slow down, and consider what you are building.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Whitney’s Resources Waters Edge Counseling Whitney Owens | Starting Fresh & Growing Fast in Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 036 Email: Whitney@watersedgecounseling.com Call: 912-319-5553 Other Resources Practice Solutions
Faith as a Niche in Private Practice 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Cool Resources G-Suite For Therapists Killin’It Camp Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon and Stacey Lanier, LPC-MHSP discuss their time working together and Stacey’s new business ventures. Stacey describes her transition to private practice and also her tipping point. Then, we learn all about Stacey’s latest business venture – The Atelier, a wellness co-working space for people to have a community of other professionals. Plus, Stacey reveals some of her most significant barriers when it comes to starting this next phase of her professional career.
Meet Stacey Lanier Stacey is a Licensed Professional Counselor, therapreneur, in Nashville where she has been in private practice for twelve years. She is a trauma specialist, a therapist to therapists who also provides supervision to counselors seeking licensure. With her business partner, Dr. Ila Foster, Stacey recently co-founded The Atelier, a co-working wellness space. Stacey has two boys; a college sophomore and a rising high school senior.
The Transition to Private Practice Stacey would advise people to have a plan. Give much forethought and find a mentor, a support person, and a community of people who will set you up for success. Do not just jump in with no safety net. When things get complicated, you should know that you are moving in the right direction. Don’t act impulsively; be intentional about what you are doing.
Stacey’s Tipping Point Stacey already had a network of colleagues – she reached out to them to let them know what she was doing and asked them directly for referrals. Also, she got involved in the community and became part of some professional associations. Stacey was anxious about her practice and getting enough clients. So, her friend told her a metaphor that has stuck with Stacey to this day: when you’re growing something you have to consider that it sleeps, it creeps, and then it leaps.
Stacey’s tipping point was when she could not answer the phone because she was seeing clients. Not being able to answer the phones was the “aha” moment that her practice was working. She started to reach out for help to get her website built and found a virtual assistant.
The Atelier The Atelier is everything Stacey needed when she first started her practice. She did not get a lot of guidance or direction early on. Twelve years ago, there were no podcasts or private practice coaches.
She created this wellness co-working space for people to have a community of other professionals who understand what it is like to build a practice from the ground up. Also, clinicians will have a robust community to receive referrals and ask questions. Private practice can be isolating; this community makes people feel like they are not by themselves when becoming successful practitioners. Plus, they can utilize the space to grow their businesses and see clients!
Barriers for The Atelier It is taking a tremendous effort to get the word out so they can reach their target market. Stacey hired a marketing firm to help them to do just that. Another barrier is trying to help other practitioners understand that this is possible for them. Yes, it is a scary step and a leap of faith. However, you can still do it and experience success with help from others that will make you feel comfortable.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Stacey’s Resources Lanier Counseling and Consulting Stacey’s LinkedIn The Atelier The Atelier on Facebook The Atelier on Instagram Other Resources BrighterVision 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Cool Resources G-Suite For Therapists Practikat Greenoak Accounting TherapyNotes Killin’It Camp Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon talks again with Joe Sanok about the importance of making connections and developing relationships in building your private practice. They also talk all about Killin’It Camp which is an upcoming conference that runs from October 20-23, 2019 in Estes Park, CO. Gordon and Joe discuss how attending the conferences are an investment in personal development as well as the future success of your private practice. Joe tells us all about why we should connect more with people in-person and connect less over social media.
Meet Joe Sanok In 2012 I launched Practice of the Practice to blog about what I was learning about business, marketing, and private practice. Since then, my income has gone up over 2,000%. In the beginning, I was making around $1000 per month. In 2015, I grossed over $200k! In fact, every month I post exactly what I made and how I made it. It’s important to me, because we don’t usually talk about money and how to make it in an ethical way. I want to increase your influence and your income!
Killin’It Camp This conference is for people starting and growing a practice, they are just getting some traction, and they are sick of boring conferences. Typical conferences have a couple of morsels of information after spending thousands of dollars. While on the other hand, Joe is into putting on unique meetings that people leave with tons of stuff done and have a feeling of great accomplishment. There is enough information out there that you can figure this out on your own. However, you will need to spend countless hours on Google, YouTube, and podcasts. Why not just be around people who have done it and rocked it out before? There is something about being in-person with people and making quick, intimate connections while being vulnerable to others.
Connecting with Like-Minded People The importance of making connections with people who are successful and doing things that they know work is essential for a successful private practice. Being in a cohort of people will allow each other to help the group rise up. We want to surround ourselves with other people who are growing in the same direction. The authentic support will allow each other to stay grounded and not let your head get too big.
Killin’It Camp Schedule The first night is to find your people that you want to go deeper with. Joe wants people to feel connected with others right away. Monday and Tuesday will be more extensive sessions and breakout sessions. TherapyNotes recently came on as a major sponsor that will allow them to put on some surprises for their guests. Joe does not have the corner of knowledge and innovation. Collectively, they will be able to put on something unique.
How to “Kill It” in Private Practice Find a community of people you can go more in-depth with. It is essential to surround yourself with the right people. People that kill it have found ways to get information that they can act on quickly. Hire a coach or sign up for a program to find a shortcut for the process. Consuming information makes changes. The knowledge is only as helpful as the action you take. Schedule time to take action and evaluate how you are using your time. Having a virtual assistant and utilizing TherapyNotes are ways to scale your practice.
YMCA of the Rockies Joe started out by doing low ropes and high ropes courses and initially thought he would be doing adventure-based therapy. His first year out of grad school, he applied to be the regional chair. For three years, he was the regional chair of the Midwest, and he would go to the YMCA of the Rockies, surrounded by the Rocky Mountains National Park. The YMCA has kept their prices really reasonable. The hotel rooms do not include TVs, no distractions! There are all sorts of free activities you can sign up for like guided hikes. It is secluded enough that you won’t have an urge to get on your phone and check Facebook. Sign up for the conference now before prices go up!
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Joe’s Resources Practice of the Practice Killin’It Camp Other Resources Brighter Vision FREE Masterclass: Knowing Your Numbers in Private Practice. 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram TherapyNotes Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
In this episode, Gordon talks about what is needed to bring clients to your practice and the various “touch-points” and tipping points that make that possible. In many ways, this episode is about marketing but goes in a little deeper to discuss some of the concepts Gordon has learned from Malcolm Gladwell’s book, The Tipping Point; How Little Things Can Make A Big Difference.
Maven, Connector, and Persuader According to The Tipping Point, there are three types of people: connectors, mavens, and persuaders. Connectors are people who can make connections with others. We are only separated from every other person on the earth by six degrees. Another type of person is a maven, someone who collects information and knows a lot about stuff. Lastly, a persuader is a person who has the gift of persuading others into things. Those of us who are therapists in many ways fit in the persuasion character. We are persuading our clients to find changes in themselves. Most of us have these three characteristics intrinsically by virtue because of the type of profession we are in. We have the ability to engage with people, we have the knowledge, and the persuasion. When we think about marketing our private practice, we should utilize these skills and make connections with the right people.
Get More Clients in Your Practice We need clients to be sitting in front of us, so we can charge our fees and be paid for what we do. When Gordon first started in private practice, it seemed like the number of clients he was getting was hit or miss. He was doing all of this stuff, but he wasn’t getting any clients. Keep doing what you are doing, it takes time! At some point you will reach a sticking point, something will resonate with someone. People need to know that you are providing services. It is essential to get out and do things – like making sure your website has SEO and blogging to get content out there.
How Clients Find Therapy 1. There are people out there that recognize they need help, so they will search you out directly. It usually is because they have a particular problem they are dealing with. When these people search for you online, you need to have the right search terms embedded in your website. For example, if someone is depressed, they might search “I’m feeling depressed, how do I find help?” So you will want the word depressed to be linked to you in one way or another.
-
There are people out there that need help but do not realize they need the support yet. You can market to this. People may be experiencing anxiety or depression, but they don’t have the label for it. Clients will describe their life to Gordon. For example, “I don’t sleep well. I can’t turn my brain off.” Typically, Gordon will give it a label and the light bulb will go off in their head. Try and use this type of language in your social media so they can make the connection.
-
People who refer to you. In particular, relationships with doctors and other professionals who see people that are struggling but may not realize they need help. The professionals will give the referral for them to see you.
-
They are not experiencing any problems, but because they know about you, they remember who you are. They may not need help themselves, but they can recall you when something does come up.
Keep Marketing There is no one foolproof way of getting clients through the door. You have to get your name out there and get yourself known. When you reach a certain critical mass in your practice, you will reach a tipping point of your practice. Keep doing all those things that you know are good marketing practices. There is no magic bullet with a particular method. You can do several different things. Be persistent and patient with the process. Gordon is consistently putting stuff out on the internet and persistently making a connection in the community. Many of Gordon’s clients refer his practice to a friend. Also, because he is active in the community, he gets many referrals from doctors and other professionals. If you keep it up, it will pay off!
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Brighter Vision- Website Design and Branding Being a Private Practice Maven FREE Masterclass: Knowing Your Numbers in Private Practice. 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Follow @TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook
Gordon’s first ever guest on the Practice of Therapy Podcast is back! Dr. David Hall of PsychMaven discusses how he has felt unqualified in more than one business venture. One of the ways David has followed his passion is by starting a continuing education group called The Narrative Institute. Also, David touches on some ethical issues in private practice and gives a little sneak peek into what he and Gordon will be presenting on at the 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences. Later, David and Gordon discuss why you should diversify your income and how to start earning passive income.
Meet David Hall Dr. Stephen “David” Hall heads up content and creative direction as the “Chief Maven” of PsychMaven. He began his work as a psychotherapist in 2005, and he currently holds clinical licenses in Family Therapy and Mental Health Counseling. He has built up multiple counseling practices in his years as a clinician, first in Georgia and then in his home state of Tennessee. In 2015, he led the start-up of an independent psychiatry clinic, Haven Family Psychiatry, in Knoxville, TN. Dr. Hall maintains a psychotherapy caseload and supervises postgraduate therapists in the practice he leads in the clinic, Haven Counseling Center at Haven Family Psychiatry.
Feeling Unqualified David started a continuing education group called The Narrative Institute. He had no idea how to start one of these groups, he figured it out as he went along. He also figured out how to run a private practice as he went along. A lot of people are hesitant to jump in, they do not feel qualified to do something. David has done lots of things that he hasn’t felt qualified to do. Doing continuing education events has led David to create PsychMaven. He first became familiar with word maven in Malcolm Gladwell’s book, The Tipping Point. A maven is an enthusiast or a connoisseur who is interested in spreading the information they get and wish to be helpful.
Ethics The first paid workshop David did for The Narrative Institutewas an ethics workshop. He did it because it was a topic that everyone needed to know. He was also determined to make ethics relevant and not boring. For the most part, ethics can be very relevant. The topic they will be touching on at the 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences is ethics in private practice. Doing things ethically and above the board is essential as a smart business move. It will keep your business sustainable. In addition, they will discuss fee disbursements and accurate advertising at the conferences.
Passive Income and Diversifying Income Many entrepreneurs are interested in creating passive income. David creates on-demand continuing education to supply passive income. Some states require fifty percent of the workshops you do to be in-person. However, many states do not place any limits on doing continuing education online. Once you take out the barriers of geography and time for ongoing training, then the doors will open. Find something that feels exciting and natural to you. There is not just one way to diversify your income. Imitating someone else in a way that is not organic to yourself will eventually be a burden. Find something that you love to create an alternative source of income.
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
David’s Resources The Narrative Institute PsychMaven on Teachable: use coupon code: GORDON (ends 7/14/19) Life-Hacks for Caseload Building (Free Mini-Course) Psychotherapist Start-Up Kit PsychMaven PsychMaven on Facebook PsychMaven on Instagram PsychMaven on LinkedIn Haven Family Psychiatry Other Resources Brighter Vision
Building a StoryBrand with Donald Miller 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course FREE Masterclass: Knowing Your Numbers in Private Practice. July 12th at 12 noon Eastern Follow TPOTpodcast on Instagram Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
What if the real key to a more productive and fulfilling career was not to create and scale a new start-up, but rather, to be able to work for yourself, determine your own hours, and become a sustainable company of one? In this episode, Paul Jarvis explains why the smarter solution is to do just that. Gordon and Paul also discuss how to work toward simplicity and the importance of building relationships in business.
Meet Paul Jarvis: Paul Jarvis is a writer and designer who’s had his own company of one for the last two decades. His latest book, Company of One, explores why bigger isn’t always better in business. He’s worked with professional athletes like Steve Nash and Shaquille O’Neal, corporate giants like Microsoft and Mercedes-Benz, and entrepreneurs with online empires like Danielle LaPorte and Marie Forleo. Currently, he teaches popular online courses, hosts several podcasts and develops small but mighty software solutions.
**Bigger Isn’t Always Better** If people are working from home, then others think they do not have a legitimate business. Paul is a one-person business, he does work with contractors but has never hired an employee because he doesn’t want to be a boss. We should reconsider the idea that bigger is always better. Paul’s book isn’t about anti-growth, it is thinking critically about growth. The key is to think about how the business works and runs. If we grew our businesses, we would have to hire people and then become a manager. Is that the position you want to put yourself in?
Working Towards Simplicity Think about all the processes that are involved and see where they can be made more efficient or cost effective. People will pay for a lot of different software products and subscriptions. Bookkeeping software can be expensive, that’s why Paul still uses a worksheet. The fewer expenses you have, the sooner you can reach profitability each month. Paying for a scheduling program makes total sense and is worth the investment. There are so many other things you can reconsider how much you are paying for and if it is necessary. In the beginning, working towards simplicity is hard work because it requires critical thinking and questioning. However, once you make your processes more straightforward, it will be worth it in the long run.
Building Relationships Paul loves marketing, it is one of his favorite things. People who are not in sales feel a little queasy about it. Marketing is really just communicating with other people. When Paul has a new product, he makes an announcement that it could be of value to others. If someone hits reply to Paul’s newsletter, he’s going to see it and respond. A lot of businesses in tech focus on acquisition over retention. They want more new customers. That’s an expensive, costly, and challenging way to do business. Think about the customers you already have, and how can you help them more? Make it so they don’t want to leave or stop paying. For Paul, this is more interesting and more exciting because he already knows his customers.
Paul’s Resources Company of One, The Podcast Paul’s Website Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Other Resources
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Brighter Vision PsychMaven 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course FREE Masterclass: Knowing Your Numbers in Private Practice. July 12th at 12 noon Eastern
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Dr. Tara Vossenkemper about how to know what you are doing as a clinician is working. Tara recently started a group practice and looks at lots of different numbers to determine how the business is operating. Also, Tara and her clinicians use multiple different methods to determine if their clients have valuable experiences during therapy. Stay tuned to hear about anonymous feedback surveys, DAS screening, Outcome Rating Scales, and Session Rating Scales.
Meet Tara Vossenkemper Tara Vossenkemper is the owner of The Counseling Hub, a group practice in Columbia Missouri, a clinician within her practice, and a burgeoning private practice consultant under her own name [www.taravossenkemper.com]. Clinically, she is heavily invested in working with couples and relationships, as well as existential crises. She’s also really into the business logistics of running a group counseling practice and constantly strives for improvement. Tara takes very few things seriously in life, with the exception of her clinical work, the health of her practice, the growth of her clinicians, and helping other practices flourish. Measuring the Group Practice Tara has seven clinicians and uses the 1099 (contractor) model of hiring people, although she would like to switch to a W-2 (employee) model. She specializes in couples work, marriage counseling, and existential crises. Tara does not have KPI’s (key performance indicators) in mind. Some things that she does pay attention to are conversion rates, number of sessions, number of cancellations, attendance rates, retention per clinician, gross revenue per clinician, and profit per clinician.
Dashboard Tara started with an Excel spreadsheet and would track on her KPI’s. Her Excel sheets automatically do the calculations on their own like averages, running totals, and quarterly totals, whereas initially, she was counting everything up. Now she is using Google Sheets because they allow you to import cells from other sheets. Tara can spend hours working on the dashboard, it’s fun! Gordon says you can create a Google form that will automatically populate to a Google sheet. The Google sheet will then do the calculations for you. These are some of the favorite tools that come with Google G-Suite.
Measuring Efficiency Tara assesses whether or not her clinical work is effective by doing check-ins with her clients. She asks questions such as: How is it working for you? How are we doing? Are we a good fit for each other? She has these obvious and essential conversations with her clients to ensure they are working well together.
Anonymous Feedback Surveys Tara has also started implementing anonymous feedback surveys. They send out surveys after the intake sessions and after the termination of sessions. The first leg is focused on the clinician and asking questions like if they are safe and heard. The termination survey is about the clinician and also the effectiveness of the therapy. Did the client get what they came for?
DAS Screening Giving clients a DAS (depression, anxiety, and stress) screening is part of their intake. It is not a diagnostic measure, it just a screening tool. Not only do they use the screening at intake, but they use it for follow-ups at three and six months. Ideally, in therapy, the depression, anxiety, and stress numbers should be decreasing.
ORS and SRS In addition, Tara and her clinicians use an Outcome Rating Scale (ORS). It helps them determine how the client has been feeling and how well they have been doing in certain areas of their life. For instance, the client determines how they are doing individually, interpersonally, socially, and overall. They will also use a Session Rating Scale (SRS) that determines how well they related with the clinician. The sheets were created by Barry L. Duncan, Scott D. Miller, and Jacqueline A. Sparks.
Low Scores Tara is pretty particular about what people they bring on as clinicians. Very rarely do they have concerns on session rating scales. If they get a low score, you can help that person develop as a clinician and deepen their interactions with clients. You also want to be thinking about if the person is working with the right clientele. Perhaps you are setting them up with someone who has other needs than what the clinician provides.
Tara’s Resources The Counseling Hub www.taravossenkemper.com Email: Tara@TaraVossenkemper.com
Other Resources
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Brighter Vision 2019 East & West TNAMFT Conferences Killin’It Camp G-Suite for Therapists >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course FREE Masterclass: Knowing Your Numbers in Private Practice. July 12th at 12 noon Eastern Outcome Rating Scale (ORS) Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTPodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon answers questions he has received from multiple listeners concerning hiring employees or contractors, and how to pay them. First, Gordon explains the difference between hiring an employee versus hiring a contractor. Hiring a contractor is undoubtedly the more straightforward route and will mean less oversight and less paperwork for the business owner. Hiring an employee is more complicated for the business owner as they will have to withhold certain taxes and pay different insurances. Stay tuned to find out why Gordon switched all his contractors over to employees at the beginning of the year, and then Gordon explains the different ways to compensate your therapists.
Independent Contractors Having independent contractors is a great model for having people on board. The advantages of having a contractor are less paperwork and less oversight on your part. You do not have to worry about withholding income tax, Medicare, and social security; the contractor will be responsible for doing this on their own. The contractor is operating as a separate business entity from your practice. You will be more hands-off with a contractor, the IRS is particular about that. One mistake a lot of people make is hiring people as contractors but treating them as employees. Be familiar with your state laws around contractors, some states do not allow you to hire contractors for your practice. Talk to someone who is an employment expert to make sure you are aware of these things.
Employees Employees report to you directly, you have to do withholding taxes, pay for unemployment insurance, and provide some sort of workman’s comp insurance. Hiring an employee is more complicated and requires a lot more paperwork. Because hiring a contractor is more straightforward, it does not mean it will be better for your practice. At the beginning of the year, Gordon switched all his contractors to employees. This switch happened because Gordon started to pay better attention to his numbers and what it costs him to keep them on. It was a better deal for the business to switch them over to employees from a profit perspective.
Compensation The typical fee split for most places is 50/50. Some sites do a 60/40 split, therapists keep 60%, and the practice holds 40%. Another way to compensate is a flat rate per session. In other words, you agree to an amount you will pay per session. A more traditional method of compensation is by paying the therapist an hourly rate. Lastly, you can compensate by paying a salary. The way you choose to compensate people is going to depend on the size of your practice, understanding what the cost of labor is, and knowing your overhead.
Ethics Gordon has heard from some people that they are discouraged from doing a fee split because of an ethical standpoint. Regardless of how you pay your employees, all of them are fee splits. In other words, you are collecting a certain amount from a client and then paying your employee with that money. For the practice to stay open, it has to make a profit. You have to keep part of the fee that is collected from your clients. All of these compensation plans are fee splits if you think about it that way.
Percentage Fee Splits Usually, the percentage method works better for contractors. Typically a fee split is only paid out to your contractor after you have collected the money from the client. With insurance, there is a delay in getting paid, you have to wait for the claims to get filed before paying your therapist.
Flat Rate Flat rates work well with both employees and contractors. Let’s say you collect $100 per session, and you pay your therapist $50 per session. If you are on insurance panels, you might only get $85 per session or $60 per session. You still agree to pay your therapist $50 per session. You need to have some money in the reserve to do this. It a good idea to have a financial buffer to cover costs, expenses, and paying yourself. Two months minimum or more is best for your financial buffer. Do your numbers, and find out what you need to have on hand.
Hourly and Salary Rates If someone works eight hours that day, you pay them at an hourly rate. It could be $15 – $20 an hour, and you pay them whether or not they are seeing clients. (The average salary for counselors and therapists in the U.S. , as of 2019, is around $43,000 a year.)
Incentives and Benefits If you want to give somebody a raise, you have to know how to do that. Work out with each individual therapist what their rates are. Gordon has levels of therapists; he has interns, level-1 therapists, and level-2 therapists. Once a therapist has been with Gordon for 2 years, then they have the opportunity to move up to a level-2 therapist which will come with higher rates across the board. What sort of benefits are you going to offer in your practice? Gordon wanted to be able to offer health insurance and profit sharing plans to his therapists so that is a big reason he switched from contractors to employees.
Resources Mentioned…
Being transparent… Some of the resources below use affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using the links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Brighter Vision >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course Business Models for Private Counseling Practices Julie Herres | Private Practice Accounting and Bookkeeping Strategies | TPOT Podcast 082 Smart Passive Income StoryBrand FREE Masterclass: Knowing Your Numbers in Private Practice. July 12th at 12 noon Eastern Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon discusses some things he has learned so far about private practice. Being in private practice is an ongoing process as you grow. It is important to be prepared to change things as time goes on. Ultimately you can do what you want to do in your way. Don’t measure what you are doing by what others are doing. Always celebrate the small wins, and focus on one thing at a time. Know when to outsource and invest in things to make allow you the best use of your time.
Ongoing Process Being in private practice is an ongoing process, you cannot set it and forget it. You cannot approach it in this way because there is constant change. Embrace the idea that you are going to be continually changing and updating things. One thing most people get stuck on is doing everything the right way. There is no one correct way, do it the way you want to do it and be happy with that.
Find an EHR Another lesson about private practice is to find the electronic health record system that works best for you. Gordon loves TherapyNotes because it helps him stay organized and HIPAA compliant. If you want to have a paperless office, then you should find an EHR system that will allow for that. However, there are some people out there that prefer to be low-tech and do paper paperwork, which is perfectly fine!
Don’t Compare Remember not to compare your beginning point with somebody’s middle. There are a lot of very successful private practice consultants out there that are good friends with Gordon. If he were to measure what he is doing with what someone else is doing, it would create a lot of anxiety. Some of the people out there have been doing it a lot longer than Gordon, so comparing the two would not make sense.
Celebrate the Small Wins You do not have to always go for tremendous growth. There is a concept that bigger is better, and success is measured by some sort of magic number. One of the things Gordon has figured out and learned along the way is that your lifestyle is essential. How you live your life, and your comfort level is more important than going after the shiny objects. It is better for you to make your practice profitable rather than overgrowing.
Break Things Down When we get overwhelmed, the best thing to do is to break things down into smaller pieces and do one thing at a time. If you could imagine having your garage crammed full of stuff all the way to the ceiling and you were tasked with reorganizing it, you would just do one item at a time. You would start in one corner, take everything out, and decide what to do with it one piece at a time. In your practice, just work on one thing at a time and make it work really well.
Ultimately, being in private practice allows you the freedom and flexibility to do things your way. There are best practices that will help you succeed, but in the end, it is YOUR practice. You get to be the boss and decide what works best for you.
Being transparent…Some of the resources listed below are affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission if you purchase using those links, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Mentioned Brighter Vision
Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course TherapyNotes Cool Resources Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon and accountant Julie Herres discuss common mistakes private practice owners make in regard to accounting. The first mistake is not knowing your numbers. Some standard numbers every owner should know are how much you are bringing in, your overhead, variable costs, and how much you need to take home each month. Another common mistake private practice owners make is not spending enough money?! Julie explains how essential it is to start spending money in order to make more money. For instance, once you have a waiting list, it must be time to start a group practice. Another example of spending money to make more money is when you need to outsource things to become more productive.
Meet Julie Herres Julie Herres is the owner of GreenOak Accounting. The firm provides bookkeeping, accounting, CFO and tax services to mental health private practice owners throughout the United States. When Julie founded GreenOak Accounting she started working with a few therapists. Over time, more and more therapist referrals came in and she started noticing trends across the practices that were thriving. Based on those trends she developed success ratios as a way to quickly determine the health of a practice.
Today, GreenOak Accounting’s focus on mental health private practice is intentional and geared towards helping business owners understand the story that their numbers are telling. Julie understands what’s involved in managing and growing a practice and is uniquely positioned to be a trusted advisor to clients.
Knowing Your Numbers GreenOak Accounting lets private practice owners take a chunk out of their day and allow them to focus on their business. Not knowing your numbers is the first mistake private practice owners make. You need to know high-level things like how much you are bringing in each much, your overhead, your variable costs, and how much you need to take home each month to take care of your family. Private practices owners tend to take money out of the business when they need it. This method can severely hurt business operations eventually when it catches up with you. One example of knowing your numbers is knowing how much your advertising costs. Then, you can calculate how much it costs you to bring in a new patient to your practice.
Not Spending Enough Money Another big mistake private practice owners make is not spending enough money. At one point in your practice, it will make more sense to outsource some of your efforts. For instance, you can outsource answering the phone and working on your website. By paying someone twenty dollars an hour to do these things, you could be making fifty to one-hundred dollars an hour in the meantime. Most therapists outsource their bookkeeping and answering questions from their websites. Whenever something starts stressing you out, stop doing it!
Renting Space Where do you want to be in six to twelve months? If you’re going to start a group practice, set yourself up for success, so you have that room for growth. Cheaper is not always better when it comes to renting space. You could also get a shorter lease so that way, the commitment will not hold you back when your practice starts to grow.
Paying Your First Hire Too Much You have gotten to a point where you are overwhelmed, you are seeing too many patients, and you have a waitlist. At this point, you know you need to hire someone to help out. Many private practice owners will make them an offer that is typically too much and is not scalable. If you were to scale it times ten, you would need a bigger space and admin. Gordon was very generous when he first hired therapists to work for him, and it really was not sustainable. If you know your numbers well, then you will know exactly what your payroll should be.
Profit First Success ratios are when you split expenses into four main categories:
1. Overhead
2. Administrative Pay
3. Salaries
4. Owner’s Pay
For solo practitioners:
1. Overhead: 20% – 40%
2. Administrative Pay: 0% – 10%
3. Salaries: 0%
4. Owner’s Pay: 50%
For group practices:
1. Overhead: 15% – 25%
2. Administrative Pay: 5% – 10%
3. Salaries: 50% – 60%
4. Owner’s Pay & Profit: 15% – 30%
Resources Mentioned
Being Transparent… Some of the resources below are affiliate links. This simply means that when you use the links to make a purchase, we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you. Thanks fo using the links!
Julie’s Resources GreenOak Accounting Call GreenOak Accounting: (571) 208-2065 Julie’s LinkedIn Other Resources Brighter Vision Killin’It Camp TNAMFT Conference Money Matters in Private Practice | The Course G-Suite for Therapists The Empathy Rising Podcast Mike Michalowicz | Using PROFIT FIRST in Your Private Practice Mike Michalowicz | Using PROFIT FIRST in Your Private Practice (part 2) Kasey Compton | Systems, Processes, & Growing a Million Dollar Private Practice Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Marissa Lawton about thinking outside the box in regards to how you are going to run a private practice. Most people in graduate school tend to go through it with an idea of getting clinical training, then working for someone else. However, there are many different ways your career can lead you. One way to diversify income is by solving a particular problem and learning how to articulate precisely what you do. Later, Marissa discusses how to shift your mindset from therapy to entrepreneurship and explains the difference between coaching and therapy.
Meet Marissa Lawton “I’m passionate about bringing my two loves together: strategy and therapy, to help my therapeutic community thrive in the online space. It is seriously one of the most important aspects of my life to help other therapists create on-brand messages that target their ideal clients and build the private practices they’ve always longed for.”
Marissa’s mission is to help clinicians in various stages of private practice to create online marketing plans that attract clients with integrity and authenticity. Marissa says, “there is seriously no point in portraying yourself online in a way that contradicts who you are in session, no matter how many calls it brings you. When you invite me to help you with your online marketing, you’re partnering with someone who takes your practice, your goals, and your dreams into consideration. You’re getting a guide who promises to walk alongside you every step of the way.”
Income Streams The big choice Marissa helps people make is if they are going to create a practice of their own or are they going to be more self-reliant and create an income stream of their own. Marissa likes to help people with coming up with their individual income streams. People get stuck with the one-on-one business model, trading money for your time. However, you can start group coaching and serve people from all over the country or even the world. No longer does your income need to come from the business model that we are most familiar with. This is the reason Gordon was pushed to start his podcast in the first place!
Mindset Shift The most significant mindset shift Marissa sees is that a lot of therapists still do not see themselves as entrepreneurs. Starting a private practice is very much starting a business. Whereas, other people have the entrepreneurial bug and are continually looking for the next thing. It takes a simple mindset reframing to understand that they are capable of running a successful business. Some people may not want to start a group practice, but they are still looking for ways to scale their business.
Entrepreneurship Embrace the idea that you are an entrepreneur is the first step to increasing income streams. Entrepreneurs do not have to be someone like Steve Jobs or Bill Gates, that is only one type of entrepreneur. There are different types of entrepreneurs:
-
Achievement – people like Steve Jobs and Bill Gates.
-
Social – people who are looking to make the world a better place.
-
Lifestyle – people who may choose entrepreneurship for the lifestyle that comes along with it.
Coaching vs. Therapy What’s the difference between coaching and therapy? Coaching solves a specific problem. One of Marissa’s clients does a three-month coaching package, and all she is doing is addressing the issue of fighting couples. The first 30 days are figuring out what couples should do just to stop fighting. Day 30 – 60 they are working on some de-escalation strategies. From day 60 – 90, they are figuring out to stop the fight in the first place. Coaching is a great way to diversify your income and create another stream of revenue.
Being transparent… some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you, if you use the links to purchase. Thanks for using the links!
Resources Mentioned Therapy Notes Practice Solutions Money Matters in Private Practice Marissa Lawton’s Resources Marissa’s Website The Empathy Rising Podcast Side Hustle Support Group Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTPodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Vanessa Lech about her anger management and addiction niches. Vanessa reveals some unconventional private practice strategies and shares ways to diversify your income streams. Find out why Vanessa says the number one way to diversify your income is through your thought process. Then, Gordon and Vanessa discuss working with people in the criminal justice system and becoming a court mediator.
Meet Vanessa Lech In one way or another, I have worked in the healthcare industry for most of my adult life. I previously served in the U.S. Army and now own and serve clients at Carolina Addiction and Anger Management PLLC,located in Raleigh, NC.
I continuously channel my creative passions, love of design and art with my knowledge on various topics having written non-fiction books, created an anger management therapy game/tool for licensed clinicians and creating/hosting a podcast that I am VERY proud of entitled: “Unraveled: Addiction & Anger Management” where expert guests are featured. When I’m not working, I’m most likely spending time with my dogs and resting up for whatever the future may have for me.
Diversifying Income Often therapists believe all their sessions need to have one-on-one attention. Individual therapy can be really draining for some, so doing only one-on-one sessions is an easy way to experience burnout. Some therapists end up doing eight to twelve of these sessions in one day. Many people try to look at diversifying income after they have reached the point of burnout; however, this is an awful time to start looking. Therapists should be looking to diversify their income as a preventative action rather than an afterthought.
The number one way to diversify your income is your thought process, you have to be creative in your thinking. For Vanessa, it all started when she was still in school and she started writing her own books on health and wellness topics. These creative projects are a passion for Venessa and help her relieve stress while also diversifying her income; the books helped energize her and simply started as a hobby. Venessa has an online retail store that is entirely separate from her private practice.
Anger Management Game Vanessa was working at a crisis center, and her peers did not want to work with clients in the criminal justice system. While working with these clients, she noticed a shortage of adult therapy tools; so, she created a gender-neutral therapy game. At first, Vanessa used glue and old business cards. After seeing how well it worked, she got it professionally made at a factory in the United States. This game was never about making money, she started it to assist with her work and realized other people could benefit from using it too.
Unconventional Practices With a big move to Virginia on the horizon, Vanessa is thinking about doing DUI groups for court-ordered people after the transition. Currently, Vanessa does a lot of court-ordered type anger management groups. Her practice is unconventional in the sense that it will be virtual, groups, individuals, voluntary, and court-ordered. Having a variety will prevent burnout, people are moving toward virtual the world, and she enjoys working with people in the criminal justice system. There is also a need for people to work with the military community, most people are not familiar with the requirements of people in the military culture.
Vanessa has seen firsthand a lot of clinicians run away from calls with lawyers. You cannot be scared of people in that world if you are going to work with clients in the criminal justice system. You will have to market your services and have your systems in place. However, a lot of lawyers wants to hire other lawyers to be mediators. Another thing to keep in mind is that some states have rules and may require you to do things at a specific rate.
Resources Mentioned
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links which simply means if you purchase using the links we get a commission, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Practice Solutions Money Matters in Private Practice Vanessa Lech’s Resources Therapist Assets Carolina Addiction and Anger Management Instagram: @govanessalech Podcast: Unraveled Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Brad Pliner, the CEO, and Founder of TherapyNotes. Brad discloses his background and what inspired him to start TherapyNotes. Then, we learn why clinicians who use TherapyNotes will pass an audit with flying colors. Brad explains the benefits of keeping notes in an electronic health record system and how security is the top priority of TherapyNotes. TherapyNotes even keeps backups for your records, so Brad suggests ditching the paper record keeping method altogether. Later, Brad and Gordon discuss using EHR with insurance panels and the way TherapyNotes has streamlined the process of submitting a claim.
Meet Brad Pliner Brad Pliner is the CEO and co-founder of TherapyNotes, LLC. He graduated with his Master’s Degree in Computer Science from Drexel University. Shortly after Drexel, Brad launched Pliner Solutions, Inc., which provided custom web application development and IT consulting services, including to several clients in the healthcare industry. Later, upon recognizing a market need for good practice management and electronic medical records solution for behavioral health, he started TherapyNotes with his wife, psychologist Debra Pliner, Ph.D. TherapyNotes quickly became the leading practice management software for behavioral health therapists, counselors, and psychologists.
The Golden Thread When Brad did web development, he got to learn about lots of different types of industries. Now he knows all about what it means to be a therapist and run a practice. TherapyNotes caters to smaller private practices. Most psychologists and therapists do not like the business side of private practice. Gordon’s favorite thing about TherapyNotes is the to-do list, it helps him to ensure his notes get completed. People get audited all the time; when they are using TherapyNotes, they pass with flying colors. What was on your claim will match exactly what is on your notes. You cannot submit a claim unless you write the notes first. Features like automatically copying information from prior notes make writing them a breeze. Clinicians can type up progress notes in about four or five minutes using this tool.
Electronic Health Record Systems If you wait too long, it will be difficult to adjust to EHR. As you grow your practice, you can then utilize the additional features TherapyNotes has such as automatic calendar reminders. Brad suggests immediately starting with an electronic health record system. Documenting and storing your records in a HIPAA compliment matter is essential to keep your systems in place and ensure proper payments are being made. The sooner, the better!
Insurance Panels & EHR You do not have to be in network with an insurance company to submit claims. Even if you are out of network and you want to help your clients get reimbursed sooner, Brad suggests using online claims. In TherapyNotes it will tell you whether or not enrollment is required, they will get you the forms you need at no additional charge. Many insurance companies do not require any enrollment and will accept claims immediately. TherapyNotes has billing partners they work with and they are very familiar with the platform.
Do you need backup records? With every one of their clients, TherapyNotes makes sure the records are safe and will notify the client if there is a problem. Brad suggests that clinicians do not keep separate records because it will be another item on their plate that they will have to keep HIPAA compliant. TherapyNotes keeps their own backups in multiple locations to make sure if there is a significant disaster that all the records will still be safe.
Appointment Reminders Patients can request appointments, cancellations, or adjustments for the clinician. Just because a patient requests an appointment, does not mean they are booked. The clinician will approve it or either call or work it out with the client. Appointment reminders are a feature of the platform that their clinicians love. A robotic voice will call their clients and remind them of their appointments. The cost of this is easily offset because you will be reducing your no-shows. Integrated credit card processing assists with no shows as well. No one wants to come in for therapy and then have to deal with the payment, that is another reason to get your client’s credit card information on file.
Being transparent... Some of the resources listed below are affiliate links. This simply means we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you, if you use the links to make a purchase. Thanks for using the links!
Brad’s Resources TherapyNotes TherapyNotes on Facebook Resources Mentioned G Suite For Therapists E-Course G Suite AWeber 191: How to Use G Suite As a Tool For Managing a Private Practice Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Melvin Varghese of Selling the Couch Podcast. Melvin shares what inspired him to start the podcast and all the challenges he has faced along the way. Eventually, people reached out to Melvin and wanted to know exactly how to start a podcast. This led Marvin to create webinars and an online community to help others get started on their podcasting path.
Meet Melvin Varghese Melvin Varghese, Ph.D. is a licensed psychologist in private practice in Philadelphia, PA. In 2015, he launched Selling The Couch (sellingthecouch.com), a podcast and blog to help our field learn the business and marketing lessons we don’t often learn in our training. On the podcast, he interviews successful practitioners about how they’ve built their businesses and shares lessons he’s learning on his own business journey. The podcast was one of the top new podcasts when it launched and has since been downloaded over 700k and is heard in over 125 countries. Melvin also founded The Healthcasters (sellingthecouch.com/healthcasters), a community of over 200 health/wellness business owners using podcasting to share their message while growing their businesses.
Selling the Couch Melvin loves the thought of doing an audio podcast because he doesn’t have to be all dressed up. The second reason he started a podcast is to be part of a growing medium. He realized we are at the tip of the iceberg in terms of podcasting. It has grown now; fifty-one percent of the US population is listening to podcasts. Seven years ago if you asked someone what a podcast was, they would have no idea! At first, Melvin was terrified of starting a podcast. He is shy and had a bit of imposter syndrome. It took a lot of courage; ultimately he did not want to live a life of regret.
Income in Private Practice If all you do is focus on income generation, you are eventually going to burn out. Time flexibility and creating a lifestyle that makes sense is far more critical than the money you will make. When a person reaches a net income of around $150,000 annually, then it just becomes unmanageable. Their quality of life will not increase with additional money. It is better to have a strong foundation that lasts long-term rather than something that takes off quickly and fizzles out.
Podcasting Melvin figured out everything on his own and made just about every mistake in the book. After starting his podcast, people began reaching out for help with starting their podcast. He thought about creating a community for health and wellness business owners to start podcasts. Melvin has an e-course, an online community, and monthly phone calls. Podcasting is a service-based platform; you get to share your knowledge and expertise. People from all over the world can hear what you say. For example, Melvin’s first episode had nine downloads (five from family members). Now it is approaching 700,000 downloads. He records his podcast from a home office in Philadelphia.
Melvin’s Resources Selling the Couch Selling the Couch Facebook Community The HealthCasters Email: Melvin@SellingTheCouch.com Resources Mentioned
Being transparent… some of the resources below contain affiliate links. This simply means that if you make a purchase using the link, we get a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
191: How to Use G Suite As a Tool For Managing a Private Practice Practice Solutions Money Matters in Private Practice >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Products from Amazon.com * -46% Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Price: $14.15 Was: $26.00 * -58% Rework Price: $10.98 Was: $26.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcat, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks about making the transition from part-time to full-time in private practice. It’s a question Gordon gets pretty frequently. First, ask yourself what is your “why”… why do you want to be in private practice, to begin with? Gordon started his private practice to focus more of his attention on his family and pursue his passion of helping people, being a practice owner and entrepreneur. The most significant factor to consider when moving to full-time is having a financial buffer. Later, Gordon discusses how to adopt the right mindset and to give yourself permission to not have a sense of urgency about it. Give yourself whatever time you may need to make the transition into private practice. Be meticulous and methodical about it.
Ask Yourself Why Working for someone else limits the time you want to spend in your own life. One of the places to start when thinking of going into private practice is to really ask yourself why. For Gordon, his why was because his wife was diagnosed with breast cancer. In addition, his daughter was entering high school, and he wanted to spend time on band trips. Gordon started his private practice while working for an agency to bring in some extra income. In the back of his mind, he knew it was something he would eventually do full-time.
Moving to Full-Time Make sure it is financially viable to make a move into full-time private practice. Do not quit your day job until you know there is a buffer in place. In other words, you have money saved away to help you make the transition. In Gordon’s journey, he saw people on the weekends and during evenings. As word started to spread, things began to pick up, and he built a website. Once he had his site up things really started to pick up. People were finding him online and through his website. Once a part-time job surfaced at his ministry, he knew the salary would be a big enough buffer to assist with the transition to private practice. Then, he reached the point where he needed to quit his part-time job and pursue private practice full-time.
Financial Buffers First, Gordon realized he would need to support himself solely on his part-time job and use all the money from his private practice to put into savings. He opened a money market account which is an interest-bearing account to save away enough money to transition into full-time private practice. Another way to have financial stability is by starting a group practice. It will allow you to rely not only on your income but the income of others. Make plans in advance for retirement and health insurance, you do not want to consider these things when it is too late down the road. At a very minimum, two months of your salary will be a decent buffer to get you going. Also, look at how you can diversify your income streams. Gordon started a group practice to diversify his income and reap the benefits of another person’s work.
Resources Mentioned
Being Transparent… some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means we get a commission, at no extra cost to you, if you use the links to make a purchase. Thanks for using the links!
Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice G-Suite For Therapists Products from Amazon.com * -46% Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Price: $14.15 Was: $26.00 * Million Dollar Practice: Five Steps to Make Sure Your Group is on Track Price: Check on Amazon * -32% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $18.36 Was: $27.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon discusses some life adjustments he has made lately and some of the things to consider when starting a group practice. Once you start having more clients than your capacity allows, it may be time to start a group practice. Starting a group practice means hiring people to work for and there are two options, employees or contractors. Employees are people who work directly for you; however, there are lots of different expenses to consider. While on the other hand, contractors can have fewer expenses, but you will have little control over how they see their clients.
Group Practice When Gordon thinks about group practices, usually he sees it done when people reach some growing pains. Typically a practice will be full, and they have maxed out the number of clients they can see in a week as a solo practitioner. Then, they start a waitlist. Once you have more clients than you can actually see that is when you can begin thinking about starting a group practice. Bringing on other counselors is a viable option when you have an overflow of clients. Instead of extending the hours of your day, adding people to your practice will allow you to relieve some of the logistical pressures of running a business.
Contractors In the contractor model, you have less oversight over what that person does. You can maybe give them a parameter of what to do, but you cannot oversee entirely how they are doing their job. An example and comparison of this is when a person might hire a contractor to do some home improvements. You can explain what you want to be done, but you don’t tell the contractor how they needed to get it done or provide any tools. The upside of having contractors that you do not have as much paperwork to worry about or the different overhead costs.
Compensation Contractors typically get paid per session they hold. This can be a flat rate that is agreed upon by both parties. For instance, you can charge the client one-hundred dollars per session but agree to pay your contractor fifty dollars for each session completed. Another way to compensate is a fee split. This works particularly well for people on insurance panels. You would pay the person based on the percentage you collect. For example, you can use a fifty/fifty split. However, in different states, there are laws against fee splitting. Remember, you still have to cover your costs as the owner, so it is essential to understand the amount of money needed to keep the business running.
Employees Check with employment experts in your area about local laws for paying people. Obviously, you will need to meet the minimum wage or paying something close to that with a salary. The other thing to consider around the payment of employees is exempt employees. Exempt employees are professionals and more leeway around how you compensate them. An exempt employee is a salaried employee or paid on a per-case basis. There will be more costs associated with employees in terms of taxes. The employer is expected to pay half of the Medicare and Social Security portion of FICA. Whereas self-employed people pay all of it themselves. Another expense is unemployment insurance. The federal government requires you to pay this cost to have an employee. Because you are helping in other ways besides straight compensation, you can justify paying a lower salary and may save money in the long run.
Resources Mentioned Download the Private Practice Business Model InfoGraphic for FREE! Maureen Werrbach – TPOT Episode Practice Solutions Money Matters in Private Practice G Suite For Therapists Products from Amazon.com * Know the Difference: Employee versus Independent Contractor Price: Check on Amazon
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on InstagramTwitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks again with Jeff Geunther, LPC about how client’s experience finding a therapist and going to counseling. Jeff talks about his new podcast, “Say More About That”, in which he interviews people that have gone to therapy and what they were looking for in a therapist. He also asks his guests if they have advice for therapists to help them be better or more effective counselors. Jeff and Gordon also discuss the importance of self-disclosure and why a clear and simple website is essential for getting clients.
Meet Jeff Geunther Jeff Guenther, LPC, is a therapist in Portland, OR. He has been in private practice since 2005 and currently leads workshops on how therapists can build their digital brand and attract more clients online. Jeff is the creator and owner of Portland Therapy Center, a highly ranked therapist directory. Jeff has just launched a new progressive therapist directory for at TherapyDen. Subscribe to Jeff’s newsletter at therapyden.com to get weekly tips on how to grow your business and attract more clients.
Self-Disclosure Gordon figured out by accident when you start to self-disclose, you give your clients a way to be vulnerable. Modeling this vulnerability helps the client connect therapeutically and it becomes more expected by the clients. All therapists are thinking about self-disclosing and are struggling with it in some way. Jeff gently encourages therapists to be more open with their values because it will get more people in the door.
Marketing + Trust All clients are looking for something specific with a therapist. They want someone authentic and open. In Jeff’s podcast, he asks clients what advice they would give a therapist who is trying to market their practice. The clients said to have the therapists write their websites with no jargon and simple language. Another client said he wants his therapist to have a good style and think about what their office looks like.
Gordon always asks his clients if they have seen a therapist before and how the experience was. One client said they had been to a therapist before, but their office was so messy it was hard to concentrate and threw people off. Another person suggested a therapist should have every little detail about getting to their office on their website. For instance, they wanted to know where to park, how much it costs, how many staircases, and so on. Clients are always testing us, but the therapist does not know when they are checking them. One client wanted her therapist to be okay with saying she was fat. If a therapist would not agree, she knew she needed to find a new therapist.
Say More About That Say More About That is a podcast that explores the personal journey of finding a therapist and going to counseling. Jeff talks to people about why they wanted to go to therapy, what kind of therapist they were looking for and why. He covers why some mental health counselors were excellent matches and why others didn’t work and also touches on what they thought therapy was going to be like and if it met their expectations. Say More About That asks their guests if they have advice for therapists to help them be better or more effective counselors. Everything from marketing their services to meeting for the first time to talking about the hard stuff. Say More About That is a podcast for therapists to hear the perspective of the client journey and also for non-therapists who want to hear what therapy is like.
Resources Mentioned Killin’it Camp Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice G Suite For Therapists Jeff Geunther’s Resources TherapyDen Getting Your Private Practice Directory Listings Noticed How Therapists can Attract More Clients from Psychology Today, GoodTherapy and TherapyDen Say More About That Email: hello@therapyden.com Products from Amazon.com * -28% Common Factors in Couple and Family Therapy: The Overlooked Foundation for Effective Practice Price: $24.65 Was: $34.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Instagram @TPOTpodcast, Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest. “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Lindsey Davis about tapping into niches and how therapists can utilize the help of a dietitian. Lindsey explains in what situations would a therapist want to refer to a dietitian and how the two can work together to assist their clients. We also learn the steps a dietician would take to help their clients and then we hear Lindsey’s thoughts on fad diets. Later, Gordon gives Lindsey some advice on her web presence and suggests blogging as frequently as possible to assist with search engine optimization.
Meet Lindsey Davis Lindsey Davis is a Registered Dietitian and owner of Restorative Health, a nutritional counseling business aimed at transforming a client’s diet and lifestyle by helping them embrace a BALANCED view of health and eliminate any weight-related fear, guilt or shame. Lindsey believes that all foods can fit into your meal plan and health-related goals are met by setting a series of small, measurable, realistic goals.
She has worked clinically for 6 years and is well versed in chronic disease treatment as well as weight management. She loves the counseling environment as it allows her to develop a relationship with her clients and walk through a season of life with them. She strives to help her clients develop a positive body image while providing education and support to meet their personal, individualized goals.
Dietitian Referrals Lindsey reached out to Gordon to educate others on when the therapy community should refer to a dietitian. For instance, people with eating disorders and disordered eating will benefit from having a registered dietitian. The dietitian can walk through with the client how to have a balanced lifestyle with their food choices. Therapists have clients with eating disorders and do not know how to address the food aspect without a dietitian. Lindsey would refer a client immediately the second you know they have an eating disorder so the dietitian and therapist can start working together.
Normal Eating Lindsey’s work is very individualized because eating disorders are not universal. Typically, Lindsey tries and nail down the negative thought that is running through her client’s head. The dietitian would then challenge the thinking and find one that would reflect the truth. Many clients suggest they want to eat like a reasonable person, so Lindsey uses a resource from the Ellen Satter Institute as to what constitutes normal eating. Then, the client will pick which aspects of normal consumption to challenge them the most and Lindsey will work them one at a time with her clients.
Fad Diets The reason Lindsey is so passionate about starting her private practice is because of her personal philosophy. Her philosophy is that all foods fit; she does not believe in excluding or restricting entire food groups unless a medical diagnosis requires it. Eating is about moderation and portion size; Lindsey wants to teach others to live a balanced and healthy lifestyle. People go out to eat, go on road trips, and come into contact with fast food. It is essential to learn how to navigate these situations without any fear or guilt.
Specialty Pages Specialty pages are useful for SEO and online marketing. For instance, a specialty page will have one page devoted to binge eating and having one page dedicated to weight loss. These pages do not need to be lengthy, but it can be a subset of the services page. The reason for separate pages is that when people search the web for a particular problem, they will type their specific need. If you have addressed this particular need on your webpage, you will be the site that comes up first on Google. Gordon also suggests stepping blogging up to a few times a month if not once a week. Relevant content is essential for search engine optimization.
Resources Mentioned Killin’it Camp Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice The Group Practice Exchange Podcast Lindsey’s Resources What is normal eating? By Ellen Satter https://www.restorativehealthrd.com Lindsey’s Blog Email: restorative.health@yahoo.com
Call Lindsey: (479) 226-1286 Products from Amazon.com * -46% Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Price: $14.15 Was: $26.00 * -34% The Ideal Team Player: How to Recognize and Cultivate The Three Essential Virtues Price: $16.59 Was: $25.00 * -15% Secrets of Feeding a Healthy Family: How to Eat, How to Raise Good Eaters, How to Cook Price: $16.95 Was: $19.95
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon discusses gratitude and growing on supports. He also dives deep and explains some personal struggles going on in his life recently. Rolling with the punches is critical for growth and reminds Gordon why his independence by being private practice has been such a blessing. Later, Gordon explains how essential safety nets are, how to practice gratitude, and planning for the day. Taking ten to fifteen minutes to prepare for the day will make life much less overwhelming.
Independence Being able to work when you want to and being your own boss is a big reason many people move to private practice. Gordon started private practice part-time while working for an agency and the turns of life helped motivate him to move more fully into full-time private practice. His daughter started high school, and Gordon wanted to participate in her extra-curricular activities. If he continued working for the agency he would not be able to do this. Also, Gordon’s wife developed breast cancer, and that is when life got complicated for their family.
Safety Net When you work for someone else, you build up sick time or paid time off that you can use for medical appointments or even emergencies. When you go into private practice, you will not have this luxury which is why it is critical to have financial reserves built up when becoming self-employed. Also, diversifying your income will assist with your safety net. Find ways to make money without using a lot of your time. For instance, Gordon uses his podcast and financial courses to diversify his income.
Practicing Gratitude Therapists are so busy taking care of others but all too often, they forget their self-care. Practicing gratitude is a big part of self-care to navigate the ups and downs of life. Gordon has been guilty of trying to do too much on his own. Honestly, we cannot do it all, and we have to draw on supports. Gordon is grateful for his staff, close friends, and neighbors who support his family in this time of need. Building relationships in your practice will allow us to rely on the community to deal with life’s surprises. Lastly, recharging batteries are needed for self-care, especially exercising.
Resources Mentioned Michael Hyatt’s Full Focus Planner Killin’it Camp Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Products from Amazon.com * -26% Daring Greatly: How the Courage to Be Vulnerable Transforms the Way We Live, Love, Parent, and Lead Price: $12.54 Was: $17.00 * -28% Full Focus Planner by Michael Hyatt - The #1 Daily Planner to Set Annual Goals, Increase Focus, Eliminate Overwhelm, and Achieve Your Biggest Goals - Appointment & Agenda Organizer - Hardcover Price: $42.99 Was: $59.99 * -15% Good Days Start With Gratitude: A 52 Week Guide To Cultivate An Attitude Of Gratitude: Gratitude Journal Price: $5.95 Was: $6.99
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Geoff Simons from The Private Practice Hub, an online platform that provides private practice resources in the United Kingdom. Geoff discusses how many therapists get into therapy first before figuring out how to run a business. The business side of their practice seems to be an afterthought. Then, the two discuss UK licensing and some differences between practicing in the United States and overseas. Later, Geoff tells us about his website and the new chatbot technology he is working on for therapist’s websites and explains some issues with online therapy.
Meet Geoff Simmons Geoff is the founder of the Private Practice Hub and has worked as a consultant, with a thriving psychotherapy practice for over five years. One of his interests is in helping private practitioners torun and grow their businesses more effectively so he developed the Private Practice Hub, a free resource for Private Practitioners which supports and helps the therapist run a successful private practice. When he finds time to relax, he enjoys a good game of tennis and watching the greatest football team ever – c’mon you Spurs!
Running a Business Starting a private practice means you are running a business. It starts with writing a marketing plan or a business plan. So many therapists do not do this. Geoff provides a “what if” calculator to evaluate all the costs involved that many people starting a business do not consider.
At the end of it, if you charge ten dollars, it will tell you how much you will earn. If you charge one hundred dollars, the calculator will show you how much you will receive. The question Geoff gets the most is how much should a therapist charge for a session? Therapists go into therapy first, then learn how to run a business. Geoff’s wife was in finance first then went into therapy. By using Geoff’s resources, you can take some of the financial questions off of your plate.
UK Licensing In the USA, each state has different licensing laws, while the UK does not have these issues because the law is the law. Geoff has been asked if he can license his platform out to other countries; he is considering this for the future. Once you have your “accreditation” that says you’re a clinical psychologist, or another type of clinical discipline, and pay your money, you can now practice as a therapist.
Also, you will need to get insurance. Geoff has three different insurance companies that will give special offers to his members. It is interesting how coverage can range with price depending on which company it is. There will be differences when Brexit, happens if it ever happens. Issues will come up with insurance companies after the split.
Private Practice Hub The Private Practice Hub has been around for four years and has built up a considerable amount of information. The five pillars of private practice are finance, marketing, administration, human resources, and professional issues. Literally if one goes into marketing, you will see everything one needs to know under the marketing tab, it is all there for someone to read. You can keep clicking through all the hyperlinks.
The free resources include lots of downloads, sometimes people have difficulty finding everything with all the resources we provide. Geoff has built a chatbot; artificial intelligence will be on the new website. The bot is still being trained but will know all the resources and where they are. Geoff is building a bot to sit on any therapist’s website; there are a lot of ethical issues to work out before it ready to go.
Online Therapy Gordon and Geoff talk about the differences in laws for online therapy. In the UK, is where the therapist is required to be licensed, not the location of the client, as it is here in the States. Until there is a legal case proving it one way or the other, that is how the rules are applied.
One of the drawbacks with online therapy is the problem of at a person on the screen but cannot see their eyes because they are not looking at the camera. And sometimes it is difficult to understand body language while video conferencing. Also, you are reliant on the bandwidth, whereas when video conference just started, they used something called ISDM. Wireless internet is not as straight forward.
Resources Mentioned
Being transparent… Some of the resources below are affiliate links. This simply means that if you purchase using the links, we recieve a commission at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using the links!
Killin’it Camp Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice Geoff Simon’s Resources Private Practice Hub Become a Member Free Resources Geoff.Simons@privatepracticehub.co.uk Products from Amazon.com * -41% The Ideal Team Player: How to Recognize and Cultivate The Three Essential Virtues Price: $14.78 Was: $25.00 * -32% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $18.36 Was: $27.00 * -31% The One Page Business Plan for the Creative Entrepreneur Price: $24.03 Was: $34.95
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast Gordon chats with Laura Poynter who is the HR Director at Mindsight Behavioral Group about creating a workplace culture that has the best work environment possible. Laura and Gordon talk about finding the right people for your organization and then what it takes to create a culture that is warm, nurturing and helps people find success in what they do as clinicians. They also talk about marketing your practice to help maintain the growth and making sure clients are placed with the best clinician for them.
Mindsight Behavioral Group is a large group practice located in Eastern Kentucky, with 6 locations and over 80 therapist. It was started and is owned by Kasey Compton, LPC who is also a private practice consultant. Check out episodes, #47, #49 & #50 for more with Kasey.
Meet Laura Poynter Laura S. Poynter, BSBA, HRM serves as the Director of Human Resources at Mindsight Behavioral Group. In this role, Laura has the responsibility for the onboarding of new employees, employee benefits, talent management, employee relations, recruiting and retaining employees. She specializes in employee motivation and team management. Laura also provides HR Consulting services for KC Consulting.
Prior to joining Mindsight Behavioral Group and KC Consulting, Laura spent 26 years as the Training and Development Coordinator at Kentucky’s largest IDD facility where she was responsible for ensuring the training and compliance of over 1300 employees.
Laura graduated from Campbellsville University with a degree in Business Administration with a concentration in Human Resource Management.
Ideal Team Player One of the inspirations for Mindsight and the culture they have created comes from the book The Ideal Team Player by Patrick Lencioni. Laura talks about how that book inspired them to hire people that are humble, hungry and smart. And for them, the most important characteristic is “hungry”.
They spend a lot of time with people on the front end to make sure they fit with the culture they have created and live into the company mission, “Mindsight, where people feel cared for”. It is a fairly intensive interview process and they outline for people the importance of the culture at Mindsight. They make sure too, that the people they hire are a good fit for the personalities that are already there. The expectations of the staff are very clear and they absolutely keep and maintain a “drama free” workplace.
Culture is Everything The key to having a workplace culture that people look forward to coming to every day is making sure there is a lot of fun. It is a “fun-oriented” culture. Laura talks about how the people working at MIndsight are very involved in the community and marketing their own individual practices.
Giving people a purpose beyond their job Much of the reason that Mindsight has the culture that they do is people feel that they have a purpose beyond their job. As was mentioned, they are very involved in the community and do a lot to help people outside the therapy room.
Helping people be part of the solution The culture lends itself to helping people build on their strengths and be part of the solutions they are trying to find. For example, one clinician was trying to figure out how to optimize her schedule to see more clients. The intake coordinator and she sat down to look at how this could be done in a very collaborative way.
The other thing that Laura emphasized was that the culture of Mindsight encourages people to be creative and innovative. One problem the staff conquered was the problem of no-shows. They created a Client Care Coordinator position that put emphasis on giving potential clients a warm and welcoming experience from the very beginning. The person in that position is Brittany, but everyone refers to her as “Bubbly Brittany”.
This person’s job is to not only make the practice welcoming and warm, but make sure clients are getting in with the best clinician for them, based on the issues they are having the personality of the therapist.
Logistics of scaling Laura and Gordon switch gears and talk about the logistics of scaling. One of the most important parts of this is making sure you have the systems and processes in place to scale. For example, having a marketing plan that will increase referrals and support added staff.
They also talk about the importance of community involvement and how this has very much been a key ingredient for Mindsight’s success. They have a network of referral sources that absolutely keeps a steady stream of referrals coming in for their counselors.
Culture is also important in scaling in that they have a high retention rate for their staff. People come and they stay which makes it all more appealing to potential clients. And the reason for this is that clients are placed with therapists that are a good fit for them. Which, in turn, makes it possible for clinicians to work with their ideal clients.
Another component of scaling that Laura mentions is providing services in the community that are needed. Maybe identifying an underserved area and then finding the right people to fill those niches. Then marketing to those niches.
Conclusion Laura ends by talking again about creating the kind of practice you want to have. Each person is unique, but by having a vision of the kind of place and culture you want to have is key. Finding the right people that are a good fit for the culture you have created will bring success.
Resources Mentioned
Being transparent… Some of the links here are affiliate links, which simply means that we receive a commission, at no extra cost for you, if you use these links to purchase. Thanks for using the links!
Products from Amazon.com * -41% The Ideal Team Player: How to Recognize and Cultivate The Three Essential Virtues Price: $14.73 Was: $25.00 * Million Dollar Practice: Five Steps to Make Sure Your Group is on Track Price: Check on Amazon * -42% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $15.75 Was: $27.00
Mindsight Behavioral Group: https://www.mindsightbehavioral.com/ Laura’s HR Consulting- https://www.consultwithkc.com Email Laura: laura@consultwithkc.com Other Resources and Show Sponsors: Money Matters in Private Practice TherapyNotes– Use the coupon code “Gordon” and get 2 months free BrighterVision Practice Solutions Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Lisa Wozniak about leaving her corporate job to start her own marketing business. As a marketer, Lisa knows you need to have a niche. After falling in love with the mental health industry, Lisa knew she was exactly where she belonged. Later, Gordon and Lisa discuss sales pitches, connecting with people, and partnering with your competition.
Meet Lisa Wozniak Lisa is a Marketing Consultant and owner of Woz Marketing; a marketing company dedicated to helping private practice owner enroll more clients through online marketing strategies. Lisa is driven by her passion for assisting practitioners to overcome different marketing challenges private practice owners face. Lisa has been in the marketing arena for over 25 years. Having worked with several big business clients in a corporate setting, she has realigned her niche to focus on private practice owners by helping them develop and implement creative marketing strategies designed to grow their client base.
Lisa’s Niche Lisa got to the point where she knew she wanted to go out on her own. Leaving a corporate setting is pretty scary and takes a lot of courage to say enough is enough. Lisa wanted to know if she really did have the chops to make it on her own. To do so, Lisa needed to figure out what her niche is going to be. A niche is what is going to attract people; she needed to find out what space was going to make her special. A family member came down with depression, and she was exposed to the mental health community. After doing some research, Lisa was surprised to find the mental health community had a severe lack of marketing.
Sales Pitches When we think about giving a sales pitch, we tend to think about ourselves and our role in the scenario. We need to flip that mindset and focus our attention on the other person. What can you find out about this person that will allow you to assist this person without expecting anything in return? With no expectations, it will take all the pressure off of you. For example, Lisa went in for a physical; the doctor started asking a bunch of mental health type questions. Lisa was handed a sheet about mental health questions. At the bottom of the sheet was a local therapist’s information.
Partner With Your Competition Collaborating with your competition might feel strange and like a weird concept at first. However, there is more than enough business to go around for all of us. When you meet another therapist, there is always the opportunity to collaborate even if you are a therapist in the same community. There are also opportunities where you are different enough, making it a great partnership for both parties. A partner doesn’t have to be someone you go into practice with. It is a partnership in collaboration and marketing techniques. Look out for someone who has that scarcity mindset because they will not be a good partner. Find someone who has a genuine interest in helping you grow your practice and someone who is interested in a long-term relationship with you. Lastly, find a business partner who is not afraid to roll up their sleeves and work right alongside you.
Social Media Lisa says clients say they try social media, but it doesn’t work. Her clients post once every few weeks, and of course, people are not responding well to inconsistency. As a business owner, you need to give the perception that you are everywhere all the time. This means posting all day every day. The bottom line is, if you are consistent with your marketing over time, it will yield great results for you.
Watch Lisa’s Interview with Gordon on Youtube Resources Mentioned Being transparent… some of the links below are affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you, if you use the links. Thanks for using the links!
Email Gordon@practiceoftherapy.com to get involved in the mastermind group! Killin’it Camp Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice Lisa Wozniak’s Resources Lisa@WozMarketing.com https://wozmarketing.com LinkedIn YouTube – Woz Marketing
Products from Amazon.com * Million Dollar Practice: Five Steps to Make Sure Your Group is on Track Price: Check on Amazon * -41% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $15.94 Was: $27.00 * -33% Building a StoryBrand: Clarify Your Message So Customers Will Listen Price: $16.84 Was: $24.99
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon is with Dr. Joanne Royer and they talk about her years as a psychotherapist and her new life chapter as an online coach. In her coaching role, her credentials were essential in helping to fix broken teams in the corporate setting. Currently, Dr. Royer focuses on helping her clients succeed, especially female professionals over the age of fifty. Joanne explains why we should all identify our wins for the day. Gordon and Joanne discuss thought habits, the connection between the mind and heart, and how doubting is hurting your progress.
Meet Dr. Joanne Royer Dr. Joanne Royer is the founder and owner of Change Agent & Associates.
After 25+ years as a psychotherapist, today in a new career chapter, Dr. Joanne provides online coaching to female career professionals approaching 50 and beyond who are finally ready to create a different relationship with their self-doubt, and the overthinking, overanalyzing and never-ending quest to be perfect, that’s been holding them back.
A graduate of Coach U in 2006 and member of the International Coaching Federation.
Executive Coaching Joanne’s coaching background included a two-year program and a certification. She worked in mental health agencies and was hired to fix broken systems from a team perspective. Joanne’s coaching fundamentals came handy with her corporate executive approach. She could see the reverberations of this coaching style. It came down to the therapist’s doubts about their capabilities. Change is small; we have to learn how to identify the small steps of successes that our clients are taking. Therapists also need to determine the wins of their days while working with clients.
Thought Habits Thought habits are almost similar to how we make choices in our eating. It becomes habitual, in a new restaurant we are bound and determined to have something we have never had before. However, when the waiter comes, we order something we usually eat. People tend to eat the same things. Our thoughts also become habitual; we are not even aware of what we are thinking. Ideas are connected to feelings and feelings are related to our actions. First, be mindful of what you are feeling. Second-guessing your competencies and doubting your abilities will not allow you to help your client recognize their strengths.
The Mind The mind is just an organ as the heart is. We need to work hard at helping connect the mind with the heart. The mind doesn’t give us an answer; it gives us many obstacles. Our mind wants to keep us safe and stay in the familiar and the predictable. Our brains do not like change and want to pull us back in familiar ways of thinking. We want to be three steps ahead of our minds. Write down thoughts that you want to think instead of going with your critical voice. Connecting the heart and soul is the ultimate relationship because our heart gives us the answers.
Doubt Doubting your capabilities, doubting your lovability, thinking you are too old to go for a promotion. Your passion might be to create a business out of what you love doing. However, many women think they are too old to start a business and take on something new. They doubt they have the skills and abilities to carry out the task. If you can decide without expectation, how would you show up then? Second-guessing and perfectionism are considerable contributors to our negative thought-processes. If you mess up a recipe, it just means you know how to improve the next time. We are always going to have a do-over. Getting out of our comfort zones will push our limits.
Resources Mentioned
Being transparent… Some of the links below are affiliate links, which simply means we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you, if you use the links. Thanks for using the links!
Killin’it Camp Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice
Michael D. Yapko, Ph.D. Dr. Joanne Royer’s Resources https://www.joanneroyerphd.com Phone: 978.308.9330 drjoanne@drjoanneroyerphd.com Thoughts keeping you up at night? Grab my free eBook to learn how to manage your thinking and put those thoughts to bed! https://app.monstercampaigns.com/c/yvm84xpqdbgkjc1dp4f3/ Products from Amazon.com * -1% Trancework: An Introduction to the Practice of Clinical Hypnosis Price: $59.51 * -20% Breaking the Patterns of Depression Price: $13.52 Was: $17.00 * -34% Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Price: $17.10 Was: $26.00
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Laura Long about her “badass” coaching business, YouTube channel, and private practice. Laura explains how her private practice started as a side gig while working at an assessment center for foster care parents. Then, Laura analyzes how her practice became lucrative and why she started her own coaching business. Later, Gordon and Laura discuss being your authentic self, why you should not be afraid to fail, and how to create the private practice you want to have.
Meet Laura Long Laura Long is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist and the owner of YourBadAssTherapyPractice.com, where she helps ambitious, Type-A therapists push through their fears and unleash their inner badass in private practice.
Laura offers free practice-building tools through her email list and her brand new Youtube channel. Her signature 8-week online course has successfully graduated over 200 therapists, and she also runs small mastermind groups and a private online community reserved for her students.
Laura is best known for her off-the-cuff coaching style that includes colorful language, a witty sense of humor, and an uncanny ability to keep it real. Her unique approach to marketing and customer service challenges the status quo and helps therapists to become better business owners. She shows therapists how to grow and scale their practices without losing their minds – because building your private practice should be fun!
You can read Laura’s blog at www.YourBadAssTherapyPractice.com and follow her antics at www.Facebook.com/YourBadAssTherapyPractice.
Private Practice as a Side Gig Laura took a break from therapy for and worked at an assessment center for foster care parents. To make some extra money on the side, Laura started a private practice; it gave her permission not to take it very seriously. She treated her private practice as a hobby and only got a few clients. The foster care agency became a toxic environment and Laura decided to grow her private practice instead. With no plan, Laura felt she had made a rash decision by quitting her steady paycheck for the unknown world of private practice.
Becoming Lucrative Private practice was no longer a hobby and Laura needed to make her private practice something lucrative. Nose to the grindstone, Laura figured it out. Now, Laura gets to help other people start their private practice, and she wants everyone to know her journey was not as easy as it sounds. There is no best way to get to your result as everyone’s journeys are different. For instance, Laura hired a coach to assist her with a YouTube channel. Her coach answered the tiny little questions that would come up. Her coach told her there was not one right way but gave her suggestions on things to try.
Coaching Laura started coaching others when there were no Facebook pages or websites to help aspiring therapists. In 2016, Laura began to her actual business to help therapists. It’s an eight-week course giving advice and tips for starting your practice. Also, coaching on YouTube has allowed her to grow her practice and help others to begin their practices. A common question asked from her viewers are how to get more clients. Lately, her fans have been asking how to get more clients while still being themselves. Therapists want to be more authentic in their marketing and be more selective in the type of clients they take.
Resources Mentioned
Being transparent… Some of the resources below are affiliate links. this just simply means we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you, if you use the links to purchase. Thanks for using the links!
Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice Jump – Steve Harvey >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Laura’s Resources Throw away your business cards and join Laura Long for her 8-week program, “Your Badass Therapy Practice,” where she distills the secrets of top-performing private practice clinicians and helps you unleash your inner badass!
Laura’s Course YouTube Channel www.Facebook.com/YourBadAssTherapyPractice. www.YourBadAssTherapyPractice.com Products from Amazon.com * -20% Jump: Take the Leap of Faith to Achieve Your Life of Abundance Price: $12.78 Was: $15.99 * -33% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $18.01 Was: $27.00 * -34% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $17.70 Was: $27.00 * -34% Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Price: $17.10 Was: $26.00
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon discusses the ethics of money management in clinical practice. Gordon’s favorite course in graduate school was legal and ethical issues in counseling. First, Gordon discusses documentation and some ethical considerations when taking payment for a session. One suggestion is to keep the client’s specific finances separate from the bigger picture business finances. Later, Gordon informs us on how to turn a profit and some tips on setting a sliding-scale fee. Stay tuned to hear Gordon’s thoughts on ethically keeping accurate records for tax information and what to do when a client does not show.
Implementing Ethics Clients see the clinician with an expectation of paying; most people do not expect free services. The deciding factor for many clients is whether or not the clinician accepts insurance. Insurance panels are bound legally by a contract to provide services to people with this insurance at the rate that was agreed to. When receiving payments, the clinicians need to have systems in place to track the financial side of the business.
Documentation If you are in private practice and someone pays you for your services; how do you document that payment? Larger practices probably are using an electronic health record system in place to file claims. In that system, there is also a financial component to it; a patient billing system. You can look and see what a patient owes for a session if the claims have been filed, what you can expect to receive, and what the patient might owe for copays. These systems will significantly alleviate any stress concerning the business side of private practice. If you are just getting to start your practice, you can do something simple with a spreadsheet.
Business Finances You receive a payment from the client, it is documented, but then you need to know what to do with the money next. Obviously, you are going to want to put it in the bank. There should be a whole separate system for the business side of your finances. Using a system like QuickBooks or FreshBookswill help you keep your books and track your income. It is a good practice, when using these systems, that as money comes in, that you leave out the names of clients in those transactions. Instead just make a notation that came from a client, but no client name. It is a great way to track the income and expenses for your business. Ethically, keep track of your money with client records and have another system for your business finances.
Profiting and Fees To have a profit, the amount of income you have need to exceed the number of expenses you have. Tracking your earnings over time is really important to the expansion of your business. Knowing your profit and loss statement each month will allow you to see where you stand financially.
You might want to consider using a sliding-scale fee for people who do not have insurance or who choose not to use their insurance for counseling services. This fee is based on the person’s income and is typically found at non-profit organizations. Do not set your prices too low. Gordon’s lowest fee used to be thirty dollars, this was too low to maintain Gordon’s practice. Ensure your scale range is viable for you and fair for your clients. One suggestion Gordon has is to set your lowest fee at what your average per-session rate is.
No-Show Expectations If you have many no-shows, that is something you need to address. You have an ethical responsibility to discuss this with your clients. Many times, clients not showing up for sessions is a clinical issue. This was ingrained in Gordon from graduate school. As the clinician, you need to be able to ask what is wrong with them that they are avoiding sessions. Make sure in your intake paperwork that it is noted they will get charged if they no-show you for a session. Keep clients credit cards electronically, so you have access to their information in case of a no-show. Gordon does give them the option to not provide their credit card information; a surcharge will be added however if they need to take a payment. All of this gets discussed at an intake session and in their intake paperwork.
Resources Mentioned
Disclaimer: some of the resources mentioned are affiliate links. This simply means we receive a commission if you purchase the service or product mentioned, at no extra cost to you, if you use those links. Thanks for using the links!
Practice Solutions Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Money Matters in Private Practice QuickBooks FreshBooks
Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Products from Amazon.com * -41% Clinical Ethics, 8th Edition: A Practical Approach to Ethical Decisions in Clinical Medicine, 8E Price: $31.17 Was: $53.00 * Business Ethics: A Stakeholder and Issues Management Approach Price: Check on Amazon * -32% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $18.36 Was: $27.00 * -50% QuickBooks Desktop Pro 2019 [PC Disc] Price: $149.00 Was: $299.99
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon goes solo and kicks off the show discussing his DNA results and how it is that time of the year again. You guessed it, taxes! We learn about self-employment taxes and how to withhold things from your check. Then, Gordon explains Social Security and Medicare taxes and why you may need to consider sales and franchise taxes. Later, Gordon reveals when starting his business he invested in QuickBooks to assist with his payroll, taxes, and expenses.
How Income Tax Is Different For The Self-Employed Most people are aware that they need to pay income tax. However, in addition to income tax, we also have to pay Social Security tax and Medicare Tax. If you get a pay stub, you will notice that it is broken down for you. It’s usually 3-line items plus other deductions from your pay, such health insurance, and retirement benefits.
What most people are unaware of though is that employers are required to pay half of your Social Security and Medicare Tax that is due. This part is not deducted from your paycheck. It is an expense for the employer; regular employment is taxed very different from self-employment. 15.3% of what you earned is automatically taxed across the board. As an employee, your employer pays half of that.
Social Security Currently, the Social Security tax is 12.4% of your earnings. If you are employed you are only deducted half of that, 6.2% and the employer pays the other half. When you are self-employed, you have to pay the full 12.4% on your net profit. (I’ll explain this later)
Medicare Currently, the Medicare tax is 2.9% of your earnings. Like Social Security, you are only deducted half of that; 1.45% and the employer pays the other half. For those that are self-employed, you pay the full 2.9% of your net profit. (Again, more on that later.)
So for people that are self-employed, they are required to pay a minimum of 15.3% of the net profit their business each year just for Social Security and Medicare Taxes. In addition to this, you are required to pay income tax based on your tax bracket and withholding allowances.
The Good News and Bad News Of It So the good news about being self-employed is you only pay taxes on your profit as a business. You have probably heard from many people that you can “deduct” business expenses. This means that any legitimate business expenses (rent, telephones, office supplies, travel for continuing ed, utilities, etc.) can be “deducted” from your total income. Then you only pay tax on the amount after those deductions have been subtracted (aka, profit).
Remember Gross Income – Expenses = Profit (or Net Income)? You only pay taxes on the profit. Here’s an example.
Total practice income for the year = $50,000.00
Total practice expensed for the year = $25,000.00
Net Income is then = $25,000.00
Social Security & Medicare Tax would be $25,000.00 x 15.3% = $3825.00
Then, you would also owe income tax on whatever your tax bracket and standard allowances are. So in this example, for a married person filing the tax jointly is 10% (based on 2019 tax table).
$25,000 x 10% = $2,500.00
So total tax owed for the year would be $2500 + $3825 = $6325.00
Of course, everyone’s tax situation is going vary based on tax credits and allowances given for things like child care, college tuition, student loans, etc. Those are other things you can deduct for depending on your situation. So even in this example, your total tax could (and probably will be less.
AGAIN, CONSULT WITH A TAX EXPERT TO KNOW WHAT YOUR SITUATION WOULD BE! Resources Mentioned
Full disclosure: Some of these links are affiliate links. This simply means that if you use these links to purchase the product or service we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you. Thanks for using these links!
Practice Solutions Money Matters in Private Practice FreshBooks QuickBooks Accounting Templates for Google Sheets Take advantage of the pre-launch of the Money Matters in Private Practice Course! Get the entire course for 50% off during the pre-launch. >>Enroll Here<< Products from Amazon.com * -50% QuickBooks Desktop Pro 2019 [PC Disc] Price: $149.00 Was: $299.99 * -53% Working for Yourself: Law & Taxes for Independent Contractors, Freelancers & Gig Workers of All Types Price: $18.80 Was: $39.99 * -34% J.K. Lasser's Small Business Taxes 2019: Your Complete Guide to a Better Bottom Line Price: $15.15 Was: $22.95
‹› Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Dr. Megan Warner about her online community, Practibytes. Megan intends on bridging the gap between clinicians and academia. Often, clinicians want more knowledge about recent science and academic expertise but do not have access to this research. Megan wants to bring information to clinicians and help therapists help their clients. Later, Megan tells us about some recent research on personality disorders and her big plans for the online community she built.
Meet Dr. Megan Warner Dr. Megan Warner is a clinical psychologist, private practice owner, and most recently the founder of Practibytes, an online communitywhere therapists have access to the most relevant and practical research findings from the academic world. Megan designed Practibytes to meet therapists needs to feel great about their clinical work without costing them a lot of time. Practibytes provides quick and practical tidbits of clinically relevant research. Practibytes is bridging the gap between science and practice. Academic researchers share their most important and relevant findings directly with the therapists that need them, and in utilizing these findings therapists elevate their work, their reputation, their confidence, and their impact on clients.
Practibytes Just like Megan’s private practice, she wants to bridge clinical and academia. As clinicians, we are spending much time worrying and thinking about how to market and build our practices. Megan realized there was a lack of educational research available for their clinicians. In graduate school, research is continuously being thrown at you, and the ability to find new information is always near. Well-intentioned clinicians get imposter syndrome because they feel as though they do not have the latest science. Academics deeply know the research, but cannot always get it to the clinicians. Practibytes changes all of this and bridges the gap between clinicians and academia. Megan views Practibytes as her journey to be a macro of what her practice is. She utilizes a W2 model because she enjoys the control, having a shared mission, and feels less lonely.
Community The Practibyte Facebook page will be the home base for our community. Megan shares some recent academic research that was revealed to her by a colleague. Many therapists believe how daunting it is to work with clients who have personality disorders. However, these disorders are not as stable as many people are trained to think. Actually, these people tend to get better over time with or without treatment. Megan leans on her academic community to provide this type of content for her and her community. The Facebook group will serve as a platform to reach those clinicians who are interested in this type of research. Later, Megan will make this a membership subscription with YouTube interviews or podcast snippets.
Resources Mentioned Therapy Notes Money Matters Course >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Megan’s Resources Email: Megan@Practibytes.com
Invite to Join Practibytes Products from Amazon.com * -34% Company of One: Why Staying Small Is the Next Big Thing for Business Price: $17.10 Was: $26.00 * -32% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $18.36 Was: $27.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon speaks with Jessica Tappana about her superpower, search engine optimization. She highly suggests using Yoast to boost your SEO and advises how to improve your Google ranking. Jessica also explains the importance of flexibility, keywords, and blogging. She recently had a client struggle with their ranking and found how their competitors had hundreds and hundreds of bank links. Backlinks can be something that needs your entire attention to improve Google rankings.
Meet Jessica Tappana Jessica Tappana started her private practice on her maternity leave about 20 months ago. After filling up in only a matter of months, she decided to bring on other therapists as 1099s and transitioned Aspire Counseling into a group practice. Worried about how she would fill the caseloads of these new therapists, Jessica tried several different marketing strategies. Ultimately, she decided to focus on getting her website to the first page of Google and began teaching herself SEO at nights after her kids were in bed. Slowly after gathering a couple of tips here and there, she got her website to the first page for nearly every keyword she targets. Aspire Counseling has grown to now include five therapists and a virtual assistant! In fact, all of the therapists are nearly full, and Jessica hopes to find a few more quality team members in the months to come.
Meanwhile, Jessica has discovered a passion for teaching other private practice owners what she has learned about website Search Engine Optimization. As a private practice SEO Consultant, she has had the opportunity to work with therapists from around the country sharing her SEO secrets. She’s both optimized websites for private practices AND has taught therapists how to do the SEO work themselves through Zoom meetings and enjoyed watching their sites begin to climb to the first page of Google even in larger metropolitan areas like Atlanta or Houston. Recently Jessica released a FREE 7-day e-mail series that teaches therapists all the necessary information they need to know and has received positive feedback across the board from other practice owners who are raving about the vast amount of information covered in only seven e-mails.
Flexibility Jessica’s dream was only to work three days a week to stay at home with her children. Her office was low cost, and she did not even have a website. Her hours filled up, and she kept adding hours and clients. Eventually, this turned into a full-time gig, so she needed to add more people to her business. By marketing herself, Jessica’s favorite activity is going to coffee with others. Coffee hour took up a lot of time, so it is no longer her primary marketing tool. Jessica learned how to use search engine optimization to utilize her website.
Search Engine Optimization Should you try to do your SEO or hire someone else to do it? If you have a competitive area or need to get to the first page and rank quickly, then you may want to pay someone. If you have limited funds, are a DIY type, or have more time then you may want to learn how to do it yourself. Where do you even start if you’re going to improve the SEO yourself? One great place to start is by changing the meta descriptions on your site.
Keywords A keyword is something you would type into Google to find what you are looking for. Jessica asked her friends what they would type into Google if they were looking for a therapist. You can also try simply typing in your search. At the bottom, Google will offer similar searches that other people have used. How do you choose what keywords to target? Is it worth it to target more general “short tail” keywords like “counseling near me”? The answer is it depends on location but frequently yes.
Blogging Blogging is one of Jessica’s favorite things to talk about; it is essential for SEO. New content will alert Google that this website has fresh and relevant information. With updated content, Google will bump you up on the rankings. For someone who doesn’t like writing, Jessica says there are ways around it. If you’re thinking of your ideal content, start considering the type of things your clients would want to read. Jessica even pays people to write blog content. It is essential to ensure the blogs posts are unique and not copied from other websites.
Resources Mentioned Brighter Vision Therapy Notes Mastermind Group Yoast >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Jessica’s Resources www.SimplifiedSEOConsulting.com
www.AspireCounselingMO.com
Products from Amazon.com * -24% SEO For Dummies Price: $22.91 Was: $29.99 * SEO 2019: Learn search engine optimization with smart internet marketing strategies Price: Check on Amazon
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon has a conversation with Ellie Vargas about her private pay psychotherapy practice and why there is no quick path to building this kind of business. Ellie’s journey took her to start the Bay Area Center for Immigration Evaluations and this venture assists with diversifying her income because she shares a fee with the clinicians in her business. Later, Ellie explains why she wouldn’t change the way she started her business and gives tips on expanding your practice.
Meet Ellie Vargas Ellie Vargas, LCSW is a trauma-informed psychotherapist in Berkeley, CA (www.EllieVargasTherapy.com) where she specializes in helping individuals become more present, authentic, and connected in their relationships – even after childhood relational trauma. Ellie also founded and runs the Bay Area Center for Immigration Evaluations (www.bacie.org). She and her team conduct psychological evaluations and write reports for legal immigration cases.
Diversifying Income The Bay Area Center for Immigration Evaluations allows Ellie to have other therapists take referrals under her business. This unique niche group practice creates passive income for Ellie, and she describes the fascinating journey to get there. The group practice is remote with a virtual assistant. As demand grew, more clinicians hopped on. Her practice is a training institute, and Ellie provides a lot of materials and oversight to ensure her clinicians are up-to-date. They are sharing the fee with Ellie, but those clinicians do not have to hustle for the business.
Lessons Learned Ellie left her salaried position to start a group practice because she felt like she had a good idea. In hindsight, Ellie believes everything she struggled with to get here is all part of her journey and helped evolve her business to where it needed to go. Therefore, Ellie would not do anything differently if she could because those mistakes built her business.
Tips for Expansion Think about the skills you already have. For example, Ellie knew how to give a thorough psychotherapy evaluation. She used these skills to offer them in a similar but slightly different way. Ideally, use these skills to fill a demand. Ellie saw a market for immigration evaluations, and so she started a business. The more diversified you can be, the better.
Diversifying Outside Your Usual Services As any practice grows, clinicians can reach a place where they need to increase income without having to increase their workload. It’s important to be able to think outside the box and find ways to bring in additional income without having to add to your workload in the long run. This is where providing services as Ellie has mentioned becomes important. You want to be able to structure things so that you get the maximum amount of return of your time and efforts. In other words, learn to work smarter, not harder.
Resources Mentioned Brighter Vision Therapy Notes >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Ellie’s Resources www.EllieVargasTherapy.com www.bacie.org FREE WEBINAR SERIES Products from Amazon.com * -22% Forensic Psychological Assessment in Immigration Court Price: $35.26 Was: $44.95 * -28% Full Focus Planner by Michael Hyatt - The #1 Daily Planner to Set Annual Goals, Increase Focus, Eliminate Overwhelm, and Achieve Your Biggest Goals - Appointment & Agenda Organizer - Hardcover Price: $42.99 Was: $59.99 * -34% Your Best Year Ever: A 5-Step Plan for Achieving Your Most Important Goals Price: $16.50 Was: $24.99
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In the first podcast episode of 2019, Gordon has a conversation with Amanda Patterson about her private practice in Pembroke Pines and how she utilizes social media to gain clients. Then, Amanda gives some advice on keeping private information private, using professional pictures, and social media reviews. Then, Amanda and Gordon discuss the benefits and possible issues with Facebook groups and Amanda explains some ethical dilemmas that come about.
Meet Amanda Patterson Amanda Patterson is a private practice consultant who helps therapists create business and marketing plans. She’s the owner of a group practice, Caring Therapists of Broward in South Florida. She’s the founder of My Private Practice Tribe, an online community for therapists in private practice. Find out more about Amanda here: www.amandapattersonlmhc.com
Social Media Amanda has been a therapist for over ten years and never imagined herself going into private practice. Her group practice is in Pembroke Pines, Florida and she utilizes social media to gain clients. In the beginning, she would private message people online to try and increase her clientele. Facebook and Instagram allow you to create business pages and keep personal information private from the public eye. Amanda wants everyone to ensure their webpage looks pretty and suggests using Canva to perfect headers and posts. Also, use a professional picture to appeal to your audience and capture their attention. On Instagram, it is essential to have a consistent color scheme to keep an audience on your page for as long as possible. Amanda points out that social media is a long-term marketing plan. She gets most of her clients from being on the first page of Google. However, those clients will look at social media reviews and make their decision based on that. Thirty hashtags on Instagram will target an audience and create follower growth.
Facebook Groups Facebook groups are a great way to attract clients and become an essential part of your community. Amanda even joins Facebook groups with other therapists to network and gain potential referrals. Throwback Thursdays are a creative way to engage a Facebook group and a way to advertise your niche therapy. For example, you can share your services in a Facebook group free of charge, and those people will think of you first when looking for a therapist. Amanda did a thirty-day marketing challenge on a Facebook group and engaged many people. The group was left open and is now a support system for over seven-thousand therapists. Amanda recommends not breaking HIPAA because people can screenshot and it could break potential laws.
Ethics Amanda recommends not breaking HIPAA on social media because people can screenshot and it could break potential laws. A social media policy should be involved in your informed consent paperwork. For example, Amanda will not answer messages on social media from her clients to ensure she is following all ethical practices. Do not ask your clients for Facebook reviews, ask your colleagues to review on social media instead.
Resources Mentioned >>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Amanda’s Resources Facebook
My Private Practice Tribe
Podcast Sponsors For 2019 Practice Solutions
Brighter Vision
Therapy Notes
Products from Amazon.com * -28% Full Focus Planner by Michael Hyatt - The #1 Daily Planner to Set Annual Goals, Increase Focus, Eliminate Overwhelm, and Achieve Your Biggest Goals - Appointment & Agenda Organizer - Hardcover Price: $42.99 Was: $59.99 * -20% Social Media Marketing Workbook: How to Use Social Media for Business (2019 Updated Edition) Price: $31.80 Was: $39.99 * Social Media Marketing 2019: Step by Step Instructions For Advertising Your Business on Facebook, Youtube, Instagram, Twitter, Pinterest, Linkedin and Various Other Platforms [2nd Edition] Price: Check on Amazon
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this podcast episode, Gordon has a conversation with Cecilia Briseno, LCSW and her unique niche of working with clients who are navigating the immigration process. First, Cecilia explains her background and what initially inspired her to create a niche. The two then go in-depth discussing the most common evaluation for clinicians to utilize, the hardship evaluation. Later, Cecilia explains the other types of evaluations, the training she provides for clinicians, and tips for anyone wanting to get into this type of work.
Meet Cecilia Briseno, LCSW Cecilia Briseno is a bilingual Licensed Clinical Social Worker with a private practice, Bright Side Family Therapy, in Arlington, TX. Cecilia has a total of 17 years of experience in social work in a variety of settings and roles. Cecilia received her BSW and MSSW from the University of Texas at Arlington. It was during her graduate internship that she studied the model of therapy that she still uses today, Solution Focused Therapy (SFT). Following the completion of her master’s program, Cecilia went on to study Marriage and Family Therapy in a doctoral program at Texas Woman’s University, which helped her to broaden her knowledge of SFT and family systems. Cecilia has found her niche in working with couples primarily while also working with families navigating through the immigration process.
When appropriate, Cecilia provides evaluations explaining the hardships they face when separated from their loved ones. She is now also providing training for clinicians interested in working with immigrants. By first having her client’s paint a detailed picture of their desired future, Cecilia is then able to help them explore past and present successes, no matter how small, to start attaining the future they wish. The beauty of the approach Cecilia uses is that this process frequently helps the client to see that they are closer to their desired future than they realized, increasing hope and motivation.
Hardship Evaluation The primary evaluation is an extreme hardship waiver. This evaluation is necessary when a resident is married to someone that is undocumented. In most cases, if the undocumented spouse returned to their country, it would cause financial hardship. For example, if the spouse took care of their children, then the partner would have to start paying for childcare. Typically the man is undocumented, and the wife is a citizen with young kids. Parents can request on behalf of their children and vice versa. Depending on the attorney, Cecilia has to adjust the evaluation accordingly.
Immigration Evaluation Boot Camp Anywhere that hits the border; there is an increasing number of people that need these evaluations. Cecilia provides a four-hour long course on the extreme hardship waiver. Also, she provides a boot camp that is two full days covering five different types of assessments. It would be best if you were individually licensed, interested in working with this population, and hopefully bilingual. The course goes over intake calls, forms you’ll need to use, the formation of the evaluations, building relationships with the attorneys, and any follow-ups. Everything you would need is included in this boot camp. The next day after the boot camp, you can start offering the service.
Tips For Clinicians Flexibility and compassion are essential for a clinician to work with this demographic. With so many unknowns and the clients often do not get much support from the community. Clinicians who work with families do well with this group. Very quickly you learn the entire family is useful for the evaluation. Cecilia often interviews the whole family to complete her evaluations.
Cecilia is strictly private pay. Most clients that come to her do not have insurance. Also, Cecilia tends to charge on the lower end because she wants her clients to be able to afford her services. Your clients know if you have the best intentions in mind or not because you’ll be welcoming and understanding to their needs. If a client sees your passion, they will work with you for the price and timing.
Five Types of Evaluations 1. Hardship: When a resident is married to someone that is undocumented. 2. U Visa: An undocumented person was a victim of a crime here in the United States. They need to stay to deal with the trauma and assist with the criminal investigation. 3. VAWA: Victims of domestic violence. The abuser is not willing to help the undocumented person to fix their papers. 4. Asylum: Fleeing their country for reasons of persecution. 5. Cancellation of Removal: Already have orders to leave the country and it’s a time-sensitive situation. The client has to explain the repercussions that would happen if they were forced to leave the country.
Political Climate With the current political climate, there are more hoops to jump through, and things are changing quickly. Information needs to be altered on evaluations, and Cecilia has to see her clients more often. There was a decrease of people coming for the evaluations based on fear. Once more people started getting deported and stopped, clients have been getting their papers fixed.
Resources Mentioned Hardship Evaluation Training
Bright Side Family Therapy
Therapy Notes
Practice Solutions
Brighter Vision
>>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Products from Amazon.com * Working With Immigrant Families: A Practical Guide for Counselors (Routledge Series on Family Therapy and Counseling) Price: Check on Amazon
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon opens up the show thinking about the New Year coming up and points out how everyone is in a celebration mode, planning for 2019, and making resolutions. The web conference Gordon recently took part in highlighted how to be productive in your private practice and how to improve your processes and systems. First, Gordon reveals how he went from being unorganized and even missing a client appointment to writing everything down in his planner. Then, we find out how to put the proper systems in place, tips on staying organized, and some important things to remember about goal setting.
Productivity Gordon reveals he was not an organized person when he started his private practice he was working for an agency. With so much on his plate, Gordon felt like he was juggling many things and letting essential items slip through the cracks. One day, Gordon completely missed an appointment with a client and he was mortified this happened. Without the proper calendar and systems in place, he realized he would not be able to keep track of everything he needed to do.
Systems in Place Getting Things Done by David Allen inspired Gordon to put the proper systems in place. Gordon has a paper planner because it causes him to slow down enough to think about his day. He recommends spending at least ten or fifteen minutes to plan your day. This planning has gone far in helping Gordon to stay on track throughout the day. Then, Gordon reveals he suffers from shiny object syndrome – continually getting distracted from something shiny. Instead of keeping things in your head, make sure they get written down somewhere you are going to look.
Stay Organized If you were to organize your house or garage, get a big huge box and throw everything into it. The best way to capture things in your head is to have a pen and paper. Gordon uses a moleskin notebook, and his planner has a place for notes. Also, if something comes up during the day, Gordon jots it down on a list. There is no order on the list; it is just a way to capture thoughts throughout the day. David Allen says there are five things to do with the list of your random thoughts:
- Act Immediately: If it is something that can be accomplished in two minutes or less, go ahead and do it then and there.
- Delegate: Get yourself in the habit of delegation. For example, Gordon has learned to hand things off to his office assistant.
- Save for Later: These can be things related to a project or a bigger picture. Gordon gets requests to pull up medical records, and this may take a little more time to accomplish. Gordon schedules it in his calendar, so he does not forget about it later.
- Reference Materials: Save something if you want to read later, file it away, so you remember to go back and look at it.
- Delete: This is something Gordon trained himself to do. Delete things you do not need to hold onto any longer. Clean out that email inbox, ditch the clutter! Gordon gets Pinterest notifications on his personal email, and he needs to remember to unsubscribe to those Pinterest notifications.
Automate Most of us have repeated tasks we do day in and day out. To assist with productivity, you should create a template to streamline things. Gordon uses templates for his session notes. Also, document your workflow. Creating step-by-step training for staff will simplify the workday. Screen captures and videos of the workflow process will save you time and money on training each new staff member. Once you document your workflow once, it is so much easier to delegate to others.
Goal Setting The rule of threes. Only work on three things at a time. The process Gordon uses is starting with his yearly goals. If you write out your goals, you are sixty-one percent more likely to accomplish your goals. Keep your annual goals to no more than twelve. When writing goals for yourself, make sure you put a timestamp on it. For example, setting a goal for getting your debt down, have a specific month in mind. If you cannot do the whole goal in a single year, think about completing half of the goal in a year. Treatment plan goals need to be measurable, so should your personal goals. Don’t just say “get healthier.” Instead say, exercise four times a week.
Weekly goals should have several different steps: three goals per week and three goals per day. If you get distracted like Gordon, commit yourself to finish what you start. Finally, Gordon explains what batching your tasks means. You need to cut out your phone and all other distractions to complete one particular task. This is also referred to as sprints, getting things done in twenty-minute intervals.
Resources Mentioned Practikat FREEBIE: Organize Your Private Practice From A-Z Full Focus Planner Session Note Helper Practice Solutions Online Marketing Made Easy Podcast Products from Amazon.com * -32% Getting Things Done: The Art of Stress-Free Productivity Price: $11.55 Was: $17.00 * -28% Full Focus Planner by Michael Hyatt - The #1 Daily Planner to Set Annual Goals, Increase Focus, Eliminate Overwhelm, and Achieve Your Biggest Goals - Appointment & Agenda Organizer - Hardcover Price: $42.99 Was: $59.99
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with BrighterVision CEO and Founder, Perry Rosenbloom. Perry and Gordon chat about Brighter Vision and what inspired Perry to start his business. Also, Perry reveals the tools Brighter Vision uses to enhance and build an active webpage. For example, Brighter Vision has an SEO specialist that will audit your SEO, with other companies the cost of an SEO audit is astronomical. However, Brighter Vision builds this cost into their services. Later, Perry gives his tips on getting a better website ranking. Blogging is a useful tool and showcasing your specialties will ensure a high ranking on a specific Google search.
Meet Perry Rosenbloom Perry has always had a connection to the field of therapy and therapists, having family both working in the field and benefiting from it. He founded Brighter Vision in March 2014 with a passion to use business savvy and web development know-how to help therapists both fully realize their career ambitions and help the most people possible. Since then, Brighter Vision has grown to be the world’s best therapist website design company, as well as one of the most trusted names in our industry, helping thousands of therapists throughout the world. Brighter Vision Perry started Brighter Vision four years ago to help therapists’ brand themselves more effectively, so they can get the types of clients they love working with. The company focuses on building brands and websites. This upcoming year, they are offering marketing automation solutions designed exclusively for therapists. Perry started this business because he wanted to create websites for exclusively one industry. Focusing on one industry saves money for his company and his clients.
Website Help The process is as streamlined and straightforward as possible. When signing up for Brighter Vision, you will receive a design team and gain the help of two developers. Fill out a brief online questionnaire, pick a theme, and a week later the team will have a website specifically designed for your needs. Once you’re ready for the site to go live, the team makes the switch, and you will be able to get technical advice and guidance whenever needed. Using Brighter Vision, you will not need to learn SEO or learn how to change the color of a sentence. Also, the SEO specialist will audit your SEO; usually this would cost a couple of hundred dollars. However, with Brighter Vision, you can get this SEO audit with the cost of your membership. Lastly, Brighter Insights will rank your brand online from Google Analytics in a readable and straightforward way.
Website Ranking Blogging can be useful in positioning yourself as an expert. Brighter Vision has a tool that allows their customers to blog easily. The growth platform will enable you to access blog posts and have automatic sharing services to social media accounts. The biggest mistake Perry sees therapists make is not having specific service pages to market their specialties. Most therapists have a particular services page; however, Google ranks websites as accurate as possible to a consumer’s search request. When someone is doing a basic therapist search, he or she is doing initial research. You want to focus on someone who is searching for a specific therapist. If you do not have pages listing your specific searches, then your page won’t get any Google hits.
>>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Resources Mentioned: Brighter Vision
Brighter Vision’s Blog
SEO Sherpa
Money Matters in Private Practice
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon goes solo and discusses his Thanksgiving traditions and how he tries to practice gratitude. Then, Gordon tells us about the recent conference he attended and his nomination for Best Therapist Blog from 2018 Best of Therapist Resources Awards. Later, we learn how networking can have a positive impact on ourselves and the lives of others in the community. Gordon then discusses the Netflix show 13 Reasons Why and what some students in Michigan did to address teen suicide with a program called 13 Reason Why Not. Lastly, Gordon sends thoughts and prayers to Paradise, CA and everyone affected by the shootings plaguing our country.
Practicing Gratitude, Kindness, and Compassion Gordon reveals how he is grateful for all the therapists out there because of the hardships they carry. Also, Gordon reminds us to practice compassion and kindness toward yourself and others. Solo practicing can be a lonely time, so it is essential to practice gratitude toward your relationships with others. During the conference, Gordon reveals how he was able to form bonds with other therapists and get affirmation that his work is recognized. Then, Gordon encourages us to rally around each other and be grateful for the work everyone does to help others.
Networking Gordon discusses how networking with like-minded colleagues and doing advocacy work will have a positive impact on your life and the lives of the others. Recently, in Texas, there was a push to do away with licenses to limit the ability of therapists to give diagnoses. Mental health provider associations did away with this push. Networking with others help make changes to policies and prevent ones that could do damage to the community. Staying involved is another way to show gratitude, by understanding the city and showing a genuine interest in your community.
Resources Mentioned: 2018 Best of Therapist Resources Awards
BrighterVision
Therapist Experience Podcast
Products from Amazon.com * -40% Daring Greatly: How the Courage to Be Vulnerable Transforms the Way We Live, Love, Parent, and Lead Price: $10.16 Was: $17.00 * -26% Choosing Gratitude: Your Journey to Joy Price: $11.08 Was: $14.99 * Grateful: The Transformative Power of Giving Thanks Price: Check on Amazon
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon and Tina talk about how intensives are a game changer for private practice because it allows you to increase profits for less time worked. Tina explains what inspired her to get her certification as a sex addiction therapist and how it lead to other intensives she now offers. Next, the two discuss niches and some things that may be preventing therapists from creating one. Tina reveals some external and internal blocks that could be the culprit of your hesitancy. Later, Gordon and Tina talk about passive income, planning long-term, and collaborating with others.
Meet Tina Wehner Tina Wehner is the Founder and Executive Director of Livingwell Counseling and Associates, established in 2012. She is a counselor, a supervisor, and a consultant. Tina earned her BA in Human Services from Elon University and later received her Master’s degree in Counseling from Gordon Conwell Theological Seminary in Charlotte. Tina is a North Carolina Licensed Professional Counselor and supervisor (LPCS), a Certified Sex Addictions Therapist and supervisor (CSAT-S) and educational Supervisor (CSAT-S), and of the only Certified Hope and Freedom Practitioners (CHFP) in the country.
In addition to treating individuals and couples with traditional therapy, Tina’s advanced training and certification by Hope and Freedom founder, Dr. Milton Magness, brings the groundbreaking sex addiction treatment model to her practice. Over the years Tina has developed various other “3 Day Intensive” programs for individuals, couples, families, and groups. She now offers a wide variety of Intensive therapy through LivingWell and LivingWell Recovery and over six years have facilitated nearly 100 Intensives during that time.
Intensive therapy includes many different modalities of treatments, comes packaged in several options related to timeframe and is an excellent option for most situations that clients would seek traditional therapy. We often say using an Intensive approach is like getting 3 to 6 months of traditional therapy in 3 days!
Not only is Tina a “go-getter,” she a gifted motivator. She is acutely aware of the emotional struggles her clients and supervised clinicians face on a daily basis. Her life experiences along with her comprehensive education and experience shine through with unparalleled compassion and understanding. Because of her mission to come alongside others in need, she has recently launched her consulting business, The Confident Clinician to support clinicians in powerful ways, finding their confidence as practitioners and exponentially impacting more people as a result.
Tina grew up in Durham and currently lives with her family in Concord, NC. She is the mom of twin teenage daughters and a younger son.
Three-Day Intensives Tina tells a story about how her clients needed intensive therapy for sex addiction, and she kept referring couples to see a specialist. After referring multiple couples, Tina knew she wanted to get her sex addiction license to serve her clients better. Now, Tina can charge well over her average session rate to give her clients crisis intervention. Also, she feels more like a coach and a guide instead of just a therapist. In addition to the sex addiction intensives, Tina also offers marriage intensives, family of origin intensives, and family intensives. Gordon points out that intensives give more bang for your buck because you can increase your profits for less time worked.
Niches Tina points out that therapists have external and internal blocks that prevent them from pursuing a niche. External blocks are the client demographics in your area might not need niche therapy, or there may not be any training programs in your area. Some internal blocks include doubting your ability to pull off niche therapy. Tina points out that when someone becomes an expert, people will find you because they are searching for the best. To overcome your blocks, Tina suggests finding scalable ways to reach your goals to become certified and successful in your niche work. Also, Make a calculated decision around your niche, do something that you love. Think about what you are good at how you can market yourself as a niche therapist. Communicate to people that you are capable of solving their problem and make sure you can back it up.
Passive Income Tina has spent quite a bit of time in the past year on passive income and loves helping other clinicians figure it out. For example, Tina wants clinicians to figure out a long-term strategic plan to think about doing something they love and earn money without sitting in their chair. Gordon wishes he knew about passive income earlier and then talks about his Financial Analysis Guide that will help others think long-term and alleviate negative pitfalls. The two then discuss how you should never compare your start to someone else’s middle and the reason people succeed is their persistence, grit, and tenacity.
>>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Collaborating Tina suggests using a multi-prong approach by utilizing learning and coaching to maximize your time and profit. Gordan and Tina agree they wished they reached out to others sooner. Being able to ask others for advice instead of trying to figure everything out on your own is a great way to learn without having to use trial by error. Many therapists have gone through the motions of starting their private practice, learn from their mistakes, so you don’t end up doing the same.
Resources Mentioned: Practice Solutions Killin’It Camp Mastermind Group Money Matters in Private Practice Counseling101.com Sexaddiction101.com Products from Amazon.com * -32% The Ideal Team Player: How to Recognize and Cultivate The Three Essential Virtues Price: $17.00 Was: $25.00 * -32% You Need a Budget: The Proven System for Breaking the Paycheck-to-Paycheck Cycle, Getting Out of Debt, and Living the Life You Want Price: $16.31 Was: $23.99
Products from Amazon.com * Million Dollar Practice: Five Steps to Make Sure Your Group is on Track Price: Check on Amazon
Products from Amazon.com * -35% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $17.45 Was: $27.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon goes solo and discusses the things he has learned in his practice over the past twelve years. He reveals how he started his practice in the realm of his church life to see what would happen and it took off. Gordon wanted the freedom and flexibility that having his own practice allowed him. Then, Gordon reveals the lessons he has learned. The first lessons are the importance of making small steps, putting the right systems in place, and learning how to outsource. Later, Gordon talks the value of understanding ROI, planning things out, and setting goals. After, we learn some essential networking and marketing skills. The big one Gordon brings up is using the coordination of care form to let doctors know you are seeking new clients. Lastly, Gordon explains diversifying income, managing money, and creating niches.
Importance of Making Small Steps Gordon says if you bite off more than you can chew, it can really put you into crisis. Make sure you are financially prepared to start a practice. If you jump in without the finances, it may slowly put you under. Once you have at least ten sessions per week, then a snowball effect should take place. Gordon says it takes about two years of work to really get the practice to a sustainable place with a steady source of referrals.
Putting the Right Systems in Place Know how to have the clinical systems in place. For example, know your intake procedures, financial management, and how you plan on doing client follow ups. These systems should be pretty well automated, and you do not want to spend a lot of time on them. Systems are a crucial piece to make sure the practice runs smoothly. Gordon wishes he spent more time on this to grow his business faster.
Do More Outsourcing & Return on Investment Gordon was concerned about spending too much money or thinking he did not have enough money. He wishes he would have outsourced more. With the insurance panels, Gordon should have outsourced all of those processes earlier. He then spent a year learning to navigate all the credentialing aspects and billing procedures. Gordon feels like he wasted a lot of time doing this instead of outsourcing. If something is going to take you a long time to learn, Gordon says to outsource.
Understand the return of investment on your time and on your money. Therapists sell their time and expertise. Time is precious, so it would have been a much better return on investment to outsource technical business aspects and spend more time seeing patients. Gordon says to pay attention and have the right mindset to ensure you are seeing a return on your investment.
Planning Things Out & Set Goals Gordon learned to map things out by writing everything down and prioritizing each item. In the past, Gordon has had a bad habit of jumping into things without writing anything down. For example, during this podcast, Gordon listed everything he wanted to say as not to ramble.
Have an understanding of ways to measure what you are doing so you know if it is working or not. Particularly around the financial side. Really look at the numbers. It inspired Gordon to put together his Money Mindset course. Lesson learned, Gordon’s fee split was not working, and he was subsidizing to pay his therapist. Financially supporting his therapist was a generous thing to do, but it was not sustainable.
Value of Seeking Help & Networking Gordon reveals one of his friends was very generous with his time and give him pointers on what to do to start his own practice. His friend told him to get on insurance panels; however, it might not be the right decision for everyone. You do not need to be on insurance panels to be successful. Private pay is easier to do and fewer headaches. Insurance panels should depend on your client base and demographics. Gordon does not want anyone to be afraid of seeking help from others. Anyone looking to start a practice can find so much assistance and resources that are available online and in-person. For example, Gordon wants to help people start their own practice.
Networking is all about building relationships. Get out and let people know who you are and what you do. Gordon wishes he spent time making himself known to doctors and other people who give frequent referrals. Coordination of care is when clients come to see Gordon, and they sign a release to let their doctor know they are being seen by him. Also, he sent a flyer alerting the doctor that he was accepting new patients. One particular doctor’s office was struggling to find a therapist to refer to, so he ended up getting many new clients from this one little marketing strategy.
Create a Niche One of Gordon’s niches is marriage and family therapy. Gordon advertised the fact that he does marriage therapy and counseling because he loves working with couples and helping them navigate through relationships. Also, he works with people who struggle with sex and pornography addictions. Gordon gets a lot of calls for people seeking help with those issues. Creating a niche is an excellent way for people to hear about your services.
Diversifying Income and Money Management One reason Gordon started his podcast was to create income. Also, Gordon created an online course to assist others with using G-Suite. These few things diversify Gordon’s income. Another way Gordon expands his salary is with a group practice. Then Gordon explains how his parents did not know how to manage their money very well and lived paycheck to paycheck. So many therapists are struggling financially, so Gordon wants to end the money struggle for business people.
>>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Resources Mentioned: Practice Solutions Mastermind Group G-Suite For Therapists Money Matters in Private Practice Brighter Vision: Use Coupon Code GORDON for a free month! Products from Amazon.com * -32% You Need a Budget: The Proven System for Breaking the Paycheck-to-Paycheck Cycle, Getting Out of Debt, and Living the Life You Want Price: $16.31 Was: $23.99 * Million Dollar Practice: Five Steps to Make Sure Your Group is on Track Price: Check on Amazon * -40% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $16.20 Was: $27.00 * -34% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $17.70 Was: $27.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon goes solo and talks how to set fees and ways to diversify your private practice. Gordon also discusses how his private practice started as a counseling ministry within his church. Later, Gordon dispels the common myth that experience equals value. We also learn how Gordon sets his fees and some common things to look out for when doing your calculations. Keep in mind how many clients you want to see per week, how much time you want to spend per session, and how long it will take you to do the administrative tasks involved. Lastly, Gordon explains what diversifying your income means and some common ways to generate passive income.
Gordon’s First Practice Gordon reveals his private practice actually started as a counseling ministry within his church. Part of his profits would go to the church in exchange for having a place to practice. Gordon says his biggest mistake with this model was not charging enough to the clients.
Experience Doesn’t Equal Value Gordon wants to dispel a widespread myth. Many people believe if they have no experience than they are not considered valuable. Gordon wants to point out that people with a master’s degree or higher are less than ten percent of the population. College degrees add a great deal of value to your resume. Also, imposter syndrome can weigh heavy on a person, but it is essential never to discount yourself.
Setting Fees Gordon suggests thinking about what sort of lifestyle you want. How much time do you want to spend on the job and how much time do you want off? Also, think about what you want to gain out of being self-employed and having your practice. When people work at agencies, they gain a great deal of experience but typically burnout because of high caseloads and little time off.
Start with how many clients you want to see per week. Gordon’s ideal caseload is anywhere from fifteen to twenty clients a week. It would be best if you also considered how much time you want to spend per session and how long it will take you to do the administrative tasks involved. Take what you want to make annually and divide that by 48 weeks (four weeks of time off) to discover how much you need to make per week. You will also need to know what your monthly expenses are (phone, electricity, internet, etc.) and multiply by twelve months. Add this to your desired annual income to discover what you need to make overall. Finally, divide this number by how many sessions per week you want to have to find out what you need to charge per session.
Your fees will also depend on where you are in the country. Gordon points out that his fees in Tennessee will be much lower than someone who is practicing in San Francisco. Also, you can check what other therapists are making in your area by using Psychology Todayto ensure you are charging similar fees to your competition. Also, it is essential to find out what your session fee is if you are working with insurance panels. This number can range from fifty dollars to two-hundred dollars depending on your location and contract. Put your full rate on your insurance claim to reap the benefits of any changes that may be made.
>>Get the FREE Financial Analysis Guide<< Diversify Your Income It is so important to diversify your income and create streams of passive income. Passive income is doing things that will generate revenue for yourself after doing the work upfront. Some examples are writing a book, affiliate marketing, and adding clinicians. Hiring clinicians will allow you to benefit from sharing office space financially. Your expenses will go down and therefore you will be able to keep more of your profits.
Gordon also points out that groups give you more bang for your buck because you have more than one client in the same sessions. Also, Gordon says you can look into having intensives to diversify your income. You can do a day-long session and get a lot more money for your time. Lastly, courses will also allow you to create passive income. Gordon points out that he uses courses to diversify his income.
Resources Mentioned: * Insurance Credentialing and Billing for Mental Health Clinicians * The Practice of Therapy Facebook Page * The Practice of Therapy Community * Practikat * Practice Solutions * Psychology Today * Settings Fees and Session Rates in Private Practice * Smart Passive Income * How to Diversify Your Income for Private Practice Success
Products from Amazon.com * People Processes: How Your People Can Be Your Organization's Competitive Advantage Price: $14.99 * -36% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $17.27 Was: $27.00 * -40% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $16.20 Was: $27.00 * -37% QuickBooks Desktop Pro 2018 [PC Online Code] [OLD VERSION] Price: $189.99 Was: $299.99
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon goes solo and talks about his recent invite to Joe Sanok’s Killin’ It Camp. Then, we find out why Gordon wants to assist others with their finances and the number one reason most private practices fail. Later, Gordon helps with analyzing current finances, and we discover why Gordon is on an insurance panel. Lastly, we learn how to break down our expenses, profit, and taxes.
Get the FREE Finance Analysis Guide<< Gordon’s “Why” Gordon reveals his “why” for wanting to assist others with their finances. Then, Gordon divulges the number one reason most private practices fail because the owners have not prepared themselves financially for owning a business. Also, owners do not put the proper systems in place to fully understand how businesses work. Most private practices go under because the owners are worried about money, paying the bills, and financial stability.
Analyzing Current Finances Every private practice needs clients to see. Without clients, you will not be able to make money. The marketing aspect of finance depends on the number of referrals you acquire. Most private practices will make money from their referrals. Especially if your business is in the beginning stages, often owners will overload themselves with clients and be overworked.
The other side of your finances is the expense side, or what it costs to maintain your practice. Gordon says there is not much overhead in a service-based business. Some common expenses for private practice include internet, furniture, electricity, and phone bills. The other aspect of operating your business is maintaining a website so people can find you and make appointments. Also, if you are in a group practice, you will need to keep your labor expenses in mind.
Gordon reveals he is insurance based because of the demographics in his neighborhood. The area he lives in pretty much demands insurance panels. Without insurance, Gordon says it would be an uphill battle to get the clients he needs. Many of his clients depend on insurance, so it was a no-brainer for Gordon to be on an insurance panel. Your pay will depend on which insurance company you use. Usually, private practices that use insurance panels will have to see more clients than private paid practices.
Break It Down Gordon suggests breaking down what it costs you to run your business per client and also find out what your average per session rate is. Gordon says you can do a lot of analysis just knowing these two figures. These figures will help you predict your cash flow and assist you in making future plans. Also, Gordon thinks it is a good idea to raise your rates periodically. For instance, Gordon plans on raising his prices on the first of the year.
With insurance companies, contract rates are fairly well fixed. Side tip, just because an insurance company gives you a specific rate, doesn’t mean you have to accept it. Those rates are negotiable! Keep this in mind when you are thinking about renewing your insurance contracts.
Make sure you know what your gross net profit is. You can find it using this equation; gross net profit is income minus your expenses. As an example, Gordon says he gets 100 dollars of profit and it costs him 25 dollars per client, so he keeps 75 dollars per client. Another mistake people make in private practice is covering their expenses rather than paying themselves. Gordon says always to pay yourself first, then pay expenses and taxes.
Profit First All of the money you receive should be allocated based on a percentage. Ideally, a percentage of your money off the top will be designated to profit. Second, it would be best if you allocated a portion to yourself. You are your number one employee, so you should pay yourself well.
Another allocation goes to your operating expense. Most people focus on their operating expenses first. However, operating expenses need to stay low. The Parkinson effect says that people will spend the resources they have. Gordon says this is the wrong way to think about it. Instead, spend based on percentages. The percentages are 50 percent to owner’s pay, 15 percent to taxes, and 30 percent to operating expenses.
Taxes Self-employment tax is different from having taxes as an employee. Depending on your tax bracket, 18 to 20 percent goes to your income taxes. These taxes should be paid quarterly based on your net income after expenses. Gordon says to set aside money every week to pay these taxes. Also, talk to an accountant, so you are getting the correct information for your area. You do not want to get to the end of the year with a massive tax bill and no money to pay it.
Resources Mentioned: * Finance Analysis Guide * Joe Sanok’s Killin’ It Camp * Mike Michalowicz Using PROFIT FIRST in Your Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 049 * Mike Michalowicz Using PROFIT FIRST in Your Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 050 * Profit First Resources * Billy Robinson, CPA Bookkeeping, & ACCOUNTING in Private Practice | TPOT Podcast 053 * Gordon’s Financial Management Course * The Practice of Therapy Resources
To be transparent… some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that if use the links to purchase products or services we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you, when you purchase. Thanks for using these links!
Products from Amazon.com * People Processes: How Your People Can Be Your Organization's Competitive Advantage Price: $14.99
Products from Amazon.com * -36% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $17.27 Was: $27.00
Products from Amazon.com * -40% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $16.20 Was: $27.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Katie Englert about the transition to private practice. The two reminisce about starting out their careers working in closets and how moving to private practice was a natural transition. There is, however, a lot you need to learn about the business side of things. With no business degree, Katie had to search far and wide for the resources she needed. Eventually, she decided enough was enough and that is how her business Practikat came to fruition. Katie discusses how Practikat makes business so much easier for private practice and all the different things you can find on her website. Later, we learn to do less bootstrapping and why being vulnerable can be beneficial for business.
>>Take the finance course survey here<<
Meet Katie Englert Katie Englert, LPCC, NCC, BC-TMH is an experienced entrepreneur who works with therapists to help them pioneer new ways to practice. She believes that helping therapists find their purpose as a therapist is how the mental health field will prosper. Katie has started and grown six-figure group private practices and co-created Practikat, the first online marketplace exclusive for therapists. She loves helping therapist discover products they have already created! Outside of work, she enjoys spending time at the soccer field with her kids, travel, hanging out with her family and learning about her family history.
Transitioning to Private Practice When Katie started therapy, she rented a closet out of a practice and paid every time she needed to “bum” an exam room. Gordon reminisces about a similar situation when he started practicing therapy. He ended up being stuck in the back of a storage closet with cheap furniture and the paper-thin walls. Not exactly ideal conditions to see patients.
Katie says the process of transitioning to private practice was pretty natural but she had to search a lot for the support she needed. With no business degree, there are a lot of things you have to learn about starting a private practice. Katie suggests finding people you have a good connection with to help with the process.
Consulting Resource Katie’s business Practikat was born from the struggle of her transition to private practice and not knowing the business side. She spent hours over the course of years learning and testing things out on her own. A couple of years ago, Katie realized she was done searching for things and was ready to solve the problem.
Practikat is an easy platform to use. You can buy a variety of things like intake forms, tracking spreadsheets, premade letters, checklists, presentations, bundles of paperwork, tools for the administrative side, agreement templates, and credentialing tools. The presentations are premade with slides and handouts for things like self-harm and forgiveness. These presentations can be customized and presented in your community. Katie says the things people are mostly looking for are marketing items, administrative forms, and hiring tools.
Do Less Bootstrapping Delegation is a learned skill. You need to get to a place of growth where you can master the art of letting things go. Find support in areas where you may have weaknesses. Katie looks for assistance with systems because she is not the most detail-oriented person. Figure out the strengths of your team to make things easier. Katie says to have a drive on Google in order to share operational things with your team. Also, Katie suggests using strength assessments to find out her team’s strengths and weaknesses. This helps her know how to delegate smarter amongst her team.
Be Vulnerable and Reach Out Katie reminds us to be vulnerable. Transitioning to private practice has been another opportunity for Katie to learn more about herself. When you are spearheading something, it can’t just be you, it has to be more than one person. Also, Gordon reminds us to reach out to others for coaching along the way. Even if it someone who is outside of the private practice business. For example, Gordon reached out to small business coach to gain clarity about the direction he wanted to go.
Private Practice Finances Having a smooth intake process will help you out a lot. Gordon reveals how he used to return the phone calls of potential customers who were inquiring about his work. This took up so much of his time that Gordon decided to come up with an email template to expedite the process. This is just one example of how Gordon is saving time and money on the daily. In addition, in order to help others out, Gordon is putting together a private practice financial management course.
Resources Mentioned: Practikat – www.practikat.com
Facebook – www.facebook.com/Practikat/
G-Suite for Therapists Course
Products from Amazon.com * People Processes: How Your People Can Be Your Organization's Competitive Advantage Price: Check on Amazon * -34% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $17.70 Was: $27.00 * -40% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $16.20 Was: $27.00
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Billy Robinson, CPA about some essential things to remember when starting a business. Billy suggests seeking out a trusted CPA and an attorney in order to outsource some of the complicated aspects of running a business. We also learn why it is important to decide on your choice of business entity. Next, we discover how making profits and doing taxes are different when being the business owner as opposed to an employee. Lastly, Billy and Gordon discuss keeping overhead expenses low and some examples of key performance indicators. Overall, self-employment can be very rewarding, yet it is critical to making sure you are spending time ON the business rather than IN the business.
Meet Billy Robinson Billy is a director based in the Kingsport office of Brown Edwards and focuses his area of practice on construction and real estate related companies, family-owned businesses and governmental agencies. Billy has twice been named a “Super CPA” by Virginia Business magazine and has been named one of the “Top 10 Business People – Under 40” by the Shenandoah Valley Business Journal. Billy graduated from the University of Virginia’s College at Wise with a Bachelor of Science in Accounting and a Minor in Criminal Justice. He is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, the Virginia Society of Certified Public Accountants, the Construction Financial Management Association, the Virginia Transportation Construction Alliance, the Shenandoah Valley Builder’s Association, and the Associated General Contractors of Virginia.
Billy suggests seeking out a CPA and a reliable attorney to be your trusted advisors. Familiarize yourself with how owning and operating a business is different from being an employee. Owning a business includes a whole different set of responsibilities. For example, you will need to know how to set up payroll taxes and be familiar with filing requirements.
I need your feedback… Take just 3 minutes and fill out the Practice of Therapy Financial Course Survey
>> Take the Survey Now<<
Starting a Business The most important decision is to establish your choice of entity in order to file your income tax return. For a lot of small businesses, the owner does not set up their business as a separate corporation and end up filing as Schedule C. Keep in mind you will not have much legal liability protection when filing a Schedule C. With a single-member LLC (limited liability corporation) the IRS will disregard that entity for taxation purposes and it will be reported on your personal return. Filing as a single-member LLC will earn legal liability protection.
Keep Business Finances and Personal Finances Separate Owners need to have a type of accounting system for business expenses. Keep separate business credit cards and banking accounts from your personal ones. If being audited, the first thing the IRS will look for is personal expenses that have been charged with your business account. In order for something to be an expense, it has to be considered a necessary and ordinary expense for the business itself. QuickBooks is the best system out there for small businesses.
Startup expenses can be accumulated and written off in the first year. A car can also be written off as a business expense. However, it is important to keep your personal use of the car separate from business use. Keeping a travel log of mileage is a critical way to ensure this. You can even write off the mileage from your personal car at fifty-three cents a mile. Advertising expenses, certifications, training, conferences, and membership fees are all examples of necessary and ordinary business expenses.
Making Profits The most important thing people do not pay attention to is cash flow. Owners need to maintain a reserve or an emergency fund. If anything happens you will need funds to keep the business running. Are you spending your time ON the business or IN the business? Billing and accounting can be outsourced because you will need to focus on revenue generation. Time management is critical to a service orientated business.
Taxes Another mistake Billy sees in new business owners is not understanding how taxes change for them. Businesses have to pay quarterly estimates. If you do not do this, you will end up with hefty penalties at the end of the year. Quarterly taxes are due April 15, June 15, September 15, and January 15. An example of taxes business owners often forget about are the self-employment taxes of 15.2%. Billy suggests setting aside about 30 percent of your revenues to cover sales tax, income tax, and self-employment tax.
Overhead Expenses Overhead erodes profit quickly. Figure out how much you are able to bill per chargeable hour. Assess how many hours of billable time you have and then set a budget. What kind of overhead can you afford? Keeping your overhead low at first is very important. This means not spending a lot on office space and labor. Billy suggests walking slowly and smartly when first starting a business.
Key Performance Indicators (KPI) Business owners have to be mindful of their billing structure. A sliding scale method changes depending on the client’s income level. This gives providers the opportunity to have their services reach people of all needs. Also, you will need to understand the amount you bill compared to your contract rate. Rates vary depending on which insurance company you are using.
Gordon suggests finding out which insurance company gives you the biggest bang for your dime. In addition, as a provider, you need to know your average cost and revenue per session. It is vital to understand what your costs are per client and then structure your pay scale to ensure profits are being made. Overall, be realistic of how much time you are going to have and the number of patients you will be able to see. In the future, you will need to be more selective of which type of patients you are taking in.
Resources Mentioned: Billy’s website – www.becpas.com
423-246-6102
Email Billy – brobinson@becpas.com
Check-out Practice Solutions for helping you navigate insurance billing and credentialing – practiceoftherapy.com/practicesolutions Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Jeremy Zug fromPractice Solutions about his medical billing in private practice. The two discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using insurance panels versus private pay. Jeremy also brings up the fact that most providers disregard the option to do out-of-network billing and goes into detail on how to provide this service. Later they talk about insurance credentialing and Jeremey gives some helpful tips and tricks to make the process easier. Lastly, we find out why using Practice Solutions can make being on insurance panels easier and how you will never have to deal with an insurance claim again.
Meet Jeremy Zug Jeremy grew up in the Pacific Northwest where he discovered his passion for people. He decided to go to college in Chicago to further develop his skills working with people and pursue a degree in counseling. While in Chicago he worked for a group practice as a practice biller and marketing manager. This initiated his desire to pursue learning about the business of private practice, particularly medical billing. He now lives in Michigan with his wife of 3 years. They both are pursuing their passion of helping helpers maintain sustainable and compliant billing practices. In his free time, Jeremy loves reading, fishing, biking, hiking, and camping
Insurance Panels vs. Private Pay Jeremy and Gordon start the podcast by discussing the advantages and disadvantages of insurance panels versus private pay. Jeremy asserts that private pay is definitely easier. However, the bigger the business gets, the more expenses it will generate. This will, in turn, shrink your profit margin.
While on the other hand, the benefits of being on an insurance panel include marketing and keeping the cost of therapy affordable for patients. Jeremey then touches on the fact that some insurance panels are just hard to work with. He suggests looking at the number of patient referrals for each insurance company, the ease of interaction, and their reimbursements in order to decide which company to continue working with.
Out-of-Network Billing Out-of-network billing is an option most people forget about. It lets the payment go directly to the patient and you still submit the claim, allowing the practice to still make your cash rate. Jeremy suggests collecting your cash rate up front and determining the out-of-network benefits for that patient. Chances are, their out of network benefits are pretty decent.
Jeremy reveals in certain instances, patients only paid a few dollars more than they normally would and his practice made their full rate. Gordon’s practice offers a sliding scale for patients who do not have insurance or do not wish to use their insurance. His practice still makes the money it would if they went through the insurance company.
Credentialing Gordon brings up the fact that credentialing can seem like an intimidating process. Jeremy suggests being organized with your license documentation, resume, previous work experience, and certifications. Credentialing boils down to being who you say you are. The only way to prove this is with your documentation, so it needs to be organized!
It is very important to create a filing system that makes sense and keeps all documentation in a row. Next, you need to ensure there is a consistent follow-up with the insurance companies. Lastly, you need to prove your modalities of treatment work.
Practice Solutions Jeremey discusses opening Practice Solutions and how it was only meant for five therapists in Montana. With his business, they were able to save therapists eight to ten hours a week. Therapists no longer have to waste their time calling insurance companies and dealing with the billing. With this time saved, therapists are able to see more patients and essentially pay for the cost of this outsourcing. Another solution to getting this work done would be to hire an admin. As long as the expense is covered, it will be worth the price.
Insurance Claims Insurance claims can be time-consuming and overwhelming when in a solo practice. Practice Solutions takes all of this off their plates. Practice Solutions will post payments, follow-up with the insurance company on rejected claims, send out patient statements, and do the credentialing. All of these items are now 100% the responsibility of Practice Solutions.
Resources Mentioned: Practice Solutions- practicesol.com/gordon
Session Note Helper
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Dr. Kate Campbell and Katie Lemieux from the Private Practice Startup Podcast join Gordon to talk about getting clarity with your marketing, diversifying and the importance of creating a niche in your private practice. They also talk about the importance of doing the “middle part” of marketing rather than focusing solely on strategies. In other words, knowing why and who you are marketing too and who is your ideal client. Kate & Katie share what they have learned in their journeys and how they got interested in their niche of helping clinicians brand and market their practices.
Meet Kate & Katie The Private Practice Startup is co-owned by Kate Campbell, Ph.D., LMFT and Katie Lemieux, LMFT. They’re two therapists with entrepreneurial spirits who are crazy about business. They live, work and play in South Florida.
Kate and Katie both built their 6-Figure private practices in less than 2 years from the ground up and love inspiring ambitious mental health professionals to brand themselves and grow their dream private practices! They have a hunger for business, branding, and marketing. They love sharing their expertise and inspiring private practitioners across the globe from startup to mastery.
They have helped therapists increase working with the clients they love the most, profit more, increase their rates, have more time off and enjoy a true lifestyle business.
Together, they have been featured as guest experts on GoodTherapy.org, Therapy Sites, Your Badass Therapy Practice, Abundance Practice Building podcast, Selling the Couch podcast, Practice of the Practice podcast, Brighter Vision’s podcast, John Clarke’s Cast, Private Practice University, Love Your Practice podcast, Become a Group Guru and more.
They provide free podcasts, webinars, online courses, private practice coaching, INSPIRE Networking, and customizable Attorney Approved Private Practice Paperwork for therapists. Visit PrivatePracticeStartup.com for more info! Join our Startup Nation Superheroes in Facebook.
Not Missing “the Middle” One of the mistakes a lot of people make when it comes to marketing their private practices is that they jump too quickly to strategies. As Katie said, “they leave out the middle”. In other words, they do not clearly define what and why they are marketing.
Why Niche Is So Important In order to truly do a good job with marketing your practice, you need to have a clear understanding of who you are marketing to. That’s why defining a niche is so important. Having a niche helps on many different levels. First of all, it helps you identify your ideal client. Which people you enjoy working with the most. Secondly, when you are working with your ideal client, you will just do better work and be more energized by what you do.
Kate mentions having those sessions where we come out of the session feeling really good about what we did with the client and the breakthroughs they might have had. This is a good indicator of knowing what kinds of clients are your ideal clients.
Thirdly, by having a niche you can better identify the kinds of problems your ideal clients are having. This is where your “marketing message” comes from. You are able to speak their language and they are able to connect with you as a therapist on the front end.
Target Market, Niche and Ideal Client A lot of times people confuse the concepts of a target market, niche, and their ideal client. Kate talks about those differences. The examples she gives is in the context of how she thinks about her own practice as a couples therapist.
- Target market = couples
- Ideal client = couples who have experienced an affair
- Niche = the services you create to best meet their needs (ex., Gottman Method, intensives, etc.)
If you don’t know who you are marketing to it is going to be very difficult to know how to market…
You Are Your Brand The number one “product” we have to offer people in our practices is you. We trade our time and expertise for the money people pay us. A brand is simply the image or personality you project to the public. It’s what people use to identify you.
The more you can project and get that out there, the more successful your marketing will be. But it needs to be genuine and reflect who are as a person and clinician. Remember, YOU are your brand. Being able to project a true picture of yourself through your website, photos and copy go a long way in knowing how to market well.
Using video to help convey your personality to potential clients. Many people feel intimidated by video. But practicing and doing it more makes it easier. Think about the times you first started seeing clients and how you developed confidence over time.
A good way to do this is by using videos. Videos help convey your personality to potential clients. Many people feel intimidated by video. But by practicing and doing it more makes it easier. Think about the times you first started seeing clients and how you developed confidence over time. Making videos of yourself are the same.
Starting with Dream Visualization Really understanding your “why” and having a clear vision. After all, if you don’t know where you are going, how will you get there?! A good place to start is by identifying the lifestyle you want. Do some dreaming and visualization around this. Then breakdown the steps it will take to get you there.
Marketing Is Like Doing Therapy If you think about it. marketing is very much like doing therapy. It’s about joining with people and engaging with them. Marketing your practice never needs to be “cheesy” or “salesy”. Good marketing simply conveys to people who you are and how you can help them with the problems they are struggling with.
Another way to think about marketing is that it is a way to simply begin a conversation with potential clients. You help them find you then, you communicate with them about how you can help them.
Ultimately, marketing is simply about building relationships. It helps people get to know and trust you so that you can help them with their struggles.
Kate & Katie’s Resources Website: www.privatepracticestartup.com
A to Z Worksheet- Five-day walkthrough of how to build a private practice
The Private Practice Startup Facebook Group
Private Practice Marketing E-Course
Resources From Gordon Apply for the Mastermind Group
“Cool Resources” Page
Session Note Helper™
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
This episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast is the second of a two-part series interviewing Mike Michalowicz, the author of Profit First and Clockwork. Gordon is also joined by Kasey Compton and they both interview Mike about the Profit First concept and how it can help clinicians in their private practices and make them more financially secure. They also talk about honing your systems and processes to make your practice run itself rather than having it “run you”. Listen in to this fun interview and Mike’s knowledge about entrepreneurship and being a small business owner.
In part two of this interview, Mike focuses on some of the concepts behind his newest book, Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself.
Enter the book giveaway here!
Meet Mike Michalowicz Mike mi-KAL-o-wits is the author of Profit First, Surge, The Pumpkin Plan, and his newest release Clockwork. By his 35th birthday, Mike had founded and sold two companies – one to private equity and another to a Fortune 500. Today he is running his third multi-million dollar venture, Profit First Professionals.
Mike is a former small business columnist for The Wall Street Journal and the former business makeover specialist on MSNBC. Over the years, Mike has traveled the globe speaking with thousands of entrepreneurs and is here today to share the best of what he has learned.
Mike’s Websites Clockwork.life – Get the free clockwork kit!
Website – www.mikemichalowicz.com
Mike’s Books
Full Disclosure: these links are affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission at no extra cost to you when you buy using these links. Mike and I thank you for purchasing his books! You won’t regret it!
Products from Amazon.com * -32% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $18.36 Was: $27.00 * -40% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $16.20 Was: $27.00 * -24% Surge: Time the Marketplace, Ride the Wave of Consumer Demand, and Become Your Industry's Big Kahuna Price: $20.53 Was: $26.95 * -38% The Pumpkin Plan: A Simple Strategy to Grow a Remarkable Business in Any Field Price: $16.61 Was: $26.95 * -23% The Toilet Paper Entrepreneur: The tell-it-like-it-is guide to cleaning up in business, even if you are at the end of your roll. Price: $19.20 Was: $24.95
Delegating and Taking Time Off In order for any business to scale or grow, a business owner HAS to be able to delegate and take things off their plate. The problem for most of us is we think we are the only ones that can do a particular thing or “it’s just easier for us to do it ourselves” than teach someone else how to do it.
Also, Mike challenges us to commit to a 4-week vacation. Number one it will give us a chance to rejuvenate and “recharge the batteries”. And it will also force us to set up the systems and processes needed for the business to run itself.
Empowering Others It’s very easy to get trapped in a role of trying to feed our own egos and micromanage people. A better way is to empower others within our organizations to do the jobs that are not the best use of our time as practice owners. What we have to be willing to give up is this idea that the people we delegate to “won’t do it as well as I can do it”. They probably won’t. But it empowers them AND strengthens your practice when you let them do it their way.
Business Growth Practice and business growth are usually a “step process”. In other words, they reach a plateau and they need to change something in order to reach the next plateau. There is a concept called “pivoting” that Mike talks about. Pivoting is figuring out what your clients want the most and then doing that with your clients. The problem is that it might not line up with what the practice owner wants.
Being Clear On Your Purpose and Passion- Your “Why” The solution to pivoting to what the customer wants when it doesn’t align with our own wants is to get in touch with your purpose and passion. Then, deliver that service to people that are also wanting that same purpose and passion.
The Importance of Your Niche In essence, by identifying our passions and knowing which clients also share those same passions, we have defined our niche. It is the place where you will do your best clinical work and be much more profitable for you in the long run.
Finding Congregation Points – Marketing to Them Once we identify our ideal clients and define our niche, we need to then figure out where they congregate and what they are most into. Then, we make sure we are in front of them in those places. We let them know our expertise in those areas and how we can help them; AKA marketing…
Giving Preference to Your Best Clients The other point that Mike makes about this is that we should give our ideal clients preference over other clients. (Despite the value of treating all people equally…) We need to give our ideal clients the better appointment slots and work with them at our optimal times.
Abundance Mentality One of the pushback points for many clinicians is they worry that if they create a niche and move away from being a “generalist” they will somehow lose potential clients. The truth of the matter is that there is an abundance of clients out there that need and want our help. So it is important to remember to keep an abundance mentality vs. a scarcity mentality. “The riches are in the niches…”
Example of Chiropractor Mike gives an example of a Chiropractor that identified his passion for working with youth athletes and their susceptibility to injury. As a result of this, he began getting involved with youth athletic programs in his town and offering free evaluations. His town was fairly saturated with other chiropractors, but he became known as a “performance chiropractic doctor”. As a result of this, parents started bringing their children athletes to him in droves.
Understanding Your “Queen Bee Role” (QBR) Mike talks about what he refers to as a “queen bee role”. It comes from the analogy of beehives and how everything happens within a beehive is dependent on the queen bee. He defines the queen bee role as the core activity or function that drives your business forward.
FedEx example- Mike uses the example of FedEx. The one thing that FedEx is most known for and depends on is logistics. But more than that, everything the company does is focused on one thing… making sure packages arrive on time. If they don’t get that right, then everything else fails.
For most of us in private practice, our QBR is around providing sound clinical services and/or being able to get clients to sessions in a timely manner. In other words, getting them in to see us as soon as possible without long wait times.
The Big Takeaways First of all, we need to make our practices profitable in order to feed and sustain them. Without making a profit, a business will quickly die (the same is true for non-profits). We also need to have systems and processes in place in order to make profitability a priority and make it so it supports the lifestyle we want to maintain for ourselves. The systems we put in place also need to help us generate the revenue needed (referrals) to sustain the business and our lifestyle.
Bigger is not necessarily better, but we all deserve to be paid a fair amount for our services. Figure out what you need in terms of cash flow to maintain your lifestyle and create the reserves you need to have in place to maintain all that.
Watch The Full Interview On YouTube Meet Kasey Compton Kasey built a million dollar practice with over seventy-five staff members in less than two years from the ground up. She is the President/CEO of Mindsight Behavioral Group with multiple offices located in Kentucky. Kasey says, “it definitely wasn’t easy but I learned a lot scaling a practice”. She is now in year three and her business with basically running itself; largely due to the systems and processes we put into place.
Now, Kasey is a behavioral group consultant(www.consultwithkc.com) and author that helps practices avoid mistakes by cleaning up their systems, implementing better processes, and understanding what to do with their money. Kasey says, “ I take so much pride in my own practice and now I feel honored to help others grow too.”
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog. He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
This episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast is the first of a two-part series interviewing Mike Michalowicz, the author of Profit First and Clockwork. Gordon is also joined by Kasey Compton and they both interview Mike about the Profit First concept and how it can help clinicians in their private practices and make them more financially secure. They also talk about honing your systems and processes to make your practice run itself rather than having it “run you”. Listen in to this fun interview and Mike’s knowledge about entrepreneurship and being a small business owner.
In part one of this interview, Mike focuses on how he came up with the Profit First system and some other ways of thinking about business finance to help us pay ourselves first AND make a profit.
Enter the book giveaway here!
Meet Mike Michalowicz Mike mi-KAL-o-wits is the author of Profit First, Surge, The Pumpkin Plan, and his newest release Clockwork. By his 35th birthday, Mike had founded and sold two companies – one to private equity and another to a Fortune 500. Today he is running his third multi-million dollar venture, Profit First Professionals.
Mike is a former small business columnist for The Wall Street Journal and the former business makeover specialist on MSNBC. Over the years, Mike has traveled the globe speaking with thousands of entrepreneurs and is here today to share the best of what he has learned.
Mike’s Websites Clockwork.life – Get the free clockwork kit!
Website – www.mikemichalowicz.com
Mike’s Books
Full Disclosure: these links are affiliate links which simply means we receive a commission at no extra cost to you when you buy using these links. Mike and I thank you for purchasing his books! You won’t regret it!
Products from Amazon.com * -41% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $16.00 Was: $27.00 * -34% Clockwork: Design Your Business to Run Itself Price: $17.70 Was: $27.00 * -24% Surge: Time the Marketplace, Ride the Wave of Consumer Demand, and Become Your Industry's Big Kahuna Price: $20.53 Was: $26.95 * -38% The Pumpkin Plan: A Simple Strategy to Grow a Remarkable Business in Any Field Price: $16.62 Was: $26.95 * -23% The Toilet Paper Entrepreneur: The tell-it-like-it-is guide to cleaning up in business, even if you are at the end of your roll. Price: $19.24 Was: $24.95
Understanding the Financial State of Your Practice Mike was able to create a system of looking at and tracking your business finances in a way that is simpler and a more intuitive for those of us that are non-accountants. Most people in small business, unless they are an accountant or have had some other financial training, find all of this very intimidating or confusing.
For most people, we tend to look at our bank balance as a measure of our practice’s financial health. And most accountants will tell you that is NOT the way to measure things. Instead, we need to be looking at our profit and loss statements, cash flow statements and balance sheets. Mike said his accountant “implored him” he should also learn about the KPI (key performance indicators) and OCR (operating cash ratio metric); all of which seem terribly intimidating for the average business owner.
The other thing most practice owners and small business operators do, is take what is left, after all the bills are paid, to pay themselves and make a profit. They are living on the leftovers, rather than paying themselves first and/or making a profit in their business. But in order for any business or private practice to survive and be sustainable, it HAS to make a profit.
Profit First With Mike’s “Profit First” system, he turns conventional wisdom on its head and gives us another way of thinking about how we manage our finances and look at profit. The traditional way of thinking about making a profit is this:
Income -Expenses = Profit It’s what we get to keep after everything else is paid for; operating expenses, salaries, and taxes. The problem is that the bigger we grow, the more our expenses grow too. It becomes a never ending cycle that keeps our profitability at bay and keeps our businesses unhealthy. Mike says this line of thinking is kind of like saying, “my health comes last”
Mike says that a better way is to allocate our profit first rather than let our expenses and operating costs determine what we get. The premise is to allocate a percentage of the income on the front end for profit. It looks like this:
Income – Profit = Expenses This of course seems like unconventional wisdom. Mike goes on to explain that by taking our profit first we are better able to take control of our business’ health and operate at a level that is more sustainable and realistic.
AC/DC Concept (Not talking about the rock band this time…) One of the things any business or private practice needs to do in order to scale and grow is put the systems in place that allows the business to run itself. Mike talks about the four phases of business flow that most all businesses depend on in order to be viable. These four phases (or systems) are:
- Attract – Getting clients interested in using our services.
- Convert – Clients make an appointment and commit to using our services
- Deliver – We hold our sessions with clients and deliver our services
- Collect – The client pays us for our services and/or we collect from third party payors
Mike says that when a business is struggling, it is usually because one or more of these four systems is not working well. It’s kind of like a chain. Find the weakest link and fix that and the business will begin to grow on thrive.
Profit is Usually The Easiest Thing To Fix Kasey mentioned that when she is working with practice owners and looking at their financials, she says that a lot of times everything looks good on the surface, but the profit is off. She says that profit is easy to fix if we take our profit first then let everything else fall into place based on the principles mentioned above.
Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs We are familiar with Maslow’s Hierarchy Of Needs. We all need our basics first. Down to the very basics such as oxygen, food, water, shelter, etc. In business, “sales” is the oxygen. If a business is not bringing in any income it can not survive and quickly suffocate. Mike says, “profit is the food”. Profit is what sustains a business and keeps it healthy. Without profit, a business will starve to death.
Mike said, that the tendency of most businesses is when they are struggling is to push for more sales. But that is kind of like giving it more oxygen when what it really needs is more food…profit.
The solution he says, is to start allocating a profit on the front end (little bits of nutrition) and then operate on the remainder. It’s an unconventional way of thinking about it, but what it does is to force the business to operate within its means and stay healthy.
Making a Behavioral Shift What this does in essence is to “force” better control of our expenses by making a behavioral shift using what Mike refers to as “Parkinson’s Law” (not like the disease, it’s a different Parkinson…). Parkinson’s Law essentially says, that as the availability of a resource increases, so does our consumption of that resource.
Think about your tube of toothpaste… when we have a brand new tube we generally put more toothpaste on our toothbrushes because we know there is more than enough needed for that brushing. As we get down toward the end of the toothpaste tube and we are squeezing and squeezing to get the last drop out, we are willing to use less so we don’t have to get another tube of toothpaste.
Mike says what we need to be doing instead with our operating expenses, is to adjust our business to operate within the means of what has been allocated for operating expenses. In other words, treat the full tube of toothpaste like it is nearly empty without skimping on brushing our teeth; paying ourselves and making a profit.
Using Our Money Differently Empowers Us When we start setting aside our profit first it takes the pressure off. When we give ourselves permission to get away the “hustle and grind” and trying to grow based on size and the amount of revenue coming in. Instead, let growth take place based on how we allocate the money we have coming in. Mike says he has known several large businesses that were bringing in a lot of money, but they were not profitable.
He believes that we can find the what works for us and that the right size business will find us. Revenue can be a stress factor. For every dollar we take in, we have an obligation to deliver a service in return. Eventually, this does have the potential of becoming overwhelming. The remedy is to instead make your practice profitable instead of trying to chase more revenue.
“Let your right size business find you. What feels good is right…”
In the next episode, we will focus more on systems and talk about Mike’s newest book, Clockwork…
Watch the Full Interview on Youtube!
Meet Kasey Compton Kasey built a million dollar practice with over seventy-five staff members in less than two years from the ground up. She is the President/CEO of Mindsight Behavioral Group with multiple offices located in Kentucky. Kasey says, “it definitely wasn’t easy but I learned a lot scaling a practice”. She is now in year three and her business with basically running itself; largely due to the systems and processes we put into place.
Now, Kasey is a behavioral group consultant(www.consultwithkc.com) and author that helps practices avoid mistakes by cleaning up their systems, implementing better processes, and understanding what to do with their money. Kasey says, “ I take so much pride in my own practice and now I feel honored to help others grow too.”
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Alison Pidgeon, LPC about growing your private practice by diversifying your income. Alison and Gordon talk about what they have learned about growing private practices and then getting to the place where they both bought their own buildings. They also talk about some of the ways in which group practices can be formed and why they have chosen the business models they are using in their practices. Alison and Gordon talk about some of the things they have learned “the hard way” and what how they might have done differently in those beginning stages of their private practices.
Meet Alison Pidgeon Alison Pidgeon, MA, LPC, is a licensed professional counselor and the owner of Move Forward Counseling (www.moveforwardlancaster.com) in Lancaster, PA. Her private practice, which focuses on women’s issues, currently consists of six other therapists and two assistants. Alison has recently purchased an office building to house her private practice and will be expanding to a total of 12 therapists in the fall of 2018.
In addition, for the past two years, Alison has been working as a business consultant along with Joe Sanok, from Practice of the Practice, (http://www.practiceofthepractice.com/our-services/consulting-with-alison/) for other private practice owners. She loves being an entrepreneur and helping others achieve their dream of being their own boss. Alison’s specialty as a consultant is how to have an insurance-based practice, helping those who are just starting out and how to grow from a solo to a group practice.
Alison has garnered local media attention for her private practice on TV, radio and in print. She has been a featured guest on the Practice of the Practice podcast, Selling the Couch podcast, and The Therapist Experience podcast. In 2017 Move Forward Counseling won the “Emerging Business of the Year” Award from the Central Penn Business Journal.
Buying a Building One of the big steps that Alison and Gordon talked about was the step they both took in buying an office space. For many therapists and counselors, this step seems very intimidating. But if you think about it, it is really not that much different from buying a house and there are usually more financing options for commercial property. Especially if you are willing to work with private investors. It’s all a matter of doing the research and looking at options.
Owning your private practice space, many times actually ends up being much more cost effective when you run the numbers. Alison gave the example of a non-profit she is involved with. When they ran the numbers, they realized they had paid double what the building was worth through leasing it.
Passive Income and Diversifying Income Streams One of the things that helps solidify growth in your practice comes from diversifying your streams of income. There are a lot of ways to do this. One is to create other less traditional products or services to offer clients. Groups, workbooks, seminars, and supervision are just a few.
Another great way to create “passive income” is to add other counselors and therapists to form a group practice. What this does, of course, is allow the practice owner to reap the benefits and income from the efforts of others in exchange for providing a place for them to practice.
Thinking Long-Term One of the “wish I had known…” issues that Alison mentioned, was she wish she had thought more long-term when she first started her private practice. She would have spent more time thinking about growth and what that would look like. Especially in terms of adding other counselors. She also realized that she should have thought about what her practice would look like 3-5 years down the road.
Insurance vs. Self-Pay One of the ongoing debates in the private practice space is if a practice should get on insurance panels or be strictly private pay. For Alison and Gordon, they do a combination of the two. Alison talked about really understanding your “break even” point in terms of how much you need to be reimbursed to cover your practice’s overhead and expenses. She only stays on the panels that meet or exceed this criteria.
The other factor to consider when thinking about being on insurance panels or not, is knowing the demographics of your area and what people can generally afford. Typically, rural areas are more insurance dependent and a clinician needs to accept insurance in order to get the volume of clients they need to sustain their practice.
Group Practices and Their Structure Alison and Gordon talk about some of the ongoing discussions they have had in their mastermind groups around having group practices. In particular, whether to follow a “1099 Contractor” model or a “W2 Employee” model. Ultimately, it is an individual decision based on the practice owner’s preferences and how much oversight they want to have with their therapists.
Other factors around this issue depend on state laws and what sort of corporate structure the practice has. In addition, the benefits and “perks” the practice owner wants to provide their employees.
There are any number of ways to set this up, from doing a “fee split” to a flat rate per case or giving a salary or hourly wage. Again, how it is set up depends solely on individual preferences and business structure.
Starting a Group vs. Working in a Group For many clinicians, the idea of being in private practice is very intriguing. But for some, the idea of running a business is not that appealing. For these folks, joining a group practice really makes more sense. But for those people that have a bit of an “entrepreneurial spirit” and enjoy the logistics of running a business, becoming a group owner makes more sense.
Systems and Processes to Help You Grow One important piece of being able to have sustainable growth in a private practice is to have the systems and processes in place to support this. Alison talks about the importance of documenting your processes and having set systems that help you operate more on “auto-pilot” with your practice.
Alison talks about the importance of being able to also collect data about your systems and processes. For example, knowing how well your intake processes are working and the ability to retain clients and get new clients to actually book appointments. Other processes to focus on are with your onboarding processes for new therapists and making that as seamless as possible.
The other very integral part of private practice systems and processes are having a reliable EHR system or other system (like Google G-Suite) that works well for you in your practice. Most EHR’s are able to track data and give the reports you need to see how your practice is growing.
Getting the Help You Need Finally, one of the things that always is a great ROI (return on investment) for most people in private practice is in doing some consulting and/or coaching with someone. Alison and Gordon talk about the benefits and huge return they have gotten by being part of and also leading mastermind groups. It is a way to be with like-minded people that all have common goals for their practices. It’s usually the boost people need to take their practices to the next level.
Resources and Contact Information Email Alison: alison@practiceofthepractice.com Alison’s Mastermind Group with Joe Sanok Gordon’s Mastermind Group (Starts September 7th 2018!)
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy podcast, Gordon talks with Kasey Compton, LPCC who is the President/CEO of Mindsight Behavioral Group. Kasey was able to build a large group practice (80 staff members!) in 3 years time. Kasey and Gordon talk about the systems and processes she put in place in order to sustain that kind of growth successfully. Kasey also talks about money mindset and what is needed in order to feel confident about growth and building a practice to that level.
Meet Kasey Compton Kasey built a million dollar practice with over seventy-five staff members in less than two years from the ground up. She is the President/CEO of Mindsight Behavioral Groupwith multiple offices located in Kentucy. Kasey says, “it definitely wasn’t easy but I learned a lot scaling a practice”. She is now in year three and her business with basically running itself; largely due to the systems and processes we put into place.
Now, Kasey is a behavioral group consultant(www.consultwithkc.com) and author that helps practices avoid mistakes by cleaning up their systems, implementing better processes, and understanding what to do with their money. Kasey says, “ I take so much pride in my own practice and now I feel honored to help others grow too.”
Residual Income One of the things that Kasey realized early in her private practice career was the need for “residual income”. As a solo practitioner, your income is based solely on what you can produce. You have to see clients in order to make money. But as Kasey said, “life happens” and you have to take time away… getting sick, having babies, or other family stuff.
Kasey started her group practice out of a desire to not have to worry about having income stop when she was not working. It just made sense to be able to duplicate her efforts and be able to provide employment for other clinicians.
Processes and Systems Kasey’s phenomenal growth (80 staff members and a million dollar practice in just 3 years) came primarily out of her ability to create processes and systems to make the growth as seamless as possible.
She put most of her effort on the front end into mapping things out so that the processes and systems where well defined. She also said that she made some mistakes and learn from them rather than let them be defeating.
Group Practice Culture Another important piece of Kasey’s success in having a practice the size of her’s was in developing a culture that was positive to work in. Kasey said she wanted to promote people’s strengths and creativity. She also recognized that not everyone was as driven as she was but they could thrive better if she did not force that way of being on them.
Kasey also has put in place a lot of incentives for her employees that help motivate them use their strengths and promote the culture she has establish within her practice.
Delegating and Outsourcing Another area that Kasey and Gordon talked about was learning how to delegate and outsource things. As a practice grows, the owner needs to be able to just focus on those things that help the company grow and be profitable.
When a practice is just starting, you have the time to “do it all” and you really need to keep costs down. But as growth occurs, it really becomes less efficient and even more costly to do all the bootstrapping yourself. It’s better to delegate and outsource so you can spend your time on tasks that actually bring in income.
Following Your Purpose and Vision Being in private practice and owning your own business can be hard. It requires a lot of hard work and time to make it successful. But without purpose or vision things can quickly become disorganized and burdensome.
Understanding Your Numbers and Metrics As a practice grows the logistics can become cumbersome and even intimidating. But when practice owners truly understand their numbers and metrics, it is much easier to know how to handle the logistics of growth.
For example, Kasey knows, because she had studied her metrics and numbers, that for every 5-8 clinicians she adds, she needs to also add an admin person. She also knows that is when it becomes cost effective to do that.
Using “Profit First” Kasey and Gordon also talked about their excitement about the Profit First book by Mike Michalowicz. They both said it was a game changer and helped them immensely with their money mindset and how to make their practices profitable.
The key with the “Profit First” system goes back to understanding and having a handle on your financials and then knowing how to allocate money in the right way. So many times people will either ignore their financials or be afraid to look at them. But to be truly profitable, you HAVE TO understand the financial side of running a private practice.
Knowing The Lifestyle You Want A big part of understanding the financial side of private practice is understanding cash flows and what you personally need to maintain your lifestyle. A person’s lifestyle desires can vary, but most of us want just some basic things. Food, shelter, and clothing are the baseline but we also want to be able to have some other perks in life.
We also do not want to be financially strained and living just paycheck to paycheck. Everyone needs a cushion to make sure that they can make it through the down times.
Going After Your “Big Idea” The other thing about private practice and being in this somewhat entrepreneurial space is also being able to go after your “big ideas”. Whether it’s writing a book or doing speaking engagements, we need to have the time to do that. But the time it takes to do those things shouldn’t jeopardize your cash flow and income.
That’s why it’s important to have that residual income and systems in place to help free up your time while still having some income (AKA passive income)
Knowing Your “Why” Finally, Kasey and Gordon talked about the importance of having purpose and vision for yourself in your practice. As Gordon puts it, “knowing your WHY”. Everything you do with your practice to maintain and have the lifestyle you want, should be driven by your “why”.
When you are feeling bogged down or just dreading going into work everyday, it’s time to take a look at your passion and vision. Know this, and follow it, and everything else has a tendency of falling in place.
Resources Mentioned Kasey’s Mastermind Group with Joe Sanok
Email Kasey- hello@consultwithkc.com
Kasey’s Website- www.consultwithkc.com
Kasey’s Book & Profit First
Products from Amazon.com * Million Dollar Practice: Five Steps to Make Sure Your Group is on Track Price: Check on Amazon * -44% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $15.01 Was: $27.00
Apply for Masterming Group with Gordon! Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks about creating a sustainable practice that supports the lifestyle you want to have. He talks to about how he would have done some things differently, knowing what he knows now about being in private practice. In particular, Gordon talks about what he has learned about why private practices fail and the financial side of owning a small business.
Apply for a Mastermind Group!
*Some of the links below are affiliate links. This simply means that I get a commission, at no extra cost to you, when you purchase the books mentioned using those links… Thanks in advance for using the links!
Private Practice Isn’t Always What You Think… A book that has caught my attention here lately and I have been reading is The E-Myth Revisited; Why Small Businesses Fail and What To Do About It by Michael E. Gerber. The premise of the book is that most people that go into small business are excellent technicians but lack the skill for management and being an entrepreneur.
If you think about, that is so true for most all of us in helping professions. We are trained to help people and provide services. We have excellent clinical knowledge and know how to apply it in the therapy room. That is also where our passion lies. We do this kind of work because we truly want to help people.
What most of us never learned was how to manage a business or how to be entrepreneurs… The primary reason practices fail is because of clinicians not knowing how to manage the financial and business sides of private practice. They also fail because they get overwhelmed with growth and not knowing how to navigate the increasing demands of a growing business.
Always Start With “WHY” You know the biggest question that anyone should ask themselves before jumping into private practice is “why”? You hear that from me a lot. It’s more than just a rhetorical question. It’s about understanding what you need for yourself in life to help you feel happy and content. It’s something most of us in this field ask our clients all the time…what do you need to make you happy?
Of course, there are no simple answers to that question. But if you were to peel away all the layers of this question, what would be at the core of what you need to make your truly happy?
What Has Motivated You To Go Into Private Practice? The simple answer to this question, for most of us is simply “freedom”. Freedom to set your own schedule to have the time off we need with our families. Freedom to do therapy in the way we want to do therapy. Freedom to have the kinds of clients we best work with. And finally some financial freedom with possibly greater earning potential.
I think too, that for most of us, money is important, but it is NOT what motivates us. What motivates us is knowing that we have helped someone in a genuine way. Also what motivates us is having a lifestyle that is relatively stress-free and surrounded by those people and things that bring us comfort and contentment. Family, friends, home…
Second, but not necessarily in the order, we are motivated by feeling like we matter. We want our work to make a difference and to be valued by others. We want what we do to get noticed and truly inspire change in the world.
If You Had A Million Dollars… So, if you had a million dollars what would really change for you? For most of us, it is an idea that we associate with winning the lottery or coming into some big windfall of cash. It’s a pipe dream. We think or have the fantasy that somehow our lives would get easier and that we could live a different lifestyle.
The truth of the matter is that having an exorbitant amount of money does not equate to having more happiness or even a greater quality of life. How many times have we heard of people that win the lottery and their lives quickly go down the tubes because it is too much to handle?
What We Really Want For most of us, what we really want is when it comes to money is to be able to buy and do the things that contribute to a standard of living and quality of life. We want to be able to eat out, go on vacations, have a decent car, good healthcare and not have to worry about bills and debt. We also want to have enough money in reserve for any unforeseen problems that might crop up.
We want money to be off our worry list… If we are totally honest, having a big pile of money would maybe give us a sense of security, but would we really change our lifestyle that much? Maybe get a bigger house or a new TV or maybe get yourself out of debt. But I think for most of us, we would just want to have more time leisure time with our families and be able to work when and how we wanted to.
Understanding How Money Really Works When it comes down to it all money really is, is something that has a universal value that we exchange for something that is more valuable to us personally. And unless you are totally self-sufficient and living totally off the grid, you have to have money to live. You have to buy food, shelter and clothing… basic needs.
Then we also need to have a way to get money in order to have even just the basics, not to mention the things that add to our quality of life. So in order to get money, we exchange our time and knowledge for money. But we also have to have the supports in place in order to even do that exchange. A car to get us to our workplace, the gas to put in the car, licenses and car tags, car insurance, etc… just to name one aspect of all that.
We need a steady flow of money coming in to pay for all of these things… AKA cash flow The other thing about money is being able to prepare for that time when we are no longer able to exchange our time and expertise for money…AKA retirement. In order to do this, we need to have a stockpile of money held back from what we spend on all the other things we need to prepare for those days ahead… AKA reserves
The other part of the equation that comes into play, especially in our culture today, is borrowing. When we want to boost our lifestyle or get something we do not have the immediate cash for, we borrow it from someone else… AKA debt. Debt is simply someone taking the risk of getting repaid from the money you are getting from your cash flow or your reserves. And usually, it is with the stipulation that you give them more money in exchange for having lent you the money, to begin with… AKA interest.
Success Comes From Balancing Cash Flow and Reserves The key to any successful business is in putting the right systems and processes in place to maintain cash flow. It also means balancing that by putting money into reserve for those times when the cash flow slows or you are not able to exchange your time and knowledge for money.
And this is where most private practices fail… They do not have the right systems in place to assure cash flow and the creation of reserves. What Can Be Done First of all, you have to start with fully understanding your current financial situation. This means not only knowing your practice/business financial situation, but also your personal financial situation. You need to find out exactly how much money you have in the way of personal assets (everything you own) and what is owed to others (debt). You also need to know your current cash flows and what you can expect from future cash flows. It’s what you expect to come in and what you expect to pay back out.
Secondly, you need to structure things so that the money coming in: pays you, gives you a profit (excess), pays off your debt, pays your expenses, and gives you a reserve for things like taxes and down times. One system I really am excited about with all this is Profit First by Mike Michalowicz (He will be a guest on the podcast later this month!)
What the Profit First system does is uses an allocation system based on percentages that you predetermine are needed for your business and for yourself as a practice owner. The book will walk you through an assessment process to help you determine how you should be allocating the money you are getting from your practice (and other sources).
The third thing, which is part of the second, is doing all you can to get yourself out of debt. In particular things like student loans, credit cards and car payments. Those three things will absolutely suck the life out of your practice and you personally if they are not addressed.
Getting out of debt is like “free money”. If you were to think about what you make in monthly payments and what it would be like to put that money into your reserves instead, it would most likely make a huge difference. It would not only free up your cash flows, but it would be a huge burden lifted emotionally and psychologically. You would no longer feel that stress.
Debt Reduction Plan Another one the books and resources I like a lot is Total Money Makeover by Dave Ramsey. A strategy for getting out of debt that Dave Ramsey suggests is the “Snowball Strategy”. With this strategy, Dave recommends focusing on paying off your smallest debt first as quickly as possible. Then when that debt is paid off, using the amount of that payment to add to what you are paying on your next highest debt and so forth. What this does is help you maximize the time it takes to pay off your debt. It’s a “snowball effect”.
The fourth thing that can be done to help with having a solid financial plan is to know your tax liabilities. So many times clinicians in private practice get themselves into trouble because they are still operating under an “employee” mindset vs. a “self-employment” mindset.
Being self-employed is much different than being employed from a tax standpoint. When you are employed, your employer is responsible for making sure your income taxes are withheld AND they pay a portion of those for you. When you are self-employed you are responsible for paying all of those taxes. Typically, an estimate of what is owed is paid quarterly.
Make sure you are covering this! So many times private practice owners will reach the end of the year and find out they owe several thousand dollars in income taxes and do not have the cash on hand to cover it.
Consult with experts! It’s always a good idea to have a trusted accountant that can advise you on tax implications and how to structure your business. They can also advise you on what you need to be paying for your taxes.
Think About The Big Picture Most of us go into private practice with the idea of simply being a solo practitioner, having a comfortable income and only working when we want to. But as they grow, they realize that things get a little more complicated and the ups and downs of practice makes it well..uncomfortable.
As they grow, the time they are having to spend on administrative functions goes up as well. For some practices, if they continue to grow, they reach a tipping point at which they need to hire an administrative person and/or add clinicians to the practice in order to free up time. (You know, it’s that time you wanted before you went into private practice, to begin with!)
Growth does bring in more income, but it also creates additional expenses. This is why it is important to have that clear understanding and handle on the financial side of things. It is also why I like the Profit First system because it is based on percentages. If the percentages are where they need to be, growth truly brings more profit.
Dream A Little (Or A Lot!) Ultimately, we all want a certain quality of life and lifestyle. Knowing how much money that will take and what you need to give yourself financial freedom will help you better know how to structure your private practice.
Most of us, if we are brutally honest, do not aspire to be multi-millionaires. We just want a life! We want to be content with what we have and be surrounded by the people we love the most. Money is just a tool. So in reality, it’s not about the money. It’s about having a meaningful life that is relatively stress-free.
Products from Amazon.com * -45% The E-Myth Revisited: Why Most Small Businesses Don't Work and What to Do About It Price: $12.75 Was: $22.99 * -44% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $15.01 Was: $27.00 * -40% The Total Money Makeover: Classic Edition: A Proven Plan for Financial Fitness Price: $14.99 Was: $24.99
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Jarrod Justice about caring for caregivers and the importance of self-care in this field. They also talk about spirituality how that can be an influence for people in their lives. Gordon and Jarrod have a conversation about how they both have what that consider “faith informed” practices. Both are clergy people and they talk about how this influences the way they do therapy and the ethical considerations they both take in their practices.
Meet Jarrod Justice Jarrod Justice, MAMFT, is a post-master’s counselor in Knoxville specializing in marriage and family therapy. He currently works at Haven Family Psychiatry with clients who are experiencing: anxiety, depression, sexual health issues, relationship concerns, and challenging family dynamics.
Jarrod has worked as a Christian minister for over a decade in Knoxville—serving in various roles as a college pastor, worship leader, and lead pastor. He also has experience working for a local non-profit called With Inc., where he provided mentorship and soul care to individuals, couples, and ministers in need.
Jarrod graduated from Baylor University in 2003 with a B.A. in International Studies, and recently graduated from Richmont Graduate University with a M.A. in Marriage and Family Therapy. Jarrod loves people and wants to offer his clients hope and courage on life’s journey.
He is a current member of the (AAMFT) American Association of Marriage and Family Therapists, and is an active member of the (CLC) Christian Leadership Concepts in Knoxville. Originally from Texas, he has called East Tennessee home for nearly 14 years. In his personal time, other than good coffee and great music—he enjoys meaningful dates with his wife, peanut butter, and watching his three boys play baseball.
“Faith Informed” vs. “Faith-Based” One designation or niche that many therapists and counselors identify with is around spirituality. For some, this very much informs who they are as people. For others, not so much. Gordon and Jarrod discuss how they have both landed in what they refer to as “faith informed” practices.
A “faith-based” practice differs from a “faith informed” practice in that a “faith-based” practice usually has some sort of direct affiliation with a religious organization (church, synagogue, mosque, etc.). Whereas a “faith informed” practice really has to do with the therapist and how they might approach their work with people.
Both Gordon and Jarrod are clinically trained in the traditional sense and use evidence-based approaches with clients. And when religion comes up, if it comes up, they are both very comfortable discussing those things with clients.
Caring for Caregivers One of the things that Jarrod has noted in his own journey is that clergy or pastors can find themselves very isolated at times. Jarrod talks about how pastors and religious leaders can have a lot of external pressure from their “flock”. Pastors and clergy are very much in the business of caregiving, not unlike therapists and counselors. And over-time if the caregiver is not being cared for, it can quickly lead to “compassion fatigue”.
An important part of this whole thing is also learning self-care and learning how to manage your own emotions well. Clergy and counselors alike, get handed a lot of heavy stuff from our clients and parishioners. It is so important to know how to process that “stuff” well and seek the support you need in handling that.
Knowing Yourself Well Jarrod and Gordon also talk about the importance of knowing yourself well and knowing how to not only process other people’s emotions but knowing how to process our own well. In many ways, we need to develop our own emotional intelligence just like we do in helping our clients.
They talk about the importance of seeking therapy and/or pastoral care for ourselves as caregivers. We all need a safe place to process our issues and be vulnerable. We all need a place to process and be heard.
Making Genuine Connections Jarrod talked about the need we all have to make genuine connections and connect with people on more than a superficial level. With all the social media we are exposed to, Jarrod makes the analogy of eating fast food vs. eating healthy food. In many ways, the connections we make through social media is like eating fast food. It fills us up and stops the hunger temporarily, but in the long run is not as healthy for us. What we really need and want are those relationships that are more meaningful and help us connect at a deeper level.
People Want to Know Their Therapist One interesting thing about how people choose therapists has a lot to do with the commonalities they see themselves having with a potential therapist. (See the previous podcast with Jeff Geunther, Episode 044). Depending on your client demographics and where you are located, religion might be an important cultural factor. For some, religious affiliation is an important piece. Gordon and Jarrod talk about their approach to this in that they disclose to clients their religious affiliation, but at the same time express NOT having a “religious agenda” with their counseling.
Both Gordon and Jarrod are clinically trained in the traditional sense and use evidence-based approaches with clients. And when religion comes up, if it comes up, they are both very comfortable discussing those things with clients.
Integrating Spirituality In Therapy Practice Jarrod and Gordon talk about giving people the space to talk about spiritual matters. Jarrod mentions that he asks clients if they want to talk about spiritual matters. Both Gordon and Jarrod talk about the importance of being sensitive to differing views and how people’s spiritual experiences can be painful for them to talk about. For example, someone being emotionally abused by people in their faith communities.
Ultimately, who we are as therapists does come into the therapy room. Being able to share those parts of ourselves with others in a way that is validating of their life experiences and their personal beliefs is important. It is possible to be spiritual without pushing a religious agenda or other convictions onto others.
Resources Mentioned: Jeff’s Therapy Practice – Haven Family Psychiatry
Join A Mastermind Group with Gordon Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Jeff Geunther, LPC about his private practice journey and how he has built his private practice and other business ventures. Jeff is an expert in SEO (Search Engine Optimization) and how to grow counseling and therapy practice using their digital assets. Jeff talks about several of the things he has learned about optimizing private practice websites based on his research into how people search for therapists. Jeff tells too how he has used this information to develop The Practice Academy and The Therapy Den, an online directory for therapist.
Meet Jeff Geunther Jeff Guenther, LPC, is a therapist in Portland, OR. He has been in private practice since 2005 and currently leads workshops on how therapists can build their digital brand and attract more clients online. Jeff is the creator and owner of Portland Therapy Center, a highly ranked therapist directory. Jeff has just launched a new progressive therapist directory for at TherapyDen. Subscribe to Jeff’s newsletter at therapyden.com to get weekly tips on how to grow your business and attract more clients.
Beginnings Jeff began his private practice journey, like many of us, not knowing exactly what direction to go or how to get people interested in using his services as a therapist. Jeff said he really charged too little for his services thinking it would make his practice grow faster. But what he found was that was not sustainable and began to slowly raise his prices.
The other thing that Jeff did was to begin diversifying his practice by renting out office space for part-time therapists. He mainly catered to therapists that were just starting out in their private practices. He became known in his community as somewhat of an expert and as the go-to person for starting practices.
Diversifying Over time, Jeff was able to acquire several office spaces around town that he provided for therapists. This lead him to then start a local online therapist directory (The Portland Therapy Center) and begin helping other therapists in marketing their practices. This, in turn, leads to him developing The Practice Academy which teaches healthcare workers how to ethically and effectively build and grow their private practices or small businesses.
Jeff also said his interest in technology and how to integrate it with therapy very much drove his interest to develop the directories and learning tools. Jeff said, when he first went into the therapy/counseling field, he also was interested in computer animation and design. Ultimately he decided becoming a therapist was the way to go. But he continues to be interested in and learn about technology as an ongoing hobby.
Knowing How To Attract Clients Through Jeff’s different ventures, he has learned a lot about what the public is searching for when seeking the help of therapists. Jeff learned specifically what people tend to click on when visiting a website and what images and copy are more appealing.
Jeff has been able to collect a lot of data through his directories about search terms that people use and what is most appealing to people seeking therapists. He came up with a list of “top 10” search terms that people will use in searching for services on Google and the internet.
Top 10 Search Terms For Therapists 1. Anxiety 2. Relationship and Marriage Issues 3. Depression 4. Child or adolescent issues 5. PTSD (people actually use this term, but also use trauma) 6. LGBTQ Issues 7. Personal Growth 8. Gender Identity Issues 9. Family Conflicts 10. Loss or Grief
In addition to these terms, it is important to get more specific around these various issues by using qualifiers. For example, social anxiety or fear of public speaking, vs. just anxiety. This will help with SEO and help you stand out when people are searching for your services.
Connecting With Clients Through Website Copy Another thing that Jeff and Gordon discussed was being able to connect with clients on your website by writing in a way to connects with them. In particular, your “About” page really needs to show that you understand the problems potential clients might be having. People will connect with you when they know you truly “get” what they are going through right now.
This is all the more reason to develop a niche in your practice. By identifying specific issues you want to work with people on, will only make you more attractive to potential clients. This is especially true when these issues align with some of these top 10 search terms.
Therapy Den Directory Jeff developed the Therapy Den Directory based on his research and what he learned from developing his local directory in Portland. But more importantly, Jeff wanted to create a directory that had more of a mission. In particular helping people connect with therapists that were progressive and understand issues like racism, homophobia, and other forms of hate.
Jeff admits that Therapy Den is up against a lot of competition in terms of some the larger therapist directories like Psychology Today or Good Therapy. But what makes Therapy Den unique is that it helps people connect with therapists that are sensitive to and compassionate to issues where people feel marginalized.
People Want to Truly Know Their Therapist One of the huge things that Jeff has discovered through his research is that people truly want to know the person who is their therapist. In other words, they want to know that their therapist truly understands what they are going through by virtue of the therapist’s own life experiences. For example, if someone is going through a divorce they would be drawn more to a therapist that has experienced a divorce themself.
Jeff mentions that therapists seem to fall on a spectrum of completely no self-disclosure to those that share a lot. Jeff says people want authenticity. And what he found was that people tended to pick therapists that were more open about their personal life experiences. The Therapy Den directory is really designed to help therapists share these things about themselves.
Picking The Right Directory There are so many directories out there for therapists to list with. (Here’s an older blog post I did about this). But as Jeff points out, it’s a good idea to make your decision about which directories to list with based on ROI (return on investment). So if one directory brings you one client, and that client sees you for several sessions, it’s a good ROI. Multiple that by the number of people that are finding you in the various directories, it becomes an even better investment.
People might spend several months researching which therapist they want to see. The more places they find you on the internet, the better impact it has for their decision. It also lends itself to more credibility by your name coming up in several different places.
The other things that directories do is create “backlinks” to your website which helps boost your SEO. Backlinks are kind of like votes. The more you have other websites linking to your website, the more Google recognizes it as being relevant.
Having The Right Pictures Jeff also has done a good bit of research into how pictures can make difference in “click through rates”. Here are a few tips on your website photos:
- People tend to click on close-up pictures rather than pictures that are full or partial body shots. Outdoor photos are more appealing than indoor photos. Have some greenery in the background.
- Natural light is important rather than pictures made indoors
- Have good contrasts in the picture. Example a clear face with blurry background.
- Your smile should not be too big. Ideally a closed mouth smile or one in which just your top teeth barely show.
- Dress nicely but do not over dress.
- Dogs in the photo with you are a big hit. (It’s the number one way to get a photo clicked on!)
Resources Mentioned Therapy Den – therapyden.com
The Practice Academy – practiceacademy.com
On Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/TherapyDen/
Email Jeff: hello@therapyden.com
Apply for Coaching or Mastermind Groups with Gordon Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon interviews Kristen Breese, LCPC about making the transition from being a solo practitioner to owning a group practice. They also talk about business growth and how taking it slow is sometimes a better option for people. Kristen talks about the importance of just doing one thing at a time; “you have to walk before you can run…”. Kristen also talks about some of the mindset changes and the things that she needed to learn when she made the switch from solo practice to group practice. Kristen and Gordon also talk about the various tasks that come with being a group practice owner and some of the challenges they had to overcome as they grew.
Meet Kristen Breese Kristen Breese, LCPC is CEO and founder of Counseling Works and multi-disciplinary group practice in Naperville, IL. Kristen is a psychotherapist, business consultant, coach, entrepreneur and speaker. She specializes in treating co-dependency, boundaries, and generalized anxiety. Her goal is to help others overcome obstacles personally and professionally to achieve their goals.
Kristen’s website is www.counselingworks.com
Knowing How To Grow Kristen and Gordon both started in similar ways in that they both were working in agency settings and began part-time private practice. Kristen tells how she focused on filling her schedule just one day at a time. In other words, she had just one day a week that she saw clients and filled that day before she added another to her schedule.
One of the challenges for many counselors and therapists is making the decision to take their practice to a new level. In particular, going from being a solo practitioner to having a group practice. Although there is no clear formula for doing this, most will make that move once they feel their own practice is full and they are losing clients because they have no appointment openings.
Having A Vision One thing that is so very important in making that transition to having a group practice, is having a clear vision of what you want your practice to be. Do you envision a large multi-location practice or do you want to have small group of 3-4 clinicians? Know your vision then commit to it.
Success comes from having a clear picture of where you want to be. Think about it in terms of where you see your practice 5 to 10 years down the road. Then focus on the small steps it will take to get you to that place.
Slow But Deliberate Growth One of the things that many counselors and therapists going into private practice face is trying to do too much. Growth occurs best when you build things one part at a time. For example, Kristen mentioned moving from part-time to full time practice. She did it by filling one day at a time.
Another mindset change that seems to help, is to not be so concerned about the speed of growth, but be more focused on the consistency of growth. The most lasting result, as it is with most anything, comes from deliberate and thoughtful planning. By taking the time to set small attainable goals, growth tends to be sustainable.
Having Systems in Place As a practice grows, it is important to have systems in place that will handle to growth. Spending time to make sure that you have a clearly defined onboarding process for new clinicians along with having client processes well defined will go a long way in helping things go smoothly.
One tip is to start documenting and writing down the steps to your current systems and processes. That way, as you bring on new people, you will have a clearly defined plan. This goes a long way in projecting professionalism and helping people feel good about coming to work with you.
Hiring The Right People One of the big learning curves for many private practice owners moving from solo to group practice is the whole hiring and interviewing process. It is so important to spend time on this. A person might have an outstanding resume and clinical background. But this does not always translate into them being a great person to work with.
Kristen talks about her process and how it is a fairly slow and deliberate onboarding. Not only does she look for people who will bring diversity to her practice in terms of treatment approach, but she also tries to make sure they have the same work ethic and is enjoyable to work with. In addition to a good work ethic, she makes sure they are bought into her vision for the practice.
Offering More To The People You Hire Another part of hiring the right people is being able to find people who will benefit from what you have to offer as an organization. Whether you are using a 1099 contractor model or W2 employee model, making sure that is a good fit and in the best interest of the people you hire.
For 1099 contractors you will need to hire people that very much self starters and have a bit of an entrepreneurial spirit about them. They need less oversight and you would be more “hands off” with them. W2 employees do need more oversight and you would be able to provide more in terms of benefits. For tax purposes, W2’s are more costly for the employer and less costly for the employee, since employers have to pay a portion of their taxes, etc.
Learning New Skills Making the move from solo practice to having a group practice can be intimidating for many. And at the same time it is one very practical way to up your game in private practice. Being a group practice owner does require some additional skill outside of what we learn clinically in graduate school.
In particular, being a group practice owner does require leadership skills, a clear understanding of the business side of private practice and a willingness to commit to taking on these additional roles. It also requires perseverance and a commitment to the people that join your group.
Group practice is a path for many, but not necessarily for everyone. But it is one of the best ways to take your practice to the next level.
Resources Mentioned: Join a Mastermind Group! Apply today!
Kristen’s Practice- CounselingWorks
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks about having a sustainable and profitable private practice and some of the mindset changes he has made around all this. Gordon shares how the book, Profit First by Mike Michalowicz, has changed some of his thinking around the financial side of private practice. In particular, Gordon talks about getting away from some of the traditional ways in which we think about money and how to use it. It’s a mindset shift of not letting what you gain financially from your practice being just the “leftovers”. It’s about maintaining a lifestyle that is comfortable and sustainable over the long haul.
>>Enter the Sustaining Your Practice Giveaway<<
Beating All The Money Angst This past month we had to buy a new car. My daughter was in an accident (No one was hurt thank God!) and so it was a “have to” kind of situation; the car was totaled. And whenever you have to make a big money decision like that, it really causes you to think about your money.
Like most of us average people, making a big purchase like that comes with an “ouch factor”. Could we afford it? What kind of car could we get with money we had budgeted? So needless to say I started thinking about how I was managing my money, not only at home but in my private practice as well.
I had heard a lot of “buzz” about the “Profit First” system, but quite frankly, had not looked into it much. So last week, I was taking some time away from the office to spend a week doing some volunteer work and decided to take the book, “Profit First” by Mike Michalowicz along.
When I started reading it, I couldn’t put it down! What is “Profit First”? For the most part, the concept of “profit” is just common sense. Very simply put, it’s the money you get to keep from your business after people pay you for your services. The traditional formula is simply:
INCOME – EXPENSES = PROFIT.
The traditional way of thinking about profit is what money is left over after you pay your expenses. So the idea is you keep your expenses low and increase your income to make a profit. And it does work mathematically. But what if your income goes down and/or your expenses go up. It can create A LOT of anxiety.
“Profit First” is a term coined by Mike Michalowicz that turns our traditional way of thinking about profit on its head. Instead of taking your profit from what is left over, Mike says take your profit off the top, then pay your expenses.
INCOME – PROFIT = EXPENSES
Sounds crazy, doesn’t it! Taking Control Of Your Money The truth of the matter is that most people tend to live paycheck to paycheck. And unfortunately, many of us in private practice tend to run the business side of the practice that way too. We’ll wait to pay ourselves after we have paid all the expenses.
What this does is have us biting our nails at the end of each month to see what we can take home. Hopefully, we will have enough to pay ourselves AND put some in savings to use as a buffer. Unfortunately, very few people get ahead doing it this way.
A better way to do this is to take what you pay yourself AND your profit on the front end, then use the what is left for your expenses. Again… sounds crazy and a bit risky.
But the truth of the matter is that when we get control of our money, rather than it controlling us, it can be very easily done.
Doing Finances Differently First of all, do take time to read “Profit First” by Mike Michalowicz to get more details. Also, consult financial experts on this. But find one that is more progressive and maybe has knowledge of this “profit first system”
Essentially, the “system” is all about assigning percentages and doing small but consistent allocations to different accounts that you set up to hold your money as it comes in. The other thing that it is important to do with this system is to make slow and intentional changes over time. This is NOT a “get rich quick” way of doing things. It’s all calculated and based on your actual numbers.
Getting A True And Accurate Picture The starting place for adopting the profit first system is to first get an accurate picture of your current financial situation over the past year or 6 months. It means getting a picture of your trends and history with your practice. In other words, getting accurate data on how much money is coming into the practice and how much is going out. You also need to know what you have in reserve if any.
Once you have gathered your data, break it all down into percentages based on 5 categories:
Revenue (Income)
Profit
Owner’s Comp (what you pay yourself)
Taxes
Operating Costs
Mike Michalowicz has resources on his website that go into more detail about all this and how to calculate it. You can check those out here: http://www.mikemichalowicz.com/resources/
Making The Shift The standard way of thinking for most people is that they can increase their profit by increasing their revenue. But, what typically happens with that is that as you increase your revenue, your operating costs go up as well. So it ends up being a wash with very little, if any increase in profit.
The other thing that can happen is that people tend to think of owners comp as being synonymous with profit. It really should not be. Profit is a bonus AND a portion of that should be used to pay down debt and create a residual account for slow periods.
Owners comp should be fair pay for what you do. It’s as if you are an employee of your practice. And if you do have employees, you would never want to dup them on what they should be paid. Right!? Treat yourself the same way!
To make the shift, you want to always give yourself a profit AND pay yourself before you pay out all the other things.
Implementing To implement profit first and begin making a profit and paying yourself, you want to begin making incremental shifts in the percentages over time. In the example given, you would want to begin increasing the percentage going to profit, owner’s comp, and taxes while decreasing operating costs.
You will notice, I said nothing about increasing revenue. And that is really the game changer to some degree. It means you do not need to work harder, just smarter! But, if you did bring on more clients (increase revenue) you would want to also increase your profit while keeping operating costs at the same level.
It’s About Allocation and Percentages In a nutshell, profit first is about changing from simply subtracting expenses from the total and using what is left over to create profit. Instead, you allocate percentages from the top.
Example:
Total Income – Expenses = What you use for Profit & Take Home Pay & Taxes
Instead… Total Income – Profit & Take Home Pay & Taxes = What you use for Expenses
It’s about taking control of the flow of money and controlling it throughout the year, rather than letting the money flow control you!
Resources: Products from Amazon.com * -40% Profit First: Transform Your Business from a Cash-Eating Monster to a Money-Making Machine Price: $16.21 Was: $27.00 * -44% The Total Money Makeover: Classic Edition: A Proven Plan for Financial Fitness Price: $14.09 Was: $24.99 * -22% The Pumpkin Plan: A Simple Strategy to Grow a Remarkable Business in Any Field Price: $20.98 Was: $26.95 * -24% Surge: Time the Marketplace, Ride the Wave of Consumer Demand, and Become Your Industry's Big Kahuna Price: $20.53 Was: $26.95
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon does a “reverse interview” with Joe Sanok about why using G-Suite in your private practice might be a good idea. The original interview was first released as Episode 309 of the Practice of the Practice podcast with Joe Sanok. Gordon and Joe talk about why they started using G-Suite and some of the hacks and tips therapists and counselors can use in their practices to work more efficiently and make it HIPAA compliant.
Meet Joe Sanok Joe is no stranger to the Practice of Therapy. Joe is the person behind the Practice Of The Practice Podcast which is the #1 podcast for counselors and therapists learning about private practice and what to do to grow and scale. It is one of the top resources out there in this private practice building space. Joe has been a previous guest on the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Episode 011, How To Level Up And Grow Your Private Practice.
Joe, his wife Christina and their two daughters live in Traverse City, MI where Joe owns Mental Wellness Counseling, a private group practice. Joe is nationally known and has been a guest on numerous podcasts and most recently a TEDx talk in Traverse City. Joe a true entrepreneur with big heart and genuineness for helping people.
Why Use G-Suite? Google G-Suite is the set of applications and tools that comes with every Google account. Most of the tools, like GMail, Google Calendar, Google Docs and Google Sheets are familiar to most. But the big game changer for most clinicians is being able to use the paid version of G-Suite in order to make it HIPAA secure. In particular, by using the paid version of G-Suite, you can get the BAA (business associate agreement) from Google which is a HIPAA requirement.
GMail Using Your Own Domain One of the big game changers in using G-Suite, is that it allows you to use your own domain name for your email. So for example, if you can have you email address be @yourdomainname.com vs. @gmail.com or yahoo.com, etc. Also, when using the paid version of G-Suite, you get the functionality of GMail that is HIPAA secure.
G-Suite Tools Can Boost Your Productivity Another, “selling point” of the tools of G-Suite, is that you can customize them and make use of templates to streamline repeated tasks. For example, using the “canned responses” feature of GMail for those emails that you respond to repeatedly; like requests for information, etc.
You can also use the tools of G-Suite to automate a lot of administrative functions. For example, setting up a Google Form that can be embedded on your website for people to request services or do intakes.
Another automated task is to set up a Google Calendar to use for people to self-schedule appointments using the appointments feature that is built in. The calendar then can be embedded on your website.
G-Suite Is A Great Choice For Bootstrapping Because G-Suite is so adaptable and cost-effective, it’s a great choice for counselors and therapists during those “bootstrapping” phases of private practice growth. The applications and tools have pretty much everything you need to do all of your administrative functions.
To Learn More: G-Suite for Therapists Course G-Suite Hacks and Tips Cheat Sheet Session Note Helper™ Other resources mentioned: Join a Mastermind Group Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Dayna Sykes, LPC about making the transition into private practice from agency work. In particular, Dayna talks about being able to start doing the kind of work she is really passionate about and doing things her way. Dayna also talks about the big learning curve for her as she moved into private practice, especially since she is a solo practitioner. Gordon and Dayna also talk about getting on and OFF insurance panels and what that process has been like for Dayna. Dayna also talks about how she developed her niche and the transitions she made around that. They also talk about the importance of not being too isolated in your practice and drawing on the support and help of others.
Meet Dayna Sykes Dayna Sykes, LPC-MHSP is the owner of Gordonsville Counseling & Play Therapy in Gordonsville, TN (cool name by the way!). Her website is daynasykeslpc.com. Dayna specializes in working with teens who are struggling with anxiety and depression.
Dayna received her B.S.W. in Social Work at Middle Tennessee State University in 2002 and was able to jump right into a career with an agency working as an In-home Family Counselor. This job equipped her for her specialty in teenage issues and parent training. She worked there for 7 years in several different positions to include In-home Family Counselor, Crisis Counselor, In-home and Transitional Living Supervisor, and Clinical Consultant and Trainer for the Middle Tennessee Region. While working for the agency, Dayna started attending Argosy University where she obtained her M.A. in Professional Counseling and worked to complete requirements for her License in Professional Counseling, which she completed in 2010.
Dayna says, “I’m a Private Practice Owner, Licensed Child and Teen Therapist- small-town practitioner with big dreams! Wife and mom of 2, baseball mom, farm life, spend my me time running and reading.”
Why Private Practice One of the main reasons people make the transition into private practice from being at an agency is out of a desire to be more independent and be their own boss. For Dayna, her decision to go into private practice was mainly motivated by her desire to have more time for her family. She made the transition to private practice after having her first child.
For others, the motivation to move into private practice from an agency setting is around being able to set your own niche and doing therapy your own way. Many times, agencies have a certain model or method of doing therapy that they expect their clinicians to follow. Not to mention the amount of time spent with clients and being able to give some extra attention to cases.
Other motivations for private practice come from being more financially independent. Earning potential for many agencies is based solely on getting raises and/or company wage standards. In private practice, especially for owners of the practice, you have more opportunity to increase your income and determine when and how you want to work.
Beating the Learning Curve Going into private practice, especially as a solo practitioner, requires learning a lot. There are so many processes and logistics to learn from the beginning. Hopefully, we don’t have to learn too much from our mistakes, but they do help us learn nonetheless.
Dayna and Gordon talk about being able to draw on supports to help with the learning curve. Things like this podcast and others can provide so much needed information to help counselors and therapists in their private practice journeys.
Finding the Right Niche Dayna also talks about how she developed and found the right niche for her in her practice. For her, she had a passion of play therapy that she developed in graduate school. When she was working for the agency, she felt limited by what she wanted to do with clients.
Originally she had intended to just work with adults in her private practice. But as she saw the need, it helped her to reconnect with her former passion. This helped her to create her niche which ended up being a better fit for her after all; working with teens using play therapy.
Working With Your Ideal Clients When we work with our ideal clients, it just makes us do better clinical work. If you are working with populations that of people. If you find yourself working with people that you have difficulty connecting to or just simply don’t enjoy, you should probably do something else.
Working with your ideal client will help you stay energized and actually look forward to going to work every day. A lot of times, that is the missing piece for people when working for an agency.
Drawing On Supports One of the mistakes that many people new to private practice do, is trying too hard to go it alone. As was mentioned, being in private practice, especially as a solo practitioner, can be lonely and isolating. That is why it is so important to be intentional about connecting with other practitioners and collaborating.
Another point to consider about collaboration is to get away from a mindset of seeing other practitioners as competition. It’s a mindset of scarcity rather than abundance. The truth of the matter is there are more than enough potential clients for all of us. They will come to us or our colleagues based on any number of factors. People choose therapists based on who they see as a good fit for them. We don’t have to compete for clients. In fact, it’s a “win, win” when we refer to each other and help potential clients find the best fit for them.
Take Home Points: Be willing to accept being on a “huge learning curve” when you are starting out in private practice.
- Know your reasons for going into private practice
- Figure out your ideal client(s) and base your niche on that ideal client
- Don’t let yourself get isolated; reach out to colleagues
- Collaborate rather than compete
Resources Mentioned: Dayna Sykes, LPC-S. MHSP – daynasykeslpc.com
dayna@daynasykeslpc.com
Session Note Helper™- http://sessionnotehelper.com
Apply to join a Mastermind Group – https://practiceoftherapy.com/mastermind
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks about some business basics and being able to navigate the business side of private practice. There are several places to focus when going into or growing your private practice. Gordon breaks these different focus area down into: mindset, planning, managing, marketing, re-investing, and sustaining. Ultimately, having a private practice as a therapist or counselor is being in business to “sell” your time and expertise. People want and need to come to us for our services. Knowing the business side of this assures success.
Business… [biz-nis]
Noun
- an occupation, profession, or trade:His business is poultry farming.
- the purchase and sale of goods in an attempt to make a profit.
- a person, partnership, or corporation engaged in commerce, manufacturing, or a service; profit-seeking enterprise or concern.
Watch the video of the webinar here
Private Practice Mindset
Being employed is not the same as being self-employed…
Employed
- FICA, Social Security, Medicare – deducted from pay
- Benefits- Retirement & Insurance
- Fixed Salary
- Only Standard Deductions for taxes
- Paid by paycheck
- Money is personal money
Self-Employed
- Self-employment taxes paid quarterly
- Retirement & Insurance are an expense
- Salary based on your “draw”
- Business expenses are deductions
- What you can pay yourself is based on business equity
- Business money is separate from personal money
Having a Business Plan
If you don’t know where you are going, how are you going to get there…
Financial Goals
- What sort of “salary” do you want to have?
- How much money do you need to maintain the lifestyle you want?
- How many sessions per week/month do you need to have to reach your financial goals?
- What do you want your net worth to be?
Time Goals
- How many days a week do you want to work?
- How much time-off do you want and need?
- Will your time-off be something that is paid for?
- How much time do you need to spend seeing clients to reach both your financial & time goals?
Managing Your Private Practice
Keeping things running like a well-oiled machine…
Clinical Side
- Intake
- Documentation
- Record Keeping
- Follow-up with clients and ancillary people
Business Side
- Client payments
- Insurance payments (and claims!)
- Accounting – Tracking income, expenses and cash flows
- Referral generation & development
Marketing Your Practice
You can’t just build it… You have to build it then tell them about it…
Connecting With Potential Clients
- Creating a niche
- Website
- Social Media
- Blogging
- Advertising
- Being known in the community
Connecting With Potential Referers
- Professional connections
- Networking in the community
- Insurance & EAP Panels
- Previous Clients
- Reputation in the community
Re-Investing For Growth
Fertilize it and it will grow…
Time Investment
- Bootstrapping in the early stages
- Learning the business side of things
- Learning how to market
- Polishing the clinical skills
- Developing a niche
Money Investment
- Learning what will give you a good ROI
- Outsourcing things that do not bring you money directly
- As you grow, invest in things that will “double” your efforts
- Invest in things that will diversify your income streams
Keeping It Sustainable
Be in it for the long haul…
- Being consistent with your efforts
- Thinking long-term
- Learning from others
- Finding a mentor and/or coaches
Download the Power Point PDF Apply for a Mastermind Group Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks again with Jane Carter, LPC about finding your “Superpowers” and priorities in private practice. Jane and Gordon share how their mindsets have shifted over time and how it has changed the focus of their practices. Jane also shares how getting some business coaching changed her practice and helped her to grow exponentially. She also shares how she made the shift to doing more coaching rather than traditional therapy in her practice. They also talk about being able to embrace change and taking some risks. And, at the same time, being genuine to yourself and knowing your gifts.
Meet Jane Carter Jane Carter, LPC is a counselor and business coach from Asheville, NC. Jane has spent the last several years in private practice as a counselor and has recently begun focusing more on business coaching, not only for therapists but other businesses as well. Her website is: JaneCarterCoaching.com
Jane says, “As a therapist, business coach, and life coach, I love helping people navigate the path to achieving their goals for a meaningful life. I apply these principles in my own life in the mountains of Asheville, NC, where I’m an outdoors woman, world-traveler, dog-mama, food-and-wine lover, reader, and coffee-shop connoisseur. (I’m also known for making up great puns on the fly).”
First Pancakes Jane talks about how she has tried a few things that really have not worked so well for her as a counselor and a business coach. She refers to these as “first pancakes”. If you have ever cooked pancakes, the first ones you try to make never turn out that good. But you have to make that first one for the rest to be perfect.
Our private practices are the same way. How you start out is probably not going to be at all like you end up. There will be a huge learning curve and you will experience some failures along the way. But you have to always make the first pancake…
Finding Your Superpowers Your “superpowers” are your gifts and talents as a person. Superpowers are also found in what you are passionate about. Finding your superpowers means being able to discover what you do better than anything else. And when you do those things, you can do them almost effortlessly. To find your superpowers it is important get feedback from others to know what they see in you that you might not have really noticed before. This is where coaching and finding a mentor can help so very much.
Another way to think about “superpowers” is really to think about what your strengths might be. By understanding and knowing yourself well, you can be more genuine and authentic with people. In many ways, it is what we help our clients with day in and day out. We help them find their strengths and gifts to help them thrive in life.
When we know our own “superpowers”, we are better able to live into how we can best help people. It makes us more authentic and genuine with what we do. People will notice that and be drawn to it.
Using Your Superpowers To Market Your Practice One of the keys things to remember about marketing is that people are drawn to what is genuine. In many ways, it is all about helping people discover how you can help them in their lives. It’s putting yourself in front of others and sharing with them how your superpowers can help them transform their lives.
Building the Long Game The other thing to remember about growing a private practice, or any business for that matter, is to think about the “long game”. “Get rich quick” rarely works. But by being able to think long-term and be content with steady growth, we are usually much more satisfied and content. Sharing your superpowers as a clinician, people will notice it as being genuine and authentic.
Ultimately, being able to know yourself well and discover your true strengths and abilities will help you be much more successful. It is where our superpowers live. By embracing our superpowers, we become much more effective as clinicians and human beings in general.
Resources Mentioned: Get a free copy of the “Private Practice Crush Game” by emailing Jane at jane@janecartercoaching.com. Use the subject line: “Gordon Brewer is awesome”. Let Jane know you listened to the podcast and she will send you the game.
Jane’s coaching and consulting website: JaneCarterCoaching.com
Get “The Works” – Paperwork Packet, Session Note Helper™ and the Accounting Templates for Google Sheets in one money-saving bundle – practiceoftherapy.com/theworks
Apply for a Mastermind Group and find your “Superpowers”!
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks about finding and living into your purpose and passion in private practice as a therapist, counselor or social worker. One of the important pieces of being successful in private practice is simply making sure you are doing what you enjoy and that give meaning. Gordon talks about some of the insights he has had lately through attending conferences and the work being done around the opioid crisis occurring in Tennessee and other parts of the country.
Finding Your Passion If you were to think about it, when was it that you decided to go into the career you are in? Was there a defining moment? What about people that maybe influenced you?
All of us go into this work for different reasons. It might be an interest in the clinical side of things. Or maybe you simply do this out of a passion for helping people who are struggling in life. It might be too that you had gone to therapy yourself and discovered a passion for this kind of work. Regardless of how you get into this field or career, I think it is important to remind yourself why you did that.
So many times we can become jaded and lose sight of our passion for the work we do. Getting bogged down in the logistics of the work, whether it is the paperwork and documentation or the schedule, can cause a person to forget why they decided to go into this kind of work, to begin with.
Finding Your Purpose Obviously, purpose and passion tend to go hand in hand. But I think of purpose as the place we can put our passion into action. Your passion helps inform your purpose. Then your purpose will help you inform your niche.
Having a niche in your practice will help assure two things:
- Helping you fill your practice with your ideal clients.
- Ensuring you of doing the work you are passionate about.
Changing Passions and Purposes Over Time One of the things that happens for many people is that our passions and purpose changes over time. This can occur for many different reasons. Many times though this occurs when we have experienced an event or epiphany about something.
An example of this was a clinician that I knew that had gone through some significant health problems. It was something she overcame, but as a result, it caused her passion and purpose to change. She had been primarily focused on helping children in her practice. But as a result of this issue in her life, she began working with people struggling with chronic pain.
For me, I had a bit of an epiphany in my own focus with the opioid addiction crisis we are having in our area. One of the things I am seeing in my practice is more and more clients either affected directly or indirectly by opioid addictions. In tandem with this, I happened to attend two conferences recently that dealt with the opioid crisis here in Tennessee and nationwide. Both of these things have prompted me to have a new passion for me around this issue and the effects it is having on many of my clients.
Being Genuine, Authentic and Present Finally, the work of being a counselor, therapist or any other mental health clinician does require authenticity and genuineness. It is the only way to do your best work as a clinician and a business person. Otherwise, people see right through it.
As I tell the people I supervise for licensure, to be a good clinician you have to have the ability to connect with people. It requires being totally present with people…what I like to refer to as “the ministry of presence”
There are a lot of hurting people out there. You will and can make a difference in their lives! So go out there and help heal this hurting world by finding your purpose and passion!
Resources Mentioned: Holy Friendship Summit: https://divinity.duke.edu/events/holy-friendship-summit-healing-heart-southern-appalachia
Hacks and Tips for Google G-Suite
Join the Mastermind Group
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Whitney Owens, LPC about marketing a private practice after starting from scratch. Whitney is the owner of Waters Edge Counseling in Savannah, GA. Whitney has started a private practice twice. Because of moves, she has made with her family, Whitney has had practices in both Georgia and in Colorado. Whitney and Gordon discuss the ways that she found to network and make contacts with people to grow her practice quickly after starting it.
Meet Whitney Owens, LPC Whitney is originally from Valdosta, Georgia and has a master’s degree in Professional Counseling from Richmont Graduate University in Atlanta. GA. Following graduate school, Whitney and her husband immediately moved to Denver, CO where she built a private practice while also doing inpatient work at a local hospital. In 2014 they moved to Savannah, Georgia and Whitney started Water's Edge Counseling. Whitney is married with two beautiful girls ages five and one.
In addition to counseling, Whitney also offers a number of other services including training and keynote speaking. She has been invited to local organizations such as churches and schools to educate on leadership, adolescent issues, parenting, family concerns, and mental health. Whitney has also facilitated retreats focused on helping women heal and find themselves.
Starting From Scratch In Private Practice One of the unique things about Whitney is that when she started her current practice, she was able to build it and fill it with clients fairly quickly. What Whitney has done has been to concentrate on some proven ways to build a practice from scratch.
Whitney has had the unique opportunity to start private practices in two different cities during her career thus far. And what she did was typical for a lot of people, she started at private practice while working somewhere else. Whitney was working in an inpatient setting and then would see private practice clients in the evenings and on weekends.
Both experiences gave her the opportunity to learn not only clinical skills but also some business building and private practice skills. When Whitney and her husband got the opportunity to move back to Georgia from Colorado, Whitney made the decision to pursue private practice as a full-time endeavor.
Marketing and Building Relationships One thing that Whitney knew she needed to do in order to build her practice was start networking. What she knows about the town and culture she now lives in (Savannah, GA), is that building those relationships in the community were important.
What has worked best for Whitney is spending time out in the community going to doctors offices and even doing some presentations with them on mental health issues. So many times doctors offices, hospitals, and other providers are grateful to have the contact and know who to refer to. By having that personal connection just increases the likelihood of them feeling confident to make those referrals.
Understanding the Community’s Needs The other place in which Whitney has had a lot of success is in having an understanding of the community’s needs. By spending time with doctors and other professionals, she would simply ask what were their concerns for patients and how as a therapist, she could help them with those problems. It comes from a place of concern rather than going out there to “convince” someone to make referrals.
For example, Whitney was able to connect with a local design school that sends her referrals from their student counseling services. And in addition to the referrals, she is getting, she was able to connect with some students to help with the revamp of her website. So it was a “win, win” situation for both she and the design school students.
Drawing on Supports The other thing that Whitney has been able to do is to draw on the support of a mastermind group. Both Gordon and Whitney have been involved in mutual mastermind groups and have learned so much. Whitney said that she has been able to double her income since being involved in a mastermind group.
Mastermind groups allow clinicians to be with peers who are struggling with many of the same issues in their practices. A person can learn so much from the group in that many of the people in the group, along with the facilitator, have done or are working on many of the same things. For example, things as simple as what phone system to use or larger issues like whether or not to form a group practice.
The other thing that mastermind group does is create a sense of accountability for you in your practice. Private practice can be lonely and by having other like-minded people to bounce things off of, helps us stay focused. Also if you say you are going to do something, the group, in a way, holds you do that and holds you accountable.
Creating A Niche One of the other things that Whitney and Gordon discussed is how they have both integrated faith and spirituality as somewhat of a niche in their practices. Both Whitney and Gordon have theological/faith-informed training. They talk about how this has helped them in their practices in terms of being identified as “Christian Counselors” and being able to incorporate addressing spirituality as part of what they can offer clients.
Of course, both Whitney and Gordon very much recognize that this needs to all be done in the context of doing sound clinical work first and keeping those ethical boundaries by being respectful of differing beliefs or spiritual practices. Having a “faith focus” or identifying one’s spiritual orientation can be attractive for some potential clients.
Finally, the key to success in private practice comes with hard work and persistence. Being able to face that challenges of private practice head-on and continue no matter what is what is needed to create a successful private practice.
Resources Mentioned: Whitney's website: https://watersedgecounseling.com/
Join a Mastermind Group
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
This is part 4, of this four-part series of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, “Love the Work, But Hate The Job”. In this session, Gordon talks about marketing and developing referral sources as you start and grow your private practice. This four-part series discusses the various steps and things a clinician might want to think about as they move into private practice. Especially those people making the transition from agency work into private practice. The series discusses: 1.) Knowing your “WHY”, 2.) Making a Plan, 3.) Setting-up an Office, and 4.) Marketing & Getting Referrals.
Check out the mini-course: “Love the Work, But Hate The Job”
In this course, you will be emailed 4 lessons, one each day, that will walk you through a way to think about making the transition from agency work into private practice. (Get the discount here!)
Marketing and Referral Sources “Marketing” is a word most of us therapist types shy away from. The idea of “selling” anything really rubs us the wrong way. In fact, unless a person has had any experience in business or in marketing, it can seem daunting. Most of us in this field have not had that.
I think it is important to think about it differently though.
My friend and colleague, Allison Puryear, puts it this way: “Marketing your private practice is simply helping the people that need and want our services find you…” I like thinking about it that way!
Marketing your private practice simply comes down to making it easier for people to find us. It’s getting your name in front of the people that you can best help. It does not have to be pushy or “salesy”.
Clients Come to Us In Two Ways If you think about it we get clients is two ways. One is they search us out on their own because they are struggling with some sort of personal issue in some way. Typically they will do an internet search or ask for some sort of recommendation from someone. The second way is through some sort of referral or suggestion from someone that they come to us; typically a doctor or other professional.
So when you think about getting clients there are two areas to focus. One is online and the second is through referral people.
Online Marketing Needless to say, in this day and age, having a website is a must. This is especially true for those just getting started and developing a client base. For the majority of people, they “Google it” first. So having an effective website should be a priority when it comes to getting a private practice started. It is your “marketing hub”.
Two Ways To Have A Website First is to create a website yourself. This a good choice for someone that has a bit of tech-savvy and the time to do it. Especially when you are in that “bootstrapping phase” of private practice.
What this involves is creating your domain name and getting a hosting service to house your website. I recommend Bluehost for this. (You can learn more about that here.) And if you want to learn more about creating websites and be in a do-it-yourself mode, a good resource is Daniel Fava’s, CreateMyTherapistWebsite.com (affiliate link)
The second way to have a website is to have someone else create it for you. For this, I recommend Brighter Vision. They are the experts in helping counselors and therapists build beautiful websites. They also help with SEO (Search Engine Optimization) which helps your website get ranked higher in Google. In fact, therapists websites are all they do. BrighterVision (affiliate link -use this link to get one month free)
Blogging One of the best ways to boost your SEO and establish yourself as an expert, is to blog. Blogging does not have be overly complicated and should be treated like writing a research paper. Use short paragraphs and put things into simple, ordinary language. Write to your clients and the struggles they are having.
Developing Referral Relationships Besides having an online presence, developing referral relationships is a tried and true way to bring in new clients. AKA, “networking” is truly about developing relationships. If you think about it, it is what we do best as therapists and counselors. We do it all the time with clients.
Networking can be simply be dropping off business cards or rack cards to doctors or other professionals to use for referrals of patients. It could also be getting together with potential referral people for coffee or lunch.
One tool that I use is a “coordination of care” form. (You can get a link to that by downloading the free Marketing Cheat Sheet). I get an “authorization to release” and send the coordination of care form and a practice flyer (information about my practice) to doctors of the clients I am seeing. The doctor and client appreciate the contact and the doctor becomes aware of my practice.
Other ways to develop referral sources is to just simply become involved in your community, especially with other professionals. When people know you, they will refer to you.
Put In the Sweat Equity Marketing your practice is something that does take some time. But the pay off is that you will develop a steady stream of referrals and clients that can come to you. Marketing and getting referrals is ultimately about developing relationships with people both on and offline. It’s helping the people that need and want your services find you.
Resources Mentioned Marketing Cheat Sheet
BrighterVision
CreateMyTherapistWebsite.com
Bluehost
Disclaimer: Some of the links to products and services in this post are affiliate links. That just simply means we receive a commission, at no extra cost to you, if you purchase using those links. Thanks for using the links!
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
This is part 3, of this four-part series of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, “Love the Work, But Hate The Job”. In this session, Gordon explores some of the logistics around setting up an office and getting started with your private practice. This four-part series discusses the various steps and things a clinician might want to think about as they move into private practice. The series discusses: 1.) Knowing your “WHY”, 2.) Making a Plan, 3.) Setting-up an Office, and 4.) Marketing & Getting Referrals.
Check out the mini-course: “Love the Work, But Hate The Job”
In this course, you will be emailed 4 lessons, one each day, that will walk you through a way to think about making the transition from agency work into private practice. (Get the discount here!)
Setting Up The Office
One of the very first things you have to figure out, logistically, about going into private practice is where and how you will see clients. The good news about doing talk therapy is all you really need is a couple of chairs and place to meet that is private and has very few distractions. The truth is, that could be just about anywhere.
But, we need a little more than that for ourselves and for our clients. For example, a waiting and reception area is nice to have. Also, a comfy, warm and inviting therapy room makes a big difference too. We want our clients to feel at ease and safe when they come to us.
Finding the right place to meet with clients sometimes takes some creativity and willingness to “think outside the box”. For most people getting started in private practice, there needs to be some flexibility in order be a bit more frugal. You really can’t afford a huge office with all the “bells and whistles” in those beginning stages.
Finding an Office Space
There are a lot of things you want to take into consideration in getting an office to see clients. Location is important. Also thinking about how clients get in and out of the space. It’s better to not have a lot of stairs (I did that and it was a barrier for some clients). Also thinking long-term as you grow; will the space support your growth?
A good place to start is just looking online and in directories like Craigslist. Keep an eye out for places as your drive around town or begin to look. Sometimes people will only advertise by having a sign out in front of an office space. I know too, letting friends and other folks know you are looking for an office space can bring some results. Use social media to help let people know you are looking. Also maybe consider talking to a realtor who specializes in office space.
Bootstrapping and Sharing Office Space
The normal progression of being in private practice is that you will want to do a lot of “bootstrapping” in those beginning stages. In other words, you leverage your time while you have a lot of it. You also want to be able to save as much money as possible as you build your financial assets in the practice.
Depending on where you are located, office space may be easy to come by or not. Usually, if there is a lot of spaces available, the prices will be more competitive. Needless to say, it makes sense, in those beginning stages, not to overextend yourself financially by spending a lot on office space. After all, office space will be one of your bigger, if not the biggest, expense you will have with running a private practice.
For this reason, subleasing or sharing office space just makes sense. And it doesn’t need to be another therapist’s office either. You could rent or sublease space from any other professional (lawyers, doctors, chiropractors, etc.). Also, look into churches, synagogues or other civic organizations that might have the extra space.
Group Practices One thing to not overlook is considering joining a group private practice as an independent contractor. Depending on their business model, many group practices do a “fee-split” with the clinicians they contract with. The advantage is that your “overhead” is already taken care of by the fee split.
Depending on how it is structured, you might do better, in the long run, to work within a group practice than trying to go out on your own and build the referrals and client base you need. Also, it might be that you would come out better financially by not having to worry as much about the cost of being in practice.
Non-Traditional Services Another thing to consider when getting started in private practice is to look into teletherapy or online therapy. It is something that is certainly growing and lucrative for a lot of people. In fact, some people have built their whole practice around this model of delivery.
Another delivery method is to go to the clients, rather than them coming to you. In-home therapy is offered by a lot of agencies. The same model can be used by people in private practice.
Phones, Email and Such Another part of running a private practice is having systems in place for people to contact you and make appointments. There are any number of phone systems available, but a simple/easy solution is to simply get a separate cell phone to use for your practice. Then as you grow you can look a dedicated phone system that is HIPAA compliant and all that.
As far as email goes, Google G-Suite is one of the best options for many reasons. You can set it up to use your own domain name (it’s more professional that way). Also, it is HIPAA secure if you use the business (paid) version of G-Suite. The other thing is the whole suite of applications that it comes with. These tools are very adaptable to small business and being able to manage a private practice. (Check out the full G-Suite for Therapists Course here)
For some practices, they will need a FAX service. More and more, email is replacing FAXes, but might be something you will need. S-Fax is one service I can recommend and also the one I use in my practice.
Other Office Equipment Besides phones and FAXes, it is helpful to have a copier and printer. Again depending on where and how you are set up. It might be that the office space you are using will provide those things.
Finding and setting up an office is really not all that hard. It just takes a bit of perseverance and willingness to do some searching. Ultimately the office and equipment you pick will help you sustain and grow,
Resources Mentioned: G-Suite for Business (This is an affiliate link to get 20% off your first year. Also, I do receive a commission for this at no extra cost to you)
G-Suite for Therapists Course
Mastermind Groups- Find out more and apply here!
Other Resources for Office Set-Up
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT
Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on Apple Podcasts, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
This is part 2, of this four-part series of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, “Love the Work, But Hate The Job”. In this session, Gordon talks about making a plan for transitioning into private practice from working in an agency setting into private practice. This four-part series discusses the various steps and things a clinician might want to think about as they move into private practice. The series discusses: 1.) Knowing your “WHY”, 2.) Making a Plan, 3.) Setting-up an Office, and 4.) Marketing & Getting Referrals.
Check out the mini-course: “Love the Work, But Hate The Job”
In this course you will be emailed 4 lessons, one each day, that will walk you through a way to think about making the transition from agency work into private practice. (Get the discount here!)
Making a Plan Needless to say, for most things in life, if you plan it out, things usually tend to go better. That is not to say though, plans always go as expected! Nonetheless, if you don’t know where you are going, how are you going to get there?!
So you have figured out your “WHY” and decided that going into private practice is what you really want to do. You have envisioned your future and thought about where you see yourself, 5, 10, or 20 years from now. The next thing is to begin thinking about how you are going to get there.
Understanding Your Financial Need Most of us need to feel secure and know that changes will only enhance our lifestyle and better ourselves financially. And the place to start is to understand fully your current financial situation.
If you are committed to moving into private practice full time, a good place to start is to figure out what it would take to make a lateral move. In other words, in order to replace your current salary and benefits, how many private practice clients would you need to see?
A way to do that is to “work backward". Take the total you are making now, benefits included, and add in the costs associated with running your practice. This will give a figure to work backward from. For example:
Salary and Benefits = $50,000.00 per year
Cost of Business (“overhead”) = $12,000.00 per year
$50,000 + $12,000 = $62,000
$62,000 is needed to match what you are currently receiving from the agency. You would then divide that by the average per session rate you anticipate. That will then let you know how many sessions in a year you will need to support yourself.
More detail on all this in this blog post: “Managing the Financial Side of Private Practice”
Planning For Slow Times and Growth Periods Needless to say, when you go into private practice there are periods of time when the practice is not bringing in any income. This is especially true for the first several months (and sometimes years) of when practice is started. No one starts at “full”. It takes time…
You need to be prepared financially for those slow periods and for times when you want to take off. As a general rule, I suggest you have 2-6 months salary & expenses in reserve for those times.
Getting Your Financial House In Order Part of the planning process is to also get your personal financial situation in order. The number one reason private practices fail, is that the practitioner was not prepared financially to make that move. They put too much of a financial strain on themselves personally. It’s a good idea work to get yourself out of debt as soon as possible before making a move into full-time private practice.
One strategy is to move into private practice part-time while continuing to work a full time in the agency. This works sometimes… Certainly you do not want to create conflicts of interest or do anything unethical with clients while doing this. (No stealing sheep!!). But if you are in a niche that does not compete with your current employer it is doable.
By doing this, you can use what you make in the private practice to build a reserve and get yourself out of debt or both. It will also give you the opportunity to build the practice without being under a financial strain.
Planning For Where and How You Provide Services There are several ways to provide services. Usually, we think of traditional office visits as the main way of providing services. In the initial stages of your practice, you will probably want to borrow or sublease space from another therapist or business. Or you could join another practice that is already established as a contracted (1099) provider.
Other things to consider seeing clients in non-traditional ways. For example, teletherapy or in-home services.
Planning for Being in Business Finally, it is important to remember that being in private practice as a counselor or therapist means you are running a business. As you plan, it is important to learn as much as possible about running a business and marketing your practice.
In this next session, we’ll be discussing the logistics of finding and setting up an office.
For many counselors, therapists, social workers, and psychologists, the dream of being in private practice, or even owning their own practice, seems daunting. In this four-part series of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks about the steps needed to make the transition from doing agency work, as a mental health clinician, to being in private practice. The series discusses: 1.) Knowing your “WHY”, 2.) Making a Plan, 3.) Setting-up an Office, and 4.) Marketing & Getting Referrals.
Check out the mini-course: “Love the Work, But Hate The Job” In this course you will be emailed 4 lessons, one each day, that will walk you through a way to think about making the transition from agency work into private practice. (Get the discount here!)
Knowing Your “WHY” For me, the place to always start is to ask “Why”. Why do you want to go into private practice to begin with? And why did you chose this profession to begin with? We all have different motivations for why we do what we do. The main point is the importance of having a sense of purpose and direction in life. To be really clear for yourself the reasons behind pursuing private practice. A good visioning exercise is to begin thinking about where you see yourself 5, 10, 20 or even 30 years? Think about what the steps would be needed to begin moving towards those goals or aspirations. Questions to ask yourself: * What are your financial goals? * If you were to create your ideal week, what would that look like? * Is your motivation to go into private practice more about having more autonomy or financial? * Why would you NOT just want to keep doing what you are doing? * If you were to change your “attitude” about your current job, would things be any different? * What supports could you draw on to help you reach your personal goals? * Why are you doing what you are doing now? Is it a stepping-stone to something else or is it just because the opportunity came up?
FUN FACT: You are 40-60% more likely to reach a goal simply by writing it down...
A good way to begin to capture all of these ideas is to start journaling about those things. Maybe also create a timeline for yourself with some realistic and attainable goals. Check out this blog post: “Why Asking WHY Matters Most”
“Follow your bliss. If you do follow your bliss, you put yourself on a kind of track that has been there all the while waiting for you, and the life you ought to be living is the one you are living…” - Joseph Campbell
Recommended Reading: [amazon_link asins='1885167776,0307465357,0801075254,0307719774' template='ProductGrid' store='POT Sales' marketplace='US' link_id='9459583a-4c83-11e8-9afb-11a6733109d0'] Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Rachel McCrickard, LMFT about clinical supervision and her new venture, Motivo. Motivo helps solve the problem clinicians have around finding supervisors that are a good fit for them in their development and movement toward licensure. One the problems many people run into, especially in rural areas, is being able to have access to clinical supervision. They discuss the changes that have occurred with the licensure in many states, and the ability to meet with clinical supervisors via video conferencing. Motivo helps pair pre-licensed clinicians with the clinical supervisors they really want to work with. Meet Rachel McCrickard, LMFT Rachel McCrickard, Founder/CEO of Motivo, is a Licensed Marriage and Family Therapist with extensive experience in the mental health care industry. A graduate of Azusa Pacific University, Rachel spent the early years of her career providing therapy to homeless individuals in Los Angeles, CA. In 2011, Rachel returned to her hometown of Chattanooga, TN where she began providing therapy to rural and underserved areas at a large mental health agency. Rachel began to recognize the difficulty many therapists experiences when attempting to find quality clinical supervision in rural areas. Impassioned by her inherent entrepreneurial spirit, Rachel fostered the creation of Motivo in 2017 and is now providing therapists with an easier path to licensure through online supervision. Finding the Right Fit Much of the clinical supervision process mirrors what we do in therapy with our clients. It is so important to find the right “fit” with a clinical supervisor. After all, you will be spending a great deal of time and making a significant financial commitment to move through the licensure process. Having a healthy relationship with the person who is supervising you is so critical for your development as a clinician. One dilemma is being supervised by someone with a different theoretical or clinical background from the clinician’s training. For example, an MFT with training in systems theory working with someone using a more individually focused model. Motivo Solving the Problem When Rachel moved from California back to Tennessee she began working on forming Motivo out of a need she saw with many of her fellow clinicians. She was working for an agency and saw the struggle of many pre-licensed people having a hard time finding people to supervise them. Not only was it difficult for people to find clinical supervisors, the time and money commitment was prohibitive because of the distances people were having to travel to meet with supervisors. The solution was two-fold; using video conferencing and having a directory of clinical supervisors that could provide supervision.
Motivo is a Portuguese word that means “foundation”. The whole idea behind Motivo is helping clinicians make the best of their training years and developing a good foundation for their clinical work.
Accessibility and Reasonable Rates When Rachel formed Motivo, it was with the idea of making clinical supervision not only accessible but affordable as well. Currently, they are in need of people to be supervisors. For supervisors, it is free to join. Apply at wearemotivo.com For people seeking a supervisor, the rates are very reasonable with a maximum individual rate of $60 per hour, $50 per hours for dyads and $40 per hour for groups. They also have the opportunity to interview as many potential supervisors at no cost. Diversifying Income For clinicians that are already licensed, offering supervision is a great way to diversify income and create other streams of income. In particular, if you are able to have supervision groups that help maximize your time. It’s a win/win proposition in that you are creating other income for yourself and helping newer clinicians with their licensure process. Taking Risks and “Making the Jump” Another thing that Rachel and Gordon discussed was how Rachel had been working for an agency and decided to take the leap and go out on her own. Even though Rachel did not go specifically into private practice, she was able to do something “outside the box” but in a related field. The key was that Rachel took the time to learn about being an entrepreneur and identified a need for other clinicians. Rachel talked about looking into business resources within your community to learn more about running a small business. For example, Chambers of Commerce and other business incubators that are out there. Finally, Rachel and Gordon talk about how it is so important to seek out mentors and coaches to help us in our journey. If you think about it, it is no different than what our clients do with us as clinicians when they come to us with their problems. We all need guidance and mentors in our lives. It is the whole premise behind clinical supervision. Why not do the same with your business practices? Resources Mentioned: Rachel's Website: WeAreMotivo.com Join a Mastermind Group Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer, and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
Download Podcast In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon has a conversation with Sybil Smith, LPC-MHSP about having a private practice in two different locations and, in two different states. Sybil shares how she has grown a successful group practice that serves very different populations due to cultural shifts. Sybil shares how she made the decision to make the move from agency work and step out into private practice. Sybil and Gordon talk about their decisions to join insurance panels and how that was not only economical decision but also a values-based decision. Meet Sybil R Smith, LPCS, FAMI, MT-BC Since 2003, Sybil has been a helper - first as a board-certified music therapist, then as a counselor, and now as a GIM Fellow and clinical supervisor. Using creativity and her entrepreneurial spirit, she opened a private practice and has now expanded into a group practice that focuses on providing trauma informed care in the experiential psychotherapy models, in the small town community of Johnson City, TN and in Asheville, NC. Her website is: www.TheJourneyCenterForHealingArts.com Dual Practices Having a practice in different cities, especially if there is a geographical shift, requires understanding the cultural nuances of those different places. Sybil talks about how having practice in Asheville, NC is much different than having a practice in the Tri-Cities of East Tennessee. Even though they are only 50 miles apart, they are very different culturally. Asheville tends to have much more educated demographic when it comes to mental health services. There is less education needed about the benefits of coming to counseling or therapy. Understanding Demographics and Culture It is important to understand the various needs of the community and the demographics of the community you are located. For example, Sybil and Gordon’s practices are in the Appalachian region of their state(s). The culture very much influences not only the kinds of people they serve is also influences many of the clinical issues as well. (For example economic hardships and generational poverty). Deciding To Be On Insurance Panels Sybil and Gordon discussed their decisions to go on insurance panels. A big part of both their decisions to do this were influenced by the demographics of their area. The other was personal values about the population they are serving. The majority of people in their area are dependent on their insurance to receive mental health and medical services. Sybil’s Private Practice Journey Sybil went into private practice directly from agency work. And because the agency she was working for had a “non-compete” clause in their contract, she could not start her private practice “on the side”. So this required her to do a lot of networking in the community and building relationships with other professionals that would refer to her. Game Changers Sybil also talked about how, as she grew, getting an EHR system in place was a big game changer. Especially in terms of streamlining the filing of insurance claims for clients. Another one was connecting with people in the community by holding workshops and getting with community leaders. Sybil still maintains those relationships with those people that she started with. Collaborating With Other Therapists Another game changer, for both Sybil and Gordon, has been collaborating with other therapists in their community. Along with this is making those connections with other business leaders in your community and learning from them. You not only learn from them, but it builds those relationships with people who will refer to you directly or indirectly. Moving Into Group Practice For Sybil, she moved into group practice out of her own need to not be so isolated as a solo practitioner. Solo practice can be lonely and isolating. She wanted to have a team of people with her same values and passion for helping people. Also she wanted to have a team with similar clinical focus and theoretical backgrounds. Takeaways * Be willing to take some risks and step-out when going into private practice. * Don’t go it alone! Always draw on supports and reach out and collaborate with other clinicians and business leaders in your community * Take advantage of technology and ERH systems to streamline your processes and workflow * Know the demographics and “culture” of your community. Work hard to serve their needs and your practice will be successful!
Resources Mentioned: Sybil’s website: www.TheJourneyCenterForHealingArts.com G-Suite for Therapists: practiceoftherapy.com/gsuitecourse Join a Mastermind Group: practiceoftherapy.com/mastermind Brighter Visions Website Solutions Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
Download Podcast In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon has a conversation with Amber Hawley, LMFT and Dr. Maelisa Hall about developing business relationships and support systems in private practice. Amber and Maelisa talk about being able to connect with people that are in similar places in their journey and how it has helped their practices thrive and grow. They talk about how getting together with others for support has increased their productivity and ability to focus in their businesses. Meet Amber Hawley Group psychotherapy practice owner, licensed marriage and family therapist, business coach, ENFP, mom of three kids and avid coffee drinker. You can find out more about Amber at: www.amberhawley.com www.couplesfix.com www.fremontcounselingservices.com Meet Dr. Maelisa Hall Licensed psychologist, consultant and trainer, online biz owner, ENFP, wife, cat owner and nail design enthusiast. You can find out more about Maelisa at: www.qaprep.com www.maeunleashed.com Maelisa and Amber met in an online book club that turned into an annual business retreat held with seven other female colleagues. After this they connected over being ENFPs with ADHD and their friendship grew into a biz bestie relationship. Together they started their podcast, My Biz Bestie, which helps other female biz owners find their support system and have more fun as entrepreneurs. Amber and Maelisa have a podcast, “My Biz Bestie” (https://www.mybizbestie.com/podcast/) where they talk about the struggles of being female business owners and how they have been able to develop meaningful relationships for support. Know Yourself Well Part of success in private practice, or any business for that matter, comes from knowing yourself well and knowing your limits. You need also know what you need to help you be successful. Everyone obviously has different needs. But by knowing yourself well, you can connect with those people that can truly be of support. Relationships Are Key One of the difficulties of being in private practice, especially as a solo provider, is that it can quickly become very isolating. Isolation can lead to stagnation and slow growth (We see it all the time with our clients…) But by having significant friendships and business relationships, a person can increase their success exponentially. These are relationships that are deeper and not at all superficial. Parallel Processes One phenomenon of drawing on supports and having “biz besties” is that a parallel process occurs. Much like it is in supervision, by being on parallel or tandem journeys people can learn from each other. Not only learn about others that you are in relationship with, but also learn about yourself from them.
Amber mentions that we can have all different kinds of friendships. Friends for a reason, a season or a lifetime. As we know, no single person can be everything to us. We have relationships on a lot of different fronts depending on the context.
Be Willing To Put Yourself Out There Not all of us are necessarily wired as “extroverts”, like Amber and Maelisa. So it takes a bit of courage to put yourself out there and develop those relationships. But once you take that first step, it becomes easier to connect with a lot of different people. When we know we are not alone, it is easier to take some necessary risks with your practice. Technology Can Keep Us Connected Amber and Maelisa talked about the fact that they live on opposite ends of their state (California) and that distance is really not a problem. They do talk almost daily and bounce ideas off each other. They do however get together frequently since it is only a one flight between their cities. Resources Mentioned Find out about upcoming mini-retreats and an upcoming workshop on networking that Maelisa and Amber will be hosting in the fall at: “My Biz Bestie” - www.mybizbestie.com [amazon_link asins='0887307280' template='ProductGrid' store='POT Sales' marketplace='US' link_id='8858362b-36ab-11e8-8908-b1e2527556c2'] Brighter Vision- Beautiful websites for counselors and therapists
Disclaimer: Some of the links above are affiliate links. These just means we receive a commission if you purchase using these links. There is no extra cost to you if you use these links.
Meet Gordon Brewer, MEd, LMFT Gordon is the person behind The Practice of Therapy Podcast & Blog.He is also President and Founder of Kingsport Counseling Associates, PLLC. He is a therapist, consultant, business mentor, trainer and writer. PLEASE Subscribe to The Practice of Therapy Podcast on iTunes, Stitcher and Google Play. Follow us on Twitter @therapistlearn and Pinterest “Like” us on Facebook.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon has a conversation with Rob Reinhardt, LPCS of “Tame Your Practice”. Rob and Gordon talk about EHR (Electronic Health Records) and how clinicians might decide which EHR might be the best fit for them in their practices. EHRs can be one of the most important investments a clinician can make in their practice. Rob’s expertise is in doing EHR reviews and looking in detail at the features the various EHR’s available for practitioners.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Samara Stone, LCSW about having a pro-insurance private practice. Samara is a person you need to know in the private practice realm. Samara teaches so much about work-life balance and is an innovative and inspiring leader in the field of behavioral health. Gordon and Samara share their journeys into private practice and how they came to the decision to be on insurance panels instead of being strictly private pay. Samara’s approach is inspirational and encouraging to those of us in this field.
In this episode, Gordon talks about marketing strategies for your counseling and therapy private practices. Ultimately, marketing is about helping people find you and helping you connect with your ideal client. Marketing can be done in two ways, online and offline. Gordon talks about the strategies of doing both and focusing on the ways that fit you and your personality best.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Maureen Werrbach, LCPC about starting a group private practice and how she grown and approached building a large group practice in Chicago, IL. Gordon and Maureen talk about how sharted the Facebook Group, “Group Practice Exchange” and some of the questions that come up for the members of that group. They also talk about the advantages and disadvantages of having 1099 (contractors) vs. W2 (employees).
In this episode, Gordon talks about the balance between the clinical vs. business side of running a private practice. Even though there are some overlaps of clinical processes and business processes, it is usually helpful to keep things separate. Gordon talks about having a good handle on how you spend your time and having processes in place to manage the various aspects of operating a private practice as a counselor, therapist, psychologist or social worker.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Mel K. Whaley about advocacy and help make mental health services more readily available to the people that need it most. Mel talks about several of the projects she has been working on in both the for-profit and non-profit sectors to help providers have better support and improve their performance in the way they run their practices. Mel’s main focus has been to use her business background to help clinicians work more efficiently and improve business processes.
In this episode, Gordon talks about using your time and money resources and when to “bootstrap” vs.outsource in private practice. There is a relationship between our time and money assets. The biggest commodity as counselors and therapists have is our time. We trade our time for money. Gordon talks about getting the best ROI for your money by developing a mindset and understanding of your time and its value. Knowing where to focus your efforts depends on which phase of private practice you are in.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Dr. Maelisa Hall from QA Prep about documentation and the common problems clinicians in private practice run into with their paperwork. Maelisa discusses some strategies around staying current with your documentation and getting caught up when you have fallen behind. “Session notes should be thought of as a part of your therapy session”. Gordon and Maelisa also talk about some of the challenges of starting a new business/practice and the importance of sticking things out and being persistent with what you do to build a practice.
In this episode Gordon talks with Rachael Norman about helping self-paying clients who want to use their health insurance to pay for your services. The easiest way for practitioners to help people collect out-of-network insurance benefits is to offer a “superbill”. Rachael talks about how and why her company developed an app called “Better” that helps clients easily get paid back for their out-of-pocket expenses, using a superbill, from their health insurance.
In this episode, Gordon talks about 11 things therapists, counselors and other mental health clinicians can do to help their private practices succeed in the coming year. From being action oriented to planning and preparing for the long haul, private practice success depends as much as anything on being persistent and consistent. Owning and running a small business takes a lot of knowledge and skill. Gordon discusses these top things he has learned in his years as a private practice owner.
In this episode, Gordon talks with Jim Turner about collections and getting paid in your private practice as a therapist, counselor or other mental health provider. They discuss having client credit cards on file and how to have a system that is secure and reduces liability for the clinician. They talk about how to set this up and then how to present it to clients. Jim talks about having a clear and simple financial policy with clients so that there very few questions about payment expectations.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks about how to plan and prepare for private practice growth. Knowing your “numbers”, getting the support you need, outsourcing and automating tasks are essential parts of having successful growth and taking your practice to the next level. Whether you are just starting into private practice or already have a practice and thinking about adding other clinicians, it is important to understand the costs or overhead of being in practice. Gordon talks about value of drawing on the support of a mastermind group or coaching. Gordon also discusses why outsourcing and learning to automate things more will give a better return on your time investment.
In this podcast episode Gordon interviews private practice coach and consultant Kelly Higdon, LMFT. They talk about therapists and counselors making the transition into private practice and some of the common barriers people run into in knowing the business side of things. They also talk about the importance of mindset and knowing your numbers (money) and being able to have an honest look at your finances.
Gordon and Kelly talk too about the importance of knowing your “why” and your own motivation behind going into private practice. They discuss the importance of having a plan and breaking things down into manageable steps.
In this podcast episode Gordon talks about productivity and time management in private practice. One of the main things that separates really successful private practice owners from those that struggle the most, is how they manage their time and get things done.
How many times have you felt overwhelmed with the shear volume of stuff that needs your attention? For me, it happened a lot! So I decided to get a handle on it and look at how I was spending my time and what I could do to better manage not only my time but my productivity.
One of the main productivity “hacks” for most people in private practice is to hire a virtual assistant. One of the biggest time killers for anyone in practice is doing follow-ups and answering phone calls. So Gordon has a conversation with his virtual assistant and intake coordinator, Nikki Carey, about what they have learned together about managing intakes and helping Gordon spend his time on things that truly need his attention and expertise.
In this podcast episode Gordon has a conversation with Cecilia Briseno, LCSW and her unique niche of working with clients who are navigating the immigration process. In particular the difficulty of families being separated during this whole process. Gordon and Cecilia talk about making the transition from working for an agency to private practice. Cecilia tells about how she started into private practice and doing it in a cost effective way. They discuss being able to prepare financially for that transition. Cecilia also talks about how she has been able to diversify her income streams in her practice through providing evaluations.
In this podcast episode Gordon has a conversation with John Clarke from Private Practice Workshop and Unconditional Media. Gordon and John talk about online marketing for your private practice and some of the strategies and ways to market. John talks about some of the different philosophies of marketing and how these can be applied to private practice. John and Gordon also talk about branding and how that differs from advertising and some strategies for creating a private practice “brand”. They talk about the importance of being able to connect with potential clients and communicate to them about how you can help them with their problems. Ultimately marketing is about getting you and your private practice in front of potential clients and communicating to them about how you will help them.
In this podcast episode Gordon has a conversation with Joe Sanok from the Practice of the Practice Podcast. Joe and Gordon talk about scaling and “leveling up” your private practice and the ways the counselors, therapists and mental health clinicians can take their practices to the next level. They talk about the importance of having mentors and coaching in helping with growth and scaling your private practice. Joe and Gordon also talk about making the transition from agency work into private practice and the different phases of starting, growing and scaling your practice.Joe speaks to how a person should be spending their time and resources during these different stages. They discuss learning how to maximize your time by learning to spend it on things that will move you forward rather than hold you down. By focusing on your ROI (return on investment) of both your time and money will help you take your practice to the next level. Joe and Gordon also talk about mindset in private practice and not letting yourself get "petrified by perfection".
In the podcast interview, Gordon talks with Danielle Kepler about insurance credentialing and billing in private practice as a therapist, counselor, social worker or other mental health clinicians. Danielle speaks to some of the advantages and disadvantages of being credentialed with insurance companies and accepting insurance in your private practice.Gordon and Danielle talk about how they decided to be on insurance panels and why they did not go strictly private pay in their practices. Danielle also talks about being your own biller and how to make the process simpler and less intimidating. They discuss how to start the process of becoming credentialed with insurance companies and some strategies around getting on insurance panels.
Danielle Kepler, LCPC is the founder and “head insurance guru” at Be Your Own Biller, LLC, where she offers consultation to business owners, solo practitioners, and non-profits local to Chicago and across the nation. Be Your Own Biller’s mission is to empower clinicians and demystify the insurance credentialing and billing world so they do not need to hire a long-term credentialing or billing service. She co-hosts a podcast dedicated to insurance credentialing and billing called Insurance Answers Podcast. In addition to consulting, she is a clinical therapist and has a private practice in downtown Chicago. In her private practice, she primarily sees adults who are struggling with anxiety and depression as well as couples. She is paneled with over 30 private insurance companies/EAPs and does her own credentialing and billing. Learn more at www.beyourownbiller.com.
Listeners can sign up for a free CPT Cheat Sheet when signing up for my e-mail list via my website. I just came out with a bunch of useful products, one including Ins and Outs of Insurance Verification E-Book™ and another a Credentialing Starter Kit™ www.beyourownbiller.com/products. I am not offering free Be Your Own Biller Quick Tips via my FB page and group and am in the process of developing courses on insurance credentialing and billing.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon talks with Daniel Fava about building your own private practice website and how have effective website design that is user friendly and easy to navigate. Gordon and Daniel also talk about why someone might want to build their own website verses having a web designer do the work. They also cover common website design mistakes and how to increase SEO (search engine optimization)
Daniel Fava is a web designer and founder of CreateMyTherapistWebsite.com. Daniel teaches therapists how to create websites and attract more clients online. After building a website for his wife’s private practice and seeing the impact it had on her business, he became passionate about helping others achieve the same. Daniel offers web design services, consultations and online training to help therapists overcome tech-fears and grow their business through online marketing. You can get free access to his library of PDFs, cheat sheets, and e-books by clicking here.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy podcast Gordon talks with Clay Cockrell, LCSW about online counseling and building a private practice using online services. Gordon and Clay discuss how being able to add online therapy as an option for clients, can be a great way to reach people who need our services but find it difficult to reach our offices. Gordon and Clay talk some about the logistics of providing online therapy and some of its limitations due to state regulations. They also discuss how providing online counseling can have global reach and give people a way to connect with professionals in some of the remote areas of the world.
Clay Cockrell, LCSW is a therapist based in New York City and is the founder of several counseling oriented endeavors. Clay is the person behind OnlineCounselling.com, a listing directory with the mission of helping clients all over the world to find the therapist or life coach that will best meet their needs. The site also works through their educational resources and podcasts to help counselors work online in an ethical, responsible and legal manner. A majority of proceeds from the site are donated to non-profit arts.
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast Gordon interviews Roy Huggins about tech, HIPAA, self-care and the business side of private practice. Roy talks about his private practice journey and how he was able to use his business and technology background to start Person-Centered Tech. Roy also talks about the ethics of using our technology and doing it in a way that protects clients and keeps their information secure. Gordon and Roy talk about the difference between being “HIPAA compliant” vs. “HIPAA secure”. They also discuss the importance of financial self-care in private practice and why it is important for clinicians to be prepared for the constant technology changes that come with running a private practice. Also making and charging enough to support yourself and keep your practice viable.
Meet Roy Huggins
Roy Huggins, LPC NCC, is a counselor in private practice who also directs Person-Centered Tech. Roy worked as a professional Web developer for 7 years before changing paths, and makes it his mission to grow clinicians’ understanding of the Internet and other electronic communications mediums for the future of our practices and our professions.
Roy is an adjunct instructor at the Portland State University Counseling program where he teaches Ethics, and is a member of the Zur Institute advisory board. He has acted as a subject matter expert on HIPAA, security and clinical use of technology for Counseling licensure boards and both state and national mental health professional organizations. He has co-authored or authored 2 book chapters, and he routinely consults with mental health colleagues on ethical and practical issues surrounding tech in clinical practice. He served for 5 years on the board of the Oregon Mental Health Counselors Association and then the Oregon Counseling Association as the Technology Committee Chair.
He really likes this stuff!
Visit the Practice of Therapy: http://practiceoftherapy.com for more show notes and links
In this episode of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon has a conversation with Allison Puryear, LCSW about marketing your private practice. Knowing how to market a private practice as a counselor, therapist, social worker or psychologist is essential in growing and building a successful practice. Gordon and Allison discuss some of the mindset changes we need when it comes to marketing. Marketing really comes down to building relationships through both networking and your online presence.
Meet Allison
Allison Puryear, LCSW is the person behind Abundance Practice Building (abundancepracticebuilding.com and abunDanceparty.com) and is private practice coach and consultant. She also is in private practice in Asheville, NC. She consults with counselors wanting to start or optimize private practices. Having had successful practices in 3 states, with pauses for 2 maternity leaves, she has private practice building experience in spades and loves to share what works.
In this session of the Practice of Therapy Podcast, Gordon has a conversation with Jane Carter, LPC about “Money Mindset” and how it can affect us in our private practices. Jane talks about the importance of having an abundance vs. scarcity mindset in being able to overcome some of our fears about money and what to charge clients.
Jane Carter, LPC is a counselor and coach who is committed to helping therapists have more money, fun, and freedom in their practice. She focuses on a mix of both strategy and mindset to help private practitioners feel inspired in their work, to use their creativity, and to successfully balance the roles of clinician & entrepreneur. Jane is the founder of Brew Your Practice coaching and events, and is a speaker, writer, world-traveler, coffee-shop connoisseur, and local-craft-beer-snob. She can be reached at www.BrewYourPractice.com and www.JaneCarterCounseling.net.
Part of learning new things in private practice requires us to fail at different times in our careers. In fact we do have to get outside our comfort zones to grow and learn. In this episode Dr. David Hall talks about what he has learned about private practice not only through his successes, but from his failures.
Dr. S. David Hall is a LMFT and LPC in practice in Knoxville, TN. He is the Executive Director of Haven Family Psychiatry, an outpatient psychiatric clinic in Knoxville. David is also the founder of the Narrative Institute, a continuing education group that puts on workshops and seminars, and is the head of business development and long-term strategic planning for Basis Health Group, a telepsychiatry practice providing services in multiple states. For more information, visit www.davidhallmft.com.
Session 003: Business Models and Business Plans in Private Practice
In this session, Gordon talks about the difference between business models and business plans in private practice. Also discusses the importance of each.
Session 002: Growing Your Private Practice with the 3 "P's"
In this session, Gordon talks about growing your practice by having a plan, being persistent and having patience.
Session 001 of the Practice of Therapy Podcast with Gordon Brewer:
In this episode, Gordon talks about his journey into private practice as a therapist and why he started the Practice of Therapy blog and podcast. Also Gordon talks about the importance of knowing your "why"